FROM  THE- LIBRARY- OF 

A.    W.    Ryder 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Arcinive 
,    in  2007  with  funding  from 
IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/beginninggermansOObierrich 


J--><£^3  CD^U-r^e^n^J^    '^w\o(:Jn^ 


BEGINNING    GERMAN 


A    SERIES    OF    LESSONS 

WITH   AN 

ABSTRACT   OF   GRAMMAR 


BY 

H.  C.   BIERWIRTH,  Ph.D. 

PROFESSOR  OF  GERMAN  IN  HARVARD  COLLEQE 


SECOND  EDITION,  REVISED  AND  ENLARGED 


NEW  YORK 
HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 


rr3u 


Copyright,  1903,  1909, 

BY 

HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 
,   .    .March,  1927      ^    ; 


s\.  \yj ,  ^^h.<^.^ 


PRINTED  IN  THE  U.  S.  A. 


PREFACE   TO   THE   SECOND   EDITION 

In  all  essential  features  —  the  method,  the  manner  of  pres- 
entation or  statement,  and  the  topics,  as  well  as  the  order, 
of  the  lessons  —  Beginning  German  remains  unchanged.  The 
increase  in  the  number  of  pages  over  the  first  edition  is 
accounted  for  by  the  alternative  exercises  in  each  lesson, 
the  four  optional  chapters  headed  Review  and  Drill,  and  a 
series  of  special,  likewise  optional,  exercises  at  the  end  of 
the  lessons. 

In  several  matters  of  detail,  however,  I  have  endeavored  to 
profit  from  criticisms  and  from  such  suggestions  as  I  could 
embody  in  the  book  without  changing  its  general  character. 
To  all  friends  and  colleagues  who  have  thus  helped  me,  I  here 
express  my  thanks. 

The  German  exercises  of  the  lessons  are  lettered  A  and  B; 
the  English,  C  and  D;  of  which  either  A  or  B  may  be  used  in 
combination  with  either  C  or  D.  The  teacher,  however,  will 
find  A  and  C  the  best  combination  for  one  year;  in  another 
year,  or  for  purposes  of  review,  he  can  use  B  and  D.  If 
some  of  the  exercises  should  seem  rather  long  (they  were 
made  longer  than  those  of  the  first  edition  at  the  request 
of  a  number  of  teachers),  a  few  sentences  in  each  may 
easily  be  omitted.  But  I  deprecate  as  much  in  this  edition 
as  in  the  first  the  translation  of  the  English  exercises  with- 
out sufficient  previous  study  of  the  German  and  the  explana- 

tory  notes.  Frt294:00 

iii 


IV  PREFACE   TO   THE   SECOND    EDITION 

The  Abstract  of  Grammar,  in  which  scarcely  anything  has 
been  changed,  will  be  published  separately,  as  heretofore;  and 
so  will  the  pamphlet  of  New  Exercises,  which,  although  no 
longer  strictly  new,  may  still  serve  £is  a  supplementary  set. 

Cambridge,  Mass.,  April,  1909. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  FIRST  EDITION 

This  book  consists  of  a  series  of  thirty  lessons  and  an  abstract 
of  grammar. 

On  the  lessons  and  the  best  way  of  using  them,  I  have  only 
a  few  suggestions  to  make,  and  these  I  will  venture  to  put  in  a 
somewhat  categorical  form. 

First,  have  your  students  recite  as  much  as  possible  with 
their  books  closed.  Secondly,  dictate  a  few  sentences  or  phrases 
to  them  at  every  lesson.  Thirdly,  postpone  sentence  writing 
and  so-called  composition  until  the  ear  is  fairly  well  trained  and 
the  new  language  has  become  alive  in  the  student's  mind. 
And  fourthly,  before  your  scholars  do  an  English  exercise,  let 
them  carefully  reread  the  preceding  German  sentences  that 
should  serve  them  as  models. 

I  may  add  that  these  suggestions  are  neither  original  nor 
novel,  and  I  dare  say  that  if  they  had  been  followed  more 
closely  since  the  Committee  of  Twelve  lent  them  the  weight 
of  their  authority,  fewer  candidates  for  admission  to  college 
would  be  found  deficient  in  the  translation  into  German,  and 
most  would  do  better  in  the  translation  of  German  into  Eng- 
lish. The  fact  is  that,  notwithstanding  all  our  conceits  to  the 
contrary,  we  are  still  too  much  under  the  sway  of  the  tradi- 
tional methods  of  teaching  the  dead  languages. 

In  the  second  part  of  the  book,  the  abstract  of  grammar,  I 
have  so  far  departed  from  the  customary  way  of  presenting 
the  subject  of  accidence  that  I  must  needs  give  my  reason  for 


VI  PREFACE   TO   THE   FIRST   EDITION 

doing  SO.  It  is  this:  if  the  initial  difficulty  for  most  English- 
speaking  students  of  German  lies  in  mastering  the  inflections, 
rather  than  in  grasping  the  uses  of  the  parts  of  speech,  or  what 
we  call  syntax,,  it  ought  to  be  more  practical  to  group  different 
parts  of  speech  under  the  same  type  of  inflection  than  to  group 
different  types  of  inflection  under  the  same  part  of  speech. 
The  former  is  the  method  that  I  have  followed.  The  latter  is 
again  a  traditional  method,  that  of  logicians;  but  it  is  not  neces- 
sarily the  best,  nor  even  the  most  rational  method,  even  if  it 
be  the  most  logical. 

The  Abstract  of  Grammar,  if  it  should  prove  useful  for  re- 
viewing the  essentials  of  accidence  and  syntax,  especially  in 
preparation  for  college,  will  soon  be  published  separately. 

I  have  adopted  the  new  official  orthography  of  1902,  hence 
the  change  of  form  in  a  few  familiar  words,  as  tun,  tat,  getan, 
2^ur,  gibft  efc.  instead  of  tl^un,  tl^at,  getf)an,  X^ixx,  giebft  etc. 

Cambridge,  Mass.,  January,  1903. 


CONTENTS 
BEGINNING  GERMAN 

PAGE 

PRONUNCIATION 1-8 

GERMAN  SCRIPT 9-10 

LESSONS 11-178 

1  Present  and  Past  Indicative  of  Weak  Verbs 11 

2  Present  and  Past  Indicative  of  Strong  Verbs 16 

3  Present  and  Past  Indicative  of  ^abcn  ©cin  SBcrbcn    .     .     .     •  I    92 

Order  of  Words J 

4  The  Definite  Article  :Der.    Nouns:  Class  I 27 

5  Words  like  J)cr.     Nouns:  Class  II 33 

1-5  Review  and  Drill  (Optional) 40 

6  The  Indefinite  Article  Sin  and  its  Group 41 

7  Nouns:  Class  III.     Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative       .  47 

8  Nouns:  Class  IV.     Personal  Pronouns 51 

9  The  Pronouns  !5)cr  SBcr  23a8.    Supplement  (Optional)  .     .     •  1    ^^ 

Substitutes  for  Pronouns     .      .  J 

10  Adjectives:  Strong  Inflection 68 

6-10  Review  and  Drill  (Optional) 74 

11  Adjectives:  Weak  Inflection 75 

12  Pronominals:  Strong  and  Weak 80 

13  Pronominals:  Strong  or  Weak 86 

14  Adjective  Inflection:  Exceptions 90 

15  Comparison.     Substantive  Adjectives 92 

16  Numerals 98 

11-16   Review  and  Drill  (Optional) 100 

17  Verbs:  Principal  Parts 105 

18  The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Indicative.  Irregular  (Mixed)  Nouns  108 

19  The  Future  Indicative.     Irregular  Weak  Verbs 114 

20  The  Present  Indicative  of  Certain  Strong  Verbs 120 

21  The  Imperative 126 

22  The  Modal  AuxiHaries 131 

23  SBiffcn 138 

24  Compound  Verbs  with  Inseparable  Prefixes 141 

25  Compound  Verbs  with  Separable  Prefixes 144 

vij 


Vlll  CONTENTS 

LESSONS  PAQB 

17-25  Review  and  Drill  (Optional) 148 

26  Compound  Verbs  with  Doubtful  Prefixes 150 

27  The  Passive  Voice 153 

28  Reflexive  and  Impersonal  Verbs 156 

29  The  Subjunctive  in  Conditional  Sentences 162 

30  The  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Statement      .      .      .      .      .      .      .  169 

1-30  Special  Exercises  (Optional) 179 


ABSTRACT  OF  GRAMMAR 

INFLECTIONS 191-237 

I    Verb  Inflections 191 

II    Odd  or  Unclassified  Inflections 212 

III  Complete  Strong  Inflection 214 

IV  Defective  Strong  Inflection 215 

V  Noun  Inflections 216 

VI    Double  Inflection:  Strong  and  Weak     .      .      .      .      .      .      .223 

USES  AND  CONSTRUCTIONS 238-273 

I    Articles.     Nouns  of  Measure.     Names  of  Cities.     Cases  .      ,  238 

II    Pronouns 241 

III  Comparatives  and  Superlatives 247 

IV  Numerals 249 

V  Verbs 249 

VI    Adverbs 260 

VII    Prepositions 264 

VTII    Conjunctions 267 

IX    Order  of  Words 268 

List  of  Strong  Verbs  according  to  Vowel  Change 274 

A-LPHABETICAL  LiST  OF  StRONG  AND  IRREGULAR  VeRBS 277 

German-English  Vocabulary        283 

English-German  Vocabulary 291 

Index 299 


BEGn^mwa  German 


PRONUNCIATION 


The 

Alphabet 

German 

German 

Roman 

German 

German 

Roman 

form 

name 

form 

form 

name 

form 

3t  a 

ah 

Aa 

ffi  n 

en 

N  n 

33  B 

bay 

Bb 

D  0 

oh 

0  0 

S  c 

tsay 

C  c 

?P  p 

pay 

P  p 

®  b 

day 

Dd 

!Q  q 

koo 

Q  q 

e  e 

ay 

Ee 

5ft  r 

er  (as  in  errand) 

R  r 

5  f_ 

eff 

F  f 

@  f§ 

ess 

S     8 

@  9 

gay 

Gg 

%.  t 

tay 

T  t 

$  ^ 

hah 

Hh 

tt  u 

oo 

U  u 

3  t 

ee 

I  i 

as  D 

fow  (as  in  foi^l) 

V  V 

3  i 

yot 

J  3 

as  to 

vay 

Ww 

a  f 

kah 

Kk 

X  s 

ix 

Xx 

2  I 

el 

LI 

D  9 

ipsilon 

Yy 

ajltn 

em 

M  m 

3  5 

tset 

Z   z 

Of  the  two  forms  f  and  3,  the  latter  is  used  at  the  end  of 
a  word,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable  in  compounds,  and  before 
suffixes  (except  suffixes  of  inflection) ;  elsewhere  f  is  used : 
§aug,  §au^'tur,  ^au^'c^en,  but  ^au'fe^;  la^,  2t^'^axt,  Ic^'bar,  but 
le'fen,  lieft. 

Note  the  following  combinations:  (^  chj  d  cky  ^  tz  and  ^ 
sz.  The  last,  however,  is  as  frequently  represented  by  ss  (and 
always  sounded  like  ss).  It  is  called  ess-tset'  and  takes  the 
place  of  f§  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable,  and  of  ff  before 


2  PRONUNCIATION 

t  or  after  a  long,  vowel  or  diphthong:  glu§  (short  u),  %u^ 
(lolig  u),:]^a6Htd^,!  tjro^'QVti^,  ^afet,  ntufe'te;  gii'fee  (long  it),  l^ei'^ 
6en,     But  gliif'fe  (short  ii),  ^af'fe,  muf'fen. 

Capitals.  Every  noun,  or  word  used  as  a  noun,  begins 
with  a  capital:  $au^  Aowse,  fiir  meinen  ^ruber/or  m^/  brother j 
in  (Snglanb  m  England.  But  adjectives  derived  from  names  of 
countries  begin  mostly  with  a  small  letter:  englifd^  English. 

Division  into  Syllables,  at  the  end  of  a  line,  is  indicated  by 
a  double  hyphen,  thus  =. 

A  single  consonant  belongs  to  the  following  vowel:  la-ben, 
ge^e,  (^a4iAa'^a ;  hkewise  c^,  p!^,  \d),  ft,  g  and  i^,  which  are  re- 
garded as  representing  simple  sounds:  la'-d^e,  ra'=fd^en,  bel'=6^np 
be'-fte.  Other  combinations  are  separated  so  that  the  last 
consonant  belongs  to  the  next  line,  d  becoming  t4:  ^nap'-pe, 
^ar4tn=^adtn,  ^at'^^t,  ^ilp'-fen,  ^arp'^fen,  gor^fter,  Btdb'^At, 
f  orb '-re.  Compounds  are  divided  according  to  their  com- 
ponent parts:  5lug^apfel,  l^ier'^auf,  DoII=en'ben. 

Vowels 

A  vowel  doubled  or  followed  by  1)  is  long:  §aar,  ^tf)L 

An  accented  vowel  before  a  single  consonant  or  at  the  end 

of  a  syllable  is  usually  long:  le'fen,  @ebot',  ha,  fo,  bu,  bir,  t)or, 

nur.     But  in  some  of  the  commonest  monosyllables,  even  when 

strongly  accented,  the  vowel  is  short :  ah,  an,  I)in,  mit,  unt,  treg, 

A  vowel  before  two  or  more  consonants  is  usually  short: 
53Iatt,  bumm,  l^ilf*  But  in  inflection  a  long  stem-vowel  re- 
mains long  even  before  several  consonants:  frag  ft,  58Iut^  (from 
fra'gen,  iBIut).  A  vowel  before  d^  or  g  may  be  long,  as  in 
^ud),  Tla^,  or  short,  as  in  ^ad),  lag. 

5(  a  has  always  the  quahty  of  a  in  father.  Long:  ba'bcn, 
^a^l;  short:  matt,  bann^ 


VOWELS  6 

Q;  e  long  sounds  like  a  in  fate:  @'po6,  §eer,  gel^t;  c  short 
like  e  in  bet:  ^ett,  ©en'bung,  §err  (like  e  in  herring,  not  like 
e  in  her). 

Unaccented  e  is  slurred;  thus,  en  in  lei'tcn  sounds  like  en  in 
frighten;  et  in  e'bel,  Hke  Ze  in  ladle;  eg  in  neu'e^,  like  ous  in 
joyous;  e  in  fom'me,  nearly  hke  a  in  comma;  @e  in  ©efefe', 
nearly  like  ga  in  gazettes. 

S  i  long  sounds  hke  t  in  machine:  if)n,  ^'ba;  i  short,  hke 
i  in  siY;  mit,  D^ip'pe,  §irt  (not  hke  hurt). 

3?e  ie  is  sounded  hke  long  i:  Sie'ber,  ^l^llofopl^ie';  but  in  cer- 
tain words  accented  on  the  syllable  preceding  ie,  these  two 
letters  are  sounded  separately,  much  hke  ia  in  gloria:  ©lo'rie, 
gami'lte,  Si'nie, 

D  0  long  sounds  hke  o  in  note:  fo,  3J?oor;  o  short,  hke  the 
0  often  heard  in  New  England  in  whole  or  only,  a  sound  lying 
between  the  a  in  fall  and  the  o  in  toll :  toll,  @ott,  Siyjot'te, 

U  u  long  sounds  hke  oo  in  fool:  iBu'bc,  ^^^ul^;  u  short,  hke  u 
in  pull:  bumm,  ^ut'ter, 

^  ^  occurs  chiefly  in  foreign  words  and,  if  accented,  sounds  usually  like  tt, 
if  unaccented  like  i. 

MODIFIED   VOWELS 

The  vowels  a,  o,  u  have  a  modified  sound  which  is  indi- 
cated by  two  dots  and  called  umlaut:  H  (i,  6  o,  U  ii.  For  flu 
ciu  see  p.  4. 

5  a  long  sounds  hke  a  in  dare:  8l^'re,  trSge;  ft  short,  hke  e 
in  let:  S'fte,  ban'be, 

6  b  long  may  be  produced'  by  rounding  the  hps  to  pronounce 
0  in  woe  and  then  trying  to  sound  an  a  hke  that  of  ape  instead: 
6^r,  bo'fe.  Short  o  has  the  same  quahty,  but  requires  less 
rounding  of  the  lips :  off 'ne,  fonnt. 

U  ii  long  may  be  produced  by  rounding  the  hps  to  pronounce 
00  in  woo  and  then  trying  to  sound  an  e  hke  that  of  he  instead: 


PRONUNCIATION 


liber,  fiilf)!.     Short  il  has  the  same  quality,  but  requires  less 
rounding  of  the  lips:  §ut'te,  ful'len, 

DIPHTHONGS 

5ft  at  and  Qi  ct  sound  like  i  in  mine:  2axh,  (Sai'te;   !^etb, 

%n  an  sounds  like  ou  in  thou:  laut,  tau'fen. 

©u  cu  and  fe  'an  sound  like  oy  in  boy:  J^eu'te,  l^eu'te;  Iciu'te, 
^iiu'te. 

Consonants 

Consonants  omitted  here  are  sounded  as  in  English. 

S3  b,  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable,  also  before  inflectional 
suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant,  sounds  hke  p:  @rab,  ©riib'- 
d^en,  l^abt;  elsewhere  hke  b:  bra'te,  53lei,  blei'ben,  ^at)n, 

(I  c,  before  a,  o,  u,  au,  ou  or  a  consonant,  sounds  hke  k:  (Sato, 
(Slau'biu^;  elsewhere  Hke  ts  or  3:  Sft'far,  Se'bcr. 

6^]^  (^,  after  a,  0,  u  or  an,  has  a  deep  guttural  sound  which 
resembles  a  throat-clearing  or  hawking  and  may  be  produced 
by  whispering  koo  or  kah:  ^a(^,  ?od^,  ^ud^,  auc^,  (a'(^e»  Else- 
where d^  has  a  higher,  palatal  sound,  hke  that  of  k  in  ^62/  when 
whispered:  53Icd^,  id^,  !Da'd^er,  So'd^er,  ^Bii'd^er,  Sei'd^e,  eud^, 
<Strau'df)er,  Ser'd^e. 

But  d^  and  ^  or  f,  when  belonging  to  the  same  stem,  sound 
hke  x:  Od^^,  Dd^'fen.  In  foreign  words  d^  often  sounds  hke 
k:  Sl^araf'ter,  or  hke  sh:  ^^ava'bt. 

^  b,  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable,  also  before  inflec- 
tional suffixes  beginning  ^vith  a  consonant,  sounds  hke  t: 
$anb,  lanb'Iid^,  Sanb^'mann,  banbft;  elsewhere  hke  d:  ha, 
^cin'be.  —  The  combination  bt  sounds  hke  t:  (Btaht,  ©efanb'ter* 

@  Q,  at  the  end  of  a  word  (for  ng  see  below)  or  syllable, 
also  before  inflectional  suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant, 
sounds  hke  d);  hence  guttural  in  Xa^,  log,  Sug,  lagft,  jag'l^aft, 


CONSONANTS  5 

and  palatal  in  tt)eg,  ^o'nig,  fetg,  ^erg,  (iegft,  t)orsug'Ud^»  In  all 
other  positions  it  is  best  to  let  the  beginner  sound  g  like  g 
in  go:  gang,  ®au,  @ott,  gef)t,  ®ier,  gut,  ©to,  ®ra«,  ©na'be,  Sa'ge, 
3^ti'ge,  30'gen,  @te'ge,  ^er'ge,  ^o'nige;  so  also  when  doubled: 

giag'ge- 

But  g  in  a  medial  position  after  a,  0,  u  or  m,  as  in  ?a'gc,  2!a'Qc  and 
jo'gen  above,  or  in  tru'gen,  Slu'gcn  etc.,  is  usually  a  "continuant"  (not 
a  ''stop")  with  voice  quality,  i.  e.,  a  sound  lying  between  the  g  m  go 
and  the  c^  in  la'c^c,  accompanied  with  vibration  of  the  vocal  chords; 
and  g  medial  after  other  letters,  as  in  ©ic'gc,  SBcr'gc  and  ^5'nigc  above, 
or  in  SBc'gcn,  lii'gcn,  33firge,  ©or'gc  etc.,  sounds  nearly  like  y  in  ye. 

$  ^,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  sounds  Uke  h  in  hat:  ^'6xi, 
§au6,  §ei'mat;  also  in  compounds:  gel^ort',  l^anb'l^au^,  iDol^cr'; 
and  in  the  suffixes  l^aft  and  l^eit:  l^ab'l^aft,  grei'i)eit.  Elsewhere 
1^  is  silent  and  indicates  that  the  preceding  vowel  is  long: 
fro^,  D^r,  (g^'re,  fa'^et,  fe'^e,  e'^e. 

3  i  sounds  hke  y  in  yea:  je,  ^ofyc* 

2  I  sounds  Hke  I  in  long.    It  is  never  silent :  l^alf,  35olf . 

9'lg  ng  sounds  Hke  ng  in  singer,  not  Hke  ngr  in  finger:  (tin'* 
ger,  Sin'ger,  ^ung'rig,  §off'nung, 

*Pf  pf.  In  producing  pf,  especiaHy  at  the  beginning  of  a 
word,  it  is  important  not  to  let  a  vowel-sound  come  in  be- 
tween the  sound  of  p  and  that  of  /,  but  to  pass  quickly  from 
the  former  to  the  latter:  ^opf,  op'f^^t,  *i|3fer'be, 

Clu  qu  is  pronounced  Hke  tXQ,  with  the  to  as  after  \6)  and  3: 
Oual,  quer» 

9fl  r  is  pronounced  more  distinctly  and  with  more  of  a  trill 
than  r  in  English:  ^Hit'ter,  rei'te,  btt'terer* 

®  f  ^  ^»  At  the  beginning  of  a  word  before  a  vowel,  or 
between  two  vowels,  f  sounds  like  z  in  zero:  fa'ge,  le'fe*  — 
When  final  or  doubled,  or  when  standing  before  a  consonant 
not  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  ^  or  f  sounds  Hke  s  in  so: 
ha^,  laf'fen,  lo'fte* — The  combination  ^  sounds  Hke  ss:  la^, 
gii'^e  (long  il),  glu6  (short  u)* 


6  PRONUNCIATION 

<Bp  fp  and  ®t  ft,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  are  sounded 
like  shp  and  sht,  with  the  sh  pronounced  hghtly  and  quickly: 
fpre'd^en,  ©pan'nung,  fte'f)en,  ©taub;  also  in  compounds:  be^ 
fpre'd^en,  befte'f)en;  elsewhere  they  sound  Hke  sp  and  st:  ilBef'pe, 
lieft,  Tlait\m\ 

<Bdj  frf|  sounds  like  sh:  fd^a'be,  fd^nelL 

2^  t  sounds  hke  t:  Xa^,  tre'ten,  Xov;  except  before  i  in 
many  words  of  French  or  Latin  origin,  where  it  sounds  like 
ts  or  3:  Nation',  dia'tio. 

Xfi  t^,  which  occurs  almost  exclusively  in  foreign  words, 
sounds  like  t:  ^f)ea'ter,  §l)pot]^e'fe,  ^aVt^tv  (also  written 
SSalter). 

X^  ^  sounds  hke  ts  or  3:  (ga^,  §itV. 

25  1)  sounds,  like  /;  3Sa'ter,  t)ier*  But  in  foreign  words  (ex- 
cept when  final)  it  sounds  hke  v:  3Sa'fe,  33ifi'te,  bra'be,  relati'De 
(but  like  /  in  brat),  relatit)')* 

2S  to  sounds  like  v:  mel'c^e,  !i?o'n)C.  But  in  producing  to 
after  fd^  or  3,  belonging  to  the  same  syllable,  both  lips  are 
used,  as  in  the  act  of  blowing  (instead  of  the  lower  hp  and 
the  upper  teeth,  as  in  producing  v):  ©d^toe'fter,  jtoi'fc^en, 
3toang,  gtoei- 

3£  I  sounds  hke  x:  5l^t,  §e'^c,  36er'^c^» 

S  h  sounds  like  ts  in  colts:  §0(3,  ^a'gen,  jtoi'fd^en,  %(m'it. 

Accent  in  German  words,  as  in  English,  rests  mostly  on 
the  root  or  stem,  and  in  compounds  mostly  on  the  first  mem- 
ber: toar'tete,  greun'binnen,  2lug'apfeL  The  beginner  should  be 
careful  never  to  accent  the  prefixes  53e  be,  @mp  cmp,  (Snt  cut, 
(Sr  cr,  ®e  ge,  5Bcr  der,  ^tx  get* 

German  Punctuation  differs  from  English  chiefly  in  the 
use  of  commas  before  subordinate  clauses.  A  comma  is  there- 
fore found  before  all  such  words  as  toeil  because,  toenn  if,  ber 
wh),  ba6  thxit,  toeld^er  which. 


PRACTICE   IN   PRONUNCIATION  7 

PRACTICE  IN  PRONUNCIATION 

Vowels  and  Diphthongs.     1.  Long  a:  fam,  Hat,  laf)m,  ^a% 
fa6,  ^aat,  Zat 

2.  Short  a:  Ramm,  aU,  Satnnt,  gall,  nag,  toa^,  fatt,  l^art. 

3.  Long  c:  $eer,  ^eet,  ©peer,  mel^r,  fel^rt,  tot^. 

4.  Short  e  and  short  a:  §err,  ^ett,  fperr',  rennt,  benn,  menn, 
fciirt,  pit,  ptt^ 

5.  Unaccented  e:  5la'Ie,  la^'me,  ^am'me,  §ee're,  fel^r'te, 
nje'^e,  ^er'ren,  SBet'ten,  tDar'te,  fdll'te,  f)'dt%  fat'ten,  gefattt', 
©eprter,  be^arten,  naf'fe,  SSel'Ien,  fd^el'ten,  tDen'be,  ^(in'be. 

6.  Long  i,  and  tc:  mix,  il^re,  S^^'^^h  iJerlte'ren,  bien'te,  mie'fen. 

7.  Short  i:  ift,  iBIicf,  nid^t,  ir're,  Zin'k,  §irt,  gemig',  in,  h)tf 'fen. 

8.  Long  o:  moo^,  ©o'te,  £)^r,  eo^'te,  ©d^ofe,  SBo'ben,  to'bet, 
lo'fe,  ^o'fe. 

9.  Short  o:  ©ot'te,  fonn'te,  fol'le,  l^^ocf,  (Sor'ge,  geftor'ben, 
gemor'ben,  Moxb,  i)olI,  $Kof'fe, 

10.  Long  u:  gut,  58u'be,  tun,  S^^u'l^e,  nur,  Ul^r,  5^atur'. 

11.  Short  u:  mu6,  ^ut' ttv,  mug'te,  frumm,  un'ter,  !Durft. 

12.  Long  a:  nta^t,  H^'re,  ma're,  ta'te,  ^rcl'mer. 

13.  Long  iJ:  bo^,  bo'fe,  ^o'nig,  t)o]^'nen,  l^or'tc,  gro'ger. 

14.  Short  5:  fount,  Xod^'ter,  eot'Ier,  ge^ornt',  fd^op'fen,  Softer. 

15.  Long  ii:  flir,  fiifi'Ien,  bii'fter,  ^rli'ber,  ii'bel,  §u'ter. 

16.  Short  ii:  miifet,  ai^iit'ter,  P'len,  p'fterte,  getiif'tet. 

17.  S(i  at  and  ©i  ci:  SBai,  bet,  ^aih,  2dh,  $at,  §ei'be. 

18.  5(tt  au:  lau,  Saub,  au^,  $au^,  fd^tau'er,  gefd^aut',  (Stau'be. 

19.  @tt  cu  and  ^u  au:  eu're,  (Sdu're,  (Seu'd^e,  ^iiu'd^e,  l^eu'te, 
§au'te,  greunb,  fc^eug'Iid^,  l^ftu^'Iid^. 

Consonants.    1.  !S  b:  ab,  ge'be,  53in'be,  @b'bc,  gel^abf ,  l^iibfd^. 

2.  6;i|  (^:  ad^,  ^a'd^er,  aud^,  ^Bil'd^er,  tad^'te,  bod^,  i^,  utd^t, 
nid^t^,  fud^^  fu'd^en,  fd^ted^t,  eud^,  t)eu'd^eln,  btiud^'te,  gud^^,  ^a(i)^, 
hjo'd^entlid^,  l^od^'fte  (long  o),  l^od^  (long  o). 


8  PRACTICE   IN   PRONUNCIATION 

3.  ^  b:  2anb,  fin'ben,  2db,  lei'ber,  etabt'd^eit  (long  a),  reb'Iid^ 
Gong  e),  bau'erten,  9[)^ab'(^eTt  (long  iX), 

4.  @  g:  (^la^,  glng,  gtn'gen,  gegan'gen,  lag,  la'gen,  bie'ge, 
Bog,  JDe'nig,  30'ge,  fliegft,  [agt,  genug',  fd^Iiigt,  ^e'ge,  fau'ge, 
^erg,  ^er'ge,  ni'!)ig,  ^off'nung,  betriig'Iid^,  log,  lo'gen,  ©tn'ger, 
gin'gcr,  ©ttn'ger,  5(u'ge,  tau'gen. 

5.  $f  ^f:  ^fab,  ^ftid^t,  gepftegt',  ^Ip'fet,  ?fer'be,  ©op'fen. 

6.  Ou  qu:  quer,  quidt,  Ouat,  Outt'te,  gequorten, 

7.  3fl  r:  ra'te,  ro'ter,  9?anb,  er,  (Sd^rau'be,  gra'be,  §trt,  §erj, 
3r'ren]^au^,  fnar'ren,  ^Diir're,  l^er,  ©err,  bit'terfter, 

8.  ©  f  ^  ff  ^:  eo^'te,  gefagt',  Derfu'c^ett,  a%  ha^,  i£3af'fer, 
gefe'f)en,  mu^,  miig'te,  ha^,  ^ug  (long  u). 

9.  et  ft  ©)j  f^:  ra'fte,  berloft'  (long  0),  ftanb,  gcftanb', 
ftim'me,  geftimmt',  ©teu'er,  fprad^,  ab'fpred^en,  9}?ei'fter,  ©piefe, 
Derftieg',  ^fer'beftalL 

10.  2:^  t^:  S^ea'tcr,  2:^eorie',  5Intipat^ic\ 

11.  95  t):  3Sa'ter,  bier,  berfpre'd^en,  biel,  Dor,  35o'geI,  Don,  be=« 
Dor',  baDon',  ©rog'Dater,  Doll,  Derfiil^rt'- 

12.  9S  to:  D3ann,  D)ie,  D30,  Djoril'ber,  iDODon',  Dertoofint',  getDann', 
SGSin'ter,  5E3an'berer,  getoufet',  gtoet,  fd^toer,  jlDin'gen,  jtDi'fc^en, 
3tDerg, 

13.  3  5^:  Sie'^cn,  gog,  gego'gen,  fet'scn,  fc^'te,  gefefet',  rei'aenb, 
rt^'te,  (gd^loans,  S^^'^^^f  l^f  3ug,  3^^,  3^erg,  begal)!!',  ^rgaf)'* 
lung,  S^'^^h  ^erg'M.  ©a^,  (Sit'^e,  gnm,  Djojn',  anDor'. 


GERMAN    SCRIPT 


^^^<f<^^.-^?^7^         A^  ^.^^       yz^ 


.^^y 


^         C/ly  ^^^  ^4^ 


^/^/zJ^i^j^^^^f^^^^^y^^^  >'^r^ 


^M^/^i^W^;^^/^y/^ 


^-/ci^^^i/yp;^/^^^^^t^al^^ 


10  GERMAN    SCRIPT 


'^^cz^^^^U^^i^^ 


.^/t^^-^^-^jf^ 


^^(^t-^^. 


UiiZ^4^' 


o       <-/ 


Lesson  i 

PRESENT  AND  PAST  INDICATIVE   OF  WEAK  VERBS 
I 

Weak  Verbs.  In  German,  as  in  English,  there  are  weak  and 
strong  verbs.  How  they  differ  from  each  other  will  be  ex- 
plained later.  This  lesson  treats  of  weak  verbs  only,  and  first 
of  the  inflection  of  fagen  to  say  and  tDarten  to  wait  in  the 

PRESENT    INDICATIVE 

\6)  fagc  /  say  (also  /  tell  etc.)  Ici^  h)artc  /  wait 

bu  fagft  thou  say  est,  you  say  bu  tnartcft  thou  waitest,  you  wait 

tx,  fie,  e6  fagt  he,  she,  it  says  tx,  fie,  e^  tuartet  he,  she,  it  waits 

toix  fagcn  we  say  Irir  tcarten  we  wait 

x^x  fagt  ye,  you  say  i^x  toaxttt  ye,  you  wait 

fie  fagcn  they  say  fie  tDartcn  they  wait 

<Bit  fagcn  you  say  (Sle  trartcn  you  wait 

The  letters  in  bold-faced  type  are  the  endings;  fag  and  toaxt  are  the 
stems.  Observe  that  Jrort  has  eft  and  et  (2d  and  3d  sing. ;  and  2d  plur.) 
where  fag  has  only  ft  and  t.  The  longer  endings  are  added  to  stems  in 
t,  b  and  a  few  other  letters,  for  the  sake  of  more  distinct  pronunciation.  . 

The  personal  pronouns  bu,  t^t,  and  Sie  are  all  commonly  trans- 
lated by  you.  !Du  and  its  plural  i^x  are  used  to  address  inti- 
mate friends,  near  relatives  and  young  children,  ©te,  always 
with  a  capital  and  with  the  verb  in  the  third  person  plural,  )» 
used  in  addressing  any  other  person  or  persons. 

Inflect  like  [^  fagc:  Inflect  like  td^  tDarte: 

t(^  fragc  /  ask,  inquire  td^  ant'tDorte  /  answer 

tc^  f)drc  I  hear,  I  understand  id^  ar'beitc  /  work 

i^[\Xi^t  I  seek,  search f  look  for 

11 


12  BEGINNING   GERMAN 


VOCABULARY 


ahtx  but  itid^t  not 

unb  and  nid^t^  nothing,  not  anything 

auci)  also,  too  tVtda^  something,  anything 

ia  yes  toa^  what 

ncin  no  §crr  ©c^mibt  Mr.  Smith 

l^eu'tc  to-day  ^axl  Charles;    5Iti'na  Anna     . 

A.  1.  3d^  frage,  unb  bu  ant'hjortcft.  2.  ©Ic  fagt  ettra^,  abet  ©ic 
fagcn  nid^t^.  3.  3^r  tDartet/  unb  fie  ar'bcitcn/  4,  (Sie  prt  e^,  ahtx 
h)lr  ()orctt  e^  nid^t.^  5.  2lnt'h)ortct  [ie^?  —  "Hfldn,  fie  ant'tDortct  nic^t/ 
6.  3Bartcft  bu  aud^,  ^art?  —  9^ein,  id)  Voaxtt  nid^t,  aber  §err  @(^mibt 
toartct.  7,  SBa^  fagcn  (Bit?  —  3d^  fagc,  2lnna  fud^t  etmag.  8,  5lr'«= 
bciten  Bit  §eute,  §err  <Sc^mibt?  —  3a,  id^  ar'beitc  ^eute,  ^arl,  aber  bu 
ar'beitcft  nic^t.  9.  Sragcn  fie  5Inna?  —  9^ein,  fie  fragcn  ^arl,  toa^  tx 
fud^t,  aber  er  ant'tDortct  nic^t.  10,  SSa«  fagft  bu,  5lnna?  —  3c^  fagc 
nid^tg,  aber  ^arl  fagt  etlDa^.  11.  3lr'beitct  §err  ©d^mibt  l^eute?  — 
ScL,  i^  ]^ore,  er  ar'beitct  f)eute,  unb  ^arl  unb  5lnna  ar'beitcn  aud^,  aber 
id^  ar'beitc  ^eute  nid^t.  12.  3d^  fud^c  e^,  unb  fie  fud^t  e^  aud^.  13.  Bit 
i)'6xi  Bit,  ahtx  tx  l)'6xt  Bit  nid^t. 

B.  14.  36)  ^ore  etn3a§,  aber  fie  l^orcn  nid^t^.  15.  SBtr  fragen 
2(nna,  tna^  fie  fud^t/  aber  fie  ant'mortct  nic^t,^  unb  ^arl  ant'mortct 
aud^  nid^t.^  16.  §orft  bu  nid^V  ^^6  i^  \^^^,  ^<iri?  -^err  ©d^mibt 
unb  5lnna  njartcn.  —  3a,  id^  pre,  ttta^  bu  fagft,  aber  bu  ()orft  nid^t, 
toag  id^  fage:  td^  ar'beitc  l^eutc.  17.  SSag  fragt  §err  ©c^mibt  2lnna? 
—  @r  fragt  5lnna:  „(Sud^ft  bu  tfma^?"  unb  fie  ant'njortct:  „5^ein,  id^ 
fud^c  nic^t^,  unb  fart  fud^t  aud^  nid^t^."''  18.  ^aS  pre  i^?  ^txx 
<Sd^mtbt  fud^t  Bit  unb  fragt  Bit,  ma^-^  Bit  ar'beiten,  unb  Bit  ant'= 
n)orten  nid^t?  19.  ®ie  fagt  f  arl  nid^t,  n^a^  mir  fud^cn,  unb  mir  fagen 
eg  aud^  nic^t.^ 

1  German  has  no  special  verb-phrases  to  express  progressive  action ;  hence 
id^  iDortc  or  id^  fud^c  means  not  only  /  wait  or  /  look  for,  but  also  /  am  waiting  or 
/  am  looking  for. — 2  There  is  nothing  in  German  to  correspond  to  do,  does,  did 
etc.  as  used  in  questions  or  negations;  hence  the  German  for  does  she  answer?, 
she  does  not  answer  or  don't  you  hear?,  if  literally  translated,  is  answers  she?, 
she  answers  not  or  hear  you  not?  Compare:  ''Revolt  our  subjects?"  Shake- 
speare, Richard  II,  Act  III.  2;  ".  .  .  and  I  called  you,  but  ye  answered  not," 
Jeremiah  7.  13;  "Hearest  thou  not  how  many  things  they  witness  against 
thee?"    Matthew  27,  13.  —  3  Literally,  and  C.  answers  also  not,  i.  e.,  neither 


LESSON    1.    i:  WEAK  VERBS  13 

(or  nor)  does  C.  answer  or  and  C.  does  not  answer,  either.  —  *  See  note  3 ;  neither 
is  C.  looking  for  anything.  — «  Say,  what  you  are  working  at.  —  *  See  note  3. 

C.  1.  He  says  something,  but  I  say  nothing.  2.  They  ask 
Charles,  and  he  answers.  3.  She  hears  nothing,  but  we  hear 
something.  4.  What  does  she  hear?  —  She  does  not  say  what 
she  hears.  5.  Anna  is  looking  for  Charles.  6.  She  is  waiting, 
and  we  are  waiting  also.  7.  Charles,  are  you^  waiting?  —  Yes, 
Mr.  Smith,  I  am  waiting,  and  are  you^  waiting  too? — •  No,  I  am 
not  waiting.  8.  You^  say  she  works  to-day,  but  I  say  she  does 
not  work.  9.  What  do  you^  say,  Charles  and  Anna?  —  We 
don't  say  anything  (we  say  nothing).*  10.  Mr.  Smith  is  asking 
Charles  something,  but  Charles  does  not  answer,  he  does  not 
hear  what  Mr.  Smith  is  asking.  11.  Is  Anna  working  to-day?  — 
Yes,  I  understand  she  is  working,  but  Smith  and  Charles  are  not 
working  (work  not).*  12.  Are  you^  asking  Anna?  —  Yes,  and 
she  answers,  too,  but  we  do  not  hear  what  she  says.  13.  What 
are  they  searching  for  to-day  (what  seek  they  to-day)*?  —  They 
don't  tell  (they  say  not)*  what  they  are  searching  for. 

D.  14.  I  am  asking  you,^  Mr.  Smith,  what  you^  are  looking 
for,  but  you^  do  not  answer.  —  But  don't  you^  hear,  Charles? 
I  am  not  looking  for  anything  (I  seek  nothing),*  but  Anna  and 
Charles  say  they  are  looking  for  something.  15.  "No,"  says  she, 
''we  are  not  working,  neither  are  they  (and  they  also  not)."* 
16.  What  do  I  hear,  Mr.  Smith?  You^  are  looking  for  Charles? 
and  Charles  is  looking  for  you'!  17.  They  are  telling  Anna  what 
Charles  is  working  [at],*  but  he  does  not  hear  it  (hears  it  not). 
18.  Mr.  Smith  says  they  do  not  hear  anything  (they  hear  nothing), 
and  I  do  not  hear  anything,  either  (I  hear  also  nothing). 

7  With  Christian  names,  use  bu  for  you,  or  tf)r  if  several  persons  are  ad- 
dressed, as  in  sentence  9.  With  Mr.,  Mrs.  or  Miss  before  a  proper  name, 
use  ®ic  for  you,  as  in  the  second  part  of  7.  When  the  context  does  not  show 
whether  the  speaker  is  on  intimate  terms  with  the  person  addressed  or  not, 
as  in  8,  give  the  form  with  bu  (or  il^r)  first,  and  then  the  form  with  (gtc.  —  To 
this  may  be  added  that  waiters,  porters  and  other  servants,  though  often 
called  by  their  Christian  names,  are  not  addressed  with  bu  or  tl^r,  except 
perhaps  by  their  own  master  or  mistress  (and,  of  course,  by  their  own  inti- 
mate friends).  — »  Parentheses,  (  ),  in  the  English  exercises  enclose  directions 
as  to  the  order  of  words  in  German,  their  gender,  case  etc.,  or  words  not 
needed  in  English,  but  required  in  German;  square  brackets,  [  ],  enclose 
words  to  be  omitted  in  German. 


14  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

II 

Next  we  take  up  the  inflection  of  fagcn  and  iDarten  in  the 

PAST   INDICATIVE 

id^  fagte  I  said  v&j  mar'tcte  /  waited 

bu  fagtcft  etc.  bu  mar'tctcft  etc. 

tx,  \\t,  c^  fagtc  er,  fie,  e6  xoax'itit 

iDir  fagtctt  Xm  tnar'teten 

tl^r  fagtct  tl^r  mar'tctet 

fie,  ®ic  fagtctt  fie,  @ie  mar'tctcn 

Without  the  longer  endings  etc  (instead  of  te),  etcft  (instead  of  tcft) 
etc.,  it  would  be  impossible  to  distinguish,  in  pronunciation  at  least, 
several  forms  of  the  past  indie,  of  JDorten  from  the  corresponding  forms 
of  its  present  indicative,  e.  g.,  tooxiit  would  sound  like  Xooxit  etc. 

Inflect  like  td^  fagtc:  Inflect  like  \6)  mar'tete: 

x6)  fragtc  /  asked,  inquired  \6)  ant'mortete  /  answered 

x6)  l^ortc  /  heard,  understood        x6)  ar'beitctc  /  worked 
v^  fud^te  /  sought,  searched,  looked  for 

VOCABULARY 

al6  when  fc^r  very 

ge'ftern  yesterday  fo  so 

l^ier  here  tcie  how 

je^t  now,  at  present  too  where 

lan'ge,  adv.,  long,  a  long  time  h\%  fed^g  Ul^r  till  six  o^ clock 

noc^  still,  yet,  as  yet  grau  ©c^ntibt  Mrs.  Smith 

nid^t  mel^r  no  more,  no  longer          9J?arie'  (two  syllables)  Mary 

A.  1.  SD^arie'  fragt  ^arl,  tt)ag  er  fud^t,  unb  ^arl  anttoortct  nid^t. 
2,  3d^  fragtc  5liina  unb  SD^arie':  „Wit  lange  fud^tct  i^r  e^  geftern,  unb 
tDo?"  Unb  fie  anf  n3ortctcn:  „Wix  fud^tcn  e^  ^ier,  unb  fefir  lange,  bi^ 
fed^g  Vitjv,"  3.  ^oren  ®ie  e^  nod),  §crr  (Sc^mibt?  —  5^ein,  id^  pre  e^ 
ie^t  nid^t  mti)x,  4,  grau  (Sd^mibt  mar'tctc  noc^,  al6  n)ir  ar'beitctcn. 
5,  §6rtcft  bu,  n)a«  fie  fagtc?  —  3a,  id^  prtc  eg;  fie  fagtc:  „3d^  arbeite 
iefet  ^ier."  6.  SSa^  fagtcft  bu,  ^arl,  aU  fie  fragtc?  —  3(^  fagtc:  „^ein, 
Jrau  ^d^mibt,  id^  fud^e  e^  nid)t,  unb  2lnna  fud^t  e^  aud^  nid^t." '    7.  $Sir 


LESSON    1.    II:   WEAK   VERBS  15 

l^ortcn  ^tuit,  2lnna  unb  Tlavk'  toaftttm  bi^  fcd^^  U^r.  SSar'tcten  (Bit 
geftem  auc^  fo  lange,  §err  ©(i^mibt?  —  9^em,  id^  tDar'tctc  nid^t  fo  langc. 
8.  Bit  fragtcn  ^arl  fo  lange,  61^  er  ant'tDortctc.  0.  „5^cin/'  fagtc  fie, 
„ic^  fuc^c  nic^t^,  unb  Tlaxit'  fud^t  aud^  nid^t^^;  abcr  §crr  unb  grau 
(Sc^mibt  fud^cn  etn)a^." 

B.  10.  Sir  fagtcn  grau  (Sd^mtbt  nld^t,  tDO  unb  n)ie  lange  tDtr 
ar'beitctcn.  11.  3d^  ^ore  jc^t  auc^  nic^t^  mt^x,^  aber  9D^aric'  fagt,  fie 
t)ort  nod^  etn)a^.  12.  5lrbeitet  ^arl  (S(^mibt  nod^  f)ier?  —  9^ein,  cr 
arbeitet  je^t  nid^t  ntel^r  {)ier,  aber  5(nna  unb  9)?arie'  ©d^mibt  arbeiten 
nod^  l^ier.  ©ud^en  Bit  ^arl?  —  3a,  ic§  fud^e  i^n  (objective  case  of 
er,  him),  13.  3a,  ja,  id^  ^ortc  e^  aud^,  er  fragte,  too  bu  ar'bcitetcft, 
^arl,  aber  bu  ant'mortcteft  nic^t,  unb  2)2arie'  unb  Slnna  fagtcn  aud^ 
nid^t^.     14.  3Sir  toax'tcttn  fo  lange,  bi^  toir  {)ortcn,  too  fie  ar'beitctcn. 

15.  (Sudeten  Bit  nid^t  geftern  aud^  etma^?  —  5^ein,  id^  fud^tc  nid^t^. 

16.  3d^  frage  ®ic  je^t  nid^t  me^r,  too  unb  toit  lange  Bit  arbeitctcn; 
id^  frage,  toa^  Bit  ar'beitctcn.    §oren  Bit  nid^t? 

*  Literally,  and  A.  seeks  it  also  not,  i.  e.,  neither  (or  nor)  is  A.  looking  for  it 
or  and  A.  is  not  looking  for  it,  either.  —  2  Literally,  and  M.  seeks  also  nothing, 
i.  e.,  nor  is  M.  looking  for  anything.  —  3  Literally,  /  hear  now  also  nothing 
more,  i.  e.,  neither  do  I  hear  anything  at  present. 

C.  1.  He  looked  for  it  a  long  time.  2.  They  were  asking, 
and  we  were  answering.  3.  I  am  searching  for  it  now.  4.  She 
asked  Mrs.  Smith  yesterday  where  we  were  working.  5.  Anna  is 
working  here  still.  6.  Was  Charles  working  (worked  C.)  when 
you  were  waiting,  Anna?  —  No,  but  Mrs.  Smith  and  Mary  were 
still  working  (worked  still)  when  I  was  waiting.  —  And  how  long 
did  they  work?  —  Mary  said  they  worked  till  six  o'clock.  7.  We 
did  not  hear  anything  (heard  nothing),  but  Mrs.  Smith  says 
Anna  heard  something.  —  And  what  did  she  hear?  —  She  does 
not  tell  (says  not)  what  she  heard.  8.  No,  I  did  not  wait  so 
long.  9.  Anna  worked  here  till  yesterday,  and  Mary  is  working 
here  to-day.  10.  What  did  she  ask  Charles?  —  She  asked  Charles 
what  he  was  looking  for.  —  And  what  did  he  say?  —  He  did  not 
answer.  11.  He  was  not  working  any  more  (worked  no  more) 
when  we  were  waiting,  but  you  were  still  working,  Mr.  Smith. 
—  No,  Charles,  I  was  not  working  any  more,  either  (worked  also 
no  more).  12.  Didn't  he  look  for  it  (sought  he  it  not)?  —  Yes, 
and  Anna  too,  but  not  very  long. 


16  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

D.  13.  Didn't  you  hear  (heard  you  not)  what  I  said?  I  am 
now  no  longer  looking  for  Charles  (I  seek  C.  now  no  more),  I  am 
looking  for  Mary  and  Anna.  I  ask  you  where  they  are  working, 
and  you  do  not  answer.  —  But  didn't  I  say,  Mary  isn't  working 
here  any  longer,  neither  is  Anna  (and  A.  also  not)?  14.  What 
do  I  hear,  Charles?  you  are  waiting  here  still?  —  Yes,  Mrs.  Smith, 
I  was  looking  for  you,  for  (conjunction,  benn)  I  understood  you 
worked  here  till  six  o'clock.  15.  Were  you  not  looking  for  Mary 
yesterday  (sought  you  M.  not  yesterday)  ?  —  No,  Anna,  but  Mary 
was  looking  for  me  (mid^),  and  to-day  she  is  looking  for  you  (and 
to-day  looks  she  for  you,  bid^).  16.  Anna  told  Charles  what  she 
was  working  [at],  but  she  did  not  tell  how  long  she  worked. 


Lesson  2 

PRESENT  AND   PAST  INDICATIVE   OF  STRONG  VERBS 


Strong  Verbs.  Regular  strong  verbs  —  the  only  ones  that 
concern  us  here  —  do  not  differ  from  the  weak  in  the  inflection 
of  the  present.  The  following  are  the  inflections  of  fommen  to 
come  and  finben  to  find  in  the 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE 

id^  fommc  /  come  \6)  finbc  /  find 

bu  fommft  etc.  bu  finbcft  etc. 

cr,  fie,  e^  fontmt  cr,  fie,  e^  flnbct 

rt)ir  fommen  h3ir  finben 

il^r  fommt  \\)i  finbet 

fie,  @le  fommen  fie,  @le  finben 

Inflect  like  Id^  fomme:  Inflect  like  id^  finbe: 

id^  bleibe  /  stay,  remain  \^  bitte  I  beg,  ask  (for) 

i(i)  ge^e  I  go,  walk  id^  rcite  /  ride 

id)  liege  /  lie,  am  reclining  id^  fi^e^  /  sit 

1  The  inflection  of  filjc  is  not  quite  like  that  of  finbc.  The  3.  sing,  and  2. 
plur.  are  usually  fi^t,  instead  of  fitjet,  for  a  t  is  easily  sounded  after  a  sibi- 


LESSON   2.    i:   STRONG   VERBS  17 

lant  (^).     The  2.  sing,  (full  form  fi^cft)  is  often  pronounced  and  written 
like  the  3.  sing.,  i.  e.,  fitjt, 

VOCABULARY 

fxanf  ill,  sick  oft  often 

ha^,  conjunction,  that  h)cr  who 

benn,  conjunction,  for  gu  §au'fe  at  home 

ober  or  nad^  §au'fe  home,  homeward 

ha  there  gu  gufe  on  foot 

im'mcr  always  pi  ^fer'bc  on  horseback 

A.  L  SBcr  tommi  ba? —  §crr  unb  grau  <Sd^mibt  fomntcn.  2.  SBo 
Uegt  c^?  — (S«  Uegt  je^t  l^icr,  tt)o  id^  fi^e.  3,  SKir  bitten  ©ic,  bafe 
(Sic  bleibcn/  §err  ©d^tnibt.  4.  3Ba^  finbeft  bu?  —  3d^  finbc  nid^t«, 
unb  fie  finbcn  aud^  nid^t^.  5.  (Sie  liegcn  nod^  franf  gu  §aufe.  6.  ©ic 
l^drte  ^arl  unb  5Inna  geftem  nid^t.^  7.  Wiv  ge^en  immer  (ju  gufe),^ 
aber  bu  reiteft  immer  (ju  *iPfcrbe).^  8.  ^ommcn  ^arl  unb  2(nna  oft 
nad^  §aufe?  —  3a,  fie  fommcn  fel^r  oft,  aber  fie  bleibcn  nid^t^  lange. 
9.  3Ker  reitct  ba?  ^arl  ober  §err  (£c^mibt?  —  ^arl,  benn  §err 
©d^mibt  reitct  nid^t  mel^r.  10 ♦  53ittc/  9Dlarie,  loie  lange  bteibft^  bu 
l^eute  ^ier?  — 3d^  bleibc^  bi^  fed^«  U^r,  bi^  i^r  fomml,  11.  (gr  bittet 
^arl  unb  5lnna  immer,  bafe  fie  arbeiten,^  aber  fie  f)6ren®  nid^t.  12.  $3a^ 
fragten  @ie,  bittc^?  —  3d^  fragte  ©ie,  njer  fommt  unb  tuer  ge^t. 
13.  (Sifecn  ©ie  aud^  oft  ^ier,  too  toir  fit^cn?  —  3a,  id^  fi^e  I)ier  fel^r 
oft.  14.  5lnttt)ortete  er  geftem  nid^t,  aU  bu  fragteft?  —  3a,  er  ant* 
loortete  cttoa^,  aber  id^  l^orte  nid^t  me^r,  toag  er  fagte.  15.  SBa^ 
l^fire  ic^,  ^arl?    !Du  liegft  nod^  immer^  ba  unb  arbeiteft  nid^t? 

B.  16.  (S6  liegt  ba,  too  @ie  fi^cn,  §err  ©d^mibt.  17.  ©ie  bittet 
grau  <Sd^mibt  ie^t,  ha^  fie  bleibt.^  18.  ^arl  unb  5lnna  fommcn  je^t. 
—  Unb  fommt  5D^arie  aud^?  —  5^ein,  fie  unb  §err  ©d^mibt  fommcn 
f)eute  nic^t.^  19.  3Sa^  fagt  fie?  —  <Sie  fagt,  er  reitct  je^t  immer  (gu 
'iPferbe),3  er  gel^t  nid^t  me^r  (gu  gufe).^  20.  3Sa«  fagten  eie,  bittc^?  — 
3d^  fage,  5lnna  liegt  nod^  franf  gu  §aufe.  21.  Sf^eitct^  i^r  l^eute  nad^ 
§aufe?  —  5Inna  unb  grau  ©d^mibt  reitcn,^  aber  ^arl  unb  id^,  toir 
ge^cn^  gu  gufe.  22.  SBie  oft  bitten  toir  ^arl,  ha^  er  arbeitet,^  aber  er 
l^flrt^  nid^t!  23.  @r  fagt,  grau  ©d^mibt  reitct  nod^  immer ,^  aber  nid^t 
mel^r  fo  oft,  toie  (as)  bu,  unb  aud^  nid^t^  fo  lange.  24.  SBer  finbet 
immer,  toag  er  fud^t?  25.  SSie  finbcn  @ie  grau  ©d^mibt  l^eute?  —  3^ 
finbc  fie  (objective  case,  her)  no(^  immer^  fel)r  franf,  aber  nid^t  mel)r  fo 


/ 


18  BE(^INNING  GERMAN 

franf,  iDtc  (as)  gcftcm.  26.  (gagtcn  ®lc  nid^t,  ©ic  Wtcn  ^art?  — 
3a,  unb  Id^  fud^e  i{)n  (him)  nod^  immcrJ  2lrbeltct  er  ie^t?  —  5^em,  cr 
arbeitetc  big  fec^g  U{)r,  aber  cr  reitct  je^t.  27.  5Inna  unb  ic^  gc^en^ 
jcfet  nad^  -©aufe,  benn  ^err  ©d^mibt  fagt  aud^,  Tlaxk  fommt^  jefet  nid^t 
mc^r. 

1  Literally,  6egf  i/om  <^ai  you  stay,  i.e.,  beg  you  to  stay;  similarly  in  sentences 
11,  17,  22, — 2  iijc^t,  if  modifying  a  statement  as  a  whole,  usually  stands 
last  in  the  sentence  or  clause ;  if  modifying  a  particular  word  or  phrase,  as  in 
sentences  8  and  23,  it  precedes.  —  ^  These  phrases  might  be  omitted,  because 
the  connection  would  show  that  gcl^en  here  means  going  on  foot,  and  because 
reitcn  always  means  riding  on  the  back  of  a  horse  or  other  animal,  never 
riding  in  a  carriage  or  on  a  wheel.  —  ^  bittc,  without  the  pronoun  id^,  often 
means  pray  or  please.  —  ^  Here,  as  often,  the  present  partakes  of  the  meaning 
of  the  future;  say,  are  you  going  to  stay?  or  shall  you  stay?  etc.  — ^  Here,  as 
often,  ]^5rcn  means  listen,  obey,  mind.  —  ^  Literally,  still  always,  a  common 
phrase,  equivalent  to  an  emphatic  still  or  to  even  now. 

C.  1.  Are  they  coming,  or  are  they  going?  —  Charles  is  com- 
ing, but  Mary  is  going.  2.  Do  you  find  what  you  are  looking  for, 
Anna?  —  No,  I  don't  find  anything,  nor  does  Mr.  Smith  find  any- 
thing (and  Mr.  S.  finds  also  nothing).  3.  Do  you  still  ride  on 
horseback,  Mr.  Smith?  —  No,  I  always^  go  on  foot.  4.  Who  is 
sitting  there?  —  Where?  —  There,  where  Smith  is  working.  — 
Mary  and  Anna  are  sitting  there.  5.  You,  Mary  and  Charles, 
stay  till  six  o'clock,  but  I  don't  stay  so  long  (stay  not  so  long).* 

6.  Who  says  she  is  lying  sick  at  home?  —  Mary  says  so   (it). 

7.  We  are  begging  Anna  now,  but  she  says  No.  8.  She  does  not 
answer,  for  she  is  looking  for  Mrs.  Smith  now.  9.  I  hear  you 
are  always  sitting  at  home  and  working,  Charles.  10.  What 
did  he  say  when  you  asked?  —  He  said:  "  Yes,  we  are  going  home 
now,*"  for  we   do   not  find  Charles   here    (find   C.  here  not)."* 

11.  They  often*  work  till  six  o'clock,  says  Mary,  but  not  always. 

12.  Please,"  Mrs.  Smith,  what  were  Anna  and  Mary  looking  for 
yesterday?  —  They  did  not  tell  what  they  were  looking  for. 

D.  13.  And  don't  you  find  anything,  either  (and  find  you  also 
nothing),  Charles?  —  No,  I  don't  find  anything,  either,  but  Mary 
says  she  finds  something.  14.  How  long  are  you  going  to  ride 
(how  long  ride  you)  to-day,  Mr.  Smith?  —  Till  Charles  comes, 
till  six  o'clock.  15.  He  always*  says  that  he  is  working.  16.  Are 
you  going  home  now,**  Mary?  —  Yes,  Mr.  Smith,  and  you  too? 


LESSON   2.    II :   STRONG    VERBS  19 

—  No,  I  [shall]  stay  till  Mrs.  Smith  comes.  17.  Where  did  you 
work  yesterday,  Mary  and  Anna?  or  didn't  you  work?  —  No, 
we  did  not  work  yesterday  (worked  yesterday  not).^  18.  We 
are  now  no  longer  looking  for  Anna  (we  seek  A.  now  no  more), 
we  are  looking  for  Mrs.  Smith.  —  She  is  not  coming  to-day  (comes 
to-day  not),*  for  she  is  still  lying  sick  at  home.  19.  ''No,  no," 
said  he,  "I  am  not  going  to  stay  so  long  (I  stay  not®  so  long)." 

20.  I  find  Mary  sits  her  horse  well  (sits  well,  gut,  on  horseback). 

21.  Are  you  not  also  going  to  stay  (remain  you  not  also)*  till 
we  go?  —  No,  nor  Mr.  Smith,  either.  22.  Are  you  working 
here  now,^®  please^^?  —  Yes,  and  Anna  also. 

8  In  independent  declarative  sentences  of  the  normal  order  (that  is,  where 
the  subject  precedes  the  verb),  an  adverb  is  not  allowed  to  stand  between 
subject  and  verb,  hence  translate :  /  go  always  on  foot;  similarly,  in  sentences 
11  and  15.  — »  See  note  2.  —  lo  An  adverb  of  time  usually  precedes  an  adverb 
of  place  or  direction,  hence  go  now  home.  —  "  See  note  4. 

II 

In  the  past  tense,  strong  verbs  always  have  a  different  stem- 
vowel  from  that  of  the  present,  whereas  weak  verbs  have  the 
same  vowel  in  both  tenses.  This,  then,  is  one  difference  be- 
tween weak  and  strong  verbs;  another  is  seen  in  the  inflection 
of  the 

PAST   INDICATIVE 

\6)  fam  /  came  \^  fanb  /  found 

bu  famft  etc.  bu  fanbcft  etc. 

tx,  fie,  e^  fam  er,  fie,  e«  fanb 

h)ir  famctt  rove  fanbcn 

t^ir  famt  tl^r  fanbct 

fie,  @ie  famctt  fie,  ^\t  fanbcn 

Inflect  like  Id)  fam:  Inflect  like  id^  fanb: 
x6)  blleb  /  stayed,  remained  \6)  bat^  /  begged,  asked 

\6)  ging^  /  went,  walked  \6)  ritt^  /  rode 

x6)  lag  /  lay,  was  reclining  i^  fa^^  /  sat 

1  In  some  strong  verbs  the  past  differs  from  the  present,  not  only  in  the 
stem-vowel,  but  also  as  to  consonants. 


20  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

VOCABULARY 

nic  never  toarum'?  why? 

no(i)  ni(i)t  not  yet  t3on  3eit  ^u  3cit/rom  time  to  time 

fd^on  already,  by  this  time  um  fiinf  U{)r  at  five  o'clock 

fo  . , .  h)ic  so  ...  as,  as  ...  as  ©onn'tag  Sunday 

tDann?  i(;/ienf  ai  ly/iai  time?  SD^on'tag  Monday 

A.  1.  SSle  tangc  lagcn  ®ie  frant?  —  3d^  tag  big  ©onntag,  ahtx 
idO  blieb  big  9}^ontag  gu  §aufe.  2.  SScr  fam  ju  gufe?  unb  mer  (fam)^ 
gu  ^ferbe?  —  5D^aric  unb  ^arl  famcn  gu  gufe,  §err  <S(f)mibt  unb  id^ 
(famcn)\.jtt  "ipferbe.  3,  3c^  fa^  fc^on  ba,  aber  i^r  lagt  noc^  t)ier,  aU  fie 
tamtn.-^.  ©ingjt  bu  geftem  aud^  fc^on  um  fiinf  UI)r  nad^  §aufe?  — 
5^cin,/^  blicb  big  fed^g  (Uf)r)/  5.  (Bit  fagt  nid^t,  tcann  er  fam,  unb 
(fie  fagt)^  aud^  nid^t,  tDarum  (er  fam).^  6.  5lud^  5lnna  ritt  t)on  3^it  gu 
3eit,  aber  nie  fo  tange,  tDie  SD^arie  ober  ^arl  unb  id^  (rittcn).^  7.  SSir 
fud^ten  Bit  geftem  fet)r  lange,  gran  (Sc^mibt,  aber  n)ir  fanbcn  @ie  nid^t 
big  um  fed^g  Ut)r.  8.  5lrbeitet  ^arl  ie^t  fc^on?  —  5^ein,  (er  arbeitet)^ 
nod^  nic^t.  9.  3Sann  batcft  bu  grau  Bdjmiht?  —  ©eftem,  alg  i^r 
famt.  10.  SSarum  arbeitete  ©d^mibt  geftem  nid^t?  —  Sr  tag  franf 
gu  ^aufe.  11.  „3Bag?"  fagte  er,  atg  er  fam,  „bu  liegft  nod^  immer  ^ier, 
^art?  unb  §err  ©c^mibt  fi^t  frf)on  gu  *ipferbe!" 

B.  12.  „3a,"  fagte  fie,  „er  fam  friil^er  (formerly)  fe^r  oft,  aber  er 
fommt  ie^t  nie  me^r,  benn  er  fi^t  je^t  immer  gu  §aufe  unb  arbeitet,  mie 
(as)  id^  t)ore."  13.  SSann  unb  tuo  fanbcn  Bit  eg?  —  SSir  fanbcn  eg 
geftem,  eg  lag  nod^  ha,  tdo  ^art  unb  30?arie  fa^cn.  14.  ^ie  oft  pren 
@ie  etmag  t)on  5lnna  ©d^mibt?  —  3d^  l^ore  nie  etirag  tion  i^r  (her),  unb 
3J?arie  l^ort  je^t  aud^  nid^tg  metir  t)on  i^r.  15.  3Bir  bitten  Bit,  ha^  Bit 
bteiben,  gran  B^miht  —  Unb  tioit  tange?  big  ©onntag?  —  5^ein,  big 
SOIontag,  bitte.  —  ®ut  (well),  id^  bteibe  big  9)2ontag,  aber  nid^t  tiinger 
(longer),  16.  ©ingft  bu  nid^t  aud^  um  fed^g  Ut)r  nad^  «&aufe,  ,^art?  — 
5^ein,  idt)  ging  fd^on  um  fiinf  (U^r  m^  ^(in\t),^  §err  B^miU,  atg  Bit 
famcn.  17.  Bit  fagte  5lnna  nic^t,  ioie  tange  fie  franf  tag.  18.  ^ir 
btiebcn  l^eute  nid^t  fo  tange  bei  (at  or  at  the  house  of)  grau  ©d^mibt  Voit 
geftem,  benn  ioir  fanbcn  fie  (her)  \t^x  franf. 

*  May  be  omitted. 

C.  1.  Why  didn't  you  come?  —  I  was  lying  ill  at  home. 
2.  They  were  working  when^  we  were  riding.     3.  How  long  did 


LESSON   2.    II :   STRONG   VERBS  21 

you  stay  yesterday,  Mrs.  Smith?  —  As  long  as  you  stayed,  Charles. 
I  went  home  at  five  o'clock.^  4.  What  do  I  hear,  Anna  and 
Mary?  you  are  not  at  work  yet  (you  work  yet  not)?  5.  He  was 
looking  for  it  (already)  when^  I  came.  —  And  when-  did  you 
come?  —  At  six  o'clock.  6.  Yes,  they  came  from  time  to  time, 
but  they  never^  stayed  so  long  as  you  [did].  7.  Why  didn't 
you  ask  Charles  (begged  you  C.  not)  ?  —  I  hear  he  is  still  lying 
ill  at  home.  —  Who  says  so  (it)  ?  —  Anna  and  Mary  said  so.  — 
When^?  —  Yesterday,  when^  they  came.  —  I  did  not  hear  it. 
8.  Are  you  going  to  stay^  till  Sunday,  or  till  Monday?  —  I  am 
going  home  to-day.^  9.  No,  said  he,  I  did  not  look  for  it  as  long 
(sought  it  not  so  long)  as  you  [did],  but  I  found  it.  10.  Were 
you  not  sitting  here  (sat  you  not  here),  Mrs.  Smith,  when^  you 
were  working?  —  No,  Mary,  I  was  sitting  there,  where  you  are 
sitting.     11.  And  what  do  you  hear  from  Charles  Smith,  please? 

—  Nothing. 

D.  12.  Yes,  Mary  and  Charles  rode  home,  but  1  stayed  till 
you  came,  Mr.  Smith.  13.  Why  are  you  still  looking  for  it  here 
(why  seek  you  it  still  here)?  Didn't  I  say.  It  is  lying  here  no 
more?  —  I  didn't  hear  what  you  said,  Anna.  14.  She  often^ 
came  home,  but  she  never^  stayed  so  long  as  I  [did].  15.  Didn't 
you  also  come  (came  you  not  also)  on  horseback?  —  When^? 
yesterday?  —  No,  to-day.  — No,  I  came  on  foot  to-day  (to-day 
on  foot).  16.  Are  they  working  here  already?  —  Who?  —  Charles 
Smith  and  Mary.  —  No,  not  yet,  but  I  understand  they  are 
coming  at  five  o'clock.  Why  do  you  ask?  —  I  am  looking  for 
them  (fie).  17.  Didn't  he  sit  his  horse  well  (sat  he  not  well,  gut, 
on  horseback)  ?  —  Yes,  very  well.  18.  They  did  not  say  why 
or  when^  they  went. 

2  When  meaning  at  the  time  when  and  used  with  a  past  tense  referring  to  a 
particular  time  or  occasion,  is  al8  and  must  be  distinguished  from  the  inter- 
rogative when  meaning  at  what  time,  which  is  toann,  —  ^  Lesson  2.  i.  note  10. 

—  4  Lesson  2.  i.  note  8.  —  ^  Lesson  2.  i.  note  5. 


22  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

Lesson  3 

PRESENT   AND    PAST    INDICATIVE    OF   ^ahtn,    <Btm,    SBctbCtt 
ORDER  OF  WORDS 


3^  f^abt,  id}  Bin,  ic^  tocrbe*  The  verbs  l^aben  to  have,  fern 
to  he  and  tDerben  to  become  are  more  or  less  irregular  in  their 
inflection.    We  take  up  first  the 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE 

/  have  I  am  I  become 

id)  ^abt  i^  bin  i^  merbc 

bu  ^aft  bu  blft  bu  h)irft 

cr,  [ic,  c^  ^at  tx,  \it,  c^  ift  er,  [ic,  c6  iDirb 

tDir  l^aben  *  h)lr  finb  tolr  tuerben 

il)r  ^abt  il^r  felb  il^r  merbet 

fie,  (Sle  l^aben  ftc,  (Sic  finb  fie,  @ie  merbcn 

Forms  of  toerben  are  often  rendered  by  those  of  get  or  grow,  e.  g.,  c« 
toirb  talt  i<  g'e^s  or  is  getting  cold,  mir  mcrben  reic^  we  are  growing  rich. 

VOCABULARY 

id)  gab  (like  fant)  7  gave  xdd)  rich 

arm  poor  aVit^  all,  everything 

gut  good,  well  gcnng'  enough 

fait  cold  t)iel  mwc/i,  a  great  deal 

Study  the  sentences  below  in  the  following  order :  1  —  1%  2  —  2*,  etc. 
Observe  the  position  of  subject  and  verb. 

A.   1.  3^  bin  iefet  franf.  !*•  3efet  bin  ic^  franf. 

2.  (5r  ift  nic^t  me^r  l^ier.  2*-  §ter  ift  cr  nid^t  mel^r. 

3.  ®ic  gab  tarl  alleg,  al^  fie  3^-  511^  fie  tarn,  gab  fic  ^arl 
fam.  ato. 

4.  3ti^  l^abc  nid^t  t)ieL  4*-  3Siel  l^abc  i(i^  nid^t. 

5.  SE3ir  fmb  nid^t  arm.  5^-  2lrm  finb  toir  nid^t. 

The  reason  for  the  order  on  the  right  (verb  +  subject),  which 
is  called  the  Inverted  Order,  in  distinction  from  the  Normal 


LESSON  3.  i:  ^aben,  (Scin,  SBerbcn  23 

Order  on  the  left  (subject  +  verb),  is  this:  in  independent 
declarative  sentences  beginning  with  any  other  element  than  the 
subject,  the  verb  must  precede  the  subject. 

But  if  such  independent  declarative  sentences  begin  with  the 
conjunctions  aber  but,  benn  for,  ober  or,  unb  and,  and  a  few 
others,  we  have  the  Normal  Order,  as  on  the  left  below,  unless 
such  conjunction  is  immediately  followed  by  another  element 
requiring  the  Inverted  Order,  as  on  the  right  below: 

6.  2Bir  l^aben  genug,  abcr  totr  6*-  SBir  l^abcn  gcnug,  aber  rcid^ 
{inb  nid^t  relc^.  ftnb  ttJtr  nlc^t. 

7.  3d^  bleibe  gu  §aufe,  bcnn  c^  7^-  S^  bleibc  gu  §aufe,  benn 
hJtrb  ic^t  fd^on  fait.  jc^t  toirb  e^  fd^on  fait. 

8.  @ie  ift  fel^r  reld^,  unb  fic  tft  8^-  ©ie  ift  fe()r  reic^,  unb  gut  tft 
aud^  gut.  fic  aud^. 

Observe,  then,  that  the  words  which  cause  the  inverted  order  in  6*, 

7^  and  8^  are  not  the  conjunctions  aber,  benn,  unb,  but  the  predicate 
adjective  reic^  (6^),  the  adverb  je^t  (7^),  and  the  predicate  adjective 
gut  (8^).  —  There  are  in  aU  six  such  conjunctions  (also  called  general 
connectives)  which  never  affect  the  order  of  words,  either  in  independent 
or  in  dependent  (Part  II)  clauses;  namely:  aber  hut  {=but  yet),  allein  but 
(aIso=6wi  yet  or  and  yet,  and  less  common  than  aber),  bcnn  for,  for  the 
reason  that,  ober  or,  [onbem  but  {=hut,  on  the  contrary),  unb  and. 

B.  9.  3Ba^  gab  cr  50?aric  gcftcm?  —  ^\6)i^  gab  cr  il^r,  bcnn  cr 
l^at  felbft  (himself)  nic^tg.  10.  3ft  e^  ^eute  fo  fait  mie  geftcm?—  mdn, 
noc^  nid^t,  abcr  c^  ttitrb  noc^  falter  {colder).  11.  3Sarum  bleibcn  ®ic 
gu  §aufc?  @inb  ©ic  nodf)  immcr^  franf  ?  —  9^cin,  franf  bin  ic^  jc^t 
nid^t  me^r,  abcr  Id^  l)abc  nod^  fcl)r  bid  gu  arbcitcn  {to  do).  12.  „@g 
ift  gut/'  fagtc  fic,^  „ha^  <Sic  fommcn,  §crr  (Sd^mibt,  tDir  martctcn  fd^on." 
13.  Wit  fait  c^  mlrb!  14.  3a,  [a,  immtx  fagft  bu:  „Um  fiinf  Ul^r 
fommc  id^  nad^  §aufe."  ^bcr  nic  fommft  bu,  unb  oft  bift  bu  um  fed^« 
nod^  nid^t  l)icr.     15.  5lud^  id^  bin^  nid^t  reid^,  abcr  id^  ^abc  gcnug. 

16.  21B  Ic^  fragtc,  tuo  unb  h)lc  langc  cr  arbcitctc,  antttjortctc  cr^  nid^t. 

17.  „®ut/'  fagtc  fic,^  „ic^t  blclbc  ic^  aud^  bi^  funf  U^r  ^tcr."  18.  (Etm^ 
l^abcn  fic  nod^,  abcr  eg  ift  nld^t  mcl^r  gcnug.  19.  3a,  ba^  er  tDartetc, 
fagtc  W;  abcr  nid^t,  h3o  unb  idIc  langc.  20.  ^r  fomntt,  aber  toann  er 
fonxntt,  fage  Id^^  nld^t. 


24  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

'  Lesson  2,  i.  note  7,  —  2  j^  what  grammatical  relation  does  the  clause 
@«  i[t  gut  stand  to  fagtc  fie?  See  also  sentences  17,  19,  20. — ^Why  not 
inverted  —  bin  id^?  Because  certain  words,  like  ctud^  and  nur  only,  when 
primarily  modifying  or  emphasizing  the  subject,  rather  than  serving  as  a 
connective,  do  not  count  as  inverting  elements.  —  *  In  what  grammatical 
relation  do  the  words  from  2II8  to  arbeitctc  stand  to  anttt)ortctc  cr? 

C.  1.  Now  they  are  no  longer  poor.  2.  We  haven't  much, 
but  we  stilP  have  enough.  3.  There  it  lies.  4.  I  am  going 
home,  for  now  I  have  enough.  5.  Yesterday  I  stayed  at  home 
till  five  o'clock,  and  you  did  not  come.  6.  When®  they  came, 
they  gave  Charles  nothing.  7.  Never  did  I  find^  it  so  cold  here 
as  to-day.  8.  Who  says  they  are  getting  rich?  —  I  say  so  (it). 
9.  And  did  you  never  go  on  foot?  —  No,*  we  always^  rode  on 
horseback.  10.  To-day  I  am  not  going  to  stay®  so  long  as  yester- 
day. 11.  At  home  he  worked  always  till  five  o'clock,  but  here 
he  works  till  six.  12.  Rich  he  was,  yes;  but  was  he  also  good? 
I  ask.  13.  You  ask  what  I  found.  Everything  did  I  find,^  but 
not  what  I  was  looking  for. 

D.  14.  Now  I  am  no  longer  rich,  but  I  am  not  poor  yet,  either 
(I  am  also  yet  not  poor).  15.  [To]  Charles  they  gave  everything, 
[to]  Mary  nothing.  —  Nothing,  you  say?  Why  didn't  they  give 
Mary  anything  (why  gave  they  M.  nothing)  ?  — "  She  is  rich 
enough,"  they  said,  when®  I  asked;  but  I  understand  she  has  been 
ill  this  long  time  (she  is  already  long  ill),  and  she  is  now  getting 
poor.  16.  From  time  to  time  I  still  hear  something  from  Anna, 
but  where  Charles  is  she  does  not  say.  17.  Hasn't  he  enough 
yet  (has  he  yet  not  enough)  ?  —  No,®  he  never^  has  enough. 
18.  On  (2lm)  Sunday  he  was  still  working,  on  Monday  he  came 
home  ill  (ill  home),  and  now  he  is  already  dead  (tot).  19.  Yes,® 
they  answered  something,  but  what  they  said  I  did  not  hear. 

«  Lesson  2.  i.  note  8.  —  ^  Lesson  2.  11.  note  2.  —  7  in  older  English,  in- 
version was  more  common  than  it  is  now;  compare  Acts  III.  6:  Then  Peter 
said,  Silver  and  gold  have  I  none,  but  such  as  I  have  give  I  thee.  —  On  the 
omission  of  did,  do  etc.,  see  Lesson  1.  i.  note  2.  — «  Words  used  with  exclama- 
tory, or  parenthetical,  force,  like  tiein,  \a,  ad^!  alas!  etc.  are  detached  by  more 
or  less  of  a  pause  from  the  rest  of  the  sentence  and  do  not  cause  inversion. 
This  applies  to  sentences  9,  17  and  19,  but  if  such  a  word  is  at  the  same  time 
the  object  of  a  following  verb,  it  does  cause  inversion,  e.  g.,  'Wo,"  he  said, 
"/  am  not  ill "  „')Rdn,"  [ogtc  cr,  „id^  bin  nid^t  front."  —  ^  Lesson  2.  i.  note  5. 


LESSON  3.  ii:  §abcn,  <Scln,  Serbcn  25 

II 

Next  we  take  up  the  inflection  of  l^aben,  fein  and  tocrben  in 
the 

PAST   INDICATIVE 

I  had  I  was  I  became 

i^  ^atic  i^  toax  id^  n3urbc 

bu  ^attcft  bu  marft  bu  murbcft 

cr,  fie,  eg  l^attc  cr,  fie,  eg  mar  er,  fie,  eg  murbe* 

tuir  l^atten  h)ir  njaren  tDir  tDurbcn 

i^r  l^attct  il^r  tuart  (marct)  i^r  murbct 

fie,  ^k  ^attm  fie,  @ie  maren  fie  (Sie,  n)urben 

id)  nal^m  (like  fam)  /  took  tcenig  hY^Ze,  a  smaZZ  amount 

i(i)  fpieic  (like  fagc)  /  play  nur  onZ?/,  6wi 

id)  fpieltc  (like  fagte)  /  played  ob  whether,  if 

tddi  because 

In  the  German  sentences  below  observe  the  position  of  the  verbs  in 
bold-faced  type. 

A.  1,  @ie  gaben  nid^t  t)iel,  benn  fie  l^atten  nur  fel^r  metiig.  2,  (Sie 
gaben  nic^t  tJtel,  tDcil  fie  nur  fel^r  n)cmg  l^atten.  3.  3d)  frage  ie^t  nur, 
ob  bu  geftern  ba  Itiarft.  4.  SBir  f)orten,  bafe  ^arl  unb  9}iarie  nod) 
fptetten,  alg  eg  fc^on  fait  tourbc.  5.  3Son  3eit  gu  ^cit  fragt  fie:  „S[Ber 
fpielt  ha  fo  gut?"  6.  3Son  3eit  gu  3eit  fragt  fie,  mx  ba  fo  gut  f^iclt.^ 
7,  ©agteft  bu  nid^t,  bag  er  alteg  nai)m,  tcag^  fie  noc^  ijattc?  —  9^ein,  ic^ 
fagte  nur,  er  nal^m  fel^r  )oitL  8,  ©d^mibt  tioax  nie  reid^,  aber  er  l^atte 
immer  genug.  9.  3e^t  tDirb  er  arm,  n)eil  er  nid^t  ntel^r  axhtxttt 
10.  §eute  fanb  id^,  tr)ag  id^  geftern  furfjte.  11.  SSann  er  geftern  tarn, 
fagte  er  nic^t,  unb  er  fagte  aud^  nid^t,  tnarum  er  fd§on  urn  fiinf  Ul^r  nad^ 
§aufe  Qtng,  ober  toie  lange  2lnna  nod^  ba  hixtb. 

The  reason  for  the  position  of  the  verbs  in  bold-faced  type 
is  this:  in  dependent  clauses  introduced  by  a  relative  or  inter- 
rogative, like  toa§,  tote,  too,  toer,  toann,  toarum  etc.,  or  by  a 
subordinating  conjunction,  like  tocil,  oi),  baft,  al§,  6i^   etc.,  the 


26  BEGINNING  GERM/ 

verb  mvM  he  transposed  to  the  end.  This  is  called  the  Trans- 
posed Order. 

Observe:  (1)  bcnn/or,  in  sentence  1,  requires  the  normal  order,  whereas 
tt)cU  because,  in  sentence  2,  requires  the  transposed  order;  (2)  when 
bafe  is  omitted,  as  in  the  last  clause  of  sentence  7  (and  as  that  often  is 
omitted  in  English) ,  we  have  the  normal  order,  cr  na^nt  f c^r  bid,  instead  of 
the  transposed  order,  ha^  cr  fe^r  Did  na^m. 

•  B.  12,  SSarum  glngcn  <Bk  gcfkm  fd^on  urn  fiinf  Uf)t  m^  $aufc, 
grau  @(^mlbt?  iDarum  bllebcn  (Sie  nid^t  aud^  bl^  fed^^,  tdit  h)ir?  — 
^cll  SJJaric  nod^  franf  ju  ^aufe  lag.  —  Unb  Uegt  fie  ^cutc  aud^  nod^?  — 
3a,  fie  Uegt  nod^  immer,  abcr  fie  tft  nid^t  inel^r  fo  franf,  trie  fie  geftem 
toar,  13.  (Sie  fragt:  „3Ser  fanb  e^  geftem?"  14.  @ie  fragt,  trer  e« 
geftem  fanb.^  15.  Db  fie  t)iel  ober  hjenig  l^attctt,  fagte  er  nid^t. 
16.  SSir  baten  ^arl  fo  lange,  bi«  er  3a  faglc  unb  nad^  §aufe  fam,  aber  meil 
cr  nid^t  mel^r  3^it  fjaiit,  blieb  er  nur  bi^  SD^ontag.  17.  ^a^  fie  geftem 
f)ier  fud^ten  unb  n)ie  t)iel  fie  nod^  fanben,  l^orte  id^  nid^t;  aber  §err  ©d^mibt 
fagte  l^eute,  bag  fie  atle^  nal^mcn,  tioa^^  fie  fanben,  unb  fd^on  um  fec^^ 
Ul^r  nad^  §aufe  gtngen,  al^  i^x  nod^  ni(^t  l^ier  toart.  18.  §oren  @ie 
ie^t,  n)ie  gut  3lnna  fd^on  fptcit?  —  3a,  td^  pre  e^,  unb  id^  finbe,  fie 
fplelt  fd^on  fel^r  gut  or  ha^  fie  fd^on  fel^r  gut  f^iclt. 

1  Compare  the  positions  of  fpielt  in  5  and  6 ;  similarly,  of  fanb  in  13 
and  14.  —  2  German  says  aUt^,  toag  (literally,  all  what)  for  all  that  or  every- 
thing which. 

C.  1.  They  came  home  because  it  was  getting  so  cold.  2.  I 
ask  if  you  had  enough.  —  And  I  answer  that  we  had  not  enough. 
3.  Anna  says  that  Mrs.  Smith  plays  very  well.  4.  Anna  says 
Mrs.  Smith  plays  very  well.  5.  Did  you  find  what  you  were 
looking  for  yesterday,  Mr.  Smith?  —  Yes,  I  found  everything' 
I  was  looking  for.  6.  I  did  not  ask  Smith  how  he  became  so 
very  poor,  but  Mary  says  he  was  ill  a  long  time.''  7.  I  was  sitting 
there,  where  you  are  sitting  now.  8.  She  had  but  little,  for 
they  took  everything.  9.  Now  Charles  and  Mary  are  going 
home.  —  But  why  don't  they  wait  (why  wait  they  not)  till  we 
go  too?  —  Because  it  is  getting  so  cold.  10.  How  cold  it  was 
when  we  came  home!  11.  Why  don't  you  ask  Charles  whether 
they  were  (already)  there  when  he  came  yesterday? 


LESSON   4.    i:  THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE  27 

D.  12.  When  I  asked  Mary  why  she  gave  Charles  so  little, 
she  did  not  answer.  13.  Yesterday  I  asked  Anna  if  Mrs.  Smith 
gave  her  (il^r)  much,  and  she  said:  "No,  she  gave  me  (mir)  but 
very  little";  but  to-day  you  tell  me  that  Mrs.  Smith  gave  her 
everything^  she  had.  14.  When  I  found  that  it  was  growing 
cold,  I  went  home.  15.  What  were  you  saying,  Mr.  Smith?  — 
I  was  saying  it  was  not  so  cold  yesterday'*  as  it  is  to-day.  Don't 
you  find  it  so,  too  (find  you  it  not,  too)?  —  No,  I  found  it  colder 
(taittx)  yesterday.'*  16.  Whether  she  played  well  or  not,  he  did 
not  say,  but  I  hear  that  she  does  not  play  very  often.  17.  Why 
didn't  you  come,  Mary  and  Anna,  when  we  were  playing  yester- 
day?—  Because  we  had  no  time  (feinc  S^^^)-  1^-  I  ^^^  ^<^^  ^^^ 
when  they  found  it,  nor  did  I  ask  (and  I  asked  also  not)  where 
they  found  it.  19.  Smith  did  not  come,  for  he  was  still  lying 
sick  at  home. 

3  See  note  2  above.  The  relative  that,  or  which,  though  often  omitted 
in  English,  is  not  omitted  in  German.  —  *  Predicate  adjectives  usually  stand 
last  in  clauses  of  the  normal  and  the  inverted  orders. 


Lesson  4 

THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE.      NOUNS:  CLASS  I 


We  now  leave  the  inflection  of  verbs  for  a  while  and  turn  to 
that  of  the  articles,  nouns,  pronouns  and  adjectives. 

Gender.  Case.  There  are  three  genders,  the  masculine, 
feminine  and  neuter,  and  four  cases,  namely,  the  nominative, 
or  the  case  of  the  subject  and  of  address  (vocative);  the  geni- 
tive, corresponding  to  the  English  possessive  or  the  objective 
with  of;  the  dative,  or  the  case  of  the  indirect  object  and  cor- 
responding to  the  English  objective  with  to  or  for;  and  the 
accusative,  or  the  case  of  the  direct  object. — The  genitive, 
dative  and  accusative  are  called  Oblique  Cases. 

The  Definite  Article  is  inflected  as  follows: 


28  BEGINNING  GERMAN 


s 

INGULAl 

a 

PLURAL 

masc. 

fem. 

neut. 

masc.  fem.  neut. 

N. 

ber 

bie 

\)a§ 

the 

bie        the 

G. 

bc^ 

ber 

be^ 

of  the 

ber       of  the 

D. 

bcm 

ber 

bem 

to  the 

ben       to  the 

A. 

ben 

bie 

ba^ 

the 

bie       the 

VOCABULARY 

The  nouns  below  are  in  the  nominative  singular  and,  in  the  first  part 
(I)  of  this  Lesson,  are  used  in  that  case  only. 

ber  SSagen  wagon,  carnage  gro^  great,  tall,  large,  big 

ba^*  9D^abc^en  the  girl  flcin  small,  little,  short 

ber  ©arteix  the  garden  f(^on  beautiful,  handsome,  fine 

ber  3Sater  the  father  tnarm.  warm 

bie  SJJutter  the  mother  balb  soon 

A.  1.  5I(^  "bir  nad^  -^aufe  famen,  iDar  e^  noc^  fe^r  fait,  aber  eg 
iDurbe  balb  h)arm.  2.  3Sa^  fragte  er  ®te?  —  Sr  fragte,  ob  ba^  SO^abc^en 
au(^  bCL  mar.  —  Unb  rt)a^  anttDorteten  @te  il)m  (dative  of  er,  him)?  — • 
3(^  fagte,  bafe  fie^  nod)  nld^t  ba  \dax,  atg  ic^  nac^  §aufe  ging.  3.  !Der 
33ater  gab  nur  iDenig,  bie  SJhitter  nid^t^.  4.  ©ie  fagt,  bag  ber  3Sagen 
nid^t  fel^r  grog  ift.  5.  3Sater  unb  9JJutter  famen  um  fiinf  U^r  unb 
blieben  bi^  fecf)^.  6.  ginbeff  bu  md)t  aud^,  33ater,  bag  ber  ©arten  nur 
flein  ift?  —  3a,  aber  er^  ift  aud^  fe!)r  fd)i3n.  7.  2Ber  fpiette  ba  fo  fd^on^? 
—  Sg  mar  9)?arie.  2)ag  9[^abd)en  fpielt  fd^on  fe^r  gut.  8.  Sie  grog 
^art  tt)irb!  @r  ift  balb  fo  grog  mie  33ater.  9.  ©eftern  mar  e^  l)ier 
aud^  fel^r  marm,  aber  nidit  fo  marm,  mie  e^  l)eute  ift.  10.  SKo  ift  ber 
^agen?  —  @r^  ift  nid^t  me^r  l)ier,  unb  SSater  unb  SD^utter  finb  aud^ 
ni(^t  mel)r  l)ier. 

B.  11.  T)it  9[)^utter  ift  fd)on  l)ier,  mie  (as)  id^  l^ore,  aber  mann 
fommt    ber   3Sater?  —  grau    (Sd^mibt    fagt,    er    fommt    aud^    balb. 

12.  9^ein,  fo  grog  ift  ber  ©arten  nic^t,  toie  ^k  fagen,  aber  fd^iDU  ift  er.^ 

13.  3Bar  ber  ^agen  noc^  nid)t  ba,  al^  ®ie  famen?  —  5^ein,  unb  al^  er* 
fam,  fanben  mir  balb,  bag  er^  nid^t  grog  genug  mar.  14.  gragte  5lnna 
(Sie  nid^t,  mer  gu  §aufe  blieb?  —  5^ein,  fie  fragte,  ob  ^arl  geftem  gu 
gug  ober  lu  "^ferbe  nad^  -^aufe  fam  (or  ob  ^arl  geftern  gu  gug  nad^ 

*  The  grammatical  gender  of  German  nouns  often  differs  from  the  natural 
gender,  or  sex,  of  the  objects  denoted  by  the  nouns. 


LESSON   4.    I:  THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE  29 

§aufe  tarn  obcr  su  'ipferbc).  15,  „dld(i)  finb  loir  alk  (aZZ)  nid^t/'  fagte 
ber  S?ater,  „aber  arm  finb  ttiir  aud^  nid^t."  16.  2Barum  fommft  bu 
nic^t  ie^t,  SD^utter?  —  3BeU  id^  ie^t  ^u  (too)  menig  S^^  ¥K  '^rim, 
17.  3(^  fragc  ®ie  ic^t,  ob  (Sie  l^cute  su  §aufe  bleiben  ober  ob  ba§  9D?ab* 
d^en  gu  §aufe  btetbt.  —  5lber  fagtc  ic^  3^nen  (dative  of  @ie,  2/0^)  nid^t 
fd^on,  a(^  ®ie  !amen,  bafe  td^  ^eute  ^u  §aufe  bleibc,  h)cil  bag  9i)labd^en 
nid^t  l^icr  ift?  —  Unb  marten  (Bit  fo  lange,  big  [ie^  fommt?  —  5^ein, 
fo  langc  ^abe  id^  nid^t  3^it;  id^  bleibc  nur  big  fiinf  U^r.  —  Unb  mann 
fommt  fie'?  —  Urn  fec^g.  18.  3lnna  fpielt  iefet  aud^  fc^on  fe^r  fc^on.^ 
19.  iBalb  famen  aud^  33ater  unb  3Jiutter,  unb  alleg  mar  gut. 

1  As  a  rule,  a  pronoun  agrees  in  grammatical  gender  with  the  noun  for 
which  it  stands,  but  with  nouns  denoting  persons  the  natural  gender  is  apt 
to  prevail.  —  ^  beautifully.  Almost  any  German  adjective,  in  its  stem-form, 
can  be  used  adverbially. 

C.  1.  Who  says  that  Mother  stayed  till  Monday?  —  Mary 
says  so  (it).  Did  she  not  stay  so  long?  —  No,  only  till  Sunday, 
but  Mrs.  Smith  and  Anna,  they  stayed  till  Monday.  —  And 
when  did  the  girl  come?  —  She  is  not  here  yet  (yet  not  here). 

2.  They  soon  found  that  the  carriage  was  not  large  enough. 

3.  "We  had  but  httle,"  she  said,  "but  we  always  had  enough, 
for  we  never  were  poor."  4.  Mary  and  Anna  play  beautifully, 
but  Charles  does  not  yet  play  (plays  yet  not)  very  well.  5.  When 
I  found  that  it  was  getting  so  warm,  I  went  home.  6.  How  hand- 
some the  girl  is  growing!  7.  Was  the  garden  so  large  as  they 
said?  —  No,  it  was  only  small,  but  it  was  very  fine.  8.  The 
girl  did  not  come,  for  she  was  still  lying  sick  at  home.  9.  Now 
the  carriage  is  coming!  he  said.  10.  Where  is  Father  sitting 
now?  —  Where  you  were  sitting  yesterday.  11.  How  much  did 
you  give  them  (i^nen) ,  Mother?  —  I  gave  them  all  I  had. 

D.  12.  "No,"  he  said,  "I  did  not  take  anything,  nor  did 
they  take  anything  (and  they  took  also  nothing)."  13.  Who  says 
that  Father  and  Mother  are  looking  for  Anna?  —  Charles  says  so 
(it).  14.  I  hear  the  girl  is  now  as  tall  and  handsome  as  her  (the) 
mother.  15.  Were  you  here,  Charles,  when  they  took  it?  —  No, 
but  Mary  and  Mrs.  Smith  were  here.  16.  It  is  getting  warm,  I 
say,  but  it  is  not  yet  so  warm  as  it  was  yesterday  when  we  were 
coming  home.  17.  The  girl  asked  why  they  became  so  poor, 
and  I  answered.  Because  they  worked  no  more.     18.  "  Yes,"  he 


30  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

said,  "Charles  plays  everything,  but  there  is  nothing  that  he 
plays  well  (but  nothing  plays  he  well)."  19.  It  was  already 
getting  cold  when  Father  and  I  were  riding  home.  —  And  when 
did  you  ride  home?  —  At  five  o'clock.  20.  From  time  to  time 
he  stayed  at  home  and  worked  a  (ein)  little.  21.  Isn't  the  car- 
riage (is  the  carriage  not)  fine,  Father?  —  Yes,  Charles,  but  it 
is  too  (ju)  small. 

II 

Nouns  are  divided  into  four  classes,  according  to  the  form 
of  the  nominative  plural,  as  compared  with  that  of  the  nomina- 
tive singular. 

The  following  rules  apply  to  all  the  four  Classes : 

1.  Feminine  nouns  have  the  oblique  cases  (p.  27)  of  the  singu- 
lar like  the  nominative  singular.  In  other  words :  feminine  nouns 
are  invariable  in  the  singular. 

2.  All  nouns  have  the  oblique  cases  of  the  plural  like  the  nomi- 
native plural,  except  that  the  dative  adds  n  if  this  nominative 
does  not  already  end  in  n. 

Class  I  has  the  nominative  plural  like  the  nominative  singu- 
lar, except  that  some  nouns  modify  the  stem-vowel  —  a,  o,  u, 
an  of  the  singular  becoming  tt,  o,  il,  ciu  in  the  plural. 

Masculines  and  neuters  add  ^  for  the  genitive  singular  and 
have  the  dative  and  accusative  like  the  nominative. 

In  Class  I  belong:  1.  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable 
ending  in  d^en  or  leln*  These  are  neuter  diminutives  and  can 
be  recognized  as  such  at  sight,  that  is,  by  their  mere  form. 
None  of  them  change  the  stem-vowel  for  the  plural,  but  many 
of  them  have  a,  o,  U  or  ciu  in  both  singular  and  plural. 

2.  All  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable 
ending  in  el,  en  or  er»  Some  of  these  modify  the  stem-vowel 
for  the  plural. 

3.  Only  two  feminines,  both  modifying  the  stem-vowel  for 
the  plural :  bit  SJ^utter  mother,  bie  2^od^ter  daughter. 


LESSON   4.    II :   NOUNS.     CLASS   I  31 

Models.    With  vowel  unchanged  in  the  plural: 


wagon,  carriage 

girl 

N.     ber    SSagen 

bag 

Wd^tn 

G.      beg   SBagctiig 

beg 

9J?abc^en§ 

D.     betn  SSagen 

bem  ^mabci^en 

A.     ben  ilSagen 

bag 

TlaWn 

N.     ble    SBagen 

bie 

mahi^tn 

G.     ber    SBagen 

ber 

^mabc^en 

D.     ben  iSBagen 

ben 

Tldh(i)tn 

A.     ble    ^agcn 

bie 

^mabd^en 

bh  vowel  modified  in  the  plural : 

garden                       father 

mother 

N. 

ber   ©arten              ber   3Sater 

bie    muittx 

G. 

beg    ©arten^             beg   3$ater^ 

ber    ^mutter 

D. 

bent  ©arten              benx  33ater 

ber   ^mutter 

A. 

ben  ©arten              ben  3Sater 

bie    gjJntter 

N. 

bie    ©arten              bie    mttv 

bie    abutter 

G. 

ber    ©iirten              ber    mttt 

ber    ^mutter 

D. 

htn  ©cirten              ben  33  (item 

ben  TluiUxn 

A. 

bie    ©cirten              bie    mttx 

VOCABULARY 

bie    9)Jiltter 

In  the  vocabularies,  the  nominative  singular  and  the  nominative 
plural  of  each  noun  are  given  with  the  definite  article.  It  is  important 
to  learn  these  two  forms  as  they  furnish  the  clue  to  the  rest. 

ber  53rnber  bie  ^riiber  brother 

ber  5Ipfet  bie  Spfel  apple 

ber  53oge(  bie  33ijgel  bird 

bie  Zo^Ux  bie  2;oc^ter  daughter 

bag  graulein  bie  grcinlein  young  lady,  Miss 

i<^  finge  (like  fomme)  I  sing        id)  fang  (like  fam)  I  sang 
in,  with  dat.,  in  in,  with  ace,  into 

3m  or  im,  in  the,  is  a  contraction  of  in  and  bem,  the  dative  sing,  masc, 
or  neut.,  of  the  article.  —  Whenever,  in  the  translation  of  English  sen- 


32  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

tences,  this  or  similar  contractions  are  to  be  used,  it  is  indicated  by  a 
hyphen,  thus:  in-the,  to-the  etc. 

A.  1.  SSir  gingen  in  htn  ©artcn,  IDO  bic  Spfel  lagen.  2.  @r  l^attc 
ben  3Kagen  nic^t  met)r,  al^  id)  nad^  §aufc  fam.  3.  „3a/'  fagte  cr,  „ti3ir 
tDaren  in  bent  ©arten,  aber  ben  3Sogel  ()orten  tDir  nid^t."  4.  SSer  ift  ba^ 
3JJabd^en  ha  im  ©arten,  unb  n)a^  fud^t  fie?  —  (5«  ift  Jrciulein  'tfflaxit, 
fie  fud^t  nod^  SpfeL  5.  Qti^t  fingen  bie  35ogel  nid^t  mel^r,  benn  e^  luirb 
fd^on  fait.  6.  3tx  bent  SBagen  fagen  3Sater  unb  SD^utter;  §err  ©d^ntibt 
aber^  ritt  ju  ^ferbe,  unb  ^arl  ging  ju  gug.  7.  3d^  frage,  ob  (Sie  ber 
^ruber  ober  ber  5Sater  be^  graulein^  finb.  —  3d^  bin  be^  grautein^ 
^ruber.  8.  ©agten  ®ie  nid^t,  ba^  grau  ©d^ntibt  bie  Spfel  ben  ^^fid^tem 
gab?  —  5^ein,  ben  2:od^tern  gab  fie  nid^t^.  9.  ganben  (Sie  graulein 
<S(^ntibt  nid^t  aud^  fe^r  fd^on?  —  3a,  aber  nid^t  fo  fd^on,  trie  grau 
©d^ntibt,  aud^2  ift  fie  nid^t  fo  grofe  toie  bie  9}Jutter.  10.  Wit  fd^on 
bie  3S5geI  geftem  im  ©arten  fangen! 

B.  11.  2Sjeit  eg  fd^on  fo  fait  n)ar,  aU  tDir  nad^  §aufe  fanten,  gingen 
hiir  nid^t  nte^r  in  htn  Garten.  12.  Urn  fiinf  U^r  fagen  toir  fd^on  im 
SSagen,  unb  um  fed^g  tDaren  n)ir  gu  §aufe,  aber  SSater  unb  SDlutter 
fanben  h)ir  nid^t  me^r,  nur  33ruber  ^arl  mar  noc^  ba.  13.  T)tx  ^ruber 
beg  graulein^  fpielt  aud^,  aber  id^  finbe,  er  fpielt  nod^  immer  nic^t  fo  gut 
mie  fie.  14.  SSie  oft  bittet  bie  5DMter  ^ruber  ^arl,  bafe  er  mei)r  ar* 
beitet,  aber  er  l^ort  nie!  15.  §6rft  bu  nod^  nid^tg,  5lnna?  3d^  pre 
fd^on  etn)ag.  —  3a,  ie^t  l^ore  id^  aud^  ettoag.  (Sg  ift  33ater^  ^agen, 
balb  ift  er  l^ier!  16.  SSie  fait  eg  }e^t  l^ier  im  ©arten  tDirb!  Unb  bie 
3Sogcl  fingen  aud^  nid^t  me^r.  (Sg  n)irb  balb  3Binter.^  17.  ilBann 
fommt  i^r  l^eute,  bitte?  —  2Bir  fommen  um  fllnf  ober  um  fed^g.  —  @ut, 
il^r  finbet  ung  (us)  im  (Garten.  —  §abt  i^r  aud^  nod^  Spfel?  —  9lein, 
Spfel  ^ahm  njir  je^t  nid^t  me^^r.  18.  gran  ©c^mibt  l^at  flinf  3:oc^ter, 
aber  graulein  Tlaxit  unb  graulein  ^nna  maren  nic^t  p  ^aufe,  alg  n»ir 
ha  iDaren. 

^  Slber,  when  not  standing  first  in  the  sentence  or  clause,  usually  means 
however.  —  2  Lesson  3.  i.  note  3 ;  here  auc^  causes  inversion,  because  it  serves 
as  a  connective ;  translate :  moreover.  — » Literally,  it  becomes  soon  winter, 
i.  e.,  it  will  soon  be  winter  or  winter  is  coming  soon. 

C.  1.  From  time  to  time  we  found  apples  in  Father's  garden. 
2.  Who  sat  in  the  carriage?  —  Charles  says  it  was  the  mother  of 
the  young  lady.  3.  When  we  went  into  the  garden,  we  found 
Charles  and  Mary;  they  were  looking  for  apples.     4.  "Where 


LESSON   5.    I:  WORDS   LIKE   htX  33 

are  the  girls  now?"  he  asked;  and  I  answered:  "They  are  work- 
ing in-the  garden."  5.  Now  the  carriages  are  coming.  6.  Who 
is  singing  in-the  garden?  —  The  young  lady's  brothers.  7.  We 
found  only  five  or  six  apples  when  we  came  home.  8.  The 
daughter  did  not  sing  so  well  as  her  (the)  mother.  9.  I  hear 
Father's  carriage,  he  said.  10.  Who  says  that  the  birds  sing 
no  more?  —  Charles  says  so  (it).  11.  He  is  asking  you  if  the 
girl  is  still  at  home.  12.  Yesterday  I  was  still  very  rich,  to-day 
I  am  as  poor  as  you  are. 

D.  13.  Why  didn't  you  take  Father's  carriage,  Charles? — • 
Because  we  found  that  it  was  not  large  enough.  14.  How  often 
do  the  brothers  come  home?  —  They  come  home  very  often,* 
but  they  never^  stay  very  long.  15.  Now  the  birds  are  singing 
in-the  garden.  Do  you  hear  them  (fie)  ?  —  Yes,  I  hear  them, 
they  are  singing  beautifully,  for  it  is  now  gietting  warm,  and 
summer  (®OTnmer)  is  coming  soon.®  16.  The  father  was  sitting 
in-the  garden  and  the  mother  was  working  in-the  house  (§aufc) 
when  I  came,  but  whether  the  daughters  were  also  at  home  I 
do  not  know.^  17.  Didn't  the  girl's  brother  say  (said  the  girl's 
brother  not)  that  he  found  six  apples?  —  Yes,  why  do  you  ask? 
—  Because  she  gave  me  (mir)  only  five.  18.  When  are  you 
going  to  ride*  to-day,  Charles?  at  five  o'clock?  —  No,  Mrs.  Smith, 
I  am  going  to  wait*  till  Mary  and  Anna  come.  19.  Didn't  you 
say  (said  you  not)  that  they  gave  the  girl  something?  —  Yes, 
but  I  did  not  say  how  much  they  gave  her  (il^r).  20.  Smith  is 
now  getting  poor,  because  he  does  not  work  any  more. 

^Lesson  2.  i.  note  10. — «  Lesson  2.  i.  note  8. — "See  note  3  above. — 
^  I  do  not  know  id)  tod^  nid^t;  mind  the  order  of  words. — « Lesson  2.  l 
note  5. 

Lesson  5 

WORDS  LIKE  bcr,      nouns:  CLASS  II 


Words  like  bcr*  The  following  words  —  used  as  adjectives 
and  as  pronouns  —  are  inflected  like  ber,  except  that  they  have 
e  where  ber  has  ie,  and  e^  where  ber  has  a6: 


34  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

blefcr  this,  this  one  mand^er  many  a  (one),  many 

jcner  that,  that  one  fold^cr  such,  such  a  one 

jebcr  every,  every  one,  each,  tcelc^er  which,  which  one,  who, 
each  one  that 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  blcfcr  bicfe  bicfc^  this  bicfe  these 

G.  biefe^  biefcr  blefc^  of  this  blcfcr  of  these 

D.  bicfem  biefcr  blefcm  to  this  blcfcti  to  these 

A.  blefcn  blefc  blefci^  this  blcfc  these 

VOCABULARY 

ber  Dnfel  blc  Onfct  uncle 

ba^  genftcr  ble  J^cttfter  window 

,.  bag  3^^i^^i^  ^ic  3i^^^i^  '^oom 

mlr,  dative  of  Id^,  to  me,  me 

[^  \a^  (like  fam)  /  saw,  looked        girel  two 
i^  jelge  (like  fage)  /  show  au^,  with  dat.,  out  of,  from 

x<i)  gelgtc  (like  fagte)  /  showed  tnlt,  with  dat.,  with 

gu,  adverb,  too 

A.  1.  !Du  fragft,  ttta^  cr  tnlr  s^lgtc?  (Sr  gelgtc  tnlr  gh)ct  3iii^ittev, 
blefc^  unb  jcnc^,  In  h)ctd^cm  Onfel  ^arl  jefet  fl^t.  —  Unb  l^at  Dnfcle 
3ltnmer  aud^  nur  gtDcl  genfter?  —  3a,  unb  c^  Ift  aud^  gu  flcln,  fagt  cr. 
2.  SD^and^c  5Sogel  flttgen  nld^t.  3.  „@oId^c  Spfel,  tt)lc  blefc,  finbct  l^r 
nld^t  In  jebcm  ©arten,"  fagte  flc.  4.  SBann  unb  rt)le  oft  fa^en  @le  ^a^ 
grauteln?  —  3d^  fa!)  bag  grauleln  jcbcn  ©onntag.^  —  Unb  htn  Onfel 
beg  grautelng,  grau  ©c^mlbt^^  ^ruber,  \ai)tn  (Sic  nle?  —  5^cln,  nlc, 
5.  (Sud^teft  bu  nld^t  cttDag  Im  ©artcn,  ^arl,  aU  n)lr  aug  bent  3ii^i^cr 
fanten?  —  3a,  Id^  fu(^te  ben  33ogel,  n)cld^cr  ba  fang.  6.  ^nna  unb 
99^arle  fanten  In  bent  ^agen  ntlt  jencn  50^abd^cn,  n)eld^c  jc^t  ha  fplelcn 
unb  flngen.  —  3Kcr  flnb  fie?  —  5^^^  (Sd^ntlbt^^  ^^od^ter,  7.  Urn  funf 
U^r,  aU  ®le  fanten,  h)ar  Id^  nld^t  l^lcr.  3d^  fcife  nod^  In  }cncm  3i^^ci^ 
unb  fa^  aug  bent  genfter.  8.  ©le  foinmt  Immcr  unb  gelgt  ntlr  allcg, 
n)ag  fie  flnbet.  9.  5ltg  Id^  noc^  Ecln  tdav,  g^tiu  ©d^ntlbt,  gaben  (Su 
ntlr  niand^cn  5lpfeL 


LESSON   5.    i:   WORDS   LIKE   bCt  35 

B.  10.  ^dd)t§  S'^mmtx  nal^m  er?  —  ^lefc^  l^icr.  —  Unb  toarutn 
nid^t  jcne^?  —  SBell  c^  nur  3tt)ei  genftcr  l^at  unb  auc^  nic^t  grog  genug 
i%  11.  3ft  ba^  griiuleln,  tnlt  tDel^cm  ©le  geftem  fangen  unb  fpielten, 
nid^t  \t^t  fd^on?  — 3a,  unb  relc^  tft  fie  aud^.  12.  didttn  @ie  nod^ 
oft,  §crr  @(^mlbt?  —  5^cln,  tc^  reitc  jc^t  nur  nod^  jebcn  (Sonntag.^ 
13.  ©old^e  33ogel  fa^  ic^  ^u^aufe  nlc.  14.  511^  fie  aug  bent  ©arten  famen, 
nal^nt  jebc^  SD^abd^en  fiinf  5ipfet,  aber  bie  ^riiber  na^nten  ieber  fed^g. 

15.  „^iefcn  SSagen/'  fagte  er,  „finbe  id)  gu  ftein  unb  {encn  gu  grog." 

16.  3elgft  bu^  ntir  ^eute  bie  3Sogel,  58ater?  —  SKeld^c  33ogel,  tarl?  — 
3fnt  ©arten.  —  3a,  aber  fie  fingen  je^t  nic^t  mef)r.  —  SBarunt  nid^t?  — 
2BeiI  e^  fd^on  gu  fait  ift.  (gg  mirb  balb  ^Sinter,'^  tarl.^17.  3n  biefcm 
©arten  fpielten  n)ir  ^ritber  oft  mit  grau  (Sd^mibt^^  ^^od^tem,  al^  n)ir 
nod^  flein  n)aren.  18.  3d&  ftage  'Bit  je^t  nid^t,  ob  jenc^  3i^^^^  fo 
grog  ift,  njie  biefc^;  id^  frage,  ob  e^  aud^  nur  gn)ei  fotd^c  genfter  f)at,  n)ie 
biefe  l^ier.  19.  „3e^t  f)aben  toir  fd^on  Spfel  genug/'  fagte  er,  „gef)t  i^r^ 
mit  ntir  nad^  §aufe?"  5lber  toir  antmorteten  alle  (all):  „^ein,  nod^ 
nid^t,  loir  fud^en^  nod^  ntel^r." 

1  The  accusative  is  often  used  adverbially,  to  denote  time.  The  names 
of  the  days  of  the  week  are  masculine .  —  ^  Proper  names  not  ending  in  an 
s-sound  have  8  in  the  genitive,  without  an  apostrophe.  —  ^  In  the  sense  of  the 
future:  are  you  going  to  etc.,  see  Lesson  2.  i.  note  5.  —  *  Lesson  4.  ii.  note  3. 

C.  1.  This  young  lady  has  two  brothers.  2.  Uncle  Charles's 
gardens  are  large  and  beautiful.  3.  Every  room  which  he  showed 
me  had  only  two  windows  and  was  too  small.  4.  Such  apples  I 
never  saw.  5.  Here  comes  the  father  of  that  girl  there.  6.  That 
bird  is  not  so  large  as  this,  but  it  is  very  beautiful.  7.  We  found 
many  an  apple  when  we  went  into  the  garden.  8.  "Is  Brother 
Charles  coming  with  Father,  or  with  Mother?"  he  asked,  and  I 
said:  "Brother  Charles  is  not  coming  to-day,  he  is  still  lying  ill 
at  home."  9.  "Yes,"  I  said,  "I  was  looking  out  of  this  window 
here,  and  Mary  was  also  in-the  room."  10.  Are  you  going  to 
show^  me  the  apples  which  you  found  in-the  garden?  —  Yes, 
Anna,  but  they  are  not  very  good.  11.  These  carriages  are  not 
large  enough,  and  those  are  too  large.  12.  Mrs.  Smith's  daughter 
is  working  here  no  longer. 

D.  13.  I  saw  the  young  lady's  uncle  yesterday,  and  he  told 
me  where  she  was  when  you  came.  14.  How  beautifully  the 
birds  in-the  garden  are  singing!     15.  Charles  rides  home  every 


36  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

Monday.®  16.  Is  he  the  brother  of  the  girl,  or  the  father?^— 
Anna  says  he  is  the  father.  17.  Which  daughter  [was  it  that] 
came  with  the  mother?  this  one  or  that?  —  This  one  here,  Charles 
says.  18.  She  gave  each  brother  two  apples.  19.  Did  you  see 
the  room  in  which  they  found  it?  —  Yes,  I  saw  it,  it  is  very  large, 
but  it  has  only  two  windows.  20.  Not  every  mother  has  such 
daughters,  I  say.  21.  I  am  asking  when  and  with  which  brother 
the  girl  came.  22.  From  time  to  time  she  gave  the  girls  apples 
from  (au^)  her  (the)  garden.  23.  He  is  not  coming,  she  says, 
for  he  is  too  ill. 

5  See  note  3  above.  —  ^  See  note  1  above,  and  Lesson  2.  i.  note  10. 

II 

Nouns.  Class  II  forms  the  nominative  plural  by  adding  c 
to  the  nonynative  singular,  and  usually  modifies  the  stem- 
vowel —  a,  Of  u,  au  of  the  singular  becoming  a,  o,  u,  an  in 
the  plural. 

Masculines  and  neuters  of  one  syllable  usually  add  e^  for  the 
genitive  singular,  and  e  or  nothing  for  the  dative;  those  of 
more  than  one  syllable  usually  add  only  g  for  the  genitive  and 
nothing  for  the  dative ;  but  after  an  s-sound  the  genitive  always 
needs  e^.    The  accusative  is  like  the  nominative. 

For  the  oblique  cases  of  the  plural,  and  for  feminines,  see  Lesson  4.  ii. 

In  Class  II  belong:  1.  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable 
ending  in  id),  ig,  ing  or  ling.  These  are  masculines  and  can  be 
recognized  as  such  at  sight,  i.e.,  by  their  mere  form.  None  of 
them  change  the  stem-vowel  for  the  plural,  but  many  have  a, 
b,  il  or  'du  in  both  singular  and  plural. 

2.  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending  in  niS  or  [al.  Most 
of  these  are  neuter,  some  feminine,  and  none  change  the  stem-vowel 
for  the  plural. 

3.  Almost  all  nouns  of  one  syllable  ending  in  f  or  ff,  g,  If,  m 
or  mm,  pf,  fd^,  ^  or  ^.  By  far  the  larger  number  of  these  are 
masculine,  only  a  few  feminine  or  neuter,  and  almost  all  those 


LESSON   5.    II:   NOUNS.     CLASS    II  37 

with  a,  0,  u  or  an  in  the  singular  change  it  to  a,  o,  ii  or  clu 
for  the  plural. 

Many  other  nouns  of  one  syllable,  and  of  all  genders,  belong  in  Class  II, 
but  are  not  recognizable  by  their  form.  Class  II  is  preeminently  the 
class  of  monosyllabic  nouns. 

Models.    With  vowel  modified  in  the  plural: 

son  foot  hand 

N.    ber   ©ol^n  bcr   gufe  bic    ^anb 

G.    be^   (Bo^nt^  be^   i^vL^t^  bcr   ^anb 

D.   bent  (So^nc  bcm  gufee  bcr   ^anb 

A.    ben  ©ol^n  ben  gufe  bic    §anb 

N.  bic  <Bo1)nt  bic  giige  bic  §(inbc 

G.  bcr  (Sofine  bcr  giifee  bcr  §anbc 

D.  ben  @6^ncn  ben  Sii^en  ben  ^anbcn 

A.  bic  ©o^nc  bie  gufee  bic  ^iinbc 

With  vowel  unchanged  in  the  plural: 

day  king  year 

N.   ber  Za^  ber   ^o'nig  bag  ^al^r 

G.   beg  2agc^  beg   ^5'mg^  beg   3a^rc^ 

D.    bent  3:age  bent  ^d'nig  bent  3af)rc 

A.    ben  2;ag  ben  ^ii'mg  bag  S^al^r 

N.  bie  Xagc  bic  ^o'nigc  bic  Qal^rc 

G.  bcr  Xagc  ber  ^o'nigc  ber  Sa^vc 

D.  hm  3:agcn  ben  ^o'nigcn  ben  ^a^ren 

A.  bic  2;age  bic  ^o'nigc  bie  3a^re 

VOCABULARY 

ber  ^aunt  bie  iBciuntc  tree 

bag  *iPfcrb  bie  ^ferbc  horse 

iiS)  tool^ne  (like  fagc)  /  dwell,  reside,  live 

id)  tDO^ntc  (like  fagtc)  /  dwelt,  resided,  lived 

w   ,  ^     .,.1     -      .  {  I  rode,  drove  (in  a  carriage) 
i^  fuf)r  (like  fant)  \  ^        ;       .,   ,\.        i_.  ^^ 
I  /  went,  sailed  (in  a  ship) 


38  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

hd,  with  dat.,  at,  at  the  house  of,  with 

nad^,  with  dat.,  to,  towards,  after 

t)on,  with  dat.,  of,  from,  about 

gu,  with  dat.,  to 

gum  =  gu  bem  to  the,  see  Vocabulary  of  Lesson  4.  ii. 

A.  1,  !Der  ^onlg  fu^r  in  bem  SSagen  mlt  ben  fec^g  *ipferbcn»  2,  ^a^ 
p)d  2:agcn  prte  id),  bafe  bu  !ran!  gu  §aufe  lagft.  3,  @r  ritt  {eben 
Xag,  gum  ^onig.  4,  ^itte,  Don  melcfiem  ^aumc  finb  biefe  Spfel  l^ier? 
—  33on  jenem,  n)eld^en  (Sle  geftem  in  grau  (Sd^mibt^  Garten  fa()en» 
SBarum  fragen  (Bit?  Bxnh  [ie  nid^t  gut?  —  D  ja,  fie  [inb  \d)x  gut,  iDir 
l^aben  aud^  fold^e.  5.  ®6f)ne  ]^aben  fie  nic^t,  aber  fie  ^ahtn  fiinf  Xbd:)ttv. 
6,  ^ie  lange  iDo^nteft  bu  bei  Onfel  (Sd^mibt?  —  ^a  tDO^nte  ic^  mand^e^ 
3a^r»  7.  ^I^  i(^  geftern  nac^  §aufe  tarn,  fu^ren  5lnna  unb  9}^arie  gu 
grau  (Sd^mibt,  ®ie  bleiben  gn3ei  Za%t  bei  i^r  (her),  8,  9^ad^  jenem 
2:age  l^orte  id^  nid^t^  mel^r  tjon  bem  <So^nc,  unb  t)on  ber  Xo(i)Ux  and) 
nic^t.  9,  SSif 'l^aben  jeber  gtoei  ^cinbe  unb  gtcei  giifec.  10,  <Sie  faf)en 
nur  be^  ^onig^  3Bagen,  aber  ben  ^onig  felbft  (himself)  \af)tn  fie  nid^t» 
11.  „^a"  fagte  fie,  „er  mo^nt  nod)  immer  bei  mir."  12.  §6rft  bu  nid^t, 
n)ie  fd^on  bie  35oget  in  ben  ^iiumcn  fingen?  (S6  n)irb  je^t  balb  ©ommer.^ 
13.  SSag  ^aft  bu  ba  in  ber  ^anb,^  SJ^arie?  — ®en  ^pfel,  n)eld^en  bu 
mir  gabft. 

B.  14.  33on  h3etd^er  ^od^ter  tarn  grau  ©d^mibt?  Bit  ^at  gtDei 
5t6d^ter.  —  ^arl  fagt,  fie  tarn  t)on  SQlarie.  15.  511^  er  au6  bem  3^^= 
mer  fam,  gab  er  mir  bie  ^anh^  unb  fragte:  „SBo  iDol^nt  grau  ©d^mibt^ 
B6t)n  it%t?"  unb  id^  antmortete:   „(Sr  n30^nt  nod^  immer  bei  mir." 

16.  3Sir  toaren  in  beg  ^onig^   ©arten  unb  fa!)en  aud^   ben  ^onig. 

17.  3it  ben  ^aumcn  fa^en  33ogel  unb  fangen.  18.  @r  ging  fel^r  oft 
gum  ^onig  felbft  (himself),  19.  ^a^  gmei  Sofyxm  mar  er  fo  reid^, 
toie  tt)ir  tDaren,  unb  I)atte  SSagen  unb  *ipferbc.  20.  Bo  lange  mie  id^  im 
SBagen  fafe,  tDaren  meine  (my)  glifec  Mt,  aber  jefet  ttjerben  fie  fd^on 
marm.  21.  '^a(^  jenem  3:age  fam  er  oft  gu  mir,  aber  er  blieb  nie 
lange,  benn  er  l^atte  immer  nur  menig  3^it.  22.  ^e^t  geigt  fie  ^arl, 
t)on  toeld^em  53aumc  bie  Spfel  finb,  meld^e  fie  mir  gab.  23.  33aterS 
33ruber,  OnM  ^art,  fu^r  jebe^  3a^r  nad^  (gngtanb  (England), 

1  Literally,  it  becomes  now  soon  summer,  i.  e.,  it  mill  soon  be  summer;  see 
Lesson  4.  ii.  note  3.  —  ^  your  hand,  and  in  15:  his  hand.  In  referring  to 
parts  of  the  body  or  to  articles  of  clothing,  German  often  uses  the  definite 
article  where  English  uses  a  possessive  adjective. 


LESSON   5.    II :   NOUNS.     CLASS   II  39 

C.  1.  From  which  tree  did  you  take  these  apples  here?  from 
this  [one]  or  from  that?  2.  Please,  where  do  Mrs.  Smith's  sons 
live  now?  —  They  are  still  living  with  Uncle  Charles.  3.  (With) 
those  horses  he  drove  many  a  day.  4.  The  son  played  after  the 
daughter,  as  (ft)te)  you  say,  but  I  found  that  he  did  not  play  so 
well  as  she.  5.  The  girl's  hands  were  very  cold  when  she  came 
out  of  the  carriage.     6.  She  is  going  to  stay^  two  years  with  me. 

7.  When  it  grew  too  warm  in  that  room,  we  went  into  this. 

8.  Yes,  she  had^  something  in  her^  hand,  but  I  did  not  see  what 
it  was.  9.  When  did  the  king  go  into  the  garden?  —  At  five 
o'clock,  when  I  was  coming  home.  10.  Here  are  two  carriages, 
each  with  two  horses.  11.  Don't  you  hear,  Mrs.  Smith?  The 
birds  in  the  trees  are  singing  already.  12.  The  girl's  mother 
gave  me  nothing,  she  was  too  poor.  13.  "Such  feet!"  he  said, 
"how  big  they  are!"  14.  He  says  that  they  are  going  to-the 
king  now. 

D.  15.  Who  took  the  apples  that  were  lying  here  when  I 
came  out  of  the  garden?  —  Mary.  —  And  where  is  she  now?  — 
In  Uncle  Charles's  room.  16.  I  ask  whether  they  are  going 
to-the  king.  17.  They  say  that  these  horses  are  not  large  enough. 
18.  Yesterday  Mr.  Smith  and  I  saw  the  king.  19.  Why  did  you 
not  come  to  me,  please?  —  Because  I  had  too  little  time.  20.  The 
sons  were  driving  with  (i.  e.,  together  with,  hence  mit,  not  bci) 
the  father  in  this  carriage,  the  daughters  with  the  mother  in  that 
[one].  21.  I  am  asking  Mary  and  Anna  whether  they  also  have 
such  apples  as  these.  22.  Each  room  has  two  windows,  but 
they  are  very  small.  23.  Who  lives  in  this  room,  the  daughter 
or  the  son?  —  The  daughter,  whom  you  saw  yesterday  at  Uncle 
Charles's;  the  son  lives  in  that  room  there.  24.  What  have  you 
in  your^  hand,  Charles?  —  I  don't  tell  what  I  have  in  mjr^  hand. 

3  Leeson  2.  i.  note  5.  —  *  Lesson  3.  i.  note  8.  — «  See  note  2  above. 


40  beginning  german 

Review  and  Drill 
Lessons   1-5 

This  exercise  is  independent  of  the  numbered  Lessons  and  may  be  omitted 
at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher. 

1.  Supply  all  the  personal  pronouns  that  can  be  used  as 
subjects  with  each  of  the  following  verb-forms,  and  tell  whether 
the  latter  are  strong,  weak  or  irregular,  present  or  past:  finb, 
fragte,  fangft,  nai)m,  l^at,  bin,  tDurbet,  l^atte,  mirb,  fanben,  fafeen, 
liegen,  batet,  fi^t,  blieb,  ritteft,  bitteft,  finbet,  gel^e,  feib,  l^abt, 
n)art,  tt)arte,  gingt 

2.  Tell  how  often  each  of  the  following  forms  of  the  definite 
article  occurs,  and  in  which  case,  number  and  gender:  bie, 
bent,  be^,  ben,^ber,  ba^. 

3.  Distinguish:  gu  §anfe  and  nad^  §anfe;  benn  and  tneil;  bafi 
and  ha^;  flein  and  tnenig;  fd^on  and  fd^on;  Dtel  and  fel^r;  nid^tiJ 
and  nid^t  and  nein;  aber  and  nur;  mann  and  aU. 

4.  Arrange  the  words  of  each  of  the  following  sentences  in  the  order 
in  which  their  German  equivalents  would  appear  if  you  were  to  trans- 
late them,  omitting  such  words  as  the  German  does  not  use  and  sub- 
stituting for  them  the  literal  English,  as,  asked  you?  for  did  you  ask? 
and  comes  for  is  coming:  (a)  He  sometimes  made  a  mistake,  (b)  Some- 
times he  made  a  mistake,  (c)  He  went  home  at  five  o'clock,  (d)  I  do 
not  know  whether  he  went  home,  (e)  They  say  that  he  went  home  at 
five,  (f)  Yes,  he  went  home  at  five  o'clock,  (g)  "Yes,"  she  said,  "he 
went  home  at  five."  (h)  That  he  went  home  at  five  o'clock  is  true,  but 
she  did  not  know  it.  (i)  That  he  went  home  at  five  is  true,  but  that 
he  is  still  at  home  I  do  not  believe,  (j)  When  were  you  at  home?  (k)  I 
ask  when  you  were  at  home.  (1)  What  did  you  say  when  you  met 
him?  (m)  I  ask  what  you  said  when  you  met  him.  (n)  I  do  not  be- 
lieve that  he  was  there,  for  he  said  nothing  about  it.  (o)  We  went  into 
the  other  room,  because  it  was  warmer  there,  (p)  I  always  thought 
they  were  rich,  but  now  I  see  that  they  are  poor,  (q)  What  was  he 
doing  when  you  found  him?    He  was  writing  a  letter. 

5.  Classify  and  inflect,  with  the  definite  article,  the  following 
nouns:   ber   Wiener   servant,  (Sperling  sparrow,  ^opf  (plur.  0) 


LESSON   6.    I:  THE   INDEFINITE   ARTICLE 


41 


head,  58og(ein  little  bird,  33a(I  (plur.  a)  hall,  Xtppi^  carpet, 
Xoii)Uv,  ba^  ^unber  (plur.  u)  wonder,  (Stabtd^en  little  town, 
^turm  (plur.  ii)  storm,  ^(ifig  cage,  ©prung  (plur.  ii)  jump,  ber 
Wantd  (plur.  a)  cloak,  ©d^ufe  (sing,  short  u,  plur.  short  ii)  shot, 
ber  ©raben  (plur.  (i)  ditch,  gliid^tling  fugitive,  ber  §afen  (plur.  ci) 
haven,  harbor,  ha^  ^lofter  (plur.  o)  cloister,  convent,  SSeg  way, 
road,  ©tamm  (plur.  ii)  stem,  trunk,  ^iinbd^en  little  hand,  5lrm 
(plur.  a)  arm,  ber  @ngel  angel,  ^d)ai^  (plur.  ft)  treasure,  sweet- 
heart, Xa^f  iCSunfd^  (plur.  ii)  vrish,  ^al^r. 

Lesson  6  •; 

THE  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE  AND  ITS  GROUP 
I 

©in.    ^citi.    The  indefinite  article  ein  a,  an  and  its  negative 
fein  no  are  inflected  as  follows: 


SINGULAR 

m. 

f. 

n. 

N.   etn 

einc 

cin 

a 

G.   einc^ 

eincr 

einc^ 

of  a 

D.   eincm 

eincr 

eincm 

to  a 

A.    einen 

eine 

cin 

a 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N. 

fcttt 

feinc 

fcin 

no 

feinc 

no 

G. 

feinc^ 

feiner 

feinc^ 

of  no 

feincr 

of  no 

D. 

feincm 

feincr 

feincm 

to  no 

feincn 

to  no 

A. 

feincn 

feinc 

fcin 

no 

feinc 

no 

Observe:  (1)  ein  has  no  plural;  as  a  numeral  adjective  it  means  one 
and  is  then  often  printed  in  spaced  letters,  as  in  sentences  8  and  24 
below;  (2)  both  words,  cin  and  fein,  have  three  forms  without  ending 
(nom.  sing,  masc,  nom.  and  ace.  sing,  neut.);  (3)  the  endings  of  the 
other  forms  of  both  words  are  the  same  as  the  corresponding  endings 
of  biefer  in  Lesson  5.  i. 


42  BEGINNING   GERMAN 


VOCABULARY 

ber  ^aifer 

bit  ^aifer  emperor 

bcr  geittb 

ble  geinbe  enemy 

ber  greunb 

bie  greunbe  friend 

ber  ^rieg 

ble  ^rlegc  K;ar 

ber  ^Beg 

ble  3Bege  lua?/,  roa(i 

ble  ©tabt 

ble  stable  town,  city 

5lme'rifa  (1 

ong  e)  America 

[^  fiet  /  fell 

i<^  Ilef  /  ran 

tc^  fii^re  /  lead,  escort 

fiir,  with  ace, /or 

[^  fil^rte  /  led,  escorted 

gegen,  with  ace,  against 

A.  1.  dx  fagte  mlr  nld^t,  tDeld^er  SSeg  nad^  ber  (Stabt  fiil^rt,  ob  eg 
blefer  Ift  ober  jener,  2,  (Sin  ©o^n  be^  ^alfer^  flel  au(^  In  bent  ^rlege 
gegen  ble  gelnbc,  3.  SSlr  glngen  In  ben  (Garten  unb  fud^ten  ^Ipfel  fiir 
ble  SO^cibd^en.  4.  ^crr  ©c^mlbt  l^at  feme  @o()ne,  er  l^at  nur  cine 
2:od^ter,  griiuleln  Tlaxit,  5.  ^in  '^ferb  l^aft  bu  je^t  fd^on,  aber  bu 
i)a\t  noc^  Immer  felnen  SBagen;  njarunt  bltteft  bu  Onfel  ^arl  nld^t? 
6.  gran  ©d^mlbt  fut)rte  ben  Dnfel  In  bag  3^^^^^.  i^  n)eld^em  ble 
2:i3d^ter  n)arteten.  7.  3Ble  fam  eg,  bafe  bu  fietft,  tart?  — 3d^  tlef 
gegen  elnen  ^aum.  8.  „Unb  l^aben  @le  nld^t  elnen  greunb  in  blefer 
@tabt?"  fragte  Ic^,  „9^eln,"  antnjortete  er,  „greunbe  t)abe  Id^  l^ler  nld^t/' 
9.  9^ld^t  ieber  tonlg  ober  talfer  Ift  relc^.  10.  5llg  n)lr  aug  bem  ©arten 
famen,  bat  l^  5(nna,  bafe  fie  mlr  ben  ©eg  nad^  ber  ©tabt  gelgte, 
11.  ^citt  33ogel  flngt  fo  fc^on,  tDle  blefer  l^ler.  12.  3a,  er  !am  mlt 
elnem  greunbe  aug  ber  ®tabt,  n)le  ^le  fagten,  aber  Id^  fal^  nld^t, 
mlt  ti3eld^em.  13.  Qn  felnem  ©arten  flnben  @le  folc^e  ^aume,  toit 
In  blefem. 

B.  14.  „§abt  l^r  aud^  elnen  tonlg  ober  elnen  f  alfer  In  5Ime'rlfa?" 
fragte  bag  5QMbd^en.  „^eln,"  antn)ortete  Id^,  „ln  5lme'rlfa  r)aben  n)lr 
felnen  tonlg  unb  aud^  felnen  talfer.  15.  „(Stn  3i^^er,  icelc^eg  fein 
genfter  ^at,  Ift  fein  3lmmer,"  fagte  fie.  16.  "ipferbe  unb  Sogel  ^aben 
feme  §anbe.  17.  2Ber  Ift  fo  arm,  bag  er  feme  greunbe,  ober  fo 
gut,  ha^  er  feme  gelnbe  l^at?  18.  telnet  Xod^ter  gab  er  fo  t)lel, 
toit  blefer.  19.  3cneg  grauleln  Ift  elne  2:od^ter  ber  grau  ©c^mlbt, 
n^etc^e  er  mlr  geftern  ^elgte,  alg  n)lr  bel  Cnfel  tarl  maren.  20.  3n 
ienem  trlege  flelen  au^  jtoei  oon  Onfel  tarlg  ^rubern,    21.  ifiSle  ble 


LESSON   6.    i:  THE    INDEFINITE   ARTICLE  43 

'iPferbe  lief  en!  22.  ^eute  fu^re  Id^  <Sie  in  be6  ^aiferg  ©ftrten,  §err 
<Sc^mibt.  23.  Stbtn  (Sonntag  fu^r  er  mit  mir  nac^  ber  ©tabt  gu 
einem  greunbe,  n3eld)er  ba  too^ntt,  24.  5^id^t  einen  ^pfel  gab  er 
bent  9L)tabc^enl 

C.  1.  When  I  came  out  of  the  garden,  I  saw  no  carriage  and 
no  horses.  2.  The  emperor,  he  says,  is  not  so  rich  as  the  king. 
3.  I  had  a  friend  in  this  city,  who  fell  in-the  war.  4.  He  escorted 
Mrs.  Smith  into  the  room  where  we  were  singing  and  playing. 

5.  No  city  is  situated  (lies)  so  beautifully  as  this  [one],  he  said. 

6.  She  gave  me  only  one  apple  for  the  girl.  7.  He  fell  because 
he  ran  against  a  window.  8.  Does  this  road  lead  to  (nad^)  the 
city?  —  No,  neither  does  that  one  (and  that  also  not).  9.  They 
were  so  good  that  they  had  no  enemies.  10.  We  found  a 
tree,  but  no  apples.  11.  This  carriage  is  too  big,  why  didn't 
you  take  two  horses?  12.  How  comes  it  that  they  are  so  poor? 
—  Because  the  enemies  took  alP  they  had.  13.  Yes,  I  said  Mrs. 
Smith  showed  (led)  a  young  lady  into  the  room,  but  I  did  not  say 
that  it  was  Mrs.  Smith's  daughter. 

D.  14.  When  we  came  out  of  the  room,  we  saw  the  emperor 
in  a  carriage  drawn  by  six  horses  (in  a  carriage  with  six  horses). 

15.  Every  Monday  he  worked  for  a  friend  who  lived  in  the  city. 

16.  When  she  showed  me  the  rooms,  I  found  that  each  had  only 
one  window  which  was  not  so  large  as  this  [one]  here.  17.  How 
long  did  she  stay  with  (bei)  her  (the)  uncle  in  America?  —  I 
heard  that  she  stayed  six  years,  but  Charles  says  she  stayed  only 
five  years.  18.  The  girls  fell  because  they  ran  too  fast  (fc^nell), 
19.  How  long  did  she  work  for  Mrs.  Smith?  —  Only  one  day,  I 
understand.  20.  I  am  still  rich  enough,  for  I  still  have  friends 
enough.  21.  No,  he  was  not  riding  when  I  saw  him  (il^n),  he 
was  leading  the  horse.  22.  The  enemies  took  many  a  town  in 
that  war.  23.  There  we  heard  but  little  about  (t)on)  the  war 
which  the  king  was  waging  (leading)  against  the  emperor. 

*  Lesson  3.  n.  note  3. 


44 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


II 

Possessive  Adjectives.  The  possessive  adjectives  below, 
when  used  attributively,  that  is,  before  a  noun,  are  inflected 
like  fein: 


Possessive 

(Correspor 

iding 

Possessive 

(Corresponding 

adjectives 

pers. 

pronouns) 

adjectives 

pers.  pronounti) 

mcltt  my 

(Ic^) 

unfcr 

'  our 

(mir) 

bein  thy, 

your 

(bu) 

cucr 

youi 

(iW 

fein  his 

(er) 

i^r  their 

(fie) 

\))X  her 

(fie) 

3^r 

youi 

mt) 

fein  its 

{e«) 

Inflection  of  meiti 

I,  unfcr  and  cucr  with  nouns: 

my 

son 

our  daughter 

your  horse 

N.   mcitt 

<So]^n 

unf(c)re 

Xoc^tcr 

cucr          ^fcrb 

G.   melne^ 

®o^nc^ 

unf(e)rcr 

ZQ^itx 

eu(c)rc^     'ijfcrbcg. 

D.    meincm 

©ol^ne 

unf(c)rcr 

2;od^tcr 

cu(e)rcm    'ipfcrbc 

A.    mcincn 

®o]()n 

unf(e)rc 

Zo6)itx 

cucr          "ipfcrb 

N.   niclnc 

<So^ne 

unf(c)re 

^od^tcr 

cu(c)rc      ^fcrbc 

G.  meiner 

(So^nc 

unf(e)rcr 

2:o(^tcr 

cu(e)rcr     "iPferbe 

D.   mcincn 

©o^ncti 

[ 

unf(c)rcn 

Xod^tcm 

cu(c)rcn     ^fcrbcn 

A.    nteinc 

eo^nc 

unf(c)re 

Joc^tcr 

cu(c)rc      "ipfcrbc 

Observe:  (1)  The  (c)  in  the  inflected  forms  of  unfer  and  cuer  is  often 
dropped;  cases,  however,  which  regularly  end  in  cm  or  en  sometimes 
drop  the  c  of  these  endings  instead,  so  that  here  any  one  of  three  forms 
may  occur,  as  bei  unfercm  or  unfrcm  or  unferm  greunbe  at  the  house  of  our 
friend.  —  (2)  There  are  eight  words  which,  if  used  adjectively  before 
a  noun,  have  no  ending  in  three  of  their  cases.  The  eight  words  are: 
cin,  as  article  meaning  a  or  an,  as  numeral  adjective,  one;  fein  (the 
negative  of  ein)  meaning  no;  and  the  six  possessives  mein,  bein,  fein, 
unfcr,  cuer,  if)r,  given  above  with  ten  different  English  equivalents, 
according  to  the  person  or  number  to  which  they  refer.  The  three 
cases  without  ending  are  the  nominative  singular  masculine,  the  nomi- 
native singular  neuter,  and  the  accusative  singular  neuter. 

Inflect  in  like  manner  the  German  for  his  friend,  her  enemy,  our  town, 
thy  father  ^  their  way,  its  window,  your  (cucr)  uncle,  your  (3^rc)  hand. 


LESSON   6.    II :   POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVES  45 

VOCABULARY 

ha^  SBaffer        hit  SBaffcr  water 
ber  5(benb  bie  ^Ibenbc  evening 

bie  9la(^t  bie  ^a^tt  night 

id)  \tti)t  I  stand  bunfel  dark 

id^  ftanb  /  stood  griin  ^reen 

td^  glaube  /  believe,  think  oijxit,  with  ace,  without 

i(^  glaubte  /  believed,  thought     c^    gibt,    followed    by   the    ace, 
in^  =  in  ha^  into  the  there   is,    there   are;   similarly, 

e^  gab  there  was,  there  were 

A.  1.  SSol^nt  ^rau  ©(^ntibt  nod^  flier?  —  ^dn,  je^t  nid^t  mt^x, 
fie  mol^nt^  fd^on  gmei  3a]^re  bei  i^rcr  2:od^ter.  2.  ^arum  fommft  bu 
l^eute  gu  gufe,  ^arl?  tDO  ^aft  bu  beinc  ^ferbe?  —  3^  fomtne  gu  gufe, 
tceil  meinc  ^ferbe  fran!  finb,  3.  3^  gtaube,  bafe  ba^  Staffer  }e^t  fd^on 
tcarm  genug  ift.  4.  ^^  gibt  biefc6  3a^r  feine  SpfeL  5.  ©ucr  greunb 
ift  fe^r  reid^,  aber  er  gab  nid^t  fo  t)iel  trie  fie,  unb  fie  ift  arm,  6,  SBo 
ftanb  ber  53aum,  toetc^er  feinc  Spfel  f)atte?  —  §ier  ftanb  er,  gtaube  id^. 
7.  grau  ©d^mibt^  ^ruber  ift  mcin  33ater.  8.  '^tx  5lbenb  mar  fo  bunfcl, 
fagte  er,  ha^  er  gegen  eincn  ^aum  lief  unb  fieL  9.  ^eute  abenb^  um 
filnf  U^r  fommen  beinc  33ruber  mit  if)rcm  greunbe  au^  ber  ©tabt  ju 
mir.  10.  ^ie  ^benbe  unb  ^Icic^te  finb  nod^  immer  fe^r  fait,  aber  bie 
53aume  in  unfercm  ©arten  tDerben  fd^on  grlin,  unb  batb  fommen  aud^  bie 
3Soge(  imb  fingen.  11.  3n  jenem  3af)re  gab  eS  md)X  Spfet,  aW  e^  in 
biefem  gibt.  12.  ©tanben  (Sie  ober  fafeen  ©ie,  at^  er  in^  3i^^ci^  fom? 
—  3d^  \tanh,  aber  ^tfx  53ruber  fa^.  13.  „^tn  3^^^^i^  t)f)ne  genfter," 
fagte  fie,  „ift  fein  ^i^niii^i^^"  14.  ©laubten  ®ie  nid^t,  trag  er  fagte?  — 
9^ein,  ic^  glaubte  e^  nic^t,  bi§  (Sie  famen  unb  e§  mir  auc^  fagten. 
15.  (Sure  ^ferbe  ftel)en  fc^on  l)ier;  e^  ift  3eit,  bafe  il^r  nad^  §aufe  reitet, 
benn  e^  mirb  f(^on  ^benb  (e^  toirb  fd^on  bunfel)  unb  ber  iliSeg  nad^  ber 
(Stabt  ift  lang  (long), 

B.  16.  Dnfel  f  arl  ift  ber  33ruber  meine^  3Sater^  unb  beincr  9J?utter. 
17.  3Bie  bunfel  toar  jener  ^benb,  al^  mir  nad^  ber  ®tabt  ful^ren !  18.  3d^ 
trarte^  l)ier  fd^on  lange,  aber  fie  fommen  nid^t.  19.  5IBann  fommt  il)r 
mit  eurcm  greunbe  au6  ber  ©tabt?  —  SKir  fommen  balb,  aber  id^ 
glaube  nid^t,  ba^  unfcr  greunb  fo  lange  bleibt,  mie  mir,  benn  er  fagte 
mir  geftem  abenb,^  ha^  feinc  Wiutttx  franf  ju  §aufe  liegt.  20.  ^a 
ftel)t  xi}x  SBagen  noc^,  aber  o^ne  'ipferbe.    21.  (2old^e  33aume  gibt  c« 


46  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

]f)lcr  nlc^t,  loie  in  Salifomien  {California).  22,  3Slc  mand^c  9^ad^t 
tt)artete  vi)  big  ixotx  W)x,  aber  er  fam  nic^t.  23.  @ie  gtaubte  immer 
alit^,  tua^  il^rc  ^od^ter  fagte.  24.  511^  id^  au^  meinem  gcnfter  fal^, 
ftanbcn  fd^on  gmel  t)on  fclncn  *ipferben  im  SBaffer.  25.  3ft  3^rc^ 
^rubcr^  (So]f)n  aud^  fo  grofe,  tnie  fcin  33ater?  —  5^od^  nld^t,  aber  cr 
tuirb  nod^  grower  {taller),  glaube  id^,  al^^  fein  5Sater  Ift.  26.  $Bic  griin 
bic  ^aume  in  curcm  ©arten  fc^on  finbl 

1  Literally,  Zives  already  two  years,  i.  e.,  ha^  been  living  these  two  years. 
This  use  of  the  German  present,  where  English  employs  the  perfect,  is  very 
common.  Similarly  in  18:  I  have  been  waiting  here  a  long  time  {already).  — 
2  Literally,  to-day  evening,  i.  e.,  this  evening;  abenb,  when  used  adverbially, 
is  written  with  a  small  letter.  Similarly  in  sentence  19.  —  ^  aU,  after  a 
comparative,  means  than. 

C.  1.  I  think  the  tree  from  which  these  apples  came  stands 
here.  2.  Are  your  horses  still  sick,  Charles?  —  No,  why  do  you 
ask?  —  Because  you  come  on  foot  to-day  (to-day  on  foot). 
—  Uncle  Smith  took  my  horses  yesterday  evening,  and  he  is 
still  in  (the)  town.  3.  Now  the  water  is  cold  enough,  I  think. 
4.  They  stayed  two  days  and  two  nights  with  (bei)  me.  5.  When 
it  was  getting  dark,  he  came  with  his  brother  and  his  brother's 
daughter.  6.  Where  is  your  father,  my  girl?  —  In  our  garden, 
he  is  looking  for  apples.  7.  I  saw  the  mother,  but  without  her 
daughters.  8.  How  warm  this  night  is,  and  how  dark !  9.  Your 
sons  will  soon  be  (become  soon)  as  tall  as  you,  Mr.  Smith,  they 
are  already  taller  than  their  mother.  10.  Where  were  their 
friends?  —  They  had  not  one  friend  in  that  town.  11.  I  did  not 
beUeve  what  he  told  my  daughter,  nor  did  she.  12.  There  is 
now  no  king  and  no  emperor  in  America,  but  there  was  once 
(cinft)  an  emperor  in  Brazil  (53rafiUen).  13.  "There  are  birds 
which  are  green,"  the  girl  said,  "why  are  there  not  also  horses 
which  are  green?" 

D.  14.  Are  your  brothers  coming  this  evening?  —  Yes,  but 
without  our  mother.  15.  Now  everything  is  growing  green. 
16.  Weren't  you  riding  in  our  carriage,  Anna?  —  No,  I  was  riding 
in  your  brother's  carriage,  Mr.  Smith.  17.  How  long  did  he 
stay  with  (bei)  his  son?  —  Only  one  night.  18.  Where  I  stood 
it  was  so  dark  that  I  did  not  see  anything,  only  the  water. 
19.  Yes,  there  are  such  birds,  my  friend,  but  not  here  where  we 


LESSON   7.    i:   NOUNS.      CLASS   III  47 

live.  20.  I  did  not  believe  that  you  were  there,  Mrs.  Smith, 
until  I  saw  you.  21.  Did  you  stand,  or  did  you  sit,  when  you 
were  singing  this  evening?  —  We  stood.  22.  It  was  so  dark  in 
my  room  that  I  ran  against  a  window  and  fell.  23.  Every 
evening  we  go  to  our  father. 


Lesson  7 

nouns:  class  hi.    prepositions  with  the  dative  or  the 

accusative 


Review.  Below  is  shown  where  the  inflections  of  bcr  and  of  fein 
(ein,  mein  etc.)  differ  from  that  of  biefcr  (jencr  etc.).  These  forms 
should  be  thoroughly  mastered,  because  without  them  the  inflection 
of  adjectives  cannot  be  understood. 

Sing.  Masc.  Sing.  Fem.  Sing.  Neut. 

N.     ber      biefcr       fcitt  btc     bicfc      fcinc  ha2      bie[e3      fein 

G.     hti   ■  biefcr      feineg  bcr     biefcr     fcincr  bc8      bicfc8       fcinc« 

D.     bcm     bicfcm     fcincm  bcr     biefcr     fcincr  bcm     bicfem     feincm 

A.     ben      bicfen      fcincn  bie     bicfe      feine  ha2      bicfcd      fein 

Plur.  Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 
N.     bie      biefc       fcinc 
G.     bcr      biefcr     fcincr 
D.     ben     bicfen     fcincn 
A.     bie      bicfe       fcinc 

Nouns.  Class  III  forms  the  nominative  plural  by  adding 
cr  to  the  nominative  singular  and  always  modifies  the  stem- 
vowel  —  a,  0,  u,  au  of  the  singular  becoming  ct,  0,  il,  an  in  the 
plural. 

Class  III  contains  no  feminines.  Masculines  and  neuters  form 
the  oblique  cases  of  the  singular  as  in  Class  II  (Lesson  5.  11). 

For  the  oblique  cases  of  the  plural  see  Lesson  4.  ii. 

In  Class  III  belong:  1.  About  fifty  monosyllabic  neuters. 
2.  About  a  dozen  monosyllabic  masculines. 


48 


BEGINNING  GERMAN 


Models 


house 

man,  husband 

N. 

bag  §aug 

ber    9}?ann 

G. 

beg    ^aufc^ 

beg   9[)2annc)^ 

D. 

bem  §aufc 

bem  2}^annc 

A. 

ha^  §aug 

ben  SD'^ann 

N. 

bie    .gaufcr 

bie    mdnntx 

G. 

ber   ^dufcr 

ber   9}^anncr 

D. 

ben  ^iiufem 

ben  SD^anncm 

A. 

blc    §aufcr 

blc    gj^anncr 

VOCABULARY 

bcr  $unb 

bie  §unbe  dog 

bcr  etu^t 

bie  ©tiil^Ie  chair 

•_ 

ber  Xi\(i) 

bie  ^Ifd^e  to6Ze 

ha^  ^u6) 

bie  iBlid^er  600A; 

bag  !5)orf 

bie  ^drfcr  village 

bag  gelb 

bie  gelbcr  ^leZrf 

bag  ^Inb 

bie  ^Inbcr  child 

ber  SSalb 

bie  SBalbcr  /ores^,  lyooc^s 

i(i)  fprad^  /  spoke,  talked 

t)lcr  /oz^r 

Xotnn  whenever,  if 

burd^,  with  ace,  through 

brei  three 

urn,  with  ace,  around,  about 

A.  1.  3ti  l^rent  3^^^^^^  f^tinb  eln  ^Ifd^  mlt  53uc]^crn,  unb  um  ben 
Xi\ii)  ftanben  brel  ^tu^k,  \)a  fafeen  bie  ^Inber  unb  arbelteten.  2.  iSSenn^ 
bie  ^alber  unb  gelbcr  griin  tDerben,  fo^  fommen  au(^  balb  bie  33ogel 
unb  flngen»  3.  ^Ir  l^aben  ^itiel  giifee  unb  aud^  gmel  §anbe,  bie  33ogeI 
aber  l^aben  nur  gtuel  giifee  unb  feme  ,^anbe,  unb  bie  *ipferbe  unb  §unbc 
l^aben  bier  giifee  unb  aud^  feme  <g)anbe.  4.  ^a,  ha^  er  mlt  belnem 
^ruber  fpra^,  l^orte  Ic^;  aber  Id^  l^orte  nld^t,  n)ag  er  fagte.  5.  SSenn* 
blefe  Tlanncx  Q^xt  ^reunbe  flnb,  fo-  flnb  fie  aud^  melne  greunbe,  benn 
Id^  bin  3^r  greunb.  6.  ©eftem  abenb,  alg^  eg  fd^on  bunfet  njurbe, 
rltten  brel  SJJanncr  burd^  unfer  ^orf,  3^  glaube,  fie  rltten  nad^  ber 
^ta\)t  7.  3d^  fal^,  ha^  ber  §unb  um  bag  ^aug  lief  unb  In  ben  ©arten, 
tDo  bag  ^Inb  fplelte.  8.  ©eftern  ful^ren  mlr  mlt  unferm  Onfel  burc^ 
ben  SSalb,  ttjle  fd)on  eg  ba  mar!    9.  ^(g^  bie  tlnber  grau  <Sc5mlbt  um' 


LESSON   7.   i:   NOUNS.      CLASS   III  49 

Spfel  hattn,  ^ah  [ie  jebem  ^Inbc  brei»  10.  @ie  fprad^en  itntncr  t)iet 
me^r  t)on  ^ferbcn  unb  §unben,  aU  tjon  iBiid^crn.  IL  ^(^  fragc,  ob^ 
bte  ^inbcr  fd^oit  su  §aufc  finb.— 3a,  bie  ^inber  finb  jclgt  gu  §aufc, 
aber  n^ann^  [ie  nad^  §aufc  famen,  prte  idp  nid^t. 

B.  12.  21B^  biefe  ©tabt  nod^  ein  !^orf  tear,  ftanb  unfer  $au§  l^icr, 
mo  tDir  jc^t  fte^en,  imb  um  ba^  §au^  lag  ein  ©arten,  fo  grog  unb  fd^on, 
h)ie  jener,  in  melc^em  mir  geftem  mit  unfem  ^inbcrn  maren.  13.  ^a^ 
fragt  er? — (Sr  fragt,  ob^  h)ir  feinen  §unb  mel^r  l^aben.  14.  3Senn^  bu 
burc^  ha^  SSaffer  ba  reiteft,  fo^  fommft  bu  in  einen  SSoIb,  unb  au«  bent 
ilSalbe  in  bag  ^orf,  t)on  melc^em  jener  SO^ann  fprad^.  15.  (Bit  bittet 
^arl  um^  ^ipferb  unb  3Bagen,  aber  feine  ^ferbe  finb  nod^  im  gelbc.  16. 3^ 
glaube,  in  biefent  3)orfc  gibt  eg  mdjv  §unbe  alg  ^inbcr.  17.  §icr 
fte^t  ein  ^ifd^  mit  gn)ei  (Stil^len,  unb  ba  liegen  eure  ^iid^cr,  ^inbcr. 
3e^t  arbeitet  i^r  big  brei  U^r.  §ort  i^r,  trag  id^  fage?  ilSenn^  i^r 
nid^t  [till  (still,  quiet)  feib  unb  nic^t  genug  arbeitet,  fo-  fommt  (get)  i^x 
l^eute  nic^t  aug  bem  §aufc.  18.  Ob^  er  lange  bei  feinen  ^inbcm  bleibt, 
fagte  fie  mir  nid^t,  unb  aud^  nid^t,  toann^  fie  mit  i^m  (him)  fprad^, 
aber  totnn^  er  nod^  ba  ift,  fo^  fommt  er  l)eutc  abenb  aud^  gu  mir, 
glaube  ic^. 

1  SBcnn  means  when  in  the  sense  of  whenever,  and  if  in  the  sense  of  pro- 
vided that  or  on  condition  that;  it  is  used  with  verbs  in  the  present,  past  or 
future.  5ll8  means  when  in  the  sense  of  as  or  at  the  (particular)  time  when; 
it  is  used  only  with  verbs  in  the  past  tenses.  SBcmn  means  when?  at  what 
time?  and  is  used  in  questions,  direct  or  indirect.  Ob  means  if  in  the  sense 
of  whether  and  is  used  in  indirect  questions.  See  Lesson  2.  ii.  note  2.  — 
2fo  is  often  used  to  introduce  a  principal  clause  and  to  sum  up  a  preceding 
subordinate  clause,  especially  after  a  clause  with  hjentl,  rarely  after  one 
with  al8;  it  may  sometimes  be  rendered  by  then,  but  is  usually  left  untrans- 
lated. —  3  bitten  um  with  an  accusative  of  the  thing  means  ask  or  heg  for. 

C.  1.  Each  son  had  a  dog  and  a  horse.  2.  We  also  have 
such  chairs  and  tables,  and  more  than  you.  3.  When  the  eve- 
nings are  getting  cold,  we  stay  in-the  house.  4.  When  we  came 
out  of  the  forest,  we  saw  the  village  of  which  you  spoke  yester- 
day. 5.  If  he  comes  to-day,  (fo)  he  comes  without  his  children. 
6.  I  am  asking  Mrs.  Smith  whether  she  has  the  books,  or  her 
daughter.  7.  I  saw  that  the  dog  ran  around  the  house,  but 
that  he  ran  into-the  field  I  do  not  believe.  8.  She  is  asking 
Mrs.  Smith  for  the  book,  don't  you  hear,  Charles?  9.  The  king 
has  four  children,  three  sons  and  one  daughter.     10.  Whenever 


50  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

they  came,  (fo)  they  talked  about  their  horses  and  dogs.     11.  As 
the  child  ran  around  the  table,  it  fell. 

D.  12.  When  the  fields  and  woods  were  getting  green,  the 
children  went  into  the  villages  which  lay  about  the  town.  13.  If 
you  go  with  me  into  my  room,  I  [will]  show  you  the  book  which 
my  mother  gave  me  yesterday.  14.  I  am  asking  you,  Mrs. 
Smith,  if  it  is  as  dark  as  it  was  yesterday.  15.  Your  father,  my 
child,  took  a  chair  and  went  into  the  garden,  and  I  think  he  is 
sitting  there  still.  16.  When  the  children  asked  the  man  for 
apples,  he  said:  "There  are  no  apples  this  year,  my  children." 
17.  How  big  this  dog  is!  but  his  feet  are  very  small.  18.  I  have 
more  books  than  you,  I  think.  19.  Whenever  he  comes  into 
our  village,  (fo)  he  stays  one  day  and  one  night  with  my  father. 
20.  It  was  night  as  we  rode  through  the  forest,  but  we  found  a 
man  who  showed  us  the  way  to  (nad^)  the  city.  21.  I  saw  that 
the  men  were  speaking  with  your  brother,  but  I  did  not  hear 
what  they  said,  because  the  dogs  were  barking  (belltcn)  so  loud 
aaut). 

II 

Of  prepositions  governing  the  dative  exclusively,  the  following  have 
occurred  thus  far: 

au8  out  of,  from  na(S)  to,  towards,  after 

bei  at,  at  the  house  of,  with  bon  of,  from,  about 

mit  with,  together  with  gu  to 

Of  prepositions  governing  the  accusative  exclusively,  the  following 
have  occurred  thus  far: 

big*  till,  until  gcgen  against,  towards 

burd^  through  ol^nc  without 

fttr/or  um  around,  about,  at 

Prepositions  with  the  Dative  or  Accusative.  The  following 
nine  prepositions  govern  the  dative  in  answer  to  the  questions 
where?  and  when?,  i.  e.,  with  verbs  denoting  either  rest  or  else 
motion  within  certain  limits,  e.  g.,  motion  in  a  circle  or  motion 
to  and  fro.    They  govern  the  accusative  in  answer  to  the  ques- 

*  Also  conjunction  with  transposed  order- 


LESSON   7.    II:   PREPOSITIONS 


51 


tions  whither?  and  how  long?,  i.  e.,  with  verbs  denoting  motion 
towards  an  object  or  any  limit: 


an  at,  on,  to,  up  to 

auf  up,  upon,  on,  on  top  of 

l^lnter  behind,  beyond 


in  in,  into 


ncben  beside,  besides,  close  by 
iiber  over,  above,  across 
untcr  under,  beneath,  among 
\)0V  before,  in  front  of 


gtDlfd^en  between 


Common  contractions  of  the  definite  article  with  prepositions: 


am  =an  bcm 
an«  =an  bad 
auf6=auf  bag 
im  =in  bcm 
ins  =in  ha^ 


bcim  =bci  bcm 
toom    =t)on  bcm 
jum    =3U  bcm 
gur     =3U  bcr 
burd^0=burd^  ba« 


VOCABULARY 


i^  lege  /  lay 
i^  Icgte  /  laid 


i(i)  feijc  /  set,  place,  put 
i^  fc^te  /  set,  placed,  put 


(Sid^,  the  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  singular  and 
plural,  is  used  for  all  genders,  and  means  therefore  himself, 
herself,  itself,  themselves  and,  with  <©te,  also  yourself  or  your- 
selves,  e.  g.,  er  fe^t  \\6)  he  seats  himself,  fie  fe^t  fid^  she  seats 
herself,  (Sie  fe^en  fid^  you  seat  yourself  or  yourselves. 


A.  1.  3e^t  fi^t  5D^aric  an  jc- 
ncm  Xi\(i)t  unb  arbeitet. 

2.  m^  [^  tarn,  lagen  bic  ^iid^er 
auf  clncm  ^tu^k. 

3.  ^er  53aum,  Don  tDetd^em 
n)ir  fprac^en,  \tan'i)  Winter  unfercm 
§aufe, 

4.  ^u  tDarft  in  blefcm  3iwi^^^« 

5.  -Sd^  fag  neben  metncm 
Jreunbc. 

6.  SSo  ift  3^r  3immer?  liber 
bicfcm. 


P-  <Sie  fc^te  fid^  an  jencn  2:ifd^ 
unb  arbeitete. 

2^-  SSlr  naf)nten  bie  iBiic^er  toon 
ben  (Stil^Ien  unb  legtcn  fie  auf  bcti 
Xi\(i)  ba. 

3^-  m^  bie  tlnber  ben  5mann 
fallen,  Uefen  fie  Winter  ba^  §au6. 

4*-  ^u  gingft  in  jene^  3^^^^^* 
5^-  (Sr    fe^t   fid^    neben    feincn 

53ruber. 
6*-  !Der    §unb   lief    burd^   ha^ 

Staffer  unb  iiber  ba;^  gelb. 


52  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

7.  3^  'i)'6xtt  cth3a«  untcr  mcl*  7^-  !Dae  ^ud^  fiel  unter  ben 
ncm  genfter.  ^ifd^. 

8.  @r  tDar  fd^on  bor  bcm  ^ricgc  8^-  ^er  SSagcn  fuf)r  t)or  bo^ 
fraitf,  §aug. 

9.  @r  rttt  ati3if(|cn  bem  ^aifer  9^-  (gr  ritt  gmifc^en  ben  ^aifcr 
unb  bem  ^onig.^  unb  ben  ^iimg.^ 

10.  !Der  5IpfeI  fid  tiom  ^aume  in^  SBaffer  unb  Uegt  nod^  tm  SBaffcr. 
11.  Hm  ^Ibcnb^  fu{)r  id^  mit  Onfel  ^arl  unb  melttem  ^ruber  nad^  ber 
@tabt  (or  3ur  @tabt).^  12.  ^u  fagteft,  [ie  fe^te  ben  (Stu^I  an^  genfter, 
abcr  al^  id^  in^  3^^^^i^  ^^^f  \^^^'^  ^^  ^^'^  ^^  3:tfc^e.  13.  3)er  SO^ann 
nal^m  ba^  ^inb,  fc^te  e^  t)or  W  ^^f^  '^f^i^'^  unb  ritt  mit  il^m  burc^^ 
SSaffer. 

B.  14.  5lm  guge  be^  iBaume^  ftanben  gtoei  ©tiil^Ic,  auf  toclc^en 
53ud^cr  lagen,  aber  bie  ^inber  n)aren  nid^t  mel^r  ba,  fie  fpielten  mit  bem 
$unbe  am  2i3offer  (say,  at  or  near  the  pond).  15.  SBenn  ber  ^dnig 
am  Slbenb^  burd^S  ^orf  ritt,  fprad^  er  oft  mit  ben  ^inbem.  16.  „3Sie 
fd^fin  e^  im  i^dht  unb  im  ^alht  i\t\"  fagte  er  gu  mir,  „aber  bu  fi^t  (  = 
fi^eft)  immer  gu  §aufe  l^inter  beinen  ^ild^ern."  17.  @r  fe^te  fic^  in  htn 
3Bagen  unb  fu^r  liber  ben  SSeg,  n)eld^er  nad^  ber  @tabt  (or  gur  @tabt)^ 
fii^rt,  in^  gelb  unb  Don  ha  in  ben  SSalb.  18.  91eben  bem  SD^anne,  tueld^er 
auf  bem  "ipferbe  ritt,  ging  ein  SOHbd^en  gu  gufe.  19.  (gie  legten  fic^^ 
unter  einen  iBaum,  unb  ba  lagen  fie,  bi^  e^  ^htnh  murbe.  20.  3rt>ifc^cn 
ber  etabt  9^uboIftabt«  unb  bem  ^orfe  5SoIfftebt«  fte^t  am  3Sege  ein 
§au^,  in  n)el(^em  (^d^itler  im  3a]^re  1788  n)o]^nte,  unb  in  einem  ^itnmer 
biefe^  §aufe^  geigte  er  mir  ben  2^ifd^,  an  n)el(^em  ©chiller  arbeitete,  unb 
ben  <Stu]^l,  auf  toeld^em  er  fafe.  21.  ®ie  legte  bag  ^ud^  Dor  fid^''  auf 
ben  jtifd^. 

*  Account  for  the  difference  in  meaning  between  9  and  9^.  —  ^  This  is 
the  regular  equivalent  for  in  the  evening,  thus  also  am  SJJorgcn  in  the  morning 
and  cm  XaQt  by  day.  —  ^  Nearly  synonymous  or  equivalent  phrases,  but  the 
latter  is  more  apt  to  mean  to  town  (on  an  errand  or  on  business).  — *  before 
him,  and,  in  21,  before  her;  after  prepositions,  [id^  often  corresponds  to  the 
personal  pronoun  in  English.  —  ^  Literally,  laid  themselves  under  .  .  .,  i.  e., 
lay  down  under  ...  —  ^  German  uses  no  preposition  to  correspond  to  of 
in  such  phrases  as  the  city  of  Philadelphia  bie  Stabt  "pl^tlabelpfiia. 

C.  1.  The  chair  stood  between  the  table  and  this  window. 
2.  If  you  laid  the  books  upon  the  table,  (fo)  they  are  lying  there 
still,  he  said.     3.  Who  was  sitting  beside  the  emperor?  —  His 


ii 


LESSON   7.   II :   PREPOSITIONS  53 

son  and  his  daughter.  4.  When  I  came,  the  dog  ran  behind  the 
house,  and  from  there  into-the  field.  5.  In  front  of  each  carriage 
rode  two  men  on  horseback.  6.  On  (2ln)  that  day  it  was  so  cold 
that  we  did  not  leave  (go  out  of)  the  house.  7.  She  showed  (led) 
the  young  lady  into  the  room  where  the  children  were  playing 
with  their  dog.  8.  Under  me  lives  the  man  whom  we  saw  yester- 
day on  (auf)  the  road  to  the  city,  and  over  me  Uves  Mrs.  Smith 
with  her  daughters.  9.  There  lay  also  the  king  among  his  ene- 
mies. 10.  Whether  they  came  across  the  pond  (water)  or  through 
the  woods  (use  the  sing,  of  SSalb)  she  did  not  tell  me.  11.  Did 
he  come  before  me  or  after  me?  —  I  did  not  see  when  he  came. 
12.  He  set  the  dog  before  him  (self)  upon  a  chair.  13.  These 
apples  are  for  the  children. 

D.  14.  As  I  was  looking  out  of  the  window,  three  carriages 
drove  [up]  before  the  house,  each  with  two  horses,  and  in  each 
carriage  sat  two  men.  15.  The  tree  fell  across  the  road,  and  at 
six  o'clock,  when  it  was  (already)  getting  dark,  it  still  lay  on 
(auf)  the  road.  16.  He  laid  the  apples  before  him  (self)  upon  the 
table  on  which  the  books  were  lying.  17.  They  seated  them- 
selves beside  their  friends.  18.  No,  he  did  not  ask  (beg)  for  the 
book,  he  only  asked  (inquired)  who  had  the  book  when  I  was 
looking  for  it.  19.  The  village  of  (Don)  which  you  were  speaking 
lies  between  the  forest  and  the  town,  but  not  beyond  the  forest. 
20.  The  dog  lay  down  under  the  wagon.  21.  He  placed  the 
child  beside  him  (self)  in  (to)  the  carriage  and  drove  across  the 
field.  22.  If  you  go  through-the  house,  (fo)  you  [will]  find  our 
father  in-the  garden,  he  is  looking  for  apples.  23.  I  did  not  see 
before  which  window  she  was  standing  on  that  day,  but  I  beheve 
it  was  this  [one].  24.  Six  children  sat  around  the  table  playing 
(and  played).  25.  The  water  is  for  the  dog.  26.  When  did  the 
father  of  these  girls  come?  At  five  o'clock,  soon  after  their  mother, 
but  before  their  brothers. 


54  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

Lesson  8 

nouns:  class  iv.    personal  pronouns 


Nouns.  Class  IV  forms  the  nominative  plural  by  adding 
n  or  en  to  the  nominative  singular  and  never  modifies  the  stem- 
vowel.  —  Noims  in  c,  el,  or  er  add  n,  others  en. 

Class  IV  contains  no  neuters.  Masculines  form  the  oblique 
cases  of  the  singular  like  the  nominative  plural. 

For  the  oblique  cases  of  the  plural  and  for  the  singular  of  feminines, 
see  Lesson  4.  ii. 

In  Class  rV  belong:  1.  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable 
ending  in  ei',  1)dt,  in,  feit,  fd^aft  or  ung,  and  in  the  foreign 
suffixes  a'ge,  te',  if,  ion',  nr'  or  tat'.  All  these  are  feminines 
and  can  be  recognized  as  such  at  sight,  i.  e.,  by  their  mere  form. 

2.  All  other  feminines  of  more  than  one  syllable  (except 
SD^utter  and  2^od^ter  of  Class  I  and  those  in  ni^  or  fal  of  Class  II). 
Hundreds  of  these  end  in  e. 

3.  All  mascuhnes  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending  in  e. 

4.  About  sixty  feminines  and  twenty  mascuhnes  of  one 
syllable. 

Class  IV  is  preeminently  the  class  of  feminines. 

!Der  §err  gentleman,  Mr.  is  irregular,  adding  only  n  in  the 
singular:  be^,  bent,  ben  §errn  (but  en  in  the  plural:  bk,  ber,  ben, 
hit  §erren). 

Nouns  in  in  double  the  n  in  the  plural. 


Models : 

woman,  wife 

flower 

queen 

N.     bie    grau 

bie    iBlume 

bie 

^o'nigin 

G.     ber    grau 

ber   iBIume 

ber 

^o'nigin 

D.     ber    grau 

ber   ^lume 

ber 

to'nigin 

A.     bie    grau 

bie    33Iume 

bie 

to'nigin 

Jl 


LESSON  8.   i:  ] 

f^OUNS.      CLASS   IV 

N. 

hit    grauen              ble 

^(unten 

ble    ^o'nlglnnctt 

G. 

ber   graucn              bcr 

iBIumen 

ber   ^5'nlglnnen 

D. 

ben  graucn              ben 

53tumen 

ben  ^o'nlglnncn 

A. 

bie    graucn              bie 

^lumen 

ble    ^o'nlglnnen 

man,  human  being 

hoy 

N.     ber    mtn\d) 

ber    ^nabe 

G.     be6    5menf(^en 

be^   ^naben 

D.     bem  ^menf^Ctt 

bem  ^naben 

A.     ben  SJJenfd^en 

bm  ^naben 

N.     ble    ^menfd^cn 

ble    ^naben 

G.     ber   ^menfd^cn 

ber   ^naben 

D.     ben  arjenfd^cn 

ben  ^naben 

A.     ble    mn\^m 

ble    ^naben 

VOCABULARY 

ber  Tlox^tn 

bie  Syiorgen  morning 

ber  ginfe 

ble  gtiiffc 

river 

ber  ®ott 

ble  ©otter  god 

ble   (Selte 

ble  ©elten  side 

bort  there,  yonder 

man,    indef.     pron.,    one,    th 

cnbllc^  finally,  at  last 

.   people 

55 


morgen  to-morrow 

felbft,  emphatic  (not  reflexive)  pronoun,  and  indeclinable,  himself, 

herself,  itself,  ourselves,  yourself  etc. 

A.  1.  3eben  9D?orgen  \af)  man  t)on  bort  ble  SDIanner  unb  grancn, 
ble  ^naben  unb  9)tdb(^en,  melc^e  auf  iener  (Selte  be^  gluffe^  In  ben 
®(irten  unb  getbem  arbeltcten.  2.  :Der  33ater  be^  ^naben  mar  Im 
^rlege,  feme  9D^utter  lag  franf  ^u  §aufe,  unb  er  felbft  njar  arm,  3.  (Snb- 
llc^!  bort  fommt  bcr  SBagen  ber  ^i3nlgln.  4.  (S^  glbt  nur  elnen  ®ott. 
5.  SBann  fal)en  (Sle  §errn  unb  grau  ©c^mlbt?  —  ^erm  (Sd^mlbt  fanb 
Ic^  fc^on  am  9)?orgen  ju  §aufe,  grau  (Sd)mlbt  aber  fa^  Id^  nld^t  t)or 
5lbenb.  6.  ^onlge  unb  ^onlglnncn,  ^alfer  unb  ^alferlnnen  {empresses) 
flnb  aud^  nur  aJJenfdfien.  7.  3d^  gtaube  an  (in)  elnen  ®ott.  8.  Um 
ben  SSagen  ftanben  ble  grauen  unb  SD^iibc^en  be^  Dorfe^  mlt  iBIumen 
In  ber  §anb  (or  In  ben  §dnben),  unb  ble  ^tumen  gaben  fie  ber  ^onlgln. 


56  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

9.  ^txm  bu  morgcti  nid^t  urn  brcl  U^r  l^lcr  btft,  fo  toartc  td^  ntd^t. 

10.  $Sei(  i6)  ^arl  nic^t  in  fetncm  B^irimer  fanb,  glng  id^  in  ben  ©artcn, 
aber  bort  fanb  id^  i^n  {him)  aud^  ni(^t.  11.  5ln  jenem  9D?orgen  famcn 
bie  ^gerrcn  felbft,  aber  o^ne  i^rc  graucn.  12.  @ic  fagt,  il^rc  §anbe 
unb  giifee  finb  je^t  enblic^  tDarm.  13.  3n  ienen  2:agcn  gab  e0  mel^r 
alg  cinen  ®ott,  unb  bie  ©otter  tno^nten  nod^  unter  ben  SO^enfd^cn. 
14.  Wit  lange  h)o]^nft  bu  fc^on  in  biefent  §aufe?  —  @d^on  gmei  Qal^re. 

B.  15.  Snblid^  famen  trir  an  htn  glug,  an  tDetd^em  ha^  ^orf  lag. 

16.  3ft  ^arl  nid^t  aud^  unter  ben  ^naben,  tneld^e  bort  f)inter  bem  ^^aufe 
fpieten? — 9^ein,  ^arl  fi^t  fc^on  lange  in  feinem  3i^^er  unb  arbeitet. 

17.  Jupiter  ober  S^^^  ^^^  '^er  3Sater  unb  tonig  ber  ©otter.  18.  iffiie 
fait  ba^  SBaffer  bort  im  gluffe  nod^  ift,  unb  bie  ^tage  finb  fd^on  fo  n)arm! 
19.  3ln  ber  (Seite  ber  ^onigin  fafe  ein  graulein,  aber  i^re  2:od^ter  tear 
e^  nid^t,  fagte  man.  20.  „9}^orgen  fommen  toir  felbft/'  fagten  fie,  „unb 
fud^en  Spfel,"  aber  id^  glaube,  fie  finben  feine  mel^r,  tdtnn  fie  fommen, 
unb  iBlumen  c(tbt  e^  aud^  nid^t  mel^r,  benn  bie  ^a(i)tt  finb  }e^t  f(^on  biet 
gu  fatt.  21.  SO^and^e  5D?enfd^cn  glauben  an  (in)  feinen  ®ott.  22.  SQ^eine 
3immer  liegen  an  biefer  ©eite  be^  §aufeg.  23.  (Snblid^!  bort  fommt 
bag  graulein  felbft  au^  bem  ©arten;  unb  fie  l^at  53lumett  in  ber  §anb, 
glaube  id^.  24.  3n  jenen  Qal^ren  fprad^  man  in  unferer  ©tabt  biel  t)on 
einem  ^riege  mit  5lmerifa.  25.  SKenn  meine  gran  nid^t  fommt,  fo 
fommen  unfere  ^lod^ter  aud^  nid^t.  26.  (S6  gab  bort  aud^  folc^e  53lumen 
unb  SSogel,  toie  e^  l)ier  gibt. 

C.  1.  The  boy  fell  from  his  (from-the,  t)om)  horse  as  he  was 
riding  through  the  river.  2.  People  did  not  beUeve  what  the 
woman  was  saying.  3.  He  says  that  kings  and  queens  are  also 
only  human  beings.  4.  Finally  the  morning  came  on  (an) 
which  they  (man)  led  the  gentlemen  before  the  king.  5.  On 
(auf)  which  side  of  the  river  stood  the  tree?  —  On  that  side,  I 
think.  6.  Why  don't  you  go  into  the  woods  (use  the  sing,  of 
3Salb),  children,  if  you  are  looking  for  birds  and  flowers?  7.  The 
men  of  the  village  were  working  in  the  fields,  their  wives  and 
children  in  the  gardens.  8.  The  girl  is  as  handsome  as  a  queen. 
9.  Who  was  so  handsome  among  the  gods  as  Apollo?  10.  He 
says  himself  that  he  saw  such  flowers  in  the  king's  garden,  but 
his  wife  does  not  believe  it.  11.  One  does  not  work  well  when  it 
is  so  warm  as  it  is  to-day.  12.  How  long  have  you  been  riding 
by  this  time^?  —  Only  one  d&y. 


LESSON   8.    II :   PRONOUNS  57 

D.  13.  ''Yes,"  he  said,  "these  men  are  our  enemies,  but  are 
they  not  also  human  beings?'^  14.  There  one  saw  men,  women 
and  children,  they  were  talking  about  the  king  and  the  queen. 

15.  Mrs.  Smith  asks  if  the  boys  and  girls  are  still  playing  in 
the  garden.  —  No,  they  are  in  their  rooms  now  and  working. 

16.  There  are  also  woods  (use  the  plur.  of  SBatb)  which  are  always 
green.  17.  On  (an)  each  side  of  the  carriage  rode  two  gentle- 
men on  horseback.  18.  If  you  show  me  the  flowers,  (fo)  I 
[will]  show  you  the  tree  under  which  I  found  these  apples. 
19.  Finally  Mr.  Smith  came  himself,  and  when  he  saw  that  the 
room  had  only  one  window  and  was  too  small,  he  did  not  take 
it.  20.  Among  the  gods  in  (an  with  ace.)  whom  they  (man)  be- 
lieved was  also  Mars,  and  he  was  the  god  of  (the)  war.  21.  When- 
ever the  boy  saw  a  dog,  he  ran  into-the  house.  22.  If  the  water 
is  not  yet  warm  enough,  why  don't  you  wait  till  to-morrow? 

1  Lesson  6.  ii.  note  1. 

II 

Personal  Pronouns.  In  the  inflection  of  the  personal  pro- 
nouns below,  the  genitives  are  bracketed  because  they  are 
rare  and  will  not  be  used  for  the  present. 

FIRST   PERSON  SECOND    PERSON 

SINGULAR  SINGULAR  SING.    AND   PLUR. 

N.         id^  /  bu  thou,  you  <Bk  you 

G.  [melner,  mcln  of  me]  [belncr,  bein  of  thee,  of  you]  [S^xtx  of  you] 
D.         mlr  to  me  blr  to  thee,  to  you  S^ntn  to  you 

A.  mid^  me  bid^  thee,  you  (Sie  you 


PLURAL 

PLURAL 

N. 

\OiX  we 

il^r  ye,  you 

G. 

[unfcr  of  us] 

[cuer  of  you] 

D. 

un^  to  us 

tud)  to  you 

A. 

•     ung  us 

eud^  you 

THIRD   PERSON  SINGULAR 

masc. 

fern. 

neut. 

N. 

cr  he 

[Ic  she 

e6  it 

G. 

[f  clner,  f  eln  of  him] 

[i^nx  of  her] 

[fctner,  feln  of  it] 

D. 

il^m  to  him 

it)X  to  her 

xt)m  to  it 

A. 

lf)n  him 

fie  her 

ed  it 

58  .  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

THIRD   PERSON   PLURAL 
m.  f.  n. 

N.  fie  they 

G.  \\fyctx  of  them] 

D.  t^nen  to  them 

A.  fie  them 

Phrases  with  bei  and  the  dative:  bet  §errn  (Sd^mibt  at  Mr. 
Smith's  house  or  how£;  htx  mix  at  my  house  or  home;  hd  3{)nen  at 
your  hou^e  or  hom£  etc. 

Instead  of  learning  a  new  Vocabulary,  the  student  may  study  the 
following  table  of  endings  used  in  the  inflection  of  nouns : 


Class  I 

Class  II 

Class  III 

Class  I^ 

N.     — 

— 

— 

— 

G.  .-« 
D.     — 

-(c)« 
-(e) 

-(e)« 
-(e) 

-(e)n 
-(e)n 

A.     — 

— 

— 

-(e)n 

N.     ^sA 
G.     (^ 
D.     ^(n) 
A.     ^ 

-(e)n 
-(e)n 
-(e)n 
-(e)n 

A.  1.  <Bit  bat  mid^  fo  lange,  bl^  tc^  ii)x  ba6  ^vl^  gab.  2.  (Sr  fagtc 
i^nen  alle^,  tt)a^  id^  eud^  unb  t^m  geftem  fagte.  3.  SSenn  bie  ^naben 
nid^t  bel  3^nen  tuaren,  fo  fanb  id^  fie  immer  bet  il^rem  OnfcL  4.  3Sar* 
urn  fe^tet  l^r  eud^  ntd^t  ncben  un§?  ^SSeil  tDir  eud^  nld^t  fa^en,  al^  mlr 
ing  3i^ttier  famen.  5.  ^aten  'Bit  il^n  felbft  ober  feinen  ^ruber?  — 
3^n  felbft,  benn  ben  53ruber  fanben  tdix  nid^t  mef)r  gu  §aufe.  —  Unb  gab 
er  ^l^nett  ttma^?  —  3a,  aber  er  gab  un^  nur  fe^ir  tDenig.  6.  3Senn  bie 
^(inigin  morgen  fommt,  fo  geige  id^  fie  eud^.  7.  Ob  fie  geftem  mit 
il^nett  ging,  fab  id^  nid^t,  unb  idi)  borte  aud^  nid^t,  tdann  fie  au6  bem  §aufe 
famen.  8.  5lrbeiten  Bit  nod^  immer  fiir  §errn  ©d^mibt?  —  3a,  id^ 
arbeite  je^t  fd^on  brei  Qa^re  fiir  i^n  unb  tnobne  aud^  bei  i^m.  9.  Ba^ 
er  nid^t  Dox  bir?  —  5^ein,  er  unb  feine  grau  fa^en  binter  mir,  unb  nthth 
ibnen  ftanb  ber  §err,  n)etd^er  iiber  bir  n)obnt.  10.  3Sa^  fragt  er  bid^? 
—  (Sr  fragt  mid^,  totx  geftem  mit  mir  fu^r,  al^  id^  ^u  eud^  fam.  11.  (S^ 
gibt  aud^  SD^enfd^en,  n)elcbe  gut  gegen  (towards)  i^xt  geinbe  finb.  12.  3d^ 
filaubte  ibm^  nid^t,  al^  er  e«  mir  fagte. 


LESSON  8.    II :  PRONOUNS  59 

B.  13.  5(16  bie  ^nabcn  gu  mir  famcn,  gitig  i^  mit  il^ncn  in  ben 
©arten  unb  ^ah  jebcm  brel  SpfeL  14.  SO?ir  fagtc  cr  eg  gcftcm,  aU  i^ 
ii)n  bet  cuc^  fa^;  aber  tf)r  fagtc  er  nid^t^  batjon  (o/i^  or  about  it),  glaubc 
td^.  15.  5Sor  un6  lag  ba^  2)orf,  unb  Winter  un6  bic  ®tabt.  16.  9}?an 
glaubte  i^r^  allc6,  tDa^  fie  fagte.  17.  ^a6  antmortetcn  (Sie  il)r,  aB  fie 
®ie  fragte?  —  3Ba6  id^  3^nen  anttnortete:  ba^  id^  il)rem  53ruber  nid^t 
me^r  gab,  aB  i^r  felbft.  18.  gu^ren  fie  mit  cud^  ober  mit  il^nen?  — 
9}Jit  un6.  19.  3a,  ^arl,  tDcnn  id^  bag  33ud^  noc^  ^abe,  fo  lege  id^  eg 
^eute  abenb  auf  beinen  ^ifc§,  unb  bu  finbeft  eg  bort,  menu  bu  nac^  §aufe 
fommft.  20.  Unter  ung  mo^nt  gran  ©d^mibt  mit  i()ren  ^toc^tem,  iiber 
ung  bcr  §err,  meld^en  ®ie  geftem  bei  ung  fa^en.  21.  3d^  frage,  ob  id^ 
@ie  morgen  abenb  gu  §aufe  finbe.  —  9^ein,  morgen  abenb  finben  ^it 
mid^  nic^t  gu  §aufe,  hmn  mein  ^ruber  fommt  !)eute  mit  feiner  grou  gu 
ung,  unb  n)ir  ge^en  morgen  mit  i^nen  gut  @tabt,  too  mir  bei  unferer 
Thitttx  liber  9^ad^t  bleiben.  22.  ^lan  fragte  ben  DJ^enfd^en:  „(Sinb  <Sie 
ftir  ben  ^onig  ober  gegen  i^n?"  Unb  alg  er  ni(^t  antmortete,  f)ielt  {took) 
man  i^n  ftir  cinen  geinb  beg  ^onigg.  23.  (gr  fal^  mid^  nid^t,  unb  id^  il|u 
auc^  nic^t. 

1  ©laubcn  takes  the  dative  of  the  person. 

C.  1.  Did  you  speak  with  him,  or  with  her? —  I  spoke  only 
with  her.  2.  After  three  days  he  came  to  me  and  asked  me  for 
(um)  the  book  which  you  gave  me,  but  I  did  not  give  it  to  him. 
3.  I  rode  with  them,  and  you  rode  with  her,  but  we  did  not  see 
you  and  you  did  not  see  us,  either.  4.  They  did  not  believe  us, 
because  we  did  not  beUeve  them.  5.  When  I  escorted  her  into 
the  room  where  we  found  you,  she  asked  me  if  you  lived  with 
us  or  with  your  uncle  Charles.  6.  Did  you  come  before  them, 
or  after  them?  —  I  came  with  (i.e.,  together  with,  mit)  them. 
7.  If  they  are  not  for  us,  (fo)  they  are  against  us.  8.  He  seated 
himself  behind  me,  not  beside  me,  for  beside  me  sat  my  friend 
Smith,  and  in  front  of  me  sat  Charles  and  Anna.  9.  There 
they  stood,  and  between  them  lay  their  dog.  10.  If  I  find 
them  at  home,  (fo)  I  [will]  tell  them  that  she  is  here  with 
you.  11.  Who  gave  them  to  her? — What? — The  flowers  which 
she  had  in  her  hand  when  you  showed  her  to  me.  —  My 
mother  gave  them  to  her.  12.  There  are  no  enemies  of  the 
king  among  them,  I  think.  13.  We  never  believed  them  (be- 
lieved them  never). 


60  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

D.  14.  He  gave  it  to  them,  they  gave  it  to  her,  she  gave  it 
to  you,  and  finally  you  gave  it  to  me.  15.  Yes,  I  hear  what  you 
say.  If  you  came  after  him,  (fo)  he  came  before  you,  but  I  am 
not  asking  you  whether  you  came  before  him  or  after  him.  I 
ask  when  you  came,  and  why  you  did  not  come  with  (i.  e., 
together  with,  mit)  me,  when  I  was  at  your  house  and  was 
looking  for  you.  16.  I  am  going  without  him  if  I  don't  find 
him.      17.  Did  she  give  the  flowers  to  you,  Anna,  or  to  her? 

—  These  she  gave  to  me,  and  those  to  her,  but  they  are  not 
for  us,  Mrs.  Smith,  they  are  all  (alle)  for  you.  18.  Among  them 
I  saw  also  a  boy  from  (au§)  the  city.     19.  Don't  you  believe  me? 

—  Yes,  I  believe  you,  but  she  does  not  believe  what  I  tell  her. 
20.  When  he  showed  me  the  room,  I  found  that  it  was  not  large 
enough  for  me.  21.  How  long  he  looked  for  them  he  did  not 
tell  me.  22.  Had  he  not  a  book  before  him(self)?  —  Yes,  I  laid 
it  myself  before  him. 

Lesson  9 

THE  PRONOUNS  ^er,  SBcr,  SBaig,    substitutes  for  pronouns 

I 

^cr,  as  demonstrative  pronoun  meaning  that,  that  one,  he,  she, 
it  etc.,  and  bcr,  as  relative  pronoun  meaning  who,  which,  that, 
are  inflected  ahke: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  bcr  bic  ha^  hit 

G.  bcffcn  bcrcn  beffen  bcren 

D.  bcm  bcr  bem  bcnen 

A.  ben  blc  ha^  bie 

2Bcr,  as  interrogative  pronoun  meaning  who,  and  tucr,  as 
relative  pronoun  meaning  whoever  or  he  who,  are  inflected  ahke. 
SSa^,  as  interrogative  pronoun  meaning  what,  and  h)a^,  as  rel- 
ative pronoun  meaning  whatever  or  that  which,  are  also  inflected 
ahke.  Both  n)er  and  lt)a^  have  no  plural,  and  tva^  lacks  also 
the  dative: 


LESSON   9.    i:   PRONOUNS  61 

N.  tdtx  N.  ti3a« 

G.  tDeffen  G.  iDcffen 

D.  tDem  D.  wanting 

A.  tDen  A.  toa^ 

VOCABULARY 

ha^  ®ctb  blc  ®etbcr  money 

bie  ®(^h)eftcr  bie  ©c^hjeftem  szs^er 

bie  2:ur  bie  Zuxtn  door 

er  ftarb  /ie  died  oben  a6oi;e,  upstairs 

cr  lebt  /le  Zi^es  unten  6eZow;,  down-stairs 

er  lebte  /le  Zii;ed  ma^r  ^me 

A.  1,  3a,  ^a^  ift  h)al^r,  feine  grau  ftarb  Dor^  brei  3a^ren,  aber  er 
fetbft  lebt  noc§,  unb  Tomn  ©ie  tneine  (Sd^h)efter  fragen,  fo  fagt  fie  S^nm 
auc^,  tno  er  je^t  hjo^nt.  2.  Unten  im  ^aufe  l^atten  toir  nur  brei  3^^= 
mer,  oben  aber  fiinf.  3.  giir  iDen  arbeitet  er  }e^t?  —  gilr  ben  .^erm, 
bei  bem^  (or  n)el(^em)  id^  tnol^ne,  —  3ft  ha^  ber  §err,  ben^  (or  toeld^en) 
©ie  mir  geftem  geigten?  —  9lein,  e§  ift  ber,  beffen^  (not  t^etd^e^)  ^inber 
immer  mit  meinen  ©ol^nen  fpielen.  ©ie  fa^en  il^n  geftem  abenb  nid^t, 
njeil  er  nid^t  me^r  gu  §aufe  h)ar.  4»  3d^  frage:  „3Ser  ift^  bie  grau, 
bie  bort  an  ber  Xiix  fte^t?  unb  \ioa^  l^at^  fie  in  ber  §anb?"  5.  3^  frage, 
njer  bie  grau  ift,^  bie  bort  an  ber  XiXx  \tt1)i,  unb  toa^  fie  in  ber  §anb  l^at.^ 
6.  SBer  feine  greunbe  t)at,  ber^  ift  arm.  7.  SSa^  fie  if)m  gab,  ba^^  faf) 
ic^  nid^t.  8.  Unten  t)or  unfrer  2^ur  ftanb  ein  SSagen  mit  gtDei  ^ipferben. 
9.  SSeffen  33u(^er  finb  ha^,^  bie  bort  auf  bem  2;ifd^e  liegen?  —  (g^^  finb 
^arl6  ^iic^er.  10.  SD^it  n)em  fuf)ren  (Sie  l^eute  morgen^  3ur  @tabt?  — 
3Sarum  fragen  @ie?  —  3^  \af)  einen  §erm  bei  3^nen  im  SKagen;  toar 
e6  nid^t  biefer,  ber  l^ier  neben  3^rer  ©d^tDefter  fi^t?  —  5^ein,  ber  mar  e^ 
nid^t  (it  was  not  he),  id}  fu^r  mit  bem  ba,  n)etd^er  je^t  bor  bem  genfter 
ftel^t.  S6  ift  ein  §err  ©d^mibt  au^  53erlin  (pronounce  Berleen^,  the 
er  as  in  errand),  in  beffen^  (not  ttjeld^e^)  §aufe  mein  ^ruber  fe^r  lange 
h)o]^nte,  at^  er  nod^  lebte.  11.  !Der  SO^ann  naf)m  ha^  @elb  t)om  3:ifd^ 
unb  lief  aug  ber  ^ilr.  12.  ^ie^^  ift  mein  (Sol^n,  ba§^  ift  meine  S^od^ter, 
unb  ba^^  finb  i^re  greunbe. 

B.  13.  SBo^nen  ©ie  noc^  immer  unten,  n)o  id^  <Bk  )oox^  brei  ^al^ren 
fanb?  —  O  nein,  id^  tDo^ne  fd^on  ein  3oi)x  oben.  14.  51B  ©oct^e  ftarb, 
lebte  <Scott  noc^,  aber  er  ftarb  balb  nad^  if)m.     15.  !Dag^  ift  bie  grau, 


62  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

mit  bcr^  (or  tuctd^cr)  mclnc  SJhittcr  geftcm  fprad^,  unb  bcrcn^  (not  n)cl* 
d^cr)  ©c^tDefter  fo  fc^on  fpielt  unb  fingt.  16.  3d^  fragc:  „5Sem  gaben^ 
@ic  bag  ®elb?"  17.  3c^  frage,  mem  ®ie  ha^  &dh  gaben.'  18.  3(^ 
fragc:  „$3el(^en  ^naben  fa^eti^  @ie  geftern?"  19.  3(^  fragc,  melc^ett 
^nabcn  ®ic  geftcm  fa^en.^  20.  3Ber  fein  ^ferb  fiattc,  ber^  ging  gu  gu^. 
21.  SSag  cr  i^r  §eute  fagte,  ha^*  ift  nid^t  hja^r.  22.  nU  i^  gu  i^m 
tarn,  ftanb  cr  fd^on  mit  feiner  ®c^n)cftcr  Dor  ber  J^tir  unb  martetc.  23.  3)u 
fagft,  ba^^  finb  i^re  "ipferbc,  bie  (or  njcld^e)  bort  am  SBcgc  ftcl^cn,  aber  id) 
glaubc,  c^'  finb  ^arl^  "ipfcrbc.  24.  :Dicg^  finb  mcine  ©d^njcftcm,  unb 
ba^^  ift  mcinc  grau.  25.  §cutc  morgcn^  gcigte  cr  mir  bag  3^iTi^cr  an 
jcncr  ©cite  beg  ^^aufcg,  aber  id^  nat)m  eg  nid^t,  benn  eg  ift  gu  flein  fur 
mic^.    26.  5Sor  jcber  Zixv  lag  ein  §unb. 

1  In  expressions  of  time,  bor  with  the  dative  usually  means  ago.  —  2  The 
choice  between  the  relative  pronouns  bcr  and  lueld^er  is  largely  a  matter  of 
euphony  or  style,  except  that  the  genitive  of  bcr,  and  not  of  totl^tr,  is  used 
when  standing  before  a  noun  on  which  it  depends.  —  ^  Notice  that  the  posi- 
tion of  the  verb  in  a  direct  question  differs  from  that  in  an  indirect  question. 
—  4  Though  h)cr  and  h)a8,  as  relatives,  are  often  equivalent  to  antecedent 
and  relative  combined  —  totr  meaning  he  who,  and  load  meaning  that  which  — 
yet,  the  antecedent  bcr  or  ba^  is  often  repeated  for  emphasis  when  the  demon- 
strative clause  follows  the  relative  clause.  —  ^  In  statements  of  identity, 
e^,  bo^  and  bicfcg,  or  its  contracted  form  bic^,  often  serve  as  the  indefinite 
subject  of  some  form  of  fcin  be  with  a  predicate  nominative  of  any  gender, 
the  verb  agreeing  in  number  with  the  predicate.  This  sounds  as  if  Germans 
said  whose  books  are  thaif  instead  of  those,  or  U  are  Charles's,  instead  of  they 
are  Charles's  etc.  —  ^  Literally,  to-day  morning,  i.  e.,  this  morning;  see  Lesson 
6.  II.  note  2. 

C.  1.  From  whom  do  you  come,  Charles?  —  From  our  sister. 
2.  Whom  were  they  looking  for?  —  Their  brothers.  3.  What 
did  they  give  them?  —  Apples  and  flowers.  4.  Whose  horses 
did  he  take?  —  I  did  not  see  whose  horses  he  took.  5.  Is  this 
the  woman  whose  daughter  sings  and  plays  so  beautifully?  — 
No,  that^  is  the  one  (that  is  she).  6.  With  which  of  (t)on)  these 
boys  did  you  play?  —  With  him  (demonstr.)  .^  7.  Isn't  this  (is 
this  not)  the  dog  which  was  lying  in  front  of  our  door?  —  Yes, 
that's  the  one  (that  is  he) .  8.  If  these  are  the  books  which  he  is 
looking  for,  (fo)  I  [will]  lay  them  upon  his  table.  9.  He  (de- 
monstr.)  has  but  little  money,  but  his  wife  is  very  rich.  10.  Why 
do  you  live  down-stairs?  —  Because  it  is  too  warm  up-stairs 
(up-stairs  too  warm).     11.  She  says  he  died  this  morning,  but 


SUPPLEMENT   TO   LESSON   9.    I    (OPTIONAL)  63 

that  is  not  true,  he  died  (already)  last  night  (yesterday  evening). 
12.  A  year  ago  he  was  still  living,  for  I  saw  him  often  at  (bet) 
my  brother^s.  13.  I  think  those  are  his  children.  —  No,  they 
(it)  are  his  brother's  children.  14.  "She  did  not  tell  her  sister 
to  whom  she  gave  the  flowers.  15.  Whatever  he  says  (that)  I 
beheve.     16.  Whoever  seeks  God  (he)  finds  him  too. 

D.  17.  The  gentlemen  whom  you  saw  down-stairs  in  front 
of  our  door  are  looking  for  rooms.  18.  For  whom  are  you  work- 
ing now?  —  For  the  gentleman  in  whose  house  you  are  living. 

19.  Whose  dogs  are  those^?  —  They  (it)  are  my  brother's  dogs. 

20.  When  her  brothers  and  sisters  came  home,  she  was  no 
longer  living.  —  And  when  did  she  die?  —  Four  or  five  days  ago. 

21.  Below   lay   the   villages,    between   which   we   saw  a   river. 

22.  There's  the  gentleman,  to  him  (demonstr.)^  I  gave  the  book. 

23.  With  whose  children  were  they  playing? —  She  did  not  say 
with  whose  children  they  were  playing.  24.  That  he  found 
something  I  believe  myself,  but  what  he  found  (that)  he  did  not 
tell  me.  25.  Whoever  was  poor  (he)  gave  but  httle  or  nothing. 
26.  To  whom  did  you  give  the  money  which  you  found  on  my 
table?  —  To  your  sister.  27.  I  understand  you  are  looking  for 
your  friends.  They  (demonstr.)  are  already  on  the  way  to  the 
city.  28.  Is  that  the  woman  whose  daughters  are  working  in 
your  garden?  —  Yes,  that's  the  one  (that  is  she) .  29.  If  you  do 
not  believe  him  (demonstr.),  then  (fo)  you  do  not  believe  me, 
either.  30.  I  ask  whether  it  is  true  that  she  is  still  living.  — 
I  don't  believe  it,  but  there  are  people  (use  Wltn\(i))  who  believe  it. 

7  Avoid  the  forms  of  iener  throughout  the  exercises  of  this  Lesson. 

Supplement  to  Lesson  9,  Part  I 

According  to  the  familiarity  of  their  students  with  English  grammar, 
some  teachers  will  no  doubt  omit  this  supplement  altogether;  others 
will  take  it  up  before  the  sentences  of  Lesson  9.  i;  and  others  still  may 
prefer  to  assign  it  in  connection  with  the  Review  and  Drill  after  Lesson  10. 

A.  Distinguish: 

DIRECT  (independent)  QUESTIONS  and    INDIRECT  (DEPENDENT)  QUESTIONS 

1.   Who    (subject)    took    the    book      !*•  /   ask  who   (subject)    took   the 
yesterday?      2Ber    nal^m    ba^  book  yesterday  ^d)  frage,  totv 

S3ud^  gcftern?  i>a^  33ud^  gsftern  na^m 


64 


BEGINNING  GERMAN 


2.  Who  (predicate  nominative)  is      2*-  / 

this     man?     SSer     ift     biefcr 

3.  Whose  hook  did  he  take  y ester-      3^' 

day?      SBcffcn  ^ud^   nol^m  cr 
geftcm? 

4.  To  whom  did  he  give  the  book      4^* 

yesterday?     SScm  gab   cr  bo« 
SBuc^  geftern? 


5.   Whom    was   he   looking  for   at      5*-  It 
that  time?     SScn  fuc^tc  er  ba^ 
inal«? 


know  who  (predicate  nomi- 
native) this  man  is  ^d)  h)et&, 
toer  biefer  SDZann  ift 

/  saw  whose  book  he  took  yes- 
terday S^  \ai),  tDcffen  58ud^  er 
geftern  nal^m 

/  am  not  going  to  tell  to  whom 
he  gave  the  book  yesterday 
^^  [age  nid^t,  Yotm  cr  bag 
33ud^  geftern  gab 
is  uncertain  whom  he  was 
looking  for  at  that  time  (S8  ift 
ungemi^,  hjcn  er  bamals  fud^tc 


Direct  or  independent  questions,  like  1-5,  become  indirect  or  de- 
pendent questions  by  being  made  to  depend  on  some  verb,  or  other 
expression,  of  asking,  doubting,  thinking,  knowing,  perceiving  and  the 
hke,  as  in  l*-5^.  In  German,  therefore,  indirect  questions  change  to 
the  Transposed  or  Dependent  Order  of  Words.  (Observe  that  there 
is  also  a  change  of  order  in  English,  except  where  the  interrogative  pro- 
noun is  the  subject,  as  who  in  1*). 

B.    Distinguish  the  following  two  kinds  of  dependent  clauses: 


INDIRECT    QUESTIONS 

6.  /  saw  who  took  the  hook  yester- 

day ^6)  \q^,  tocr  ha^  iBuc^ 
geftern  nat)m 

7.  /  told  her   with  whom  I  came      7^*  / 

yesterday  and  whom  we  met 
in  the  street  ^6)  fagte  i^r,  mit 
toem  ic^  geftern  fant  unb  iBcn  Xq\x 
auf  ber  ©tra&c  trafen 


/  inquired  whose  children  took      8*-  / 
the  apples    ^6)   fragte,  meffen 
^inbcr  bic  Spfel  na^mcn 


RELATIVE    CLAUSES 

/  saw  the  man  who  took  the  book 
yesterday  ^^  \a^  ben  SO?ann, 
iDctd^er  (or  ber)  ha^  53ud^  gc* 
ftcm  na^m 

showed  her  the  woman  with 
whom  I  came  yesterday  and 
the  boy  whom  we  met  in  the 
street  ^^  ^eigte  t^r  bic  ^^rau, 
mit  n)eld^er  (or  ber)  ic^  geftern 
fam,  unb  ben  ^naben,  hjclc^en 
(or  ben)  n)ir  auf  ber  (Strode 
trafen 

inquired  for  the  man  whose 
children  took  the  apples  — 
or  for  the  woman  whose 
children  etc.  —  or  for  the 
parents  whose  children  etc. 


SUPPLEMENT   TO   LESSON   9.    I    (OPTIONAL)  65 

^ii)  frogtc  nad^  hem  ^annt, 
bcffen  (not  hjelc^e^i)  ^inber  bic 
Sipfel  nal^mcn  —  or  m^  ber 
t^rau,  beren  (not  h)cl(^er»)  ^in* 
bcr  etc.  —  or  nad^  ben  ©Item, 
bcrcn  (not  tDcId^er*)  ^inber  etc. 
1  Lesson  9.  i.  note  2. 

In  6-8,  the  dependent  clauses  beginning  with  who,  with  whom,  whom 
and  whose  suggest  and  represent  (direct)  questions,  e.  g.,  in  7:  with  whom 
did  you  come  yesterday?;  hence  the  interrogative  pronouns  in  German. 
In  the  corresponding  dependent  clauses  of  6^-8*,  who,  with  whom,  whom 
and  whose  neither  suggest  nor  represent  questions,  but  relate  to  an  ante- 
cedent, which  is  qualified  or  limited  by  them;  hence  the  relative  pronouns 
in  German. 

C.  The  same  syntactical  distinction  holds  for  the  following  sentences, 
though  here  German,  like  English,  uses  the  same  word  as  interrogative 
and  relative  (except  that  for  tDcld^er,  when  pronoun,  bcr  may  be  sub- 
stituted) : 

INDIRECT    QUESTIONS  RELATIVE    CLAUSES 

9.  He  knew  what  (interrog.  ad-  9**  He  knew  the  way  which  (rel. 

jective)  way  or  which  (in-  pron.)    led   to   the  city    (Sr 

terrog.  adj.)  way  led  to  the  iBufetc  ben  SBeg,  rtcld^cr  (or  ber) 

city    @r  nju^te,  tocld^er  SSeg  noc^  bcr  ©tabt  fu^rtc 
nad^  bcr  <Stabt  fiil^rte 

10.  He  asks  me  what  I  have  in  my  lO**  /  gave  him  what  {=that  which) 

hand  (Sr  fragt  mtd^,  h)a«  i^  in  I  had  in  my  hand  ^^  Qab 

bcr  §anb  {jabc  tl^nt,  n)a«  {=ha9,  tt)a«)  id^  in  ber 

§anb  ^attc 

11.  I  saw  where  (=in  what  place)      11**  /  saw  the  place  where  (=in 

he  stood  ^d)  \a^,  n)o  cr  ftanb  which)  he  stood  ^^  fal^  btc 

(Stclfc,  njo  (=an  njcld^cr)  cr  [tanb 

D.  The  following  sentences  illustrate  the  uses  of  other  words  that 
need  to  be  distinguished: 

12.  /  ask  if  {= whether)   he  came      12*-  I  will  speak  with  him  if  {^pro- 

alone  (indirect  question)  3<^  vided  that  or  on  condition 

frage,  ob  cr  attctn  fam  that)  he  comes  alone  (con- 

ditional clause)  3d^  ttiitt  mit 
tl^m  [pred^en,  n)cnn  er  atlein 
fommt 


66 


BEGINNING  GERMAN 


13.  When  =  at  what  time  =  trann;  13^" 
e.  g.,  when  did  he  come? 
(past  time)  htann  fam  cr?  — 
when  does  he  dine?  (present 
time)  njatin  t^t  er?  —  when 
will  he  go?  (future)  irann 
tt)irb  er  abrctfen?  Also  in  in- 
direct questions,  e.  g.,  /  do 
not  know  when  (=at  what 
time)  he  came  etc.  ^(i)  tod^ 
nid^t,  loann  cr  fam  or  h)ann  er 
ifet  or  toann  er  abreifen  toirb 


When  =  at  the  time  when=aU; 
e.g.,  I  was  not  here  when  he 
came  ^d^  toax  nid^t  l^ier,  al§ 
er  fam.  —  21I«  is  used  only  to 
refer  to  one  particular  occa- 
sion or  time  in  the  past, 
hence  only  with  past  tenses. 
—  But  if  when  =  whenever 
and  denotes  repeated  or 
customary  action,  rotnn  is 
used,  thus:  Whenever  he 
came,  I  was  not  here  SScnn 
er  fam,  fo  toax  id^  nid^t  l^ier 


II 


VOCABULARY 


blc  5^bcr 

[^  fd^relbe  /  write 

baran'  thereat,  at  it,  at  them 
barauf     thereupon,    on    it,    on 

them 
bafiir'   therefor,  for  it,  for  them 
barin'   therein,  in  it,  in  them 
bamit'  therewith,  with  it,  with  them 
bat)on'    thereof,    of  it,    of  them, 

about  it,  about  them 


bie  J^ebem  pen,  feather 
Id^  fd^rieb  /  wrote 

tDoran'  whereat,  at  what 
tnorauf  whereon,  whereupon,  on 

what 
tDoftir'  wherefor,  for  what 
tDOrln'  wherein,  in  what 
iDOtnit'  wherewith,  with  what 
tt)Ot)on'   whereof,   of  what,   about 

what 


Study  the  sentences  below  in  the  following  order,  1,  2,  3  etc.,  1%  2% 
3*  etc. 


A.  1.  ^icr  ift  cm  Zx\(i)  mlt 
gtuel  @tuf)len  baran. 

2.  :Der  Xi\d)  ftanb  ba,  aber 
^iic^er  tagen  nic^t  barauf. 

3.  @r  gab  mir  bie  J^ber,  unb  id^ 
gab  il^Tn  ba^  ^ud)  bafiir. 

4.  Dag  §aug  ift  nid^t  grofe  gc- 
nug,  tDcil  nur  fcd^g  3iiTi^^^  ^^^'^^ 
finb. 


1^-  ^oxan  (of  what)  ftorb  fie? 
5ln  (of)  bent  IpfeL 

2^-  SSorauf  ftanb  er,  aU  er 
fprad^?    5luf  einem  ©tu^Ic. 

3^-  SKofur  ift  bag  ®elb,  bag 
(Sie  ntir  gaben?    gilr  bie  53ud^er. 

4^'  (Sr  fagte  nid^t,  n)orin  er  eg 
fanb. 


LESSON   9.    II :   PRONOUNS  67 

5.  T)k  gebern  finb  noc^  gut,  5^-  SSomlt  fd^reibft  bu?  mit 
aber  ic^  fc^reibe  nlc^t  me^r  bamlt.      beiner  geber. 

6.  3)at)on  fagte  er  mir  geftern        6^-  3Sot)on  fprad^eti  fie? 

Sentences  1-6  show  that  Ger-  Sentences  1^-6^  show  that  Ger- 
man substitutes  for  personal  pro-  man  substitutes  for  the  missing  da- 
nouns  of  the  third  person,  when  tive  of  irag  and  for  the  accusative 
referring  to  objects  without  hfe  and  h}a^,  when  governed  by  a  preposi- 
governed  by  a  preposition,  the  ad-  tion,  the  adverb  h)o  (before  vowels 
verb  ha  (before  vowels  bar)  followed  toox)  followed  by  the  preposition, 
by  the  preposition.  Thus,  in  1,  Thus,  in  1*,  tooran  stands  for  an 
baran  stands  for  an  i^m;  in  3,  bafiir  with  the  missing  dative  of  h)a8;  in 
stands  for  fiir  [ic  etc.  3^,  h)ofur  stands  for  fiir  tna^  etc. 

The  adverbs  hjoran,  morauf  etc.,  may  be  similarly  used  instead  of  a 
preposition  with  the  dative  or  accusative  of  bcr  or  toclc^cr,  as  shown  below. 

7.  ®er  SSagcn,  tDorln  (for  in  bent  or  in  rt)cl(^em)  er  tarn,  toav  mein 
SSagen.  8.  T)k  geber,  tDofiir  (for  fur  bie  or  fiir  n)elc^e)  id)  i^nx  ben 
^leiftift  (pencil)  gab,  ift  nic^t  fe^r  gut. 

B.  9.  ^a,  bafe  er  etma^  bauon  nal^m,  ba^  \ai)  id^,  aber  nic^t,  rt)ie 
Diet.  10,  ©nblic^  fanben  n»ir  ba^  §au^,  n)orin  ®oet()e  tDo^nte,  at^  er 
noc^  lebte;  unb  in  bent  3^^i^^i^f  ^^  iDeld^ent  er  immer  arbeitete,  ^eigte 
ntan  un^  au(^  einen  Xi\(i)  ntit  einer  geber  barauf,  In  omit  er  fc^rieb. 
IL  „3)a  fte^t  ber  Xi\(i),"  fagte  fie,  legte  bie  53ud^er  barauf  unb  fe^te 
3tDei  ©tii^te  baran.  12.  (gold^e  gebern  f)abe  ic^  aud^,  aber  id^  fd^reibc 
nic^t  oft  bantit.  13.  T)a^  toar  etn)a^,  n)ot)on  trir  ^u  (at)  jener  3^it  nie 
fprac^en.  14.  Hber  tDorauf  fi^t  er  benn  (then  =  please,  pray),  tdtnn 
er  nid)t  auf  einent  ©tul^le  fi^t?  —  ^uf  bent  3:ifd^e,  glaube  id^.  15.  W,^ 
h3ir  an  ben  glu^  fanten,  toar  fein  SSaffer  barin.  16.  !Du  fragft  ntid^, 
tnofilr  id^  i^nt  ba^  (^elb  gab?  —  3a,  benn  menu  e6  fiir  ben  §unb  tnar, 
fo  gabft  bu  i^nt  gu  t)iel  bafiir,  toeil  ba^  2;ier  (animal,  beast)  fd^on  lange 
franf  ift. 

C.  1.  He  showed  me  a  house  with  five  rooms  in  it,  of  which 
(whereof)  only  two  were  as  large  as  this.  2.  Here  is  the  girl 
with  the  flowers.  Have  you  the  money  for  them  (therefor)  ?  — 
Here  it  is.  3.  What  are  you  writing  with,  please?  —  With  your 
pen.  —  Who  gave  you  my  pen?  —  Charles  gave  it  to  me;  he  also 
wrote  with  it,  but  he  did  not  tell  you  about  it  (said  to  vou  nothing 


68  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

thereof).  4.  When  we  came  into-the  room,  we  saw  a  table  with 
books  on  it,  but  I  do  not  think  that  anybody  (jctnanb)  was  sit- 
ting at  it.  5.  The  children  showed  me  the  way  to  the  city,  for 
which  (wherefor)  I  gave  them  some  (ettDa^)  money.  6.  This  is 
the  forest  in  which  (wherein)  I  found  the  flowers  that  I  gave 
to  our  mother  yesterday.  7.  ''The  king  is  coming!"  he  said, 
whereupon  we  all  (alle)  ran  to-the  (an^)  window. 

D.  8.  If  you  are  for  it,  then  (fo)  I  am  no  longer  against  it 
(bagcgen).  9.  The  pen  with  which  (wherewith)  he  wrote  this, 
he  gave  to  me.  10.  This  is  the  carriage  in  which  (wherein)  the 
queen  sat.  11.  Here  is  a  river  without  water  in  it.  12.  He 
wrote  much  whereof  I  never  saw  anything.  13.  Thereupon 
they  asked  me  what  (tDoran)  he  died  of,  and  I  said  that  he  fell 
in  the  war.  14.  The  children  took  their  books  and  pens,  went 
into  my  room  with  them  (therewith  into  my  room)  and  wrote 
till  three  o'clock,  whereupon  they  played  till  five  in-the  garden. 
15.  "No,"  he  said,  "I  heard  nothing  of  it  until  she  came  herself, 
nor  did  my  wife."  16.  They  did  not  say  what  the  money  was  for 
which  they  gave  me,  but  I  think  it  is  for  the  flowers  and  apples. 
17.  What  (tnoran)  is  he  working  at  now?  —  At  his  book.  — ■-  And 
how  long  has  he  been  working  at  it  by  this  time^?  —  Three  years, 
I  think. 

1  Lesson  6.  ii.  note  1. 

Lesson  lo 

adjectives:  strong  inflection 


Strong  Endings.  Pronominal  Adjectives.  The  endings  of 
biefer,  jener  etc.,  as  also  those  of  the  two  articles,  are  called 
the  Strong  Endings;  and  all  these  words,  when  used  adjec- 
tively  (or  before  nouns)  are  called  Pronominal  Adjectives, 
because  most  of  them  are  of  pronominal  origin. 

Descriptive  Adjectives.  From  the  Pronominal  Adjectives 
we  distinguish  the  ordinary  or  Descriptive  Adjectives,  as  gro^ 
tall  or  fd^on  handsome. 


LESSON   10.    I:   ADJECTIVES 


69 


A  descriptive  adjective  is  not  inflected  when  used  predi- 
catively,  that  is,  when  modifying  a  noun  by  means  of  a  verb, 
e.  g.,  bk  ^naben  finb  gro^  the  hoys  are  tall.  But  when  a  de- 
scriptive adjective  is  used  attributively,  that  is,  when  it  mod- 
ifies a  noun  (expressed  or  understood)  directly,  as  tall  modifies 
hoys  in  the  sentence  tall  hoys  run  fast,  it  takes  the  strong  end- 
ings, like  biefer,  jener  etc.,  provided  that  it  is  not  preceded  hy  a 
pronominal  adjective  which  itself  has  a  strong  ending. 

How  the  descriptive  adjective  is  treated  when  it  is  preceded  by  a 
pronominal  adjective  with  a  strong  ending  will  be  explained  in  Lesson  11. 


SING.  MASC. 


good  man 

N.  gutcr    9D?anti 

G.  gutc^    Tlannt^ 

D.  gutcm  SO^annc 

A.  Qutcn   aJJann 


SING.  FEM. 

good  woman 
Qute   grau 
guter  grau 
guter  grau 
gutc    grau 


SING.  NEUT. 

good  child 
gutc^    tinb 
gutC)^    tlnbcg 
gutcm  ^inbc 
gutCig    ^inb 


PLUR.  MASC.  FEM.  NEUT. 

good  men,  women,  children 
N.     gutc    Tlanmx,        grauen,       ^inber 
G.     gutcr  SO^anner,        S^t^iien,       ^inber 
D.     gutcn  9D2annem,      graucn,       ^inbem 
A.     gute   SJJanner,        grauen,       ^inber 


VOCABULARY 

bic  33rlcfc  letter 

bie  J^anbcr  land,  country,  soil 

bie  <S(^loffcr  castle,  palace 

bie  ^ird^eti  church 

bie  ©tra^en  street 


ber  33rlef 

ba6  2anb 

ba^  ©d^Iofe 

bie  tird^e 

bie  ©trage 

bie.  2tnU,  plur.  only,  people,  persons 


i^  faufe  /  huy 
i^  faufte  /  hought 
olt  old 
j[ung  young 


neu  new 

lang  long 

hirg  short 

fc^Ied^t  bad,  poor,  mean 


70  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

A.  1.  3n  {ebcm  2anht  gibt  c^  gutc  9}?enfd^en  unb  fc^Iec^tc  SD^enfd^cn, 
armc  J^eute  unb  reid^c  ?eute.  2.  ^leine  Scinber  ^aben  oft  grofec  unb 
rcic^c  ©tcibte  mit  fd^oncn  altcn  ^iiufern  unb  ^irc^en  barin.  3.  3Senn  er 
altc  33uc§er  faufte,  fo  gab  er  oft  mel^r  ®elb  baflir,  al^  ftir  neuc.^  4.  33or 
mand^en  §aufern  be^  !l)orfe^  fafeen  altc  franfc  Wdnntx  unb  grauen, 
unb  auf  htn  ©trafeen  fpielten  fleinc  ^inber.  5.  Sangc  iSriefe  fc^reibe 
id^  i^m  nie,  unb  er  mir  auc^  nic^t,  benn  toir  l^aben  faum  (scarcely)  ^dt 
genug  fiir  furgc.  6.  T)k\t  geber  Ift  noc^  neu,  aber  fie  fc^reibt  fc^on 
fd^Ied^t.  7.  SSarum  faufft  bu  ben  3:ifd^  nld^t?  —  ^Selc^en?  —  !Den  ba. 
—  '^tx  ift  nid^t  grog  genug  fiir  mein  ^i^^^^^  8.  3d^  fd^reibe  biefen 
iBrief  mit  5(nna6  alter  geber,  9.  ^enn  mir  tangc  Xage  ^aben,  fo  l^aben 
n)ir  auc^  furge  5^ad^te,  or  ^ahtn  ioir^  langc  2age,  fo  ^ahtn  toir  aud^  furgc 
"^1X^)1^,  10.  „®utcn  9D?orgen/'  fagte  er,  aU  er  in^  3^^^^^  ^^^* 
11.  ^a,  'ba^  txtaxtn  fc^onc  Jage,  alter  greunb,  al^  mir  noc^  jung  toaren, 
bie  fommen  nie  mieber  {again,  hack)\  12.  3n  meffen  ^agen  fu^rt 
\\)x,  bitte?  — ^ir  fu^ren  in  33ater^  altem  Sagen. 

B.  13.  55or  gtoei  ober  brei  Sa^ren  faufte  §err  ©d^mibt,  ber  Je^t 
fel)r  reid^  ift,  einen  ©arten  mit  grogen  alten  53aumen  unb  fd^onen  iBlumen 
barin.  14.  !^a^  finb  fcl)led)te  gebern,  folc^e  faufe  id^  nie,  benn  id^ 
fd^reibe  nur  mit  guten.^  15.  SBenn  bie  2;age  furg  finb,  fo  finb  bic 
^'ix6)iz  auc§  lang,  or  (Sinb  bie  Jage^  furg,  fo  finb  bie  ^lac^te  aud^  lang. 
16.  ^leine  ^inber  fpielen  oft  mit  jungen  .^unben.  17.  ©roge  33(iter 
l^aben  nid^t  immer  groge  (Si)^ne,  fc^one  9}liitter  nic^t  immer  f(^i)ne 
Sloc^ter.  18.  5llte  ©d^loffer  gibt  e^  in  biefem  ?anbe  nid^t,  unb  fel)r 
alte  £ird^en  aud^  nid^t.  19.  3eben  (Sonntag  fcl)reiben  mir  lange  53riefc 
an  unfere  greunbe.  20.  (Sinb  bag  alte  53iid^er  ober  neue^?  —  (gg  finb 
neue.^  21.  ^ir  ful^ren  burd^  lange  unb  burd^  furje  ©trafeen.  22.  3Son 
3cit  gu  ^t\i  fpielt  fie  mit  unfre^  greunbe^  fleiner  ^^oc^ter.  23.  3Senn 
^inber  armer  ?eute  p  i^m  famen,  or  ^amen  ^inber^  armer  ?eute 
gu  i^m,  fo  gab  er  il^nen  oft  5ipfel  ober  aud^  etma^  {some,  a  little)  @clb. 
24.  „3unger  greunb,"  fagte  er,  „mer  fein  ®elb  ^at  unb  nid^t  arbeitet, 
ber  mirb  aud^  nid^t  reidf)."  25.  3d^  bat  ®ie  um  marmei^  SSaffer,  aber 
®ie  fommen  mit  faltem,^  grdulein  9}Jarie.  26.  3)ic  gebern  folc^er 
3Sogel  foften  {cost)  oft  Diel  ©elb. 

1  Translate  new  ones,  good  ones  etc.  The  ending  of  the  German  adjective, 
agreeing  with  the  noun  understood,  corresponds  to  the  pronoun  one  or  ones 
which  EngHsh  substitutes  for  the  noun.  —  2  jn  German,  inversion  quite 
commonly  takes  the  place  of  the  h)cnn-construction  (with  the  transposed 
verb),  in  English  only  rarely,  e.  g.,  were  I  well=if  I  were  well,  I  should  go. 


LESSON    10.    i:   ADJECTIVES  71 

C.  1.  I  believe  those  (ha^)  are  poor  books  which  he  bought 
yesterday.  —  No,  they  (e^)  are  very  good  ones.^  2.  You  are 
good,  children.  3.  You  are  good  children.  4.  Who  lives  in  the 
king's  old  palace?  —  Two  of  (t)on)  his  sons  live  in  it.  5.  Rich 
people's  children  do  not  often  play  with  poor  people's  children. 
6.  The  kings  of  small  countries  often  have  more  money  than 
those  (use  ber,  not  jener)  of  large  countries.  7.  It  is  true,  the 
city  has  beautiful  old  churches,  but  also  dark  and  short  streets. 

8.  On  (an)  that  day  he  drove  (with)  Mrs.  Smith's  young  horses. 

9.  When  I  was  (still)  young,  I  used  to  write  (wrote  always)  long 
letters,  but  now  I  am  old  and  write  only  short  ones.  10.  Are 
those  (ba^)  new  houses,  yonder?  —  No,  only  the  windows  and 
doors  are  new.  11.  ''Poor  child,"  she  said,  "your  hands  and 
feet  are  as  cold  as  ice  (@i^)."  12.  There  comes  my  father's  new 
carriage.  13.  Whenever"*  he  found  good,  new  books,  he  bought 
them. 

D.  14.  In  the  streets  of  the  city  we  saw  young  people  with 
beautiful  flowers  in  their  hands,  who  were  waiting  for  (auf  with 
ace.)  the  king  and  the  queen.  15.  We  children  heard  much 
about  (t)on)  the  king's  large  palaces  and  gardens,  and  about  old 
churches  with  beautiful  windows.  16.  Whenever*  we  went  into 
the  garden,  we  found  only  poor  apples  and  no  flowers.  17.  Small 
countries  often  have  long  rivers.  18.  Mr.  Smith  buys  old  books, 
if  they  are  not  too  bad.  19.  On  (an)  this  side  of  the  road  stood 
young  trees,  but  on  that  old  ones.^  20.  What  do  you  say  to 
Uncle  Charles's  new  carriage?  —  It  is  very  fine,  but  not  large 
enough,  I  think.  21.  Old  towns  often  have  short  and  bad 
streets.  22.  Those  (ba^)  are  the  gardens  of  very  poor  people, 
are  they  not  fine?  23.  "Poor  old  woman!"  he  said,  "her  son 
fell  in-the  war,  her  husband  lies  sick  at  home,  and  she  her- 
self works  from  morning  till  evening,  but  hds  not  enough 
to  eat  (cffen)!"  24,  Have  you  no  water,  Anna?  —  Yes,  but 
only  cold  [water].  25.  Yes,  I  have  pens  enough,  but  only 
poor  ones.  26.  They  are  sick,  children.  27.  They  (c6)  are 
sick  children. 

3  See  note  1  above ;  henceforth  the  omission  of  one  or  ones  will  not  be  in- 
dicated by  the  use  of  square  brackets.  —  <  Lesson  7.  1.  note  1,  and  note  2 
above. 


72  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

II 

It  follows  from  what  was  said  above  that  descriptive  ad- 
jectives must  have  strong  endings  (not  only  when  they  are 
not  preceded  by  any  modifier  at  all,  as  in  the  Models  and  in 
the  sentences  of  the  first  part  of  this  lesson,  but  also)  after 
all  pronominal  or  other  modifiers  which  themselves  lack  these 
strong  endings;  hence 

1.  After  the  nom.  sing,  masc,  and  the  nom.  and  ace.  sing, 
neuter  of  the  indefinite  article  and  other  words  of  its  group. 

2.  After  words  or  forms  like  the  following: 

tfma^  some,  a  little  toeld^  what  a,  what,  which 

mt1)x  more  lolel  much,  many 

allerlel'  all  kinds  of  tocntg  little,  few 

bielerlei'  many  kinds  of     ^     gtuci  two 

gcnug'  enough  brei  three 

mand^  many  a,  many  t)lcr  four  and  other  undeclined 

fold^  such  a,  such  numerals 

In  Lesson  5.  i,  mand),  fold^  and  h)eld^  are  given  with  strong  endings. 
Before  ordinary  or  descriptive  adjectives,  these  words  often  appear  in 
their  stem-form,  with  no  great  difference  in  meaning  from  their  inflected 
forms,  except  that  \od^  is  chiefly  used  in  exclamations  and  with  the 
meaning  of  what,  what  a,  e.  g.,  totl6)  grower  9JJann!  or  also  toeld^  cin  grower 
aWannI  what  a  tall  man! 

A.  1.  !Die«  ift  meiner  (Sd^rt)eftcm  alte«  §au^,  unb  ha^  ba  ii)x  ncuci3. 
2.  3n  icncm  ^riegc  fid  aud^  unfcr  jungcr  greunb.  3.  ^uf  bcm  Zi\(i)t 
lagcn  atlerlel  atte  ^iid^er  unb  brei  obcr  t)icr  fc^led^tc  gebern,  unb  an  bent 
Jifd^e  ftanb  ein  grower  ©tu^t.  4.  (gin  armc^  Wdh^tn  hat  un^  urn 
Spfel,  unb  tdtii  tilr  feine  Spfel  me^r  l^atten,  gaben  mlr  i^r  etmaS  fleine^* 
@elb.  5.  3^  glaube,  euer  neucr  SKagen  ift  ettua^  gu  grog  fiir  euer 
aim,  fleinc^  ^ferb.  6.  SSarum  faufft  bu  fold^  fc^Ie^tc^  ?anb?  !Du 
l^aft  iefet  fd^on  me^r  fc^led^tc^  aB  gutc§.  7.  @te  ritten  burd^  mand^ 
bunfelcn  SBalb  unb  famen  iiber  mand^  grofecn  glufe.  8.  2Beld^  grogc 
§anbe  unb  gtifee  ber  ^nabe  bort  f^ail  9.  Sarum  fommft  bu  nid^t  ntlt 
ttxoa^  faltcm  Staffer,  ^nna?  !Diefe^  {)ler  ift  fd^on  gu  \ioaxm,  10.  3Ser 
fo  t)lel  gutc  greunbc  l^at,  tolc  er,  bcr  ift  fein  armcr  SD^ann.    11.  511^  cr 


LESSON    10.    II :  ADJECTIVES  73 

au6  jcneti  Siinbcm  nad^  <gaufe  tarn,  l^atte  er  allcrtel  fleinc;^^  ®elb  bei  fid^.^ 
12,  (5ie  fanbcn  no(^  mand^en  5lpfel  unter  ben  ^aumeti,  aber  nid^t  genug 
gutc.  13.  ^dn,  ha^  %tf)t  nid^t/  meiti  gutcr  greunb.  SSenn  ha^  §au^ 
nur  fo  tDenig  grofee  3iTnmer  l^at,  or  §at  ha^  ^au6^  nur  fo  tDcnig  grofec 
^itnmer,  fo  faufc  id^  e^  nid^t. 

B.  14.  SBic  t)let  fd^Ied^tc  33ud^er  er  immer  fauft,  unb  trie  hjenig 
gutc!  15.  „^a  fomnten  gtoei  jungc  §erren  mit  gtuei  grogcn  ^unben," 
fagte  fie.  16.  (g^  gibt  me^^r  gutc  93?enfd^en  aU  fd^Ied^te,  glaube  tc^. 
17.  5^em,  fein  jungcr  greunb  fiel  ntc^t  im  ^riege,  ber  tebte  nod^  mand^ 
langc^  Qal^r  nad)  bem  ^riege.  18.  §aben  (Sie  nid^t  etrt)a^  fleino^* 
®elb  bei  fid^^?  —  3a,  aber  nur  \d)x  n)enig.  19.  (Bold)  armcn  ober 
franfcn  li^euten  gab  fie  oft  allerlei  fd^one  53tuTnen.  20.  SBeld^  fd^5nc§. 
ajJabd^en!  or  3BeI(^  ein  fd^dnc^  ayjabd^en!  —  3a,  ift  fie  nid^t  fd^fin? 
5Iber  fie  ift  bag  ^inb  armcr  i^eute.  21.  3n  jenem  Sanbe  fanb  id^  tjielerlei 
fd^lec^tc^  ®elb.  22.  !Dag  ge^t  nid^t,^  armc^  ^inb,  bie  geber,  momit 
bu  fd^reibft,  ift  ju  fc^Ied^t.  23.  SSenn  fie  fein  tDamte^  SSaffer  ntel^r 
l^atten,  or  fatten  fie^  fein  tDarmc^  3Saffer  mel^r,  fo  na^men  fie  oft  faltc^. 

24.  2(uf  fc^Ied^tcm  ?anbe  finbet  man  fotd^e  53aume  nid^t,  nur  auf  gutcm. 

25.  ,5aft  bu  nid^t  balb  altc  ^tld^er  genug?  toarum  f  auf  ft  bu  nid^t  aud^ 
tion  S^it  gu  3cit  ein  neue^?  26.  SSarum  fd^reibft  bu  immer  folc^ 
furje  iBriefe,  gutc  ^od^ter? 

1  Literally,  small  money,  i.  e.,  coins  or  change.  —  2  With  him,  and,  in  18, 
tuith  you  or  in  your  pocket;  see  Lesson  7.  11.  note  4.  —  ^  Literally,  goes  not,  i.  e., 
won't  do.  —  *  Lesson  10.  i.  note  2. 

C.  1.  He  has  much  poor  land  and  no  very  good  land. 
2.  There  we  saw  three  or  four  little  birds.  3.  At  (an)  the  door' 
stood  a  tall  man  with  two  small  boys.  4.  I  have  not  enough 
change  with  me.  5.  What  a  large  room  and  what  small  win- 
dows! he  said.  6.  I  have  many  a  beautiful  book  at  home,  and 
more  good  ones  than  he.  7.  Why  do  you  always  write  with 
such  bad  pens,  my  young  friend?  8.  In  the  city  there  are  not  so 
many  beautiful,  green  trees  as  [there  are]  here  in  (auf)  the  coun- 
try. 9.  There  comes  our  good  old  friend.  Poor  man!  How  he 
walks!  I\^think  he  is  sick.  10.  When  we  were  in  Niirnberg,  we 
saw  all  kinds  of  old  houses.  11.  A  little  boy  asked  me  for  some 
cold  water.  12,  I  never  write  long  letters,  and  but  few  short 
ones. 


74  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

D.  13.  What  [a]  large  dog  he  has  with  him  (self) !  14.  Many 
a  good  father  has  bad  sons.  15.  We  have  more  old  trees  in  our 
garden  than  young  ones.  16.  On  (an)  such  dark,  evenings  they 
stayed  at  home.  17.  That's  true,  my  good  friend,  this  is  a  rich 
country,  but  where  do  you  find  so  many  poor  people  as  here? 
18.  There  are  people  who  believe  that  no  good  man  is  without 
[an]  enemy.  19.  When  these  gentlemen  came  into  our  little 
village,  they  bought  all  sorts  of  good  land,  but  also  some  [that 
was]  bad.  20.  He  led  us  through  four  or  five  short  streets,  and 
there  we  found  little  children  enough.  21.  Is  that  not  a  fine  old 
castle?  he  said.  22.  Why  didn't  the  child  come  into  our  new 
house?  —  Because  your  big  dog  was  lying  in  front  of  your  door. 

Review  and  Drill 
Chiefly  on  Lessons  6-io 

This  exercise  is  independent  of  the  numbered  Lessons  and  may  be  omitted 
at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher. 

1.  Classify  and  inflect,  with  the  definite  article,  the  following 
nouns:  3Ung(mg  young  man,  youth,  ba^  ©el^eim'ni^  secret,  §off* 
nung  hope,  ber  ginger  finger,  *i|3ferbc^en,  Tlntkx,  greunbin,  ^rm 
(plur.  a)  arm,  9^ation'  (pronounce  ti  like  ji)  nation,  ber  ©d^na'bel 
(plur.  a)  beak,  hill,  ©efelCft^aft  company,  gifd^  fish,  ^lei'ntgfelt 
tfifle,  3ug  (plur.  U)  train,  §err,  ber  9^agel  (plur.  (x)  nail,  ^u^, 
hit  ^ame  lady,  glu^,  3a^r,  ba^  (Bc^id'fal  fate,  destiny,  ^amm 
(plur.  (i)  comb,  (Sc^lofe  (exception  to  what  rule?),  bit  Hnt'tDort 
answer,  ©elrol^n' f)eit  habit,  ber  Se^rer  teacher,  bit  ©age  legend. 

2.  Inflect:  unfer  ©ol^n,  fein  *^ferb,  btef-  .^llet'nlgfeit  this  trifie, 
tux-  Wntttx,  ien-  53u(^,  gut-  ^nabe,  alt-  fc^on-  ^Sd^Iog,  lang- 
grofe-  Xi\d),  mein-  grennbin,  alt-  greunb* 

3.  Supply  the  proper  endings:  ein  alt-  "ipferb,  filr  gut- 
^inber,  euer  neu-  §au^,  er  babet  (bathes)  immer  in  fait-  $3affer, 
er  l^at  fein-  §unb,  er  l^at  fein-  §unbe,  mit  gmei  grofe-  §unb-, 
ein  l^ol^-  (high)  iBanm,  er  rettete  (rescued)  un^  au^  grofe-  9^ot 
(fern,  distress),  fie  ritten  auf  iVbti  metfe-  (white)  ^ferb-.  er  ftecfte 


LESSON    11.    I :   ADJECTIVES  75 

{stuck)  fein-  §anb  in  fait-  iCSaffer,  bief-  !Dame-  finb  gut-  Sel^rerin- 
(give  the  English),  jen-  ^nabe-  finb  b-  (Sol)n-  arm-  (Sltern 
{'parents),  er  fd^reibt  lang-  iBrief-  mit  fd^Ied^t-  Sinte  (fem.  mA;). 

4.  Distinguish:  fid^  and  felbft,  an  and  auf,  unter  and  unten, 
9}^ann  and  9J?enfd^,  mand^  and  >oxd,  \6)\t6)i  and  arm,  menn  and 
iDann  and  al^,  menn  and  ob,  id^  tDOl^ne  and  id^  lebe,  mer  and 
iDcId^er. 

5.  Give  the  German  for  the  following  sentence  —  (a)  if  addressed 
to  one  person  with  whom  the  writer  is  on  intimate  terms ;  (b)  if  addressed 
to  two,  or  more,  such  persons;  (c)  if  addressed  to  one  person  with  whom 
the  writer  is  not  on  intimate  terms;  (d)  if  addressed  to  two,  or  more, 
such  persons:  /  was  looking  for  you  in  your  room,  but  you  are  not  here, 
hence  (alfo,  with  inversion)  /  vrrite  you  this  letter. 


Lesson  ii 

adjectives:  weak  inflection 


Weak  Endings.  When  a  descriptive  adjective  is  preceded 
by  bie fer,  jener  etc.,  by  the  definite  article,  or  by  any  form  of 
the  indefinite  article,  or  other  pronominal  word,  with  a  strong 
ending,  it  takes  one  of  a  simpler  set  of  endings,  called  the 


WEAK 

ENDINGS 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N. 

C 

e 

e 

cn 

G. 

en 

en 

en 

Ctl 

D. 

en 

en 

en 

cn 

A. 

en 

e 

c 

cn 

Notice  the  five  forms  in  bold-faced  type.  —  Compare  these  endings 
with  those  of  the  words  inflected  in  Lesson  7.  ii.  Review.  —  How  many 
different  forms  do  the  strong  endings  show?  how  many  the  weak?  How 
often,  and  where,  do  they  coincide  in  form? 


76  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

Models : 

SING.    MASC. 

this  or  the  good  man 
N.     biefer    or  ber    gutc     Tlann 
G.     biefe^    or  be^    gutcn    Tlannt^ 
D.     biefem  or  bent  guten    9JJanne 
A.      bie[en    or  ben    gutcn    SJJann 

SING.    FEM. 

</iis  or  the  good  woman 
N.     bicfe     or  ble    gutc     grau 
G.     biefer    or  ber    gutcn    grau 
D.     biefer    or  ber    gutcn   grau 
A.     biefc     or  bie    gutc     grau 

SING.    NEUT. 

this  or  the  good  child 
N.     biefer*  or  bag   gutc     ^Inb 
G.     biefer    or  be^    gutcn   ^inbe3 
D.     biefem  or  bem  gutcn   ^inbe 
A.      biefem*  or  ha^   gutc     ^Inb 

*  The  contraction  of  btcfe§  into  bie§  does  not  aflfect  the  ending  of  the  adjective. 
PLUR.   MASC.    FEM.    NEUT. 

these  or  the  good  men,  women,  children 
N.     biefe     or  bie    gutcn  9Jtdnner,     graueu,  ^inber 
G.     biefer    or  ber   gutcn  Wdnntv,     graueu,  ^inber 
D.     biefen   or  htn  gutcn  9}?annern,  graueu,  ^inbern 
A.     biefe     or  bie    gutcn  Tldnncv,     grauen,  ^inber 

VOCABULARY 

ber  <Bommtx  bie  ^Sommer  summer 

ber  SSinter  bie  Winter  winter 

bag  ^leib  bie  ^leibcr  dress 

bie  ©(^ule  bie  ©c^ulen  school 

bie  SItem,  plur.  only,  parents 

x^  mdnt  I  mean,  think,  suppose  [<^  trug  /  carried,  wore 

id^  mcinte  /  meant,  thought,  supposed       lieb  dear 


LESSON    11.    i:   ADJECTIVES  77 

A.  !♦  ^ie  f)at  man^^  fd^oncg  ^leib*  2.  ^ie  Ifiat  tnand^e^^  fd^finc 
mdh.  3,  ^ic  (gltcnt  na^men  i^r  Eeineg  ^inb  mlt  (fid))^  gur^  tlrd^c. 
4.  ©el^t  3^re  fleinc  2:od^ter  fd^on  gur^  ©d^ule?  —  9^em,  fie  ift  nod^ 
nid^t  alt  genug.  5.  3m^  SSlnter,  tDenn  e^  fait  ift,  fingen  bie  fteincti 
33ogel  nid^t.  6,  ilSeld^en  meineti  ©ie,  grau  ©d^mibt,  ben  grofecn 
^Ttaben  ober  ben  fleincn?  —  3enett  grofecn  bort.  7.  5lber  ba6  gel^t 
nic^t,  lieber  greunb,  in  biefem  bunflcn,^  falten  3^^^^i^  tDerben  (Sie 
franf.  8.  ^enn  ber^  ©ommer  tarn  unb  e^  marm  tduxht,  famen  unfere 
liebcn  Sttem  immer  gu  unS  auf^  ^anb.®  9,  SSar  ba^  eure  ©d^mefter,  bie 
ha^  bunflc^  ^(eib  trug?  —  3o,  ba^  mar  fie,  10.  gr  fam  gn  ung,  Todl  er 
nteinte,  bafe  il^r  nod^  immer  bei  un^  njol^ntet.  11.  SO^it  fold^en  altcn  gebem 
fd^reibe  ic^  nie,  n)arum  faufft  bn  bir  feine  neucn?  12.  3n  jeber  grofecn 
<Stabt  finbet  man  arme  ^eute.  13.  Sr  fagt  nid^t,  tioddjt  alten  ^iid^er 
er  meint.    14.  Wix  I)aben  eine  feljr  gutc  ©c^nle  in  unferm  fleincn  3)orfc, 

B.  15.  SBenn  il)r  l^eutc  ^w^  ^ird^e  gel^t,  fo  gcl^en  n)ir  mtt  (eud^).^ 
16.  3m*  ©ommer  n)ot)nte  ber  gute,  attc  §err  anf  bem  !i?anbe,®  im*  3Bin* 
ter  in  ber  ©tabt.  17.  3Son  iretd^er  armcn  gran  fprad^en  (Sie?  —  5Son 
ber  gran,  beren  ^inbern  ©ie  geftem  bie  fd^oncn  Spfel  gaben.  18.  S^ 
meine  ben  jungen  §errn  ©d^mibt,  ®ie  ben  attcn.  19.  @6  ift  feinc 
fd^lec^tc  ©c^ule,  aber  fie  ift  nnr  filr  ^inber  \d)V  reid^er  ©Item.  20.  ^trug 
ha^  fteine  SD^iibd^en  nicf)t  ein  bunflc^^  ^leib?  —  3ct,  cin  grilne^,  gtaube 
id^.  21.  3a,  ba6  meinte  ic^  t)or  brei  ^lagen  and^  nod),  lieber  grennb, 
aber  e^  ge^t  nid)t,  benn  n)enn  n)ir  ha^  altc  ^au^  mit  bem  fd^oncn,  grogcn 
©arten  nid^t  ^leute  faufen,  fo  fommt  morgen  fcin  rei(^er  ^mber  au§  ber 
@tabt  unb  fauft  e^  felbft.  22.  ^ir  ritten  burc^  mand)i  bunEen^  SSalb 
(or  burd^  manc^en^  bunflcn^  ^alb),  unb  mand^^  lange  '^a^t  (or  mand^e^ 
langc  ^a(^t)  fc^liefen  (slept)  \d\v  unter  einem  griincn  iBaum  ober  auf 
freiem  (open)  gelbe.  23.  211^  ioir  an  bm  grofeen  glufe  famen,  fa^en 
toir  bie  fd)onc,  alte  ©tabt  auf  bicfer  (Seite  unb  ha^  2)orf  mit  ber 
fleincn  ©d^ule  auf  jener. 

1  Lesson  10.  ii.  2.  —  2  Often  omitted,  whereby  mit  comes  to  correspond  to 
along;  on  fid)  in  sentence  3,  compare  also  Lesson  7.  ii.  note  4.  —  ^  ^ux  ^irc^c 
and  gur  ©d)ule  —  both  with  the  article  —  mean  to  church  (for  worship)  and 
to  school  (for  instruction),  whereas  the  corresponding  phrases  with  nad)  or 
in  (and  the  article)  do  not  so  commonly  imply  this;  see  Lesson  7.  ii.  note  3. 
—  *  The  names  of  the  seasons  (all  masculine)  are  mostly  used  with  the  def . 
art.  —  «  Adjectives  in  unaccented  el,  en  or  er  commonly'  drop  the  e  cf  these 
suffixes  in  inflection;  see  Lesson  6.  ii.  — «  The  regular  phrases  for  into  the 
country  and  (sentence  16)  in  the  country,  as  distinguished  from  the  city. 


78  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

C.  1.  I  meant  the  old  book,  not  the  new  one.  2.  The  parents 
of  these  little  children  are  very  poor.  3.  We  wore  dark  dresses, 
because  it  was  winter  (no  article).  4.  ''That  is  a  good  school," 
he  said,  ''but  we  also  have  poor  schools  in  our  large  city."  5.  In 
summer  we  have  long  days  and  short  nights.  6.  Many  a  poor 
(give  two  forms)  girl  had  not  one  warm  dress.  7.  Do  you  mean 
the  little  house  which  I  showed  you  when  we  went  through  that 
short  dark  street?  —  Yes,  who  lives  in  it?  —  A  dear  old  gentle- 
man, whose  sons  went  to  school  with  me  when  we  were  (yet) 
boys.  8.  "Where  do  you  go  to  school,  dear  children?"  I 
asked  them,  and  they  answered:  "In  the  little  village  yonder, 
where  we  also  go  to  church."  9.  When  I  entered  (came  into-)the 
room,  he  was  sitting  at  a  little  table  and  writing  a  long  letter  to 
(an  with  ace.)  his  old  friend.  10.  How  beautiful  it  is  now  in 
the  country!  11.  There  are  no  good  apples  this  year,  I  think 
(believe).  12*.  Those  are  the  poor  parents  whose  son  fell  in-the 
war. 

D.  13.  We  carried  the  new  books  into  the  large  room,  but 
the  old  ones  are  still  in  the  small  one.  14.  Every  Sunday,  in 
winter  and  in  summer,  these  good  old  people  go  to  church. 
15.  Which  new  house  do  you  mean?  —  The  green  one  there  on 
(auf)  this  side  of  the  little  river.  16.  If  you  buy  the  large  field, 
(fo)  I  [will]  buy  the  small  one.  17.  She  (demonstr.)  gave  me 
many  a  fine  (give  two  forms)  apple  when  I  was  (still)  a  small 
boy.  18.  The  girls  wore  their  new  dresses  when  the  queen 
came.  19.  She  worked  and  lived  only  for  her  dear  old  mother. 
20.  The  good  son  gave  the  money  to  his  old  parents.  21.  These 
big  boys  always  come  too  late  (fpat)  to  school.  22.  Did  you 
mean  the  old  Mr.  Smith,  or  the  young  one?  —  I  meant  the  gentle- 
man in  whose  carriage  we  drove  to  town  five  or  six  days  ago. 
Whether  he  is  old  or  young,  I  do  not  know.'^  —  That  is  the  young 
one.  He  lives  in  the  country,  but  the  old  gentleman  lives  in  the 
city.     23.  In  that  big  school  you  find  only  sons  of  rich  men. 

7  /  know  i<i)  n)ei§, 

II 

The  Principle  of  Double  Adjective  Inflection  restated.  We  have  now 
seen  that  every  ordinary  or  descriptive  adjective,  when  used  attribu- 
tively, is  subject  to  two  modes  of  inflection,  the  strong  and  the  weak, 


LESSON  11.    II :  ADJECTIVES 


79 


and  that  its  ending  in  every  case  or  form  depends  on  what  kind  of  modi- 
fier, if  any,  precedes  it.  If  this  is  a  word  without  strong  ending,  or  if 
no  modifier  precedes,  the  adjective  takes  the  strong  ending  of  its  case, 
number  and  gender;  but  if  the  preceding  modifier  has  itself  a  strong 
ending,  then  this  is  not  repeated  on  the  adjective,  but  changed  to  a  weak 
ending,  e  or  en.  In  four  forms,  however,  the  weak  endings  coincide  with 
the  strong,  and  in  these  the  endings,  though  called  strong  and  weak 
respectively,  are  distinguished  only  in  name.  —  The  table  below  shows 
the  combinations  of  strong  and  weak  endings,  the  forms  in  which  they 
coincide  being  given  only  once.  The  inflections  below  of  fein  and  gut 
before  nouns  of  all  genders  are  the  best  suited  to  make  the  beginner 
grasp  the  application  of  the  principle  of  inflection,  because  they  exhibit 
both  kinds  of  endings.  In  them,  the  strong  endings  of  gut  are  put  in 
bold-faced  type,  and  the  forms  in  which  strong  and  weak  endings  coin- 
cide are  marked  with  a  star. 

STRONG    AND    WEAK    ENDINGS    COMBINED 


SINGULAF 

PLURAL 

masc. 

fem. 

neut. 

m.  f .  n. 

s.    w. 

8.      W. 

s.    w. 

s.    w. 

N. 

er     e 

e 

e«     c 

N. 

c     en 

G. 

c«     en 

er     en 

e«     en 

G. 

er    en 

D. 

em    en 

er     en 

em    en 

D. 

en 

A. 

en 

e 

c«     e 

A. 

e     en 

Models: 

SING.  MASC. 

SING.  FEM. 

SING.  NEUT. 

N. 

fein 

gutcr 

Wlann 

feine    gute*   ^rou 

fein 

gutc^  linb 

G. 

(cineg 

guten 

9JJanne8 

feiner  guten   grou 

feineS 

guten  ^inbeg 

D. 

feinem 

guten 

ajjanne 

feiner  guten   ^^rau 

feinem  guten  ^inbc 

A. 

feinen 

guten* 

9}?ann 

feine    gute*  grau 

PLURAL 

fein 

gutc^  tinb 

•    N. 

feine     guten 

2)?anner,     ^raucn, 

tinber 

G. 

feiner   guten 

SJtanner,     ^^rauen, 

Winter 

D. 

feinen  guten*  '^lanntvn,   ^^rauen, 

^inbem 

A. 

feine     guten 

SD^anner,     JVrauen, 

£inber 

Supply  the  endings  and  inflect:  fein  gro§-  ^ou8,  bie[-  flein-  ^ferb,  bctn 
iung-  greunb,  i^r-  \ith-  alt-  9D?utter,  euer  ncu-  SSagen,  jen-  long-  .^ricg,  etn 
griin-  33aum,  bie  flein-  2;ilr,  mein  tnarm-  ^leib,  ber  fait-  iliBinter,  unfer-  neu- 
ec^ule. 


80 


BEGINNING  GERMAN 


Lesson  12 


PRONOMINAL  WORDS   WITH   STRONG  AND   WEAK  INFLECTION 


The  principle  of  double  inflection  with  strong  and  weak 
endings  applies  also  to  certain  pronouns,  pronominal  adjec- 
tives and  indefinite  numerals  which,  like  descriptive  adjectives, 
can  be  used  both  with  and  without  the  definite,  or  indefinite, 
article.  These  we  take  up  in  two  groups,  one  in  each  part  of 
the  lesson. 

Group  I  (only  the  stems  are  given  in  this  list) : 


anbcr-   other,  different         iDentg- 
beib-     both,  two  jeb- 

t)tct-      much,  many  \o\6)- 


little,  few 

each,  every,  everybody 

such,  such  a 


EXAMPLES  WITH  STRONG  FORMS 

cr  ]^at  ein  anberc;^  iBud^  he  has  an- 
other book 

beibc  ©o^ne  finb  l^ler  both  sons  are 
here 

id^  l^ore  Diclc  33ogel  /  hear  many 
birds 

mtt  nur  tDenigcm  ©elbe  with  but 
little  money 

jebc^  ^inbe^  of  every  child 

ein  fold^cr  9}?ann  such  a  man 


EXAMPLES  WITH  WEAK  FORMS 

cr  l^at  \)a^  anberc  Sud^  he  has  the 

other  book 
hit  belbctt  <So^ne  finb  ]f)ter  the  two 

{both  the)  sons  are  here 
id)  I)ore  bie  t)le(en  33oge(  I  hear 

the  (many)  numerous  birds 
mlt  bem  toenigcn  ©elbe  with  the 

(little)  small-amount-of  money 
elne^  jebcn  ^tnbe^  of  every  {single) 

child 
eine^  fold^cn  9[)lanne^  of  such  a 

man 


VOCABULARY 

\d)  mad^e  /  make,  do  x6)  trinfe  /  drink 

\6)  mad^te   /  made,  did        tcb  tranf  /  drank 
l^ei^   hot  leic^t  light,  easy 

fc^trer  heavy,  difficult,  hard 


LESSON   12.   i:  PRONOMINAL  WORDS  81 

A.  1.  5In  l^cifeen  Xag^tn  lagett  beibc  §unbe  unter  bcm  attcn  53aum 
oor  ber  ^au^tiir.^  2.  !l)arauf  fiil^rte  id^  bie  belbcn  fleinen  ^nabcn  bor 
ba^  §au^  unb  fe^te  fie  auf  bie  ^ipfcrbe,  3,  Slnbere  ^iinber,  anberc  Scute, 
4.  !l)er  anberc  SBagen  h)ar  gu  fd^mer  fiir  bag  arme  fleine  ^ferb.  5.  T)it 
hjenigen  iBlld^er,  tueld^e  er  nod^  ^atte,  al^  er  \taxh,  fauften  feine  ^reunbe. 
6.  SBenn  e^  im  <3ommer  fel^r  ^eife  ift  unb  man  gu  l3ie(  falter  SSaffer 
trinft,  fo  tnirb  man  leic^t  franf.  7,  (gg  ift  n)a{)r,  er  l^atte  nur  trenigc 
greunbe,  aber  biefe  tnenigcn  n)aren  gute  greunbe,  8.  ^a^  ift  nid^t  fo 
leic^t,  tDie  bu  glaubft,  licber  greunb.  9.  SKaS  mad^t  bicfcr  reid^e  9D?ann 
mit  feinem  tjielcn  ®clbe?  Tlan  l^firt  nie,  ha^  er  hen  armen  Seuten 
tttisa^  bat)on  gibt  (gives).  10»  giir  jebc^  ^inb  madjte  fie  ein  neue«, 
fd^oneg  ^leib»  11.  (Sin  jebcr  Don  il^nen  tranf  etma^J  falte^  3Saffer. 
12.  5ln  einen  fold^cn  @ott  gtaubt  l^eute  fein  SD^enfd^  me^r. 

B.  13.  ®ott  ift  ber  greunb  unb  3Satcr  eineS  jebcn  93?enf d^en,  ob  er 
arm  ober  reic^  ift  (or  ob  er  arm  ift  ober  reid^).  14.  iBeibcr  ^naben 
58ater  toaren  fet)r  reid^.  15.  ^id^t  jebcr  finbet  ha^  anberc  Sud^  fo 
leid^t,  n)ie  ®ie  e^  finben,  bietc  2tutt  meinen,  eS  ift  fet)r  fd^rtjer.  16.  i)ic 
beibcn  53niber  be^  grdulcin^  l^aben  jebcr  ein  fd^one^  ^ferb  unb  einen 
grogen  ^unb.  17.  33ielc  Seute  trinfen  jebcn  3)?orgen  tfrna^  l^eifee^ 
SSaffer,  anberc  falter.  18.  SSaS  mad^t  ber  alte  §err  mit  ben  tiielcn 
33ud^em,  bie  er  immer  fauft?  19.  $Ser  fold^cr  guten  9}?enfc^en  geinb  ift, 
ber  ift  felbft  fein  guter  9)?enfd^.  20.  3>a§  njcnigc  ®elb,  treld^e^  er  fold^ 
armen  Seuten  gab,  mad^te  fie  nid^t  reid^  unb  i^n  nid^t  arm.  21.  ^unbe, 
•iPferbe  unb  SD^enf d^en  tranfen  bon  bem  SBaffer  au§  bem  fleinen  gluffe, 
benn  anberc^  ^atte  man  in  jenem  fieifeen  (gommer  nidfit.  22.  SBeld^ 
grofee  unb  fd^mere  'ipferbe  ioir  in  !2it>erpool  fallen!  23.  ^ag  ift  nid^t 
toal^r,  ein  fold^cr  ^aum,  n)ie  ber  ha,  ftefjt  in  feinem  anbem  ©artcn  unfrer 
<Biaht,  unb  toer  mir  einen  fold^cn  geigt,  bem  gebe  (give)  id)  aKe^,  toag  id^ 
l^abe.    24.  3Sor  jebcr  ^au^tiir^  in  bem  fteinen  2)orfe  lag  ein  §unb. 

1  Compound  nouns  mostly  have  the  gender  and  inflection  of  the  last  member. 

C.  1.  Both  girls  wore  dark  dresses  on  that  hot  day.  2.  I  did 
not  hear  what  the  other  old  man  did  with  his  money,  but  this 
one  gave  it  to  his  wife  and  his  children.  3.  At  four  o'clock, 
when  school  ''let  out"  (when  the  school  was  out,  au6),  every 
child  ran  home.  4.  The  two  (both)  brothers  bought  much  good 
land,  but  also  some  that  was  bad  (some  bad).  5.  Our  king  is  as 
rich  as  those  of  other  countries.     6.  The  feathers  of  such  a  bird 


82  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

cost  (foftcn)  a  great  deal.  7.  ''That  is  all  very  easy/'  he  said, 
"if  one  only  has  money  enough."  8.  How  many  horses  and 
carriages  and  dogs  he  had,  she  did  not  tell  me.  9.  Thereupon 
the  father  gave  his  son  a  different  book,  which  was  not  so  diffi- 
cult. 10.  The  few  apples  which  we  found  in  our  garden  we  gave 
to  the  boys  of  the  poor  woman  who  always  worked  for  us. 
11.  But  if  the  water  was  too  hot,  why  did  you  drink  it?  Why 
didn't  you  wait?  12.  Only  few  of  (don)  the  many  young  men 
of  our  town  who  went  to  (into)  the  war  came  home  again  (iDicbcr; 
transl.  again  home).  13.  I  never  drink  such  cold  water,  my 
dear  boy. 

D.  14.  We  saw  no  such  flowers  in  your  two  (in  your  both) 
gardens.  15.  What  do  you  say  to  such  a  carriage,  Charles? — • 
It  (demonstr.)  is  too  heavy  for  your  horses.  16.  She  knows 
(fcnttt)  the  dress  of  every  [single]  child  in-the  village.  17.  ''Is 
that  all?"  he  asked,  "this  small-amount-of  money  for  so  many 
books?"  18.  Charles  and  I  rode  on  horseback,  the  other  boys 
went  on  foot.  19.  What  are  you  drinking  there,  my  friend?  — 
What  I  drink  every  morning,  a  little  (use  tttGa^,  or  ein  h)enlg, 
without  ending)  hot  water.  20.  Both  books  were  easy.  21.  He 
believes  that  every  good  man  has  his  enemies.  Do  you  beheve 
that  too?  —  No,  I  don't  believe  it.  22.  What  is  he  doing  with 
so  many  horses  and  dogs?  —  He  has  four  sons,  and  each  of  (t)on) 
them  has  a  horse  and  a  big  dog.  23.  The  good  old  woman  used 
to  make  (made  always)  all-sorts-of  beautiful  flowers  of  (au6) 
paper  (*ipaptcr,  pronounce:  papeer').  24.  I  never  drank  such  good 
water  as  this  here.  25.  The  sons  of  such  a  (a  such)  man  never 
play  with  other  people's  children. 

II 

Group  II  (only  the  nominatives  of  the  singular  are  given  in 
this  list): 


STRONG    FORMS 

WEAK   FORMS 

elncr, 

-c,    -c^  one 

bet, 

blc,     bag  einc  the  one 

mciner, 

-t,    -C^  mine 

ber, 

hit,     bag  meinc  mine 

bcincr, 

-t,     -e^   yours 

bcr, 

bic,     ha^  beinc  yours 

feiner, 

-C,     -C^   his 

ber, 

bic,    bag  fetnc  his 

LESSON    12.    II :   PRONOMINAL   WORDS  83 

tf)rcr,  -t,  -t§  hers  ber,  hit,  ba^  ll^re  hers 

feincr,  -c,  -c^  its  ber,  bie,  ba6  fetnc  i7s 

unf(e)rcr,  -c,  -c^  ours  ber,  ble,  ha^  unf(e)rc  ours 

eu(e)rcr,  -c,  -e^  ^/^'^^^  ^^i^^  ^^^/  ^^^  eu(e)re  yours 

i^rcr,  -c,  -c^  theirs  bcr,  bie,  bag  i^rc  theirs 

Q^xtXf  -c,  -C!^  2/^i6rs  bcr,  bic,  bag  3^rc  2/o^^^s 

These  forms  are  pronouns  only,  except  htv,  bit,  ha^  cine,  which  is 
also  used  as  attributive  adjective:  ba^  cine  33ud^  the  one  book.  They  must 
be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  attributive  adjectives  in  Lesson  6. 
All  the  stems  in  Lesson  6  occur  here  again,  except  fcin  (for  which  see 
Lesson  13).  The  weak  forms  of  the  possessive  pronouns  above  are  less 
common  than  the  strong. 

VOCABULARY 

bcr  53crg  bic  ^crge  mountain 

bag  2^ier  bie  2^iere  animal,  beast 

i(^  fd^tief  /  slept  f)od^*  high,  tall 

faul  lazy  \taxt  strong 

fleifeig  diligent,  industrious  ftilt  still,  quiet 

gang  whole,    entire,    adv.    quite,  tot  dead 

very  ha,  conj.,  since,  as 

gliicfUd^  happy,  lucky  aV\o  hence,  therefore,  and  so 

(Sg  may  stand  as  the  anticipatory,  or  grammatical,  subject  of  a  verb, 
the  latter  agreeing  in  number  with  the  true,  or  logical,  subject.  In  this 
use,  c6  often  corresponds  to  the  expletive  there:  c«  hjor  cinntat  cin  ^onig 
there  was  once  a  king  or  once  upon  a  time  there  was  a  king;  c8  toarcn  cin- 
mal  smei  53ruber  there  were  once  two  brothers;  eg  tarn  cinmal  ein  SOZonn  there 
came  once  a  man;  c3  famcn  cinmal  gtuci  ^naben  etc.  See  also  Lesson  9.  i. 
note  5. 

A.  1.  3c§  glaubc,  i^r  f(^lieft  nod^,  ^arl,  benn  in  beinem  3^^^^^^^ 
ttjie  (as  or  as  well  as)  in  feincm  (or  bent  feincn)  mar  alleg  gang  ftiE, 
alg  id)  oben  bei  euc^  tioax,  alfo  ging  ic^  o^ne  euc^  auf  ben  ^ol^en  ^erg. 
2.  (Solc^  faule  ^naben  ^abe  ic^  in  nteiner  gangen  (Bd)uk  nic^t,  §err 
©cfimibt,  n)ie  8ie  in  3^rcr  (or  ber  3^rcn)  ^aben,  aber  ha^  fo  fe^r  bicle 
Don  nteincn  (or,ben  meincn)  fteigig  finb,  bag  fage  ic^  aud^  nid^t.  3.  ginbc 
ic^^  meine  Jeber  nic^t,  fo  fc^reibe  id^  mit  beincr  (or  ber  beincn)  ober  mit 
i^rcr  (or  ber  ifircn).    4.  '^o?  einc^  (or  bag  einc)  t3on  feinen  'ipferben 

*$od^  drops  the  c  in  inflection:  cin  ^ol^er  S3erg  (but  bcr  S3erg  ift  ^oc^). 


84  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

franf  tourbe,  fo  nal^m  er  unfcrc  (or  bic  unfcrcn)  unb  \nf)v  mtt  tl^ncn  gur 
<Stabt;  aber  al^  er  urn  fiinf  U^r  iDiebcr  {again,  back)  nad^  §aufe  fatn, 
lag  feiit  arme^  ^ler  ba^  unb  tt)ar  fc^on  tot.  5.  ©rofee  Seute  finb  nid^t 
inttner  fo  ftarf,  mie  ficine,  unb  reld^e  nid^t  tmmer  fo  glildlid^,  roit  armc, 
6*  (S^  tnar  einmal  elne  grau,  bte  f)atte^  gtrel  ^ijd^ter,  t)on  benen  bie  cine 
immer  flelfeig  trar^  unb  t)on  9}Jorgen  bl^  5lbenb  arbeitete^;  bie  anberc 
aber  mar  fo  faul,  bafe  fie  oft  htn  ganjcn  3;;ag  fd^lief.  7.  S^  liegen  nur 
gttjei  gang  alte  unb  fd^led^te  gebcrn  auf  i^rem  Xi\<i),  momit  fie  je^t  nic^t 
mel^r  fd^reibt.  8.  T)o?  fo  Diele  5tpfel  unter  htn  ^aumen  lagen,  fo  nal^nt 
id^  mir  aud^  eincn  bat)on  unb  ging  bamit  auf  (to)  mein  3i^^er.  9.  '^a^ 
liegen  bie  ^tlc^er,  fagte  er.  10.  3)a^  fprad^  einc^  (or  ein^,  contracted) 
t)on  ben  2:ieren  gu  bem  2)^enfd^en:  „Unfer  ^onig  ift  fo  gro^  unb  ftarf  toit 
eurcr  (or  ber  eurc)." 

B.  11.  58ift  bu^  nid^t  batb  ftilT,  tnetn  ^inb,  fo  gel^e  id^  nid^t  mit  bir 
in  ben  ©arten.  12.  Uber  mir  in  eincm  (or  bem  eincn)  ber  l^ol^en  33aumc 
fag  ein  gang  fjeiner  33ogel  unb  fang,  bi6  e^  5lbenb  tnurbe.  13.  !Da^ 
unfer  ^orf  auf  ber  eincn  ©eite  eine6  l^o^^en  ^erge^  lag  unb  i^rc^  (or  ha^ 
il^rc)  auf  ber  anbern,  fo  fallen  iDir  unfere  licben  greunbe  im  3Sinter  nid^t 
fel^r  oft.  14.  (g^  fommen  f)eute  nur  njenige  Don  i^nen,  loeil  e^  fo  fait 
ift.  15.  ^a^  lag  ba^  arme  alte  2:ier  unb  n)ar  tot.  16.  Tltin  5Sater 
unb  feincr  (or  ber  feinc)  finb  iBrilber,  alfo  ift  fein  5Satcr  mein  Dnfel, 
unb  mein  33ater  ift  fein  Onfel.  17.  @^  maren  einmal  gn)ei  ^onige, 
eincr,  ber  fo  t3iele  ©d^loffer  l^atte,^  bag  er  in  iebem  nur  ein  en  Xa^  im 
gangen  3al)re  n)o§nte,  unb  ein  anberer,  ber  l^atte^  nur  ein  ©c^log,  ha^ 
h)ar^  fd^on  alt  unb  fd^led^t.  18.  ^a^  na^m  ber  ^nabe  hm  armen  toten 
3Sogel  in  bie  §anb  unb  trug  i^n  in^  §au^.  19.  9}?and^e  grogen  SJJen* 
fc^en  finb  nid^t  fo  ftarf,  n)ie  bie  fleinen,  unb  mand^e  reid^en  nid^t  fo  gliidflic^, 
iDie  bie  armen.  20.  T)a^  ber  einc  ber  beiben  ^riiber  fe^r  faul  tdax  unb 
mel^r  fc^lief,  al^  er  arbeitete,  fo  tDurbe  er  aud^  balb  gang  arm;  ber  anberc 
aber,  ber  fleigige,  'max  balb  fo  reid^,  bag  er  fid^  §au6  unb  Garten  unb 
!t?anb,  *ipferb  unb  SSagen  faufte.  21.  ^ie  (Sc^ule  in  unferm  ^orfe  ift 
nid^t  fo  fc^led^t,  n)ie  mand^e  ?eute  glauben,  aber  fo  gut  tDie  cure  (or  bic 
cure)  ift  fie  nic^t.  22.  2Ba6  bie  Tlutkx  bem  einen  ^inbe  gab,  ha^  gab 
fie  aud^  bem  anbem,  benn  einc^  (or  ein^,  contracted)  tioax  il)r  fo  lieb, 
n)ie  ha^  anberc.  23.  iBeffen  ^unbe  finb  e^?  3l)re  (or  bic  3l)rcn)? 
—  -Sa,  eg  finb  meinc  (or  bie  meincn). 

'Lesson  10.  i.  note  2.  — « Distinguish :  (1)  ha,  adv.,  there,  as  in  4  (the 
end),  9,  15;  (2)  ha,  adv.,  then,  as  in  10,  18;  (3)  ha,  conj.,  since,  as  in  4  (fii-st 


LESSON    12.    II :   PRONOMINAL   WORDS  85 

word),  8,  13,  20.     Observe  also  the  difference  in  the  position  of  the  verb. 
—  3  Account  for  the  positions  of  these  verbs. 

C.  1.  Are  these  your  books  or  hers?  —  They  (e^)  are  mine. 
2.  There,  at  the  foot  of  the  high  mountain,  lay  the  quiet  little 
village  of  which  (whereof)  they  spoke.  3.  In  every  large  school 
one  finds  diligent  boys  and  lazy  ones.  4.  As  he  was  very  ill, 
one  of  his  young  friends  remained  with  (bei)  him  all  night  (the 
whole  night) ;  the  others  went  home,  each  to  his  parents. 
5.  There  was  once  an  old  queen  who  (use  the  demonstr.  pron.) 
was  very  rich,  but  she  was  not  happy,  because  she  had  but  one 
daughter  and  no  son.  6.  ''Poor  beast,"  he  said,  "now  your 
master  is  dead.  Why  didn't  you  die  with  (mit)  him?  "  7.  Their 
children  are  not  (yet)  so  old  as  ours,  hence  they  do  not  yet 
go  to  school.  8.  How  long  he  slept  (that)  he  did  not  tell  his 
father.  9.  When  she  did  not  sit  at  your  table,  she  sat  at  ours. 
10.  And  such  happy  little  children  as  (toie)  we  found  in  those 
poor,  dark  houses  and  streets!  11.  Not  every  big  book  is  diffi- 
cult, my  dear  child,  and  not  every  small  one  easy.  12.  I  don't 
believe  that  your  house  is  quite  so  high  as  his,  but  there  are  (e^ 
finb)  more  large  rooms  in  it  than  in  his.  13.  There  he  lay,  the 
good  old  king,  dead  among  his  enemies.  14.  Then  the  big, 
strong  boy  took  the  little  one  on  his  (the)  back  (D^iirfeti,  masc.) 
and  carried  him  across  the  river. 

D.  15.  Your  father  and  mine  are  old  friends,  and  Charleses 
mother  and  mine  are  sisters,  hence  Charles's  mother  is  my  aunt 
(3::antc).  16.  Yes,  that  is  a  high  mountain,  as  you  say,  but  I 
do  not  believe  that  it  is  so  high  as  the  other  one  which  we  saw 
from  (au^)  the  window  of  my  room.  17.  How  still  everything 
was  in  the  big  old  castle!  18.  I  gave  the  poor  beast  some  cold 
water.  19.  Only  young  and  strong  men  go  to  (into)  the  war, 
the  old  ones  stay  at  home.  20.  You  lazy  boy,  what  are  you 
doing  here?  Why  don't  you  work?  21.  Once  upon  a  time 
there  was  a  country  in  which  only  lazy  people  dwelt.  22.  In 
which  room  did    they  sleep?   in  yours  or  in   his?  —  In   mine. 

23.  The  little  boy  asked  me  for  an  apple,  and  as  I  had  no  more 
apples  (no  apples  more),  I  gave  him  some  coins  (small  money). 

24.  Where  is  your  other  dog,  Charles?     I  mean  the  big  one.  — 
He   is   dead.      25.  One    finds    more    happy  people   among  the 


86 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


industrious  than  among  the  lazy  ones.  26.  The  entire  village 
stood  under  water,  so  high  was  the  river  on  that  day.  27.  There 
came  two  gentlemen  on  horseback  who  (use  the  demonstr.  pron.) 
had  two  large  dogs  with  them  (bei  fid^) . 


Lesson  13 

PRONOMINAL    WORDS    WITH    STRONG    OR    WEAK    INFLECTION 

The  principle  of  double  inflection  with  strong  and  weak 
endings  does  not  apply  to  the  pronominal  words  below.  Those 
on  the  left  are  never  preceded  by  an  article  or  a  similar  pro- 
nominal word,  those  on  the  right  always.  The  former,  there- 
fore, are  always  strong,  the  latter  always  weak. 


STRONG    ONLY 

fcincr,  -c,  -e^  none,  nobody 
alkx,  -c,  -c^  all 
ci'nigcr,  -c,  -c^^  some,  a  few 
mel^'rercr,  -c,  -t§^  several 

1  Rare  in  the  sing.,  except  in  the 
nom.  or  ace.  neut. :  ci'nigcg  =  some 
things  and  mt^'xtxt9= several  things. 


WEAK   ONLY 

berfeFbc,    biefeFbc,    ha^\tVht'   the 

same 
ber'ienige,     bie'ienigc,     ba^'jenigc^ 

that  (one);  he,  she,  it 
ber,  bie,  ha^  mel'nigc^  mine 
bcr,  bie,  ba^  beitt'igc  yours 
ber,  bie,  ha^  fel'nigc  his 
ber,  ble,  ha^  i^'rigc  hers 
ber,  ble,  ba6  fei'nlgc  its 
htx,  bie,  ha^  un'frige  ours 
ber,  bie,  ha^  eu'rigc  yours 
ber,  ble,  ba6  i^'rigc  theirs 
ber,  bie,  ba6  3^'rigc  yours 

1  The  article,  though  joined,  is  in- 
flected throughout,  e.  g.,  gen.  sing, 
begferbcn,  bcrferbcn,  bcSferben;  be^'jem* 
gen,  ber'ienigcn,  beS'ienigcn.  —  !I)er'ienige 
is  used  chiefly  before  relatives,  e.  g., 
bie'ienigen,  h)ctd^e  famcn  those  who  came. 
—  2  These  forms  of  the  possessives 
are  more  common  than  the  other 
weak  forms  in  Lesson  12.  11. 


LESSON    13:   PRONOMINAL   WORDS  87 

We  have  now  had  three  sets  of  equivalents  for  the  posses- 
sives  mine,  thine  or  yours  etc.:  (1)  meincr,  -e,  -t§  etc.;  (2)  ber, 
bte,  ba6  meinc  etc.;  (3)  btx,  bk,  ba^  tneinigc  etc.  But  German 
has  a  fourth  set  of  equivalents,  namely  the  uninflected  stem- 
forms 

mcln  mine  unfer  ours 

bein  yours  cucr  yours 

fein  his  i^x  theirs 

i^x  hers  3^x  yours 

fcin  its 

These  last  are  used  as  predicate  adjectives  and  denote  pos- 
session pure  and  simple;  thus,  ha^  ^ud)  ift  tiiein  means  simply 
the  hook  is  mine,  or  my  property,  or  the  book  belongs  to  me,  whereas 
bie^  ^ud^  ift  meine^  or  ha^  meine  or  ha^  meinige  means  more 
particularly  this  book  is  my  book,  or  this  book  is  the  one  that 
belongs  to  me. 

A.  1.  3Benn  bu  i]f)m  geftcm  ha^  (^tlh  gabft,  IdIc  bu  fagft,  fo  ift  ba^ 
^ferb  bctn.  2.  (Sr  na^tn  aKe^,  tDa^  fcin  tioax,  ahtx  felncn  Sent  (cent) 
mtt}X.  3.  3c^  ^abe  fein  ®elb,  unb  bu  l^aft  aud)  fcinc^  (or  feini^,  con- 
tracted) me^r,  aber  ^arl  \)at  feine^  (or  fcto,  contracted)  nod^.  4.  3Bic 
t)iete  ^nabcn  finb  ^eute  ^ier  in  bcr  ©d^ute?  altc?  —  9^etn,  nut  h)cmgc. 
—  ^0  finb  bie  anberen?  —  Tlt^xtxt  finb  nod^  mit  i^ren  ©Item  auf 
bem  Sanbe,  unb  einigc  finb  franf.  5.  3Bcld^en  §unb  meincn  ®ie? 
unfem  or  ben  unfrigcn  (or,  less  often,  ben  unfcrn)  obcr  il^ren  or 
ben  i^rigcn  (or,  less  often,  ben  i^ren)?  —  Sd)  meine  feincn  t)on 
beiben  {neither  of  the  two),  i^  meine  ben  ba,  ber  je^t  t)or  ^l^rer  jtltr 
liegt.  ^a^  ift  nid^t  3^rer  or  ber  3^rigc  (or,  less  often,  ber  ^l^re).  — 
5^cin,  bag  ift  (Sd^mibt^  alter  ^unb,  ber  lebt  nid^t  lange  mel^r,  glaube  id^. 
6.  m^  tDir  ing  ^orf  famen,  njar  atlc^^  3Baffcr  fd^Ied^t.  7.  Huf  bcr- 
felben  @eite  be^  gluffe^,  too  @ie  bie  l^o^en  53aume  fallen,  ftel^t  aud^  bie 
^irc^e  beg  fleinen  Dorfeg.  8.  T)k  ^erren,  n)eld^e  noc^  etiuag  fleineg 
®clb  bei  fid^  l^atten,  gaben  benjenigcn,  Votl(i)t  fein^  mel^r  l^atten,  tttda^ 
bat)on.  9.  3n  bemfelbcn  3a^re,  in  toeld^em  ®oetl|e  ftarb,  ftarb  aud^ 
(Sir  SKaltcr  ®cott.  10.  SSag  l^at  biefer  Tltn\(i)  nun  t)on  atP  feinem 
®elbe?  5^ic^tg,  benn  er  ift  nic^t  gllidflid^.  11.  3Kenn  id^  fage:  „(gr  fam 
mit  mel^rercn  greunben/'  fo  ift  bag  nid^t  bagfelbc,  alg  menu  id^  fagc: 


88  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

„@r  tam  mlt  me^r  %xtunhtn"  12.  (gin  jcbcr  bon  ben  §crrcn  l^ortc, 
bag  cr  in  ber  @tabt  toax,  ja  (na?/),  cinigc  fa^cn  i^n  auc^  auf  bcr  ©trafee, 
aber  feincr  ging  gu  il^m  ober  fprad^  mit  bcm  armen  9D?enfd^en.  SSar  bag 
nic^t  fd^led^t  toon  i^ncn? 

B.  13.  5IIIc^,  Voa^  bu  toon  mir  faufft,  ift  bcin,  ba6  ift  n)a]^r;  abcr 
allc^  an^re  bleibt  tncin.  14.  211^  id^  !am,  maren  attc^  ^ipferbc  franf. 
15._gpift  nod^  immer  berfelbc  alte,  faule  ^nabe,  biefer  ^arl!  SBann 
Itoirb  tx  enblid^  ff^ifeig?  —  ®er?  ^er  toirb  nic  anber^  (otherwise, 
different).  16.  SSeld^e^  ^fcrb  ritten  (Sie  gcftem?  Ql^rc^  or  bag 
3]^rigc  (or,  less  often,  bag  ^l^re)  ober  feineg  (or  feing,  contracted)  or 
bag  feinige  (or,  less  often,  bag  feine)?  — 3^  ritt  meineg  (or  meing, 
contracted)  or  bag  meinigc  (or,  less  often,  bag  nteine).  17.  §orft  bu, 
n)ie  ai?  bie  fleinen  33ogel  bort  fingen?  18.  SSenn  ©ie  morgen  gur 
©tabt  gel^en  unb  nene  gebern  faufen,  fo  bitte  id^  ©ie,  bag  @ie  mir  aud^ 
einigc  ober  me!)rerc  faufen;  meine  or  bic  nteinigcn  (or,  less  often,  bie 
meinen)  finb  arte  alt  unb  fd^reiben  nic^t  nte^r.  19.  !Da  fant  eine  alte 
grau  unb  bat  mid^  urn  ettoag  ®elb,  aber  id^  gab  i^r  feine^  (or  fdn^, 
contracted).  20.  ^einc^  (or  fein^,  contracted)  toon  alien  biefen 
'$flahii)tn  ift  fo  fleigig  mie  2Inna.  21.  SKir  trol^nten  meljrere  3a^re  in 
bemfelben  «^aufe,  too  mir  aud^  toon  3cit  gu  3^it  einige  toon  euren  atten 
greunben  fal)en.  22.  T)k  ^pfel  gelioren  (belong)  bemjenigen,  n)eld^er 
(or  ber)  fie  finbet.  23.  ©age  id^:  „9D?and^  guter  9}?enfc§  ift  aud^  ol^nc 
@elb  gliidfUc^/'  fo  meine  id^  bamit  (by  it)  gang  bagfelbc,  atg  toenn  id^ 
fage:  „2)?and^er  gute  '^ltn\<i)  ift  aud^  o^ne  ®elb  glucftic^."  5lber  tdtnn 
id)  fage:  „^r  gab  mir  mel^rerc^,"  fo  ift  bag  etmag  anbereg,  alg  toenn  id^ 
fage:  „@r  gab  mir  me^r."  24.  ^er  ^onig  fprad^  mit  jebem  toon  biefen 
§erren,  mie  bu  fagteft,  aber  mit  feinem  fpracf)  er  fo  lange,  toie  mit 
jenem  ha,  ber  jefet  bei  bem  @rafen  im  ^agen  fi^t. 

^  Here,  English  uses  the  definite  article  after  all;  German  omits  it  after 
aU-f  unless  it  has  demonstrative  or  determinative  force,  e.  g.,  otte  bie  S3ild^er, 
bie  er  geftem  fauftc,  iDoren  [d^Ied^t  all  the  books  (namely  those)  that  he  bought 
yesterday  were  bad.  —  2  Before  a  possessive  adjective  or  definite  article,  aitt 
(without  ending)  is  often  used. 

C.  1.  Now  all  these  books  are  mine  (=my  property),  for  I 
gave  him  the  money  for  them  this  morning.  2.  "  If  this  book  is 
not  yours  (  =  your  book),"  he  said,  ''it  is  mine  (=my  book)." 
3.  Those  who  had  horses  rode,  and  those  who  had  none  went 
on  foot.     4.  That  is  the  same  house  in  which  I  Ifved  several 


LESSON    13:   PRONOMINAL   WORDS  89 

years  ago.  5.  Some  oP  his  friends  rode  with  him  in  his  carriage, 
others  with  us  in  ours  (=our  carriage).  6.  Finally,  when  I 
found  the  house  of  the  poor  old  woman,  I  saw  that  all  the*  chil- 
dren were  ill.  7.  You  ask  me  'for  money,  but  I  have  none,  my 
friend,  nor  has  my  brother.  8.  What  did  they  do  with  alP  the 
beautiful  flowers  which  I  saw  in  their  rooms  yesterday?  —  They 
gave  them  to  some  sick  children  in  the  city.  9.  I  wrote  this 
letter  with  the  same  pen  with  which  I  wrote  that  one.  10.  Who 
believes  what  such  people  say?  Nobody.  11.  Charles  says 
that  you  were  looking  for  apples  when  I  came,  and  that  you 
found  some.  Is  that  true,  Anna?  —  Yes,  I  found  some,  but  only 
few,  and  they  (demonstr.)  are  not  good,  either. 

D.  12.  The  horse  was  mine  (=my  property)  until  he  gave 
me  the  money  for  it,  but  now  it  is  his  (=his  property).  13.  Each 
of  us  has  several  pens,  but  I  often  write  with  yours  (=your  pens) 
and  you  often  write  with  mine  (=my  pens).  14.  As  some  of^ 
the  girls  were  children  of  poor  people,  Mrs.  Smith  gave  them 
money  enough  for  new  dresses.  15.  Who  says  that  we  have  not 
one  fine  church  in  our  city?  We  have  several.  16.  Here  is  the 
school.  All  the*  boys  are  in  this  room,  and  all  the*  girls  in  that 
one.  17.  You  spoke  of  Mrs.  Smith's  sisters,  but  Charles  says 
she  hasn't  any.  18.  Nobody  knows  (trci^)  what  he  does  with 
alP  the  old  books  which  he  buys.  19.  The  apples  which  we 
found  under  this  tree  are  not  quite  so  poor  as  those  which  we 
found  under  the  other.  20.  Those*  are  the  same  gentlemen 
whom  we  saw  yesterday  at  your  uncle's.  21.  Whose  garden  is 
this?  yours  (=your  garden)?  —  No,  this  is  hers  (=her  garden), 
mine  (=my  garden)  lies  on  the  other  side  of  the  town  and  is 
not  quite  so  large.  22.  His  old  friends  say  that  he  is  no  longer 
the  same  that  (btx)  he  was,  because  he  is  so  rich  now,  but  I  don't 
believe  it.  23.  Several  of^  their  children  died^very  young  and 
none  (sing.)  lived  to  be  old  (became  old) .  24.  Every  one  knows 
(tnci^)  that  the  old  count  was  the  friend  of  all  [the]  poor  people 
in  our  little  village. 

3  After  numerals,  definite  or  indefinite,  tion  with  the  dative,  instead  of 
the  partitive  genitive,  is  commonly  used  in  plain  prose.  —  *  See  note  1  above. 
—  »See  note  2  above.  — •  Use  !5)a8. 


90  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

Lesson  14 

ADJECTIVE   inflection:   EXCEPTIONS 

There  are  two  exceptions  to  the  Principle  of  Adjective  In- 
flection as  stated  in  Lesson  11.  11: 

1.  Adjectives  before  a  genitive  singular  in  g  of  masculine 
or  neuter  nouns,  not  preceded  by  a  pronominal  word  with 
strong  ending,  have  the  weak  ending  ctt  more  often  than  the 
strong  ending  c^;  see  below,  sentences  6,  7  and  13. 

2.  After  the  nominatives  and  accusatives  plural  anbere, 
cinige,  mel^rere,  biele  and  inenige,  adjectives  usually  take  the 
strong  ending  c  instead  of  the  weak  ending  ctt;  see  below, 
sentences  2,  3,  4,  8,  10,  12,  14  and  15. 


VOCABULARY 

bcr  mo'mt 

bic  90^0'natc  moi 

ber  3Sein 

bie  SSelnc  wine 

bag  ®tu(f 

bie  ©tilde  piece 

ha^  ©lag 

bie  ©liifer  glass 

bie  Sdt 

bie  3^itcit  time 

(ber)  2lprir  Apn7 
berlil^Tnt'  famous  [d^tnad^  lyeaA;,  /ee6?e 

A.  1.  ^er^  Wltn\(i)  lebt  in  ber^  Sdt,  unb  ba  bie^  3cit  nie  ftill  ftel^t, 
fo  ftel^t  aud^  ber^  SD^enfc^  nie  ftllL  2,  @g  famen  nte^rere  reid^c  ^erten 
aug  ber  (Stabt  §anno't)er2  nnb  fanften  ftd^  bort  unten  am  gufee  beg 
^ergeg  ein  grofeeg  ©tiicf  Sanb^;  unb  bag  tear  int  5D?onat  5lpri(/  glaubc 
Id^.  3.  3n  bem  gangen  ^orfe  fanben  n)ir  nur  elnige  alte,  fc^toad^c  90?an= 
ner  unb  grauen  unb  t)iele  fieinc  ^inber,  bie  t)or  ben  Xliren  auf  ber  &xa^t 
fpielten;  alle  anberen  arbeiteten  auf  ben  getbem.  4.  3n  jenen  alten 
3eiten  lebten  abet  au(^  nod^  anbere  beriif)mte  Wdrmtx,  tuelc^e  aud^  biele 
fc^one  53uc^er  fd)rieben.  5.  @r  tran!  j^ei  ©lag  ^ein,^  id^  ahtx  nur 
eing.  6.  SBarum  trinfft  bu  nic^t  alte  2:age  (=ieben  2:ag)  ein  ©lag 
gutcn  3Seineg,  h3enn  bu  fo  fran!  unb  fd^trad^  bift?  — 3Seil  id^  feinen 
l^abe.  7,  5Iug  bem  einen  genfter  fal)  man  nur  ein  ©tildf  fti^led^tcn  ?am 
beg/  benn  bag  gute  ?anb  lag  alleg  unten  am  gluffe,  unb  btn  fal^  matt 


LESSON    14:   ADJECTIVE    INFLECTION.      EXCEPTIONS  91 

t)on  bort  md)t,  meil  auf  belbcn  ©eltcn  be^  gluffe^  ^o^e  iBaume  ftanben. 
8.  3d^  l^abe  nur  irenige  faulc  ^naben  in  melner  8ci^ulc,  abcr  aud^  nidjt 
fc^r  t)ie(e  ficifeigc,  fagte  er. 

B.  9.  2)ie^  3c^t  ift  fiir  ben^  SO^enfc^en  nur  ein  ^Icib  (garment), 
n)clc^c^  er  ablegt  (pw^s  o/),  menu  er  ftirbt  (c^ies).  10.  @^  famen  int 
9D?onat  5IpriP  me^irerc  alte  greiinbe  ^u  mir,  unb  bie  baten  mi(^  fo  lange, 
bi^  idi)  nrit  i^nen  ritt  unb  i^nen  bie  beriil^mte  (Stabt  ^eimar^  gcigte. 
11.  @g  n)ar  fo  l^eig,  bag  i(^  gtDei  ®Iag  Staffer  tranf,  unb  ha  ha^  Gaffer 
gu  fait  tear,  murbe  ic^  franf.  12.  Unter  a((  ben  gebem,  bie  bu  mir 
gabft,  maren  nur  einige  gutc,  unb  t)ie(e  traren  gang  fd^Ied^t.  13.  3e^t 
trinft  ber  alte  9D^ann  ade  Xage  ( =  jeben  3:^ag)  ein  ®la6  f(§n)ercn  (strong) 
3Seineg,  aber  er  bleibt  fo  fc^n)arf),  tuie  er  ift.  14.  33iele  armc  J^eute  auf 
bem  ^anbe  glauben  immer  noc^,  bag  e^  in  ben  grogen  ©tabten  nur  rei(^e 
^eute  gibt.  15.  2lnbere  jungc  §erren  arbeiten,  iDenn  fie  fein  ®elb  me^r 
l^aben,    SKarum  ntac^en  ®ie  eg  nid^t  auc^  fo,  lieber  greunb? 

1  Concrete  nouns  used  in  a  generic  sense,  like  ber  3Wcnfd^  man = mankind, 
and  abstract  nouns,  like  bie  ^tit  Time,  require  the  definite  article.  —  ^  Names 
of  cities,  provinces,  kingdoms  etc.,  as  also  the  names  of  the  months,  follow 
the  general  designation  (here  <Stabt  and  'SJlonat)  directly,  without  anything 
corresponding  to  of,  and  without  inflection.  The  names  of  the  months  re- 
quire the  definite  article  if  the  designation  SO^onot  is  not  used,  e.  g.,  im  Hpril. 
—  3  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  denoting  a  measure,  weight,  or  quantity  are 
used  in  the  singular  after  numerals,  and  the  noun  denoting  the  substance 
measured  or  weighed  is  used  without  inflection  and  without  anything  cor- 
responding to  of,  unless,  as  in  sentences  6,  7  and  13,  it  is  preceded  by  an 
adjective,  but  here,  too,  we  find,  in  the  more  colloquial  language,  the  appo- 
sitional  construction:  ein  ®Ia3  guten  3Sein  etc. 

C.  1.  Some  nights  in-the  month  of  April  were  very  cold,  and 
I  found  several  little  birds  dead  under  the  trees  in  our  garden. 
2.  Some  good  old  women  were  making  new  dresses  for  the  poor 
children.  3.  In  the  city  of  Paris  we  saw  many  fine  churches. 
4.  Only  a  few'*  young  people  came  to  church,  but  many  old  and 
feeble  ones.  5.  An  old  house  and  a  very  (gang)  small  piece  of 
bad  land  —  that's  alP  he  has.  6.  Every  morning  I  drink  a 
glass  of  hot  water.  7.  What  are  men  (human  beings)  in  a  (in-the) 
war  against  the  gods?  8.  How  many  famous  men  lived  at  (gu) 
that  time  in  the  little  city  of  Weimar!  9.  Time  waits  for  (auf 
with  ace.)  no  man.  10.  Then  they  played  some  other  famous 
pieces,  but  none  (sing.)  so  well  as  those  which  you  heard. 


92  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

D.  11.  Saturn  or  Cronos  was  the  god  of  Time.  12.  We  had 
many  very  fine  days  in-the  month  of  April,  as  you  say,  but  we 
also  had  a  few^  cold  nights.  13.  There  were  ((S^  iDarcn)  still 
other  poor  people  in  our  little  town  who  gave  more  than  this 
rich  man.  14.  There  rode  several  gentlemen  in  front  of  the 
king's  carriage.  15.  Is  it  true  that  man  is  the  lord  of  Time? 
16.  I  never  drink  more  than  two  glasses  of  water  a  day  (the  day, 
ace).  17.  He  led  us  through  some  small,  but  very  beautiful 
gardens  to  (an)  the  river.  18.  When  I  asked  her  how  long  she 
lived  in  the  city  of  Chicago,  she  answered,  Only  a  few^  months. 
19.  I  found  but  few*  pieces  of  poor  land  at  the  foot  of  the  moun- 
tain, but  also  only  one  very  good  one.  20.  Charles,  who  was  the 
famous  queen  that  founded  (griinbete)  the  city  of  Carthage 
(^artl^a'go)  ?  and  how  did  she  buy  the  piece  of  land  on  which  she 
founded  it?  21.  Some  feeble  old  men  and  women  still  believe 
that  they  grow  strong  (ftarf)  if  they  drink  every  day  a  glass 
of  strong  (fd^lDcr)  wine,  but  many  physicians  (Srgte)  no  longer 
believe  it.     22.  One  poor  pen  —  is  that  alP  you  have? 

*  Distinguish  between  a  few  cintgc  and  few  toeniQC.  — ^  Lesson  3.  ii.  notes  2,  3. 


Lesson  15 

COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES.      SUBSTANTIVE    ADJECTIVES 


Comparatives  are  formed  by  adding  er,  and  superlatives  by 
adding  ft  to  the  stem  of  the  positive. 

Adjectives  in  c  drop  this  e  before  the  er  of  the  comparative,  e.  g.,  ireifc 
wise,  iDcifcr  wiser.  —  Adjectives  in  el,  en  or  er  often  drop  the  e  of  these 
syllables  before  the  cr  of  the  comparative,  e.  g.,  bunfel  dark,  bunfler 
darker.    Compare  unfer,  euer,  Lesson  6.  11. 

Adjectives  in  §,  ^,  \d),  j,  b  or  t  usually  insert  c  before  the  ft  of  the 
superlative,  e.  g.,  l^ei^  hot,  ^eifecft-*  hottest. 

*  The  hyphen  indicates  that  the  superlative  forms  are  not  used  without 
endings.     See  note  3  below. 


LESSON    15.    i:   COMPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES 


93 


Umlaut  in  Comparison.     The    following   monosyllabic    ad- 
jectives modify  the  vowel  in  the  comparative  and  superlative; 


alt 

mtv 

atteft- 

old 

arm 

(trmcr 

ftrmft- 

poor 

iuttg 

iiinger 

iiingft- 

young 

fait 

falter 

falteft- 

cold 

flug 

fliigcr 

fliigft- 

clever,  wise 

franf 

franfer 

franfft- 

sick,  ill 

furs 

furser 

fiirjeft- 

short 

lang 

longer 

tangft- 

long 

fd^tDad^ 

fd^mad^er 

fd^lDad^ft- 

weak,  feeble 

jc^mars 

fd^lDarger 

fc^margcft- 

black 

ftarf 

ftarfer 

ftarfft- 

strong 

hjamt 

farmer 

njarmft- 

warm 

See  also  next  paragraph. 

Irregular  Comparison.    The  following  adjectives  are  irregu- 
lar in  their  comparison: 


91^06 

grofeer 

grfifet- 

great,  tall 

gut 

beffer 

beft- 

good 

m 

^5^er 

m^t- 

high 

nal^ 

na()er 

nad^ft- 

near 

t)iel 

me^r 

melft- 

much 

^a^\i-  means  both  nearest  and  next. 

Inflection.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  take  the  same 
endings  as  positives,  according  to  the  principle  stated  in 
Lesson  11.  11. 

Models:  grofeere  greube  (fern.  Class  IV)  greater  joy,  ber  (iltcrc 
9}^ann  the  older  man,  mein  befte^  53ud^  my  best  book. 


STRONG 

WEAK 

N. 

grofeerc     grcube 

ber    attere     SQ^ann 

G. 

grogercr   greube 

be^    altercn   Tlannt^ 

D. 

grofeercr   greube 

bent  alteren   5D?anne 

A. 

grofeerc     greubc 

ben   altercn   Tlann 

94  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

N.  grfifeere  greuben                ble    attcrcn  Wl'dnntx 

G.  grfifeercr  greuben                ber    iilterctt  9}ianner 

D.  grogeren  greuben                ben   alteren  90?anncm 

A.  grofeerc  greuben                bic    ciltereti  9}ianner 


N. 

mcin  beftc^  ^ud^ 

G. 

meitte^    beftcn  ^ud^c6 

D. 

nxeinem  bcften  iBud^e 

A. 

ntcin  befte^  ^ud^ 

N. 

^->- 

tnelne     beftcn  ^iid^er 

G. 

Ttieiner    beftcn  iBiid^er 

D. 

W    ► 

tneinen   beftcn  ^iid^em 

A. 

^'    ^ 

tnelne     beftcn  53ud^er 

A.  1.  ^arl  ift  fd^on  grfiger  dg  feln  3Sater.  2.  !Dic  fleinerc  t)on 
ben  belben  Xod^tern  ift  ble  diterc,  3.  3Benn  bu  mlr  (agft,  n)etd^e^^  ber 
allerl^od^ftc^  ^erg  ber  SSelt  {world)  Ift,  fo  gebe  Ic^  blr  blefen  5lpfel,  5lnna, 
4.  ilBeld^er^  t)on  blefen,  belben  Segen  fii^rt  nad^  ber  @tabt  §anno't)er, 
bltte?  —  ^elbe,  aber  blefer^  l^ler  Ift  ber  flirgerc*  5.  ^n  bem  nad^ftcn 
^orfe  mol^nte  elner  melner  beftcn  greunbe,  bel  bem  blleb  Id^  fo  lange, 
big  meln  iiingercr  ^ruber  !am.  6.  3m  ©ommer  flnb  ble  3:age  am 
langftcn,^  aber  ble  Ictngftcn  3:age  flnb  nld^t  Immer  ble  miirmftcn,  unb  ble 
fiirjeftcn  nld^t  Immer  ble  fatteftcn,  7.  ^enn  fie  am  melftcn^  arbeltete, 
fo  arbeltete  fie  aud^  Immer  am  beftcn.^  8.  ^er  flelne  ©c^mlbt  ba  Ift 
ber  fliigftc,  aber  aud^  ber  faiilftc  ^nabe  In  ber  ganjen  ©d^ute.  9.  ^a 
fommt  fie  fd^on  mlt  ^elfeercm  SBaffer.  10.  9llc^tg  mad^te  (caused)  ber 
armen  gran  grofeerc  greube,  al^  trenn  man  flc^  gu  (beside)  l^r  fe^tc 
unb  fie  bat,  ha^  fie  etn)a6  »on  ber  guten  alten  3elt  ergci^rte  (erjaf)len, 
infin.,  narrate,  tell).  11.  ^rofug  mar  elner  ber  reld^ftcn  ^onlge  In 
ienen  alten  ^^^ten.  12.  5lud^  (even)  felnem  Ilebftcn  ^reunbe  fagte  er 
nld^tg  bat)on. 

B.  13.  ^Ipollo  niar  ber  fd^onftc  unter  ben  alten  ©ottern,  unb  Su'plter 
ber  ftiirfftc.  14.  iffield^eg^  Ift  ble  allergrofetc^  ©tabt  ber  ^elt  (world)? 
—  bonbon  Ift  ble  atlergrofetc^  ©tabt  ber  gangen  3SeIt.  15.  gg  mlrb 
Don  3:ag  gu  2:age  falter.  16.  33on  bort  rltten  fie  auf  bem  nad^ftcn  Sege 
nad^  ber  (Stabt.  17.  ^er  alte  §err  Ift  nod^  Immer  reld^er  al^  ble  melftcn 
anberen  ^eiite  ber  Btaht,  aber  t)or  bem  ^rlege  ^atte  er  nod^  melir  ®elb 
unb  Sanb  unb  ^dufer,  ba  toar  er  am  reld^ftcn.^    18.  ^u  fpradjift  mlt 


LESSON    15.    I:   COMPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES  95 

bcm  Jiingercn  ber  beiben  53ruber,  ha^  fa^  td^,  aber  nld^t  mit  bcm  ilingftcn, 
benn  fie  l^at  nod^  einen  33niber,  ber  einige  3a^re  jiinger  ift,  aU  jene 
beiben,  bie  geftern  ^ier  bei  uu6  tuaren.  19»  SBer  am  flelfeigftcn^  im 
©arten  afbeitete,  bem  gab  [ie  auc^  immer  bie  tneiftcn  Spfel  ober  iBlumen. 
20.  Oben  auf  bem  l^od^ftcn  ^aume  fa^  ein  gang  fteiner  3SogeI,  ber  fang 
fd^oner  aU  alk  anbem.  21.  3!)er  cilteftc  t)on  nn^  alien  ift  er,  ba^  ift 
tt)a^r;  aber  ob  er  auc^  ber  tneifefte  ift,  bag  ift  bie  grage  (question).  22. 3Bic 
gro^  toax  unfere  greube,  al^  trir  enblic^  ben  fd^onften  griinen  SBalb  t)or 
un6  fa^en!  23.  „?iebftcr  greunb,"  fagte  er,  ffha^  ge^t  nid^t;  luenn  bu 
in  biefem  alten  §aufe  bleibft,  fo  n)irft  bu  nur  noc^  !r (infer,  SBarum 
bauft  (build)  ober  faufft  bu  bir  nid^t  ein  befferc^?" 

1  Neuter,  because  toeld^cg,  in  statements  of  identity,  is  treated  like  c8, 
bag  or  bteS;  see  Lesson  9.  i.  note  5.  Thus  one  would  also  say  tt)cld^c8  fmb 
bie  J^fic^ften  iBergc  in  Slmerifa?  In  sentence  4,  however,  h)cld^er  and  bicfer  are 
not  indefinite  or  undetermined  subjects,  but  pronouns  standing  for  iBCld^cr 
2Bcg  and  biefer  SBeg.  —  2  xhg  genitive  plural  alter  is  often  used  to  strengthen 
superlatives:  highest  of  all  or  the  very  highest  etc.  Compare  Shak.  2.  Henry 
VI.  1.  1:  "You,  mine  alder-liefest  sovereign."  — » gtem-forms  of  the  super- 
latives (as  given  in  the  lists  above)  occur  only  now  and  then  in  adverbial 
use,  e.  g.,  itingft  (very)  recently,  langft  (very)  long  ago.  Where  English  uses 
superlatives  as  predicate  adjectives,  e.  g.,  the  days  are  longest  in  June  (longest 
without  article,  notice),  or  adverbially,  e.  g.,  she  worked  best  when  alone, 
German  uses  the  dative  of  the  superlative  after  am  (  =  an  bem),  e.  g.,  am  iSng* 
ften,  am  beften,  am  meiften,  am  reid^ften  etc.,  literally  meaning  at  the  longest  etc. 

C.  1.  Which  (= which  tree)  of  these  two  (both)  trees  is  the 
higher?  —  This  one  here,  it  is  the  highest-of-all  in  our  garden, 
but  not  the  finest-of-all.  *  2.  Have  you*  no  hotter  water  than 
this,  Miss  Mary?  —  No.  3.  Charles  is  the  smallest  boy  in  (the) 
school,  but  he  is  also  the  most  diligent.  4.  I  slept  best  in  the 
room  over  yours,  because  it  was  the  quietest  room  in  the  whole 
house.  5.  He  thinks  that  the  richest  people  are  also  the  hap- 
piest. 6.  Now  the  days  are  growing  longer.  7.  In  the  city  of 
Paris  there  are  longer  and  finer  streets  than  in  (the)  most  other 
cities  of  the  world.  8.  My  sister  is  a  year  older,  and  my  brother 
is  two  years  younger  than  I  am.  9.  The  city  of  Trier  or  Treves 
is  the  oldest  city  in  Germany  (^eutfd^lanb) .  10.  How  many  days 
has  the  shortest  month  of  the  year,  Charles?  and  how  many 
the  longest?  11.  When  I  asked  him  for  whom  he  was  buying 
the  land,  he  said,  for  his  elder  brother  who  was  living  in  the 


96  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

nearest  town.  12.  I  am  happiest  when  I  am  in  the  country  or 
in  the  mountains.  13.  Among  the  girls,  Anna  writes  best-of- 
all.     14.  Books  are  his  greatest  joy. 

D.  15.  Did  not  his  youngest  son  fall  in-the  war?  —  No,  he 
had  one  son  who  was  younger  than  the  one  (demonstr.)  who  fell 
in-the  war.  16.  She  has  five  handsome  daughters,  but  Miss 
Mary  is  the  handsomest-of-all.  17.  In  the  months  of  Decem- 
ber ©cgcm'bcr)   and   January   Oanuar')   the  days  are  shortest. 

18.  There  she  sat,  in  the  coldest  and  darkest  room  of  the  house! 

19.  Among  the  poorest  people   one   often   finds  the  happiest. 

20.  Why  don't  you  go  to  Father  and  ask  him  if  he  has^  not  a 
better  pen?  21.  Yes,  we  staid  longer  in  London  than  in  Berlin, 
but  longest  in  Paris.  22.  Of  (bon)  whom  did  he  buy  the  new 
horses  (with)  which  he  drove  yesterday?  —  Of  Mr.  Smith,  who  is 
also  one  of  the  richest  men  in  (the)  town.  23.  I  work  best  when 
everything  is  quiet.  24.  I  have  several  younger  boys  in  my 
school  who  are  more  diligent  than  these  older  ones.  25.  The 
two  (both)  httle  girls  will  be  (become)  six  next  year. 

<  Lesson  1.  i.  note  7. 

II 

In  German,  as  in  English,  adjectives  may  be  used  substantively  and 
thus  denote  persons  or  things  which  possess  the  quality  expressed  by 
the  adjective.  In  German,  such  an  adjective  is  written  with  a  capi- 
tal, like  a  noun,  but  inflected  like  an  adjective  standing  before  a  noun.' 
It  then  denotes,  in  the  singular  of  the  masculine  and  feminine,  a  person 
possessing  the  quality;  in  the  singular  of  the  neuter,  a  thing  which,  or 
that  in  general  which  possesses  the  quaUty;  in  the  plural,  persons  (never 
things)  possessing  the  quality. 

Examples: 

STRONG  WEAK 

cin  Hltcr  an  old  man  bcr  Slltc  the  old  man 

^(irc,  Slltc  listen,  old  woman  ha  i[t  bic  Slltc  there's  the  old  woman 

W.tt^  unb  SiltMtd  old  things  and  new      baS  Slltc  unb  ba«  9?euc  the  old  and  the 

new  (things) 
i^  \)'dxe  nur  ®utCi§   Don  i^m  /  hear      cr   na^m   alleg   ®utc  he   took  every- 
only  good  things  about  him  thing  that  was  good 


LESSON    15.    II:   SUBSTANTIVE   ADJECTIVES 


97 


id^  finbc  Did  ©utCiS,  ©d^fincig  unb 
SSa^re^  barin  /  find  much  in  it 
that  is  good,  beautiful  and  true 

tomm,  Kleiner  come,  little  fellow 


^gutcr    Slltct!"    fagtc    cr    "good    old 

man!''  he  said 
cin  SDcutfd^cr  a  German  (man) 

ba^  finb  altc  ©cutfd^c  those  are  old 
Germans  (men  or  women  or  both) 

cr  ift  fcin  2>cutfc^cr  he  is  no  Ger- 
man 

bielc  ^ranfe  (L.  14)  ftarbcn  many 
(sick  persons)  patients  died 


ex  fuc^t  ha^  ®utc,  ha9  ©d^iine  unb 
ha^  SSa^rc  he  seeks  the  good,  the 
beautiful  and  the  true  or  whatever 
is  good  etc. 

ha  fommt  ber  ^leinc  or  bic  ^leinc  or 
bag  ^Icinc  there  comes  the  little 
fellow  or  the  little  girl  or  the  little 
child 

„bcr  gutc  5llte!"  fagtc  cr  "the  good 
old  man!"  he  said 

bcr  !Dcut[c^c  the  German  (man),  bic 
©cutfd^c  the  German  (woman) 

ha^  [inb  bic  oltcn  !Dcut[d^ctt  those  are 
the  old  Germans  (men  or  women 
or  both) 

fie  ift  fcinc  S)cutfcl^e  she  is  no  Ger- 
man 

fcinc  ^ranfctt  ftarbcn  atte  his  patients 
all  died 


1.  ®er  Slrmc  bat  ben  9fJcid^en  urn  tfmai  ®clb,  abcr  bcr  ^Jcid^c  gab  bent  Hmtctt 
feinS.  2.  ^ft  cin  ©c^marjer  nic^t  aud^  cin  SWenfd^?  3.  2)a«  58cffere  ift  bc« 
@utcn  i^einb,  fagt  man  oft.  4.  §ier,  mein  licber  ^nabe,  ba«  ift  cin  58ud|  ilbcr 
(with  ace,  about,  concerning)  ^aifer  ^arl  ben  @ro&cn  ober  Charlemagne. 
5.  (Sr  tear  cin  ^^reunb  ber  5llten  unb  bcr  ^fungcn. 

1.  I  bought  this  horse  of  (t)on)  a  German  who  lives  in  the 
next  village  yonder.  2.  The  poor  and  the  rich,  the  weak  and 
the  strong  —  all  are  God's  children.  3.  The  old  are  not  always 
wiser  than  the  young.  4.  Charles,  when  did  Charles  the  Great 
live?  5.  Here's  an  apple  for  you,  little  [man].  6.  That  was  in 
the  same  year  when  Lincoln  freed  (befrei'te)  the  blacks.  7.  What 
do  they  do  with  so  many  flowers?  They  give  them  to  the  sick 
[people].  8.  The  new  [thing]  is  not  always  the  better  [thing], 
and  the  best  [thing]  is  not  always  the  good  [thing].  9.  He  did 
(tat)  many  a  good  [thing]  whereof  you  and  I  never  heard  any- 
thing. 10.  They  (man)  say  that  he  is  a  German.  11.  What 
do  you  say  now,  old  [man]?  12.  Pippin  the  Short  was  the 
father  of  Charles  the  Great. 


98  BEGINNING  GERMAN 


Lesson  i6 

NUMERALS 

The  Cardinals,  or  the  fundamental  words  denoting  number,  are  as- 
follows : 

1  eine  15  fttnfjc^n  60  fed^jig 

2  itod  16  fcd^sc^n  70  fiebjig 

3  brei  17  fiebsc^n  80  ad^tjig 

4  bier  18  ac^tjel^n  90  neungig 

5  fUnf  19  ncunjc^n  100  ^unbert 

6  fcc^S  20  jmangig  149  l^unbcrt     ncunuitb* 

7  ficben  21  cinunbjhjanjtg  bier  jig 

8  a^t  22  jibeiunbjitjanjig  200  gmeil^unbert 

9  neun  23  breiunbjnjanjig  1000  taufenb 

10  jel^n,  30  breifeig  1133    taufenb    eitil^unbert 

11  elf  31  einunbbreifeig  breiunbbrei^ig  or 

12  gtoiJlf  32  jmeiunbbreifeig  elfl^unbert     brei^ 

13  breije^n  40  bier  jig  unbbreifeig 

14  bierje^n  50  fUnfjig 

100000  ^unberttaufenb  1000000  eine  ^million' 

(Sins  is  used  when  no  other  numeral  follows,  as  in  counting :  einS,  jlbet, 
brei  etc.,  I^unbert  unb  ein«  etc.,  also  in  expressions  of  time,  as  eS  ift  einS 
it  is  one  o'clock,  eS  ift  l^alb  ein«  (lit.  half  one)  it  is  half  past  twelve.  Other- 
wise ein  is  used,  as  in  eimmbjnjanjig  above,  and  in  forming  ordinals,  as 
ber  einunbjnjanjigfte  etc. 

For  the  inflection  of  eincr,  -c,  -t^,  and  ber,  bie,  ba^  eine,  see  Lesson  12.  ii. 

The  other  cardinals  are  usually  uninflected,  but  the  genitives  jtbeicr 
and  breier,  and  the  datives  jnjeicn  and  breien  are  used  when  the  case 
would  not  otherwise  be  obvious. 

The  Ordinals  are  adjectives  resembling  superlatives  in  their  forma- 
tion, and  are  inflected  like  them,  with  strong  and  weak  endings.  As 
preceded  by  the  definite  article  ber  (or  bie,  ha^),  they  are: 

ber  crfte  the  first  ber  fed^ftc  the  sixth 

ber  jmeite  the  second  ber  fiebente  the  seventh 

ber  britte  the  third  ber  ac^te  (one  t)  the  eighth 

ber  bierte  the  fourth  ber  neunte  the  ninth  etc.,  with  te  up 

ber  fiinfte  the  fifth  to  twentieth,  after  that  with  fte 


LESSON    16:  NUMERALS  99 

bcr  atDangigftc  the  20th  bcr  brcifeigftc  the  SOth 

bcr  einunbjtoansigftc  the  21st  bcr  t)ierjig[tc  the  40th 

ber  jttJciunbstDanjtgftc  the  22d  ber  l^unbertfte  the  100th 

bcr  brciunbjtoansigftc  the  2Sd  bcr  taufcnbftc  the  1000th 

Examples  : 

strong  weak. 

crfteiS  S3ud^  first  book  bQ«  crftc  33ud^  the  first  book 

al«  bierter  unb  illngftcr  8o^n  l^attc  cr  bcr  bicrtc  ©ol^n  ftarb  nad^  bcm  fttnfteit 

nur  tDcnig  ?anb  ?>etngr  </ie  fourth  the  fourth  son  died  after  the  fifth 

and  youngest  son,  he  had  but  little 

land 

ficbcntcr  33cr«,   giticitc^   SSort  seventh  tm  ficbcntcn  33cr8  ha^  pcite  SBort  in 

verse,  second  word  the  seventh  verse,  the  second  word 

1.  ^er  ©aurif an' far  ober  Mount  Everest  ift  ncununb^lDangigtaufenb 
unb  gtDet  gug^  ]^od^,  2.  ©cm  3Sater  ftarb  ant  neunge^nten  ^prlF  ac^t* 
ge^n^unbertneununbfed^a^g*^  3.  3e^t  ift^  fie  fc^on  dlergel^n  ^age^  tot, 
4.  ^arl  ift  fein  britter  (Sol^n  unb  5lnna  feine  gnieite  ^orfiter,  aber  jener 
ift  gtDei  3a]^re  alter  al^  biefe.  5.  (Stcibte  t)on  me^r  al^  ^unberttaufenb 
(SiniDol^nem  {inhabitants)  nennt  (ca^Zs)  man  in  ^eutfd^lanb  (Germany) 
@ro6'ftabte.  6,  gunf  unb  fieben  finb  (or  ift)  g^olf.  7.  gunf  mat 
(times)  fieben  ift  fiinf  unb  breifeig,  8.  Sr  fam  am  einunb3n)an3igften 
Wai  (May).  9,  5D2an  fd^reibt  ad^ tl^unbertfiebenunbbreigig,  aber  man 
fd^rcibt  auc^  ac^t  l^unbert  fieben  unb  breifeig.  10.  ®er  eine  'Bo^n  n)ar 
fo  fleifeig,  tDie  ber  anbere  faul  h)ar.  11.  !Die^  ift  ber  Icfetc  (Bai^  (last 
sentence), 

1  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  denoting  measure  have  the  singular  form 
after  numerals;  compare  the  English:  Twenty  sail  were  in  sight.  See  also 
Lesson  14.  note  3.  —  2  That  is,  am  (=an  bcm)  ncunscl^ntcn  jTage  beg  SO^onatS 
Slprtl;  see  also  Lesson  14.  note  2.  — »  German  is  not  consistent  in  the  writing 
of  compound  numerals;  compare  sentences  2  and  9.  —  *  Lesson  6.  11.  note  1. 
—  5  xhis  is  the  regular  German  expression  for  a  fortnight. 

1.  Their  third  child  died  on  the  22d  of  April,  1908.  2.  He  took 
six  apples,  three  in  each  hand  (ace),  and  went  to  (auf  with  ace.) 
his  room  with-them.  3.  We  found  that  the  mountain  was  not 
so  high  as  he  thought,  it  was  only  5785  feet  high.  4.  A  year 
has  twelve  months.  Seven  months  always  have  31  days,  four 
always  30  days,  and  one  has  sometimes  (mitun'ter)  28  days  and 


100  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

sometimes  29.  5.  In  the  year  1906,  the  city  of  New  York— ^ 
I  mean  Greater  New  York  (®ro6=5^en3  2)orf)  —  had  4,014,304 
inhabitants  ((ginn30^ner) .  6.  1477  and  631  are  2108.  7.  This 
is  my  first  German  book. 

Review  and  Drill 
Chiefly  on  Lessons  11-16 

This  exercise  is  independent  of  the  numbered  Lessons  and  may  be  omitted 
at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher. 

Nouns:  Gender  and  Inflection.  Of  the  following  rules  the  first  five 
are  the  most  important,  not  only  because  they  are  almost  without  ex- 
ceptions, but  also  because  they  enable  the  student  to  tell  both  the 
gender  and  the  class  of  hundreds  of  nouns  at  sight,  that  is,  from  their 
mere  form,  apart  from  considerations  of  meaning.  Rules  6-9  are  less 
helpful,  but  th§y  often  assist  the  student  in  determining  the  inflection 
of  a  noun  if  its  gender  can  be  made  out  from  an  accompanying  article, 
adjective  or  pronoun.  This  is  shown  more  fully  in  the  section  below 
which  is  headed  Drill.  —  In  classifying  nouns,  the  student  should  also 
keep  in  mind: 

that  Class  I  contains  only  two  feminines  (9)?uttcr,  Jod^tcr)  and  only 
two  monosyllables  {ha^  (Sein  being,  existence,  \>a^  XviU  doings) ; 

that  Class  II  contains  the  great  majority  of  monosyllables; 

that  Class  III  contains  no  feminines,  but  chiefly  neuters ; 

that  Class  IV  contains  no  neuters,  but  the  great  majority  of  fem- 
inines, and  also  the  great  majority  of  nouns  of  more  than 
one  syllable  in  c,  whether  feminine  or  masculine. 

Rule  I.  For  Class  I:  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  in  d^en  or 
Icin  are  neuter  diminutives,  belong  to  Class  I,  and  do  not  change  the 
stem-vowel  for  the  plural :  "i^a.^  93?abc^en  girl,  ba8  33oQlein  little  bird. 

Rule  2.  For  Class  II:  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  in  id^,  ig, 
ing  or  ling  are  masculine,  belong  to  Class  II,  and  do  not  change  the  stem- 
vowel  for  the  plural:  bcr  Slcppid^  carpet,  ber  ^6nig  king,  ber  Bering  herring, 
bcr  Stogling  young  man. 

Rule  3.  For  Class  III:  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  in  turn 
are  neuter,  belong  to  Class  III,  and  modify  the  vowel  of  this  suffix,  in- 
stead of  the  stem-vowel,  for  the  plural :  bae  ^er'jogtum  dukedom,  duchy, 
plur.  bie  ^ct/jogtilmet  (without  change  of  accent).    Two  important  ex- 


REVIEW    AND    DRILL    (OPTIONAL)  101 

ceptions,  but  only  as  to  gender,  are  bcr  ^rc'tum  error,  pfur.bie^rr' turner, 
and  bcr  did^'ium  wealth,  riches,  plur.  bic  ^Jcid^'tUmcr. 

Rule  4.  For  Class  IV:  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  in  ci'  or 
crei',  l^eit,  in,  tdt,  [d^aft  or  ung,  also  those  with  the  foreign  suffixes  a'gc, 
ie',  if,  ion',  ur'  or  tiit',  are  feminine  and  belong  to  Class  IV  (which  never 
changes  the  stem-vowel  for  the  plural) :  bie  "ipartei'  party,  faction,  bic 
^flaocrci'  slavery,  bic  grci'f)eit  freedom,  liberty,  bic  ^o'nigin  (plur.  bic  ^d'ni* 
ginnen),  bic  J?)Iei'nigfeit  trifle,  bic  ^reunb'fc^aft  friendship,  bic  ^off'nung  hope, 
bie  (gta'gc  story,  flat,  bie  Colonic'  colony,  bie  i^abrif  factory,  bic  9Zation'  nation, 
hie  ^atux'  nature,  bic  SO?aic[tfit'  majesty. 

Rule  5.  For  Class  II:  Almost  all  nouns  of  one  syllable  in  f  or  ff,  g,  U, 
m  or  mm,  pf,  fc^,  fe  or  1j  are  masculines  and  belong  to  Class  II,  those 
with  stem-vowel  a,  0,  u  or  ou  in  the  sing,  changing,  as  a  rule,  to  tt,  H, 
tt  or  fiu  for  the  plur.:  bcr  SSolf  (plur.  fl)  wolf,  bcr  ©toff  (plur.  0)  stuff, 
material,  bcr  SSeg  way,  road,  ber  33alt  (plur.  fi)  ball,  bcr  33Qum  (plur.  ttu) 
tree,  ber  ©tamm  (plur.  H)  tree-trunk,  ber  ^opf  (plur.  '6)  head,  bcr  %\\^  fish, 
ber  5u&  (plur.  11)  foot,  bcr  "jpiotj  (plur.  ft)  place. 

This  rule  covers  about  200  nouns.  Some  common  exceptions,  which  the 
student  should  note  at  once,  are: 

Class  II  Class  III  Class  IV 

bag  ©d)iff  ship  ba«  T)orf  village  bie  Surg  castle 

bag  3)ing  thing  ha^  ?amm  lamb  ber  ®raf  count 

bag  i^ki\^  flesh,  meat  ha^  ®(^Io&  castle  ber  2Kenfcl^  man 

ha^  9^0^  (plur.  0)  horse  ber  SSurm  i^orm 
bic  ^u^  (plur.  il)  nw^ 

Rule  6.  For  Class  II:  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  in  ni8  or 
fal  belong  to  Class  II  and  do  not  change  the  stem-vowel  for  the  plural. 
Most  of  them  are  neuter,  some  feminine :  bag  ©c^eim'nig  secret,  bag  ©d^id '« 
fal  fate,  lot,  bic  SBilb'nig  wilderness,  bie  2>hi^'fal  toil,  trouble. 

Rule  7.  For  Class  I:  All  masculines  and  neuters  of  more  than  one 
syllable  in  el,  en  or  cr  belong  to  Class  I,  some  changing  a,  0,  u  or  au  of 
the  singular  to  a,  6,  il  or  ttu  for  the  plural :  bcr  Slpfct  (plur.  a)  apple,  ber 
SBagen  (plur.  0)  wagon,  ber  33atcr  (plur.  fi)  father,  bag  S3iinbel  bundle,  bag 
3cic^en  mark,  bag  2ager  (plur.  a)  camp. 

Rule  8.  For  Class  IV:  All  feminines  of  more  than  one  syllable  (ex- 
cept SO^uttcr  and  3:od^ter  of  Class  I,  and  those  in  nig  or  fal  of  Class  II) 
belong  to  Class  IV.  By  Rule  4,  hundreds  of  these  can  be  recognized  at 
sight  and  without  fail,  but  there  are  hundreds  of  others  not  recognizable, 


102  HEGINNING  GERMAN 

to  which  belong  by  far  the  larger  number  of  nouns  in  e,  e.  g.,  bic  ^Blutne 
flower,  bic  ©tunbc  hour,  bic  ®c[(f)id^'tc  story  etc.  Here  belong  also  those 
in  cl  or  er  which  are  not  of  Class  I  (Rule  7),  as  bic  ^nfcl  island,  bic  ^^cber 
feather,  pen,  and  many  ending  otherwise,  as  bic  ©efal^r'  danger,  bic  jtu'gcnb 
virtue,  bic  5lr'beit  work  etc. 

Rule  9.  For  Class  IV:  All  masculines  of  more  than  one  syllable  in 
c  belong  to  Class  IV:  bcr  ^nabc  boy,  bcr  Soiuc  lion,  ber  ©enoffc  companion 
etc.  —  Exceptions  belonging  to  Class  I  are:  ber  ^(i[c  cheese  and  a  few 
others  which,  originally  ending  in  en,  drop  'the  n  more  or  less  regularly, 
e.  g.,  bcr  i^ricbc  or  ^^ricbcn  peace. 

Lists  of  Nouns.  Unfortunately  for  the  beginner,  a  number  of  the 
very  commonest  nouns  which  he  is  expected  to  learn  first  do  not  fall 
under  any  of  the  rules  given  above,  but  must  simply  be  committed  to 
memory.  Of  these  the  student  should  either  make  lists  of  his  own,  or 
he  may  learn  them  from  the  following,  which  include  all  the  nouns  used 
in  the  exercises  of  this  book,  and  a  few  others  equally  common.  Such 
as  come  under.  Rules  1-5  are  marked  with  a  star;  and  umlaut  in  the 
plural  is  indicated  thus  {^): 

Class  I 

bcr  Hpfel  (■^)  apple  bcr  ©ommcr*  summer 

ber  33ruber  (^)  brother  ber  33ogeI  (^)  bird 

bcr  2)icner  servant  ber  SSagen  wagon,  carriage 

ber  (Sfcl  donkey  ber  SBinter^  winter 

ber  i^'m^tx  finger  ha^  gen[ter  window 

ber  ®arten  (-^)  garden  ba^  ^euer  fire 

ber  ^immel  sky,  heaven  ^ha^  ^riiulein  young  lady.  Miss 

ber  ^aifer  emperor  *ha^  Tlah^^m  girl 

ber  !Bel^rer  teacher  bo8  SSaffer  water 

ber  SD^orgcn  morning  ha^  ^i^^ci^  room 

bcr  Onfel  uncle  bic  9D?utter  (^)  mother 

ber  ©c^nciber  tailor  bie  Zo6)itx  (^)  daughter 

bcr  ©chiller  pupil,  student 

*  The  names  of  the  seasons  are  all  masculine. 

Class  II 

bcr  Slbcnb  evening  *ber  SBricf  letter 

*ber  5Irm  arm  *bcr  ^att  (^)  fall,  case 

*bcr  iBaum  (■^)  tree  ber  ^einb  enemy 

*ber  ^crg  mountain  *ber  glufe  (*)  rii;er 


REVIEW   AND   DRILL    (OPTIONAL) 


i03 


bcr  i^rcunb  friend 
*bcr  guB  (-)  foot 

bcr  ^ti'm  (^)  d^^ 

bcr  ,^unb  c?o^ 

bcr  §ut  (^)  /^a^ 
*bcr  ^ampf  (^)  combat 
*bcr  ^ijnig  A;m^ 
*bcr  ^ricg  lyar 

bcr  3)?o'nat  month 

bcr  2)^on'tag^  Monday 
*bcr  "ipia^  (^)  pZace 

bcr  9^ocf  (^)  coa^ 
*bcr  ©d^Iag  (^)  blow 
*bcr  (Sicg  victory 

bcr  ©ol^n  (■^)  son 

bcr  (Sonntag^  Sunday 

bcr  ©tcin  stone 

bcr  ©tul^l  (^)  c/iatV 
*bcr  2;ag  day 
*bcr  Stifd^  to6Ze 

'  The  names  of  the  days  of 


*bcr  Xurm  {^)  tower 
*bcr  )E3cg  u'a?/,  roac? 

bcr  SBcin  mne 
*bcr  ^ug  C-^)  train 

bic  ^anb  (■^)  /lanc? 

bic  5^ad^t  (^)  nzg'/i^ 

bic  9^ot  (^)  distress,  need 

bic  ©tabt  (^)  c%,  toi/;/i 

bag  53cm  leg 

ha^  SBrot  6reac? 

bog  S)ing  ^/tzngf 

ba6  ^aar  hair 

ha^  ^ai)t  year 

tia^  papier'  paper 

ba^  ^ferb  /lorse 

ha^  ©d^iff  s/iip 

bag  ©tilcf  piece 

ba^  Xkv  animal,  beast 

bag  SBort  word 


the  week  are  all  masculine. 


Class  III 


bcr  ©cift  ghost,  spirit 

bcr  ®ott  (-)  god 

bcr  3n:'tum  (•^)  error 

bcr  2)?atm  (*)  man 

bcr  9?eid^'tum  (^)  ric/ies 

bcr  SSalb  (f)  forest 

bag  33ilb  picture 

bag  i8uc^  (^)  book 

bag  !5)a(i^  (^)  roo/ 

bag  ©orf  (•^)  village 

*bag  Si'gcntum  (-^)  property 

bag  ^clb  yieZc? 

*bag  i^ilrftcntum  (*)  principality 


bag  ®clb  money 
bag  ©lag  (^)  ^Zass 
bag  ^aug  C"^)  house 
*bag  ^er'jogtum  C-^)  rfwc% 
bag  ^olg  (^)  t^ooc? 
bag  ^inb  child 
bag  ^Icib  caress 
bag  Sanb  (■^)  ta<^ 
bag  ©d^Iofe  (■^)  cas^Ze 
bag  ©d^tDcrt  sword 
bag  2!al  (•^)  2;a/Zei/ 
bag  3SoI!  (■^)  people 
bag  SBcib  woman 


Class  IV 


bcr  {^iirft  prince 
bcr  ®raf  cownZ 
bcr  $clb  Aero 


bcr  ^crr  master,  gentleman 
bcr  ^nabc  601/ 
bcr  9?Jcnfci^  man 


104  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

bcr  ^rinj  prince  bic  9?ofc  rose 

bcr  ©olbat'  soldiet  bic  ©c^Iad^t  6a«fe 

bic  Slnt'lDort  answer  bic  ©d^ulc  sc/iooZ 

bic  5lr'beit  lyorA;,  Zaftor  bic  ®d^n)c[tcr  sister 

bic  S3lumc /oi^er  bic  ©cite  side 

bic  53rucfc  bridge  bic  (Sonne  sun 

bic  (Srbc  ear^/i  bic  ©timmc  wfce 

bic  i^cbcr  feather,  pen  bic  ©tra^c  street 

bic  5^09^  question  bic  <Stunbc  /lour 

bic  ^i^au  woman,  vnfe  bic  Jot  c/eed 

bic  i^xtnht  joy  bic  Xiir  door 

*bic  i^rcunbin /nenci  bie  Ul^r  hour,  clock 

bic  ®e[c^id^'tc  stor?/  *bic  SSafir'ficit  Zri^i/i 

*bic  ^offnung  hope  bic  SBelt  iworZc? 

bic  ^ird^c  church  bic  SSod^e  tf^ee/c 

*bic  ^6'nigin  queen  bic  3^^*  time 

bic  9lci[c  journey 

Drill.  Classify  and  inflect,  with  the  definite  article  or  with  jcncr, 
biefcr  or  njcld^cr,  the  nouns  in  this  section,  observing  that  when  the 
gender  and  class  can  not  be  determined  by  applying  one  of  the  first  five 
rules  of  gender,  the  noun  is  either  one  which  should  have  been  memorized 
from  the  preceding  lists  or  one  whose  class  can  be  ascertained  from  an 
accompanying  article,  adjective  or  pronoun;  thus:  in  the  phrase  mit 
grower  @f)re  with  great  honor,  the  noun  is  shown  to  be  a  feminine  of 
Class  IV,  for  grower,  being  governed  by  mit,  must  be  dat.  sing,  fem., 
and  a  feminine  noun  of  more  than  one  syllable  must  belong  to  Class  IV 
(Rule  8).  Again:  in  bem  mei^en  9)2antel,  tDclc^cn  er  trug  in  the  white  cloak 
which  he  wore;  here  neither  bem  nor  njei^en  shows  whether  9}2antet  is 
masculine  or  neuter,  they  only  exclude  the  possibility  of  its  being  fem- 
inine, but  h)cld^en  shows  it  to  be  masculine,  and,  being  a  masculine  in  el, 
it  belongs  to  Class  I  (Rule  7) : 

3tDcig  twig;  ®(^5nf)eit  beauty;  ^u&  (■^)  kiss;  <Stabt;  Uniderfitot'  university; 
Xop\  (■^)  pot;  93ilb;  (Srfin'bung  invention;  ein  foId^cS  (Srelg'niS  such  an  event; 
Tl&X(i)tn  fairy  tale;  ©perling  sparrow;  ®d^i[f;  ®orf;  (Si'gentum  property;  ^anb; 
cin  <Sd^icf'[aI  a  fate,  lot;  ^Iei'nig!eit  trifle;  3^crglein  little  dwarf;  in  [old^er  SBilb* 
ni8  in  such  a  wilderness;  ?c^'rerin  teacher;  3?ogeI;  cine  fc^one  &aht  a  beauti- 
ful gift;  (5c^n)e[ter;  Jurm  (■')  tower;  SBa^rl^eit  truth;  [ic  ging  in  cin  ^lofter  (^) 
she  went  into  a  convent;  SBilj  joke;  ®db;  ^nobc;  cine  90?eile  lang  q  mile  long; 
^artei'  party,  faction;  Tlann;  „<B^'6nt  3'ttfel!"  rief  cr  "Beautiful  island!"  he 
exclaimed;  SBalb;  grofc^  (*)  frog;  yiaijt;  auf  feiner  ©coulter  on  his  shoulder; 
SReligion'   religion;  Sgrief;   9?eid^tum;  3:od^ter;  cr  bat  urn  Slrbcit,  abet  id)  l^attc 


LESSON   17:   VERBS  105 

!cinc  he  asked  for  work,  hut  I  had  none;  i^e[tung  fortress;  2:ag;  Jtcr;  ^Jclb; 
©cle'gen^cit  opportunity;  ein  flcincr  ^o.\^  a  little  hare;  {6)  gab  i^m  2)?effcr  unb 
®abel,  ieneg  legtc  er  red^tg  f)in,  bicfe  linfg  /  gave  him  {a)  knife  and  (a)  fork, 
the  former  he  laid  down  at  his  right,  the  latter  at  his  left;  ®ott;  SQZog'Ud^- 
felt  possibility;  ^^abrlf  factory;  ^immcr;  ^ird^c;  (Sturm  (■^)  storm;  SSagcn; 
Wtn\6);  ®Io«;  ^^u^;  ^unb;  ©efcirfd^aft  company;  cr  mad^tc  brei  i^cl^Icr,  fie  gar 
fclnen  he  made  three  mistakes,  she  none  at  all;  ?anb;  ^^igut/  figure,  shape; 
^aljd^en  kitten;  ^crr;  tocld^  bunfle«  ®c[ang'ni3!  what  a  dark  prison!  mit  rotcr 
2:inte  lyiY/i  red  mA;;  SSort;  Slbcnb. 

Adjectives.  1.  Change  the  adjectives  and  adverbs  in  the  following 
sentences  from  the  positive  or  superlative  degree  to  the  comparative: 
er  fd^ricb  cincn  langen  ^rief;  flc  faufte  bic  bcftcn  ^ebcm;  ba«  i[t  bcr  fUrjeftc  SBeg; 
id^  iBartcte  am  Idngftcn;  gu  (at)  iener  ^cit  max  cr  am  rcic^ften;  ba  [prad^  eincr  ber 
altcn  2)2anner;  ^arl  lief  am  fd^nettften  (fastest). 

2.  Supply  the  inflectional  endings  and  the  suffixes  of  the  comparative 
or  superlative:  (a)  9iur  bieienig-,  h)etd^-  fein-  ?^reunbe  l^aben,  finb  arm. 
(b)  2ln  bunfel-  Jagen  arbeite  id^  in  bem  anber-  ^inxmcr,  toeld^-  )oid  l^ett-  ift,  al8 
bief-  ^ier.  (c)  SSetc^-  bon  ten-  beib-  ^nabe-  meinen  ®ie?  htn  flein-  obcr  ben 
gro^-?  —  3d^  meinc  ben  griJ^-  unb  iilt-.  —  ^a3  ift  ^arl  ©c^mibt;  ber  ift  grfife- 
al«  ber  anber-,  aber  nic^t  alt-,  ^eibe-  ^nabe-  finb  Don  gleic^-  (same)  Sllter 
(masc,  age),  (d)  „Unfer-  3Saterg  "ipfcrb-  .finb  ^eutc  franf,"  fagte  5Inna  ju  i^r- 
(gc^mefter,  „unb  bag  ein-  ift  bietleic^t  (perhaps)  fc^on  tot."  (e)  2)a«  finb  bie* 
felb-  ?eute,  mit  ben-  toir  auf  bem  gro§-  ©c^iff-  ful^r-,  unb  bcr-  ^inb-  immer 
mit  ben  unfrig-  fpielten.  (f)  T)a  fommt  fie  fd^on  mit  ein-  ®Ia«  fait-  SSaffcr«. 
(g)  gr  ritt  in  b-  nac^-  ©tabt  unb  fauf-  mel^rer-  fef)r  f(^6n-  33iic^-  toon  ein- 
alt-  SD?ann-,  melc^-  in  ein-  flein-  ^aufc  l^inter  b-  ^irc^e  njol^nt.  (h)  ^n  jen- 
lang-  unb  blutig-  (bloody)  ,^ricge  fiel  manc^  tapfer-  (brave)  ©olbat'  (soldier), 
unb  t)iel-  toon  benen,  b-  hjieber  nad^  ^auf-  famen,  toax-  ii)V  ganj-  Seben  (neut., 
life)  lang  franf.  (i)  2)a«  ift  b-  alter^ac^-  33aum  in  mein-  ©arten.  (j)  (5r 
ift  ein  2)eutfc^-.  (k)  5)er  Slrjt  (physician)  blieb  b-  gang-  S^ad^t  bei  bem  ^ranf- 
(1)  S)a  lagcn  oiel-  Stot-.      (m)   @r  fam  am  crft-  SIpril. 


Lesson  17 

verbs:  principal  parts 

The  German  verb  has  two  voices,  the  active  and  the  pas- 
sive; four  modes,  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  imperative  and 
conditional;  one  verbal  noun,  the  infinitive;  and  two  verbal 
adjectives,  the  present  participle  and  the  past  participle. 


106 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


The  Simple  Forms,  all  grouped  under  the  active  voice,  are 


1.  the  present  indicative 

2.  the  present  subjunctive 

3.  the  past  indicative 

4.  the  past  subjunctive 


5.  the  imperative 

6.  the  present  infinitive 

7.  the  present  participle 

8.  the  past  participle 


All  other  forms  are  Compound  Forms,  or  verb-phrases,  and 
are  made  with  the  auxiharies  l^dben  have,  fein  he  and  tDerben 
become. 

The  Stem  of  a  verb  is  found  by  dropping  from  the  present 
infinitive  the  final  en  or  n* 

The  Principal  Parts  of  a  verb,  from  which  all  the  other  parts 
or  forms  can  be  inferred  or  derived,  are  1.  the  present  infinitive; 
2.  the  first  person  singular  of  the  past  indicative;  3.  the  past 
participle. 

Weak  and  Strong  Verbs.  Verbs  are  divided,  with  refer- 
ence to  their  inflection,  into  weak  and  strong  verbs. 

In  the  weak  verbs,  the  first  person  singular  of  the  past  in- 
dicative adds  tc  or  ete  to  the  stem,  and  the  past  participle 
adds  t  or  et» 

In  the  strong  verbs,  the  first  person  singular  of  the  past 
indicative  changes  the  stem-vowel,  but  takes  no  ending,  and 
the  past  participle  adds  en» 

In  both  weak  and  strong  verbs,  the  past  participle  has  the 
prefix  ge* 

Examples  (principal  parts): 

lob-ett         lob-te        ge-Iob-t 
reb-en         reb-ete       ge-reb-et 

\t^-m         \tti)  gc-fc^-en 

fec^t-cn       fo(^t  ge-foc^t-en 

fing-en       fang  ge-fung-en 


weak 


strong 


praise  praised  praised 
talk  talked  talked 


see  saw  seen 
fight  fought  fought 
sing  sang  sung 


Below  are  given  the  principal  parts  of  all  the  verbs  that  have  occurred 
thus  far.     Those  with  ift  before  the  past  participle  take  the  auxiliary 


LESSON    17:   VERBS 


107 


fein  be,  instead  of  l^aben  have,  in  certain  compound  forms,  and  their 
principal  parts  should  be  learned  with  ift.  —  The  first  three,  being  the 
common  auxiliaries,  are  not  grouped  as  either  weak  or  strong,  though 
l^aben  belongs  with  the  former,  and  [ein  and  merben  with  the  latter. 


^abcn 

§atte 

ge^abt 

have 

fein 

tioav 

ift  getrefen 

he 

h)erbcn 

n)urbe  or  h)arb   ift  getoorben 

WEAK    VERBS 

become 

fragcn 

fragte 

gefragt 

ask,  inquire 

ftt^ren 

fii^rte 

gefii^rt 

lead,  guide 

glauben 

glaubte 

geglaubt 

believe,  think 

^orcn 

^orte 

ge^ort 

hear 

faufen 

faufte 

gcfauft 

buy 

Icben 

lebte 

gelebt 

live 

Icgett 

legte 

gelcgt 

lay 

madden 

mad^te 

gemad^t 

make,  do 

mcincn 

meinte 

gemelnt 

mean,  think 

fagett 

fagte 

gefagt 

say,  tell 

fe^en 

fefete 

gefe^t 

set,  put,  place 

fpielen 

fpielte 

gefpielt 

play 

fud^en 

fud^te 

gefud^t 

seek,  look  for 

njo^nen 

tDo^ntc 

getr)of)nt 

dwell,  live 

geigen 

geigte 

gegeigt 

show,  point  out 

anttDorten 

antnjortete 

geantn3ortet 

answer,  reply 

arbeiten 

arbeitete 

gearbeitet 

work 

n)orten 

iDartete 

gemartet 

wait 

STRONG    VERBS 

fal^ren 

fu^r 

ift  gefa^ren 

drive 

tragen 

trug 

getragen 

carry,  wear 

fatten 

fiel* 

ift  gefallen 

fall 

fd^lafen 

f(^Uef 

gefc^lafen 

sleep 

laufen 

lief 

ift  gelaufen 

run 

ge^en 

ging* 

ift  gegangen* 

go,  walk 

ne^men 

nal^m 

genommen* 

take 

fpred^en 

fprad^ 

gefproc^en 

speak 

fterben 

ftarb 

ift  geftorben 

die 

108 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


gcbett 

gab 

gegeben 

give 

Wen 

\a^ 

gefc^en 

see 

ftc^en 

ftanb* 

geftanben* 

stand 

liegen 

lag 

gelegen 

lie 

bitten 

bat 

gebeten* 

beg,  ask 

%n 

far 

gefeffen* 

sit 

reiten 

ritt* 

ift  geritten* 

ride 

bleiben 

blieb 

ift  gebtieben 

stay,  remain 

fc^reiben 

fd^rieb 

gefd^rieben 

write 

fommen 

fam* 

ift  ge  fommen 

come 

'    finben 

fanb 

gefnnben 

find 

fingen 

fang 

gefungen 

sing 

trinfen 

tranf 

getrunfen 

drink 

*  Notice  the  change  (from  the  infin.)  of  the  final  consonant  of  the  ste 

•  . 

Lesson  i8 

THE    PERFECT    AND     PLUPERFECT    INDICATIVE. 
IRREGULAR    OR   MIXED  NOUNS 


§aben  and  all  other  transitive  verbs,  as  also  certain  intran- 
sitives,  form  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  indicative  with  l^aben* 
@ein,  however,  and  many  other  intransitives,  most  of  which 
signify  a  change  of  condition,  as  tDcrben,  or  motion,  as  gel^en 
and  fommen,  form  those  tenses  with  fein  —  these  are  the  verbs 
whose  principal  parts  are  given  with  ift  before  the  past  par- 
ticiple (Lesson  17). 


/  have  had 
id)  f)aht 
bn  ^aft 
er  f)at 
njir  l^aben 
i^r  f)abt 
fie  l^aben 


gel^abt 


PERFECT    INDICATIVE 

/  have  been  or  become 
i(^  bin 
bu  bift 
cr  ift 
toxx  finb 
il^r  feib 
fie  finb 


getDefen  or  gelDorben 


LESSON    18.    i:   PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  INDICATIVE       109 


PLUPERFECT    INDICATIVE 


I  had  had 

\6)  l^atte 
bu  ^atteft 
cr  l^attc 
h)lr  l^atten 
i^r  ^attet 
fie  l^atten 


gcl^abt 


/  had  been  or  become 
\6)  roax 
bu  tDarft 
cr  h)ar 
n)ir  maren 
i^r  tDar(e)t 
fie  tDaren 


getDefcn  or  gctDorbcn 


Note.  Observe  that  just  as  id^  hjortc  means  not  only  /  wait,  but  also 
/  am  waiting  (Lesson  1. 1.  note  1),  so  id^  i^abc  gcnjartct  means  not  only  /  have 
waited,  but  also  /  have  been  waiting,  and  id^  ^atte  gelDortct  not  only  /  had 
waited,  but  also  /  had  been  waiting. 


ber  @raf 
blc  (Stunbc 
bic  U^r 
bie  ^od^e 

fd^Iagen     fd^Iug 

friil^  early 
fpat  Zaie 


VOCABULARY 

bic  (Sc^iffe  s/iip 
bic  ©rafctt  cown^ 
bic  ©tunbctt  /lowr 
bic  Ul^rcii  clock,  watch 
bic  SBoc^cn  lyeeA; 

gefd^Iagcn  s^rzAje,  defeat,  beat 

faum  scarcely,  hardly 
nac^bcm,  conj.,  after 


Observe  the  position  of  the  participles  in  the  German  sentences  below. 
The  rules  for  the  position  of  the  verb,  given  in  Lesson  3,  apply  only  to 
the  inflected  or  personal  forms  of  the  verb,  often  called  the  finite  verb; 
but  the  uninflected  or  non-personal  forms,  namely,  the  infinitive  and 
past  participle,  stand  last  in  independent  sentences  or  clauses  of  both 
the  normal  and  the  inverted  orders,  and  next  to  last  in  dependent  clauses 
of  the  transposed  order. 

A.  1.  ^ic  bciben  iimgen  ©rafcn  finb  cine  gangc  (S.tunbc  l^ier  getticfcn. 
2.  ^ir  l^aben  atle  unfrc  geinbc  Qcfc^Iagcn.  3.  ^er  5lltc  l^atte  nod^  nic 
cin  (Sc^iff  Qcfc^en,  benn  cr  ^atte  immer  auf  bem  ?anbc  gcUJO^nt.  4.  3c^ 
§abe  bie  53uc^er  t)on  bem  <Stu^l  gcnommcn  unb  auf  ben  3:ifd^  ficlcgt. 
5.  ©ie  fagt,  bafe  fie  bie  iBlid^er  t)on  bem  ©tul^l  gcnommen  unb  auf  ben 
'Z\\6)  Qclcgt  ]^at.  6.  9lad^bem  fie  faum  brei  3Sod^cn  bei  unS  gctocfcn 
n^ar,  murbe  fie  cineS  SD^orgen^^  frlil^  um  fiinf  U^r  franf,  unb  um  fieben 


110  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

Ul^r  toax  fie  fd^on  tot.  7.  ^aum  mar  fie  brei  SSod^en  bet  un^  gcrticfcn, 
fo^  tDurbe  fie  eine^  3}Jorgen^^  frii^  urn  fllnf  U^r  frattf,  unb  urn  fieben 
U^x  tdax  fie  fc^on  tot.  8.  3Son  bent  (Sd^iffe  bi^  gu^  eurem  §aufe  finb 
ioir  gu  gu6  gcgangcn.  9.  3)u  fommft  oiel  gu  fpcit,  lieber  greunb,  bie 
§erren,  bie  bu  fud^ft,  finb  fd^on  dor  einer  @tunbe  auf  {to,  up  to)  be^ 
©rafen  ©d^tofe  gcfa^rcti.  10.  3d^  frage,  ob  bie  U^r  fd^on  elf  gcfd^tagcn 
§at.  —  9^ein,  fo  fpcit  ift  eg  nod^  nid^t.  11.  51B  id^  ^eute  frii^^  3^re  liebe 
9}hxtter  fa^,  fanb  id^,  ba^  fie  in  ben  toenigen  ^ct^ten  red^t  {right  =  very) 
alt  unb  fd^toad^  gcttiorbcn  toar.  12.  Snblid^,  ha  liegt  bag  ^ud^,  ba^  id^ 
fo  lange  gcfurfit  Isabel 

B.  13.  ®ie  gute  5ltte  l^atte  nod^  nie  ein  <Sd^iff  gcfc^cn,  loeit  fie 
immer  auf  bent  ?anbe  gcttiol^nt  ]^atte.  14.  (Sineg  2:ageg^  toar  ber  reid^e 
®raf  in  ber  ©tabt  gctoefcn  unb  Ifiatte  tne^irere  junge  "ipferbe  gcfauft. 
15.  9^ad^bent  toir  faunt  eine  ©tunbe  gefa^irctt  ioaren,  fanten  n)ir  an 
einen  gro^en  glufe.  16.  ^aunt  tnaren  n)ir  eine  ©tunbe  gcfa^rcn,  fo^ 
tauten  njir  an  einen  grogen  glu^.  17.  ^Dag  griiulein  ^attt  bie  ^inber 
in  ben  ©arten  gcfiifirt  unb  i^nen  einige  Spfel  gcgclbcn.  18.  3d^  fa^^, 
bag  ha^  graulein  bie  ^inber  in  ben  ©arten  Qcfii^rt  unb  i!)nen  einige 
5lpfet  gcgcbcn  l^atte.  19.  SBarunt  bleiben  @ie  nid^t  etmag  tanger? 
(gg  ift  nod^  friif),  unfere  U^r  l^at  nod^  nid^t  fiinf  gcfc^tagcn.  —  ^itte, 
menu  3§re  U^r  nod^  nid^t  flinf  gefc^Iagcn  l^at,  fo  ge^t  fie  gu  fpat. 
20.  3Benn  id^  fage:  „3d^  bin  brei  SBod^en  franf  gctocfcn,"  fo  nteine  id^, 
bag  id^  ie^t  nid^t  Tnef)r  fran!  bin.  2lber  fage  ic^,  „3^  bin  brei  ^oc^en 
tranf  ober  „3d^  bin  fd^on  brei  $3od^en  franf,"  fo  nteine  id^  bantit  {by 
it),  bag  id^  aud^  je^t  nod^  franf  bin.  21.  SSie  lange  er  t)on  ber  ^ird^e 
big  gu^  bent  neuen  ©d^loffe  gegangcn  niar,  bag  fagte  er  ntir  nid^t.  22.  3)a 
all  bie  gebern,  bie  fie  int  ^orfe  gefauft  fatten,  fd^Ied^t  toaren,  fo  ging  ic§ 
felbft  gur  ©tabt  unb  faufte  einige  gute.  23.  ^a  tarn  l^eute  fril]^^  ein 
iBrief  toon  il^r,  morin  fie  f(§rieb:  „Unfer  lieber,  alter  33ater  ift  geftern 
abenb  unt  ge^n  U^r  gcftorl^cn." 

1  Adverbial  genitive,  one  morning,  and,  in  sentence  14,  one  day.  —  2  y)hen. 
—  ^  up  to,  as  far  as.  —  ^  early  this  morning. 

C.  1.  The  count  has  defeated  the  king.  2.  You  have  come 
an  hour  too  early,  my  dear  friend.  3.  After  we  had  waited 
three  or  four  weeks,  [there]  came  a  long  letter  from  him,  but 
then  {ba)  it  was  too  late.  4.  I  have  seen  many  large  ships, 
but  this  is  the  largest-of-all.  5.  If  it  is  true  that  he  has  bought 
Mr.  Smith's  house,  (fo)  I  have  heard  nothing  about  it.    6.  Scarcely 


LESSON    18.    II :   IRREGULAR   NOUNS  111 

had  you  gone  home  when  (fo)  your  youngest  sister  came,  who 
had  been  looking  for  you  a  whole  hour.  7.  One  morning,  we 
found  that  he  had  been  working  all  (the  whole)  night.  8,  Has 
the  little  one  told  you  where  she  has  been?  —  Yes,  she  says  she 
has  been  playing  in-the  garden.  9.  It  has  just  (cbcn)  struck 
twelve,  and  now  it  is  too  late.  10.  One  day,  in  the  month  of 
June  (3u'ni)  —  I  think  it  was  on  the  fifteenth  —  we  had  been 
sitting  under  the  trees  and  singing  till  it  grew  quite  dark. 

D.  11.  How  old  he  has  grown,  and  how  feeble!  12.  As  our 
old  horse  (has)  died,  we  (have)  bought  a  new  one,  and  a  stronger 
one.  13.  These  little  children  have  always  lived  in  the  city 
and  have  never  seen  a  green  forest.  14.  Our  clock  had  scarcely 
struck  two  when  (fo)  Miss  Mary  Smith  came  and  told  us  why 
her  mother  had  not  bought  the  house.  15.  No,  that  was  several 
weeks  later,  after  she  had  spoken  with  the  count  about -it. 
16.  Early  in-the  (am)  morning  one  always  works  best.  17.  How 
long  did  you  ride  (use  the  perf.)  from  the  village  to  the  (bi^  gur) 
city?  —  Only  two  hours.  18.  To-day  I  have  come  a  whole 
hour  earlier,  because  we  have  had  no  school.  19.  I  did  not  ask 
him  whether  he  had  been  working  all  (the  whole)  day.  20.  With 
whom  have  you  been  playing,  children?  —  We  have  not  been 
playing,  Mrs.  Smith,  we  have  been  in  (the)  school.  21.  There 
is  the  gentleman  whom  we  saw  (perf.)  yesterday  in  front  of  the 
count's  castle.  —  That  is  the  count  himself.  —  He  is  much  older 
than  I  thought.  22.  How  did  you  sleep  (perf.)?  —  Not  very 
well. 

n 

Irregular  or  Mixed  Nouns.  The  nouns  below  form  the 
singular  after  Classes  I-III,  the  plural  after  Class  IV: 


NOM.   SING. 

GEN.   SING. 

NOM.   PLUR. 

ber  ^auer 

beg  ^aucr^ 

bie  ^auem 

farmer 

bcr  5^a(^bar 

bc^  ^ad^bat)^ 

bie  5^ac^bam 

neighbor 

ber  (Biaat 

be6  (Staatc^ 

bie  ©taatcn 

state 

ha^  ^lugc 

beg  5luge^ 

bie  2lugett 

eye 

ba«  O^r 

beg  O^rc^ 

bie  O^rcn 

ear 

bag  33ett 

beg  iBettc^ 

bie  iBetten 

bed 

112  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

ha^  (Snbc  bc^  (Snbc!^  bie  (Snbcn  en(i 

bcr  ^oftor         be^  SDoftor^        bie  ^ofto'rcn       dodor 
bcr  *iprofcf'for      be^  *iprofef'for;§      bie  *iProfeffo'ren     professor 

Examples  : 

N.  ber  (Btaat  ha^  ^lugc  ber   ^Doftor 

G.  bc«  etaate^  be«  5luge^  be«   !Dof'tor)g 

D.  bcm  ©taate  bem  Huge  bem  ^oftor 

A.  ben  (Btaat  ba^  5luge  ben  ^oftor 

N.  bie  ©taatcti  bie  5(ugen  bie  ^^ofto'rcn 

G.  ber  (Staaten  ber  5lugen  ber  !I)ofto'rctt 

D.  ben  (Staatcn  ben  5lugen  ben  !Dofto'ren 

A.  bie  (Btaaten  bie  ^lugen  bie  ^ofto'ren 

SBauer  and  ^a(i)hax  also  form  a  singular  after  Class  IV: 
be^,  bem,  ben  iBauern  or  9^ad)barn. 

!Da^  §er3  heart  is  inflected  as  follows:  be^  ^erjen^,  bem  ^er- 
3en,  ba^  ^er^;  plur.  bie,  ber,  ben,  bk  ^eraen* 

A,  1.  Unter  meinen  ^^ac^bam  finb  gmei  ^rofeffo'ren  unb  cin  junger 
^oftor,  ber  frli^er  (formerly)  im  ^Btaatt  ^tW)  ^ampf()ire  gehjol^nt  ^at. 
2.  ©egen  (gnbe^  be^  SO^onat^  2lpril  fur)r  er  mil  feinem  5^ad^bar,  ^errn 
^oftor  ©d^mibt,^  auf^  i^anb  unb  faufte  toon  einem  iBauem  ein  neue6 
^Pfcrb,  benn  fein  alte^  iDar  fd^on  lange  franf  unb  fd^n)ad^  gen)efen  unb 
wax  enblid^  gc[torben,  3,  3^  bat  if)n  urn  ein  ^iii^^er  ntit  gtDei  ^etten. 
4.  SD^an  iDirb  nic^t  alt,  folange  ba^  ^erg  jung  bleibt.  5.  ^arum  ge^ft 
bu  nic^t  gu  ^oftor  (Sci^mibt,^  n)enn  bu  glaubft,  bafe  beine  5Iugen  fc^tDad^ 
iDcrben?  6.  3)a  i^  fa^,  bafe  bie  5Ilte  mit  bem  einen  Ol^re  nii^t  me^r  fo 
gut  prte,  toie  frii^er  (formerly),  fo  fe^te  ic^  mid^  auf  bie  anbere  ©eite  unb 
fprad^  etnjag  tauter  (louder).  7.  ^ann  ift  .^errn  "iprofeffor  ©c^mibt^^ 
Xoc^ter  geftorben?  —  2Im  einunb^JDanjigften  5(priL  8.  21B  junge  grau* 
h)ar  fie  fel^r  fd^on,  9.  ^ie  U^r  tiatte  fd^on  lange  neun  gefd^lagen,  unb 
id^  n)ar  fd^on  ^trcimar  (twice)  im  ©arten  gemefen,  ba  (when)  lagft  bu 
fauler  ^nabe  nod^  im  iSett^  unb  fd^liefft,  bafe  ha^  eine  5luge  ba^  anbere 
nid^t  \di).  10.  3n  menigen  (Stunben  fuf)ren  n)ir  burd^  ben  gangen  <Btaat, 
t)on  einem  (Snbe  be^felben  bi^  gum  anbern. 

B.  IL  (S^  tDar  einmal  ein  reid^er,  alter  53auer,  ber  l^atte  Diele  geinbc 
unter  fcincn  9^ad^bam.    12.  Qn  jebem  S'^^^^t^  ftanbcn  ginei  iBetlen, 


LESSON   18.    II :   IRREGULAR   NOUNS  113 

cin  grogc^  unb  cin  fleinc^,  ein  grower,  runber  (round)  Zi\ii)  unb  gmd 
fe^r  fd^onc  @tuf)lc.  13.  211^  i(i)  urn  gel^n  Ul^r  nad^  §aufe  fam,  lagcn 
jd^on  alle  im  ^ctt^  unb  fd^liefen.  14.  ^tx  cine  t)on  jcnen  bciben  SD^an^^ 
nern  mar  t)or  einigen  ^a^ren  au^  bem  (Staate  3lIinoi^  gefommcn,  too 
cr  ai^  iungcr  ^oftor^  auf  bem  ^attbc  gctoo^nt  l^atte;  bcr  anbcrc  toar  bcr 
(So^n  bc^  §crm  'iprofcffor  ©d^mibt^  or  .^crrn  ^rofcffor  (Sc^mibt^^ 
©ol^n.  15.  „^cnn  ©labftone  fprac^/'  fagte  cr,  „fo  toar  icbcr,  bcr  i^n 
l^firtc,  gang  2lugc  unb  O^r."  16.  ®egcn  (gnbc^  bc^fctben  Qal^re^  —  td^ 
glaube,  c^  toar  nod^  tm  9}?onat  5^ot)embcr  —  toar  aud^  mein  Ilcber,  alter 
9^ad^bar  (Sd^mibt  geftorbcn,  ein  Tlann,  in  beffen  58ruft  (breast)  ein 
toarme^  ^cr^  fur  alle  ^inbcr  unb  alle  ^ranfen  unfcrer  (Stabt  fd^lug. 
17.  ^enn  man  fagt:  „(Sr  legte  fid^  aufg  O^r/'  fo  meint  man  bamit: 
„(Sr  ging  gu  iBett  unb  fc^lief."  18.  Unb  fage  id^:  „3c^  l^abc  mit 
i^m  unter  t)ier  5lugen  gefprod^cn,"  fo  ift  ba^  foDicl,  aU  toenn  id^  fage: 
„3d^  l^abc  mit  il^m  aHcin  (alone)  gefprod^cn,  fobafe  fcin  anbcrcr  und 
gcl^iirt  §at." 

1  In  many  phrases  where  English  requires  the  definite  article,  German 
omits  it,  and  vice  versa.  —  ^  a  name  after  a  title  urith  preceding  article  is 
left  unvaried.  A  name  after  a  title  without  preceding  article  is  inflected  and 
the  title,  except  .^err,  is  then  left  unvaried.  Of  two  titles  the  second  is 
regularly  unvaried. 

C.  1.  What  lazy  boys!  they  have  lain  in  (-the)  bed  till  ten 
o'clock.  2.  As  [a]  young  man  I  could  see  (I  saw)  very  well,  but 
now  I  am  old,  and  my  eyes  have  grown  weak.  3.  Towards  [the] 
end  of  the  war,  none  of  my  neighbors,  who  formerly  (fruiter)  were 
all  rich  farmers,  had  more  than  one  horse.  4.  Those  are  the 
daughters  of  (the  Mr.)  Professor  Smith  or  (Mr.)  Professor  Smith's 
daughters.  5.  He  did  not  tell  me  from  (au6)  what  state  he  had 
come.  6.  Charles,  why  do  we  say:  ''This  or  that  man  has  two 
ears,"  but  "This  or  that  man  has  no  ear  for  music  (93lufif')?" 
When  we  hear  music,  do  we  not  hear  with  both  ears?  And  do 
we  not  also  say:  ''He  or  she  has  no  eye  for  what  is  beautiful  (for 
the  beautiful,  subst.  adj.  neut.  sing.)?"  It  is  true  that  God  has 
given  us  only  one  heart,  but  has  he  not  given  us  two  eyes  and 
two  ears?  7.  When  I  reached  (came  to,  an)  the  end  of  the  street, 
I  saw  in  front  of  Dr.  Smith's  house  the  poor  woman  whose  chil- 
dren are  so  sick.  8.  I  am  now  working  for  a  rich  old  farmer  who 
lives  on  the  other  side  of  the  river.     9.  Massachusetts  is  one  of 


114  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

the  smallest  states  of  the  Union  (Union',  fern.) ,  and  Texas  is  the 
largest-of-all;  it  (e^)  is  as  large  as  all  Germany  (gang  ^eutfc^lanb) . 

D.  10.  My  nearest  neighbor  is  (the)  old  farmer  Smith,  a  man 
with  one  eye,  two  large,  large  ears  and  a  heart  so  good  that  every 
child  in-the  village  calls  (nennt)  him  Uncle  Smith.  11.  Not  far 
(meit)  from  this  good  old  [man]  lives  Mr.  Miller  {TUilltx) ,  the  doc- 
tor of  the  village,  a  much  younger  man,  who  has  two  eyes,  but 
only  one  ear,  for  several  years  ago,  on  a  very  cold  day  in(-the) 
winter,  he  (has)  lost  (t3erIoren)  one.  12.  Of  him  (33or  bent)  many 
children  are  afraid  (bange),  because  he  often  says  to  (gu)  their 
parents:  "It  is  better  if  your  boy  does  not  eat  (ifet)  so  many 
green  apples"  or  '4f  your  little  girl  stays  at  home  to-day  and 
goes  to  bed."  13.  In(-the)  summer  I  have  another  (noc^  cinen) 
neighbor,  a  professor,  of  whom  all  [the]  people  in-the  village  say 
that  he  is  the  smartest  (flug)  man  in-the  whole  state,  or  even 
(gar)  in-the  whole  country.  14.  His  wife  is  Dr.  Miller's  sister, 
and  every  year,  towards  [the]  end  of  the  month  of  June  (3uni), 
they  come  with  their  four  children,  three  girls  and  one  boy,  and 
stay  till  the  (bi^  gum)  first  of  October  (Ofto'ber). 


Lesson  19 

THE  FUTURE   INDICATIVE.      IRREGULAR   WEAK  VERBS 

I 

The  future  indicative  of  all  verbs  is  formed  with  tDerbcn, 
as  shown  below. 

FUTURE    INDICATIVE 

/  shall  have  or  be  or  become  or  say  or  come  etc. 

i(i)  totxht 
bu  n)irft 
er  n)irb 
mir  merbcn 
U)x  njcrbet 
fie  iDcrbcn 

For  the  position  of  the  infinitive  see  Lesson  18.  i. 


I^aben  or  fein  or  n)erben  or  fagcn 
or  fomnten  etc. 


LESSON    19.    i:   FUTURE   INDICATIVE  115 

VOCABULARY 
bcr  "iprinj         hit  '^xin^tn  prince 

!Deutf(^lanb  Germany  (Snglanb  England 

beutfc^  German  cnglifd^  English 

nteTuanb  nobody  nun  now 

gang,  adv.,  quite,  all,  very  neulic^  recently,  the  other  day 

tDol^l  well,  in  good  health  fonbem  hut 

h)ieber  again,  back  biellcid^t'  perhaps 

reifen  reiftc  tft  gereift  travel,  go 

fc^iden         fc^idte  gcfd^idt  send 

tDunfd^en      tDiinfc^te  getDiinfc^t       wish 

3d^  reife,  gel^e  ober  fal^re  ju  meinem  ^ruber,  aber  id^  reife,  gel^c 
ober  fal^re  na^  bonbon  ober  nac^  ©nglanb, 

^e^t  means  simply  now,  at  present,  and  has  usually  no  reference  to 
what  has  gone  before ;  whereas  nun  means  now  in  the  sense  of  and  now  or 
and  therefore  now,  and  connects  the  present  with  what  has  gone  before, 
e.g.,  ic^  l^abe  ben  ganjen  Jag  gearbeitet,  nun  mitt  ic^  [plelen  /  have  worked  all  day 
and  {having  done  that)  I  will  now  play.  Hence  also  the  frequent  use  of 
nun  in  continuing  or  resuming  a  narrative,  e.  g.,  2II8  e«  nun  jludlf  fd^lug, 
tarn  er  unb  .  .  .  Now,  when  it  struck  twelve,  he  came  and  .  .  . 

A.  1.  3Serbcn  ©le  nad^ften  (Bommtx  tDieber  nad^  @nglanb  unb 
^Deutfc^Ianb  rci[en,  §tn  ^oftor?  —  3^  trerbe  bicfc^  So^r  tjicKeid^t  in 
5lmerifa  bleiben,  benn  mein  ^ruber  §einri(^  f:)at  mic^  neulic^  gebctcn, 
auf  (for)  einige  ^od^en  gu  i^m  nad^  <San  granci^co  gu  fommcn.^  2.  3d^ 
frage  @ic  je^t  nid^t  mel^r,  ob  cr  mciner  (Sd^tDeftcr  "ipferb  faufen  mirb, 
bcnn  er  l^at  e^  fd^on  t)or  etnlgen  ^agen  gefauft;  id^  frage  nur,  Voann  er 
i^r  ba^  ©elb  baflir  geben  h)irb.  3.  @ie  tDiinfd^t,  bafe  mir  i^r  balb  eln 
neue^  ^uc^  fd^idfen,  aber^  !ein  englifd^e^,  fonbem^  eln  beutfc^e^;  bielleid^t 
iDerbe  id^  morgen  eln^  unter  htn  3^rigen  finben,  tvmn  id)  gu  3^nen 
fontme.  —  3a,  ic^  toerbe  3^nen  mel^rere  geigen.  4.  51B  h)ir  nun  gh)ei 
gauge  ©tunben  getoartet  fatten  unb  nod^  niemaub  gefommen  mar,  ful^ren 
tcir  tnieber  nad^  §aufe.  5.  $Ser  mar  ber  -gerr,  ber  neben  bent  ^aifer 
ritt?  — 2)ag  mar  *iPring  §einrid^,  be^  taifer^  53ruber.  6.  !Da  id) 
l^eute  nic^t  gang  mo^I  bin,  fo  merbe  id^  gu  §aufe  bleiben.  7.  SBann 
mirft  bu  §erm  (Sc^mibt  ba^  ®e(b  fiir  ble  neuen  ^lid^er  fc^icfen?  —  Tlov^ 
gen,  menu  bu  e^  miinfd^eft.  —  ^arum  nid^t  fd^on  f)eute?  —  SSeil  id) 


116  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

l^cutc  fcinS  l^abc.  8.  (S^  lagen  fcinc  gutcn  gebcm  mel^r  auf  bcm  ^ifd^, 
fonbern^  nur  nod^  einige  fd^led^te.  9.  grii^  am  5lbenb  be^felben  2:agc8 
famcn  gtuei  beutfd^e  ^erren,  hit  mii  grau  ^rofeffor  (Sd^mibt  gu  fprcd^cn^ 
iDilnfd^ten.  10.  Qa,  ha^  ift  alle^  gang  ma^r,  lieber  greunb,  h)ag  bu 
fagft,  aber  nicmanb  tDirb  c^  bir  glauben.  11»  §cute  abenb  mcrben  aud^ 
h)ir  Icinger  bei  grau  (Bd^mlbt  bleiben,  iDcnn  c^  nur  nid^t  mieber  fo  l^eig 
in  il^rcn  3intmem  tolrb,  tcie  eS  neulid^  tDar.  12.  3(^  ^erbe  ©ie^  morgcn 
fprcd^cn. 

B.  13.  3^  l^iJrtc  e^  fd^on  nculid^,  al€  id^  bet  cud^  tnar,  aber  il^nt  l^at 
big  ic^t  nod^  niemanb  etn3a^  bation  gefagt.  14.  3ft  §err  ©c^mibt  nic^t 
gcftcm  nad^  (Snglanb  gcrelft?  —  9^ein,  aber  irenn  er  tDieber  gang  n)o]^l 
ift,  rnirb  er  bielleid^t  ^eute  abenb  reifen.  15.  ^a^  n3iinfd^en  @ie,  bitte? 
—  3d^  h)unfd^e  ein  neue^  ^leib  flir  biefe  £Ieine  gu  faufen.^  16.  9lun 
fam  ein  §err  gu  "^ferbe,  aber^  e6  tear  nid^t  ber  beutfd^e  ^aifer,  fonbcm^ 
fein  33ruber,  ^ring  §einrid^,  ben  n)ir  t)or  mel^reren  9}?onaten  aud^  fd^on 
in  ^nterifa  gefs^en  l^atten.  17.  (Sd^idft  bu  niir  bie  ^iid^er  nic^t,  fo 
fd^idfe  id^  bir  aud^  ba«  ®elb  nid^t,  l^orft  bu?  18.  (gg  finb  fd^on  Diele, 
biete  junge  9J? (inner  in  biefent  langen  ^riege  gefallen,  unb  aud^  mand^er 
au6  unferm  fleinen  (Staat.  19.  @^  gibt  einen  beutfd)en  ,^aifer,  aber=^ 
eg  gibt  feinen  ^aifer  t)on  3)eutfd^Ianb.  20.  Qd)  glaubc  faum,  bafe 
unfer  alter  ^a^hax  noc^  fo  lange  leben  n)irb,  benn  er  (iegt  fd^on  ntand^e 
SSod^e  franf  gu  §aufe  unb  toirb  Don  Xag  gu  S^age  fc^tDcid^er.  21.  SSenn 
il^r  morgen  loieber  fo  fpdt  fommt,  fo  toerbet  ifir  niemanb  mel^r  gu  ^aufc 
finben,  benn  loir  toerben  nid^t  n)ieber  auf  eud^  toaxtm,  ha^  fage  id^  eud^. 

22.  3d^  l^abe  i^n  gebeten,  mit  mir  aufg  Sanb  gu  fa^ren;  ha  er  aber  je^t 
fcine  3^it  ^at,  fo  mxht  id^  aud^  nid^t  fal^ren,  fonbern^  big  morgen  n)artcn. 

23.  3d^  loerbe  am  ©onntag  bei  meinen  ©Item  mit  il^r  fpred^en,  benn  fie 
l^at  mir  neulid^  gefagt,  bafe  fie  oor  bem  erften  ncid^ften  SD^onatg  nid^t  nad^ 
Slmerifa  reifen  mirb.  24.  3^  \)aht  §erm  "ifrofeffor  ©c^mibt  nod^ 
nid^t  gefproc^en.^ 

»  The  infinitive  in  infinitive  clauses  stands  last,  that  is,  all  its  adjuncts 
precede  it.  —  2  ^\j^x  may  follow  a  positive  or  a  negative  statement,  fonbern 
follows  only  a  negative  statement  and  introduces  a  substitute  statement; 
ahtT=but  yet,  \onbtxn=but,  on  the  contrary.  —  ^^pvtd)tn  with  the  accusative 
of  the  person  is  used  in  the  sense  of  speak  with,  or  as  an  equivalent  of  the 
colloquial  English  see. 

C.  1.  When  shall  you  go  to  England,  Charles?  —  Next  month, 
if  Father  sends  me  the  money.     2.  When  we  saw  the  prince,  he 


LESSON    19.    II :   IRREGULAR   WEAK  VERBS  117 

had  not  yet  been  in  America.  —  What  prince  do  you  mean?  — 
Prince*  Henry,  the  brother  of  the  German  emperor.  3.  I  wish 
to  buy  an  Enghsh  book  for  my  sister.  4.  ''He  has  not  gone  to 
Germany,  but  (=but  on  the  contrary)  to  America,"  she  said. 
5.  My  neighbor  is  not  sick,  but  (=but  yet)  he  is  not  quite  well, 
either  (he  is  also  not  quite  well).  6.  She  now  thinks  that  per- 
haps nobody  will  come  before  six  o'clock.  7.  Now,^  when  he 
had  written  this  long  letter,  he  sent  it  to  (an)  the  old  gentleman 
whom  we  saw  at  your  father's  the  other  day®;  and  he  (demonstr.) 
showed  it  to  me.  8.  After  the  rich  old  farmer  had  bought  one 
of  the  youngest  horses,  he  drove  home  again  (again  home). 
9.  Hardly  had  the  boys  come  out  of  (the)  school  when  (fo)  they 
begged  me  to  show  them  one  of  the  very-biggest  ships.  10.  There 
lay  more  books  on  the  chairs  than  on  the  tables. 

D.  11.  I  shall  stay  in  (-the)  bed  till  I  am  quite  well  again 
(again  quite  well).  12.  If  you  now  buy  the  English  books,  (fo) 
I  shall  perhaps  buy  the  German  ones.  13.  The  other  day,  when 
we  rode  through  the  forest,  we  saw  the  queen  in  her  carriage  and 
the  two  (both)  princes  on  horseback.  14.  Who  says  that  Henry- 
will  go  to  Germany?  —  He  says  so  (it)  himself.  15.  Charles,  if 
you  have  time  enough,  I  wish  to  speak  with  you.  16.  Now,^ 
when  I  had  found  nobody  in-the  house,  I  went  into  the  garden, 
and  there  they  sat,  Charles  and  Henry,  each  with  a  book  in  his 
(the)  hand.  17.  Perhaps  she  will  not  send  both  her  (her  both) 
daughters  to  England,  but  (=but,  on  the  contrary)  only  the 
younger  one,  for  the  older  one  has  already  been  there.  18.  That 
is  quite  true,  the  good  old  [woman]  was  not  rich,  but  (=but  yet) 
she  was  always  happy.  19.  There  stood  no  high  trees  on  this 
side  of  the  river,  as  you  say,  but  (=but  yet)  several  small  ones, 
and  if  you  go  with  me,  you  will  see  that  they  still  stand  there. 

*  Used  as  a  title  (without  preceding  article),  hence  not  inflected.  —  ^  gee 
note  under  Vocabulary  above.  — «  Lesson  2.  i.  note  10. 

II 

Irregular  Weak  Verbs.  The  following  verbs,  though  in- 
flected Hke  weak  verbs,  undergo  a  change  of  stem-vowel  in 
the  past  indicative  and  past  participle.     The  last  two  also 


118 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


change  the  final  consonants  of  the  stem  (j 

IS  their  equivaL 

do  in  English): 

brcnncn 

branntc         gcbrannt 

burn,  he  on  fire 

fenncn 

fanntc           gefannt 

know 

nenncn 

nanntc           gcnannt 

name,  call 

rcnncn 

ranntc       ift  gcrannt 

run,  race 

fcnbcn 

fanbtc            gefanbt 

send 

toenbcn 

iDanbtc          gemanbt 

turn 

bringcn 

brad^tc           gebrac^t 

bring,  take 

bcnfcn 

bac^tc            gebac^t 

VOCABULARY 

think 

bcr  !Dlcncr            btc  Wiener 

servant 

ha^ 

gcucr             bie  geuer  . 

fire 

ha^  ^ilb               bie  iBilber 

picture 

bcr  <Solbaf          btc  ©olba'tcn 

soldier 

rufcn       ricf        gcrufen     call,  shout,  cry  out 

atlcin'  alone  eben  just,  just  now 

fd^ncll  quick,  fast  iDcit  {wide) ,  far,  distant 

fru'f)cr  earlier,  former,  formerly 

A.  1.  Rcnncn  ®lc  ben  iBaucr,  beffcn  ^avA  gcftem  ahtnh  branntc? 
—  ^en  fenne  tc^  fel^r  gut,  benn  cr  iDar  aud^  @oIbat/  al^  3^r  33ater  unb 
\6)  \m  ^ricgc  hjaren.  2,  SBoran  (lit.  whereat,  i.  e.,  of  what)  bac^teft 
bu  cbcn,  ^arl?  —  2ln  unfcm  friil^eren  3)iener,  'i^tn  mir  ^nabcn  immer 
ben  Hlten  nannten.  ^er  arme  SDIann  n)o]^nt  ie^t  ganj  alleln  unb  ift 
alt  unb  fd^n)ad^  gcmorben,  n)ie  9}hitter  mir  fd^reibt.  3d^  Ujerbe  i^m 
morgen  etma^  ®elb  fenben,  3.  9^ad^bem  mir  bie  33ilber  in  ber  ^irc^c 
gefel^en  fatten,  gingen  tr)ir  fc^nell  burd^  einige  furge  unb  bunfle  (Strafeen 
nad^  bent  (Sd^Ioffe  be^  "ipringen  ^einrid^,  xod6)t^  nid^t  Votxi  t)on  bem  be^ 
^6nig«  ftel^t.  4.  ^oum  tear  ber  ^Diener,  ber  mir  titoa^  Gaffer  gebrad^t 
l^attc,  n)icber  au6  bem  3i^^c^/  fo  ^orte  id^,  bafe  unten  t)ic(e  Scute  geucr! 
geucr!  ricfen.  3d^  rannte  fd^ncll  auf  bie  ©trafee  unb  fa^,  '^a^  unfer^ 
9^ad^barg  ^au^  branntc.  5.  ^ommen  bie  ^erren  morgen  n)ieber  gu 
mir,  fo  njcrbe  ic^  fie  bitten,  fic^  an  ®ie  gu  njcnben.^  5116  fie  geftem  ^ier 
toaren,  bac^te  id^  nid^t  baran  (lit.  thereat,  i.  e.,  of  it),  \iQS^  (Sic  fie  fd^on 
Idngcr  unb  beffer  fenncn,  al6  id^.    6.  ^a  ber  ^aifer  f(^on  lange  franf 


LESSON    19.    II :   IRREGULAR   WEAK   VERBS  119 

lag,  fo  fanbtc  er  felnen  altcftcn  ^Bo^n,  "ipring  ^arl,  unb  biefer  fiil^rtc  bic 
(Solbaten  gegen  ben  geinb  unb  fd^Iug  i^n  aud^  balb.  7.  SSarum  manb^ 
ten  Bit  fic^^  nid^t  an  3^ren  Onfet,  menu  Bit  kin  ®elb  ntel^r  l^atten 
unb  ble  ^ilber  gu  faufen  miinfci^ten?  —  Seil  ber  eben  nad^  ^eutfd^Ianb 
gereift  njar.  8.  §aft  bu  feine  O^ren,  ^arl?  <5orft  bu  nic^t,  ba^  id) 
bid^  fc^on  eine  ©tunbe  rufe?  SBarum  anttDorteft  bu  nid^t?  9.  3^ 
tdtxht  nic^t  tDieber  mit  bir  ge^en,  benn  bu  ge^ft  mir  tmmer  3U  fd^ncIL  — 
^f^ennft  bu  ba^  fd^neH?  —  3a,  bu  ge^ft  nid^t,  bu  rennft  h)ie  ein  *ipferb, 

B.  10.  ®ibt  eg  auc^  t)iete  Slrme  in  eurem  ^orfe?  —  3d^  fcnne 
feine.  11.  SBenn  er  mir  ha^  33i(b  t)or  fec^g  U^r  bringt,  fo  n)erbe  id^ 
i^m  morgen  aud^  ha^  ®clb  bafiir  fenben.  12.  Bit  fagen,  bafe  Bit 
(Solbat^  getDefen  finb,  aber  mag  finb  @ie  je^t?  —  3d^  bin  fd^on  mel^rcrc 
Tlonatt  ^iener^  bei  bem  iungen  ©rafen  bort  oben  auf  (in)  bent  (Sd^Ioffc. 
13.  2l(g  id^  nun  ^orte,  bafe  bag  geuer  nid^t  meit  don  ung  mar,  am  anbem 
^nht  ber  Btxa^t,  mo  unfer  Onfel  ^einrid^  mo^nte,  rannte  id^  fd^ncll 
bort^in  (thither),  aber  id^  fam  gu  fpat,  fein  ,^aug  brannte  fd^on.  14.  9^ad^* 
bem  ber  ^6nig  nur  furgc  3^^t  mit  bem  reid^en  ©rafen  gefprod^en  l^attc, 
manbte  er  fid^^  an  einen  alten  ©olbaten,  ber  gang  allein  ftanb,  unb  fagtc 
gu  \i)m:  „Bit  fenne  id^  fd^on  lange,  alter  ^amerab'  (comrade),  unb  id^ 
l^abe  aud^  oft  an  ®ie  o,tha(i)t,  benn  ic^  fanbte  Bit  einmal  bei  bunfler 
9lac§t  burd^  einen  3Salb,  in  bem  diele  geinbe  lagen,  unb  Bit  brad^ten  bem 
"iPringen  einen  ^rief  tjon  mir."  15.  3Senn  Bit  mir  ben  ,^errn  nennen, 
ben  Bit  gu  fpred^en  miinfd^en,  fo  merbe  id^  meincn  Wiener  rufcn,  ha^  er 
<Sie  gu  i^m  fii^rt.  16.  2Bir  maren  eben  gu  53ett  gegangen,  fd^liefen 
aber  noc^  nirfit,  ba  (when)  rief  unten  t)or  ber  ^augtlir  ein  9}?ann:  „(Sg 
brennt^  bei  Doftor  ©d^mibt!"  17.  3^  fenne  i^n  nur  gu  gut,  er  ift 
einer  t)on  jenen  9J2enfd^en,  meld^e  nur  an  (of)  fic^  felbft  bcnfen  unb  nic 
an  anbere. 

1  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted  before  a  predicate  noun  denoting  voca- 
tion, rank  or  profession.  —  2  ^[f^  iDcnben  with  an  and  the  ace.  of  the  person 
means  turn  to,  apply  to.  —  ^  There  is  a  fire. 

C.  1.  The  king  sent  (use  fenben)  the  old  soldier  his  picture 
by  (burd^)  one  of  his  servants.  2.  I  was  all  (gang)  alone  and 
was  just  thinking  of  (an  with  ace.)  the  great  fire  in  Chicago, 
when  (ha)  some  boys  in  (auf)  the  street  shouted  Fire!  3.  ''Do 
you  know  this  gentleman?"  she  asked  her  neighbor;  and  the 
latter  (biefer)  replied:  ''No,  I  do  not  know  him,  but  I  have  just 
heard  that  Mrs.  Smith  calls  him  Professor."     4.  Why  do  you 


120  BEGINNING  GERMAN 

run  SO  fast,  Charles?  we  have  time  enough,  it  isn't  twelve  yet. 
5.  Shall  you  send  (use  fc^iden)  me  the  pictures,  or  shall  you 
bring  them  yourself?  —  I  shall  bring  them  myself  when  I  go 
home  to-night,  for  I  do  not  live  far  from  you.  6.  "Quick!"  he 
cried,  "the  whole  house  is  on  fire."  7.  But  why  don't  you  apply 
to  the  count  if  you  haven't  any  more  money  (no  money  more)? 
He  (demonstr.)  is  rich  and  always  gives  us  (gives  us  always) 
something  for  the  poor  of  our  village.  8.  As  it  was  very  dark 
in-the  room,  she  ran  against  a  chair  and  fell.  9.  Their  first  son 
they  named  Henry,  their  second  Charles,  and  their  first  daughter 
Mary.     10.  I  shall  have  no  time  to  think  of  it  (baran) . 

D.  11.  "Who  has  brought  these  books  and  pictures?"  she 
asked  the  servant,  and  the  latter  (bicfcr)  replied:  "A  boy  whom 
I  did  not  know,  but  he  said  that  (Mr.)  Professor  Smith  was  send- 
ing (use  fd^irfen)  them  to  you."  12.  If  you  (use  (Bit)  apply  to 
Mrs.  Smith,  she  will  tell  you  everything.  13.  The  great  fire  in 
Boston  was  in^the  month  of  November,  1872.  14.  Quickly  the 
king  turned  to  a  soldier  and  sent  (use  fcnben)  him  with  a  letter 
to  (an)  the  prince.  15.  When  I  am  all  (gang)  alone,  I  often 
think  of  (an  with  ace.)  the  good  old  times  that  lie  so  far  behind  us. 
16.  If  he  calls  that  a  big  dog,  what  will  he  say  when  he  sees 
ours?  17.  He  has  just  told  me  that  in  the  state  of  Maine  whole 
forests  are  on  fire.  18.  The  night  was  so  dark  that  several  of 
(don)  us  ran  against  the  trees  and  fell.  19.  Not  far  from  here 
[there]  lives  an  old  farmer  whose  children  have  all  gone  (use 
gel^en)  to  America. 

Lesson  20 

THE   PRESENT  INDICATIVE   OF   CERTAIN  STRONG  VERBS 


Strong  verbs  with  a  for  a  stem-vowel  modify  this  a  in  the 
2.  and  3.  persons  singular  of  the  present  indicative,  thus: 

xfi)  trage  /  carry,  wear  njtr  tragcn 

bu  tragft  t^r  tragt 

er  tragt  fie  tragen 


LESSON   20.    i:   STRONG   VERBS 


121 


The  most  important  of  these  verbs  are 


INFIN. 

PAST  IND. 

PAST  PART. 

PRES. 
2.  sing. 

IND. 
3.  sing. 

catch,  capture 

fangen 

ftng 

gefangen 

fangft 

fangt 

fall 

fallen 

fiel 

ift  gefallcn 

fallft 

fallt 

hold 

l^altcn 

^ielt 

gc^altcn 

Pltft^ 

mt' 

advise 

raten 

riet 

geraten 

ratft^ 

vat' 

let,  cause  to 

laffen 

m 

gclaffen 

laffeft^ 

mt 

sleep 

fd^lafen 

Wlief 

gefd^lafen 

wm 

waft 

drive 

fal^ren 

Mr 

ift  gefal^ren 

rmt 

fa^rt 

strike,  beat 

fd^lagcn 

fd^lug 

gcfd^lagcn 

mm 

WHt 

carry,  wear 

tragen 

trug 

gctragen 

triigft 

tragt 

With  these  may  be  classed 
run  laufcn         lief 


ift  gclaufcn        Ifiufft       lauft 


1  In  the  2.  sing,  of  these  verbs  no  c  is  used  to  separate  the  ending  ft  from 
stems  ending  in  t  (^altft,  not  „^aUt\t");  and  in  the  3.  sing.,  where  two  t's 
would  come  together,  only  one  is  written,  as  only  one  is  pronounced  (l^filt, 
not  „pltt")-  —  ^  laffcft  ordinarily  becomes  la^t  in  colloquial  language,  see 
Lesson  2.  i.  note  1  on  the  inflection  of  [iljc. 

A.  1.  2Benn  bu  morgeit  tt)iebcr  fo  langc  fd^lcifft,  trie  l^eutc,  fo  fii^rt 
33ater  allein  gur  @tabt  unb  lap  blc^  gu  Jug  gcl^cn,  I^Crft  bu,  ^arl? 
2.  gcingft  bu  htn  2lpfel,  fo  ift  er  bein.  3.  ©ie  tragt  i^r  griine^  ^Icib 
fc^on  ein  ganged  3a^r,  abcr  e^  ift  nod^  immer  gang  gut.  4.  SSa^  ratft 
bu,  5lnna?  —  3d^  rate  bir,  nid^t  nad^  (Snglanb  gu  reifen,  fonbem  nad^ 
^eutfc^lanb,  unb  9JJutter  l^alt^  e^  aud^  filr  beffer.  5.  iffienn  man  gu 
fd^nell  lauft,  fo  fiillt  man  leid^t.  6.  ^a  ift  ber  gro^e  ^nabe,  ber  meinen 
fleinen  53ruber  immer  fd^lagt.  7.  „3^  fe^e,  bu  pltft  beine  geber  nod^ 
felir  fc^led^t,  liebe^  ^inb,"  fagte  fie.  8.  ©eftern  morgcn  )x\av  fie  nod^  gang 
h)o^l,  aber  gegen  Slbenb  tDurbe  fie  fo  franf,  bafe  toir  ben  !Doftor  fommen 
liefeen.^  9.  (Sr  lii^t^  feinen  ©ol^n  htn  iBrief  fc^reiben.  10.  (Sr  Icigt^ 
htn  ^rief  fc^reiben.  11.  ^it  ^naben  finb  im  SBalbe  getuefen  unb  ^abtn 
58ogel  gefangen.  12.  3^  f)aht  biefe  5lad^t  fel^r  fc^lec^t  gefd^lafen.  13.  Qci) 
bat  bie  Wutttx,  ben  fleinen  nid^t  tnieber  oline  htn  T)itntx  fa^ren  gu  laffen. 

B.  14.  SBenn  e«  5lbenb  tcirb,  fo  tragt  einer  bon  htn  ^ienem  bic 
^ifd^e  unb  @tul)le  immer  mieber  in6  §au6.  15.  <Bit  fjalt^  @ie  flir  einen 
^eutfc^en,  glaube  i(^.    16.  gal)rft  bu  gu  fd^nell,  fo  fdllft  bu  bom  SKagen. 


122  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

17.  3c^  fpicic  oft  @d^ad^  (chess)  mlt  mcinem  iiingftcn  ©ol^nc,  unb  cr 
fd^lagt  mid^  oft.     18,  ®ie  fc^reibt  felled) t,  locil  fie  bie  geber  fc^Ied^t  l^alt. 

19.  2Scr  fd^Iaft  in  biefem  ^ttk?    §ier  fc^lafen  bie  beiben  ^naben. 

20.  3(1,  lieber  greunb,  ha^  ift  immer  fo  getoefen,  unb  e«  toirb  aud^  \)itU 
leid^t  immer  fo  bleiben:  toenn  ber  §unb  nid^t  fd^neller  Iciuft  d^  ber  .^afc 
(hare),  fo  fangt  er  i^n  and)  nic^t.  21.  3}tein  ^ruber  rat  mir,  mid^  an 
"iProfeffor  ©d^mibt  gu  nienben,  aber  id^  fenne  ben  §erm  nid^t.  22.  ^a 
cr  an  jenem  Wflox^tn  nid^t  gang  too^t  toar,  fo  liefeen^  JDir  btn  ^oftor 
fommen.  23.  (Sr  lagt^  feinen  (So^n  ben  ^rief  fd^reiben.  24.  (Sr  lagt^ 
ben  ^rief  fd^reiben. 

1  ^alten  filr  regard  as,  take  for.  —  2  2a\\tn  often  means  let  in  the  sense  of 
cause  to  or  ^ave  with  an  infinitive ;  thus  in  A  8,  and  in  B  22,  we  caused  the  doc- 
tor to  come,  i.  e.,  we  sent  for  .  .  .,  and  in  A  9  or  B  23,  he  has  his  son  write  the 
letter,  where  ©o^n  is  at  once  the  object  of  la^t  and  the  (logical)  subject  of 
fd^reiben.  When  such  object-subject  is  omitted,  as  in  A  10  or  B  24,  the 
infinitive  acquires  passive  meaning:  he  has,  or  is  having,  the  letter  written. 

C.  1.  My  dog  runs  faster  than  my  horse.  2.  What  is  she 
holding  in  her  hand?  —  I  think^  those  are  flowers.  3.  She  always 
wears  this  dress  when  she  drives.  4.  Why  don't  you  let  me  sleep, 
Charles?  —  Because  you  always  sleep  too  long  if  I  don't  call  you. 
5.  There  (ba)  falls  an  apple  from-the  tree  into-the  water.  6.  If 
you  strike  his  dog,  Charles,  he  will  strike  you.  7.  She  advises  us 
(dat.)  to  stay  till  he  comes.  8.  Why  don't  you  send  for  the 
doctor  if  she  is  so  ill  as  you  say?  9.  Does  she  make  the  dress 
herself?  —  No,  she  has  her  daughter  make  all  [the]  dresses. 
10.  I  am  having  a  new  carriage  made.  11.  He  sleeps  up-stairs, 
and  we  down-stairs.  12.  The  enemies  have  captured  the  soldier 
whom  the  king  sent  (use  fenben)  to  (an)  his  son,  the  prince. 

D.  13.  Is  it  true  that  the  count  advises  the  king  (dat.)  to 
lead  the  soldiers  himself?  —  I  think^  not,  but  I  have  not  heard 
anything  about  it.  14.  This  big,  lazy  boy  sleeps  more  than  he 
works.  15.  There  she  sits,  in  (the)  one  hand  she  holds  a  book, 
in  the  other  a  pen.  16.  Henry,  if  you  run  as  fast  as  I  [do]  and 
catch  me,  I  [will]  give  you  all  my  apples.  17.  Who  drives  there? 
Isn't  that  our  neighbor,  (the)  old  farmer  Smith?  —  I  think  not,^ 
for  those  horses  are  much  bigger  than  his,  and  he  (demonstr.) 
never  drives  so  fast,  either  (and  he  drives  also  never  so  fast). 

18.  Why  do  you  let  the  boys  strike  your  little  dog,  Charles? 


LESSON   20.    II :   STRONG   VERBS  123 

19.  The  little  boy  had  fallen  into-the  water,  and  so  we  had  him 
carried  home.  20.  My  sister  is  having  a  new  dress  made. 
21.  To-morrow  I  shall  let  you  sleep  an  hour  longer,  because  it 
is  Sunday.  22.  What  do  you  advise,  Henry?  —  I  advise  you 
(dat.)  to  say  nothing  about  it  till  he  comes  himself  and  asks  you. 

3  The  colloquial  think  in  the  sense  of  believe  or  surmise  is  glaubcn;  bcnfen 
is  usually  think  in  the  sense  of  reflect,  ponder. 


II 

Strong  verbs  with  short  c  for  a  stem-vowel  change  this  c 
to  i  in  the  2.  and  3.  persons  singular  of  the  present  indicative. 
The  most  important  are 


break 

brcd^en 

brad^ 

gebrod^ett 

brtd^ft 

brid^t 

speak 

fpred^en 

fprad^ 

gefproc^en 

fpric^ft 

fprid^t 

help 

l^elfen 

¥\\ 

gc{)oIfen 

m\t 

Pft 

meet 

trcffen 

traf 

getroffcn 

triffft 

trifft 

eat,  dine 

effen 

a6 

gegeffeti 

iffeft^ 

ifet 

«  Often  contracted  to  i^t,  and  then  like  the  3.  sing.     Cf.  Ififfeft  in  Part  I. 

Here  may  be  classed  bu  tm\i,  er  tt)irb,  from  tDcrben  become. 
The  following  verbs  with  long  c  change  to  ie: 


read 

lefcn 

lag 

gclefen 

Itcfeft^ 

Itcft 

see 

fel)cn 

fa^ 

gefe^en 

Wft 

\m 

steal 

ftef)lcn 

\m 

gcfto^Ien 

ftte^Ift 

fttc^ilt 

2  Often  contracted  to  licft,  and  then  like  the  3.  sing.     Cf.  Ififfcft  in  Part  I 
and  iffcft  above. 

The  following  three  verbs  change  long  c  to  i,  and  the  last 
two  double  the  final  consonant  of  the  stem: 

give  gebcn        gab         gegebctt         gibft^        gibt^ 

take  ne^men    nal^m      genommen    nimmft    ntmmt 

step  treten       trat    ift  getreten        trittft^      tritt* 

3  Pronounced  both  long  and  short,  and  until  recently  written  gicbft  gicbt, 
— "  See  note  1,  under  the  list  of  Part  I;  tritt  for  „trittt." 


124  BEGINNING  GERMAN 


VOCABULARY 


bcr  Hrm  blc  5lrinc  arm 

bag  ^cin  bic  ^einc  leg 

bag  iBrot  bie  ^rote  6reac?,  Zoa/ 

bcr  5lnnc,  nom.  sing,  masc,  i/ie  poor  man 
bic  5lrme,  nom.  sing,  fern.,  the  poor  woman 
bie  5Irmcn,  nom.  plur.,  ^/le  poor  (people) 

A.  1,  ^er  SO^enfc^  ifet  unb  trinft,  um^  ^n  Ithtn,  abtx  cr  tcbt  nid^t 
nur,  um^  gu  effen  unb  gu  trinfen.  2.  ^cr  mir  nic^t  l^ilft,  bcm  l^elfc 
i<i)  aud^  ni^t.  3.  giillft  bu  t)on  bem  iBaum,  fo  bric^ft  bu  bir  ben  5lnn 
ober  bag  ^ein.^  4.  ©iel^ft  bu  ben  §errn  ha,  ber  je^t  ing  ^^ii^^ci^  tritt? 
—  3a,  fennft  bu  i^n  nic^t?  —  ^ein,  tt)cr  ift  eg?  —  ^ag  ift  ber  reid^e 
®raf,  ben  tDir  geftem  trafen,  alg  trir  burd^  ben  ^alb  ful^ren.  5.  3)ie 
5Irme  l^atte  ein  iBrot  geftol^Ien,  iDeil  i^re  ^inber  nid^tg  mel^r  gu  effen 
l^atten,  6.  SSer  am  meiftcn  lieft,  ift  nid^t  immer  ber  fliigfte,  unb  tDer 
am  meiften  fprid^t,  ber  ^at  oft  am  t^enigften  gu  fagen.  7.  T)m  airmen 
l^ilft  man  oft  am  beften,  n3enn  man  il^nen  fein  ®etb  gibt,  fonbern  etmag 
gu  arbeiten.    8,  3e^t  nimmt  er  bie  geber  unb  fd^reibt  bamit,  fiel^ft  bu? 

9.  ^enn  ein  firmer  fommt,  fo  lagt  fie  if)m  immer  etn)ag  iBrot  geben. 

10.  2Bag  lieft  bu  ha,  5lnna?  — 3d^  lefe  ein  engtifd^eg  «ud^.  —  ©prid^ft 
bu  aud^  ©nglifd^?  —  5^ur  ein  toenig.  11.  ^arl  unb  9}?arie  finb  eben 
in  ben  ©arten  gegangen,  um^  bic  toenigen  Spfel,  bie  nod^  unter  ben  iBau- 
men  liegen,  ing  §aug  gu  bringen,  benn  id^  glaube,  eg  toirb  biefe  ^f^ad^t 
fel^r  fait  loerbcn. 

B.  12.  SSenn  bu  l^eute  gur  @tabt  fal^rft  unb  bei  meinem  iBruber 
iff  eft  (or  ifet),  fo  triffft  bu  bort  bielleid^t  aud^  unfern  alten  greunb,  ®raf 
m.  13.  2Ber  nimmt,  toag  nid^t  fein  ift,  ber  ftiel)lt.  14.  SSic  biel 
mand^er  SO^enfd^  lieft,  unb  trie  toenig  er  benft!  ^ie  t)iel  ein  anbrer 
fpric^t,  unb  toie  menig  er  fagt!  Unb  tnie  t)iel  ein  britter  gibt,  unb  toic 
tocnig  er  l^ilft!  15.  3)ie  5lrme  fiel^t  nid^t  mel)r  fo  gut,  njie  frii^er,  benn 
fie  ift  lange  franf  gen)efen  unb  i^re  5lugen  finb  fd^tnad^  getDorben.  16.  ^ic 
fd^ijn  ift  eg,  n)enn  ber  9?eid^e  fein  iBrot  brid^t  mit  bem  ^rmen!  17.  ^er 
Diener  mar  eben  ing  3^inmer  getreten,  um^  feinem  §erm  in  hm  3Sagen 
gu  l^elfen,  ber  fd^on  t)or  ber  ^augtiir  l^ielt  ( =  ftanb) ;  ba  fiel  ber  alte  §err 
liber  einen  ©tul^l  unb  brad^  fid^  bag  ^ein.^  18.  3d^  tuerbe  bie  5lpfel  ing 
§aug  tragen  laffen.    19.  "Hfla^  bem  ^riegc  fal^  man  mand^en  alten 


LESSON   20.    II :   STRONG   VERBS  125 

(Bolhattn  t)on  ^iir  su  Ziiv  gel^en.  Dcr  cine  l^atte  nur  cincn  Hrrn,  bcr 
anbere  nur  cin  ^Bein  ober  nur  ein  Sluge.  20,  „3Bag  ber  iBauer  nid^t 
fennt,  bag  ifet  er  ntd^t/'  fagt  man  oft  in  ^eutfc^lanb,  unb  bantit  meint 
man,  bag  ber  iBauer  meiften^  (mostly)  fur  ha^  ^Ite  unb  gegen  bag  9^eue  ift. 

1  Urn  before  an  infinitive  with  ju  means  in  order  to.  —  2  When  no  ambi- 
guity can  arise,  German  may  use  the  definite  article,  often  with  the  dative 
of  a  pronoun  (personal  or  reflexive),  instead  of  a  possessive  adjective;  hence 
bir  ben  2lrm=beincn  %xm,  \i^  ba^  i8cin  =  [ein  53cin  etc. 

C.  1.  She  reads  all  [the]  German  books  which  her  father 
gives  her,  2.  They  say  that  he  steals  (the)  most  [of  the]  apples 
which  he  eats  out  of  his  neighbor's  garden.  3.  If  she  meets  him 
to-day,  she  will  ask  him  not  to  come  so  late  again.  4.  Don't 
you  see  that  you  are  stepping  on  my  flowers,  Henry?  5.  He  is 
not  rich,  but  he  always  helps  the  poor.  6.  The  poor  [woman] 
takes  the  bread  and  gives  it  to  her  children.  7.  I  know  a  Ger- 
man who  has  been  (is  already)  twenty  years  in  this  country  and 
yet  (bod^)  speaks  no  English.  8.  If  you  fall  from  the  tree,  chil- 
dren, you  [will]  break  your  legs  or  your  arms.  9.  Since  his  old 
pens  were  all  bad,  I  had  him  buy  new  ones.  10.  When  I  stepped 
into  his  room  in  order  to  help  him  (dat.),  I  found  that  he  had 
fallen  and  broken  his  arm;  so  (alfo)  I  sent  for  the  doctor.  11.  Per- 
haps the  poor  [man]  wishes  something  to  eat  or  to  drink,  why 
don't  you  give  him  a  piece  of  bread,  Anna? 

D.  12.  How  well  the  little  [girl]  reads!  13.  She  no  longer 
sees  so  well  as  formerly.  14.  She  is  not  speaking  of  your  brother, 
but  of  mine.  15.  Charles  is  giving  the  horse  a  piece  of  bread. 
16.  My  sister  is  still  very  weak,  for  she  eats  but  little.  17.  Doc- 
tor Smith  often  helps  the  poor  (dat.),  but  he  never  takes  [any] 
money  for-it.  18.  She  asks  if  that  is  the  count  who  is  just  now 
stepping  up-to-the  (an^)  window.  19.  Glass  breaks  very  easily. 
20.  Why  do  you  strike  the  boy,  Charles?  —  Because  he  always 
steals  apples  out  of  our  garden.  21.  Whenever  he  meets  the 
poor  [woman],  he  speaks  with  her,  and  often  he  gives  her  a 
little  (ein  n)enig,  without  ending)  money.  22.  Hardly  had  I  sat 
down  at  the  table  in  order  to  write  him  a  letter  when  (fo)  he 
stepped  into-the  room.  23.  How  did  it  happen  (come)  that 
the  boy  broke  his  arm?  —  He  was  riding  too  fast  and  fell  from 
his  (from-the)  horse.     24.  I  wish  to  buy  a  table  with  four  legs, 


126 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


because  such  a  (a  such)  table  stands  much  firmer  (fcftcr)  than 
one  with  three  legs. 

Lesson  21 

THE   IMPERATIVE 


Formation  and  Models.  The  imperative  of  both  strong  and 
weak  verbs  is  regularly  formed  from  the  stem  of  the  present, 
as  shown  below: 


2.  sing. 

2.  plur. 

2.  sing,  or  2.  plur. 

fagc 

fagt 

fagcn  (Bit 

say 

frage 

fragt 

fragcn  Bit 

ask 

iDarte 

tDartct 

Xoaxitn  Bit 

wait 

bleibc 

bicibt 

bleibcn  Bit 

stay 

trage 

tragi 

tragcn  Bit 

carry 

trinfc 

trinft 

trinfcn  Bit 

drink 

rcite 

reitct 

rcitctt  Bit 

ride 

l^abe 

fiabt 

l^abcn  Bit 

have 

iDcrbe 

merbct 

totxbtn  Bit 

become,  get 

Weak  verbs  sometimes  drop  the  ending  c  of  the  2.  singular; 
strong  verbs  quite  commonly. 

The  2.  singular  (used  to  address  one  person  with  whom  the 
speaker  is  intimate)  and  the  2.  plural  (used  to  address  several 
such  persons)  are  followed  by  their  pronouns,  bu  or  tl^r,  only 
when  these  are  required  for  emphasis  or  contrast,  e.  g.,  frage  bu 
(or  fragt  ilfir)  i^n,  id)  fenne  il^n  nid^t  (do)  you  ask  him,  I  don't 
know  him.  —  The  <Bit  of  the  last  form  (used  to  address  either 
one  or  more  persons  not  famiUar  to  the  speaker)  is  never  omitted 
^nd  is  repeated  with  every  verb. 


folgen 

hb\t  angry,  wicked 
al'fo  hence,  so,  therefore 


VOCABULARY 

folgtc        ift  gcfotgt  follow 

harm  then,  and  then,  next 
erft,  adv.,  first 


LESSON   21.    I :   THE   IMPERATIVE 


127 


Study  the  German  sentences  of  A  in  the  following  order :  1  —  1*  —  1^, 
2  —  2^  —  2^  etc. 

A.  1.  ©age  e^  bei=  P-  ©agt  e^  eurer  1^-  (Sagcn  <Sic  c^ 
ner  ©d^tccfter,  bittc.        ©c^tDcftcr,  bltte.  3^rer  (Sd^hJefter,  bitte. 

2.  (grft  fc^relbe  bei-  2^-  (grft  fd^reibt  2^-  grft  fd^reibcn 
ncn  33rief,  bann  ge^  su    eurc  iBrtefc,  bann  ge^t    ©ic  Sl^ren  ^rtef,  bann 


belncm  greunbc. 


gu  eurctn  greunbc. 


tDOl^l/ 


3.  ed^Iafe 
Ilebe^  tinb. 

4.  3(^    h)crbc    bic^ 
fu^rcn,2     tarl;     alfo    fu^ren,^ 
fomm  unb  folge  mir,    SJJarie; 


3^-   ed^Iaft    IDO^I/ 
^inber. 
4^-  3d^  tDerbe   eud^ 


unb  folgt  tnir. 


5.  SBcnn   cr   l^cutc 
gu    fpcit    fomtnt,    fo 


gc^ien  @le  gu  3^tcm 
greunbc. 

3b-  ©c^Iafen  (Sic 
tDol^l/  §crr  ©d^mibt, 

4b-  3:d^  iDerbc  (Sic 
^art      unb    fiil^ren/  grciulein 

alfo  fontmt  SO^aric;  alfo  fommen 
(Sie  unb  folgen  ®tc 
mir» 

5b-  SBenn  er  l^cutc 
gu    fpftt    fontmt,    fo 


5*-  ilScnn  cr   l^eutc 
gu    fpat    fontmt,    fo 


tuerbe,      bitte,     nid^t    n)erbet,     bitte,     nid^t    iDcrben     (Sic,     bittc, 
bofc,  liebcr  greunb.        bofe,  liebc  grcunbe.         nid^t  bofe,  meinc  §cr^ 

ren  {=  gentlemen) . 

B.  6.  iBleib  fi^en,^  IDO  bu  fi^t  ( =  fifeeft),  unb  n)ortc,  bi«  id^  bid^  fragc, 
prft  bu,  mein  ^inb?  7.  iBringen  (Sic  mir  erft  ein  ®la6  falter  SSaffer,* 
bitte,  unb  bann  fe^en  8ie  fid^  unb  fagen  Sic  mir,  n)a6  er  3f)nen  gefd^rieben 
^at.  8.  Sauft  nic^t  fo  fc^nell,  tinber,  unb  get)t  ni(^t  fo  na^  axi^  SBaffer. 
9.  Saffen  ©ic  ben  ^oftor  fommen.  10.  2:rag  bie  ©lafer  in^  §au«, 
2lnna,  unb  mad^e  beine  5Q^utter  nid^t  bofe.  11.  ?ebc  Xqo\)\,^  liebcr 
greunb,  unb  fd^reib  mir  Don  3eit  gu  ^t\t  12.  ©el^t  unb  fud^t  cure 
gebern,  2lnna  unb  SQ^arie,  unb  tuenn  il^r  fie  gefunben  l^abt,  fo  fd^reibt 
beibe  an  cure  Sltern.  13.  §aben  ®ie  bie  ©iite  (kindness),  S^xtm 
greunbe  gu  fagen,  bag  id^  nad^fte  SBod^e  gu  il)m  fommen  trerbe.  14.  (Stcl^ 
ftill,  bu  Kleiner,  unb  geige  mir  beine  §anb.  15.  (Sd^idfe  il)m  ba^  @elb 
l)eute  nid^t,  fonbern  tDarte  bi^  morgen  bamit.  16.  3Kerbe  nur  nic^t 
franf,  5lnna.     17.  „golgt  mir  gegen  ben  geinb,  ©olbaten!"  rief  er. 

1  ®c^Iaf(c)  tDOl^I  or  gut,  about  the  same  as  /  hope  you'll  rest  well.  —  ^  show 
you  the  way,  escort.  —  ^  remain  sitting;  after  bleiben,  and  some  other  verbs, 
the  infinitive  is  used  in  the  sense  of  the  English  present  participle.  —  ^  The 
accusative  (here  in  apposition  with  ®IaS)  is  more  common  in  colloquial 
language  than  the  partitive  genitive,  which  would  be  falten  SBaffcrS;  see 
Lesson  14,  note  3.  —  ^  Farewell. 


128  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

In  translating  the  English  sentences  below,  the  student  should  give  all 
three  forms  of  the  imperative,  if  admissible. 

C.  1.  Answer  first,  please,  and  then  go  home.  2.  Show  me 
what  you  (have)  found.  3.  Don't  stay  too  long.  4.  Carry 
your  books  yourself.  5.  Ride  a  little  faster,  but  don't  fall  from 
your  (from-the)  horse.  6.  Tell  your  mother  that  we  shall  be 
there  at  five  o'clock.  7.  Don't  strike  the  poor  dog.  8.  Run 
and  follow  him.     9.  Write  with  my  pen  if  you  do  not  find  yours. 

10.  Lay  your  books  and  pictures  on  your  table,  and  not  on  mine. 

11.  Lie  still,  you  little  [chap]. 

D.  12.  Wait,  I  am  going  with  you.  13.  Don't  buy  so  many 
poor  apples.  14.  Tell  me  where  you  live  now.  15.  Come  again 
when  you  have  more  time.  16.  Ask  your  father  for  money, 
I  haven't  any.  17.  Look  for  your  dog,  quick!  call  him.  18.  Set 
the  chair  between  the  table  and  the  window  and  lay  the  book 
on-it.  19.  First  work,  and  then  go  and  play  with  your  friends. 
20.  I  shall  also- go  home,  so  (alfo)  wait  for  (auf  with  ace.)  me, 
please.  21.  Lie  still,  my  child,  and  sleep.  22.  Don't  grow 
(become)  too  diligent.  23.  Please,  escort  your  friend  into  the 
other  room. 

n 

special  Forms  of  the  Imperative.  All  strong  verbs  that 
change  e  to  I  or  it  in  the  2.  and  3.  singular  of  the  present  in- 
dicative (except  tDerben,  see  I  above)  make  the  same  change 
in  the  2.  singular  of  the  imperative  and  omit  the  ending  e: 


brtd^ 

bred^t 

bred^cn  <Bit 

break 

fprtd^ 

fprcd^t 

fpred^cn  ®ie 

speak 

w 

Wft 

i)elfctt  (Sie 

help 

trlff 

trcfft 

treffctt  (Sie 

meet 

i6 

c6i 

cffcn  <Bit 

eat 

Ilc« 

Ief(e)t 

lefcn  Bit 

read 

fie^ 

m 

fe^cn  @ic 

see,  look 

mi 

mi 

fte^Icn  (Bit 

steal 

Qib 

Q^hi 

gebcn  Bit 

give 

nimm 

ncl)mt 

ne!)mcn  Bit 

take 

tritt 

tretct 

tretcn  Bit 

step 

LESSON   21.    II :  THE   IMPERATIVE  129 

The  imperative  of  fein  be  is: 

fei        feib        fcicn  <Bit    be 

VOCABULARY 

bcr  ^ut  bic  §utc  /lai 

ba6  SSort         bic  SSorte  it^orc?,  promise 

banfcn    banfte    gcbanft  ^/lanfc 

cbct  no6Ze,  high-minded  ttiixtlid)  real,  really 

fc^marg  black  bod^  6w^,  i/e^,  s^i7Z,  after  all 

tDelg  ii^/ii7e  cl^e,  conj.,  before 

A.  1.  9^imm  belnen  §ut,  gel^  nad^  ^ciufc  unb  fprtd^  crft  mit  bcincm 
S5ater,  abcr  fage  feinem  anbcm  9D?enfd^en  eiti  ilBort  batjon,  bag  bu  l^icr 
gert)cfen  blft.  2.  2:ritt  na^cr/  bittc,  unb  ife  bei  un^,  cl^c  bu  tDcitcr  fcil^rft. 
—  S^  banfe,^  lieber  grcunb,  c^  ift  fd^on  gu  fpcit,  id)  l^abc  l^cutc  tDirflid^ 
feine  3^^^  mel^r.  3.  ^ein  eblcr  9J?cnfd^  brid^t  fein  ^ort.  4.  (gel  fo 
Qut  unb  l^ilf  ber  amtcn  grau  bort  em  tDentg.^  5.  Qm  <Bommtx  tragt 
man  me^r  tDcifee  ^leiber  unb  §ute,  im  SKintcr  mcl^r  fd^margc.  6.  ®ib 
bod^*  beinem  armcn  §unbe  cttoa^  gu  cffcn,  ficl^ft  bu  benn^  nid^t,  h)lc 
l^ungrig  (hungry)  cr  ift?  7.  ^k^  nid^t  fo  fd^nell,  id^  fann  (can)  bir 
nid^t  folgcn.  8.  53itte,  3)?arie,  fticl^l  mir^  meinc  ncue  gcber  nid^t 
mieber.  —  2Ba^  fagft  bu,  ^arl?  ic^  ftel^te  bir^  gebem?  —  3a,  H)cnn  cincr 
nimmt,  n)a^  nid^t  fein  ift,  fo  nenne  id^  ha^  ftel^IenJ  —  ®ut,  morgcn 
fcillt  tjielleid^t  ein  5lpfel  au^  ^a(!i)hax  (Sd^mibtg  @arten  in  unferen, 
bann  n)erbe  id^  bir  aud^  einen  ^naben  geigcn,  ber  ftiep;  bu  fennft 
i^n  felfir  gut, 

B.  9.  iBitte,  gib  mir  meinen  §ut,  5lnna,  abcr  nid^t  ben  hjcifeen, 
fonbem  ben  fd^margen.  10.  ®ei  nid^t  bofe,  liebe  SJ^utter,  iDenn  id^  bir 
nod^  nid^t  bafiir  gebanft  l^abe,  bag  bu  mir  ha^  fd^one  ^ilb  gegeben  l^aft. 
11.  2:ritt  na{)er,^  bitte,  unb  ic^  n)erbe  bir  ba^  englifc^e  iBud^  jcigen, 
ml(^t^  fie  ie^t  lieft.  12.  ^ommen  @ie,  §err  ©c^mibt,  unb  effen  <Sie 
l^eute  abenb  einmal  bei  ung.  —  3d^  banfe,^  lieber  ^ari,  id^  l^abe  fd^on 
gegeffen.  13.  §itf  mir  erft  ein  n3enig,^  bann  ge^e  id^  mit  bir  unb  l^elfe 
bir  aud^.  14.  9^imm  bod^*  einen  anbcm  5(pfel,  ber  ift  fd^on  fd^led^t. 
15.  (Sprid^  bod^^  nid^t  fo  laut  (loud),  ober  glaubft  bu,  ha^  noix  feinc 
Ol^ren  l^abcn?    16.  SSarum  famft  bu  benn^  nid^t,  aU  id)  bid^  rief? 


130  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

17.  (Sie^  ha,  finb  ha^  md)t  hit  beiben  bofcn  ^nabcn,  hit  un6"  tmtncr  hit 
Spfcl  au^  bem  ©arten  fte()len?  —  SBirflic^,  ba^  finb  fie.  ^artc,  id) 
tdtxht  fie  ie^t  fangen.  18.  36  unb  trinf  erft  ettDag,  e^e  bu  tcieber  nac^ 
ber  ®tabt  fa^rft.  19.  ©age  mir,  h)o  trifft  man  einen  ebteren  9}?enfc^en, 
al«  unfem  guten  alten  grennb  ®raf  9JJ.?  20.  Sine  gange  ©tunbe 
toaren  <Sie  unternieg^  (on  the  way)  tjon  f)ier  bi^  na(^  bent  niid^ften 
SDorfc?  gZennen  @ie  ba^  benn^  fa^ren^?  21.  ^ric^t  er  fein  SBort, 
fo  brid^  bu  beine^  nid^t,  ^orft  bu?  22.  3Ser  fid^  felbft  f)ilft,  bem  ^itft 
®ott.  23.  (Sie  na^men  i^m®  al(e«,  toag  er  l^atte.  24.  3d^  nennc  bag 
gut  fpielen.^ 

1  Literally,  siep  nearer,  i.  e.,  s<ep  in  or  ti;aZA;  in.  —  ^ici)  bantt,  or  simply 
bantt,  commonly  means  /  decline  with  thanks.  —  ^  ein  toenig  (regularly  with- 
out ending)  a  little.  —  *  bod^  with  an  imperative  corresponds  to  do  as 
used  before  an  English  imperative  to  make  it  emphatic,  as  do  give  etc. 
—  s  benn  {then)  is  often  used  with  questions  in  the  sense  of  tell  me, 
please,  pray.  —  ^  Dative  of  the  person  with  verbs  of  taking  or  depriving, 
commonly  rendered  by  from.  — '  Translate  by  verbal  in  -4ng,  and  compare 
note  3  of  Part  I. 

C.  1.  Take  your  pen  and  write  him  a  letter,  or  go  to  him  and 
speak  with  him  before  he  comes  and  asks  you.  2.  No,  he  has 
not  said  one  word  about  it.     3.  Thank  your  sister  (dat.)  for-it. 

4.  Buy  me  a  hat  when  you  go  to  town,  a  black  one,  please. 

5.  Do  help  the  poor  [man],  don't  you  see  that  he  has  only  one 
leg?  6.  Has  he  really  been  stealing?  —  Some  people  say  so 
(it),  but  (the)  most  people  don't  believe  it.  7.  Look,  there 
comes  our  friend.  8.  Don't  eat  too  much  of  it  (thereof),  do 
you  hear?  9.  Be  diligent.  10.  Write  a  little  faster.  11.  Read 
what  your  father  writes  and  then  send  (use  fc^iden)  his  letter 
to  (an)  your  sisters.  12.  Don't  step  on  my  flowers,  please. 
13.  Give  the  little  [one,  fem.]  a  piece  of  bread.  14.  Every 
really  high-minded  man  helps  also  his  enemies,  and  not  only 
his  friends.  15.  Don't  break  your  promise.  16.  Do  you  see 
the  young  lady  with  the  white  feather  on  her  hat?  That  is  one 
of  his  sisters.  17.  He  says  that  he  often  meets  them  at  Uncle 
Henry's. 

D.  18.  Take  one  of  these  chairs.  19.  You  [will]  meet  many 
famous  men  at  the  count's,  Charles.  20.  If  it  is  too  dark  yonder, 
where  you   sit,   (fo)  step  up-to-the   (an^)  window  and  read  his 


LESSON   22.    l:   THE    MODAL   AUXILIARIES 


131 


letter.  21.  See  Naples  (5^ca'pel)  and  die!  22.  Don't  speak  with 
her,  but  with  your  sister.  23.  Break  the  apple  in  two  pieces 
(ace.)  and  give  me  one,  but  not  the  smaller  one.  24.  Don't  be 
so  angry.  25.  Thank  the  gentleman  (dat.)  who  helped  you 
(dat.).  26.  Do  eat  some  black  bread,  it  is  really  much  better 
than  the  white.  —  Thanks,  I  always  eat  white  [bread].  27.  Not 
every  nobleman  (S'belmantt)  is  a  noble  man.  28.  I  don't  be- 
lieve one  word  of  it  (thereof).  29.  If  he  steals  hats,  he  also 
steals  money.  30.  Does  she  really  speak  English?  Yes,  but  not 
very  well,  for  she  has  not  been  in  England  yet. 


Lesson  22 

THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES 
I 

Parts  of  the  Modal  Auxiharies: 

Principal 

bilrfen 

burfte 

Qcburft 

he  allowed,  he  permitted,  may 

fonncn 

fonntc 

ge  fonnt 

can,  he  ahle 

mogcn 

Titod^tc 

gemod^t 

may,  like  to, 

care  to 

ntliffcn 

mufete 

gcmufet 

must,  he  ohliged  to,  have  to 

follctt 

fotlte 

gefotrt 

shall,  am  to,  c 

mght  to 

tooUm 

tDOKtC 

getDoIlt 

will,  intend  to,  he  about  to 

PRESENT    INDICATIVE 

I  am 

/  can,  I      I  may,  I       I  must, 

I  am 

I  will,  I 

allowed  to. 

am  able 

;        like  to. 

I  have  to, 

(told)  to. 

am  ahout 

have  per- 

to 

neg.  / 

I  can- 

I shall 

to,  I  in- 

mission to 

don't 
care  to 

not  hut 

tend  or 
want  to 

tdE)    barf 

fanit 

mag 

mu6 

foil 

h)tir 

bu    barfft 

fannft 

ntagft 

mufet 

foEft 

tDtttft 

cr     barf 

fann 

mag 

mu^ 

foil 

toill 

iDir  blirfeti 

fonncn 

mogcn 

miiffen 

follcn 

tDoKcn 

il^r   biirft 

fonnt 

mogt 

mii^t 

fotrt 

mlU 

fie    biirfctt 

fonnen 

mogen 

miiffen 

foltcn 

motten 

132 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


PAST   INDICATIVE 

7  was 

I  could, 

I  liked 

7  had  to. 

7  was 

7  would. 

allowed  to, 

I  was 

to,  I 

I  was 

(told)  to. 

I  was 

had  per- 

able to 

might. 

obliged 

I  should 

about  to. 

mission  to 

neg.  / 

to,  could 

I  in- 

did not 

not  but 

tended  or 

care  to 

wanted  to 

i^    burftc 

fonntc 

mod^tc 

mufetc 

foirtc 

njoritc 

bu    burftcft 

fonntcft 

mod^tcft 

muPcft 

folttcft 

njolltcft 

cr  .  burftc 

fonntc 

mod^tc 

mufetc 

foirtc 

molltc 

h)ir  burftctt 

fonntcn 

moc^tcn 

mufetctt 

foirtcn 

n)olltcn 

il^r   burftct 

fonntct 

mod^tct 

ntufetct 

folltct 

n)olltct 

fie    burftcn 

fonntcn 

mod^tcn 

mufetcn 

foirtcn 

njolltcn 

Observe:  (1)  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative  of  these  verbs  is 
inflected  like  the  past  indicative  of  strong  verbs  (no  endings  in  the  1. 
and  3.  pers.),  though  the  past  indicative  follows  the  inflection  of  weak 
verbs;  (2)  in  all  but  follen,  the  singular  of  the  present  has  a  different 
stem-vowel  from  that  of  the  plural,  which  latter  has  the  same  vowel  as 
the  infinitive;  (3)  the  past  indicative  and  past  participle  have  no  um- 
laut even  though  the  infinitive  has  it;  (4)  gu,  like  to  in  English,  is  omitted 
before  an  infinitive  accompanying  a  modal  auxiliary  (see  sentences  1, 
2  etc.,  below). 


A.  1.  SSann  cr  rclfcn  mug,  ha^  farm  id)  S'^ntn  nid)t  fagcn,  aber  id) 
njill  meine  <Sd^n)efter  fragen,  luenn  id)  fie  l^eute  treffen  folltc.  2.  !Du 
follft  nic^t  \tti)Un,  3.  (^eftern  burfte  ber  ^ranfe  nid^t  au6  bent  §aufe 
gel^en,  unb  lieute  morgen  module  er  nid^t/  alfo  mufete  id^  gu  i^m  ge^cn. 

4.  5^un  gel^  unb  fpiele  ntit  ttn  anbern  ^inbern,  aber  il)r  biirft  nid^t^ 
n)ieber  fo  t)iele  Spfel  effen  unb  fo  t)iel  falter  Staffer  trinfen,  prft  bu? 

5.  ^ie  ^leine  h)ar  nod^  nid^t  fieben  ^alire  alt,  bod^  fonnte  fie  fc^on  gang 
gut  lefen  unb  aud^  ttma^  fd^reiben.  6.  ©oil  ^arl  l^eute  nic^t  gur  ©d^ulc 
gel^en,  9Jhitter?  —  2Sie  fannft  bu  fo  fragen,  5lnna?  3^r  follt  alle  gur 
©d^ule.^  —  SSeil  ^arl  fagt,  er  toill  nic^t.^  —  !Da^  fagt  er  oft,  aber  tnenn 
c^  3^^t  ift,  fo  n)irb  er  boc^  gel^en,  tddi  er  mug.  7.  ©arf  id^  fragen,  ob 
©ie  §errn  ©d^mibte  §aug  inirfrid^  faufen  n)orren?  —  3a,  id^  n)irr  e^ 
faufen,  aber  ob  id^  e^  faufen  n)erbe  unb  ob  ic^  e6^  fann,  ha^  ift  eine  anbre 
grage  (question),  benn  §err  ©d^mibt  n)irr  gu  Diel  ©erb  bafilr  liaben. 
8.  SSenn  bu  mirflic^  ein  neue^  ^reib  liaben  mugt^  Wlavit,  bann  follft  bu 


LESSON   22.    i:  THE   MODAL   AUXILIARIES  133 

au(^  eltt  gute^  l^abcn,  unb  Tlutttx  mirb  bir  eing  faufen.  9.  SKir  hjotrtcn 
thtn  cffcn,  ba^  famen  §err  unb  grau  *iprofeffor  ©c^tnlbt,  uttb  ft)tr  mu^ten 
eln  tDenig  Icarten.  10.  3Sag  mad^ft  bu  benti  ^ler  im  ©arten,  £arl? 
©ollteft  bu  nid^t  auf  (^o)  beltx  3^^^^^^  Q^^^ii  ii^^  arbeitcn?  —  3^,  ba^^ 
follte  ic^,  unb  ic^  tDotlte  cS^  auc^,  5Sater,  aber  eg  trar  l^ier  fo  t)iel  fd^iJner 
alg  int  ^aufe,  bag  ic^  nod^  nic^t  arbeiten  module.  —  9^un  (well),  fo 
magft  bu  noc^  elne  (Stunbc^  l^ier  blelben,  big  eg  bunfet  tDirb,  aber  bann 
gelf)  fc^nelt  unb  fei  red^t  (right  =  very)  fleifeig.  11.  (Sle  toerbcn  ben 
^eg  nid^t  adein  finben,  glaube  id^.  (Soil  id^  Sic  fii^rcn?  —  ^ittc, 
menu  Sie  fo  gut  fein  tDollen. 

B.  12.  SSag  njotlen  <Bk  mit  bent  t)ielen  ®etbe  madden?  —  3d^  mitt 
inir  atterlei  fd^one  53ucf)cr  unb  53ilber  bafiir  faufen.  ^olkn  @ie  nid^t 
mit  ntir  gur  Stabt  fasten  unb  ntir  babei  (in  it,  at  it)  l^elfen?  —  3a, 
aber  ^cute  fann  id^  nid)t.^  —  ®ut,  bann  loerbe  i<i)  big  ntorgen  toarten. 
13.  SBenn  er  nid^tg  nte'^r  gu  effen  l^at,  fo  mug  cr  arbeiten,  ob  er  eg^  n)itt 
ober  nic^t.  14.  !Du  barfft  nic^t^  o^nc  ^^ut  auf  bie  Strafe  gel^en,  eg  ift 
^cute  fe^r  fait.  15.  3d^  n)ottte  3^nen  bag  ^(eib  fd^on  geftern  fd^idfen 
obet  bringen,  grau  Sd^mibt,  aber  id^  fonnte  eg'  nid^t,  benn  ic^  n)ar  franf, 
unb  nreine  Jocftter  unb  id^  mugten  beibe  gu  §aufe  bleiben.  16.  T)a  h)ir 
ben  ^erm  nid^t  fannten,  fo  mod^ten  n)ir  il)n  nic^t  fragen.  17.  2llg  ber 
3)iener  bag  *^ferb  tjor  bie  ^ilr  fiifiren  follte,  n)ollte  er  eg'  nid^t,  meil  bag 
3:ier  i^n  fd^on  einmal  gefrfilagen  (kicked)  l)atte,  alfo  mufete  id^  eg  felbft 
tun  (do),  18.  ©ott  id)  Sf)nm  nid^t  morgen  einige  neue  gebem  faufen? 
—  3a,  loenn  Sie  boc^  (anyway)  gur  Stabt  fa^ren  rt)ollen,  fo  nrogen  @ie 
ntir  einige  bringen,  aber  red^t  (right  =  very)  gute,  bitte.  19.  @g  hjar 
fd^on  bunfel  gelDorben,  unb  fie  trollte  thtn  nac^  §aufe  reiten,  ha*  tarn  i^r 
S3ater,  unb  nun  burfte  fie  nod^  eine  Stunbe^  bei  ung  bleiben.  20.  SBenn 
bie  Sltern  gu  htn  ^inbern  fagen:  „3^r  follt  bieg  ober  bag  tun  (do)"  fo 
miiffen  fie  eg  tun,  unb  fie  fagen  bann  gu  anbern  ^inbern:  „3Bir  follen  eg 
tun,  unfere  ©Itern  liaben  eg  gefagt."  Sagen  bie  (Sltern  aber:  „3^x  follt 
bieg  ober  bag  nid^t  tun,"  fo  bilrfen  bie  ^inber  eg  nic^t  tun,  unb  fie  fagen 
bann  gu  anbern:  „3Sir  biirfen  eg  nid^t  tun,  bie  Sltem  tootten  eg  nid^t 
^aben." 

1  The  infinitive  dependent  on  a  modal  auxiliary  is  often  omitted  when  it 
can  easily  be  supplied  from  the  context.  This  is  done  most  frequently  with 
intransitives  like  gel^en,  reifen,  fa^ren,  or  with  transitives  like  tun  do  and 
others.  In  the  latter  case,  the  object  in  the  form  of  a  pronoun  (usually  eS 
or  hai)  remains  and  appears  then  like  a  direct  object  of  the  modal,  as  in 
sentences  7,  10,  13,  15  and  17.  —  2  burfen  with  a  negative  is  often  equivalent 


134  BEGINNING    GERMAN 

to  must  not,  i.  e.,  it  is  not  'proper,  prudent  or  advisable.  —  3  gee  note  1  above. 
—  *  ba,  here  demonstrative,  but  translated  by  the  relative  when.  — « yet  an 
hour,  i.  e.,  another  hour  or  an  hour  longer;  thus  also  nod^  cin  ©tiicC  S3rot 
another  piece  of  bread,  whereas  cin  anberc^  BtM  S8rot  would  mean  a  different 
piece  of  bread. 

C.  1.  Can  you  read,  Charles?  —  Yes,  I  can  read,  but  I  can- 
not write  yet.  2.  That  may  be  true,  but  will  he  believe  it? 
3.  Must  you  go  already?  —  Yes,  I  must  not  (use  biirfen)  stay 
[any]  longer;  it  is  getting  dark,  and  the  children  do  not  like  to 
be  alone.  4.  As  his  old  horse  had  died,  he  was  obliged  to  buy  a 
new  one.  5.  I  was  about  to  write  him  a  letter,  when  (ba)  you 
came.  6.  Shall  I  bring  you  a  glass  of  water?  —  Yes,  if  you  will 
be  so  kind  (gut) .  7.  Now  we  will  play  in-the  garden.  —  But 
have  you  permission,  children?  —  Yes,  we  have  asked  Father, 
and  he  says  we  may  (are  allowed  to).  8.  She  is  to  go  to  (Mr.) 
Doctor  Smith  and  ask  him  if  he  can  come  to-night.  9.  If  her 
brother  did  not  care  to  play  longer,  why  didn't  he  come  home 
earlier?  —  Because  his  mother  had  said  he  was  to  wait  for  (auf 
with  ace.)  his  sister,  and  she  did  not  want  to  go  home  before 
six  o'clock.  10.  The  little  [fellow]  had  run  so  fast  that  he  could 
hardly  speak.  11.  Will  you  give  me  the  money  to-morrow? 
■ — Yes,  if  I  can  (it).  12.  I  don't  care  to  read  a  German  book 
(I  care  to  read  no  German  book),  give  me  an  English  one. 
13.  Why  didn't  Henry  go  with  them?  —  Because  he  was  not 
allowed  [to].  14.  You  shall  go  to  bed,  whether  you  will  or  not. 
Do  you  hear  what  I  say,  Charles? 

D.  15.  Nobody  is  allowed  to  speak  with  the  soldier  whom 
the  king  has  sent  (use  fenben).  16.  He  may  be  at  home,  but  I 
cannot  find  him.  17.  Who  shall  carry  the  books?  —  Mother 
says  you  shall  carry  them,  because  they  are  too  heavy  for  Mary. 

18.  Whenever  he  could  not  find  a  horse,  he  had  to  go  on  foot. 

19.  If  you  have  written  the  letter,  you  may  go  home,  but  you 
must  be  here  again  (again  here)   when  the  clock  strikes  three. 

20.  Children,  you  must  not  (use  biirfen)  speak  so  loud  (laut). 
Father  wants  to  read.  21.  Even  (@elbft)  our  horses  and  dogs 
did  not  like  to  drink  such  bad  water.  22.  No,  I  will  say  nothing 
about  it.  23.  Why  haven't  you  brought  your  pen?  —  Because 
I  could  not  find  it.     24.  He  might  say  what  he  would,  nobody 


LESSON   22.    II :   THE   MODAL   AUXILIARIES  135 

believed  him  (dat.).  25.  Did  I  not  say  you  were  to  come  at 
five?  —  Yes,  but  Mr.  Smith  would  not  let  me  go.  26.  We  wanted 
to  buy  the  dog,  but  we  were  not  allowed  [to  buy]  it.  27.  If  they 
cannot  tell  you  where  she  is,  you  must  go  to  her  sister.  28.  They 
were  just  about  to  drive  into-the  (auf^)  country,  when  (ba)  I 
came.  29.  The  princes  were  never  allowed  to  play  with  other 
people's  children.  30.  I  do  not  like  to  travel  alone.  31.  He  says 
I  must,  and  I  say  I  won't.  32.  Shall  you  buy  the  house?  — 
No.  —  Why  not?  —  Because  I  cannot  (it),  he  wants  (to  have) 
too  much  money  for  it. 

II 
Compound  Forms  of  the  Modal  Auxiliaries: 

FUTURE    INDICATIVE 

1  shall  be  allowed  to,  he  able  to,  etc. 
id^  tDcrbc  ] 

bu  tDirft       blirfcn,  fiinncn  etc. 
etc.       J 

PERFECT    INDICATIVE 

/  have  been  allowed  to,  been  able  to,  etc. 
id)  l^abe  1 

bu  l^aft       gcburft,  gefonnt  etc. 
etc.     I 

« 

PLUPERFECT    INDICATIVE 

I  had  been  allowed  to,  been  able  to 
id^  l^atte     1 

bu  l^atteft      gcburft,  gefonnt  etc. 
etc.        J 

When  the  perfect  or  pluperfect  is  accompanied  by  the  in- 
finitive of  another  verb,  the  past  participle  of  the  modal  auxil- 
iary (geburft,  gefonnt  etc.)  is  changed  to  the  infinitive  (biirfen, 
fonnen  etc.).  Thus,  i^  'i)abt  ntd^t  gc^en  biirfen  (where  biirfen 
stands  for  geburft  and  where  an  infinitive,  namely  gel^en,  is 


136  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

actually  expressed)  means  /  have  not  been  (or  /  was  not)  allowed 
to  go;  whereas  x6)  l^abe  nid;t  gcburft  (where  an  infinitive,  ge{)cn 
or  other,  is  understood,  but  not  expressed)  corresponds  to  the 
colloquial  Enghsh  /  have  not  been  (or  /  was  not)  allowed  to 
(where  to  also  requires  an  infinitive  to  be  understood). 

A.  1.  SBi^  \t%i  l^abc  td^  ^'^x  ^telb  nld^t  fd^ldfcn  fSnnen,  Jtau  ©d^tnlbt, 
aber  l^cute  foil  tnelne  ^od^ter  c^  Ql^ncn  bringcn*  2.  SSle  oft  l^abc  id^  gu 
bir  fommen  Xoolkxi,  aber  td^  l^abe  nic  geburft.  3.  SSenn  33ater  nad^ 
§au[e  fommt,  merbet  t^r  ^naben  nld^t  me^r  im  ©arten  fpielcn  blirfcn. 
S)ann,  glaube  td^,  inirb  jeber  auf  fern  3ii^i^er  gel^en  unb  arbeitcn  tniiffen. 
4,  ^a6  fie  §errn  ©d^mibt  bag  ®elb  fur  bie  iBlld^er  h)ir!lid^  nld^t  gegeben 
l^at,  ift  n)a^r;  aber  bafe  fie  e§  i^m  nld^t  l^at^  geben  tnolten,  bag  glaube  ic^ 
nid^t,  benn  Id^  fenne  fie  fd^on  gel^n  ^al^re,  unb  id^  l^abe  nie  fo  ettDag^  t)on 
t^r  gel^ort.  5.  ^er  tt)irb  in  einem  fo  alten  unb  fd^n^eren  SSagen  fasten 
mogcn?  5^iemanb,  6.  @r  l^at  ben  iBrief  fd^reiben  follen,  aber  er  l^at 
eg  nic^t  getDoIIt/  7.  !I)a  bie  ^leine  nld^t  beibe  iBiid^er  l^atte^  tragcn 
fonnen,  fo  l^atte  fie  eing  auf  bent  2:ifd^e  liegen  laffen.^ 

B.  8.  SSerbe  td^  htxi  ^ranfen  l^eute  fe^en  bilrfen,  §err  !l)o!tor?  — 
!Dag  glaube  id^  faum,  grau  ©d^mibt,  er  ift  nod^  gu  fd^njac^,  benn  er  l^at 
big  ie^t  nod^  nid^tg  effen  ober  trinfen  fonnen.  9,  3ft  eg  tDirflid^  hjal^r, 
bag  @ie  Q^reg  9^ad^barg  $aug  l^aben^  faufen  itiotlen?  —  3a,  bag  l^abe 
id^  getooltt,  aber  nid^t  fiir  mid^  felbft;  id^  'i^aht  eg  fiir  einen  meincr  greunbc 
faufen  foden,  iBeit  biefer  aber  tior  einigen  SKod^en  geftorben  ift,  fo  l^abe 
id^  eg  aufgeben  {give  up)  miiffen.  10.  ©inen  fo  fd^Ied^t  gefc^riebencn 
S3rief  toirb  niemanb  lefen  mogen.  11.  ^a  feine  9)?utter  franf  getoorben 
n)ar,  fo  l^atte  er  gu  §aufe  bleiben  miiffen.  12.  ®ie  l^at  ben  §errn,  ben 
fie  nid^t  fannte,  nid^t  urn  ®elb  bitten  ntogen,  alfo  ift  fie  gu  mir  gcfomnren, 
13.  ©iel^ft  bu?  5^un  toirft  bu  irieber  nad^  §aufe  laufen  mtlffen,  toeil 
bu  beine  geber  auf  bem  2:ifd^  liaft^  liegen  laffen,^  unb  bann  mirft  bu 
gu  fpat  gur  ©d^ule  fommen.  14.  (go  cttoag^  mod^te  cr  nid^t  l^orcn. 
15.  ^ag  ber  nid^t  gefonnt  l^at,  bag  mirft  bu  aud^  nid^t  fonnen. 

1  In  a  dependent  clause  introduced  by  a  subordinating  conjunction,  or 
by  a  relative,  and  containing  an  infinitive  used  for  a  past  participle  (as  tt>ottcn 
for  gehjottt),  the  personal  part  of  the  verb  (as  l^at)  stands,  not  at  the  end 
(Lesson  3.  ii),  but  before  the  non-personal  verb-forms.  This  order  of  words 
is  also  often  followed  when  two  or  more  non-personal  verb-forms  succeed  each 
other  of  which  none  is  a  substitute  infinitive;  thus,  in  a  dependent  clause 


LESSON   22.    II :  THE   MODAL   AUXILIARIES  137 

with  a  future  tense:  er  fagt,  ba^  er  morgen  nid^t  h)irb  fomnten  bllrfcn  or  ffinncn 
he  says  thai  he  will  not  he  allowed  to,  or  able  to,  come  to-morrow.  —  2  Literally, 
so  something,  i.  e.,  such  a  thing  or  a  thing  like  that.  —  3.ia[j'eii  for  gelaffcn;  i.  e., 
laffen  and  a  few  other  verbs  follow  the  construction  of  the  modal  auxiliaries. 
Thus  also:  ic^  ^abc  ha^  ^^raulein  [ingen  l^5rcn  (for  gel^ort);  fie  l^at  ben  ^naben  laufcn 
fel^en  (for  gcfel^cn);  er  l^otte  mir  arbeiten  l^elfen  (for  gel^olfeti). 

C.  1.  Till  now  he  has  not  been  willing  to  look  for  it,  but  he 
always  says  that  he  has  not  been  able  to  find  it.  2.  You  say  you 
will  be  obliged  to  stay  at  home,  but  why?  I  ask.  —  I  will  tell 
you  (That  will  I  tell  you),  because  I  have  been  obliged  to  help 
one  of  my  best  and  oldest  friends,  and  so  I  have  not  money  enough. 
3.  How  long  have  I  been  wanting  to  travel!  4.  He  did  not  tell 
me  why  he  had  not  been  able  to  write  the  letter  before  he  came 
to  me.  5.  Nobody  will  care  to  read  so  big  a  (a  so  big)  book. 
6.  Who  was  to  help  you  to-day,  Mary?  —  Charles  and  Henry 
were  to  help  me.  7.  Until  now  these  boys  have  never  cared  to 
go  to  school.  8.  Shall  you  be  able  to  come  if  you  are  allowed 
[to]? — No,  I  shall  not  be  able  [to],  for  I  must  stay  at  home  and 
work  till  six  o'clock,  and  then  it  will  be  too  late. 

D.  9.  She  has  been  obliged  to  buy  her  neighbor's  house. 
10.  I  shall  not  be  able  to  help  you,  dear  friend.  11.  I  have  long 
been  wanting  to  read  this  famous  book,  but  I  have  never  been 
able  to  find  it.  12.  Charles  says  that  Mary  has  been  told  (use 
follcn)  to  come,  but  Anna  believes  that  she  has  not  been  allowed 
[to].  13.  Perhaps  they  have  not  cared  to  ask  their  uncle  for  his 
horses.  14.  The  other  day  she  was  to  carry  the  chairs  and 
glasses  into-the  house,  but  she  would  not  (it).  Then  came  Mr. 
Smith,  and  she  had  to  do  (tun)  it  after  all.  15.  What  he  told 
us  was  quite  true,  for  when  we  came  we  saw  that  he  had  really 
been  obliged  to  wait  because  he  had  no  money.  16.  Yes,  now 
you  say:  "To-morrow  I  will  go  with  you."  But  shall  you  still 
care  to  go  when  we  ask  (bitten)  you  to-morrow?  —  I  shall  have 
to  go  with  you,  for  I  have  promised  (tterfprod^en)  it  now.  17.  We 
were  just  about  to  look  for  the  old  farmer  when  (ba)  he  stepped 
into-the  room  and  asked  us  to  drive  to  town  with  him  (with  him 
to  town). 


138 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


Lesson  23 

aSiffen 

SSiffen,  ttjuftte,  getou^t  know  resembles,  in  its  inflection,  the 
modal  auxiliaries: 


PRES.   IND. 

PAST    IND. 

IMPERATIVE 

/  know 

/  knew 

know 

\6)  njctfe 

bu  mctfet 

er  tDCife 
Xoxx  miffcn 
i^r  Xox^i 
fie  toiffcn 

td^  tDugtc 
bu  tDufetcft 
er  tDufete 
tDir  mufetctt 
il^r  tDugtct 
fie  iDufelctt 

2. 
2. 
2. 
2. 

sing, 
plur. 
sing, 
plur. 

h)iffe 
tDiffet 

iDiffen  <©i 

FUT.  IND. 

PERF. 

IND. 

PLUP.  IND. 

/  shall  know          I  have  known 

/  had  known 

iii)  tDerbe  h)iffeu        id^  l^abe  getuugt 

id^  l^atte  gemu^t 

etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


SBiffen  means  to  know  facts,  to  know  that  something  is  thus 
or  sOj  fennen  (fannte,  gefannt,  Lesson  19.  11)  means  to  know 
things  or  persons,  to  he  acquainted  with. 


VOCABULARY 

bcr  ?e]^rer  bie  ^el^rer  teacher 

ber  (Sd^iiler  bie  ©d^liter  scholar,  student 

lel^reu  le^rte  gele^rt  teach 

lemeu  lernte  gelernt  learn,  study 

lieben  Uebte  geliebt  love 

tun  tat  getan  do 

gar,  adv.,  very,  fully  (used  especially  to  strengthen  negatives) 
gar  nid^t  not  at  all  gar  nic^t^  nothing  at  all 

gar  fein—  none  at  all 
ie'bermann  everybody  gtDar  to  he  sure,  it  is  true 

jufanx'tnen  together  getDi^'  certain,  sure 


LESSON  23:  SBiffcn  139 

gem  gladly,  willingly,  with  pleas-    Ikhtx,  compar.,  more  willingly, 
ure  rather,  better,  preferably 

am  Uebften,  superl.,  most  willingly,  best  of  all 
i(^  fa{)re  gem  /  am  fond  of  driving,  I  like  driving 
id^  rclte  Iteber  /  prefer  to  ride,  I  like  riding  better 
td^  ge^c  am  Ueb [ten  /  like  walking  best  of  all 

A.  1.  Sd)  tDcig  nid^t,  ob  bcr  ncuc  2t^xtx  fcinc  ©d^liter  fd^on  ollc 
fcnnt,  abcr  man  f)at  mir  gcfagt,  bafe  cr  gern  lef)rt  unb  bag  bic  ©d^iilcr 
bid  bci  i^m  Icrnen,  2,  (Sin  jcber  gutc  (Bot)n  liebt  fcinc  @Itcm  unb 
l^ilft  i^ncn  gem.  3.  iBig  jc^t  l^at  bicfer  faule  ^nabc  gar  nid^t  gearbcitct. 
4.  §aben  @ic  mirflic^  gar  nid^t6  batjon  gcprt?  —  tcin  ^ort.  5.  !Da« 
fann  gmar  jebcrmann  fagen,  abcr  n)cr  n)irb  c^  glaubcn?  5^icmanb. 
6.  ^omm,  njir  moKcn  gufammcn  gu  tl^m  gcl^cn  unb  i^n  bitten;  bann, 
glaubc  id^,  mirb  cr  c«  gcnjife  tun.  7.  SBcr  t)on  cud^  licbcr  \di)xi  obcr 
reitet,  ber  mag  fid^  an  Onfct  §cinrid^  menben,  bcnn  cr  ^at  'ipferbc  unb 
SSagen  gcnug  unb  mirb  fie  cud^  gem  gcben;  abcr  ^arl  unb  id^,  mir  gc^cn 
am  liebften  gu  gufe.  8.  ®age  mir,  Kleiner,  nja^  lemft  bu  bcnn  in  ber 
©d^ulc?  —  3^  Icrnc  (cfcn^  unb  fd^reiben.^  9.  9^icmanb  tDU^tt,  tvtx  c« 
getan  l^atte,  ober  feiner  njollte  e^  fagen.  10.  5ln  fotc^  fd^onen  Xagcn 
ge^e  id^  bid  licber  in  htn  ^alb  unb  ^orc  bic  33ogd  fingen,  at^  bafe^  id^  gu 
§aufe  Winter  meinen  ^iid^ern  fi^e  unb  lerne.  11.  „3ungcr  9}?ann/' 
fagtc  barauf  bcr  altc  §crr,  „ic^  fcl^c,  Bit  n)iffcn  gtucir  fef)r  bid,  abcr  bi^ 
ic^t  ^aben  ®ic  nur  au^  ^lld^crn  gdcmt;  mirflid^c  SD^enfd^cn  fenncn  ®ic 
nod^  gar  nid^t."  12.  Wtin  licber,  alter  ?e^rcr,  ber  mid^  al^  gang  flcincn 
^naben  lefen^  unb  fd^rcibcn^  le^rte,  ift  l)eutc  frii^  geftorben.  13.  Ob  fie 
il)n  gefannt  l^at  ober  nid^t,  ba6  fann  id^  3l)nen  n)irflid^  nid^t  fagen;  abcr 
fie  ^at  fe^r  gut  gcmufet,  bafe  gu  jener  ^^it  cin  folc^cr  SD^ann  in  unfrcr 
(Stabt  tbo^nte,  unb  gmar^  nid^t  hJcit  bon  i^r. 

B.  14.  ^omm,  bu  Kleiner,  jc^t  follft  bu  Icfen^  unb  fd^rcibcn^  Icmcn. 
15.  !Der  ?e^rer,  njdd^cr  bic  ©chiller  CSnglifd^  le^rt,  ift  funf  3a^rc  in 
(Snglanb  gctDcfen  unb  fprid^t  fcl^r  gut  ©nglifd^.  16.  (Sic  fagt,  fie  tbcife 
gar  nid^t^  babon,  unb  il)rc  ©c^njcftcr  aud^  nid^t.  17.  l^icbet  cure  geinbe. 
18.  ©ciDife,  toir  beiben,  ^arl  unb  ic^,  n)ir  arbciten  gern  jufammcn,  abcr 
^einrid^  arbeitet  lieber  allcin,  h)cil  cr  bid  fd^nellcr  Icrnt  al^  Ibir.  19.  @r 
nennt  bid^  gmar  feinen  licben  greunb,  abcr  bu  tbcifet  gar  h)o^l,  bafe  cr 
cin  bofer  SD^enfc^  ift  unb  bi(^  gar  nid^t  liebt.  20.  9}Jutter  fc^laft  am 
liebften  oben  in  bem  flcincn  3iwimcr  nebcn  mcincm,  tbcil  e^  ba  am  ftillften 


140  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

Ift,  21,  Scbcrmann  iDufete,  ha^  er  c^  getan  ^attc,  aber  nicmanb  fprad^ 
bat)on.  22.  3d^  h)lll  bid^  gern  !Deutfd^  fprc(^en^  le^rcn,  mein  liebe^ 
Wahd)tn,  obex  ha^  fagc  id)  hit,  bu  tuirft  fe^r  fleigig  fein  miiffen,  iDenn 
bu  nod^  t)icl  lernen  h3il(ft,  et)e  bu  mit  beinen  SItcrn  nad^  3)eutfd^lanb 
rcifcft.  23»  ^ieber  bleibc  ic^  bic  gan^c  5^ad^t  unb  gc^c  gar  nic^t  nad^ 
^aufe,  aU  ha^^  id)  ben  ^ranfen  Jjier  allein  laffe  (leave).  24.  3Senn  cr 
eg  fd^on  fo  lange  getDufet  f)at,  rtiarum  ^at  er  un^  benn  nie  etma^  ha'oon 
gefagt?    25.  3:un  (5ie  e^,  unb  gtpar^  jefet,  el^e  e^  gu  fpat  ift. 

1  Semen  and  lel^rcn  are  used  without  ju  before  an  accompanying  in- 
finitive. —  2  Literally,  than  that,  i.  e.,  /  had  rather  go  etc.  than  sit  etc.;  and 
in  23:  /  had  rather  stay  than  leave  etc. —  3  ^^^  jj^qj  ^j^^  ifi^t. 

C.  1.  He  is  [a]  teacher,  but  what  he  teaches  and  how  many 
students  he  has  I  do  not  know.  2.  You  will  soon  learn  to  ride, 
Charles.  3.  Yes,  he  said,  I  like  to  drive,  but  I  like  riding  better. 
4.  I  don't  work,  because  I  have  nothing  at  all  to  do.  5.  Your 
elder  brother  and  I  often  read  German  books  together.  6.  Every- 
body loves  such' good  people  as  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Smith.  7.  We  did 
not  know  at  all  that  he  was  here.  8.  My  little  daughter  says 
that  she  likes  writing  and  singing  best  of  all,  but  my  sons  prefer 
reading,  and  I  cannot  buy  books  enough  for  them.  9.  Is  it  true 
that  the  queen  (has)  died  last  night  (yesterday  evening)?  — 
Certainly,  everybody  says  so  (it).  10.  If  she  does  not  do  it,  (fo) 
I  will  [do]  it.  11.  Let  us  work  together,  I  will  teach  you  German, 
and  you  shall  teach  me  English.  12.  Will  you  give  me  your 
pen?  I  don't  know  what  has  become  of  (au^)  mine.  —  With 
pleasure,  here  it  is.  13.  It  is  true  (3^(it,  with  inversion),  we 
have  a  new  school  and  also  a  new  teacher,  but  the  students  say 
that  they  learn  nothing  at  all  under  (bei)  him,  because  he  lets 
them  play  too  much. 

D.  14.  Will  you  drive  with  me?  —  Thanks,  I  prefer  to  walk. 
15.  Do  you  know  the  old  gentleman  yonder?  —  I  have  known 
him  these  twenty-five  years  (I  know  him  already  twenty-five 
years) ,  he  was  my  teacher  when  I  went  to  school,  and  he  taught 
me  to  read  and  write.  16.  Tell  me,  please,  where  your  children 
have  learned  to  sing,  and  I  will  send  mine  to  the  same  teacher. 
17.  I  went  to  bed  very  early,  but  I  could  not  sleep  at  all.  18.  I 
know  nothing  at  all  about  it.  19.  She  prefers  travelling  to 
reading  (than  that  she  reads).     20.  The  patient  (sick  one)  eats 


LESSON   24:   COMPOUND   VERBS 


141 


and  drinks,  to  be  sure,  but  so  little  that  he  is  still  very  weak. 

21.  How  many  students  have  you  in  your  school,  (Mr.)  Doctor? 
—  Boys    and    girls  together,  I    have   (have    I)   now  forty-five. 

22.  Certainly,  that's  always  so,  everybody  wants  (will  have) 
the  money,  but  nobody  is  wilHng  to  work  (do  anything)  for 
it.  23.  Do  you  like  to  ride  on  horseback?  —  Yes,  but  I  like 
walking  best-of-all.  And  you?  —  I  prefer  driving.  24.  At  (gu) 
that  time,  we  did  not  (yet)  know  what  had  become  of  (au^)  him, 
whether-  he  had  died  or  whether  he  was  still  living.  25.  There, 
in  front  of  the  school,  we  found  the  pupils,  boys  and  girls;  they 
were  all  waiting  for  (auf  with  ace.)  the  teacher,  and  as  he  did  not 
come,  they  quickly  ran  home  again. 


Lesson  24 

COMPOUND  VERBS  WITH  INSEPARABLE  PREFIXES 

Two  Classes.  There  are  two  classes  of  compound  verbs:  those 
with  inseparable  prefixes  and  those  with  separable  prefixes. 

The  Inseparable  Prefixes  are  be,  emp,  ent,  er,  ge,  tier  and  ger. 
Verbs  compounded  with  these  have  the  accent  on  the  stem 
and  are  inflected  Hke  simple  verbs,  except  that  the  past  participle 
omits  the  prefix  ge. 


Model:  befd^rei'ben  describe. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS 

befd^rel'ben        bcfc^ricb'        befd^rlc'ben 


PRES.  IND. 

PAST    IND. 

IMPE 

/  describe 

I  described 

de 

[^  bcfc^rel'bc 

id)  befd^rieb' 

2. 

sing. 

bu  befc^reibft' 

bu  bcjc^rlcbft' 

2. 

plur. 

er  befc^reibf 

er  befd^rieb' 

2. 

sing. 

n)ir  befc^rei'ben 

tDir  befc^rie'ben 

2. 

plur. 

ibr  befcbreibt' 

ibr  befd^ricbf 

fie  befc^rei'bctt 

fie  befd^rie'ben 

describe 

bcfd^ret'be 
befd^reibt' 
befcbrei'beu 

(Bit 


142 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


FUT.   IND. 

PERF.  IND. 

PLUP.  IND. 

/  shall  ^escribe 

/  have  described 

/  had  described 

id^  h)erbe  befd^rcl'bcn         id)  l^abc  bcfd^ric'bcn 

id^  l^attc  befd^rlc'bcn 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

VOCABULARY 

btc  ©cfd^ld^'tc         hit  ©cfd^id^'tcn  stori/,  /iistori/ 

ic'manb  somebody,  anybody 

einan'bcr  each  other,  one  another 

bcfu'd^en 

bcfuc^'te 

bcfud^t' 

visit,  call  on 

Derfu'd^en 

tjcrfud^'tc 

berfud^t' 

try,  attempt 

ertau'ben 

crlaub'tc 

eriaubt' 

allow,  permit 

erga^'len 

txi^Vtt 

ersa^If 

tell,  relate 

cmpfon'gcn 

cmpfing' 

cmpfau'gen 

receive 

gefc^e'^cn 

gcfd^a^' 

Ift  gefd^e'^cn 

happen 

t)ergef7en     . 

bergafe' 

t)ergef'fcn 

forget 

bcrllc'rcn 

Dcrlor' 

t)erlo'rcn 

lose 

t)erfprc'{i^en 

t)erfprad^' 

toerfpro'd^cn 

promise 

A.  1.  SBcnn  ®ic  crlaubcn,  fo  mcrbe  id^  ®le  morgen  bcfud^cn,  §crr 
^rofcffor,  unb  3^nen  alle^  crgci^lcn,  ma^  gcfd^e^en  ift.  2.  9^un  befd^ricb 
bag  grauleltt,  tDic  man  fie  in  bcr  @tabt  empfangen  unb  toa^  man  i^r 
Derfprod^en  fjattc.  „5lber  bag  atleg/'  fagte  fie  enblic^,  „^aben  biefe  fc^lec^^ 
ten  SO^enfd^en  fd^on  tuiebcr  t)crgeffen;  tDcnn  id^  fie  je^t  auf  ber  (Strafe 
treffe,  fo  fennen  fie  mid^  gar  nic^t  me^r."  3.  SSie  oft  f)aht  id^  ha^  t)cr* 
fuc^t,  aber  id^  f)abe  eg  nie  gefonnt.  4.  Ob  fie  ha^  ^uc^  bergeffen  ober  auf 
bem  ^ege  toerloren  ^atte,  bag  tDu^te  fie  felbft  nid^t.  5.  2llte  ©olbaten 
erg  allien  einanber  gem  atlerlei  ©efd^ic^ten  aug  bem  ^riege.  6.  3Bcnn 
jemanb  fommen  unb  nad^  mir  fragen  foirte,  fo  tDeifet  bu,  mo  ic^  bin;  id^ 
ge{)e  auf  (for)  tint  ®tunbe  p  9^ad^bar  ©d^mibt.  7.  iBefc^reiben  ®ie 
mir  ben  SO^ann,  bitte,  Don  bem  (Sie  fpred^en;  Diedeic^t  fenne  id^  i^n  bann. 
8.  (go  etmag^  gefd^ie^t  nid^t  oft.  9.  ^eine  lieben  (gltern  empfingen  ung 
mit  grower  greube.  10.  ^arl,  t)ergi6t  bu  beine  geber  unb  bein  ^ud^ 
nod^  einmal,^  fo  fc^idfe  id^  bid^  tnieber  nad^  §aufe.  11.  ^ir  n)iffen  aug 
ber^  ©efd^id^te,  ha^  ^arl  ber  ©rofee  erft  fd^reiben  lernte,  alg  er  f(^on  ein 
9)?ann  toar.  12.  ^iirfen  toir  ben  (Solbaten  big  ang  Snbe  ber  (Strafe 
folgen,  liebe  9D?utter?  —  3a,  bag  bllrft  i^r,  ^inber,  aber  ge^t  i^r  lociter, 
fo  eriaube  id)  eg  eud^  nie  n)ieber,  f)ort  if)r? 


LESSON   24:   COMPOUND   VERBS  143 

B.  13.  ^arauf  t)erfud^tc  i<^,  bcm  ^errn  "iprofeffor  ble  gauge  ©cfd^td^tc 
^u  crjii^len  unb  il^m  gu  befc^reiben,  tiok  e3  alle^  gefd^c^en  trar,  aber  er 
tuoKte  e^  mir  nid^t  crlaubcn.  14.  iBittc,  l^aben  @ic  etmag  bcrloren,  fo 
fagen  <Bk  e^  mir,  unb  ic^  U)il(  3^ueu  fud^cu  ^elfeu.  —  T)antt,  ic^  ^atte  eiu 
fleiuc^  ©tiirf  @elb  fterloreu,  aber  ic^  i)aht  e^  fc^ou  gefuubeu.  15.  §abcu 
@ie  mid^  \)tnn  gaug  toergeffeu,  alter  greuub?  —  SBarum  meiueu  (©ic 
ba6?  —  ^eil  @ie  utic^  fo  lauge  ulc^t  befud^t  l^abeu.  16.  ®eU)i6,  t)er* 
fproc^eu  i)at  er  e^,  aber  U)irb  cr  aud^  3Bort  l^alteu  uub  e^  U)trf(i(^  tun? 
17.  SKir  befud^teu  eiuauber  oft,  aber  e^  gef d^a^  aud^  oft,  ^a^  eiuer  ben 
anbem  nid^t  gu  §aufe  fanb.  18.  ^er  @raf  unb  feine  beiben  cilteften 
<©o^ne  empfingen  ben  ^onig  Dor  bem  (Sd^loffe.  19.  @^  fommt  jemanb, 
aber  td^  faun  Don  i)itv  nid^t  fe()en,  tDcr  c^  ift.  20.  SSie  faun  jemanb  fo 
etma^^  Derfpred^en?  21.  SBenn  bu  §erm  ©d^mlbt  triffft,  fo  Dergig  nid^t, 
i^n  noc^  einmaP  gu  bitten,  bag  er  {)eute  abenb  etma^  frii^er  fommt  al^ 
geftem.  22.  3)ie^  ©efd^id^tc  ergal^lt  un«  Don  Dielen  berii^mten  Wdn^ 
ncm,  bcren  (SItcm  gang  arme  unb  unbefannte  (unknown)  i^eute  toaren. 

1  Lesson  22.  ii.  note  2.  —  ^  Literally,  yet  once,  i.  e.,  once  more.  —  ^  Lesson 
14.  note  1. 

C.  1.  I  have  promised  the  children  to  tell  them  a  story. 
2.  Can  you  describe  the  woman  who  wanted  to  call  on  me  to-day? 
—  No,  I  have  not  even  (nic^t  einmal)  heard  that  anybody  has 
been  here.  3.  We  are  neighbors,  and  we  will  try  to  help  one 
another.  4.  It  happened  that  the  emperor  received  the  count 
in  the  garden  behind  the  castle.  5.  Wait,  I  have  forgotten  or 
lost  something.  6.  Will  you  call  on  me  to-morrow  before  you 
go  (use  reifen)  home? — With  pleasure,  if  you  permit  (it).  7.  What 
has  happened?  Quick,  tell  me.  —  They  say  that  somebody 
has  fallen  into-the  water.  8.  I  shall  try  to  send  you  Dr. 
Smith's  letter  when  I  get  (come)  home.  9.  Promise  me, 
Charles,  that  you  will  be  more  diligent  next  year  (next  year 
more  diligent).  10.  Such  a  boy,  he  forgets  or  loses  everything! 
11.  (The)  history  tells  us  that  Csesar  ((Eafar)  defeated  the  Ger- 
mans. 12.  It  often  happens  that  he  is  all  (gang)  alone  when  I 
call  on  him. 

D.  13.  I  do  not  know  whether  she  lost  (perf.)  the  money  or 
whether  she  forgot  (perf.)  to  take  it  from-the  table.  14.  We 
were  sitting  under  this  big  old  tree   and  telling  each  other  all 


144  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

sorts  of  stories,  when  (ba)  somebody  came  into  the  garden  and 
inquired  for  (nad^)  you.  15.  Allow  me  to  receive  him  when  he 
comes,  he  is  one  of  my  oldest  and  best  friends.  16.  Shall  you 
promise  him  the  books  for  (auf  with  ace.)  this  week  or  the  next? 
—  I  shall  promise  him  nothing  at  all,  but  I  will  try  to  send  them 
to  him  before  he  goes  (use  rci[en)  to  England.  17.  When  you 
drive  to  town,  Charles,  you  must  call  on  (Mr.)  Doctor  Smith,  do 
you  hear?  —  Yes,  certainly.  18.  Such  a  thing  one  cannot  de- 
scribe, one  must  see  it  with  [one's]  own  (eigen)  eyes.  19.  He 
promised  to  do  it,  and  he  tried  it  too,  but  it  was  too  late.  20.  To- 
morrow we  [shall]  have  the  longest  day,  then  the  days  grow 
shorter  again  (again  shorter)  until  the  (bi^  gum)  twenty-first  of 
December  (^egem'bcr) .  21.  If  you  promise  me  your  picture, 
you  shall  also  have  one  of  (t)on)  mine. 


Lesson  25 

COMPOUND  VERBS  WITH  SEPARABLE   PREFIXES 

Separable  Prefixes.  Some  of  the  commonest  separable 
prefixes  are 

ab  off,  from,  away  l^in^  along  that  way 

GXi  on,  at  mlt  with,  along 

auf  up,  upon  nac^  after,  for 

au^  out,  from  nle'ber  down 

bei  by,  to  t)or  before,  pre- 

eiu  into  tDeg  away,  off,  from 

feft  fast,  firm  inei'ter  further,  on 

fort  forth,  away,  on  3U  to,  toward 

f)eim  home  gurticf'  back 

f)tt^  along  this  way  gufam'men  together 

^  ^cr  denotes  motion  towards  the  speaker  or  towards  the  point  of  view 
which  the  speaker  takes  or  wishes  the  reader  to  take;  in  other  words,  such 
motion  as  is  described  by  hither,  here,  this  way,  along  this  way.  ^in  is  the 
opposite  of  l^er,  meaning  thither,  there,  that  way,  along  that  way.  With  l^cr 
and  l^in  many  compound  separable  prefixes  are  formed,  e.  g.,  I^erau^',  as  used 
in  fomm  l^erauS'!  come  out  (this  way,  toward  me)\  and  l^inaud',  as  used  in  gel^ 
l^inaudM  go  out  (that  way,  away  from  here  or  from  me)  I 


LESSON  25:  COMPOUND  VERBS 


145 


Verbs  compounded  with  these  prefixes  differ  from  the  inseparable 
compounds  in  four  points:  (1)  the  prefix  has  the  principal  accent;  (2) 
the  gc  of  the  past  participle  is  put  between  the  prefix  and  the  verb; 
(3)  ^hen  the  infinitive  requires  gu  to,  this  is  put  between  the  prefix 
and  the  verb;  (4)  in  the  present  and  past,  and  in  the  imperative,  the 
prefix  is  separated  from  the  verb  and  put  at  the  end  of  the  clause, 
unless  the  clause  be  a  dependent  one  with  transposed  order,  in  which 
case  the  prefix  remains  united  with  the  verb. 

Model:  an'fangen  begin. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS 

an'fangcn     1  ^.         ,  ,    .  ,     . 

an'lufangen    ^'"9  ""        an'^^^amcn       hegrn 


PRES.   IND. 

PAST  IND. 

IMPERATIVE 

/  begin 

I  began 

1 

begin 

\6)  fangc  an' 

id)  fing  an'                  2. 

sing. 

fang(c)  an' 

bu  fangft  an' 

bu  fingft  ( 

m'                2. 

plur. 

fangt  an^ 

cr  fangt  an' 
Xq{x  fangctt  an' 

cr  fing  an 
\div  fingen 

2. 

;  an'              2. 

sing, 
plur. 

fangcn  ©ic  an' 

i^r  fangt  an' 

i^r  fingt  ( 

m' 

fie  fangctt  an' 

fie  fingen 

an' 

FUT.  IND. 

PERF.  IND. 

PLUP.  IND. 

7  shall  begin                   I  have  begun 

I  had  begun 

[^  tDcrbe  an'fangcn         id^  l^abe 

i  an'gcfangen 

id^  §attc  an'gcfangen 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

VOCABULARY 

gel^o'rcn 

gcl^er'tc 

gc^iJrt' 

belong 

Derfau'fen 

i)erfauftc 

berfauft' 

sell 

auf'pren 

^orte  auf 

aufgcprt 

cease,  stop 

ouf'mad^en 

macule  auf 

aufgemad^t 

open 

auf'tDac^en 

noadjtt  auf 

ift  auf  gen)ac^t 

awake 

aufftcl^cn 

ftanb  auf 

ift  auf  geftanbcn 

rise,  get  up 

fort'fal^ren 

fu^r  fort' 

fort'gefal^rcti 

L 

continue,  go  on 

l^erun'tcrfatten 

fid  l^erun'tcr 

ift  l^crun'tergefallcn 

fall  down 

l^lnaufgel^cn 

ging  ^Inauf 

ift  ()inauf  gcgangcn 

go  up 

146 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


A.  1.  ^a^  ^auS  gef)ort  mlr  jc^t  nld^t  me^r,  id)  ^abe  c§  gcftcm  art 
(to)  melnen  5^ac^bar  t)er!auft.  2.  511^  ic^  aufmac^te,  ftanb  ic^  auf  unb 
mad^te  ba3  genfter  auf.  3.  ©obalb  bu  anfcingft  ju  fd^reiben,  tDcrbe  id) 
auf^oren  gu  Icfett,^  4.  511^  i(i^  auf^oren  trotltc,  batett  mid^  bie  tleihen^ 
in  meincr  ®efd^i(^te  fortjufa^rett.  5.  '^a  id)  iDu^tc,  baft  cr  obett  in 
feinem  3tnimcr  tnar,  ging  ic^  l^inauf.  6.  „gall  nid^t  l^erunter!"  ricf  er, 
at^  cr  ntid^  oben  in  bem  ^aume  fa!). 


7.  SBann  fongt  cr  ba^  ncuc 
^ud^  an? 

8.  @r  fagt,  cr  tt)ad)t  immtx  urn 
funf  U^r  auf. 

9.  Sd)  fragc  bid^:  „@tttg  cr  ^in^ 
auf  obcr  fam  cr  Jicruutcr,  al^  bu 
i^n  fa^t?" 

10.  3d)  iDiinfc^c  morgcn  urn 
fcd^^  ]Xi)v  aufsuftc^cn. 

11.  „@c^cn  ^iz  l^inauf  unb  ^tU 
fen  ®ic  ii)m,"  fagte  cr  unb  f u^t  fort 
^u  Icfcn.^ 


7^-  3d)  tDcife  nid^t,  h)ann  cr  c^ 
aufdugt. 

8^*  @r  fagt,  bafe  cr  immcr  um 
fiinf  ]Xi)x  auftoac^t. 

9^-  Sd)  fragc  bid^,  ob  cr  ]^tnauf= 
Qtttg  obcr  ^cruntcrfam,  aU  bu  il^n 

10*-  3d)  toiU  morgcn  um  fed^« 
Ul^r  aufftc^eu. 

11*-  „®c]^cn  ®ic  l^inauf  unb  ^tU 
fen  (Bit  d)m,"  fagtc  cr,  c^c  cr  fort^ 
fu^r  3u  Icfcn.^ 


B.  12.  „'Bd)ntU,  madden  (Sic  bic  Xixx  auf!"  ricf  cr  unb  l^ortc  auf  gu 
fd^rcibcn.^  13.  2Ba^  bir  nid^t  ge^ort,  ba^  barfft  bu  aud^  nic^t  t)crfaufcn. 
14.  SBann  finb  (Bit  ^tntt  morgcn  aufgcftanbcn?  —  511^  id^  aufmac^ tc^ 
um  fcd^^  Ul^r.  15.  55a{)rft  bu  fort,  fo  laut  (loud)  gu  fprcd^cn/  fo  fann 
Id^  nid^t  anfangcn  gu  fd^rciben,  obcr  id)  mu^  l^inaufgc^cn  unb  obcn  arbcitcn. 
16.  W,^  id)  in^  3^^^^i^  t^tit,  fa()  id^,  ha^  cin^  t)on  ben  ^ilbcrn  ficruntcr- 
gcfattcn  loar. 


17.  SBat^en  (Bit  auf,  fo  rufcn 
©ic  mic^,  bittc. 

18.  3d)  licbc  c^  gar  nid^t,  fo  friil^ 
auf5uftc]^cu. 

19.  (gr  fragtc  mid^:  „^ann  gin^ 
ficu  ®ic  ^inauf ?" 

20.  3d)  fagc,  cr  Prt  }c^t  immcr 
um  ncun  U^r  auf  gu  arbcitcn^  unb 
ticrfuc^t  bann  gu  fc^Iafcn. 


17^-  ^Bcnn  Bit  auftoad^eu,  fo 
rufcn  @ic  mid^,  bittc. 

18^-  3d)  mag  gar  nic^t  gem  fo 
friif)  aufftc^cn. 

19^-  @r  fragtc  mid^,  tnann  id^ 
^maufgiuQ. 

20^-  3d)  fagc,  bafe  cr  \ti^t  immtx 
um  ncun  Ul^r  aufPrt  gu  arbcitcn* 
unb  bann  ticrfuc^t  p  fc^tafen. 


^  English  uses  the  verbal  in  -ing  after  stop  and  gro  on,  German  the  infinitive 
with  ju  after  auf^fircn  and  fortfa^rcn. 


LESSON   25:    COMPOUND   VERBS  147 

C.  1.  If  you  do  not  begin  now,  you  will  perhaps  never  begin. 
2.  Stop  writing,  please,  and  begin  to  read.  3.  It  is  high  time 
to  get  up.  4.  Open  the  door,  please,  5.  I  will  sell  my  house 
and  buy  me  another.  6.  To  whom  does  the  book  belong  which 
has  just  fallen  down.  —  It  belongs  to  her.  7.  All  went  on  cry- 
ing Fire !  Fire !  8.  Do  you  always  wake  up  so  early?  —  No,  it 
often  happens  that  I  do  not  wake  up  before  nine  o'clock,  but  I 
always  get  up  when  I  wake  up.  9.  He  continued  to  work  dili- 
gently. 10.  Don't  you  hear,  Charles?  Mary  asks  you  to  open  one 
of  the  smaller  windows.  11.  Let  us  open  one  of  the  larger  win- 
dows. 12.  She  says  Father  is  now  beginning  to  read.  13.  I  don't 
know  when  he  stops  working.  14.  Who  says  that  Mrs.  Smith 
has  sold  her  carriage?  —  Anna  says  so.  Isn't  it  true?  —  No,  but 
she  has  tried  to  sell  it.  15.  Who  is  the  gentleman  that  came  down 
with  you?  —  I  don't  know  him,  but  I  know  that  he  is  a  German. 
16.  When  do  you  wish  to  get  up  to-morrow?  —  Have  (let)^  me 
called  at  six,  but  not  later,  for  I  must  be  in  New  York  at  eight. 

D.  17.  Get  up,  Charles,  quick!  It  is  high  time  to  go  to 
school.  18.  I  tried  to  speak  with  them,  but  all  went  on  singing. 
19.  Shall  you  allow  your  children  to  sell  the  house?  —  They 
may  do  (ma^en)  with  it  what  they  will.  20.  I  will  go  up  and 
see  whether  she  has  really  opened  the  window.  21.  I  heard 
that    something   had  fallen  down,  but  I  did   not  know  what. 

22.  If  you  continue  to  be  as  lazy  as  you  have  been  till  now,  (fo)  I 
shall  send  (use  fc^idfctt)  you  no  more  money  (no  money  more). 

23.  Our  boys  never  wake  up  till  I  call  them,  and  they  never  get 
up  until  I  have  called  them  three  or  four  times  (brct  obcr  t)ler 
Tlal).  24.  There  is  the  old  farmer  who  (has)  sold  me  these  two 
(both)  horses.  25.  Whom  does  this  hat  belong  to?  —  I  think  it 
belongs  to  my  brother.  26.  When  will  the  old  gentleman  stop 
buying  books?  —  When  he  dies.  27.  Come  down,  Mrs.  Smith, 
and  hear  how  beautifully  the  little  ones  are  playing  and  singing. 
28.  "  Good  morning,"  he  said,  "  may  I  ask  if  Henry  has  (already) 
got  up?"  —  "Not  yet,"  I  answered,  ''he  never  gets  up  until 
it  is  almost  (faft)  too  late  to  go  to  school."  29.  I  cannot  see 
from  here  whether  he  is  going  up  or  coming  down.  30.  Don't 
fall  down,  children.      31.  Have  (let)^  the  servant  called,  please. 

*  Lesson  20.  i.  note  2,  under  Exercise  B. 


148  beginning  german 

Review  and  Drill 
Lessons  17-25 

This  exercise  is  independent  of  the  numbered  Lessons  and  may  be  omitted 
at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher. 

I.  The  translation  of  the  sentences  of  this  section  is  mainly  intended 
as  a  test  on  some  of  the  notes  of  Lessons  18-25.  Italics  are  used  to  in- 
dicate the  particular  construction  or  idiom  explained  in  the  notes, 
and  references  to  these  are  added  to  be  looked  up  if  the  student  does  not 
recall  the  point  in  question: 

1.  One  day  (18.  i.  n.  1)  he  had  been  in  town  and  had  bought  a  new 
horse.  2.  Hardly  had  I  written  to  you  when  (18.  i.  n.  3)  one  of  my  ser- 
vants showed  you  into-the  room.  3.  As  far  as  (18.  i.  n.  2)  the  castle  we 
shall  go  on  foot.  4.  Both  came  towards  the  end  (18. 11.  n.  1)  of  the  week. 
5.  He  is  one  of  (Mr.)  Doctor  Smith's  (18. 11.  n.  2)  patients.  6.  He  is  not 
dead,  but  {19.  i.  n.  2)  he  is  so  ill  that  he  cannot  live  another  day  (not  one 
day  more).  7.  He  did  not  come  on  foot,  hut  on  horseback.  8.  There  lay 
(Less.  12. 11)  two  books  on  the  table;  I  see  but  one,  where  is  the  other? 
9.  What  is  your  friend?  —  He  is  a  (19.  11.  n.  1)  doctor.  10.  Why  does 
she  not  apply  to  Mr.  Smith?  He  has  more  money  than  we  have  (19.  11. 
n.  2;  7. 11.  Vocab.).  11.  Why  do  you  come  so  late?  I  have  been  waiting 
(6.  II.  n.  1)  here  (already)  an  hour.  12.  Do  you  take  me  for  (20.  i.  n.  1)  a 
soldier,  little  [man]?  13.  Have  (20.  i.  n.  2)  him  come  down,  do  you  hear? 
But  he  has  already  come  down.  14.  I  am  having  (20.  i.  n.  2)  my  daughter 
write  my  letters.  15.  I  have  come  in  order  to  (20.  11.  n.  1)  help  you. 
16.  Each  boy  had  an  apple  in  his  (20.  11.  n.  2)  hand.  17.  I  begged  him 
to  get  up,  but  he  kept  his  seat  (remained  sitting,  21.  i.  n.  3).  18.  Let 
me  give  you  another  (22.  i.  n.  5)  piece  of  (14.  n.  3)  bread.  —  Thanks  (21. 
II.  n.  2),  I  have  enough.  19.  Do  sell  (21.  11.  n.  4)  me  one  of  your  dogs. 
20.  Do  you  call  that  working  (21.  i.  n.  3),  you  lazy  boy?  21.  You  must 
not  (22.  I.  n.  2)  step  on  my  flowers,  children.  22.  I  (have)  never  said 
such  a  thing  (22.  11.  n.  2).      23.  I  (have)  let  (22.  11.  n.  3)  him  go  up. 

24.  (The)  most  children  learn  to  (23.  n.  1)  read  before  they  learn  to  write. 

25.  Bring  me  a  pen,  and  that  (23.  n.  3)  a  good  one,  please.  26.  Say  that 
once  more  (24.  n.  2),  please.  27.  Stop  calling  (25.  n.  1)  him.  28.  I  will 
teach  you  to  (23.  n.  1)  play.  29.  Have  the  doctor  called  (20.  i.  n.  2), 
please.  30.  Go  on  reading  (25.  n.  1).  31.  There  (Less.  12.  11)  has  been 
no  school  to-day.  32.  The  pen  with  which  you  write  is  not  mine,  bu( 
(19.  I.  n.  2)  hers.  33.  There  came  three  gentleman  who  had  a  big  dog 
with  them  (7.  11.  n.  4). 


REVIEW   AND   DRILL    (OPTIONAL)  149 

II.  Change  the  verbs  ir  the  following  sentences,  first,  to  the  second 
person  singular,  and  then,  to  the  familiar  second  plural  of  the  same  tense 
or  mood,  observing  that  these  changes  may  involve  others  in  the  forms 
of  pronouns  or  adjectives;  thus:  @eben  ®ic  mir  jmei  toon  3t)ren  gebern;  gib 
nxir  itod  bon  beinen  ^cbern;  gebt  mir  jmei  tton  curcn  ^^cbem  etc.: 

1.  SScnn  (Sic  fo  [d^nell  laufcn,  fo  fatten  <Sic.  2.  ^clfen  Bit  3^rer  (©(^luefter 
bod^!  <Bti)m  ©ic  fie  nic^t?  SBarum  tragen  ©ie  bie  Spfel  nic^t  felbcr  in«  §qu8? 
3.  fatten  @ie  S^xt  gcber  fo,  bann  fdnnen  @ie  toiel  beffer  fd^reibcn.  4.  Sretcn 
<Sic  l^ierl^er  {this  way)  an8  i^enfter,  tomn  <Sic  bag  ^ilb  beffer  fel^en  tootten. 
5.  Stiffen  @ie  md)t,  n)0  ®ie  3^t^cn  35ater  treffen  foHen?  ©ic  toerben  it)n  um 
fUnf  bei  ^l^rem  Onfel  ©c^mibt  finben,  aber  n)enn  ®ic  fpater  fommen,  fo  treffen  ©ie 
i^n  nic^t  mel^r.  6.  ^^a^ren  <Sie  nic^t  auc^  am  Ucbften?  ober  get)en  ©ie  am  liebftcn 
ju  i^ufe?  7.  ®ic  biirfen  t)eute  nod^  nid^t  aufftel^en,  ®ie  finb  noc^  gu  fd^rtad^  unb 
mUffen  nod^  einen  Xag  im  SBett  licgen  bleiben.  8.  SSergeffen  ®ie  Sf)Xt  SBlic^er 
nic^t,  ^firen  ©ie?  9.  ^ier,  lefen  ©ic  3^re«  S3ater«  33rief,  e^c  (gie  ju  3^rem 
t^reunbe  ge^en  unb  mit  i^m  fprec^en.  10.  SBcnn  ©ie  bie  ®tilf)Ie  in«  §au«  tragen, 
fo  nel^men  ©ic  aud^  biefe«  S3ud^  mit  (along),  bittc.  ®eben  ©ic  eg  mcincr  SD^utter 
unb  banfen  ©ie  il^r  bafUr. 

III.  3fd^  ^obc  eg  nid^t  tun  fiJnncn  means :  /  have  not  been  able  to  do  it.  With 
this  sentence  for  a  basis  or  model,  translate  into  German  the  following : 

1.  Has  he  not  been  willing  to  do  it?  2.  He  will  be  obliged  to  do  it. 
3.  He  was  to  do  it,  but  he  would  (it)  not.  4.  He  had  not  cared  to  do 
it.  5.  He  intended  to  do  it,  but  he  could  (it)  not.  6.  He  will  not  be 
able  to  do  it.  7.  Who  says  that  I  have  not  been  willing  to  do  it?  8.  I 
think  he  has  not  been  able  to  do  it.  9.  When  he  was  to  do  it,  he  would 
(it)  not.  10.  When  is  he  to  do  it?  —  He  may  do  it  whenever  (rtann)  he 
will.  11.  If  he  has  not  yet  been  able  to  do  it,  (fo)  he  will  never  be  able 
to  do  it.  12.  I  don't  like  to  do  it.  13.  May  I  do  it  now?  14.  They  did 
not  like  to  do  it.  15.  You  shall  do  it,  whether  you  will  or  not.  16.  Are 
you  allowed  to  do  it,  Charles?  —  No,  I  am  not  allowed  [to  do]  it,  but  I 
will  do  it  though  (bod^).  17.  Will  you  do  it  or  not?  —  You  ask  if  I 
will  do  it?  Certainly  I  will  (it).  18.  You  must  not  do  that,  children 
19.  Shall  you  do  it  to-day  or  to-morrow?  —  I  wanted  to  do  it  to-day, 
but  I  could  (it)  not,  hence  (alfo)  I  will  do  it  to-morrow.  20.  Will  she 
be  able  to  do  it  before  he  comes?  —  I  think  she  will  not  be  able  [to  do] 
it.  21.  Shall  she  do  it,  or  shall  I  [do]  it?  —  I  will  do  it  myself.  22.  You 
wanted  to  do  it,  but  you  could  (it)  not.  —  You  say,  I  could  (it)  not?  — 
Yes,  I  say  that  you  could  (it)  not,  or  didn't  you  care  to  do  it?  —  No,  I 
didn't  care  to  do  it.  23.  She  says  he  shall  do  it,  but  will  he  be  willing 
[to  do]  it?  —  I  believe  not.  24.  He  has  been  told  to  do  it,  and  he  has 
also  intended  [to  do]  it,  but  when  the  time  came  he  could  (it)  not.     25.  He 


150 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


might  say  what  he  would,  he  had  to  do  it.  26.  If  they  are  allowed  to 
do  it,  why  is  not  she  (allowed  it)?  27.  I  could  not  but  laugh  (lad^en) 
when  he  finally  did  it.  28.  Shall  you  be  permitted  to  do  it?  and  shall 
you  be  able  [to  do]  it  if  you  are  permitted  [to  do]  it?  29.  Why  did  he 
do  it  if  he  was  not  obliged  [to  do]  it?  —  Only  because  he  wanted  [to  do] 
it.    30.  They  shall  not  do  it,  I  will  not  have  it. 


Lesson  26 


COMPOUND  VERBS  WITH  DOUBTFUL  PREFIXES 

Doubtful  Prefixes,  ©urd^  through,  iiber  over,  across,  urn 
about,  around,  unter  under  and  iDieber  again  form  both  separable 
and  inseparable  compounds.  As  a  rule,  these  prefixes  are 
separable  when  used  in  a  literal  sense,  i.  e.,  with  the  meanings 
given  above,  and  inseparable  when  used  in  a  derived  or  figura- 
tive sense.  This  twofold  use  sometimes  has  its  counterpart 
in  English;  thus,  from  unter  under  and  gel^en  go  are  made: 

un'terge^en  go  un'der  and    untcrge'^en  undergo' 

Qlng  un'ter  went  un'der  and    unterglng'  underwent' 

un'tergegangen  gone  un'der    and    untcrgan'gen  undergone' 

The  following  are  some  of  the  most  important  compounds 
of  this  class: 


SEPARABLE 


il'bcrfc^en 

um'bringen 

tDic'berbringen 

h)lc'ber()oIcn 

toic'bcrfel^cn 


iibcrfarien 

iibcrfet'gen 

iibergeu'gen 

unterbre'd^en 

unterncl^'mcn 

iDiebcrl^olcii 


fc^te  ii'bcr 
hxQi6:^it  um' 
brac^te  Xoxt'htx 
i^oltc  tnie'bcr 
fal^  tDie'bcr 


il'bcrgcfe^t 

um'gebrad^t 

tt)le'bergcbra(^t 

JDie'berge^oIt 

toic'bergefc^en 


INSEPARABLE 


iibcrfleF 

iiberfe^'tc 

iibergeug'tc 

unter  brad^' 

unternal^m' 

tDieber^orte 


iiberfarten 

iiberfe^t' 

iibergeugt' 

unterbro'd^en 

unternont'nxcn 

toieber^olt' 


ferry  over 
kill,  murder 
bring  hack 
fetch  hack 
see  or  meet  again 


surprise,  attack 

translate 

convince 

interrupt 

undertake 

repeat 


LESSON   26:   COMPOUND   VERBS  151 

With  the  prefixes  above  are  sometimes  classed :  l^inter  behind, 
mife  amiss,  mis-,  \)oll  fully  and  tt)tber  against,  re-.  Their  com- 
pounds, however,  are  mostly  inseparable,  e.  g. : 

l^tnterlaf'fen      l^interlieg'        l^interlaf'fcn     leave  (behind),  bequeath 
bollbrin'gcn       t)oIIbrad^'te       t)ollbra(§t'        accomplish,  carry  out 
bolten' ben  tjollen'bete        tjotlen'bet        finish,  complete 

A.  1.  SBer  l^at  biefe^  ^u6)  iiberfefet'?  ^err  *iprofeffor  ^at  c6  iibcr= 
fcfef,  2.  (g«  finb  gcftcm  gh)olf  fleine  unb  brei  grofee  ©c^iffc  un'tcr* 
Qcgattgcn.  3.  (Sic  njerben  ben  armcn  9}?enfd^cn  um'bringen,  tDenn  h)lr 
it)Tn  ntc^t  fd^nctt  l^elfen,  4.  „^teber  greunb,"  fd^rieb  er,  „ic^  mufe  ®ic 
bitten,  mir  morgen  bag  ^ud^  njie'bergubringen."  5.  9liemanb  ntod^te 
fo  ettDag  untemeymen.  6.  ^d^  bin  feft  (firmly)  ilbergeugt',  t>a^  hjir 
fie  nie  n)le'berfef)en  tcerben.  7.  SSarum  fe^ten  ^ie  bte  5IIten  nid^t  erft 
ii'ber,  unb  bann  bie  ^inber?  —  SBeil  bie  ^inber  nid^t  tDartcn  n)olIten. 
8,  @r  Toax  glucfCid^  in  allcm,  ma^  er  untema^m',  9.  „3Sieber]^olen 
@ie  nod^  einmal,  h)ag  (Sie  eben  gelefen  l^aben,"  unterbrad^'  er  mid^. 
10.  ^ie  gcinbe  iiberfielen  unfere  (Solbaten  unb  brad^ten  t)iele  tion  il^nen 
urn'.  IL  ©d^nell,  {)olen  ®ie  mir  meinen  §ut  tuie'ber,  el^c  er  in^  SSaffer 
fattt.  12.  (Sein  33ater  l^interliefe'  il^nt  §aug  unb  ©arten,  ^ferb  unb 
SEBagen,  aber  fein  ®elb.  13.  SSer  bag  t)oIlbringt',  ber  tDirb  gemife 
berii^mt.  14.  (Sic  f)at  fd^on  il^r  fiebgigfteg  3af)r  bollen'bet  unb  ift  je^t 
cine  altc  grou.  14.  ^d)  n)iebcr^olc  eg,  inenn  bu  mid^  noc^  einmal 
unterbrid^ft',  fo  ^oxt  id^  auf  pi  lefen.  15.  ©eftem  abenb  tarn  er  enblid^ 
unb  brad^tc  bag  ^ilb  tDie'bcr,  n)eld^eg  er  t)or  id^  tucife  nid^t  n)ie  t)ict  ^od^cn 
Tnit'genommen  l^attc. 

B.  16.  §at  er  n)ir!(id^  fo  tjiel  ®elb  l^intcrlaf'fcn,  h)ic  man  fagt?  — 
3d^  bin  feft  (firmly)  iiber^cugt',  bafe  eg  nid^t  fo  bid  ift.  17.  §olft  bu 
bir  bag  'ipferb  nid^t  felbft  trie'ber,  fo  barfft  bu  aud^  nid^t  reiten.  18.  „3un^ 
ger  Tlann,"  unterbrad^'  i^n  ber  5llte,  ,/Bit  unteme^'men  gu  biel.  3SoIt' 
cn'ben  <Bit  erft,  toag  (Sic  an'gefangen  l^aben."  19.  ,^ag  folten  h3ir 
madden,  njcnn  bie  geinbe  ung  ^ier  iiberf alien?"  fragte  er.  20.  !Dann 
toieber^orte  er  nod^  einmal  alleg,  njag  er  gefagt  l^atte.  21.  3d^  iiber* 
fefge  ie^t  ein  fleineg  33ud^  aug  bem  (Snglifd^cn  ing  ^eutfd^e.  22.  5llg 
n)ir  an  ben  gtufe  famen,  tear  niemanb  ha,  ber  ung  ii'berfe^en  fonnte. 
23.  ^Ser  itjeig,  tDann  n)ir  ung  n3ie'berfel^en?  24.  SSag  man  unter* 
nimmt,'  bag  mug  man  aud&  boKbrin'gen.    25.  2)u  magft  bag  cine  53ud^ 


152  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

mlfnel^mcn,  tocnn  bu  c^  nur  bor  (gnbe  bcr  SBod^c  tDic'bcrbringft, 
26.  Untcrbrid^'  mic^  nic^t  fo  oft,  bittc.  27.  3d^  l^abc  mid^  noc^ 
nid^t  bat)on  ubcqcu'gcn  fonncn,  bafe  er  c§  mirflid^  gut  mlt  un«  mcint. 
28.  3efet  ersd^len  bie  Seute  im  ®orfe  einanber,  bafe  ber  altc  !Diener 
auf  bcm  "Sc^loffe  geftem  tjerfuc^t  f)at,  feincn  ^errn,  ben  ©rafen,  um'gu* 
bringen. 

C.  1.  I  asked  him  to  repeat  what  he  had  said,  but  he  would 
not  [do]  it.  2.  She  has  not  convinced  me.  3.  How  did  you 
get  (come)  across  the  river?  —  Two  old  farmers  ferried  us  over. 
4.  If  you  want  to  ride,  (fo)  you  must  first  go  to  our  neighbor 
and  fetch  back  our  horse.  5.  They  found  that  they  had  under- 
taken too  much.  6.  What  he  bequeathed  to  his  youngest  son 
was  not  very  much.  7.  Yes,  that  is  true,  he  undertook  it,  but 
he  did  not  carry  it  out.  8.  She  was  still  reading,  and  I  did  not 
like  to  interrupt  her.  9.  He  wished  to  translate  the  book,  and 
he  began  it  too,  but  he  died  before  he  could  complete  it.  10.  Here 
it  was,  in  this  dnrk  forest,  and  at  the  foot  of  this  mountain,  where 
the  Germans  surprised  the  Romans  (Diomcr)  and  killed  thou- 
sands (!5;aufcnbc)  of  (t)on)  them.  11.  How  much  money  have  you 
brought  back?  None  at  all.  12.  When  shall  we  see  each  other 
again?  —  In  two  years.  13.  It  is  not  true  that  his  ship  has 
gone  down. 

D.  14.  The  rich  count  had  been  obliged  to  ride  through  a 
dark  forest,  and  there  several  wicked  peasants  had  surprised  and 
killed  him.  15.  Finally  I  convinced  him  that  it  was  really 
better  not  to  sell  the  house,  but  to  wait  another  (yet  one)  month. 
16.  (My)  gentlemen,  I  must  beg  you  not  to  interrupt  me,  if 
I  am  to  translate  this  letter  for  you.  17.  Nobody  knows  how 
much  his  uncle  has  left  him,  but  everybody  thinks  that  it  must 
be  more  than  he  himself  says.  18.  Go  and  fetch  back  your 
brother.  19.  I  do  not  believe  that  the  two  (both)  sisters  saw 
each  other  again  until  their  mother  died.  20.  No  man  accom- 
plishes everything  that  he  undertakes,  or  completes  all  that  he 
begins.  21.  Let  me  repeat  his  own  (cigcn)  words.  22.  I  have 
just  ferried  (Mr.)  Doctor  Smith  over,  who  was  about  to  call  on 
a  patient  on  the  other  side  of  the  river.  23.  When  shall  the 
girl  bring  you  back  your  dress,  Mrs.  Smith?  —  Not  later  than 
Sunday,  please. 


LESSON   27:  THE   PASSIVE   VOICE  153 

Lesson  27 

THE   PASSIVE  VOICE 

The  Passive  is  formed  with  tDerben  and  the  past  participle 
of  some  transitive  verb,  e.  g.,  lieben,  liebte,  geliebt  love.  When 
so  used,  tuerben.  has  for  its  past  participle  tDorben,  instead  of 
gelDorben,  as  shown  below: 

PRES.  IND.  PAST  IND. 

/  am  loved  I  was  loved 

iiS)  h)crbc  gclicbt  id)  tDurbc  geliebt 

bu  tDirft  geliebt  bu  tDurbeft  geliebt 

cr  mirb  geliebt  er  tourbe  geliebt 

toix  tDerben  geliebt  toir  tourben  geliebt 

il^r  hjerbet  geliebt  i^v  tuurbet  geliebt 

fie  totxhm  geliebt  fie  hjurben  geliebt 

The  Imperative  is  too  rarely  used  to  be  given  here. 
FUTURE   INDICATIVE 

/  shall  be  loved 
[^  iDerbe  geliebt  t^erben 
bu  tDirft  geliebt  merben 
etc. 

PERF.   IND.  PLUP.    IND. 

/  have  been  loved  I  had  been  loved 

i^  bin  geliebt  tuorben  id)  H)ar  geliebt  tuorben 

bu  bift  geliebt  iDorben  bu  toax\t  geliebt  h)orben 

etc.  •  etc. 

PRESENT  INFINITIVE 

geliebt  (gu)  merben   (to)  be  loved 

The  Passive  denotes  a  process,  a  change  of  condition,  or 
an  action  as  affecting  the  person  or  thing  acted  on.  This, 
in  German,  is  indicated  by  using  toerben  become,  instead  of 


154 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


fein  be,  which  latter,  if  used  with  a  past  participle  for  a  predi- 
cate adjective,  denotes  a  state  or  condition,  and  never  an  action 
as  going  on.     Distinguish,  therefore,  as  follows: 


SScrbcn  with  a  past  participle,  de- 
noting a  process  or  a  change  of  con- 
dition (i.  e.,  the  real  passive) : 


bcr  53ricf  tDurbe  gcrabe  gefd^rtcbcn, 
al^  id^  tarn  the  letter  was  just 
being  written  when  I  came 

bcr  53ricf  mufe  mit  3:inte  gefci^rie= 
ben  h)erben  the  letter  must  be 
written  in  ink 

bcr  @olbat  h)ar  gcfangen  tnorben 
the  soldier  hod  been  captured 


©cin  with  a  past  participle,  denot- 
ing a  state  or  a  condition  resulting 
from  a  process  or  from  an  action 
completed : 

bcr  iBricf  mar  fd^on  gefc^ricben,  aU 
id^  tarn  the  letter  was  {already 
written)  finished  when  I  came 

ber  33rief  tnufe  urn  gnjolf  U^r  ge= 
fd^rieben  fein  the  letter  must  be 
finished  by  twelve  o'clock 

ber  ©olbat  toax  gefangen  the  sol- 
dier was  a  captive 


bcr  ©d^ncibcr 
bag  ^ipapier' 
ber  dlod 

gefallen  gefiel 

l^eifeen  l^leg 

it)ic   l^ci^cn  (Sie?    what  is  your 
name? 


VOCABULARY 

bic  (Sd^nelber  tailor 
bie  "ipapie're  paper 
bie  dlodt  coat 
bic  §ol3Cr  lyoodf 

gefallen  please 
gefieifeen  6e  ca/Zec? 

id^  (leifec  ^arl  m?/  name  is  Charles 


cin  getniffer  §err,  ber  (Sd^mlbt  l^ei^t  a  certain  gentleman  whose  name 

is  Smith 

barum  therefore,  for  that  reason      gerabc,  adv.,  just,  exactly 

A.  L  ^er  ^aifer  Ift  geftern  bon^  bcm  ^onlg  gefd^Iagcn  n)orben.2 
2,  S^x  neucr  dlod  tt)irb  S^nen  fc^on  morgen  bom  ©d^neiber  gefd^idft 
njcrben.  3.  ^a^  *ipapier  ift  fe^r  gut,  aber  bie  geber  gefiiltt  mir  gar 
nid^t,  barum  gel^  unb  bringe  mir  fd^nett  cine  anbcre,  4.  33on  meld^em 
©d^nciber  l^aben  ®le  biefcn  diod  mac^en  laffen?  —  SBarum  fragen  (Bit? 
(^efciltt  er  ^l^nen  nid^t?  — ®oc§/  gerabe  treil  er  mir  fo  gut  gefaitt, 
barum  frage  td^.    @in  dlod  fann  gar  nid^t  beffer  gemad^t  mcrben, — 


LESSON   27:  THE   PASSIVE   VOICE  155 

5^un,^  bcr  ©d^nclbcr  l^eifet  9)?et)er  unb  irol^nt  nid^t  tDcit  tjon  ^l^ncn. 
5.  3Siffen  8ic,  Voann  ha^  §au^  t)er!auft  merben^  rt)irb?  —  (S^  ift  fc^on 
Dcrfauft.  6.  SBenn  Id^  fagc:  „5lu«  ^olg  h)irb  je^t  oft  papier  gcmad^t/' 
fo  melnc  ic^  bamit  Qanj  ba^felbc,  al^  hjenn  i^  fage:  „9D^an  mad^t  jc^t 
oft  *ipapier  aug  §oIg."  7.  ^^  i)oxtt  tool)!,^  bag  t^  gcrufcn  tDurbe,  nur 
iDufete  id^  nid^t  toon  tocm.  8.  (Sin  fotd^er  9}?enfd^  tDirb  Don  jcbcrmann 
gcliebt.    9»  2)iefe  ^inbcr  tcunfd^en  iibergefe^t  gn  merbcn. 

B.  10.  9)?an  loeife  nod^  immer  nid^t,  bon^  mem  bcr  armc  <Sd^ncibcr, 
ben  man  tot  unter  elnem  53aum  im  SBalbe  fanb,  umgebrac^t  morben^  ift. 
11.  !Da6  *ipapier  unb  bie  gebem  n)urben  f)eute  morgen  toon^  einem  fleinen 
^naben  gebrac^t,^  ber  ^arl  ©d^mibt  l^eifet  unb  gerabe  fo  alt  ift,  n)ie  unfer 
Kleiner.  12.  !Die  ^ferbe  unfre6  ^a^hax^  finb  fd^on  toerfauft,  unb  tncnn 
(Sic  htn  SBagcn  noc^  faufen  loollen,  fo  gc^cn  Sic  fd^nell  l^in,  ober  ®ic 
tDcrben  ju  fpat  fommcn.  13.  3c^  njcrbc  mir  cinen  anbercn  9?odf  madden 
laffcn  miiffen,  biefer  gefcidt  meiner  ^rau  gar  nid^t.  14.  (Sei  felber 
(=felbft)  gut,  unb  bu  h)irft  toon  alien  ®uten  getiebt  n)erben.^  15.  ^at 
3^nen  ba^  53ilb  nid^t  gefatten?  —  ^od^.^  —  ^f^un,*  marum  l)aben  ©ic 
e^  benn  nicfit  gefauft?  —  $Seit  e6  fd^on  an  §erm  ©d^mibt  toerfauft  n)ar. 
16.  3)iefe^  junge  grautein  hjilufd^t  morgen  friil^  nad^  ber  (Stabt  gefal^ren 
gu  merben.  17.  3c^  tDufete  n)o^t,^  ha^  er  franf  mar,  unb  gerabe  barum 
ging  id^  gu  i^m,  benn  idf)  mollte  i^m  l^elfen.  18.  ®ibt  e^  nid^t  aud^ 
©d^ul)e  (shoes),  bie  gang  aug  ^olg  gemad^t  finb?  —  ©emife,  in  ^eutfd^= 
lanb,  §oI(anb  unb  granfreicf)  (France)  merben  toiele  ©d^ul^e  gang  aug  §oIg 
gemac^t,  aber  fie  toerben  meiften^  (mostly)  nur  toon  ben  !^euten  auf  bem 
Sanbc  getragen.    19.  SSer  SJJajrimi'Uan  ^d^t,  ber  hjirb  oft  Tlaic  gcnannt. 

1  By;  don  is  the  preposition  regularly  used  with  the  doer  of  a  verb  in  the 
passive  voice.  —  ^  As  in  the  active,  the  uninflected  forms  of  the  verb  stand 
last  if  the  order  is  normal  or  inverted,  and  before  the  personal  verb  if  the 
order  is  transposed ;  see  Lesson  18.  i.  —  ^  Yes,  indeed  or  certainly  —  a  com- 
mon use  of  bod^  after  a  negative  question.  —  ^  5^un,  with  a  pause  after  it 
(indicated  by  a  comma),  commonly  means  well.  —  ^  indeed  or  to  be  sure. 

C.  1.  Tell  me  first  by  what  tailor  this  coat  was  (has  been) 
made.  —  The  tailor's  name  is  Meyer.  2.  If  the  other  horse  is 
really  sold,  as  he  says,  I  shall  buy  this  one  here.  3.  Did  you 
not  say  that  the  paper  was  just  being  brought  when  you  came 
home?  —  Yes,  you  will  find  it  up-stairs  on  your  table.  4.  The 
hat  did  not  please  me  at  all,  and  for  that  reason  I  did  not  take 
it.     5.  Here  is  a  little  book  that  should  be  read  by  everybody. 


156  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

6.  Father  wishes  to  be  called  when  the  tailor  comes.  7.  They 
say  that  the  king  and  the  oldest  prince  are  captives.  8.  After 
the  count  had  been  surprised  by  the  peasants,  his  castle  was 
stormed  (ftlirmen,  weak  verb).  9.  Ask  Charles  if  the  wood 
has  been  brought  into-the  house.  10.  I  cannot  go  home  until 
both  letters  are  written.  11.  His  books  are  (being)  read  by 
everybody.  12.  The  two  (both)  pictures  will  be  sent  to-morrow. 
13.  Such  a  woman  is  (being)  loved  by  all  good  people.  14.  They 
say  that  our  soldiers  have  been  defeated  again. 

D.  15.  By  whom  were  the  children  ferried  across?  —  By  the 
count's  servant.  16.  I  think  his  second  book  is  now  being 
translated,  but  I  don't  know  by  whom.  17.  The  money  for 
your  new  coat  has  not  yet  been  sent  (use  fc^idfen)  to  (an)  the 
tailor;  shall  it  be  sent  now?  —  No,  I  prefer  to  give  it  to  him  my- 
self. 18.  I  know  indeed  that  the  table  is  made  of  (au6)  the  best 
wood,  but  it  does  not  please  me,  and  just  for  that  reason  I  will 
have  another  one  made.  19.  First  you  will  be  asked  what  your 
name  is,  and  then  whether  you  can  read  and  write.  20.  The 
papers  which  you  mean  had  not  yet  been  found  when  I  was  in 
town.  21.  There  is  more  English  (being)  spoken  here  than 
German.  22.  Are  these  the  soldiers  that  have  been  captured? 
—  No,  those  are  the  ones  (that  are  they).  23.  Why  cannot  the 
letter  be  sent  now?  —  Because  Father  has  said  just  now  that  it 
shall  be  sent  to-morrow.  24.  His  name  is  Henry,  and  because 
he  is  so  tall,  he  is  always  called  (the)  long  Henry.  25.  Smith's 
wagon  was  to  be  sold  yesterday,  but  I  have  not  heard  whether 
it  has  really  been  sold. 

Lesson  28 

REFLEXIVE  AND  IMPERSONAL  VERBS 

Reflexive  Verbs.  In  German,  as  in  English,  transitive  verbs 
are  often  used  with  a  reflexive  pronoun  for  an  object,  e.  g., 
cr  geigt  ftd^  he  shows  himself,  fie  fe^t  fid^  she  seats  herself.  But 
German,  unhke  EngHsh,  uses  some  verbs  reflexively,  though 
the  reflexive  pronoun  is  no  longer  felt  as  an  object  and  the 
verbal  idea  of  the  combination  has  become  virtually  intransi- 


LESSON   28:   REFLEXIVE   AND    IMPERSONAL  VERBS  157 

tive,  e.  g.,  er  freut  \i6)  {he  gladdens  himself,  i.  e.)  he  rejoices  or  is 
glad. — The  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  for  both  num- 
bers and  all  genders,  is  fid^  (Lesson  7.  ii) ;  for  the  other  persons 
the  corresponding  personal  pronoun  is  used,  as  shown  below. 

INFINITIVE 

fid^  (gu)  ^d^tn  (to)  show  one's  self       [id)  (pi)  frcucn  (to)  rejoice 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE 

td^  gcigc  mid^  /  show  myself  id^  frcuc  tntd^  /  rejoice 

bu  geigft  bid^  you  show  yourself  bu  freuft  bid^  you  rejoice 

cr  gclgt  fid^  he  shows  himself  tx  frcut  fid^  etc. 

[it  gcigt  [id^  she  shows  herself  fie  frcut  fid^ 

c^  gclgt  fid^  it  shows  itself  c§  frcut  fld^ 

h)lr  scigcn  un^  we  show  ourselves  tDir  frcucn  un« 

i^x  gclgt  cud^  you  show  yourselves  i^r  frcut  cud^ 

fie  geigen  fic^  they  show  themselves  fie  frcucn  fic^ 

©ie  gcigen  fid^  you  show  yourself  ®ic  frcucn  fid^ 
or  you  show  yourselves 

PAST  INDICATIVE 

id^  gcigtc  mid^  /  showed  myself  id^  freutc  mid^  /  rejoiced 

etc.  etc. 

IMPERATIVE 

geige  bid^  show  yourself  frcuc  bid^  rejoice 

gcigt  cud^  show  yourselves  frcut  cud^  rejoice 

gcigcn  @ie  fid^  show  yourself  or  frcucn  (Sic  fid^  rejoice 
show  yourselves 

FUTURE    INDICATIVE 

i(^  iBcrbc  mid^  jcigcn  td^  hjcrbc  itiid^  frcucn 

/  shall  show  myself  I  shall  rejoice 

PERFECT    INDICATIVE 

i^  l^abc  m\6)  gcscigt  ic^  l^abc  mtc^  gcfrcut 

/  have  shown  myself  I  have  rejoiced 

PLUPERFECT    INDICATIVE 

td^  l^attc  mi(^  gcjeigt  i^  fiatte  mid^  gcfrcut 

/  had  shown  myself  I  had  rejoiced 


158  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

Impersonal  Verbs,  or  verbs  and  verb-phrases  used  imper- 
sonally, with  e6  it  for  a  subject,  are  not  pecuUar  in  their  in- 
flection, e.  g.,  e^  regnet  it  rains,  e^  regnete  it  rained,  e^  l^at 
geregnet  it  has  rained,  e^  tnirb  regnen  it  will  rain, 

VOCABULARY 
tc^t,  adj.,  last        iDci^rcnb,  prep,  with  gen.,  during 

iDCil^rcnb,  subordinating  conj.  with  transp.  order,  while 
\i6)  argent  iiber,  with  ace,  he  vexed  at  or  with 
fid^  freueti  liber,  with  ace,  rejoice  over  or  at,  he  glad  of 
\id)  tDunbem  liber,  with  ace,  wonder  at,  he  surprised 

e^  bli^t  it  lightens  e^  regnet  it  rains 

e^  bonnert  it  thunders  e^  fd^nelt  it  snows 

The  following  yerbs,  or  verb-phrases,  describe  a  state  of  mind  or  body, 
and  are  construed,  some  with  the  accusative  and  some  with  the  dative 
of  the  person  concerned: 

c^  argert  mtd^  /  am  vexed  e^  ^ungert  tnld^  /  am  hungry 

eS  freut  mid^  /  am  glad  e^  biinft  mtd^  methinks,  it  seems 

e^  tnunbert  m\6)  I  wonder,  I  am        to  me 

surprised  e^  ge^t  mtr  gut  /  am  well  (as  to 
e^  burftet  1      .  ^    ^       ^7  •    ^  health) ,  I  am  getting  on  well 

eS  burftet  j  ^  e^  tut  mir  leib  /  am  sorry 

Three  of  the  verbs  above  (argern,  frcuen,  hjunbern)  may  each  be  con- 
strued (a)  reflexively  and  (b)  impersonally,  without  essential  difference 
in  meaning;  thus: 

(a)  (b) 

i^  argcre  mici)  bariiber,*    1  ba^  /  am  vexed  1  that  e8  argert  mic^,    1  ba^ 

i^  freuc  mi^  barlibcr,*       [   er  /  rejoice       \    he  eg  freut  mi(^,      I   er 

i^  iBunbere  mid^  bariiber,*]  [ingt  /  wonder      J  sings  eg  iDunbert  mid)  J  [ingt 

*  The  adverb  may  be  omitted;  it  merely  annoimces  the  following  clause. 

Hence  the  full  inflection,  in  both  constructions,  of  the  present  indica- 
tive of  the  second  verb,  for  example,  is  as  follows : 


LESSON  28 :   REFLEXIVE   AND    IMPERSONAL   VERBS  159 


id)  frcuc  mic^  bariibcr, 
bu  frcuft  bid^  bariibcr, 
cr  frcut  fic^  bariiber, 
[ic  frcut  \i6)  bariiber, 
e«  freut  [id^  bariiber, 
h)ir  freuen  unS  bariiber, 
il^r  freut  eud^  bariiber, 
fie  freuen  fid^  bariiber, 
©ie  freuen  fic^  bariiber, 


ba^        I  rejoice       ]    that        c§  freut  fie,  ha^ 

er         2/^^  rejoice   [     Ae        [e^  freut  eS,]         er 

fingt  etc.        J  sings       eS  freut  un3,       fingt 


e«  frcut  mid^, 

e«  freut  bid^, 

eg  freut  il^n, 

c§  freut  fie. 

[eg  freut  e8,] 

cS  freut  ung. 

c8  frcut  m6), 

c8  freut  fie. 

c«  freut  @ie. 

A.  1.  SBa^renb  bcr  (e^ten  9^a(^t  bUfetc  unb  bonnerte  e^  fo  ftarf 
(hard),  bag  fcincr  t)on  un^  fc^Iafen  fonnte.  2.  ©age  i^m  nur  nid^t,  bag 
bu  bid^  bariiber  argerft  {  =  'i>a^  e^  bic^  citgert),  bcnn  id^  tDcig,  bag  er  fid^ 
bariiber  freut  (  =  ba6  e^  i^u  freut).  3.  $Regnet  e^  ober  fd^neit  e^?  — 
3cfet  reguet  e^  nod^,  aber  fobalb  e^  gegen  5lbeub  eth)a6  falter  tnirb,  mirb 
e^  h3of)I  (probably)  fd^neien.  4.  ^ie  oft  l^abe  id^  mid^  fd^ou  liber  ben 
faulen  ^naben  geargert!  5.  SBii^renb  fie  atle^  il^ren  ^riibem  unb 
(Sd^meftern  gab,  ijergag  fie  fid^  felbft.^  6.  Stiffen  ©ie,  n)ie  e^  meinem 
5Bruber  ge^^t?  —  (5^  gel^t  i^m  l^eute  etira^  beffer.  7.  @g  l^ungert  unb 
burftet  mid^  (  =  9D^id^  l^ungert  unb  burftet^),  gebt  mir  bod^  fd^nelt  etma^ 
gu  effen  unb  gu  trinfen.  8.  "HJlid)  blinft,^  ber  "iprofeffor  ift  n^al^renb  be^ 
le^ten  3a^re^  red^t  (right  =  very)  alt  unb  fc^mad^  getDorben  (  =  90^ic^ 
biinft,^  bag  ber  ^rofeffor  n)a^renb  be^  le^ten  Qal^re^  red^t  alt  unb  fd^mac^ 
gen)orben  ift).  9.  §at  e^  fd^on  aufge()ort,  gu  regnen?  —  D^ein,  e^ 
regnet  nod^  immer.  10.  ^omm  bod^,  Hnna,  unb  geige  bic^  in  beinent 
neuen  §ut.  11.  bariiber  l^aben  mir  ung  getDunbert  unb  gefreut. — 
SBoriiber^?  —  bariiber,*  bag  e^  i^r  fd^on  toieber  fo  gut  ge^t,  benn  neulid^ 
tear  fie  nod^  felir  franf.  12.  §ort,  ma^  fie  fd^reibt:  „(S6  tut  mir  fe^r 
leib,  liebe  greunbe,  bag  id^  (Sie  bor  nad^ftem  ©onntag  nid^t  befud^en 
fann,  aber  bann  fomme  id^  gang  getoig."  13.  d^  mirb  mid^  fe^r  freuen 
(=3d^  toerbe  mid^  fel^r  bariiber*  freuen),  ioenn  (Bit  ha^  ^ud^  balb  liber- 
fefeen.  14.  SD^einen  <Bit  nid^t  aud^,  bag  ba^  gu  t)iel  ®elb  ift  fiir  fo  njenigc 
tinmen?  —  9^ein,  bag  blinft  mid^  gar  nid^t,  benn  e^  ift  {e^t  ^Sinter, 
unb  33Iumen  finb  teuer  (dear).  15.  ^er  l^at  eud^  libergefefet,  £inbcr? 
—  ^ir  ^aben  un^  felber  (  =  felbfti)  libergefe^t.  16.  (gg  fa^rt  fid^^  gut 
in  einem  folc^en  3Bagen,  nid^t  tDa^r^?  —  3a,  fe^^r  gut.  17.  (S6  n)urbe 
geftern  abenb  erft  gelefen,^  unb  bann  tourbe  gefungen.^ 

B.  18.  (gg  tut  mir  fe^ir  Teib,  bag  e^  fieute  mieber  regnet,  benn  id^ 
tooKte  gur  <Stabt.    19.  323 ie  oft  ^aht  id^  mid^  liber  bie  ^leine  gefreut! 


160  BEGINNING   GERMAN 


20.  9}?an  fagt,  ba^  e6  l^ncn  alien  gut  gc^t.  21.  Jragcn  ®lc  fid^  felbft,* 
ob  ©ic  mit  fold^  eincm  Tltn\^tn  etiDa^  gu  tun  f)aben  tDoKen.  22.  @e 
l^ungcrtc  unb  burftete  mld^  fo  {  =  Tli(i)  I)ungertc  unb  burftete^  fo),  bag 
td^  nid^t  melfir  gcl^en  ober  ftel^en  !onntc.  23.  Unb  ha  cr  toierjig  2:age  unb 
bicrgig  5^a(^tc  gefaftet  (/as^ed)  {)atte,  l)ungcrte2  i()n.  24.  3cfu^  ant* 
h)ortctc  unb  fprad^  gu  il^r:  3Ber  biefe^  SBaffcr  trinft,  ben  iDirb^  h^icber 
biirften.  25.  5Bic  ger)t  c^  3^nen?  —  3)anfe,  e^  gc{)t  mir  etn)ag  beffcr 
aU  gcftcrn.  26.  $mid^  bunft,^  e^  ^at  eben  geblifet  (  =  mi(i)  bunft,^  bag 
c«  eben  gebli^t  f)at) .  —  !Dann  mlrb  e«  aud^  ti^ol^l  (probably)  balb  bon* 
ncm.  27.  5Ba!)renb  bie  anbcrcn  [ai)  barilber  cirgertcn,  freutc  fie  fid^ 
baruber.  28.  SKorilber^  tuunberft  bu  bid^,  ^arl?  —  3c^  Ujunbere  ntic^ 
barilber,*  ha^  bu  n)d()renb  einer  gangen  (Stunbe  !ein  $3ort  gefprod^cn, 
fonbem  immer  gclefen  l^aft,  unb  e^  freut  mi^  (=unb  id)  freue  m'vi) 
bariiberO,  bafe  bir  ba^  neue  ^ud^  fo  gut  gefallt.  29.  !Da  e^  gefd^neit 
l^atte,  fonnten  n)ir  htn  SBeg  faum  finben.  30.  greuen  ®ie  fid^  mit  mir! 
Dber  freut  e^  ©ie  nid^t,  ba^  id^  nun  mieber  gu  meinen  lieben  Sltern 
reifen  fann?  —  ©etuife  freut  mid^  ha^,  aber  trenn  id^  an  mid^  felbft^ 
benfe,  fo  tut  e^  mir  aud^  leib,  bag  id^  (Bit  nun  h)ieber  tierliere.  31.  3n 
ben  Bergen  reitet  eS  fic^^  beffer  auf  einem  @fel,  al^  auf  einem  ^ferbe, 
nid^t  toa^r^?  — 3a,  ha^  finbe  i(^  aud^.  32.  (ge  n^urbc  geftern  abenb 
crft  gut  gefungen,^  aber  f pater  lourbe  fe^r  fd^Ied^t  gefpielt.^ 

1  The  intensive  pronoun  fclbft  (or  fdbcr,  both  forms  indeclinable)  is  often 
added  to  the  reflexive,  for  the  sake  of  clearness  or  emphasis.  —  2  With  these 
verbs  the  cd  is  regularly  omitted  when  the  clause  begins  with  some  other 
element  or  word.  In  sentences  8  and  26,  the  dependent  clause  following 
bUnft  takes  the  place  of  the  omitted  c8.  —  ^  Literally,  whereover,  i.  e.,  at 
what?  —  •»  May  be  omitted.  —  «  Literally,  it  drives  itself  well,  or  in  sentence  31, 
it  rides  itself  better,  i.  e.,  it  is  easy  driving,  better  riding  etc.  Many  intransitive 
verbs  may  thus  be  used  reflexively  and  impersonally.  —  «  Literally,  not  truef, 
i.e.,  does  it  not?  isn't  it  so?  — '  These  are  passive  constructions  used  imper- 
sonally, the  eg  of  the  second  clause  is  omitted  as  above,  see  note  2.  Translate: 
There  was  singing,  reading,  playing  etc. 

C.  1.  You  will  rejoice  if  I  tell  you  what  has  happened. 
2.  Now  it  will  begin  to  snow.  —  No,  I  think  it  will  rain.  3.  The 
old  [woman]  was  vexed  with  her  daughter.  4.  Is  his  brother 
doing  well?  No,  he  is  doing  poorly.  5.  I  wonder  that  he  does 
not  fall.  6.  We  are  sorry  that  we  cannot  drive  with  you. 
7.  How  it  thundered  and  lightened  during  the  night!  8.  She 
was  hungry  and  thirsty  when  she  came  home.     9.  I  think  he 


LESSON   28:  REFLEXIVE   AND   IMPERSONAL  VERBS  161 

will  soon  show  himself.  10.  She  does  not  know  whether  they 
are  doing  well  or  poorly.  11.  Are  you  not  glad  that  you  came 
(have  come)?  —  No,  I  am  sorry.  —  Why?  —  Because  it  seems 
to  me  that  the  others  are  vexed  with  me.  12.  They  were  sur- 
prised that  it  was  still  snowing.  13.  You  say  that  you  are 
hungry,  Charles;  and  I  am  glad  of  it  (that),  for  I  have  something 
good  to  eat.  14.  I  have  often  wondered  why  you  did  not  visit 
us  last  year  while  you  were  at  your  uncle's.  15.  Don't  be  vexed 
at  that  (thereover).  Try  to  forget  it.  16.  We  are  very  glad 
to  hear  that  you  are  getting  on  so  well,  Mr.  Smith. 

D.  17.  How  is  she  getting  on?  —  Thanks,  she  is  getting  on 
very  well.  18.  I  don't  see  how  you  can  wonder  at  that  (there- 
over). 19.  She  will  be  sorry  to  hear  that  you  are  not  well.  20.  If 
you  are  hungry,  Mary,  why  don't  you  eat?  21.  What  was  that? 
It  seems  to  me,  it  was  thundering  just  now.  22.  When  I  woke 
up,  I  was  very  thirsty,  but  I  did  not  find  anything  to  drink. 
23.  He  was  vexed  that  I  interrupted  him,  but  the  others  were 
glad  of  it  (thereover).  24.  If  he  is  really  sorry  that  he  has  for- 
gotten it,  why  does  he  not  tell  (it)  me?  25.  During  the  last 
winter  it  snowed  but  very  little.  26.  Give  me  a  glass  of  water, 
please,  I  am  so  thirsty.  '  27.  It  lightens,  but  I  don't  hear  that  it 
thunders.  28.  I  have  never  been  sorry  that  I  (have)  helped 
him.  29.  Won't  he  be  vexed  with  us?  —  I  think  not.  I  even 
(fogar)  think  he  will  be  glad  if  I  tell  him  everything.  30.  How 
the  old  [man]  rejoiced  over  his  sons  when  they  finally  came  home! 
31.  We  stood  under  a  big  tree  while  it  was  raining,  and  we  did 
not  get  wet  (na^)  at  all.  32.  I  did  not  know  that  it  had  been 
raining  so  hard  (strong). 

E  (Supplementary  and  Optional).  In  connection  with  the  idiom  ex- 
plained in  note  5  above,  the  student's  attention  is  directed  to  a  few  illus- 
trations of  the  peculiar  and  common  use  of  laffen  with  [id^  (compare  also 
Lesson  20.  i.  note  2) : 

•Da«  la§t  fid^  leld^t  [agen  or  madden  That's  easily  said  or  done 

(Sa  lafet  [id^  Icid^t  benfen,  ha^  cr  b5fc      One  can  easily  imagine  that  he  got 

hjurbc  angry 

!DaS  lafet  [td^  ^firen  That's  worth  listening  to 
:Da8  33rot  liefe  fic^  md|t  cffen,  unb  ha9      The  bread  was  not  fit  to  eat  and  the 

SBoffcr  nid^t  trinfcn  water  not  fit  to  drink 

^icr  Ittfet  fi(^'«  [d^iin  triiuntcn  This  is  a  fine  place  for  dreaming 


162 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


Lesson  29 

THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   IN   CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES 
I 

Inflection  of  the  past  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  and  the 
present  and  perfect  conditional  of 

^abcn  ©citt  SBcrben 


PAST    SUBJUNCTIVE 

{If)  I  had  or  (//)  /  were  or 

had  I  or  I  were  I  or  I 
should  have  should  he 

id)  l^cittc  i^  to'dxt 

bu  ^attcft  bu  hjcircft 

cr  f)aitt  cr  tncirc 

iDir  l^crttctt  tDir  iDcirett 

il^r  ^dtict  U)x  td'axti 

fie  f)atten  fie  todxtn 

PLUPERFECT    SUBJUNCTIVE 


(//)  /  became  or 
/  should  become 

iii)  tDiirbc 
bu  tDiirbeft 
er  tDiirbc 
iDir  tt)iirbett 
il^r  tDiirbet 
fie  JDiirben 


(//)  I  had  had  or  had    (If)  I  had  been  or  had    (If)  I  had  become  or 


/  had  or  /  should 

have  had 
id)  l^dtte  gel^abt 
bu  ^(itteft  ge^abt 
etc. 


/  should  have 
id)  hJiirbe  l^aben 
bu  toiirbeft  l^abcn 
etc. 


/  been  or  /  should 

have  been 
id)  h)are  getDefen 
bu  njcircft  gemefen 
etc. 

PRESENT    CONDITIONAL 

/  should  be 
id)  iDilrbe  fein 
bu  tDiirbcft  fein 
etc. 


had  I  become  or  / 
should  have  become 
id)  tDcire  geh3orbcn 
bu  njcireft  getDorben 
etc. 


I  should  become 

id)  hjiirbc  h)crben 

bu  toiirbeft  tocrben 

etc. 


/  should  have  had 
id)  miirbc 
bu  rt)iirbeft 
etc. 


PERFECT    CONDITIONAL 

/  should  have  been        I  should  have  become 


gef)abt 
l^aben 


id)  iDilrbc 
bu  tDiirbeft 
etc. 


geiDcfen 
fein 


id)  hJiirbe 
bu  iDilrbeft 
etc. 


geh)orbcn 
fein 


LESSON   29.    I :   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE 


163 


Use.  These  forms  are  used  chiefly  in  sentences  containing 
one  clause  expressing  a  condition,  or  supposition,  contrary  to 
fact,  and  another  clause  expressing  a  conclusion,  or  result, 
which  would  follow  if  the  condition  were  a  fact: 

A.    In  the  present  or  in  the  immediate  future. 


CONDITION 

//  /  had  money,  or 
Had  I  money, 

SBenn  x6)  ®clb  l^attc, 

(past,  subj.) 


CONCLUSION 

/  should  he  happy 
fo  iDiire  i<i)  gliicflid^ 

(past  subj.) 
or,  less  often, 

njiirbe  id^  glucflid^  fcin 

(pres.  conditional) 


pattt  id^  ©clb, 

(past,  subj.,  with  inverted  order  in- 
stead of  Xomn  with  transposed  order) 


fo  marc  id)  gtiidflid^ 

or,  less  often,  . 

fo  iDilrbc  id^  glttcflid^  fcin 


or,  with  inversion  of  clauses: 


CONCLUSION 

/  should  be  happy, 

3d^  to'CLXt  gliicflid^,  or 

3<i)  tdixxht  gliidtid^  fcin, 

B.     In  the  past, 

CONDITION 

//  /  had  had  money,  or 
Had  I  had  money. 


(pluperf.  subj.) 


CONDITION 


if  I  had  money  {had  I  money) 

totxm  id)  ®clb  'i)attt 
(less  often,  pttc  ic^  ®elb) 


CONCLUSION 

/  should  have  been  happy 
fo  td'dxt  id)  g.  gelDefen 

(pluperf.  subj.) 
or,  less  often, 

fo  tDiirbc  id)  g.  getnefen  fcin 

(perf.  conditional) 


§(itte  id)  ®.  gcl^abt,  [  fo  loarc  id^  g.  gelDcfcn 

(pluperf.  subj.,  with  inverted  order  in-  \  or,  less  often, 

stead  of  tDcnn  with  transposed  order)  [        fo  h)urbc  id)  g,  gciDefcU  fcttl 
or,  with  inversion  of  clauses: 


164 


BEGINNING   GERMAN 


CONCLUSION 


I  should  have  been  happy, 
3d^  tG'dxt  g.  gctDcfen, 

or,  less  often, 

3^  iDilrbc  g.  gctDcfcn  fcln, 


CONDITION 

if  I  had  had  money  (had  I  had  m.) 

totnn  id)  ®.  gel^abt  l^attc 
(less  often,  pttc  it^  ®.  gc^abt) 


C.     As  a  third  form  we  may  regard  the  combination  of  A  and  B: 


CONDrriON  IN   THE   PAST 

//  he  had  been  there,  or 
Had  he  been  there, 

SScnn  cr  ba  geiBcfcn  toixxt, 

or 

SBfirc  cr  ba  gcnjcfcn, 


CONCLUSION  IN  THE  PRESENT 

he  would  now  be  rich 

fo  to'dxt  cr  ic^t  rcid^ 

or 

fo  ttjiirbe  cr  iefet  reid^  fcin 


COITOITION   IN  THE   PRESENT 


CONCLUSION  IN  THE  PAST 


//  he  were  still  alive,  or  1      ,  7j  i.        t        i.       ? 

w      h%    i-ii    T  \     he  would  have  been  here  long  ago 

fV  ere  tie  sizll  aivve,  j 


SBcnn  cr  nod^  am  ?cbcn  »arc, 

or 

SBiirc  cr  no(^  am  Scbcn, 

Inversion  of  clauses  may  occur  as  in  A  and  B. 


fo  tottre  cr  fd^on  langc  l^icr  gctocfcn 

or 

fo  ioilrbc  cr  f(^on  langc  l^icr  gctocfcn  fcin 


Observe:  1.  The  Condition,  or  the  ij-clause,  takes  the  sub- 
junctive only,  not  the  conditional. 

2.  The  Condition  may  be  implied  only,  or  partly  expressed: 
How  happy  I  should  he!  SSlc  gliidflid^  miirbe  x6)  fein  or  iDttre  ic^I 
(supply,  e.  g.,  if  I  were  rich  tDenn  \6)  reid^  tnctre)  or  At  12  o'clock 
it  would  have  been  too  late  Um  glcblf  U!)r  miirbe  e^  gu  fpat  gemefen 
fein  or  tDcirc  e8  gu  fpat  gelDefen  (here  the  complete  Condition 
may  be  supposed  to  be:  //  we  had  been  there  at  12  o^ clock  3Benn 
toir  um  gtuolf  Ul^r  gefommen  iDdren). 

The  Conclusion  may  be  impUed  only,  or  partly  expressed: 
///  were  only  rich!  SBenn  \6)  nur  reid^  iDare!  or  iSSttrc  x6)  nur 
xtx6)\  (supply,  e.g.,  how  happy  I  should  be  XQXt  gliidfUd^  tDiirbe 
id^  fcin  or  loftre  id^)  or  He  spoke  as  (=as  he  would  speak) 


LESSON   29.    II :  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE  165 

if  he  were  rich  Sr  fprad^,  aU  (=aU  or  toie  er  fpred^eti  toilrbc) 
toenn  er  reid^  toctre  or  (without  if  and  with  inverted  order)  al^ 
Mxt  er  reic^» 

3.  (a)  Conditions  of  the  less  vivid  future,  which  are  not  contrary  to 
fact  but  still  possible  of  realization,  coincide  in  form  with  those  contrary 
to  fact  in  the  present  time :  if  he  should  fall  sick,  I  should  he  unhappy 
hjcnn  cr  franf  luiirbc  (or  toilrbc  er  franf),  fo  toixxt  i6)  unglilcflid^.  —  (b)  In  other 
conditions  not  contrary  to  fact,  including  those  of  the  more  vivid  futuf '•, 
the  indicative  is  used :  if  he  gets  (or  shall  get)  well  again,  I  shall  be  happy 
menn  er  mieber  gefunb  n)irb,  fo  n)erbc  ic^  glildflic^  fein;  if  he  has  money,  he  is 
happy  hjenn  er  ®elb  \)at,  fo  ift  cr  gliicflid^;  (if)  whenever  he  had  money,  he  was 
happy  mnn  er  ®elb  ^atU,  fo  toav  er  gtUcflid^;  if  he  has  been  there,  he  has  seen 
her  njenn  er  ba  geiuefen  ift,  fo  l^at  cr  fie  gefel^cn. 

The  following  sentences  may  serve  for  further  practice,  either  befor-o 
or  after  Part  II  of  this  Lesson: 

1.  He  would  have  (already)  been  here,  if  he  had  had  more  time. 
2.  Were  I  a  king,  I  should  not  be  happier  than  I  am  now.  3.  If  I  had 
so  much  money,  you  would  not  be  poor  either.  4.  How  happy  the  chil- 
dren would  be,  if  Mother  should  still  have  some  apples!  5.  It  would 
have  been  better,  if  you  had  had  more  money.  6.  He  would  never  have 
grown  well  again.  7.  You  would  have  been  much  happier,  if  you  had 
had  something  to  do.  8.  If  I  only  had  been  there!  9.  If  he  has  said  it, 
nobody  has  heard  it.  10.  It  would  now  be  too  late  to  go.  11.  He 
spoke  as  if  he  had  been  there  himself.  11.  Whenever  he  had  been  in 
(the)  town,  he  brought  me  a  new  book.  12.  They  would  all  have  grown 
rich,  but  they  did  not  care  to  work.  13.  How  famous  he  would  have 
become!  14.  But  if  he  should  become  famous  in  this  war,  should  you 
not  be  happy?  —  Certainly,  I  should  be  happy.  15.  If  he  were  still 
rich,  he  would  also  have  had  money  yesterday,  but  I  know  that  he  had 
none.  16.  How  famous  he  would  now  be,  if  he  had  been  in  the  war! 
17.  If  he  has  the  books  to-morrow  (to-morrow  the  books),  he  will  give 
them  to  you ;  but  I  do  not  know  if  you  will  find  him  at  home.  18.  If  it 
rains,  I  shall  stay  till  it  stops  raining.  19.  Wouldn't  it  be  sad  (traurig), 
if  he  should  be  ill  again? 

II 

1.  The  past  subjunctive  of  regular  weak  verbs  is  like  the 
past  indicative;   that  of  strong  verbs  differs  from   the   past 


166  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

indicative   in    the    endings    and   in    the    modification  of  the 
stem-vowel,  if  this  be  capable  of  modification: 


WEAK 

STRONG 

PAST     IND. 

PAST      SUBJ. 

PAST     IND. 

PAST      SUBJ. 

^  fagtc 

td^  fagtc 

ic§  tarn 

i(^  fame 

bu  fagtcft 

bu  fagtcft 

bu  famft 

bu  famcft 

cr  fagtc 

er  fagtc 

er  tarn 

er  fame 

iDir  fagtcn 

h)ir  fagtcn 

tDir  famcn 

tDir  fiimcn 

i^r  fagtct 

i^x  fagtct 

i^r  famt 

i^r  fiimct 

fie  fagtcn 

fie  fagtcn      . 

fie  famcn 

fie  fiimcn 

2.  The   pluperfect   subjunctive   and   the   two   conditionals,   of   both 
weak  and  strong  verbs,  are  made  like  those  of  fjaben,  [ein  and  iDcrbcn: 

PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Auxiliary  l^aben:  Auxiliary  fein: 

Igefe^cn  LQwommcn 

PRESENT   CONDITIONAL 

i^  tDiirbc  fagett  or  fel^en  or  folgcn  or  fommen 

PERFECT   CONDITIONAL 

Auxiliary  l^abcn:  Auxiliary  fcin: 

■gefagt  ^aben  or  _  w.«.i.-  f  Q^fo^S*  f""  or 


[gcfe^cn  gabcn  L 


gcfommen  fein 


3.  The  past  subjunctive  of  the  following  irregular  weak 
verbs  (Lesson  19.  ii)  and  modal  auxiharies  (Lesson  22)  is  hke 
the  past  indicative  with  umlaut  added  (cf.  l^atte  and  f)atte): 

PAST  IND.     PAST  SUBJ.       PAST  IND.     PAST  SUBJ. 

x^  brad^tc        i^  brcid^tc  td^  burftc  id)  biirftc 

ici)  bad^tc  id^  biid^tc  id^  fonntc  id^  fonntc 

id^  mod^tc  tc^  moc^tc 

td^  mufetc  id^  miifetc 

id^  JDufetc  id^  tniigtc 


LESSON  29.    II :  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE  167 

VOCABULARY 

bcr  §immel  btc  ^Intmel  sky,  heaven 

hit  @rbc  bie  (Srben  earth,  ground 

l^offen  l^offte  ge^offt  hope 

t)erbienen        t)erbiente        bcrbient  earn,  deserve 
augfef)en         fol^  au^         au^gefe^en  ZooA;,  appear 

ntad^tig  mighty,  powerful  je  e7;er,  a^  any  time 

ollmad^tig  almighty  felt,  with  dat.,  since 

moglic^  possible  fonft  else,  otherwise 

A.  1.  ilBcnn  ber  ^imtnct  nid^t  fo  fd^iDarg  augfal^c,  fo  gtngc  td^  gur 
©tabt  unb  befud^tc  unfcm  alten  OnfcL  2»  SBle  leld^t  fiinntc  cr  fid^ 
cttoag  ®elb  t)erblenen,  aber  er  Ift  gar  gu  {altogether  too)  faul.  3.  ®ott 
ift  ber  .^err  be^  ^irnmeB  unb  ber  (Srbe,  fonft  tncire  er  nid^t  aKmad^tig. 

4.  (Sr  fame  getDife,  tiJenn  er  nur  biirfte,  ober  njenn  e^  \^m  miiglid^  hjiire. 

5,  §atte  id^  bag  getrufet,  fo  XQ'axt  td^  bir  getrlfe  nicfit  gefolgt.  6.  SBenn 
ic^  nic^t  felt  SSod^en  franf  tm  ^ett  gelegen  t)atte,  fo  tDilrbe  id^  fd^on  lange 
gu  bir  gefommen  fein»  7,  ^ie  arme  5llte  t)offte  nod^  tmmer,  il^rcn 
lieben  @o]^n  tDiebergufefien.  8.  53rad^te  fie  bie  tinmen  jc^t,  fo  tDcirc 
eg  nod^  nic^t  gu  fpcit.  9,  SKenn  id^  tuirflid^  baran  bad^te,  nad^  ^eutfc^* 
lanb  lu  reifen,  fo  tDiirbe  id^  fd^on  lange  mit  bir  bariiber  gefprod^en  l^aben. 
10.  3Bie  lEiiitte  5^apoIeon  je  ein  fo  mad^tiger  ^aifer  loerben  fonnen, 
inare  er  nid^t  ein  fo  tapferer  (8olbat  getDefen?  11.  ^er  ^immet  ficl^t 
aug,  alg  tDenn  eg  balb  regnen  tDiirbe.  12.  SSie  l^citte  id^  mid^  bariiber 
gefreut!  5lber  bu  famft  nic^t,  unb  bag  tat  ung  alien  fe^r  leib.  13.  9}^6te 
er  nid^t  fd^on  ^ier  fein,  iDenn  er  tuirflid^  l^atte  fommen  mollen?  14.  ®u 
{)(itteft  bid^  nid^t  iiber  einen  folc^en  9}Jenfd^en  argem  follen.  15.  SBUfetc 
x6)  m6)\,  bag  unfer  alter  greunb  9D?el)er  tot  ift,  fo  tDiirbe  id^  fagen:  „^a 
ift  er!"  benn  jener  §err  bort  fie^t  gang  fo  aug,  iDie  er.  16.  SBarum 
ergci^Iteft  bu  il^m  bag  nid^t?  —  SBeil  er  eg  bod^  nid^t  geglaubt  ptte. 
17.  SSenn  er  mef)r  tjerbienen  \q\\1,  fo  mug  er  fleigiger  arbeiten. 

B.  18.  SSiire  bie  grau  nid^t  fd^on  fo  alt  unb  fd^tDad^,  fo  fonnte  fie 
fidf)  nod^  etn)ag  Derbienen;  aber  bag  ift  }e^t  nic^t  me^r  moglid^.  19.  SBenn 
id^  je  ge^offt  ^citte,  bid^  l^ier  gu  treffen,  fo  ^atte  id^  bir  aud^  erft  gefd^rieben. 
20.  3)er  alte  f)err  mug  reid^  fein,  fonft  fonnte  er  ung  nic^t  fo  Diel  ®elb 
fiir  bie  airmen  geben.  21.  (Sd^on  felt  geftern  morgen  l^at  ber  .^immel 
auggefe^en,  alg  toenn  eg  balb  regnen  toollte.    22.  gg  toiirbe  mid^  fel^r 


168  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

freuett,  §err  ©d^tnibt,  mcnn  (Bit  mld^  balb  einmal  befud^ten.  23.  fatten 
fie  ctmag  batjon  gefagt,  bag  fie  nic^t  tommen  mollten,  fo  miigte  ic^  e« 
aud^,  unb  bann  mare  id)  gu  ^aufc  geblieben.  24.  SScr  moc^te  (w;ou/ti 
^iA;e)  fo  et'jDag  unterne^men?  teiti  9}^enf(^,  glaube  id^.  25.  ^cid^te 
beine  fleine  (Sd^tDcfter  nic^t  immer  an  alle6,  fo  miirbeft  bu  grower  ^tiabe 
bag  Suc^  rt)ieber  t)crgeffen  l^aben.  T)u  folltcft  bid^  fd^amen  {be  ashamed). 
26.  $Sie  fonnte  @ott  allmad^tig  fein,  to  are  er  nid^t  aud^  §err  ber  @rbe, 
toie  beg  ^immelg?  27.  2Benn  id^  nur  aufftef)en  fonnte!  28.  ^rcic^te 
fie  mir  bod^  balb  ein  ©lag  faltcg  Staffer!  29.  SBamm  bitteft  bu  ^art 
nid^t,  ha^  er  fommt?  —  tarl?  ^er  fame  borf)  nid^t.  30.  ^Saf^ington 
unb  Lincoln  l^atten  mad^tiger  toerbcn  fonnen,  aU  hit  mad^tigften  ^onigc 
unb  ^aifer  ber  Srbe,  aber  fie  tociren  barum  nid)t  beriil^mter  getoorben. 
31.  SBenn  man  nur  nid^t  fo  biel  arbeiten  miifete,  fo  gefiele  eg  ung  alien 
l^ier  nod^  toiet  beffer.  32.  ^er  ptte  an  fo  ettoag  gebad^t?  33.  3ft  er 
tuirfiid^  in  ber  (Stabt,  fo  toirb  er  ung  aud^  getoife  befud^en. 

C.  1.  He   would   earn   more,   if   he   were   more   industrious. 

2.  She  would  look  better  if  she  had  not  been  ill  since  last  Monday. 

3.  Certainly,  had  it  at  any  time  been  possible,  I  should  have 
visited  him.  4.  If  his  sisters  had  not  hoped  to  find  him  here, 
they  would  not  have  looked  for  him  so  long.  5.  The  apple 
would  have  fallen  to  (auf)  the  ground,  if  the  little  [fellow]  had 
not  caught  it.  6.  She  is  ill,  else  she  would  have  been  able  to 
come.  7.  If  I  had  seen  how  black  the  sky  was,  I  should  not 
have  come.  8.  Man  often  calls  himself  the  mighty  lord  of  all 
the  (the  whole)  earth  and  forgets  that  God  is  almighty.  9.  How 
would  it  look  if  we  gave  her  nothing  at  all?  10.  Did  I  not 
know  it  and  had  I  not  seen  it  with  [my]  own  (eigen)  eyes,  I  should 
not  have  said  anything  about  it.  11.  You  would  have  been 
obHged  to  go  on  foot,  if  I  had  not  met  you.  12.  I  should  like 
(use  mdgen)  to  know  who  would  have  brought  the  books  if  your 
little  sister  had  not  thought  of  it  (baran).  13.  It  looks  as  if 
it  had  snowed.  14.  Should  you  have  come  if  you  had  been 
allowed  to?  15.  If  I  were  only  allowed  to  get  up!  16.  If  the 
doctor  would  only  allow  me  to  get  up !  —  But  you  are  so  weak, 
my  dear  friend,  that  you  would  not  be  able  to  stand  on  your 
(the)  feet.     17.  If  he  (demonstr.)  has  said  it,  it  is  surely  true. 

D.  18.  It  would  have  looked  better  if  you  had  followed  him 
at  once.^     19.  If  I  did  not  hope  to  find  my  friends  there,  I  should 


LESSON   30.    i:  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  169 

not  be  going  (use  l^ingel^en) .  20.  Had  it  been  possible,  he  would 
have  made  himself  king  (gum  ^onig),  but  he  was  not  powerful 
enough.  21.  If  you  have  not  seen  Henry  since  Monday,  as  you 
say,  then  (bann)  he  must  still  be  in  town.  22.  If  I  could  only 
see  the  sky,  I  should  know  whether  it  is  going  to  rain  (use  the 
future)  or  not.  23.  The  child  caught  the  apple,  else  it  would 
have  fallen  into-the  water.  24.  Do  we  not  all  beheve  that  God 
is  almighty?  But  we  often  act  (l^anbcln)  as  if  he  were  (it)  not. 
25.  Had  Mary  written  the  letter  yesterday,  she  would  not  be 
obliged  to  write  it  to-day.  26.  How  easily  could  such  a  rich 
man  help  this  poor  old  woman,  but  he  has  no  heart  for  the  poor. 
27.  Don't  say  that  you  would  have  come,  for  I  know  you  would 
not  have  been  able  to  come.  28.  If  I  thought  (benfcn)  so 
(ba^),  I  should  not  rejoice  over  it.  29.  You  ought  to  go  to  bed 
earlier  and  get  up  earlier,  and  then  you  would  be  able  to  work 
better.  30.  I  should  like  (gladly  or  very  much,  gem)  to  eat  an 
apple,  if  I  could  only  find  one.  31.  Could  you  translate  this 
into  German  (ln6  ^eutfc^e),  Charles,  if  you  had  to?  —  Cer- 
tainly, (that)  I  could.  32.  If  my  students  only  knew  more 
English  ((gngUfc§),  how  easily  they  would  then  learn  German 
(©cutfd^) ! 

1  at  once  gleid^. 

Lesson  30 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  INDIRECT  STATEMENT 

I 

Inflection  of  the  present,  perfect  and  future  subjunctive  of 
$aben  @ein  SKerben 

PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE 


id)  ^abc 

id)  fct 

id)  tDcrbc 

bu  l^abcft 

bu  feicft 

bu  mcrbeft 

cr  f)aht 

er  fel 

cr  tDcrbc 

h3lr  l^abcn 

iDir  fcictt 

mir  tpcrbctt 

i^x  l^abct 

i^r  fcict 

i^x  hjcrbct 

flc  I)abcn 

fie  feien 

^Ic  ircrben 

170  BEGINNING   GERMAN 


PERFECT   SUBJUNCTIVE 


id^  l^abe  gel^abt  id^  fcl  gcmcfcn  td^  fel  gctnorbcti 

bu  l^abeft  gcl^abt  bu  felcft  gehjcfcn       bu  fclcft  gemorbcn 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

FUTURE   SUBJUNCTIVE 

td^  tDcrbe  l^aben  id)  hjcrbe  fein  id^  tocrbe  iDcrbcn 

bu  tDcrbcft  l^aben         bu  tDcrbcft  fcln         bu  hjcrbcft  toerbcn 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

The  meanings  of  these  forms  vary  according  to  their  use  and  can  best  be 
learned  from  the  examples  given  below. 

Use.  The  subjunctive  forms  of  the  present,  perfect  and 
future  are  found  most  frequently  in  dependent  clauses  after 
words  of  saying,  reporting,  thinking,  inquiring,  doubting,  hoping, 
feeling  and  the  like.  Their  use  in  such  clauses  is  to  emphasize 
the  indirect  of  hearsay  character  of  that  which  is  said,  reported 
etc.,  whereas  the  indicative  tends  to  make  it  appear  as  actual. 

DIRECT,  OR  ORIGINAL,  STATEMENT  INDIRECT  STATEMENT 

A.  says  or  has  said  to  B. :  B.  says  or  reports  to  C. : 

1.  I  have  no  money  3d^  l^tibc  1^"  A.  says  that  he  has  no 
fcln  ®elb.  money    H.  fagt,  ha^  cr  feln  ®clb 

1^'  A.  said  that  he  had  no 
money    51.  fagte,  ha^  er  fein  ®elb 

2.  Who  has  been  here?  SSer  2^-  A.  asks  who  has  been  here 
tft  l^icr  gctocfcn?  51.  fragt,  tticr  l^ier  getrefen  fct. 

2^-  A.  asked  who  had  been 
here  51.  fragte,  tuer  f)ler  geh)efen  fei. 

3.  I  think  she  will  soon  get  well  3^'  A.  thinks  she  will  soon  get 
again  ^<^  glaube,  fie  tDirb  balb  well  again  51.  glaubt,  [ie  toerbe 
toiebcr  gefunb  n)erbcn.  balb  tuieber  gefunb  hjerben. 

3^-  A.  thought  she  would  soon 
get  well  again  51.  glaubte,  fie 
toerbe  balb  n)ieber  gefunb  tuerben. 


LESSON   30.    I :  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  171 

The  examples  given  thus  far  show  that  the  verb  of  the  direct,  or  origi- 
nal, statement,  if  changed  from  the  indicative  to  the  subjunctive,  re- 
mains in  the  same  tense;  and  this  is  the  rule,  whether  the  principal,  or 
governing,  verb  is  in  the  present,  as  in  1^  ([agt),  2*  (fragt)  and  3^  (glaubt), 
or  in  the  past,  as  in  1^  (fagtc),  2b  (fragte)  and  3^  (glaubte).  The  same  is 
true  if  instead  of  the  past  tense  (used  chiefly  in  narration  and  description) 
the  perfect  is  employed  (as  is  often  done  in  mere  reporting  and  in  every- 
day conversation) ;  e.  g.,  21.  f)at  gefragt,  tt)cr  l^icr  gctuefcn  fci.  But  observe 
the  modifications  of  this  rule  in  the  following  examples  (4-8) : 

4.  You  have  no  money,  B.  !Du  4*'  A.  says  I  have  no  money 
f)a\t  (or  ©ie  ^aben)  fein  (^elb,  ^.    51.  fagt,  i^  Ijatte  fein  ©elb. 

4^-  A.  said  I  had  no  money 
51.  fagte,  i^  ijUtt  fein  (^elb. 

5.  They  have  had  money  ®ie  5^'  A.  says  they  ha.ve  had 
f)ahtn  (J^ctb  gel^abt.  money    51.  fagt,  fie  fatten  ®elb 

gel^abt. 

5^-  A.  said  they  had  had  money 
51.  fagte,  fie  pttcn  ®elb  geliabt. 

6.  We  shall  he  there  in  season  6^"  A.  says  that  they  shall  he 
SSir  tDerben  belselten  ba  fein.  there  in  season    51.  fagt,  ba^  fie 

belgeiten  ba  fein  tourbcn. 

6^-  A.  said  that  they  should  he 
there  in  season  51.  fagte,  ba^  fie 
bei^eitett  ba  fein  tourbcn. 

Examples  4r-6  show  that  wherever  the  subjunctive  of  the  indirect 
statement  would  be  identical  in  form  with  the  indicative,  if  the  tense 
remained  the  same,  a  distinguishable  form  is  secured  by  changing  the 
tense  also,  namely:  from  the  present  to  the  past  (4),  from  the  perfect 
to  the  pluperfect  (5),  and  from  the  future  to  the  present  conditional  (6); 
hence  l^ottc  instead  of  l^abc  (4*,  4^),  l^atten  gcl^abt  instead  of  l^abcn  gel^abt 
(5%  5b),  and  fein  hjiirbcn  instead  of  fein  njerbcn  (6*,  6^). 

7.  They  grew  rich  (Sle  iDurben  7^-  A.  says  that  they  grew  rich 
reid^.  51.  fagt,  ba^  fie  reid^  gcttiorbcn  feicn. 

7b-  A.  said  that  they  grew  rich 
51.  fagte,  bag  fie  reid^  QCttJorbcn 
fcicn. 

This  example  shows  that  a  past  indicative  in  direct  statement  is 
changed  to  the  perfect  subjunctive  in  the  indirect,  for   the  subjunc- 


172  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

tive  of  the  past  might  be  misunderstood;  thus:  SI.  [agt  (or  fagtc),  ba^ 
fie  reic^  hjurbcn  might  mean  A.  says  (or  said)  that  they  would  grow  rich, 
and  might  thus  suggest  a  condition  (contrary  to  fact,  Lesson  29),  e.  g., 
if  they  worked  hard  or  the  Uke. 

8.  Stay  here!  ^letb  l^ier!  8^-  A.  says  I  shall  (am  to) 
(equivalent  to  !^u  follft  l^ier  stay  here  %.  fagt,  ic^  ftille  l^ier 
bleiben).  Uttbtn, 

S^-  A.  said  I  should  (was  to) 
stay  here  51.  fagtc,  id^  folic  l^icr 
l^leil^en. 

This  example  shows  that  the  imperative  in  direct  statement  is  expressed 
in  the  indirect  by  means  of  the  present  (or,  if  need  be,  the  past)  subjunc- 
tive of  foden  and  an  infinitive. 

These,  then,  are  the  principal  uses  of  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  state- 
ment. But  it  is  important  to  notice  that,  especially  after  a  principal, 
or  governing,  verb  in  the  present  tense,  the  indicative  (in  the  tense  of 
the  original  statement)  may  also  be  used.  Thus,  B.  may  say  to  C. :  21. 
foQt,  boB  er  fein  ®clb  l^at,  instead  of  l^abc  (1*).  In  that  case,  however, 
B.  does  not  indicate,  and  C.  does  not  feel,  so  clearly  that  the  statement  is 
made  on  another's,  namely  A.'s,  authority.  What  C.  then  hears  sounds 
like  a  direct  statement  of  an  actual,  or  at  least  accepted,  fact;  whereas 
if  B.  uses  the  subjunctive,  as  in  1*  above,  he  adds,  as  it  were,  "this  is 
what  A.  says,  you  know,"  and  thereby  declines  all  responsibility  for  the 
truth  or  correctness  of  A.'s  statement.  This  use  of  the  indicative  applies 
also  to  the  examples  2^-6^,  and  in  the  language  of  every  day  is  not  in- 
frequently found  after  a  governing  verb  in  the  past  tense. 

After  a  governing  verb  in  the  first  person  pf  the  present  tense,  as  in 
3  above:  id^  glaube,  [ic  irirb  balb  toiebcr  gcfunb  hjcrbcn,  only  the  indicative 
is  used,  for  here  the  speaker  is  not  reporting  the  words  of  another  person, 
but  is  stating  in  the  directest  way  possible  a  thought,  or  belief,  of  his 
own,  and  of  this  he  cannot  naturally  be  in  doubt.  —  Likewise,  the  in- 
dicative only  is  used  after  (any  tense  or  person  of)  verbs  denoting  cer- 
tainty, as  h)iffen  know,  bcmeifcn  prove,  fcl^cn  see,  iiberjeugt  fein  he  convinced, 
Har  fein  he  evident  etc.,  e.  g.,  [ic  toeife,  or  hju^tc,  'bo,'^  er  'bo.  toar. 

The  following  sentences  may  serve  for  further  practice,  either  before 
or  after  Part  II  of  this  Lesson;  they  should  be  translated  in  every  pos- 
sible form,  with  bu,  i^r  and  ©ic  for  you,  with  and  without  the  conjunc- 
tion h(x^,  and  with  the  indicative  where  it  is  admissible. 


LESSON   30.    I :  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE 


173 


DIRECT    STATEMENT 

A.  says  or  has  said  to  B.: 

1.  I  am  the  son  of  that  gentle- 
man and  the  girls  are  my  sisters. 


2.  I  think  C.  has  one  of  my  books. 


3.  I  shall  never  grow  rich. 


4.  You  are  my  best  friend,  B. 

5.  Has  she  been  here  and  has  she 
had  the  book  (already  fd^on)? 


6.  She  was  not  there. 


7.  We  have  never  had  a  horse. 


8.  Go,  but  don't  stay  too  long. 


9.  I  think  they  will  have  the 
money  to-morrow. 


INDIRECT    STATEMENT 

B.  says  or  reports  to  C. : 

!*•  A.  says  he  is  the  son  of  that 
gentleman  and  the  girls  are  his 
sisters. 

lb.  A.  said  he  was  the  son  of 
that  gentleman  and  the  girls  were 
his  sisters. 

2^-  A.  thinks  that  you  have  one 
of  his  books. 

2b.  A.  thought  that  you  had  one 
of  his  books. 

3*-  A.  says  he  shall  never  grow 
rich. 

3b.  A.  said  he  should  never  grow 
rich. 

4*-  A.  says  I  am  his  best  friend. 

4b.  A.  said  I  was  his  best  friend. 

5^-  A.  asks  whether  she  has 
been  here  and  whether  she  has  had 
the  book  (already  fd^on). 

5b.  A.  asked  whether  she  had 
been  here  and  whether  she  had 
had  the  book  (already  fd^on) . 

6*-  A.  says  that  she  was  not 
there. 

6b.  A.  said  that  she  was  not 
there. 

7**  A.  says  they  have  never  had 
a  horse. 

7b.  A.  said  that  they  had  never 
had  a  horse. 

8^-  A.  says  I  shall  go,  but  not 
stay  too  long. 

8b.  A.  said  I  should  go,  but  not 
stay  too  long. 

9*-  A.  thinks  they  will  have  the 
money  to-morrow. 

9b.  A.  thought  they  would  have 
the  money  to-morrow. 


174  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

10.  Has  C.  ever  Qc)  had  a  horse?         10^-  A.   asks   me   whether   you 

have  ever  had  a  horse. 

IQb-  A.  asked  me  whether  you 
had  ever  had  a  horse. 

II 

1.  The  present  subjunctive  of  all  verbs  (except  that  of  fein) 
is  made  by  adding  to  the  stem  of  the  infinitive  the  endings 
c,  eft,  c,  en,  et,  en: 


^  fage 

fomtne 

fe^e 

^elfe 

bilrfe 

iDlffe 

bu  fageft 

fommeft 

fe^eft 

^elfcft 

bilrfcft 

tDtffeft 

cr  fage 

fomme 

fe^e 

^etfe 

biirfe 

iDiffe 

tDir  fagcn 

fommctt 

fe^cn 

^elfen 

biirfcn 

h)lffcn 

i^r  faget 

fomtnet 

fe^et 

^elfet 

burfct 

tDlffct 

fie  fagcn 

fommen 

fe^en 

^clfen 

burfen 

hjiffcn 

Though  the -stems  of  verbs  like  fcl^cn,  l^clfen  (L.  20),  biirfen  (L.  22), 
tt)iffcii  (L.  23),  as  also  those  of  l^abcn  and  hjcrben,  undergo  a  change  in 
certain  forms  of  the  present  indicative,  they  remain  unchanged  through- 
out the  present  subjunctive. 

2.  The  perfect  and  future  subjunctive  are  made  like  those  of  l^abei^ 
fein  and  ttjcrbcn: 

PERFECT   SUBJUNCTIVE 

Auxiliary  ]§abcn  AuxiUary  fcfn 


td^  ftabc    ]     r    ^  i(^  fei 

etc.     J    9"^^'"  etc. 


gcfommcn  or 
gefolgt 


FUTURE    SUBJUNCTIVE 


x6)  iDcrbc 

bu  toerbcft 

etc. 


fagcn,  fommcn,  fcl^cn, 
btlrfcn,  miffeti,  etc. 


VOCABULARY 

bcr  Sfcl  bie  Sfel  donkey 

bcr  gad  bic  gcille   case,  fall 

ber  (Stein  bie  (Steinc  stone 

ble  SSelt  bie  2Beltcn  world 


LESSON   30.    II :  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  175 


fteffen 

fteirte 

gcfteitt               p^ace,  put 

tocrfcn 

toarf 

gemorfen            i/irou? 

gicl^cn 

m 

gcgogen              draw;,  'pull 

berftcl^en 

t)erftanb 

t)crftanben          understand 

fid^cr  safe,  sure 

bamit  m  order  i/iai,  so  i/iai 

fd^tDer  heavy,  difficult 

bc^^alb  for  that  reason,  therefore 

rcd^t  right 

iDol^er  whence,  from  where 

rcd^t  l^abcn  he  in 

the  right 

n)oi)m  whither,  where 

Note.  When  translating  the  following  German  exercises  into  Eng- 
lish, the  student  should  be  required  to  give  in  German  the  direct,  or 
original,  statement  for  every  indirect,  or  reported,  statement,  whether 
the  latter  be  in  the  subjunctive  or  in  the  indicative;  thus:  SlHc  mcincn,  c8 
h)erbe  morgen  regnen  —  what  did  these  persons  (Slttc)  say  or  think?  Evi- 
dently: „@^  toirb  morgen  regnen/'  which  might,  however,  have  also  been 
reported  in  the  indicative:  5ltte  meinen,  e«  toirb  morgen  regnen.  Again:  ©r 
glaubt,  'ta'i^  fein  SSater  [d^on  gefommen  fet  —  original  statement,  or  thought : 
„2)^ein  3Sater  ift  [d^on  gefommen"  or  „3<^  gtaubc,  mein  SSatcr  ift  [d^on  gefommen/' 
which  again  might  have  been  reported  in  the  indicative,  if  the  person 
reporting  it  had  not  for  some  reason  or  other  preferred  to  indicate  that 
he  declines  to  be  responsible  for  the  correctness  of  it.  —  A  correspond- 
ing analysis  is  suggested  for  the  translation  of  the  English  sentences 
into  German. 

A.  1.  !Der  33aucr  metnt,  feln  @fcl  fann  cincn  fo  fd^lDcrcn  SBagcn 
nid^t  ixt^tn,  unb  x6)  glaube,  er  ^at  rcd^t;  tt)ir  toolfcn  be^l^alb  licbcr  gu 
gu6  gcl^en.  2.  Qd^  fragtc,  ob  er  'iitn  (©tein  getuorfcn  l^abc,  ober  ber 
anbere  ^nabe.  3.  (Sbcn  l^abe  t(^  gel^ort,  bafe  ber  ^ontg  geftorben  fei.  — 
SBarum  fagen  (Sie:  geftorben  „fel"?  —  SBeil  id^  e^  t)on  jemanb  l^orte,  bcm 
eg  auc^  tiur  t>on  anbem  Seuten  auf  ber  (Strafe  ergiil^It  tDurbe,  unb  totxl 
\6)  e6  begf)alb  nod^  nid^t  fiir  n)a^r  l^alte.  —  5lber  lelber  (unfortunately) 
\\i  eg  tnal^r,  benn  id^  l^orte  t)or  einer  (Stunbe  t)on  ®raf  ©.,  ber  gerabc  aug 
bem  (Sd^loffe  fam,  'i^OiS^  ber  ^onig  n)irf(ld^  geftorben  tft,  unb  jtoar  fd^on 
l^eute  morgen  urn  ad^t  U()r.  4.  (gr  fagte,  luenn  bag  ber  gall  fet/  fo 
tniirben  (Sle  bort  t)ieMd^t  bor  3()ren  geinben  fic^er  fein.  5.  Unfere 
^inber  ^offen,  bafe  eg  balb  fd^neit.  6.  (Sie  meint,  id^  l^atte  ben  ^erm 
nid^t  red^t  berftanben,  njell  er  nur  ^eutfd^  fptad^/  aber  td^  ^aht  gang  gut 
tjerftanben,  hjag  er  gefagt  §at.  7.  5llg  bie  gran  ben  ©olbaten  fragtc, 
n)of)er  er  !omme  unb  too^in  er  ge^e,  antmortete  er  l^r,  bag  biirfe  er  nie= 
ntanb  fagen.    8.  (gg  glbt  2)^enfd^en,  loetd^e  glauben,  bafe  bie  SKelt  allc 


176  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

jtagc  fd^led^tcr  irerbc.  SBcnn  id^  ba6  aud^  gtaubtc,  fo  toiXxbt  id^  nid^t 
mcl^r  Icbcn  mfigen,  fonbem  t)iel  liebcr  fterben.  9.  5^ac^bem  cr  to 
dimmer  getreten  h)ar,  nal^m  cr  elnen  <Stu()l,  ftellte  i{)n  neben  bie  2:ur 
unb  Icgte  bann  ba^  ^uc^  barauf,  bamit  feln  grcunb  e^  fcinbe,^  fobalb  er 
nad)  §aufe  fame,^  10.  5)a6  bein  iBruber  red^t  ()atte,  ha\)on  toax  id^ 
fd^ott  lange  feft  uber^eugt.  11.  ©ing  er  tnirfUd^  mit  3^nen,  aU  ®te 
i^n  batcn?  —  SBa^?  @ie  fragcn  Jefet  nod^,  ob  er  n)irflid^  nttt  ntir 
gegangen  fei?  ©etDig  ging  er  tnlt.  12.  ©el^en  ®ie  fd^nett  gu  il^m,  unb 
fragen  (Bit  i^n,  ob  er  morgen  fommen  fonnc,  n)ir  iDoltten^  eine  (Stunbc 
jufammen  ftngen  unb  fpielen,  tt)enn  er  3^^^  baju  l^abe.*  13.  3n  bem 
fleinen  SBagen,  ber  Don  etnem  (Sfel  gejogen  tourbe,  fafeen  gtoet  ^naben. 
^a3  n)dren*  bic  ©o^ne  bc^  ©rafen,  fagte  ber  Tlaxm,  ber  un^  ben  ^erg 
l^inauffiil^rte,  er  l^atte*  fie  l^ier  fd^on  oft  gang  alleln  getroffen,  ol^ne  einen 
2)iener,  unb  er  tciirbe^  fie  je^t  fragen,  ir»o  i^r  5Sater  gu  finben  toare.^ 
14.  !Doftor  ©d^ntibt  meint,  fie  toare^  l^eute  nod^  nidf)t  tokhtx  beffer, 
toenn  fie  nid^t  fo  lange  ftiti  gu  {in)  iBett  getegen  ^atk,^  15.  Btti)  auf, 
bitte,  banxit  id^  ben  (Stul^l  toieber  an  ben  3:ifd^  ftellen  fann.^ 

B.  16.  SSenn  beine  (Sd^trefter  fagt>  ha^  ha^  n)ir!tid^  ber  ijalt  ift, 
fo  t)aht  id^  ben  §erm  nidf)t  red^t  berftanben.  17.  !Da6  einer  ber  beiben 
^naben  ben  ©tein  getoorfen  l^atte,  ba^  tDufete  fie  loo^I;  nur  fonnte  fie 
nid^t  mit  ©eloifel^eit  (certainty)  fagen,  ioeld^er  eS  getan  {)atte.  18.  (Snb* 
lid^  fagte  er,  (Sie  l^dtten  red^t,  unb  fobalb  er  ioieber  gefunb  (well)  fei/ 
molle  er  ^l^nen  bag  iBud^,  loeld^e^  Bk  fo  lange  l^ier  gu  §aufe  gefud^t 
l^aben/  felbft  ioieberbringen.  19.  3c^  ^cibe  ge^ort,  @ie  feien  franf 
getoefen;  ift  bag  toal^r?  —  3a,  aber  id^  bin  fd^on  feit  einer  3Bod^e  n)ieber 
beffer.  —  ^ag  freut  mid^.  20.  !Der  ^erg  toar  fe^r  l^od^  unb  ber  SSeg 
fd^led^t,  begl)alb  bat  ung  ber  33auer,  eine  B^^tlang  (awhile)  gu  gufe  gu 
ge^en,  bamit  ber  arme  fleine  Sfel  ben  fd^toeren  SBagen  beffer  gielien  fonne.^ 
21,  ^ann  ftanb  id^  t)on  meinem  Btu^t  auf,  ftellte  i^n  n)ieber  ang  gen= 
fter,  too  er  geftanben  l^atte,  unb  toollte  nad^  §aufe,  aber  ber  5llte  bat 
mid^,  nod^  eine  ©tunbe  bei  il)m  gu  bleiben,  eg  fei^  noc^  frill)  am  2^age,  er 
toerbe^  mid^  fid^er  fo  balb  nic^t  toieberfel^en,  n)ol)in  id^  benn  toolle,^  ob  id^ 
nid^t  ein  toenig  me^r  3^^^  l^atte^  fiir  einen  alten  Tlann,  ber  fo  gang  allein 
iool^ne^  unb  oon  einem  (gnbe  beg  Qa^reg  big  gum  anbern  nid^tg  tjon 
©otteg  fd^oner  iBelt  l^ore^  ober  felie.^  5llfo  blieb  id^  il)m  gu  Siebe  (to 
please  him)  nod^  eine  ©tunbe.  22.  3d^  fragte  i^n,  too^er  bie  @ol^ 
baten  fommen  loiirben,  aber  er  fagte,  bag  miffe  er  nid^t.  23.  T)cx 
©d^neiber  meinte,  bie  3^iten  toiiren^  gtoar  fd^led^t,  aber  cr  ^atte^  fd^on 


LESSON   30.    II :  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  177 

fd^tcd^tcre  Ta^t  gefcl^cn  unb  hjiirbe^  and)  Je^t  tDol^t  nod^  genug  fur  Jrau 
unb  ^inber  t)erbienen,  hjenn  cr  nur  fleifeig  arbeitcte.^  24,  ^d^  bin  fcft 
iibergcugt,  bag  fie  fid^  iibcr  i^n  gefreut  l^citte,^  toinn  fie  bei  un§  getDefcn 
tccire/  aber  id^  meife  aud^  gang  getDife,  bag  fie  nur  nid^t  l^at  fommen  n)olIen, 
Ineil  fie  big  je^t  imnter  gegtaubt  l^at,  er  fei  nod^  fo  faut,  mie  er  fritter 
n)ar/  h3ag  nid^t  ber  gall  ift.^  25,  ®ag^  e6  i^nt  jei^t,  bamit  er  e^  tod^,^ 
l^orft  bu? 

1  The  verb  of  a  clause  dependent  upon  a  subjunctive  clause  is  commonly 
attracted  into  that  mood,  unless  it  states  something  which  the  speaker  asserts 
on  his  own  authority  as  a  fact.  —  2  The  subjunctive  is  also  common  in  clauses 
of  purpose  when  this  is  looked  upon  as  something  that  is  still  uncertain  or 
doubtful,  but  if  the  purpose  approaches  in  degree  of  likelihood  a  result  that 
is  sure  to  follow,  the  indicative  is  used,  —  3  Subjunctive  depending  on  an 
implied  word  of  saying  or  inquiring.  —  *  Here  we  should  expect  the  present, 
perfect  and  future  subjunctives,  which,  in  these  persons,  would  be  perfectly 
distinguishable  from  the  corresponding  indicative  forms;  but  in  the  spoken 
language,  especially  of  Northern  Germany,  as  also  sometimes  in  careful 
writers,  we  find  the  other  tenses  instead ;  see  Part  I,  the  remarks  on  Examples 
1-3  and  4-6.  — «  Here  the  past  and  pluperfect  subjunctives  must  be  used, 
because,  standing  in  a  condition  contrary  to  fact  (Lesson  29),  they  would 
also  be  used  in  the  direct  statement. 

C.  1.  I  ask  if  you  have  given  the  donkey  some  water  to  drink. 
2.  He  says  it  is  very  difficult  to  learn  German,  but  I  don't  be- 
lieve that.  3.  We  asked  her  if  she  had  placed  chairs  enough 
at  (an)  the  table.  4.  I  don't  know  who  threw  (has  thrown)  the 
stone;  hence  don't  ask  me.  5.  After  he  had  told  us  whence  he 
came,  we  also  wanted  to  know  whither  he  was  going,  but  that 
he  was  not  allowed  to  tell  us.  6.  At  last  he  saw  that  it  was 
not  the  case  and  that  I  was  in  the  right.  7.  I  am  convinced 
that  you  would  not  have  understood  her  rightly,  if  she  had  spoken 
German.  8.  Poor  man!  he  believes  even  now  (nod^  immcr)  that 
the  world  is  growing  worse  from  day  to  day.  9.  When  we  came 
to  (an)  the  foot  of  the  mountain,  we  thought  the  donkey  could 
draw  the  carriage  no  longer,  but  we  soon  found  that  the  little 
beast  was  stronger  than  many  a  big  horse.  10.  The  poor  tailor 
said  that  he  had  come  to  (in)  this  country  in  order  that  he  might 
be  safe  from  (t)or  with  dat.)  his  enemies,  who  had  tried  to  kill 
him.  11.  Mrs.  Smith  believes  that  her  son  will  never  learn 
German,  because  he  does  not  work.  12.  Then  he  inquired 
whom  I  had  met  in  town,  whether  you  (@ie)  would  come  soon, 


178  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

and  when  you  were  going  (use  rei[en)  to  England.  13.  Charles 
wants  to  know  whether  you  (have)  understood  all  she  said.  — 
Tell  him  that  I  really  did  not  understand  one  word  of  it.  14.  Did 
she  not  say  she  was  very  sorry  that  she  had  forgotten  the  book? 
—  Yes,  and  she  should  bring  it  to  you  ©l^nen)  as  soon  as  you 
came  back. 

D.  15.  Don't  ask  me  where  he  lives,  for  I  hardly  know  him. 
16.  In  the  mountains,  he  says,  one  rides  more  safely  on  donkeys 
than  on  horses,  and  I  believe  he  is  right.  17.  If  you  think  that's 
the  case,  you  surely  did  not  understand  (use  the  perf.)  what  he 
said.  18.  It  is  a  question  (it  asks  itself)  whether  the  world  is 
getting  better  or  worse.  19.  Nobody  believed  that  the  boy 
could  throw  the  heavy  stone  so  far,  until  he  showed  us  that  he 
could  really  [do]  it.  20.  I  know  that  the  donkey  would  not  have 
been  able  to  draw  the  carriage  with  both  men  in  it,  if  we  had  not 
begged  them  to  go  on  foot.  21.  Place  your  chair  nearer  to  (an) 
the  table  so  that  you  can  write  better.  22.  We  wanted  to  know 
where  the  poor  woman  had  come  from  and  where  she  was  going 
to;  therefore  we  sent  (use  l^lnfc^itfcn)  Henry  that  he  might  ask 
her,  but  when  he  came  back  he  said  that  she  spoke  only  German 
and  that  he  had  not  understood  all  she  said.  23.  When  I  asked 
her  if  the  professor  had  come,  she  answered  that  he  was  up- 
stairs in  Charles's  room.  24.  If  the  books  had  not  been  so  heavy 
I  should  have  carried  them  myself.  25.  We  always  lioped  that 
you  would  write  to  us,  for  we  did  not  know  that  you  were  so  ill. 


SPECIAL  EXERCISES 

(OPTIONAL) 

Most  of  these  exercises  are  intended  to  furnish  practice  in  supplying  end- 
ings, prefixes,  suffixes,  single  words  and  phrases  or  single  characteristic 
letters,  needed  to  complete  easy  sentences.  As  such  practice  is  highly 
valued  by  some  teachers,  but  not  often  resorted  to  by  others,  the  exercises 
have  been  placed  where  they  can  be  used  or  omitted  at  will.  Their  value,  in 
my  opinion,  consists  in  fixing  the  student's  attention  upon  the  varying  forms 
of  words,  since,  for  the  time  being,  he  is  almost  entirely  relieved  of  questions 
concerning  the  choice,  as  well  as  the  order,  of  words.  The  exercises  on  the  last 
five  or  six  Lessons,  however,  involve  something  hke  composition,  or  at  least  the 
construction  of  easy  sentences  upon  given  models.  At  the  end,  there  is  added 
a  section  which  calls  exclusively  for  the  correction  of  mistakes  in  the  order  of 
words,  in  the  use  of  cases,  and  in  some  other  elementary  matters  of  form. 

Chiefly  on  Lessons  1-7 

L  eud^-  ^art  e6  jcfet?  — 3a,  abcr  cr  finb-  e«  nic^t.  2.  SSo 
tpiel-  ii)v  geftem?  — 3Sir  fpict-  in  Onfel-  ©arten.  —  3n  tdd(i)- 
©arten?  Onfel  ^at  gtDel  gardens.  —  3ti  b-  ©arten  ba  Winter  b- 
2Balb-»  3.  ^ief-  53aum  h)lrb  fd^on  grlin,  aber  jcn-  trees  noc^ 
mc^t»  4.  SSie  lang-  lag-  (Sie  franf,  §err  (Sd^tnibt?  —  9^ur  funf 
2:ag-,  5.  ^-  *i|3fcrb-  lief-  gegeu  ein-  33aum  utib  pet-.  6.  His 
greunb  tarn  au^  b-  ©tabt.  7.  @r  geig-  me  je^t  fein-  friends, 
tddd)-  in  b-  SSagen  fafe-.  8.  Qn  ii)x~  3i"^^cr  stood  ein  3:if(^, 
unb  auf  b-  table  lag  b-  53ud^,  tDeld^-  bu  geftem  fuc^-.  9.  SSo  l^ab- 
t^r  ^inb-  eu(e)r-  books?  —  Unf(e)r-  books  lieg-  nod^  unter  b- 
trees  in-the  garden.  10.  3e^t  fui^r-  b-  Wann  b-  "ipferb  an 
b-  SBaffer  unb  bann  t)or  b-  house.  11.  3d^  ging  ntit  mein- 
§unb-  liber  b-  gelb.  12.  ©old^-  trees  fal^-  mir  aud^  in  b-  towns, 
burc^  totld)-  \div  tarn-.  13.  SSenn  her  33ruber  your  greunb  ift, 
fo  ift  er  auc^  our  greunb.  14.  3d^  fal^,  bafe  er  geftem  abenb  mit 
b-  ^onig  fprad^,  aber  ic^  l^or-  nid^t,  tna^  fie  fag-.  15.  (Sie  fe^tc 
fid^  an  jen-  3:ifd^  unb  arbeit-.  16.  SSarum  fomm-  i^r  l^eute  o^^ne 
your  friends?  —  SSeil  our  friends  nid^t  me^r  ^ier  finb.     17.  Onfel 

179 


180  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

^art  ift  b-  33rubcr  melti-  33ater-  utib  beln-  a^hitter^  18»  ®ab  fie 
b-  tinbc  nid^t  eiti-  5Ipfel?  —  9lein,  benn  fie  !^at-  felbft  fein-  apples 
me^r,  19.  5ln  ien-  5lbcnb  H)ar  e^  fe^r  fait.  20.  Qa,  c«  glb- 
fol(^-  SSogel,  aber  nid^t  f)ier,  h)0  h)lr  h)ol)n-  21.  Unter  b-  3Bagen, 
hjctd^-  auf  b-  2Bcg-  stood,  lag-  jmel  dogs.  22.  2)-  grau  irol^n- 
je^t  bel  i^r-  ^^oc^ter  SJJarie  unb  nid^t  tnei^r  bet  if)r-  (So()ii-  ^arl.  — 
^at  fie  tild^t  iTod  daughters?  —  3a,  unb  aud^  jtocl  sons.  23.  §6r- 
bu  nid^t,  5lnna,  UdIc  fd^on  b-  birds  in  b-  trees  [Ing-?  24.  3n 
ien-  Qal^re  gab  e^  fein-  apples.  25.  3^eb-  9}?ontag  arbeitet  er  filr 
ein-  friend  in  b-  (Stabt.  26.  3d^  glaub-  nid^t,  ba^  er  mel^r  aU 
jtDei  houses  l^at,  bief-  l^ier  unb  Jen-  am  SSeg-  nad^  b-  ^orf-. 
27.  S)-  9lad^t  mar  fo  bunfel,  bag  er  into-the  Gaffer  fiel.  28.  (gr 
bUeb  nur  cin-  day,  .aber  gtoei  nights  bei  fein-  friends.  29.  (Sold^- 
men  l^ab-  fein-  enemies.  30.  '¥tdn-  gti^-  finb  fait  unb  mein- 
hands  aud^.  31.  3tt  {en-  ^riege  fiel-  aud^  ^tDei  t>on  b-  ^aifer- 
sons.  32.  tlber  me  tnol^n-  je^t  grau  (S.  mit  i^r-  bier  daughters. 
33.  (Sr  nal^m  ein-  <Stul)l  unb  fe^-  fid^  an  b-  table,  id^  aber  sat  an 
b-  window.  *  34.  3Bir  fu^r-  geftern  gu-  (Stabt,  aber  nid^t  burd^  b- 
iESalb,  benn  in-the  forest  finb  b-  SSeg-  nid^t  gut.  35.  3d^  ^iir- 
geftem,  bag  ®ie  mit  your  53ruber-  horses  nad^  b-  @tabt  ful^r-. 

Chiefly  on  Lessons  8-15 

1.  !D-  9)^abd^en  n)ar  fo  fd^iin  h)ie  ein-^^onigin.  2.  53or  unf(e)r- 
house  stood  ein  grog-  alt-  i8aum,  unter  b-  n)ir  ^nabe-  oft  fpiel-. 
3. 3eb-  SDIorgen  unb  jeb-  5lbenb  ging-  toir  mit  them  auf  b-  anber- 
©eite  b-  gluff-,  n)0  b-  high  trees  stand.  4.  'jfflan  fii^rte  ung 
burd^  mel^rer-  fel^r  bunf(e)l-  unb  furg-  'Btxa^t-,  t)or  whose  (b-) 
houses  nur  alt-,  franf-  men  and  women  fag-  ober  flein-  children 
fpiel-  5.  (Snblid^  fomm-  bu,  lieb-  greunb!  6.  3n-  ©ommer  finb 
b-  days  longer  al^  in-  SSinter.  7.  3eb-  gut-  book  ift  a  good 
friend.  8.  ^-  ein-  ^leib  lag  auf  jen-  (2tu^l-  ha  an-  genfter,  aber 
b-  anber-  fanb  ic^  nid^t.  9.  mt  whose  geber  fc^reib-  5lnna?  — 
mit  b-  meinig-,  b-  i^rig-  ift  ^u  alt  unb  fd^led^t.  10.  ^a«  ift  b- 
highest  33erg  b-  ganj-  ^anb-,  aber  in  anber-  countries  gib-  e^  nod^ 
higher  mountains.  11.  ^Diejenig-  apples,  meld^-  nod^  gut  h3ar-, 
trug-  fie  into-the  house.  12.  In-the  month  of  April  loar  e6  t)iel 
warmer  al^  in-  SO^ai  (May).     13.  2)-  beib-  men  tranf-  feb-  stt)ei 


SPECIAL   EXERCISES    (OPTIONAL)  181 

glasses  of  wine.  14.  3n  b-  grog-  cities  finb-  man  oft  me^r  arm- 
I^eutc  aU  in  b-  flein-  villages.  15.  5lm  next  morning  ftarb  bic 
gut-  mt-  16.  SBeld^-  t)on  bicf-  beib-  boys  ift  b-  older?  —  ®ief-, 
aber  jen-  tft  b-  ftarf-  17.  ^ieienlg-  9i)^cnfd^-,  b-  b-  meift-  ®elb 
l^ab-,  finb  nid^t  tmmer  b-  gliicflic^ft-  18.  ^en-  §crr-  finb  SDcutfd^-. 
19.  Tldn-  younger  ©d^tuefter  nnb  id^  fd^reib-  did-  lang-  iBricf- 
an  unf(e)r-  (Sltern.  20.  3n  fein-  ^orf-  finb-  8ie  ein-  beff-  ©d^ulc, 
al^  in  unf(e)r-.  21.  3Son  b-  ^ranf-  ftarb-  Diet-  22.  ^a^  9f^eu- 
ift  nic^t  immer  better  than  the  old.  23.  i8atb  fam  Ji^ci^tein  Tlaxk 
aug  b-  ©arten  unb  l^at-  allerlei  fd^on-  flowers  in  b-  §anb. 
24.  ®ott  ift  b-  3Sater  nnb  greunb  cin-  jeb-  Tltn\(i)-,  ob  cr  arm  ift 
ober  reid^.  25.  3}?e^rer-  Don  b-  ^lein-  bitt-  ^crr-  nnb  gran  ^. 
je^t,  bag  fie  nod^  bei  nn6  bleib-.  26.  §ab-  @ie  fein  l^eiger-  iS5affer? 
27.  3n-  (Sommer  finb  b-  days  an-  liingft-.  28.  5lnf  berfelb-  Seitc 
b-  river  fte^-  einig-  fCein-  houses,  in  b-  arm-  i^eute  n)ot)n-. 
29.  SBarum  gab-  (Sie  b-  arm-  gran  nid^t  ettoa^  ftein-  @elb?  — 
SSeit  id^  fein-  bei  me  l^at-.  30.  3ln-  ©onntag  gel^-  'mix  immer 
ad-  3u-  ^ird^e.  31.  ^a6  toar  berfelb-  alt-  §err,  todd)-  toir  geftem 
bei  unf(e)r-  £)ntd  fal^-.  32.  ®-  ein-  bief-  itinger-  brothers 
arbeitete  lang-  3eit  fur  b-  alteft-.  33.  !Da§  ift  gran  ©d^mibt- 
flein-  ©arten,  il^r  grower-  ©arten  lieg-  nnten  an-  gng-  b-  iBerg- 
unb  ift  nod^  grog-  aU  unf(e)r-.  34.  9)?an  fag-,  bag  b~  ®raf- 
@c^log  ein-  b-  fd^onft-  in-  ganj-  !Banb-  ift.  35.  @ie  gab  them 
alt-  m-  fie  ]^at-.  36.  ^arauf  faufte  er  fein-  <So]^n-  ein  (Btixd  gut- 
?anb-,  "mdi^-  gtDifd^en  b-  village  unb  b-  city  tag,  unb  auf  bief- 
baute  (built)  er  him  aud^  ein  neu-  ^au^.  37.  (gr  fd^rieb  me  mand^ 
tang-  iBrief,  aber  Don  me  befam  (received)  er  immer  nur  short 
ones.    38.  !Da  stands  b-  horse.    SSetd^  ein  fd^on-  2:ier  e^  ift! 

Chiefly  on  Lessons  16-23 

1.  (Sin-  XaQ-  in-  9D?onat  Hprit  tioax  b-  reid^-  ®raf  in  b-  town 
-iDef-  unb  ^at-  fid^  ein  neu-  horse  -fauf-,  benn  his  old  one  loar  Dor 

met)rer-  ^od^e ftorb-.    2.  ©ie  finb  an-  fpdteft fomm-,  §err 

@.  3.  35on  b-  (Sd^iff-  bi^  gn-  <Sc^toff-  finb  mir  ein-  gang-  (btunbc 
-fa^r-.  4.  !D-  U^r  l^at-  fd^on  ge^n  -fd^tag-,  aber  b-  faut-  boys 
tag-  nod^  in-  33ett.  5.  (ginb  ©ie  nid^t  ^err-  ^rofeffor  ©d^mibt- 
^f^ad^bar?    6.  2ln-  (Snbe  of  the  same  year  toar-  mein-  Singe-  fo 


182  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

fd^mad^  -tDorb-,  ha^  ic^  gu  ^oftor  5^.  glttg.  7.  (S^  ftanb-  nur  gtuet 
58ctt-  in  b-  grofe-  3i^i^^t,  unb  feln-  t)on  beib-  mar  gro^  genug  fiir 
me.     8.  ^-    alt-   Wiener    faun-    bett    ®oIbat-   auc^    nlc^t   me^r. 

9.  grau  2)oftor  ©c^tnibt-  9^ad^bar-  flnb  l^eute  nad^  Sonboti  -reif-. 

10.  .^enn-  bu  b-  Kein-  iBllb,  h)etd^-  id^  him  morgen  fd^idf-  h3erb-?  — 
5^cin,  id^  l^ab-  it  nod^  nid^t  -fel^-.  11.  5^ad^bem  rt)ir  gmei  gang- 
©tnnbe — tDart-  ^at-,  ging-  h)ir  all-  mieber  auf  b-  @c^iff  unb  ful^r- 
fd^nett  nad^  b-  town.  12.  ^ontm-  b-  ^err-  morgen  iDieber,  fo 
tDcrb-  id^  fie  bitt-,  fid^  an  @ie  gu  tuenb-,  benn  @ie  fenn-  fie  beff- 
aU  id^.  13.  (g^  n)ar  ein  grofe-  geuer,  aU  unfer-  ^ird^e  brann-. 
14.  SB-  ]^ab-  <Sie  eben  -ruf-,  gran  (Sd^mibt,  5lnna  ober  mid^?— - 
3d^  {)ab-  eud^  beib-  -ruf-.  15.  2B-  bie  53ilb-  -brad^-  bat,  b- 
l^ab-  h)ir  her  nid^t  -fag-.  16.  ^-  U^r-  auf  b-  (Sd^Ioff-  unb  auf 
b-  £ird^c  fd^Iug-  eben  gtDolf,  ba  l^or-  id^  mel^rer-  J^eute  burd^  b- 
©trage-  renn-  unb  geuer!  ruf-.  17.  3c^  nenn-  ba^  ein-  leid^t- 
SBagen.  18.  !D-  ^onig  rief  ein-  b-  beib-  ©olbat-  gu  fid^,  gab 
him  b-  iBrie^  unb  f-nbte  him  bamit  auf  b-  ©d^Iog  gu-  ®raf-. 
19.  SB-nn  shall  bu  mir  fd^reib-  ob  bu  f-mnrft?  —  3d^  shall  you 
in  einig-  2:ag-  fd^reib-.  20.  @ie  f-gt,  ha^  fie  her  griin-  ^leib 
fd^on  ein  gang-  3a^r  tr-gt.  21.  g-ngft  bu  b-  2lpfet,  fo  ift  it  bein, 
^arl.  22.  iSSer  f-I)rt  ba?  — 3c^  gl-be,  e^  finb  ^oftor  2)^et}er- 
daughters.  — ■  3^ein,   bie  finb   e^  nid^t,   b-   f-]^ren   nid^t   fo    fd^nelL 

23.  ®d^I-gft  bu  mein-  §unb,  bu  gro^-  ^nabe,  fo  fd^I-ge  id^  bid^. 

24.  ^Barum  I-fft  bu  nid^t  ttm^  fd^nell-,  ^arl?  e-^t  bu  nic^t,  tvit 
fd^nett  b-  anber-  ^nabe-  I-fen?  @^  ift  b-  :^-d^fte  S^it,  bafe  bu  in 
b-  (Sd^ule  f-mmft.  25.  2S-nn  cr  nod^  fr-nfer  tDirb,  al^  er  jefet  ift, 
unb  nj-nn  er  bief-  92ad^t  n)ieber  fo  fd^Ied^t  fd^I-ft,  fo  ^-^^b  il^n  33ater 
bitt-,  bag  er  b-  !Doftor  fomm-  I-gt.  26.  3Son  mem  I-fet  il^r  eur- 
dl-dt  mad^-?    27.  3efet  takes   fie   b-   geber   unb    fc^reib-   -mit, 

28.  ^-  SD^enfd^  ig-  um  -  leb-,  aber  er  leb-  nid^t  nur  um  -  eff-. 

29.  §-Ifft  bu  mir  ^eute,  fo  help  I  you  to-morrow.  30.  @^  ftanb- 
gtoei  (Bt-^t  in  b-  gr-feeren  3^^^^^*  31.  9^ad^bem  er  b-  ein- 
2:ifd^  an-  genfter  -fe^-  l^at-,  I-gte  er  b-  brei  apples  -auf.  32.  @rft 
fd^reib-  Bit  your  ^rief-,  bann  ge^ —  gu  S^x-  greunbe,  l^or-  @ie? 
—  ^a,  id^  ^or-  h)ag  Bit  fag-  33.  ©pr-d^t  nid^t  fo  laut,  ^inb- 
B-^t  i^x  nid^t,  bag  your  father  is  reading?  34.  58itt-  eat 
bief-  5lpfel  nid^t,  it  is  fd^on  fd^Ied^t,  ic^  geb-  bir  ein-  better  one. 
35.  2:r-tt  ni(^t  auf  mein-  ^l-men,  ^arl.    36,  ®ib  me  fd^nell  em 


SPECIAL   EXERCISES    (OPTIONAL)  183 

glass  of  water,  please.  37.  (^ti)  unb  speak  with  them.  38.  .^eiti 
eb(e)t-  2)?enfc^  breaks  his  SSort.  39.  ®ott  ^-Ift  nur  ben-  b-  fid^ 
felber  1^-Ifen.  40.  SSelc^  fc^on-  flowers  il^r  mir  geftern  -brad^-  f)ah-l 
3d^  banf-  eud^  fetjr  -fur,  Ileb-  ^inb-.  41.  „Be  ftill,  bu  mdn-/' 
fagte  er  gu  his  daughter.  42.  „(5ud^-  beln-  §ut,  bu  ^lein-/'  fagtc 
b-  33ater  gu  b-  ^nabe-,  al^  bief-  o^ne  §ut  au^  b-  house  fam. 
43.  9^ie  ]^ab-  tolr  fd^oner-  @d^I-ffer  -fe^-  al^  am  9^^ein.  44.  t-nnft 
bu  fd^on  lef-,  ^arl?  — 3a,  aber  id^  f-nn  nod^  nid^t  fd^reib-  45.  HB 
id^    geftern    unfr-    apples    in-    §aug    bring-    m-Kte,    l^at-    unfr- 

neighbors  fie  all fto^l-.    46.  ^u  njirft  bir  ein-  neu-  ^ut  fauf- 

m-ffen,  benn  bein  alt-  ift  fc^on  gu  fd^led^t,  ben  b-rfft  bu  nid^t  me^r 
trag-.  47.  Sie  oft  liab-  id^  gu  end^  fomm-  m-llen,  lieb-  greunb-/ 
aber  id^  l^ab-  nie  geb-rft.  48.  3n  ein-  fo  fd^led^t-  alt-  ^agen  hjirb 
niemanb  fai^r-  n)-llen.  49.  @ie  l^at  b-  ®laf-  nid^t  finb-  f-nnen. 
50.  @ie  Tn-(^ten  b-  §err-  ni(^t  urn  ®elb  bitt-,  meil  fie  i^n  nid^t 
f-nnten.  51.  SD^-gt  i^r  je^t  fd^on  toieber  nad^  ^auf-  fal^r-,  tinb-? 
^-nnt  il^r  nid^t  n)art-,  bi^  your  father  fomm-?  52.  SSenn  your 
©c^mefter  fag-,  ha^  bu  gu  her  fomm-  f-llft,  fo  go.  53.  9^eulid^ 
f-llte  §einrid^  fein-  flein-  ©d^toefter  l^elf-,  nnb  er  m-llte  e6  nid^t, 
aber  enblic^  m-fete  er  e^  boc^.  54.  iJSer  nid^t  arbeit-  m-g  ober  nid^t 
to-ll,  ber  f-ll  aud^  nic^t  eff-.  55.  !Du  mein-,  fie  ^at  e6  nic^t  tu- 
to-llen,  aber  id^  meife,  bafe  fie  e^  nid^t  ^at  tu-  b-rfen.  56.  3d^ 
know,  ha^  b-  <Sd^uler  in  bief-  ©d^ule  ein-  neu-  Se^rer  l^ab-,  aber 
id^  f-nne  il^n  nod^  nid^t.  57.  ®-]^ft  bu  nic^t  aud^  an-  liebft-  gu 
gufe?  —  5^ein,  ic^  reit-  lieb-  58.  @r  §at  e^  gem  done.  59.  iSSig- 
i^r  nid^t,  n)0  your  father  gu  finb-  ift?  —  5^ein,  toir  miff-  nid^t,  too 
er  ift,  aber  ^arl  io-fe  ee  t)ielleid^t.  60.  ^-  ^at  er  geftem  b-  ®elb 
-geb-,  eud^  beib-?  —  9^ein,  toir  toiff-  e^  beib-  nid^t. 

Chiefly  on  Lessons  24-30 

1.  (Sr  l^at  me  t)erfprod^-,  me  morgen  gu  befud^-,  aber  ob  er  e^ 
tu-  will,  know  id^  nic^t.  2.  ^Da  gefd^a^  e^  ein-  3:ag-,  bafe  b- 
^onig  unb  b-  queen  nic^t  gu  ^auf-  toaxtn  unb  b-  -^onig^tod^ter  all 
alone  burc^  b-  t)iel-  3^^i^si^  b-  grofe-  ©c^loff-  ging.  3.  ^f^iemanb 
f-nn  htn  ^inb-  fd^oner-  ©efd^id^te-  erga^l-,  aU  our  alt-  Onfcl 
gn^.  4.  „(Srga]^l-  me  jefet,  tioa^  -fd^el)-  ift,"  fagte  er  gu  bem  ^lein-. 
5lber  b-  ^lein-  had  fo  fd^nell  -lauf-,  ha^  er  faum  fpred^-  f-nntc. 


184  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

5.  SB-nn  finb  (Sic  l^eutc  morgcn  aufgctrad^t?  —  3d^  know  nid^t, 
h)-nn  id^  aufgett>ac^t  -.  6.  „§eute/'  fagte  b-  2t^xtx'm,  „fang-  h)ir  ein 
ncu-  ^ud)  an."  Our  school  begins  at  nine  o'clock.  7.  „Maxl, 
bu  tt)-rft  l^erunterfall-!"  rief  b-  9D?utter,  al^  fie  b-  ^mht-  oben 
in^  53auTn-  fife-  fa^.  "Don't  fall  down,  my  little  [fellow]!"  he 
cried.  8.  SSir  bat-  him  fc^nelt  l^inaufgugel^en.  *'I  will  go  up 
quickly,"  he  answered.  9.  ^Bii^rcnb  b-  anbcr-  laf-,  fu^r  er  fort 
gu  fd^reib-.  While  he  goes  on  writing,  she  reads.  10.  SSer  mad^tc 
b-  Xux  auf,  er  ober  fie?  I  did  not  see  who  opened  the  door. 
11.  (Sg  l^at  nod^  nid^t  aufgel^ort  gu  regnen.  When  it  stops  raining, 
(fo)  we  shall  go  home.  12.  2a^  un6  beib-  books  liberfet'gen.  One 
is  already  translated,  and  the  other  is  too  difficult  to  translate. 
13.  !5)-  ©olbat-  brad^-  b-  arm-  ^auer  um.  The  peasants  hjollten 
einige  Don  unf(e)r-  ©otbat-  murder.  14.  3d^  ioieberlfiole  e^:  tiotnn 
bu  mid^  n)ieber  unterbrid^ft',  fo  pr-  id^  auf  gu  lef-.  You  must  not 
interrupt  me  so  often,  my  dear  child,  or  I  shall  be  obhged 
to  stop  reading.  15.  SKiff-  ®ie,  ob  er  fein-  ^inbern  Diel  ®elb 
l^interraf'f-  l^al?  What  he  left  was  but  very  httle.  16.  ®oIt  td^ 
eud^  il'berfefe-,  ^inb-?  Did  you  know  the  man  whom  he  has 
just  (eben)  ferried  across?  17.  SO^an  fagt,  bag  me^rer-  ftein- 
(Sd^iff-  un'tergegang-  finb.  He  thinks  that  the  ship  will  go 
down.  18.  51B  id^  fant,  toax  b-  ^rief  nod^  nid^t  -fd^rieb-.  The 
letter  was  being  written  while  the  servant  was  waiting.  19.  ®ief- 
flein-  ^nabe  inirb  immer  b-  ^urg-  genannt.  This  emperor  has 
often  been  called  the  Great.  20.  ^l^r  neu-  dtod  loirb  3^nen 
morgen  t)on  mein-  (Sol^n-  gebrad^t  totxh-.  After  my  coat  had 
been  brought  to  me  by  my  tailor,  I  gave  him  the  money 
for  it.  21.  SSenn  b-  neu-  ilSage-  toirflid^  Derfauft  n)erb-  folt,  fo 
tt)i(I  id^  it  !auf-.  All  these  old  books  shall  be  sold.  Shall  you 
buy  some  of  them?  22.  ^ax  b-  Sifc^  au^  <§oIg  gemac^t  .ober  aug 
(Stein?  The  window  has  been  opened  (=is  open).  23.  5113  e^ 
anfing  gu  regnen,  fefe-  toir  -  unter  ein-  iBaum,  unb  ba  sat  Voix,  bi6 
eg  stopped  raining.  24.  (gg  tut  mir  fel^r  leib,  bafe  ic^  l^eute  nid^t 
fomnt-  f-nn.  You  do  not  know  how  sorry  I  am  that  you 
cannot  come  to-morrow,  Mrs.  Smith.  25.  <Sie  n3irb  fid^  liber 
il^n  freuen,  aber  id^  n)erbe  ntid^  liber  i^n  argevn.  Don't  be  vexed 
with  the  boy.  26.  Ob  c^  i§m  gut  gel^t  ober  fd^Ied^t,  bag  fc^reibt 
fie  nid^t.     How  do  you   do   to-day?  —  Thank  you,  I   am  well. 


SPECIAL   EXERCISES    (OPTIONAL)  185 

—  Go  and  ask  her  how  her  brother  (her  parents,  her  sisters, 
her  mother)  is  doing.  27,  @^  tDimbert  tnic^,  bag  er  nod^  nid^t 
ha  ift.  Why  were  you  surprised  that  he  did  not  come?  I  was 
not  surprised,  I  was  vexed.  28.  SSic  l^cifet  {en-  alt-  ^err,  b- 
bort  3rt)ifc^en  3^t-  33ater  unb  3^r-  ^Sd^toefter  sits?  I  don't  know 
what  his  name  is.  29.  @^  fd^neit,  unb  babel  (at  the  same  time) 
bonncrt  unb  bli^t  eS.  It  had  been  snowing  all  (the  whole)  day, 
and  at  the  same  time  it  had  been  thundering  and  hghtning. 
30.  SBenn  er  ttilrflld^  nod^  cttDa^  ®elb  gel^abt  -,  fo  tDiigte  id^  e^. 
Do  you  think  that  you  should  have  known  it,  if  he  had  had 
the  money?  —  No,  I  should  not  have  known  anything  about, 
it  (thereof).  31.  §orcn  @le,  n^ie  er  rebet;  aB  tDenn  {aU  oh)  er 
reid^-  inare,  al^  b-  .^onig!  He  always  talks  as  if  we  were  little 
children.  32.  3d^  iDtlrbe  Ql^nen  gem  tttioa^  Gaffer  -brad^-  l^ab-, 
Votnn  Id^  eln  ®Ia^  l^at-  finb-  fonn-.  Shouldn't  you  have  brought 
me   a   glass   of   water   if    I    had    asked    you    for   it    (barum)? 

—  Certainly  I  should  have  done  that.  33.  Wit  tDiirben  toix  un^ 
gefreut  l^aben,  td'dvt  er  nod^  l^ier!  How  I  should  rejoice  if  we 
found  him  still  at  home!  34.  ^onnteft  bu  b-  ^rief  nid^t  }e^t 
fd^on  fc^reiben?  Yes,  and  I  might  have  written  it  even  (fd^on) 
yesterday,  if  I  had  only  had  pen  and  paper.  35.  ^a^  l^atteft  bu 
nid^t  tun  fotlen.  Why  do  you  say  that  I  ought  not  to  have 
bought  his  house?  —  Because  he  would  have  sold  it  to  you  for 
less  (tDcniger)  money,  if  you  had  waited  another  (nod^  ein-)  month. 
36.  Ob  er  e^  getan  l^at,  njetg  nlemanb,  aber  jebermann  \iod^,  bag  er  e« 
l^at  tun  tnollen.  Is  it  true  that  you  (have)  intended  to  translate 
this  book?  —  Yes,  a  year  ago  I  intended  to  translate  it,  and 
I  should  also  have  done  it,  but  I  found  that  it  was  already 
translated.  37.  ^le  gem  fame  id^  gu  3t)nen,  Ueb-  greunb,  aber 
id^  t)aU  jefet  fein-  3sit.  Had  I  had  more  time,  dear  sister,  (fo)  I 
should  have  come  long  ago  (fd^on  langft).  38.  SBenn  er  ung  b- 
®elb  je^t  br-d^te,  fo  fonn-  n)ir  ^eute  nod^  reif-.  I  should  have 
gone  as  early  as  Monday  (fd^on  am  SJJontag),  if  he  had  only 
given  me  the  money  on  Sunday. 

Suppose  that  (Sd^mtbt  has  made  the  following  statements  and  addressed 
the  following  questions  to  Tlttftx  directly,  that  is,  in  the  form  in  which  they 
are  here  given  —  in  what  form  will  'SRttftx  report  them  to  a  third  person, 
SD^iiHcr,  if  he  wishes  the  latter  to  understand  that  he  (2Keqcr)  is  acting  merely 


186  BEGINNING   GERMAN 

as  a  reporter  and  declines  to  vouch  for  the  correctness  or  truth  of  what  has 
been  said  ?  —  Make  the  indirect  or  reported  statements  and  questions  depend 
on  such  expressions  as  ©c^mibt  fagte  (or  l^at  gefagt),  <S(^mibt  meintc  (or  glaubtc), 
©d^mibt  fragtc  (or  ^at  gefragt),  ©d^mibt  h)oI(te  tpiffen,  ob  etc.  —  Students  often 
fail  to  bear  in  mind  that  indirect  speech  or  discourse,  as  a  rule,  involves  at 
least  three  persons;  and  that  the  original  statement  or  question,  like  a 
parcel  handled  by  more  than  one  carrier,  is  delivered,  not  by  the  person 
from  whom  it  comes,  but  by  an  intermediary  or  go-between,  that  is,  indi- 
rectly in  the  strict  meaning  of  the  term.  This  remains  true  whether  the 
route  of  delivery  is  a  straight  line  or  a  broken  line,  like  two  sides  of  a 
triangle.    The  diagram  below  illustrates  the  process: 

direct  indirect 


SJltXitty^  '^ 


!♦  ©ic  Itcgt'ttod^  tnttner  franf  gu  §aufe.  2.  §aft  bu  ®clb  gcnug 
bcl  bir,  Tlfqtx?  3.  SO^ilKer  tft  geftern  t)OTn  ^ferbe  gefalten.  4.  SD^einc 
Zo(i)ttx  gel^t  nod^  nid^t  gur  @c^u(e,  aber  fie  fann  fd^on  lefen,  5.  @^ 
finb  geftern  jtDel  ©d^iffe  untergegangen.  6.  5Ber  l^at  bte  Spfel  au^ 
^l^rcnt  ©artett  geftol^Ien?  7.  ilSare  td^  reid^  genug,  fo  tnilrbe  id^  urn 
bic  gauge  SBelt  relfen*  8»  (S^  mlrb  balb  regnen.  9.  Tlttjcx,  ©ic 
tDcrbcn  franf  tDerben,  tiotnn  'Bit  bel  blefem  ^Better  (weather)  au^* 
gc^en.  10.  Tlttjtx,  td^  l^iitte  Sic  nid^t  gefunbcn,  menn  mir  nid^t 
icmanb  3^x  §au^  gegeigt  l^citte.  IL  (g^  tdaxtn  geftern  ghjei  iBauern 
bet  mir,  bic  mir  S^xt  ^ipferbe  t)erfaufen  iDolItett.  12,  3d^  mag  nid^t 
gem  atlein  reifen.  ga^ren  ®ie  mit  mir,  Tltt)tx.  13.  3cfet  treig  fein 
9}?enfd^  mcl^r,  tdaxm  ha^  gefd^el^en  ift.  14.  ^annft  bu  mir  uid^t  ttwa^ 
®elb  lei^cu  (loan),  Tlttjtx?  3d^  Uiill  e^  bir  iu  bierge^u  2:ageu  iDieber* 
gcbcn*  15.  ^auu  U)ar  9}?ullcr  ^ier?  16.  ^ahtn  Bit  gar  uid^t^  t)on 
il^ucu  gel^ort?  17.  ^ttjtx,  Bit  folleu  uid^t  arm  U)erbcu,  folauge  id^ 
3^r  greuub  biu.  18.  '^dulitx  ift  ciu  guter  SD^eufd^,  er  U)irb  bir 
l^clfcu,  Tltt)tx,  totnn  bu  i^u  uur  barum  bitteft.  19.  ^a^  ^at  ber  ©raf 
bagu  gefagt,  9D2et)er?  20.  ^ie  (Slteru  famcu  t)or  ii^reu  ^iuberu. 
21.  ^er  ba«  gefagt  l^at,  ber  U)ei6  uid^t^  bat)OU.  22.  '^tx  "ipriug  ift 
im  ^riege  gefalleu,  bod^  ber  ^fiuig  tebt  uod^.  23.  iBei  biefem  J^el^rer 
fiabeu  meiue  ^iuber  gar  uid^t^  gelerut,  htnn  er  ^ai  fie  immer  fpieter 
laffcu.    24.  Sd)  feuue  §erru  Tliiikx  uid^t.    ^oli)nt  cr  fd^ou  taugc  in 


SPECIAL   EXERCISES    (OPTIONAL)  187 

unfcrcr  ©tabt?  25.  SO^cine  grau  liigt  ll^re  ^teibcr  in  <B,  madden, 
tueil  tDir  frii^er  bort  gemo^nt  l^aben.  26.  ^c^  barf  fcinen  SBein 
tritifcn. 

Most  of  the  remaining  sentences  contain  mistakes  in  the  order  of  words, 
or  in  the  use  of  cases,  conjunctions,  verb-forms,  pronouns,  etc.  These  mis- 
takes —  47  in  all  —  the  student  should  try  to  find  and  correct : 

11  ^aum  l^atte  bic  ^(eine  htn  grofecn  §unb  gcfel^cn,  fo  Itef  fie,  fo 
fd^nill  fie  fonnte,  in§  ^aug.  2.  ^err  (Sd^mibt  finben  <Sie  jc^t  nid^t 
me^r,  benn  t)or  einer  (Stunbe  fein  ^ruber  fagte  mir,  ba^  er  fd^on  urn 
gel^n  U^r  nad^  bie  @tabt  gu  fa^iren  iDoIIte.  3.  3Bie  mand^er  gute  (Solbat 
l^at  in  bent  langen  ^riege  gef alien!  ^ud^  eurer  eble  ©raf,  man  fagt, 
fommt  mieber  nic^t.  4.  @o  fie  fafeen  aud^  an  biefen  2lbenb  mieber 
unter  bent  ^annt  unb  erja^Iten  einanber  allerlei  alten  ©efd^id^ten  au« 
bent  ^riege.  5.  (Sold^  gnte  SD^enfd^en  finbet  man  nid^t  iiberall 
(everywhere),  6.  2Sir  merben  fo  langc  ^ier  hearten,  bi^  er  n)ad^t 
anf.  7.  !Der  i8auer6  (So^n  beneibete  (envied)  bie  ^naben  in  ber 
®tabt,  njeil  fie  t)iel  beffer  gefleibet  (dressed)  aU  er  maren.  8.  iSSenn 
(Bit  feine  mtt}x  3^it  l^aben,  toaxuxn  bleiben  (Bit  benn  nod^  l^ier  langer? 

9.  3Ba6  foil  £arl  fie  fagen,  tvtnn  fie  fommen?  —  ®ang  ba^felbe,  h)a3 
follft  bu  fagen,  namlid^  (namely),  bafe  id^  eg  nid^t  finben  ffinnen  l^abe. 

10.  Ob  er  nod^  mit  feiner  2:od^ter  mo^nt,  i(i)  frage.  —  Sfltin,  fonbem 
er  n)ol)nt  nod^  l^ier  in  ber  ®tabt,  nur  n)iffe  id^  nid^t,  tdit  l^eifet  bic 
©trage.  11.  SSa^  ber  SD^enfd^  anfangt,  ba6  mu^  er  aud^  t)ollenben. 
12.  <^6nnft  bu  beine  geber  nid^t  finben,  9i)^arie?  —  9^ein.  —  5^immft 
meine,  bittc.  13.  3d^  fagte  gar  nid^tg,  benn  id^  miinfd^te  il^n  nid^t 
untergubrec^cn.  14.  3Bcnn  feit  il^r  guriidfgefommen?  —  5Sor  biergel^n 
Stage.  15.  3d^  fd^lafe  immer  beft,  toenn  bie  9^ad^te  red^t  bunfel  finb. 
16.  (S^  gibt  feine  ^o^ere  53aume  in  ber  gangen  SBelt,  al^  bie  in  Sali* 
fomien,  id^  glaube.  17.  SBiffen  Bit,  n)er  bie^  fleine  iBud^  iiberfefet 
l^at?  —  5^ein,  ha^  toeife  id^  nid^t.  18.  ^en  fud^en  @ie?  —  §err 
^oftor  ©d^mtbtg  ^ruber.  19.  SSarte  ein  loenig,  id^  n)ill  bid^  l^elfen, 
mein  ^inb.  20.  %U  mir  nun  an  ben  §of  (farm)  famen  unb  ob  ber 
^auer  ju  §aufe  fei  fragten,  ba  fagte  feine  grau,  i^rer  'Mann  arbeitc 
l^cute  auf  bem  gelbe.  21.  SSie  ioiirbe  id^  freucn  mid^,  hjenn  er  fame! 
22.  ®el)en  (Bit  gu  i^m  unb  fragen  i^n,  menu  er  ^eute  abenb  fommt  ober 
morgen  frii^.  23.  2)a6  ift  berfelbe  §err,  meffen  Bot)n  fo  lange  ^o^ten 
bei  ung  getDo^nt  l^at.  24.  3mmer,  aU  ici)  \i)n  urn  ®elb  bitte,  fagt 
cr,  er  l^abe  fein. 


AN   ABSTRACT 

OF 

I 

GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


AN  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


INFLECTIONS 

1.  German  words  capable  of  inflection  are  here  treated  under 
the  following  heads: 

1.  Verb  Inflections,  comprising  all  verbs. 

II.  Odd  or  unclassified  Inflections,  comprising  a  few  pro- 
nouns, as  ic§  7,  bcr  that  etc. 

III.  Complete  Strong  Inflection,  comprising  certain  pronouns 
and  pronominal  or  numeral  adjectives,  as  the  definite  article  bcr 
the,  tDeld^er  who,  which,  atler  all  etc. 

IV.  Defective  Strong  Inflection,  comprising  certain  other  pro- 
nominals  or  numerals,  as  the  indefinite  article  cln  a,  an,  fein  no, 
mein  my  etc. 

V.  Noun  Inflections,  comprising  all  nouns. 

VI.  Double  Inflection,  Strong  and  Weak,  comprising  all  ordi- 
nary, or  descriptive,  adjectives,  a  few  pronominals,  all  substantive 
adjectives,  the  comparatives  and  superlatives  of  adjectives,  and 
all  ordinal  numerals. 

The  references  in  the  Abstract  are  to  sections,  not  to  pages, 

I.    VERB  INFLECTIONS 

2.  The  Stem  of  a  verb  is  found  by  dropping  from  the  present 
infinitive  the  final  en  or  n. 

3.  The  Principal  Parts  are  the  present  infinitive,  the  first 
person  singular  of  the  past  indicative  and  the  past  participle. 

4.  Weak  and  Strong  Verbs.  Verbs  are  divided,  with  refer- 
ence to  their  inflection,  into  two  classes,  the  weak  and  the  strong. 

191 


192  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

In  the  weak  verbs,  the  1.  sing,  of  the  past  ind.  adds  tc  or  etc 
to  the  stem,  and  the  past  participle  adds  t  or  et. 

In  the  strong  verbs,  the  1.  sing,  of  the  past  ind.  changes  the 
stem-vowel,  but  takes  no  ending,  and  the  past  participle  adds  en. 

In  both  weak  and  strong  verbs,  the  past  participle  regularly 
has  the  prefix  ge. 

Examples  (principal  parts): 


,     r  lob-cn 
weak          , 

I  rcb-en 

lob-te 
reb-ete 

ge-Iob-t 
ge-reb-et 

praise,  praised,  praised 
talk,  talked,  talked 

•  fc^-en 
strong     fc(^t-en 
.  fing-en 

foc^t 
fang 

ge-feHn 

ge-fod^t-en 

ge-fung-cn 

see,  saw,  seen 
fight,  fought,  fought 
sing,  sang,  sung 

The  Auxiliary  Verbs 
§aben       (5ein       ^erben 

5m  These  three  verbs  are  used  to  form  the  compound  tenses  of  all  verbs  and 
are  therefore  talfen  up  separately.  The  first  belongs  with  the  weak  verbs,  the 
others  with  the  strong,  but  each  has  some  irregular  forms.  Those  of  their  end- 
ings which  are  regular  and  will  occur  again  in  later  verbs  are  in  bold-faced  type. 

6.  Principal  Parts: 

l^abcn       l^attc  ge^abt  have,  had,  had 

fetn  tt)ar  tft^  getDcfen  be,  was,  (has)  been 

iDcrbcn     tDurbc  or  h)arb^  ift^  geh)orben  become,  became,  (has)  become 

1  The  princ.  parts  of  all  verbs  whose  perfect,  pluperfect  and  future  perfect 
are  made  with  fein  instead  of  l^abcn  are  given  with  ift  (lit.  is)  before  the  past 
participle  and  should  be  so  learned.  For  a  list  of  such  verbs  see  187.  —  2  This 
is  an  older  and  rarer  form,  see  9. 

The  Simple  Forms  of  l^abcn,  fein  and  merben, 

7.  §aben 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Subj.* 

Past  Ind. 

Past  Subj.* 

[(^    l^abc  /  have 

16)    ^abc 

XCf) 

^atit  I  had 

td^     ^attc 

bu    f)aft 

bu    §abcft 

bu 

riatteft 

bu     ^attcft 

cr    \)at 

cr     f)abc 

er 

i)aiit 

er     ^atte 

mir  fiabcn 

n)lr  ^abcn 

tDir 

fatten 

h)ir  l^dttcn 

il^r  !)abt 

\i)v    l^abct 

i^r 

^attet 

t^r    Wt^t 

fie    l^abctt 

fte     l^abctt 

fte 

fatten 

fte     fatten 

*  As  the  English  equivalents  of  the  subjunctive  vary  greatly  according  to  its  use,  they  are 
omitted  throughout;  often  they  coincide  with  those  of  the  corresponding  indicative. 


VERB   INFLECTIONS 


193 


Imperative 

2.  sing,  l^abc  have 
2.  plur.  l^abt  have 
2.  sing,  or  plur.  l^aben  ©ie 

Present  Infinitive 
(ju)  l^aben  (to)  have 

have 

Present  Participle 
l^abcnb  having 

Past  Participle 
gel^abt  had 

8.    @ein 

Pres.  Ind.            Pres.  Subj. 

Past  Ind.               Past  Subj. 

id)    bin  /  am     id)    fei 
bu    bift               bu    feicft 
er    ift                 cr     fei 
tt)ir  finb               n)ir  feicn 
i^r  feib               il^r    feiet 
fie    finb               fie    feicn 

id)    toax  I  was     id)    mSre 
bu    marft              bu    miireft 
er     mar                cr     mdre 
mir  maren             toir  miircn 
il^r    mar(e)t          il^r    maret 
fie    maren             fie    miiren 

Imperative 

2.  sing,  fei  be 

2.  plur..  feib   be 

2.  sing,  or  plur.  feien  ®ic  be 

Present  Infinitive 
(ju)  fein  (to)  be 

Present  Participle 
feienb  being 

Past  Participle 

gcmefen  been 

9.    SBcrbcn 

Pres.  Ind.         Pres.  Subj. 

I  become 
id)    h)erbe         id)    tDerbe 
bu    tDirft          bu    tDerbcft 
er    h3irb          er    tcerbe 
tDir  tDerbcn      iDir  twerben 
i^r  njerbct       il^r    irerbet 
fie    iDerbcn       fie    trerben 

id) 

bu 

er 

mil 

i^r 

fie 

Past  Ind.                    Past  Subj. 
I  became 

murbe  (marb)        id)    milrbe 
murbeft  (marbft)     bu    miirbeft 
murbe  (marb)         er     miirbe 
:  murbcn                  mir  miirben 
murbet                  il^r   miirbet 
murbcn                  fie    murben 

Imperative 

Present  Infinitive 

2.  sing.  h)crbe  become                       (gu)  toerbcn   (to)  become 

2.  plur.  tuerbct  become 

2.  sing,  or  plur.  tDcrben  ®ie  become 

194  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

Present  Participle  Past  Participle 

hjcrbenb  becoming  geiDorben  become 

The  Compound  Forms  of  l^abcn,  feln  and  n3crbcn. 
10.    $abcn  <Scln  and  SScrbcn 

Perfect  Indicative 


/  have  had 

/  have  been  or  become 

[^    i)aht 

ge^abt 

x(i)    bin    gctuefen  or  getDorben 

bu    ^aft 

gc^abt 

bu    bift    gcmcfen  or  ge^orben 

er    l^at 

gcfiabt 

cr    ift      gemefcn  or  gcn)orbcn 

toxx  i)ahtn 

Qc^abt 

n)ir  finb    gch)efcn  or  getDorben 

\\)X  §abt 

gel^abt 

il^r  feib    gemcfcn  or  gen)orben 

fie    ^abcn 

gc^abt 

fie  finb  getucfen  or  gctDorben 
Perfect  Subjunctive 

td^    l^abc 

gcl^abt 

id^    fei      gcmcfen  or  gemorben 

bu    ^a0eft 

gct)abt 

bu   feieft  getuefcn  or  gctDorbcn 

er     f)aht 

gc^abt 

er    fei      gen)efen  or  gen)orbcn 

n)ir  l^aben 

gel^abt 

h)ir  feicn   getDcfen  or  gemorben 

i^r  ^abet 

geljabt 

il^r  feiet    getuefen  or  gemorben 

flc    ^abcn 

ge^abt 

fie  feien  getoefen  or  genjorben 
Pluperfect  Indicative 

/  had  had 

/  had  been  or  become 

iii)    ^atte 

gcl^abt 

i(i)   tt)ar      gctucfen  or  gcirorben 

bu    ^atteft  gc()abt 

bu   iDarft    gemefen  or  getrorben 

er    f)attc 

gel^abt 

er    mar      gcmcfcn  or  gcmorbcn 

n)ir  flatten 

gef)abt 

mir  maren  gemefcn  or  gemorben 

i^r  ^attet 

gel^abt 

i^r  mart     gclDcfen  or  gctDorbcn 

fie    fatten 

ge^abt 

fie    marcn  getuefcn  or  gemorben 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive 

id^    ptte 

gcl^abt 

id^   mare     gcmcfcn  or  gcmorben 

bu    ^attcft  gc^abt 

bu   mare  ft  gemefen  or  gemorbcn 

er    ^atte 

gcl^abt 

er    mare     gemefen  or  gcmorben 

toir  fatten 

gcl^abt 

mir  maren  gemefen  or  gemorben 

i^r  fiftttet 

gef)abt 

i^r  mciret    gemefen  or  gemorben 

fie    patten  ge^abt 

fie    miiren  gemefen  or  gemorben 

VERB    INFLECTIONS 


195 


I  shall  have 

id^    luerbe  l^abcn 

bu    n)ir[t  l^abcn 

cr    tDirb  ()abcn 

n)ir  tDerbcn  l^abctt 

il^r  tocrbet  f)abcn 

fie    tocrbcn  l^abcn 


Future  Indicative 

/  shall  be  or  become 

i<i)   tDcrbc  fein  or  iDcrbcn 

bu   h)irft.  [cin  or  njcrbcn 

cr    mirb  fein  or  iDcrbcn 

n)ir  tDerbcn  fein  or  hjcrbcn 

il^r  tDcrbct  fein  or  tDcrben 

fie    h)erbcn  fein  or  loerben 

Future  Subjunctive 
id^  n)erbe    l^aben  id^  iDerbe  fein  or  toerbcn 

bu  tDerbeft  l^aben  etc.        bu  tDerbcft  fein  or  toerben  etc. 

Futiu-e  Perfect  Indicative 
/  shall  have  had  I  shall  have  been  or  become 

\<i)  tDerbe  gel^abt  l^aben  id^  totvht  gen)cfen  fein  or  getDorben  fein 

bu  n)irft    Qt\)ahi  f)aben  bu  tDirft   gemefen  fein  or  gemorben  fein 

etc.  etc. 

Future  Perfect  Subjimctive 
i(^  tDerbe     ge^abt  l^aben         id^  tuerbe     getnefen  fein  or  gemorben  fein 
bu  tDerbeft  ge^abt  l^aben         bu  merbeft  geluefen  fein  or  getDorben  fein 
etc.  etc. 

Present  Conditional 


I  should  have 

\(i)  tDiirbe  l^aben 

bu  njiirbeft  ()aben 

er  tDiirbe  l^aben 

n)ir  tDiirben  ^aben 

il^r  h)urbet  l^abcn 

fie  milrben  ()aben 

I  should  have  had 

[^  tDiirbc     gcl^abt  l^aben 

bu  hJiirbeft  ge^abt  ()aben 

etc. 

(to)  have  had 
ge^abt  (^u)  l^aben 


/  should  be  or  become 

id)  mUrbc  fein  or  totxhtn 

bu  n)urbeft  fein  or  totxhtn 

er  n)urbe  fein  or  n)crben 

n)ir  tDiirben  fein  or  njerben 

\\)x  n)urbet  fein  or  toerben 

fie  mtirben  fein  or  toerben 

Perfect  Conditional 

7  should  have  been  or  become 

id)  tDiirbe     gen»efen  fein  or  getDorben  fein 

bu  tDiirbeft  gen)efen  fein  or  getuorben  fein 

etc. 

Perfect  Infinitive 

(to)  have  been  or  become 
getDefen  (gu)  fein  or  gcmorben  (gu)  fein 


196 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


Weak  Verbs 
11.    Models,     i^obcn    lobtc    gclob.t  praise 


Simple 

Forms 

Pres.  Ind.             Pres.  Subj. 

Past  Ind.              Past  Subj. 

/  praise 

/  praised 

id)    lobe           id)    lobe 

id)    lobte            id)    lobte 

bu    lobft           bu    lobeft 

bu    lobteft          bu    lobteft 

er    lobt           er    lobe 

er    lobte            er    lobte 

h)ir  loben          iDir  lobcn 

n)ir  lobten          voir  lobten 

il)v  loht            \f)x  lobct 

il^r  lobtet           t^r   lobtet 

fie    loben         fie    loben 

fie    lobten          fie    lobten 

Imperative 

Present  Infinitive 

2.  sing,  lobe  praise 

(gu)  loben  {to)  praise 

2.  plur.  lobt   praise 

2.  sing,  or  plur.  loben  ®ie  praise 

Present  Participle 

Past  Participle 

lobenb  praising 

gelobt  praised 

Compound  Forms 

Perf.  Ind. 

Perf.  Subj. 

/  have  praised 

id^  l^abe  gclobt 

id^  l^abc  gelobt 

bu  l^aft  gelobt  etc. 

bu  l^abeft  gelobt  etc. 

Plup.  Ind. 

Plup.  Subj. 

/  had  praised 

id)  l)attt  gelobt 

id)  l^citte  gelobt 

bu  l^atteft  gelobt  etc. 

bu  l)dtteft  gelobt  etc. 

Fut.  Ind. 

Fut.  Subj. 

/  shall  praise 

id)  toerbe  loben 

id)  totxbt  loben 

bu  tt)irft  loben  etc. 

bu  njerbeft  loben  etc. 

VERB   INFLECTIONS 


197 


Fut.  Perf.  Ind. 
I  shall  have  praised 
id)  tuerbc  gelobt  1)ahtn 
hvL  iDirft  gelobt  l^abcti  etc. 

Pres.  Condit. 
I  should  praise 
t(^  tDiirbc  loben 
bu  toiirbeft  loben  etc. 


.     Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 

td^  toerbe  gelobt  l^aben 

bu  toerbeft  gelobt  ^aben  etc. 

Perf.  Condit. 
/  should  have  praised 
td^  njiirbe  gelobt  l)aben 
bu  njiirbeft  gelobt  l^aben  etc. 


12. 


Perfect  Infinitive 
gelobt  (gu)  l^aben  (to)  have  praised 

9^eben    rebetc    gerebet  talk 


Simple  Forms 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Past  Ind. 

Past  Subj. 

/  talk 

I  talked 

i^    rebc 

id^    rebc 

ici) 

rebetc* 

id^    rebetc* 

bu    rebcft* 

bu    rebcft 

bu 

rebctcft* 

bu    rebctcft* 

er    rebct* 

er     rebc 

er 

rebetc* 

er     rebetc* 

loir  rebctt 

mir  rebcn 

njir 

rebctctt* 

toir  rebctcn* 

il)r  rebct* 

i^r    rebct 

i^r 

rebctct* 

i^r    rebctct* 

fie    rebcn 

fie    rebcn 

fie 

rebctcn* 

fie    rebctcn* 

Imperative 

Present  Infinitive 

2.  sing,  rebc  talk 

(gu)  reben  (to)  talk 

2.  plur.  rebct* 

talk 

• 

2.  sing,  or  plur. 

.  rebcn  (Sic  talk 

Present  Participle 

Past 

Participle 

rebcnb   talking 

ficrebct*  talked 

*  Inflect  like  rebcn,  i.e.,  with  the  longer  endings  in  the  starred  forms, all  verbs 
with  stems  in  b  or  t,  and  in  m  or  n  after  a  consonant  other  than  I  or  r  (except 
stems  in  mm  or  nn),  e.  g.,  toartcft,  iiffnct,  geatmct,  atmctc  etc.    See,  however,  18.  6. 

Compound  Forms 
They  are  made  with  l^aben,  like  those  of  loben  (11) 

13.  golgen    folgte    ift  gefolgt  follow 

Simple  Forms 
They  are  made  like  those  of  loben  (11) 


198 


AN  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


Compound  Forms 


Perf.  Ind. 
I  have  followed 
x^  bin  gcfolgt 
bu  blft  gefolgt  etc. 

Plup.  Ind. 
/  had  followed 
ic§  h)ar  gefotgt 
bu  tDarft  gcfolgt  etc. 

Fut.  Ind. 
/  shall  follow 
i(i)  iDcrbe  folgcn 
bu  tDirft  fotgen  etc. 

Fut.  Perf.  Ind. 
/  shall  have  followed 
ifi)  iDcrbc  gefolgt  fein 
bu  h)irft  gefotgt  fcin  etc. 

Pres.  Condit. 
I  should  follow 
id)  tDiirbe  folgen 
bu  miirbcft  fotgen  etc. 


Perf.  Subj. 

id^  fel  gefotgt 

bu  feieft  gefotgt  etc. 

Plup.  Subj. 

id^  h)arc  gefotgt 

bu  n)areft  gefotgt  etc. 

Fut.  Subj. 

[^  toerbe  fotgen 

bu  ioerbeft  fotgen  etc. 

Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 

[^  iDerbe  gefotgt  fcin 

hn  n)erbeft  gefotgt  fein  etc. 

Perf.  Condit. 
I  should  have  followed 
id)  iDiirbe  gefotgt  fein 
bu  n)urbeft  gefotgt  fein  etc. 


Perfect  Infinitive 
gefotgt  (gu)  fein   (to)  have  followed 

14.  Weak  Verbs  in  ein  and  em  frequently  drop  the  e  of  these 
syllables  before  the  ending  e:  id)  l^anbte  (for  ^anbete,  from  l^an* 
betn  act),  id)  toanbre  (for  manbere,  from  n)anbem  wander). 

15.  Weak  Verbs  of  Foreign  Origin  in  teren  form  the  past 
participle  without  the  prefix  ge:  ftubiert  (not  „gcftubiert")  from 
ftubieren  study. 

16.  Irregular  Weak  Verbs  changing  the  stem-vowel  e  to  a  in 
the  past  indicative  and  past  participle  (but  not  in  the  past  subj .) : 

Inf.  Past  Ind.      Past  Subj.     Past  Part. 

brenncn      brannte        brennte       gcbrannt      burn 
fennen       fanntc  fcnnte        ge!annt        know 

ncnncn      nanntc         ncnntc        genannt       name 


rcnncn 

ronntc 

rcnntc 

fenben 

fanbte 

fenbetc 

tDcnben 

matibte 

menbete 

VERB    INFLECTIONS  199 

ift  gcronnt        run 
gefanbt         send 
gelDanbt       turn 

©cnbcn  and  toenbcn  have  also  the  regular  forms  in  the  past  indicative  and 
past  participle:  fcnbctc,  gcfcnbct,  tocnbetc,  gcmcnbct. 

The  following  are  still  more  irregular,  but  nearer  their  Eng- 
lish equivalents: 

Inf.        Past  Ind.    Past  Subj.     Past  Part, 
bringcn      brad^tc      brad^tc        gebrac^t      bring     brought      brought 
bcnfcn        bad^tc        bad^tc         gcbad^t        think     thought      thought 

Strong  Verbs 

17.  Stems  of  the  Principal  Parts.  (1)  The  stem-vowel  of 
the  past  is  always  different  from  that  of  the  infinitive.  The 
stem-vowel  of  the  past  participle  is  sometimes  the  same  as  that 
of  the  infinitive:  fe^en  fal^  gcfel^en  see;  sometimes  the  same  as 
that  of  the  past:  fed^ten  fod^t  gefod^tcn  fight;  and  sometimes  dif- 
ferent from  both:  fingen  fang  gefungen  sing. 

(2)  In  most  verbs  the  final  consonant  of  the  stem  is  the  same 
in  the  past  and  past  participle  as  in  the  infinitive;  but 

(a)  Six  verbs  (shortening  the  vowel  while  changing  it)  double 
the  consonant  (b  becoming  tt)  in  the  past  and  past  participle; 
one,  itel^men,  in  the  past  participle  only: 

grcifcn  griff  gcgriffen  grasp  ftrcitcn  ftritt  gcftrtttcti  strive 

rcitcn  rltt  ift  gcritten  ride  leiben  litt  gcUtten  suffer 

fd^relten  fd^ritt  ift  gefd^ritten  stride      fc^neibcn  fd^nitt  gefd^nittcn  cut 
nel^men  nal^m  gcnommcn  take 

(b)  Four  verbs  (lengthening  the  vowel  while  changing  it) 
simplify  the  consonant  {d  becoming  !)  in  the  past;  one,  bitten, 
in  the  past  and  past  participle : 

crfd^rcdfen  erfc^raf  ift  erfc^rodfcn        fommcn  fam  ift  gcfommcn  come 

be  frightened  treffen  traf  getroffcn  hit,  meet 

fallen  fiel  ift  gefalten  fall  bitten  bat  gebeten  beg,  ask 

Verbs  with  stems  in  ff  change  only  the  form  of  [f :  loffen,  infin.,  let;  liefe,  stem 
of  past  ind.  and  subj.;  lafe^  2.  sing,  imperative;  lafet,  2.  plur.  imperative. 


200  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

(c)  The  following  verbs  undergo  other  changes  of  the  stem: 
9e]f)en  glng  Ift  gegangen  go  ftcl^cn  ftanb  geftanbcn  stand 

l^auen  ^ieb  ge^auen  hew  tun  tat  getan  do 

fi^en  fag  gefeffcn  sit  glel^en  gog  gegogen  draw 

18.  The  Present.  In  certain  strong  verbs,  the  second  and 
third  persons  singular  of  the  present  indicative  undergo  special 
changes : 

(1)  Verbs  with  short  c  in  the  stem  change  this  c  to  short  i  in 
the  2.  and  3.  sing.  pres.  ind.;  e.  g., 

brcd^en         break  id)  hxtd)t         bu  brlc^ft         cr  brid^t 

treffen  hit,  meet        id)  treffc         bu  triffft  cr  trifft 

(2)  The  following  verbs  with  long  c  in  the  stem  change  this 
c  to  ic  in  the  2.  and  3.  sing.  pres.  ind. : 


befel^Ien 

command 

id)  befel^le 

bu  beficW 

er  befiel^It 

cmpfe^Icn 

recommend 

id)  empfel^Ic 

bu  cmpfie^tft 

er  empfie{)lt 

lefcn 

read 

id)  lefe 

bu  tiefeft^ 

er  Heft 

fc^en 

see 

ic^  fef)c 

bu  fte^ft 

cr  fie^t 

fte^Ien 

steal 

id)  ftc^Ic 

bu  ftie^Ift 

cr  ftie^rt 

gefd^e^en 

come  to  pass 

c6  gef(^iel^t 

1  Commonly  pronounced  and  not  imcommonly  written  like  the  3.  sing., 
i.  e.,  licft.  So  also  with  the  2.  sing.  pres.  ind.  of  other  verbs  (weak  or  strong) 
whose  stem  ends  in  an  s-sound;  e.  g.,  bu  rcifcft  or  rcift  you  travel. 

(3)  The  following  three  verbs  change  long  e  to  i,  the  last  two 
doubling  the  final  consonant  of  the  stem: 

geben  give  id)  gebe  bu  gibft*  cr  gibt^ 

nel^men        take  id)  ne^me       bu  nimtnft       er  nimmt 

treten  step  id)  trete  bu  trittft  er  tritt^ 

1  Pronounced  short  or  long,  and  until  recently  written  gicbft,  gicbt.  —  ^  Yot 
ttitt,  see  6  below. 

(4)  Verbs  with  a  in  the  stem  modify  this  a  in  the  2.  and  3. 
sing.  pres.  ind.;  e.  g., 

tragen  carry  id)  trage         bu  tragft  er  tragt 

fd^Iafen         sleep  id)  fd^Iafe        bu  fd^Iafft         er  fd^laft 

(5)  ?aufen  run  and  ftogen  push  always  modify  the  stem-vowel 
in  the  2.  and  3.  sing.  pres.  ind. :  Idufft  liiuft,  ftofeeft  ftogt;  fommen 
come,  sometimes:  fommft  fiimtnt. 


VERB    INFLECTIONS  201 

(6)  The  endings  in  the  present  indicative  of  strong  and  weak 
verbs  are  the  same,  but  the  following  strong  verbs  with  stems 
in  t  and  vowel-changes  as  described  above  have  ft  in  the  2.  sing, 
(instead  of  eft,  see  12,  note)  and  no  ending  at  all  in  the  3.  sing, 
(instead  of  et,  see  12,  note) : 


fed^ten 

fight 

\6)  fed^te 

bu  fid^tft 

er  fid^t 

gelten 

he  worth 

i^  gelte 

bu  Giltft 

er  gilt 

treten 

step,  tread 

\6)  trete 

bu  trittft 

er  tritt  (3  above) 

l^alten 

hold 

td^  ^alte 

bu  ^altft 

er  ^alt 

raten 

advise 

id^  rate 

bu  rcitft  ' 

er  rat 

But 

reiten 

ride 

id6  reite 

bu  reitcft 

er  reltct 

19.  The  Past  Subjunctive  of  strong  verbs  modifies  the  stem- 
vowel,  if  this  be  capable  of  modification,  and  takes  the  endings 
t,  eft,  e,  en,  et,  en,  as  shown  in  22  below. 

20.  The  Imperative  of  strong  verbs  changing  e  to  t  or  ie  in 
the  2.  and  3.  sing.  pres.  ind.  (except  that  of  tcerben)  makes  the 
same  change  in  the  2.  sing,  and  drops  the  ending  e,  e.  g., 


PRES.   IND,   SING. 

IMP. 

SING. 

1 

2 

3 

2 

bred^c 

brid^ft 

brid^t 

brid^ 

break 

befetile 

befie^Ift 

befie^It 

befie^I 

command 

gebe 

gibft 

Qtbt 

gib 

give 

nel^me 

nimmft 
But 

nimmt 

nimm 

take 

hjerbe 

mirft 

tolrb 

iDerbe 

become,  ge 

Some  other  strong  verbs  drop  e  regularly,  as  fomm  come,  lafe 
let  etc. 

21.  The  Past  Participle  sometimes  drops  the  e  of  its  ending, 
especially  after  ^,  e.  g. ,  gefe^n  seen.  Xun  do  has  getan  done  and 
effen  eat  has  gegeffen  eaten. 

22.  Models.       ©cl^cn    fal^    gefel^en    see 

Simple   Forms 

Observe  that  the  endings  in  the  pres.  ind.  and  subj.  are  the  same  as  those 
of  lobcn  (11). 


202 


AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Past  Ind. 

Past  Subj. 

i^    fc^e 

id^    fe^e 

id^     fa^ 

id^     fii^c 

bu    ficf)ft 

bu    fe^ieft 

bu    fa^t 

bu    fii^cft 

cr    fic^t 

cr     fel^c 

cr     fa^ 

cr     fii^e 

mir  fe^en 

H)ir  \t^tn 

h)lr  fa^cn 

h)ir  faf)Ctt 

i^r  W 

t^r    \t\)tt 

i^r    fa^t 

i^r    fii^ct 

fie    fc^eu 

fie    fe^eti 

fie    fa^cn 

fie    fa^en 

Imperative 

Present  Infinitive 

2.  sing.  \it\) 

(Su)  fc^en 

2.  plur.  fc^t 

2.  sing,  or  plur. 

fc^en  eic 

Present  Participl 

B 

Past  Participle 

fe^enb 

ficfe^ctt 

Compound 

Forms 

They  are  made  with  ^ahtn, 

hke  those  of  lobcn  (11) 

^omnten    tarn    ift  gcfontmen    come 


Pres.  Ind. 

id^  fommc 
bu  fommft 
cr  fommt 
h)ir  fommcn 
il^r  fommt 
fie    fommcn 


Simple  Forms 
Pres.  Subj.  Past  Ind. 


id^  fommc 

bu  fommcft 

cr  fommc 

iDir  fommcn 

il^r  fommct 

fie  fommcn 


id^  fam 

bu  famft 

cr  fam 

h)ir  famcn 

i^r  famt 

fie  famcn 


Past  Subj. 

id^  fame 

bu  famcft 

cr  fame 

ioir  fdmcn 

il^r  famct 

fie  famcn 


Imperative 
2.  sing,  fomm 
2.  plur.  fommt 
2.  sing,  or  plur.  fommcn  (Sic 


Present  Infinitive 

(ju)  fommcn 


Present  Participle  Past  Participle 

fommcnb  gcfommcn 

Compound  Forms 
They  are  made  with  feiu,  like  those  of  folgen  (13) 


The  Passive 

24.  The  forms  of  the  passive  are  the  forms  of  njerben  (with 


VERB   INFLECTIONS  203 

iDorbcn  instead  getDorben),  construed  with  the  past  participle  of  a 
transitive  verb,  as  shown  below. 

Forms  Corresponding  to  the  Simple  Forms 
OF  THE  Active 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Subj. 

I  am  'praised 

vS)  tuerbc  getobt  id^  hjcrbc  gctobt 

bu  h)irft  gelobt  etc.  bu  tDcrbeft  gclobt  etc. 

Past  Ind.  Past  Subj. 

/  was  praised 
vS)  h3urbc  (tDarb)  gelobt  id^  n)urbc  gctobt 

bu  tDurbeft  (iDarbft)  gelobt  etc.  bu  miirbcft  gelobt  etc. 

Imperative 

2.  sing,  fei  (rarely  hJcrbe)  gelobt  he  praised 

2.  plur.  feib  (rarely  tDerbet)  gelobt  he  praised 

2.  sing,  or  plur.  feien  (Sie  (rarely  loerben  (Sie)  gelobt  he  praised 

The  present  participle  (gelobt  tocrbcnb)  can  scarcely  be  said  to  exist,  and 
the  past  participle,  gelobt  toorben  been  praised,  is  used  only  in  the  compound 
forms  below. 

Forms  Corresponding  to  the  Compound  Forms 
OF  the  Active 

Perf.  Ind.  Perf.  Subj. 

I  have  been  praised 

[^  bin  gelobt  tDorben  id)  fei  gelobt  toorben 

bu  bift  gelobt  toorben  etc.  bu  feieft  gelobt  morben  etc. 

Plup.  Ind.  Plup.  Subj. 

I  had  heen  praised 
ici)  toar  gelobt  tuorben  id^  to  are  gelobt  toorben 

bu  toarft  gelobt  ioorben  etc.  bu  tocireft  gelobt  toorben  etc. 

Fut.  Ind.  Fut.  Subj. 

I  shall  he  praised 

i^  n)erbe  gelobt  n)erben  td^  toerbe  gelobt  njerben 

bu  toirft  gelobt  toerben  etc.  bu  toerbeft  gelobt  merben  etc. 


204 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


Fut.  Perf.  Ind. 
I  shall  have  been  praised 
td^  hjcrbe  gelobt  iDorben  fein 
bu  toix\t  gelobt  h)orben  fein  etc. 

Pres.  Condit. 
I  should  be  praised 
i^  iDiirbe  gelobt  toerben 
bu  tolirbeft  gelobt  toerbcn  etc. 


Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 

td^  merbe  gelobt  n)orben  fein 

bu  toerbeft  gelobt  n)orben  fein  etc. 

Perfect  Condit. 

id)  toUrbe  gelobt  loorbcn  fein 

bu  tourbeft  gelobt  loorben  fein  etc. 


Perfect  Infinitive 
gelobt  toorben  (gu)  fcln  (to)  have  been  praised 


The  Modal  Auxiliaries  and  SSiffen 
25.  Principal  Parts  of  the  Modal  Auxiliaries : 


biirfen      burfte     geburft 


fonnen 

ntogen 

miiffen 

follen 

loollen 


fonntc 

mod^te 

mufete 

follte 

n)ollte 


gefonnt 

gemoc^t 

gemufet 

gefollt 

getoollt 


be  allowed,  be  permitted;  interrogatively: 

may  I;  with  a  negative :  must  not 
can,  be  able,  may 
may,  like  to,  care  to 
must,  be  obliged,  be  compelled,  have  to 
shall,  ought,  am  to  or  am  told  to 
will,  be  willing,  want  to,  intend  to,  mean 
to,  be  on  the  point  of,  be  about  to 


26.   Inflection  of  the  Modal  Auxiliaries: 


td^  barf 

bu  barfft 

er  barf 

tolr  biirfen 

i^r  biirft 

fie  biirfen 

td^  bitrfe 

bu  burfeft 

er  biirfe 


fann 

fannft 

fann 

fonnen 

ffinnt 

fonnen 


ffinne 

fonneft 

fiinne 


Simple  Forms 
Present  Indicative 

mu^t 


mag 

ntagft 

mag 

mi)gett 

mogt 

mogen 


mufe 
miiffen 
miigt 
miiffen 


Present  Subjunctive 

moge         miiffe 
mogeft       miiffeft 
moge         miiffe 


fott  trill 

follft  iDtEft 

foil  mill 

follen  toollen 

font  mollt 

follen  mollen 

folle  irolle 

folleft  loollcft 

folle  toolle 


VERB   INFLECTIONS 


205 


tolr  bilrfeti 

fiinnen 

mfigctt 

miiffctt 

fotten 

moHctt 

i^r  bilrfet 

fonnct 

mogct 

muffct 

follct 

tDOltct 

fie    btirfen 

fonnctt 

mogcn 

muffcn 

forieti 

tDoItcn 

Past  Indicative 

td^    burfte        fonnte       ntod^tc       mugte  follte  tooffte 

bu    burflcft      fonntcft      mod^tcft     mufetcft  folltcft  toollteft 
etc.              etc.            etc.            etc.           etc.  etc. 

Past  Subjunctive 

id^    biirftc        fenntc        m'6(i)it       miigtc  folltc  tooUit 

bu    biirftcft      ffinntcft      tnod^teft     miifetcft  folltcft  n)oIltcft 
etc.              etc.            etc.            etc.           etc.  etc. 


wanting  in  all  but  tDoKen 


Imperative 
2.  sing. 
2.  plur. 
2.  sing,  or  plur. 


iDOIte 

tooEct 
iDolten  @lc 


Present  Participle 

bilrfcttb       fonncnb       mogcnb       miiffcnb       foffcnb       h)offcnb 

For  present  infinitive  and  past  participle,  see  25. 


Compound  Forms 


Perf.  Ind. 
td^  f)aht  gcburft,  gcfonnt  etc. 

Plup.  Ind. 

id^  l^attc  geburft,  gcfonnt  etc. 

Fut.  Ind. 

id^  tocrbc  blirfen,  fiinncn  etc. 

Fut.  Perf.  Ind. 

td^  tocrbc  gcburft  l^aben  etc. 

Pres.  Cond. 

id^  iDiirbc  biirfen,  fonncn  etc. 


Perf.  Subj. 
id^  ^abt  gcburft,  gcfonnt  etc. 

Plup.  Subj. 

id^  l^attc  gcburft,  gcfonnt  etc. 

Fut.  Subj. 

.id^  njcrbc  biirfen,  fonncn  etc. 

Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 

id)  locrbe  gcburft  l^abcn  etc. 

Perf.  Condit. 

id^  hjtirbc  gcburft  l^aben  etc. 


Perfect  Infinitive 

gcburft  (au)  l^abcn,  gcfonnt  (ju)  ^abcn  etc. 


206  AN  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

27.  Irregular  or  Special  Forms.  (1)  The  singular  of  the 
present  indicative,  except  that  of  tDoIIcn,  was  originally  the  past 
tense  of  a  strong  verb,  hence  no  endings  in  the  1.  and  3.  persons. 
When  this  strong  past  had  acquired  present  meaning,  a  new 
weak  past  was  formed  with  te  etc. 

(2)  The  vowel  of  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative  is 
different  (except  in  foKcn)  from  that  of  the  plural.  The  plural 
has  the  same  vowel  as  the  infinitive. 

(3)  !I)urfen,  ftinnen,  m5gen,  ntiiffen  have  no  umlaut  in  the  past 
ind.  and  past  part.     (SoEcn  and  ttioKen  have  no  umlaut  anywhere. 

(4)  SQ^dgen  changes  g  to  d^  in  the  past  indicative,  past  subjunc- 
tive and  past  participle. 

(5)  When  the  perfect  or  pluperfect  is  accompanied  by  the  in- 
finitive of  another  verb,  the  past  participle  of  the  modal  auxil- 
iary (gcburft,  gcfonnt  etc.)  is  changed  to  the  infinitive  (biirfcn, 
tonntn  etc.).  Thus,  id)  t)aht  nic^t  ge^cn  biirfcn  (where  bilrfen 
stands  for  gcburft  and  an  infinitive  is  expressed)  means  /  have  not 
been  (or  /  was  not)  allowed  to  go;  whereas  Id^  l^abe  nid^t  geburft 
(where  an  infinitive,  gel^en  or  other,  is  understood)  corresponds  to  the 
colloquial  English  /  have  not  been  (or  /  was  not)  allowed  to  (where 
to  also  requires  an  infinitive  to  be  understood). — ^cifecn  bid, 
f)oren  hear,  l^elfcn  help,  laffen  let  and  fe^en  see  (sometimes  also 
braud^en  need,  le^ren  teach,  Icrnen  learn  and  madden  make)  follow 
the  same  construction :  id^  l^abc  l{)n  ge^cn  laffen  (for  gelaffen)  I  {have) 
let  him  go,  man  l^attc  mld^  fommcn  felien  they  had  seen  me  come. 

(6)  3^/  like  to  in  Enghsh,  is  omitted  before  an  infinitive 
accompanying  a  modal  auxiliary:  Id^  toiU  nad^  §aufe  gef)en  unb 
arbciten  /  will  go  home  and  work. 

28.  SBiffen  know  resembles  the  modal  auxiliaries  in  the  in- 
flection of  its  simple  forms : 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Past  Ind. 

Past.  Subj. 

td^    iDcig 

id^    tDiffe 

id^     tDufetc 

td^     tDii^tc 

bn    n)Ct6t 

bu    trlffeft 

bn    liDufetcft 

bu    tPiipcft 

cr    n)ei6 

er     tDiffe 

er     tDufete 

er     n)u6te 

n)ir  tDiffcn 

n)lr  miffen 

tDxx  tDu^tcn 

iDir  tDiipcn 

i^r  tDifet 

i^r    h)iffet 

i^r    iDufetet 

i^r    hjufetct 

fie     tDlffCtt 

fie     iDiffctt 

fie     tdu^icn 

fie    JDiifetctt 

VERB   INFLECTIONS  207 

Imperative  Present  Infinitive 

2.  sing.  h)tffe  '  (gu)  toi\\m 

2.  plur.  tDiffct 
2.  sing,  or  plur.  toiffcn  ©ic 

Present  Participle  Past  Participle 

toiffcnb  getoufet 

The  compound  forms  are  made  with  l^abcn  and  have  none  of 
the  irregular  constructions  and  uses  of  the  modal  auxiliaries: 
fut.  ind.  i(^  njcrbc  iDlffcn;  perf.  ind.  id^  l^abc  gciuufet  etc.  An  accom- 
panying infinitive  requires  gu:  cr  l^at  eg  nid^t  anjufangcn  gctDU^ 
he  did  not  know  how  to  go  at  it.  For  toiffcn  as  distinguished  from 
fcnncn  and  ffitinen,  see  186. 

Reflexive  Verbs 

29.  In  German,  as  in  English,  transitive  verbs  are  often  used 
with  a  reflexive  pronoun  for  an  object,  e.  g.,  cr  gcigt  ftd^  he  shows 
himself,  fie  getgt  fl(^  she  shows  herself.  But  German,  unlike 
English,  uses  some  verbs  refiexively  though  the  reflexive  pro- 
noun is  no  longer  felt  as  an  object  and  the  verbal  idea  of  the 
combination  has  become  virtually  intransitive,  e.  g.,  er  freut  fic^  (he 
gladdens  himself ,  i.  e.)  he  rejoices  or  is  glad.  —  The  inflection  of 
the  verb  itself  is  either  strong  or  weak,  as  the  case  may  be,  with 
i)abcn  for  an  auxiliary.  The  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  3.  person,  for 
both  numbers  and  all  genders,  is  fic^  (39) .  For  the  other  persons 
the  corresponding  personal  pronoun  is  used,  as  shown  below. 

Infiliitive 

M  W  h^W^  (^)  ^how  one's  self  fic§  (gu)  frcucn  (to)  rejoice 

Present  Indicative 

i^  jclgc  tnid^  I  show  myself  i^  frcuc  ntid^  I  rejoice 

bu  geigft  bid^   you  show  yourself  bu  frcuft  bld^   you  rejoice 

er  geigt  fid^  he  shows  himself  er  freut  fid^  etc. 

fie  geigt  fid^   she  shows  herself  fie  freut  fid^ 

eS  geigt  fid^  it  shows  itself  e^  freut  fid^ 

h)ir  geigeu  uu^   we  show  ourselves  rtilr  freueu  un^ 

il^r  geigt  eud^  you  show  yourselves  i1)v  freut  eud^ 

fie  geigeu  fid^   they  show  themselves  fie  freueu  fld^ 

(Bie  geigeu  ftd^  you  show  yourself  (Bit  freuen  fid^ 
or  yourselves 


208  AN  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

Imperative 
gcigc  btd^   show  yourself  frcuc  bld^ 

geigt  cud^   show  yourselves  freut  cud^  [  rejoice 

geigen  ©ic  [id^  s/iow?  yourself  frcucn  ©ic  fid^ 

or  yourselves 

Perfect  Indicative 

td^  l^abc  mid^  Qejelgt  id^  l^abc  mid^  gefrcut 

bu  l^aft  bid^  gcgeigt  bu  l^aft  blc^  gefrcut 

etc.  etc. 

Some  reflexive  verbs  govern  the  dative.  In  the  inflection  of 
these,  substitute  mir  for  mifi)  and  blr  for  bid^;  e.  g.,  id^  fc^metc^lc 
ntir  /  flatter  myself,  bu  fd^meld^elft  bit  you  flatter  yourself,  and,  in 
the  2.  sing,  imperat.,  fd^melc^Ie  blr  flatter  yourself. 

Impersonal  Verbs 

30.  Impersonal  verbs  ascribe  an  action  or  a  state  to  an  indefinite  agent 
or  subject,  c8  it,  or  express  a  verbal  idea  without  reference  to  a  subject. 
Their  inflection  is  strong  or  weak,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  almost  all  of  them 
take  l^abcn  for  an* auxiliary;  thus  c8  rcgnct  it  rains,  c«  regnete  it  rained,  c3  toiixbt 
tcflticn  it  would  rain,  c«  l^at  gercgnct  it  has  rained  etc. 

Compound  Verbs 

31.  There  are  two  classes  of  compound  verbs:  those  with  in- 
separable prefixes  and  those  with  separable  prefixes. 

Inseparable  Compounds 

32.  The  Inseparable  Prefixes  are  be,  emp,  ent,  tx,  ge,  t)cr,  gcr. 
Verbs  compounded  with  these  have  the  principal  accent  on  the 
stem  and  are  inflected  like  simple  verbs,  except  that  the  past 
participle  omits  the  prefix  gc;  thus,  bcrfte'^cn  t)erftanb'  tjerftan'ben 
(not  „get)erftanben")  understand. 

33.  Model.    iBefd^rci'ben     befd^ricb'    bcfd^rie'ben    describe 

Simple  Forms 

Pres.  Ind.               Pres.  Subj.  Past  Ind.                 Past  Subj. 

id^  befc^rci'be      tc^  bcfd^rei'bc  i^  befd^rieb'  id^  befd^rie'bc 

bu  befd^reibft'      bu  bcfc^rei'bcft  bu  befc^rlebff  bu  befc^rie'bcft 

etc.                    etc.  etc.                     etc. 


VERB   INFLECTIONS 


209 


Imperative 

Present  Infinitive 

2.  sing,  befd^rei'bc 

(au)  befd^rcl'bcTi 

2.  plur.  befd^reibf 

2.  sing,  or  plur.  bcfd^rei'bcn  <Bk 

Present  Participle 

Past  Participle 

bcfd^rct'benb 

bcfd^ric'bcn 

Compound  Forms 

They  are  made  with  l^abcn 

Separable  Compounds 

34.  Separable 

Prefixes.     Among    the 

commonest    separable 

prefixes  are: 

ah  off 

ctnpor'  up(ward) 

t)or  before,  pre- 

an  on,  at 

cntge'gen  toward,  to  meet 

Dorbei'  by,  past 

auf  up,  upon 

fcft  fast,  firm 

toorii'ber  by,  past 

aug  out,  from 

fort  forth,  away,  on 

t)or'tt)artg  forward,  on 

bet  by,  to 

f)dm  home 

h)cg  away,  off,  from 

ha  there 

log  loose,  off 

totVttx  further,  on 

bar  there,  in  view 

mit  with,  along 

gu  to,  toward 

batoon'  aiya?/,  along 

nad^  after,  for 

gurilcf'  back 

tin  into 

nic'ber  down 

gufam'mcn  together 

To  these  add  l^er  hither,  here,  this  way,  along  this  way,  \)m 
thither,  there,  that  way,  along  that  way  and  certain  compounds  of 
l^cr  and  ^in,  as  appearing  in  verbs  like 

l^crab'l^angcn  hang  down  (from  above,  this  way) 

l^eran'fommcn  come  on,  along  this  way;  approach 

l^erauf  bringcn  bring,  or  carry,  up  (from  below,  this  way) 

l^erau^'treten  step  out  (from  within,  this  way) 

uml^er'ftiegen  fly  around,  about,  this  way  and  that 

]^inab'gcf)en  go  down  (that  way,  from  up  here) 

l^inauf  blicfen  look  up  (that  way,  from  below  here) 

l^inaug'tDerfen  throw  out  (that  way,  from  within  here) 

l^inein'trcten  step  in  (that  way,  from  without  here) 

35.  Accent  and  Construction.  Separable  compounds  differ 
from  the  inseparable  in  four  points:  (1)  the  prefix  has  the  prin- 
cipal accent;  (2)  in  the  present  and  past  (ind.  and  subj.)  and  in 


210  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

the  imperative,  the  prefix  is  separated  from  the  verb  and  put  at 
the  end  of  the  clause,  unless  the  clause  be  a  dependent  one  with 
transposed  order,  in  which  case  the  prefix  remains  united  with 
the  verb :  i<i)  fangc  ein  neue^  ^ud^  an'  /  am  beginning  a  new  book; 
fangc  noc^  fcin  neuc^  ^U(^  an'  don't  begin  a  new  book  yet;  cr 
fagt,  cr  fangc  cin  ncuc^  53u(f)  an^  he  says  he  is  beginning  .  .  .;  but 
cr  fagt,  ha^  cr  cin  ncuc^  33uc^  an'fangc  he  says  that  he  is  .  .   .; 

(3)  the  gc  of  the  past  participle  is  put  between  the  prefix  and 
the  verb:  id^  ^abc  cin  ncuc^  iBud^  an'gcfangcn  /  have  begun  .  .  .  ; 

(4)  when  the  infinitive  requires  gu  to,  this  is  put  between  the 
prefix  and  the  verb:  cr  bat  ntld^,  cin  ncuc^  ^ud^  an'^ufangcn  he 
begged  me  to  begin  .  .  . 

36.  Model.    5ln'fangcn    fing  an'    an'gcfangcn    begin 

Simple  Forms 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Subj.  Past  Ind.  Past  Subj. 

i<i)  fangc  an'  id)  fangc  an'  td^  fing  an'  id^  fingc  an' 

bu  fangft  an'  bu  fangcft  an'  bu  fingft  an'  bu  fingcft  an' 

cr  fangt  an'    *  cr  fangc  an'  cr  fing  an'  cr  fingc  an' 

h)ir  fangcn  an'  toir  fangcn  an'  n)ir  fingcn  an'  h)ir  fingcn  an' 
etc.                       etc.                      etc.  etc. 

Imperative  Present  Infinitive 
2.  sing,  fang(c)  an'  an'fangcn 

2.  plur.  fangt  an'  an'pfangcn 

2.  sing,  or  plur.  fangcn  (Sic  an' 

Present  Participle  Past  Participle 

an'fangcnb  an'gcfangcn 

Compound  Forms 
They  are  made  with  l^abcn 

37.  Prefixes  Separable  or  Inseparable.  (1)  ^urd^  through, 
iibcr  over,  across,  um  around,  about,  untcr  under  and  iDicbcr  again 
form  both  separable  and  inseparable  compounds.  As  a  rule, 
these  prefixes  are  separable  when  used  in  a  literal  sense,  i.  e., 
with  the  meanings  given  above,  and  inseparable  when  used  in  a 
derived  or  figurative  sense.  This  twofold  use  has  its  counterpart 
in  English;  thus,  from  nntcr  under  and  gct)cn  go  are  made 


VERB   INFLECTIONS 


211 


un'tergel^en 
ging  un'tcr 
un'tergegangcn 


go  un'der 
went  un'der 
gone  un'der 


and   untergc'l^cn 
and    unterging' 
and   imtcrgan'gcn 


undergo' 

underwent' 

undergone^ 


Some  of  the  commonest  compounds  with  burd^,  liber,  um,  untcr 
and  toicber  are; 

Separable 


burd^'brtngcn 

brang  burd^' 

ift  burd^'gebn 

mgcn    press  through 

ii'berfe^en 

fe^te  ii'ber 

ii'bcrgcfe^t 

ferry  over 

um'bringcn 

brac^te  urn' 

um'gebrad^t 

kill,  murder 

um'fe^ren 

fcl^rte  um' 

um'gcfcl^rt 

turn  round 

um'fontTncn 

fam  um' 

ift  um'gefommen       'perish 

um'fe^en  refl. 

fa^  um' 

um'gcfel^en 

look  round,  hack 

iDie'bcrbrlngcn 

brad^tc  tDic'ber  iDic'bcrgcbrad^t           bring  hack 

mic'berl^olen 

l^oltc  hJie'bet 

'    n)ic'berge()olt 

fetch  hack 

tDie'berfommcn  fatn  mic'bcr 

ift  tDic'bcrgcfommcn   come  again,  return 

tDic'berfcl^cn 

\q^  mlc'ber 

toie'bergefcl^cn 
Inseparable 

see  or  meet  again 

burd^brln'gcn 

burd^brang' 

burd^bnm'gcn 

permeate 

iiberfarien 

uberfter 

iiberfarien 

surprise,  attack 

iibcrge'ben 

iibergab' 

iiberge'ben 

deliver  up,  surrender 

iiberlaf'fen 

uberltcfe' 

iiberlaf'fen 

turn  over  to,  make  over  tc 

iiberlc'gen 

iibcrleg'tc 

uberlegt' 

consider,  think  over 

iiberne^'mcn 

iibema^m' 

libemom'men 

take  upon  one's  self 

iiberra'fc^en 

iibcrrafd^'te 

iiberrafc^t' 

surprise 

ilbcrfe'^cn 

iibcrfa^' 

iiberfe'^en 

overlook 

iiberfefgctt 

iiberje^'tc 

liberfefef 

translate 

iibergcu'gcn 

iibergeug'te 

iibergcugt' 

convince 

umge'ben 

umgab' 

umge'ben 

surround 

unterbre'd^cn 

unterbrad^' 

unterbro'd^en 

interrupt 

unterl^arten 

unterl^iett' 

unter^al'tcn 

entertain,  support 

unteme'l^meii 

untema^m' 

untemorn'men 

undertake 

unterfc^ei'ben 

untcrfc^ieb' 

unterfd^le'beu 

discriminate,  distinguish 

untcrftlit'gen 

unterftii^'tc 

unterftli^t' 

support,  aid 

untcrfu'c^en 

unterfud^'te 

untcrfud^t' 

investigate,  examine 

njieber^olcn 

tr>ieberf)ortc 

iDieberI)oIt' 

repeat 

(2)  With  the  prefixes  in  (1)   above  are  sometimes  classed  the 


212 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


following :  l^inter  behind,  mi^  amiss,  mis-,  bolt  fully,  h)ibcr  against, 
re-.     Their  commonest  compounds,  however,  are  inseparable: 


l^interlaf'fen 

Tniprau'c^en 

bollbrln'gen 

t)oIten'bcn 

hjiberfet'gcn  refl. 

tDiberfpre'd^en 

toiberfte'^en 


l^interllcg' 

ntipraud^'tc 

toollbrac^'tc 

Dollen'bete 

h)lberfefe'te 

tDiberfprad^' 

miberftanb' 


l^intertaf'fen 

mifebraud^t' 

t)ottbrad^t' 

t)oIIen'bet 

iDiberfc^t' 

hJiberfpro'd^en 

iDiberftan'bcn 


leave  behind,  bequeath 
misuse,  abuse 
accomplish,  finish 
complete,  finish 
resist,  oppose 
gainsay,  contradict 
resist,  withstand 


II.     ODD  OR  UNCLASSIFIED  INFLECTIONS 
Personal  Pronouns 
38.  FIRST  PERSON  SECOND  PERSON 


SINGULAR 

SINGULAR 

SING.  AND  PLUR 

N. 

ic^  / 

bu  thou,  you 

<©ie  you 

G. 

meiner,  mein  of 

me     beincr,  beln  of  thee,  of  you 

3?^rer  0/  2/0?^ 

D. 

mir  to  me 

bir  to  thee,  to  you 

3:^neTi  to  you 

A. 

mid^  me    • 

PLURAL 

bld^  thee,  you 

PLURAL 

(Sie  2/0^ 

N. 

Xoxx  we 

\%x  ye,  you 

G. 

unfcr  of  us 

cucr  of  you 

D. 

un^  to  us 

cud^  to  you 

A. 

un^  us 

cud^  you 

THIRD   PERSON   SINGULAR 

masc. 

fem. 

neut. 

N. 

er  he 

fie  she 

e«  it 

• 

G. 

feiner,  fcin  of 

him         \\)Xtx  of  her 

feiner, 

fein  of  it 

D. 

t^m  to  him 

\\)X  to  her 

il^m  to  it 

A. 

il)n  him 

fie  her 

THIRD   PERSON   PLURAL 

m.  f.  n. 
N.     fie  they 
G.     tl^rer  of  them 
D.     tfjnen  to  them 
A.      fie  them 

ee  it 

ODD    OR   UNCLASSIFIED    INFLECTIONS  213 

Reflexive,  Reciprocal  and  Intensive  Pronouns 

39.  Reflexive  Pronouns.  German  has  no  special  forms  for  the  first  and 
second  persons  of  the  reflexive  pronoun,  i.  e.,  for  myself,  thyself,  yourself  and 
yourselves,  but  uses  the  personal  pronouns  instead.  Nor  has  it  more  than  one 
form,  namely  fid^,  for  both  numbers  and  all  genders  of  the  third  person,  i.  e., 
for  himself,  herself,  itself  and  themselves,  or  for  yourself  and  yourselves  when 
referring  to  <Sie.  See  the  inflection  of  reflexive  verbs,  29.  —  After  prepositions 
fid^  often  corresponds  to  the  personal  pronoun  in  English:  cr  l^at  ®clb  bci  [id^ 
he  has  m^ney  with  him,  fie  legte  baS  33ud^  \30X  fid^  she  laid  the  book  before  her. 

40.  The  Reciprocal  Pronoun  is  the  indeclinable  cinanbcr;  but  where  no 
ambiguity  can  arise,  unS,  cud^  and  fid^  are  likewise  used  in  a  reciprocal  sense : 
h)ir  fallen  cinanber  or  unS  (ace.)  we  saw  each  other  or  one  another;  iuir  begegncten 
cinanber  or  un6  (dat.)  we  met  each  other  or  one  another;  i()r  fel^t  eitianbcr  or  cud^ 
you  see  each  other  or  one  another;  fie  bcgegnen  cinanber  or  fid^  they  meet  each 
other  or  one  another. 

41,  The  Intensive  or  Emphatic  Pronoun  is  the  indeclinable  fclbft  (or  fel* 
ber):  id)  fclbft  h)or  ha  I  myself  was  there,  (2ie  l^obcn  c«  fclbft  getan  you  did  it 
yourself  or  yourselves,  bcr  ^aifer  fclbft  fommanbicrte  bic  Xruppcn  the  emperor 
himself  commanded  the  troops,  ftc  fd^lfigt  fid^  fclbft  she  strikes  herself. 

The  Demonstrative  and  Relative  Pronoun  !Der 

42,  ^cr,  as  demonstrative  pronoun  meaning  that,  that  one,  he, 
she,  it  etc.,  and  bcr,  as  relative  pronoun  meaning  who,  which,  that, 
are  inflected  alike: 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N. 

ber 

bie 

ba^ 

bic 

G. 

beffen 

beren 

beffen 

beren 

D. 

bcm 

bcr 

bcm 

bcnen 

A. 

ben 

bic 

bag 

bic 

The  gen.  sing.  masc.  and  neut.  of  the  demonstrative  is  sometimes  ht9,  as  in 
bcSnjcgcn  on  that  account;  the  gen.  plur.  is  bcrer  before  a  relative:  bcrcr,  btc  nO(^ 
lommcn  follcn  of  those  who  are  yet  to  come. 

The  Interrogative  and  Relative  Pronouns 
SBcr  and  SBa« 
43.  2Scr,  as  interrogative  pronoun  meaning  who,  and  totx,  as 
relative  pronoun  meaning  whoever  or  he  who,  are  inflected  alike. 
2Sa^,  as  interrogative  pronoun  meaning  what,  and  tva^,  as  relative 
pronoun  meaning  whatever  or  that  which,  are  inflected  alike.  Both 
iDcr  and  toa^  have  no  plural,  and  tt)a6  lacks  also  the  dative: 


214 


AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


N.  n)cr  who 

G.  tDcffcn  whose 

D.  toem  to  whom 

A.  torn  whom 


IDQ^   what 
meffcn  o/  M;/iai 
wanting 
toa&   what 


The  gen.  is  sometimes  tnt^,  especially  in  compounds,  as  tuc^l^alb? /or  what 
reason?  why? 

Indefinite  Pronouns 

44.  ^cbermann.  everybody,  jemanb  somebody  and  nicinanb  nobody 
form  the  genitives  jebennann^,  jemanbe^  and  niemanbc^  or  nic- 
manb^.  For  the  dative  and  accusative,  the  nominative  form  is 
used,  but  jemanb  and  niemanb  have  also  a  dative  in  em  or  en  and 
an  accusative  in  en. 


III.     COMPLETE  STRONG  INFLECTION 

45.  The  words  below  are  inflected  alike;  only  the  definite 
article  ber  the  (as  emphatic  demonstrative  adjective  meaning 
that)  differs  slightly  from  the  rest  in  having  ie  where  the  others 
have  c  and,  m  two  cases  (nom.  ace.  sing,  neut.),  a^  where  the 
others  have  c^,  —  The  last  five  words  occur  more  frequently  in 
the  plural  than  in  the  singular. 

NOMINATIVE   SINGULAR 


m. 

f. 

n. 

ber 

hie 

ha^ 

the  (that) 

biefcr 

biefe 

btefe^ 

this 

ieber 

}ebe 

iebe)^ 

each,  every,  everybody 

jencr 

iene 

jcne^ 

that,  that  one,  yon 

mand^cr 

mcind^e 

man(i)t^ 

many  a,  many  a  one 

fold^cr 

We 

fold^c^ 

such,  such  a  one 

tt)tld)tt 

tDCld^C 

tod(i)C§ 

which,  what,  who 

atter 

aire 

allt^ 

all,  every,  everything 

anberer 

anberc 

anbere!^ 

other,  different 

beiber 

beibe 

beibe^ 

both,  two,  either 

einiger 

einige 

einige^ 

some,  a  few 

nte^rcrer 

mel^rere 

mel^rere^ 

several 

Dicier 

t)iele 

Dieted 

much,  many 

toenlger 

iDenige 

toenige^ 

little,  a  litUe,  few 

DEFECTIVE   STRONG   INFLECTION 


215 


46. 

Inflection  of  bcr: 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

m. 

f.           n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N. 

bcr 

btc      ha^  the  (that) 

bte  the  (those) 

G. 

be^ 

bcr     bc^  of  the  (of  that) 

bcr   of  the  (of  those) 

D. 

bcm 

bcr     bcm  to  the  (to  that) 

htn  to  the  (to  those) 

A. 

bCtl 

hit      ha^   the  (that) 

bic  the  (those) 

47. 

Inflection  of  biefer,  Jebcr  etc. : 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

m. 

f.               n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N. 

biefer 

bicfc        biefc^^   this 

biefe  these 

G. 

bicfe^ 

biefer      biefci^  of  this 

biefer  of  these 

D. 

biefcm 

biefer      biefcm  to  this 

biefen  to  these 

A. 

bicfcti 

biefe        biefC!^^   this 

biefe  these 

Often  contracted  to  bic«. 


48.  The  endings  of  biefer,  }eber  etc.,  as  also  those  of  ber,  are 
called  the  '' strong"  endings,  and  this  mode  of  inflection  is  called 
the  "  complete  "  strong  inflection,  in  distinction  from  the  "  defect- 
ive" strong  inflection  below  (50). 

49.  Common  contractions  of  the  definite  article  with  prepositions  are 


am=an  bent  at  the 

im=in  bem  in  the 

bom  =  don  bem  of  the,  from  the 

gum=ju  bcm  to  the 

beim=bet  htm  at  the 

an8=on  ha^  to  the,  towards  the 


aufg=Quf  bag  upon  the 
burc^g=burci^  ba^  through  the 
fUr«  =  fUr  ba«  for  the 
in«=tn  ba^  into  the 
bor6=t)or  ha^  before  the 
3ur=ju  ber  to  the 


IV.     DEFECTIVE  STRONG  INFLECTION 

50.  The  words  below  are  inflected  like  biefer,  jeber  etc.,  that 
is,  with  strong  endings  (48);  only  the  nominative  singular  mas- 
culine and  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  neuter  are 
without  ending.  Their  inflection  is  therefore  caUed  the  "de- 
fective" strong  inflection,  in  distinction  from  the  "complete" 
strong  inflection  above.  —  The  indefinite  article  ein  a,  an  (as 
emphatic  numeral  adjective  meaning  one)  has  no  plural. 


216 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


NOMINATIVE 

SINGULAR 

m. 

f. 

n. 

cin 

cine 

cin 

a,  an  (one) 

fcin 

fcinc 

fcin 

no 

mcin 

meinc 

mcin 

my 

bcin 

bcinc 

bcin 

thy,  your 

fcin 

fcine 

fcin 

his 

i^r 

il^re 

i^r 

her 

fcin 

feinc 

fcin 

its 

unfcr 

unferc^ 

unfcr 

our 

cuer 

euere^ 

cucr 

your 

i^r 

i^re 

i^r 

their 

S^v 

3^rc 

3^x 

your 

*  When  inflected,  unfcr  and  cucr  often  drop  the  c  before  the  r  of  the  stem, 
j>T  the  c  of  the  endings  cm  and  en,  e.  g.,  unfrc,  curcr,  unfrcd,  unfrcm  or  unfcmt, 
eurcm  or  cucrm. 

51.  Inflection  of  ein: 


SINGULAR 

m. 

f. 

n. 

N.     cin    • 

cine 

cin 

a  (one) 

G.     cinc^ 

ciner 

cinc^ 

of  a  (of 

one) 

D.     cinem 

eincr 

cinem 

to  a  (to 

one) 

A.      cincn 

cine 

cin 

a  (one) 

52,  Inflection  of  fcin: 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

N.     fcin 

fcine 

fcin 

no 

fcine 

no 

G.     fcine^ 

feiner 

fcine^ 

of  no 

feiner 

of  no 

D.      fcincm 

feiner 

feinem 

to  no 

fcinen 

to  no 

A.      fcinctt 

fcine 

fcin 

no 

fcine 

no 

V.     NOUN  INFLECTIONS 

53.  Nouns  are  divided  into  four  classes,  according  to  the  form 
of  the  nominative  plural,  as  compared  with  that  of  the  nomina- 
tive singular. 

I.     Nom.  pi.  =  nom.  sing.,  sometimes  1      modify- 

II.     Nom.  pi.  =  nom.  sing. +  e,  usually  I  ing 

III.  Nom.  pi.  =  nom.  sing. +  er,  always  I  the 

IV.  Nom.  pi.  =  nom.  sing. +n  or  en,  never]  stem-vowel^ 


NOUN   INFLECTIONS  217 

^  Only  nouns  in  turn  (61)  modify  the  vowel  of  this  suffix  instead. 

Most  compound  nouns  have  the  inflection  and  gender  of  the  final  member. 

54.  The  Oblique  Cases  of  the  Singular.  1.  Feminines  of  all 
Classes  have  the  oblique  cases  (gen.,  dat.,  ace.)  like  the  nominative. 

2.  Masculines  and  neuters  of  Classes  I-III  take  c^  or  ^  in  the 
genitive,  c  or  no  ending  in  the  dative,  and  have  the  accusative 
like  the  nominative. 

Those  in  unaccented  t,  t\,  en,  tt,  d^CTi  or  Icitl  add  d  for  the  gen.  and  no  end- 
ing for  the  dat. ;  those  in  an  s-sound,  cd  for  the  gen.  and  c  or  no  ending  for 
the  dat. ;  all  others,  if  monosyllabic,  prefer  c8  in  the  gen.  and  c  in  the  dat., 
or,  if  polysyllabic,  ^  in  the  gen.  and  no  ending  in  the  dative.  After  preposi- 
tions, however,  and  before  vowels,  even  monosyllables  are  apt  to  reject  the 
dative-c. 

3.  Masculines  (there  are  no  neuters)  of  Class  IV  form  the 
oblique  cases  of  the  singular  like  the  nominative  plural  (55). 

55.  The  Oblique  Cases  of  the  Plural,  in  all  Classes,  are  hke 
the  nominative  plural,  except  that  the  dative  adds  n  if  this 
nominative  does  not  already  end  in  n. 

Class  I 

56.  Here  belong:  1.  All  nouns  with  the  suffixes  d^cn  and  Icin 
—  these  are  neuter  diminutives. 

2.  All  masculines  and  neuters  in  cl,  en  and  cr. 

The  neuters  in  en  (sometimes  only  n)  include  all  infinitives  used  as  nouns, 
e.  g.,  ha^  2c[en  reading;  they  seldom  occur  in  the  plural. 

3.  All  neuters  in  c  with  the  prefix  ®c. 

4.  Only  two  feminines :  Tlutitv  (plur.  ii)  mother,  Xo(i)ttx  (plur.  iJ) 
daughter. 

There  are  also  only  two  monosyllables  in  Class  I:  ba^  <Bdn  being,  ba«  Xun 
doings,  conduct,  both  infinitive  nouns. 

57.  Models.  1.  With  vowel  unchanged  in  the  plural:  bcr 
SSagen  wagon,  ba^  ©ebftu'be  building,  ba^  Tlahd)m  girl. 

N.  ber    SSagcn  ba«  ©ebiiu'bc  ba«  SD^abd^cn 

G.  beg   ^ai^tn^  ht^    (S^ebau'be^  be^  mdhii)tn^ 

D.  bcm  SBagen  bcm  (^ebau'bc  bem  9}^abc^en 

A.  ben  SSagen  bag  Q^ebau'be  bag  ai^abd^en 


218 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


N.     bit    SBagcn  hit    ©cbau'bc 

G.     bcr    3Sagcn  bcr    ©ebau'bc 

D.     ben  SSagcn  ben  ©cbau'bcn 

A.      ble    ilBagen  bic    ©ebiiu'bc 

2.  With  vowel  modified  in  the  plural:  ber 
SSatcr  father,  hit  SO^uttcr  mother. 

N.     bcr   @artcn  bcr   33atcr 

G.     beg   ©artcn^  bc^    5Batcr^ 

D.     bcm  @artcn  bent  33atcr 

A.     ben  ®arten  ben  53ater 


N.  bte  @drtcn 

G.  ber  ©drten 

D.  ben  ©arten 

A.  bic  @drten 


bic  3Sdtcr 

bcr  3Sdtcr 

ben  53dtcm 

bic  35dter 


bic  SO^dbd^cn 

ber  9D^db(^cn 

ben  SDIdbc^en 

bic  5D?dbd^en 

Garten  garden,  bcr 

bic  ^mutter 

bcr  2)hittcr 

ber  arhittcr 

bic  mntttx 

hit  miitttx 

ber  mLtttx 

htn  SD^iittem 

bie  aJHitter 


58.  The  following  masculines  are  declined  like  $Sagen,  except 
that  most  of  them  regularly  drop  the  n  of  the  nominative  singular: 


bcr  gncbc(n)   peace 

ber  ©cbanfc  thought 

bcr  ©laube  faith 

ber  §aufc(n)   heap,  pile 

N.  ber   "Hflamt 

G.  beg   "iRamtn^ 

D.  bcm  9^anTcn 

A.  ben  ^antcn 


ber  9^amc  name 
ber  (Bamt(n)   seed     ' 
bcr  ®ci^abe(n)   damage 
ber  ^illc  will 

hit  ^^lantcn 

ber  9^amen 

ben  9^amcn 

bie  5^amcn 


^cr  %tl\tn  or  ber  %ti^  rock  is  declined  as  follows :  gen.  gclfcn^  or 
gclfcn;  dat.  ace.  gclfen  or  gcl^;  plur.  gclfcn. 


Class  II 

59.  Here  belong:  1.  All  nouns  with  the  suffixes  i(i),  tg,  tng 
and  ling  —  these  are  masculine  and  without  change  of  vowel  in 
the  plural. 

2.  All  nouns  in  ni^  and  fal  —  most  of  these  are  neuter,  some 
feminine,  and  all  without  change  of  vowel  in  the  plural. 

3.  The  majority  of  monosyllabic  nouns  —  most  of  these  are 
masculine  and  usually  modified  in  the  plural;  35  are  feminine, 


NOUN   INFLECTIONS  219 

also  modified;  and  40  are  neuter,  not  modified.     Many  can  easily 
be  recognized  as  masculines  by  their  final  letters;  e.  g., 

g:  bcr  SBcg  way,  bcr  ®ang  gait,  ber  ^rug  jug,  bcr  ^ag  day,  ber 
iBerg  mountain  (but  bie  iBurg  cas^/e,  CI.  IV) 

11:    bcr  gait  fall,  case,  bcr  iBall  6aZZ,  bcr  ^o\\  toll,  inch 
m(tn):  bcr  3:urm  ioi^^er,  bcr  SBaum  ^ree,  bcr  ^amm  co?n6  (but  bag 
?amm  /am6,  CI.  Ill) 

^f :  bcr  2:opf  ;?o^,  bcr  ^opf  head,  bcr  ^ampf  j^s'^^,  ^^^^  ©tutnpf  stump, 
bcr  ^ampf  s^eam,  vajpor 

f^:  bcr  2:tf(^  to6Ze,  bcr  grofd^  frog,  bcr  SSunfd^  wish  (but  bcr  SD^cnfd^ 
man,  CI.  IV) 

ft:  bcr  (Spag  joke,  bcr  @ptc6  spear,  bcr  ^ug  tos  (but  bag  (Sd^Iofe 

castle,  CI.  Ill) 
^:  bcr  *ipia^  pZace,  bcr  ^lo^  %,  bcr  53U^  /as^ 

60.   Models.      1.  With  vowel  modified  in  the  plural:  bcr  ^opf 
head,  bcr  glufe  river,  bic  ^anb  hand. 


N. 

bcr    topf 

ber    g(u6 

bie  §anb 

G. 

beg   topfc^ 

beg    glnffe^ 

bcr  §anb 

D. 

bcm  topfc 

bem  gluffe 

ber  §anb 

A. 

ben   topf 

ben  glu6 

bic  ^anb 

N. 

bic    ^iipfc 

bic    gtiiffc 

bic  §anbe 

G. 

bcr    tfipfc 

ber    gluffe 

bcr  ^cinbe 

D. 

ben  ^opfctt 

ben  glilffcn 

ben  ^(inbctt 

A. 

bic    topfc 

bie    gluffc 

bic  §anbc 

ith 

vowel  unchanged  in  the  plural: 

bcr  Stag  day,  be 

th. 

"iia^  3a]^r  year. 

bag  ©c^cim'nig  secret. 

N. 

bcr   3:ag 

bcr   ^mo'nat 

bag  3a^r 

G. 

beg   Jagc^ 

beg    ^mo'nat^ 

beg   3a^rc)^ 

D. 

bem  2^agc 

bcm  SDIo'nat 

bcm  ^(x\)xt 

A. 

ben  2^ag 

htn  mo'mi 

bag  3a()r 

N. 

bie    2:agc 

bic    SOb'nate 

bie    3a]^rc 

G. 

ber   3:age 

ber    90^0'nate 

ber   3a^re 

D. 

ben  3:^agcn 

ben  SD^o'natcn 

'^tn  Sal^rcn 

A. 

bic    Jage 

bic    mQ'mit 

bic    3a^re 

220  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

Nouns  in  ni^  double  the  ^  before  endings. 

N.  ba^  ©el^eim'nlg  N.  hit  ©el^eim'ttiffe 

G.  be«   ©e^eim'niffc^  G.  bcr  ©e^elm'nlffc 

D.  betn  ®tt)dm'm^  D.  ben  ©e^clm'mffcn 

A.  ba^  @ef)eiTn'ni«  A.  bie  ©e^eim'niffe 

Class  III 

61.  Here  belong:  1.  All  nouns  with  the  suffix  turn  (plur. 
tlimcr)  —  these,  with  the  exception  of  bcr  3n:tum  error  and  bcr 
D^tcld^tum  wealth,  are  neuter. 

2.  About  50  monosyllabic  neuters,  also  a  few  neuters  with  the 
prefix  @c,  but  without  the  suffix  c  (56.  3),  as  ba^  ©cfid^t  face. 

3.  About  a  dozen  monosyllabic  masculines. 
There  are  no  feminines  in  Class  III. 

63.  Models.  ^a§  §au§  hoicse,  bcr  'iDlann  man,  ha^  §cr'gogtutn 
dukedom. 

N.  ba§  ^§aug  bcr   Tlann  bag  ^er'gogtum 

G.  beg   ^aufc)§  beg   SD^anne^  beg   ^er'gogtum^ 

D.  betn  §aufc  bent  SJJannc  bent  §er'gogtunt 

A.  bag  §aug  ben  Tlann  bag  ^er'gogtutn 

N.  bie  §aufcr  bie  SO^iinncr  bie  ^er'gogtiintcr 

G.  bcr  §aufcr  bcr  SO^anncr  ber  ^er'gogtiintcr 

D.  ben  ^aufcrn  ben  Mdnntxn  ben  ^er'gogtuntcm 

A.  bie  §aufcr  bie  SJJanncr  bie  ^er'gogtiimcr 

Class  IV 

63.  Here  belong:  1.  All  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  in 
ei',  crei',  l^eit,  in,  feit,  fd^aft  and  ung,  also  those  with  the  foreign 
suffixes  a'ge,  ie',  if,  ion',  ur'  and  tat' —  all  these  are  feminines. 

2.  All  other  feminines  of  more  than  one  syllable  (except  bie 
Tlutttx,  bie  3:ocl^ter,  56.  4,  and  a  few  in  nig  or  fal,  59.  2 )  — 
among  them  are  hundreds  ending  in  c. 

3.  About  60  feminines  of  one  syllable. 

4.  About  20  masculines  of  one  syllable. 

5.  All   masculines  of  more  than   one  syllable  in  c  and  many 


NOUN   INFLECTIONS 


221 


foreign  masculines  of  more  than  one  syllable  with  the  accent  on 
the  last,  e.  g.,  bcr  (Stubcnf  student. 

There  are  no  neuters  in  Class  IV. 

Nouns  in  e,  cl  or  er  add  n  for  inflection,  others  en  (53.  iv).  But 
bcr  §err  gentleman  adds  only  n  in  the  singular :  bc^,  bem,  ben  ^erm 
(the  plural  is  regular:  bie,  ber,  ben,  bie  ^errcn),  and  nouns  in  in 
double  the  n  before  endings  (see  ^fi'nigin  below). 


64.  Models.     1.  Feminines:  1 

)ie  gran 

woman,  bie  iBIumc  flower, 

bie  ^o'nigin  queen. 

N.     bie    gran             bie 

^lumc 

bie    ^a'nigin 

G.     ber   gran             ber 

mumt 

ber   ^(i'nigin 

D.     ber   gran             ber 

33Iume 

ber   ^ii'nigin 

A.     bie    gran             bie 

^lume 

bie  ^6'nigin 

N.     bie    grancn          bie 

33rnmen 

bie    ^o'niginnen 

G.     ber   graucn          ber 

iBIumen 

ber   ^fi'nlginnctt 

D.     ben  grancn          ben 

53lnmen 

\)tn  ^ii'niginnen 

A.     bie    graucn          bie 

53lumen 

bie    f  o'niginncn 

2.  MascuHnes :  ber  93^enfd^  man 

,,  human  being,  ber  ^nabe  boy. 

N.     ber    ^menfd^ 

ber   ^nabe 

G.     be«   gj^enfd^cn 

beg   ^nabeti 

D.     bem  9D?enjd^cn 

bem  ^naben 

A.     ben  3JJcnfd^cn 

ben  ^naben 

N.     bie    SD^Jenfd^cn 

bie    ^nabeti 

G.     ber   ^menfd^cn 

ber   ^naben 

D.     ben   SD^enjd^cn 

ben  ^naben 

A.     bie    Tltn\(i)tn 

bie    ^naben 

65,  Mixed    Nouns.    The    following 

masculines    and    neuters 

form  the  singular  after  Classes  I-III 

(54.  2);  the  plural  after 

Class  IV  (53.  iv). 

ber  iBaner  peasant 

H^ 

5luge  eye 

ber  !Dom  thorn 

bag  iBett  bed 

ber  ^lad^'bar  neighbor 

ha^  @nbe  end 

ber  ©(^merg  pain 

i>a^  O^r  ear 

ber  @ee  lake 

ber 

^of'tor  doctor 

ber  ©taat  state 

ber 

^rofef'for  professor 

ber  ©tra^I  ray 

and  others  in  unac- 

ber ^Setter  cousin 

cented  or 

222  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


N. 

bcr   (Btaat 

bag 

5Iuge 

ber   ^oVtox 

G. 

beg   (Staatc^ 

beg 

5luge^ 

beg   3)ortor!^ 

D. 

bcm  (Staatc 

bem 

Sluge 

bem  Doftor 

A. 

ben  (Staat 

bag 

5luge 

ben  !Dortor 

N. 

bie    <Staatctt 

bie 

5Iugen 

bie    3)ofto'rcii 

G. 

ber   ©taatcn 

ber 

5lugen 

ber   3)ofto'rcn 

D. 

ben  ©taatcn 

ben 

5lugen 

ben  ^ofto'ren 

A. 

bie    ©taatcn 

bie 

^ugen 

bie    3)o!to'ren 

53auer  and  ^a(i)hax  often  form  a  singular  after  Class  IV:  beg, 
bem,  ben  ^auem  or  9^ad^barn.  —  (See  usually  forms  the  plural  (Seen, 
instead  of  Seeen,  —  Sd^merg  sometimes  forms  the  gen.  sing.  Sd^mer* 
geng,  instead  of  (Sd^mergeg.  —  S)ag  ^erg  heart  is  declined  as  follows: 
beg  ^ergeng,  bem  ^ergen,  bag  ^erg;  bie,  ber,  ben,  bie  ^ergen. 

66..   Proper  Names.     Most  names  of  persons,  when  not  preceded  by  an 

article,  add  8  for  the  genitive:  ^axU  S3u(^  Charles's  book,  (Sd^itter6  SSerfc 
Schiller's  works,  §clenc«  ^leib  Helen's  dress.  But  masculines  ending  in  an 
s-sound  add  end  or  an  apostrophe,  the  latter  mostly  when  they  are  family 
names:  ^^ritjcn*  "ipferb  Fred's  horse,  SSofe'  3Bcr!e  the  works  of  Voss. 

67.  A  personal  name  preceded  by  an  article  adds  no  ending:  bie  SSerfc 
cinc«  ©driller  the  works  of  a  S.,  hit  Sgricfc  be«  ^orag  the  epistles  of  Horace,  btc 
SBcrfc  bc8  iungcn  (Sd^ittcr  the  works  of  the  youthful  S.  —  Combinations  like  little 
Fred  or  long  John  require  the  definite  article  in  German:  bcr  flcinc  ^ni^,  bcr 
langc  ^o^ttitn. 

68.  A  name  after  a  title  with  preceding  article  is  left  unvaried:  bcr  $!ob 
bc8  ^ai[cr«  SBil^elm  the  death  of  Emperor  William,  bo6  ^au8  bc«  "iprofefford 
©d^mibt  or  bcS  .^errn  ©d^tnibt  the  house  of  Professor  or  Mr.  Smith.  A  name 
after  a  title  without  preceding  article  takes  the  genitive  ending,  and  the  title, 
except  §crr,  is  then  unvaried:  ^aifcr  SBili^cIing  Job,  ^rofcffor  ©c^mibtg  ^au6, 
but  §crm  (Sd^mibt*  §au8. 

69.  Names  of  countries  and  places  form  a  genitive  in  6,  except  those  end- 
ing in  8;  with  these  oon  of  is  used :  bie  ^Illffc  granrrcic^S  or  gronf'rcid^g  ^lUffc 
the  rivers  of  France,  btc  ©trafeen  53crlin«'  the  streets  of  Berlin,  but  bie  ©trofecn 
toon  ^ari§\  —  They  are  neuter  and  take  an  article  only  if  they  are  modified : 
ha^  ganje  !Dcutfc^'lanb  all  Germany,  ba6  \<i)'6nt  ^axi^'  beautiful  Paris.  —  Two  im- 
portant exceptions  are  bie  (gd^hJCtg  Switzerland  and  bie  Jilrfei'  Turkey;  these 
always  have  the  article:  bie  ^anto'ne  bcr  (5d^tt)cig  the  cantons  of  Switzerland. 

70.  The  names  of  the  months,  which  are  masculine  and  require  the  defi- 
nite article,  are  now  quite  commonly  used  without  a  genitive-6:  in  ben  crftcn 
Jagcn  bc«  Slpril  (or  5lpril§)  in  the  first  days  of  April.     In  certain  phrases  the 


DOUBLE    INFLECTION  223 

article,  or  both  article  and  genitive-^,  are  omitted:  fcit  Slprtl'  since  A.;  cr 
tarn  Sltifang  Slprir,  unb  fie  tarn  Snbc  9}?ai  he  came  in  the  beginning  of  A. 
and  she  at  the  end  of  May. 

VI.     DOUBLE  INFLECTION:  STRONG  AND    WEAK 

71.  Ordinary,  or  descriptive,  adjectives  are  not  inflected 

1.  when  used  predicatively :  ba«  §au«  tft  alt,  unb  hit  gcnfter  finb  Hcin  the 
house  is  old  and  the  windows  are  small; 

2.  when  used  appositively :  cin  ^au^,  grofe  unb  fd^fin  a  house,  large  and 
handsome; 

3.  when  used  adverbially:  fie  fingt  gut  she  sings  well; 

4.  rarely  also  when  used  attributively  (in  poetry  or  in  set  phrases,  and 
mostly  before  neuter  nouns  in  the  nom.  or  ace.  sing.):  fein  fiegl^oft  53anncr  his 
victorious  banner,  ein  nttrrifd^  3)ing  a  droll  thing. 

72.  Adjectives  in  cr  from  names  of  places  are  never  inflected:  cr  ging  auf 
bie  Scipjiger  SD^cffc  he  went  to  the  fair  at  Leipzig;  nor  are  gang  and  t)alb  in- 
flected when  used  without  article  before  neuter  geographical  names:  ganj 
(Sng'lanb  all  England,  burd^  l^alb  SScrlin'  through  half  of  Berlin. 

73.  Uninflected  are  also  the  possessive  adjectives  when  used  predicatively, 
namely: 


mcin 

mine 

unfcr 

ours 

bein 

thine,  yours 

cuer 

yours 

fein 

his 

i^r 

theirs 

t^r 

hers 

^^r 

yours 

fein 

its 

Examples:  ba8  ^au«  ift  mcin  the  house  is  mine;  bcr  ®ieg  unb  bic  gl^rc  finb 
unfcr  the  victory  and  the  honor  are  ours;  bcin  ift  ba^  9?eid^  unb  bic  ^raft  unb  bic 
^crr'Iid^feit  thine  is  the  kingdom,  and  the  power,  and  the  glory. 

Double  Inflection  of  Ordinary  or  Descriptive 
Adjectives 

74.  Principle  of  Inflection.  When  used  attributively,  the 
ordinary,  or  descriptive,  adjective  takes  the  strong  endings  (48), 
unless  it  is  preceded  by  a  pronominal  or  numeral  modifier  which 
itself  has  a  strong  ending.  It  then  takes  a  simpler  set  of  end- 
ings, called  the  ''weak,"  namely  e  in  the  nominative  singular  of 
all  genders,  as  also  in  the  accusative  singular  of  the  feminine 
and  neuter,  and  en  in  all  other  forms. 


224 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


75.  The  two  sets  of  endings  in  full  are 


i 

5TR0N 

G  en; 

DINGS 

WEAK 

ENDINGS 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SING 

PLUR. 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

m. 

f. 

n. 

tn.  f .  n. 

N. 

er 

e 

eg 

C 

N. 

e 

e 

e 

en 

G. 

eg 

er 

eg 

er 

G. 

en 

en 

en 

en 

D. 

em 

er 

em 

en 

D. 

en 

en 

en 

en 

A. 

en 

e 

eg 

e 

A. 

en 

e 

e 

en 

In  four  forms  —  ace.  sing,  masc,  nom.  and  ace.  sing,  fern., 
dat.  plur.  —  the  weak  endings  are  identical  with  the  strong,  and 
the  distinction  is  one  in  name  only.  For  these  four  forms  the 
ending  is  printed  only  once  in  the  following 


76.  Combination  of  Strong  and  Weak  Endings 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

m. 

f. 

n. 

m.  f.  n. 

s.        w. 

s.         w. 

s. 

w. 

s.        w. 

N. 

er  ^    e 

e 

eg 

C 

c        en 

G. 

eg       en 

cr       en 

eg 

en  ' 

er       en 

D. 

em     en 

cr      en 

cm 

en 

en 

A. 

en 

c 

eg 

c 

c        en 

77.  Models. 

STRONG 

WEAK 

The  adjective  is  not  preceded  by 
any  pronominal  and  therefore  has 
strong  endings  throughout 


good  man 

N. 

guter    ^ann 

G. 

gute^    9D?anneg 

D. 

gutcm  Tlannt 

A. 

gutctt   Tlann 

N. 

gutc     Wdnntx 

G. 

gutcr    50?  (inner 

D. 

gutcn    5D?annem 

A. 

gutc     932anuet 

The  adjective  is  preceded  by  a 
pronominal  with  strong  endings 
throughout  and  therefore  has  weak 
endings  throughout 

this  or  the  good  man 
biefcr    or  her    gutc    Tlann 
biefeg    or  beg    gutcn  SO^anneg 
bie[em  or  bem  gutcn  SOIanne 
biefen    or  htn    gutcn  93?ann 

biefe  or  bie  gutcn  90?  (inner 

biefer  or  bcr  gutcn  Wdnntx 

biefen  or  htn  gutcn  9D?annem 

bic(^  or  bie  gutcn  Tl'dnntx 


DOUBLE   INFLECTION 


225 


good  woman 

N.  gutc    .  grau 

G.  gutcr    grau 

D.  Qutcr    grau 

A.  gutc     grau 

N.  gutc     grauen 

G.  gutcr    grauen 

D.  gutcn    graucn 

A.  gutc     5^^ucn 

good  child 

N.  gutC)3    ttnb 

G.  gutC)^    tinbeg 

D.  gutcm  ^iube 

A.  gutC)^    ^Inb 

N.  gutc     tlnber 

G.  gutcr    ^inbcr 

D.  gutcn   ^inbcm 

A.  gutc     ^iubcr 


this 

or  the  good  woman 

biefe 

or  bic 

gutc    ^xavi 

biefer 

or  ber 

gutcn  gran 

biefer 

or  ber 

gutcn  §rau 

biefe 

or  bie 

gutc    grau 

biefe 

or  bie 

gutcn  grauen 

biefer 

or  ber 

gutcn  grauen 

biefen 

or  ben 

gutcn  grauen 

biefe 

or  bic 

gutcn  grauen 

this  or  the  good  child 
biefe^^  or  ba6   gutc    ^inb 
biefen    or  be^    gutcn  ^inbe^ 
biefem  or  bem  gutcn  ^inbe 
biefeS^  or  ha^   gutc    ^inb 


biefe 
biefer 
biefen 
biefe 


or  bie 

or  ber 

or  ben 

or  bie 


gutcn  ^inber 
gutcn  ^inber 
gutcn  ^inbem 
gutcn  ^inber 


1  The  shortening  of  the  nom.  and  ace.  sing.  neut.  bicfe^  into  bic«  (47)  does 
not  affect  the  ending  of  the  adjective:  bic8  gutc  ^inb,  bic«  altc  §au8. 

78.  Additional  examples,  including  some  with  more  than  one 
ordinary  adjective: 


STRONG 

altt§  SBeib  old  woman 

treuc  greunbe  faithful  friends 

ba§  SBort  treucr  greunbc  the  word 
of  faithful  friends 

fd^Ied^tc^  ®etb   bad  money 
flei^igc  ©driller  diligent  students 

frifc^c^  Dbft  fresh  fruit 


WEAK 

iDetd^e^    attc    SSeib?    which    old 

woman? 
atlc   treucn   greunbc  all  faithful 

friends 
ha^  3Bort  tjieler  or  me^rerer  treucn 

greunbc  the  word  of  many  or 

several  faithful  friends 
aUt^  fd^Ied^tc  ®elb  all  bad  money 
mand^e    fleifeigcn    ©d^tiler    many 

diligent  students 
einigeg    frifd^c    OBft    some  fresh 

fruit 


226 


AN  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


au^  grower  9^ot  from  great  dis-  au^  jener  grofeen  5^ot  from  that 

tress  great  distress 

gutcr,  alter  SO?ann  good  old  man  jeber  gutc,  atte  9JJann  ei^eri/  ^ooc? 

oZc?  man 

flared,  faltc^  Gaffer  clear,  cold  ha^  flare,  falte  3Baffer  the  clear, 

water  cold  water 

in  flarem,  Mtem  3Baffer  in  clear,  in  biefcnx  flaren,  fatten  SSaffcr  in 

cold  water  this  clear,  cold  water 

79.  Further  Applications  of  the  Principle.  According  to  74, 
descriptive  adjectives  must  take  the  strong  endings  (not  only 
when  they  are  not  preceded  by  any  modifier  at  all,  as  in  the  left 
half  of  the  examples  of  77  and  78,  but  also)  after  all  modifiers, 
pronominal  or  other,  which  are  themselves  without  these  strong 
endings;  hence  after  the  following  groups  of  words  or  forms: 

I.  after  the  nom.  sing.  masc.  and  the  nom,  and  ace.  sing, 
neuter  of  the  indefinite  article  and  other  words  of  its  group  (50) ; 

II.  after  mand^,  folc^,  tDeld^,  t)icl  and  tDcnig  —  shortened  forms 
which  are  often  used  instead  of  the  full  forms  (45),  especially 
before  ordinary  adjectives; 

III.  after 


ettDa^  some 

md)x  more 

tDeniger  less 

Moa^  fiir  (133)  what  kind  of,  what 

allerlei  all  kinds  of 

t)ic(erlel  many  kinds  of 

mand^erlei  7nany  kinds  of 

80,   Examples  of  Group  I: 

This  is  often  called  the  mixed  adjective  declension  because,  as  shown  below,  both  strong 
and  weak  forms  occur  in  the  same  paradigm  of  the  masculine  and  the  neuter,  though  the 
feminine  has  none  but  weak  forms. 


gcnug  enough 
lauter  sheer,  nothing  but 
gtDci  two 
brci  three 

bier  four,  and  other  undeclined 
cardinals 


STRONG 


WEAK 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


no  good  man 
fein  guter  ^ann 


fcine^   gutcn  Tlannt^ 
fcinem  guten  Tlannt 
feincn  gutcn  Tlami 


DOUBLE   INFLECTION  227 


N. 

VAT       r 

feine 

guten  Woxmtx 

G. 

SiV     F 

fciner 

guten  Waxmtx 

D. 

%!)     ^ 

fcinen 

guten  SO^cinnem 

A. 

#->- 

WO  g^ood 

feine 
woman 

guten  3JJ  (inner 

N. 

feine 

gute    i^rau 

G. 

feiner 

guten  grau 

D. 

^V     r 

feiner 

guten  grau 

A. 

s^    ^ 

teine 

gute    grau 

N. 

Sfi)    ^ 

feine 

guten  grauen 

G. 

.WW       w 

feiner 

guten  grauen 

D. 

m^     W 

feinen 

guten  grauen 

A. 

vj9     P 

no  grooc? 

feine 
child 

guten  grauen 

N. 

fcin 

gute^  tlnb 

G. 

SS'    ^ 

feine6 

guten  f  inbe^ 

D. 

^-> 

feinem 

guten  ^inbc 

A. 

fein 

gutc^ 

^inb 

N. 

feine 

guten  ^inber 

G. 

feiner 

guten  f  inber 

D. 

V.V      r 

feinen 

guten  ^inbem 

A. 

^i'      * 

feine 

guten  ^inber 

Similarly: 

STRONG 

WEAK 

our  or  her  (their)  good  old  father 
N.  unfer  or  i^r  guter  alter  3Sater 

G.  #->-  unfere^  or  il^re^  guten  alten  3Saterg 

etc. 
your  old  house 
N.  euer  or  Ql^r  attc^  §aug 

G.  ^->  eureg  or  Qfire^  alten  ^aufe6 

etc. 

81.  Examples  of  Groups  II  and  III: 

STRONG  WEAK 

ntand^    brat)cr    ©olbat    many    a    manc^er    braDe    ©olbat    many   a 
brave  soldier  brave  soldier 


228 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


meld^e  grofeen  5lugen  what  large 

eyes 
t)ieleg  rclfc  Dbft  (139)  much  ripe 

fruit 
mit  fold^er  fd^Ied^tcn  9}Jild^   m7/i 

swc/i  poor  milk 
in  bent  fd^on  ettna^  faltcn  Staffer 

in  ^/le  water  which  by  that  time 

was  rather  cold 
aU  id^  bic  gmel  ganj  flclnen,  aber 

l^iibfd^cn  35ogel  fal^  ly/iew  /  saw 

the  two  etc. 


hjeld^  Qtofec  5lugcn  ly/iai  Zargre  e^/es 
t)iel  reife;^  Ob  ft  mi^c/i  npe  fruit 

mit  fold^  fd^Ied^ter  9}^ilcl^  with  such 

poor  milk 
mit   etlDQg   fattcm   SSaffer   iyi7/i 

some  cold  water 

id)  \ai)  gmei  gang  ficine,  aber  t)uh\(i)t 

3Sogel  /  saw  two  very  small, 

hut  pretty  birds 
me^r   fd^led^tc   ^iid^er  more  bad 

books 
allerlei  buntc  ^lumen  all  sorts  of 

gay  flowers 
tauter  bummo^  ©efc^tDa^  nothing 

but  foolish  talk 
mit  iDa^  fiir  fd^led^tcr  (dat.  gov. 

by  mit,  133)  2:inte  er  f^reibt! 

with  what  poor  ink  he  writes! 


S2»  <SoId^  and  lueld^  are  also  the  regular  (shortened)  forms  before  the  in- 
definite article:  fold^  cin  SD^onn  such  a  man,  tocld^  cin  9}?ann!  what  a  man!  — 
Similarly  all  is  the  regular  (shortened)  form  before  the  definite  article  and 
before  possessive  adjectives:  all  bcr  ©lanj  all  the  splendor,  all  mciti  @lii(f  all 
my  happiness. 

83,  Exceptions  to  the  Principle.  Adjectives  before  a  genitive  singular  in 
i  of  masculine  or  neuter  nouns,  not  preceded  by  a  pronominal  with  strong 
ending,  have  the  weak  ending  en  more  often  than  the  strong  c8.*  In  a  few 
phrases  and  contractions  one  form  prevails  to  the  exclusion  of  the  other : 

♦  Applies  to  comparatives  and  superlatives  also. 


STRONG 


gcrobci8n)eg8   straightway 
fcinoSiucgg  by  no  m^ans 


fcinejgfaUg  on  no  account 
[td^enbcig  5"6c^  immediately 


WEAK 

€tn  Xvunt  flarcn,  taltcn  SBafferS  a 
drink  of  clear,  cold  water 

cine  Sabung  rauc^lofcn  Rubers  a  cargo 
of  smokeless  powder 

jcbcnfallg  in  any  case 

feinenfatlS  on  no  account 

[tel^enbcn  ^JufeeS  immediately 


DOUBLE   INFLECTION 


229 


84.  After  the  nominatives  and  accusatives  plural  anbcrc,  cinigc,  met)rerc, 
btcic,  iDcnigc  (sometimes  also  after  mand^e,  fold^e),  adjectives  usually  take  the 
strong  ending  instead  of  the  weak  (that  is  anbcrc,  cinige  etc.  are  treated  like 
ordinary  or  descriptive  adjectives,  78)*: 

♦  Applies  to  comparatives  and  sup>erlatives  also. 

STRONG  WEAK 

onberc  cl^rlid^c  Seute  other  honest  people 
n)enigc  or  einige  l^ilbfd^c  SBiJgcI  few  or 
some  pretty  birds 

85.  Adjectives  preceded  by  personal  pronouns  should  have  strong  endings 
throughout  (79),  but  in  the  dative  singular  and  the  nominative  (less  often  in 
the  ace.)  plural  the  weak  endings  are  at  least  as  common  as  the  strong: 


mir 


STRONG      . 

armcm  3Wannc  or 

armcr  ^rau  or 

armem  ^inbc  or 

ormc  SDJfinncr  or 

armc  t^rauen  or 

arme  ^inbcr  or 


armctt  2)?annc 

armen  grau 

armen  ^inbc 

amtcn  9)?ttnncr 

armen  ^jraucn 

armen  ^inber 


86.  Change  of  Stem  Jbefore  Endings.    Adjectives  in  c  drop  this  e  before 

endings:  iueife  vrise  —  rtcifcr,  hjcifc,  loeifei^  etc. 

Adjectives  in  unaccented  e(,  en,  er  often  drop  the  e  of  these  syllables  before 
endings  or  (those  in  el  and  er)  the  c  of  the  endings  em,  en  (50  0  •  cbcl  noble  — 
cblcr,  cbtc,  eblcm  or  ebelm,  eblen  or  ebeln;  l^eiter  cheerful  —  l^citrc^,  l^eitrem  or 
^etterm;  off  en  open  —  offncr,  offnc,  offnejg,  offnem,  offncn. 

^od)  drops  c  before  endings:  cin  Do^er  i8erg  a  high  mountain. 

Double  Inflection  of  Certain  Pronominals  and 
Indefinite  Numerals 

87.  The  principle  of  double  inflection  applies  to  all  those 
pronominals  and  indefinite  numerals  which,  like  descriptive  ad- 
jectives, can  be  used  both  with  and  without  the  definite  or  indefinite 
article  : 

WEAK  FORMS 

bcr,  bit,  ba^  anbcrc 
bcr,  bie,  ba^  t)ielc 
bcr,  bie,  ba^  tuenigc 
bic  bcibcn,   nom.   or  ace.   plur., 
the  two,  both 
ieber,       -t,  -c^  einc^  i^bcn,  gen.  sing.  masc.  or 

neut.,  of  every  (one) 


STRONG 

FORMS 

anbercr, 

-e, 

-t2 

t)iclcr, 

-e, 

-c^ 

mcniget, 

-e, 

-c^ 

bcibcr, 

-e, 

-t2 

230 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


fold^cr,    -e,  -t^ 


cincr, 

-^/ 

-c^ 

one 

mcincr, 

-^f 

-t^ 

mine 

bcincr, 

-^/ 

-t§ 

yours 

feiner, 

-^f 

-e^ 

his 

i^rer, 

-^, 

-e^ 

hers 

feiner, 

-<, 

-eig 

its 

unfercr, 

-^, 

-c^ 

ours 

cuercr, 

-C/ 

-e^ 

yours 

i^rer, 

-^, 

-c^ 

theirs 

3^rcr, 

-C/ 

-e^ 

yours 

eine^  fold^cn,  gen.  sing.  masc.  or 

neut.,  of  such  a  (one) 
felnem  fold^en,  dat.  sing.  masc. 

or  neut.,  to  no  such 
ber,  bie,  ha^  tint         the  one 
hex,  bie,  ha^  metnc      mine 
ber,  bie,  ba^  bctnc        yours 
btx,  hit,  ba^  feinc        his 
ber,  bic,  ba^  i^re         hers 
ber,  bie,  ba^  feinc        its 
ber,  bie,  ba^  unfere      ours 
ber,  bie,  bag  euerc        yours 
ber,  bie,  bag  i^rc         theirs 
ber,  bie,  bag  3^rc       yours 


88.  Observe:  (1)  The  stems  of  the  first  six  pairs  are  given  in  45  with 
complete  strong  endings;  the  rest  in  50  with  defective  strong  endings.  —  (2) 
Weak  forms  of  beib-  occur  in  the  plural  only,  after  the  definite  article  or 
after  possessives  (meine  beibcn  33rilber);  of  jcb-,  after  the  indefinite  article 
only;  and  of  fold^-,  after  the  indefinite  article  and  fein.  —  (3)  The  first  seven 
pairs  are  used  adjectively  and  pronominally,  the  rest  only  pronominally.  — ■ 
(4)  The  weak  forms  of  the  possessivee  above  are  less  common  than  the  strong. 


89.   Examples: 

STRONG 

anbercr  ^ein  other  wine 
anberc  famen  fpciter  others  came 

later 
beibcr  ^niber  of  both  brothers 

beibc  gin  gen  both  went 

bag  ©liic!  t)ieter  the  happiness  of 

many 
mit   n)enigcm    ®elbe    with   little 

money 
cin  iebcr  SOIenfd^   every  man 

jebcm,  ber  fam  to  everybody  who 
came 


ber  anberc  3Bein  the  other  wine 
hit  anberctt  famen  fpciter  the  others 

came  later 
{ener  beibcn  ^rilber  of  those  two 

brothers 
hit  beibcn  gingen  the  two  or  both 

of  them  went 
bag  ©liid  ber  t)ielcn  the  happiness 

of  the  many 
mit   biefem   n3enigcn   ®elbe   with 

this  small  amount  of  money 
eineg    jebcn    SD^enfd^en    of  every 

man 
einem  Jebcn,  ber  fam  to  everybody 

who  came 


DOUBLE   INFLECTION 


231 


cm  anbtxt^  ^ud^  another  book 


tt)d<^  anbere^  ^nd)  which  other 

hook 
fein  folc^cr  ^nabc  no  such  boy 

meln  or  feln  anbercr  ^ruber  my  or 
his  other  brother 

\^  gab  i^m  mcin*  ^fcrb  unb  cr 
Qob  mir  feinc^^  /  gave  him  my^ 
horse  and  he  gave  me  his^ 

fie  fd^ricb  mit  feiner^  gebcr  unb  cr 
fd^rlcb  mit  il^rcr^  she  wrote  with 
his^  pen  and  he  wrote  with  hers^ 


cine^  anbercn  ^ud^c6  of  another 

book 
toeld^e^  anberc  ^ud)  which  other 

book 
fcinem  fold^cn  ^nabcn  to  no  such 

boy 
mit   meinem    or   fetnem    anbercn 

^ruber  with  my  or  his  other 

brother 
id)  ^ah  i^m  mein^  ^ferb  unb  cr 

^ah  mir  ba^  fcinc^  /  gave  him 

my^  horse  and  he  gave  me  his^ 
[ic  fc^rieb  mit  feiner^  gebcr  unb  cr 

fd^rieb  mit  bcr  il^rcn^  she  wrote 

with  his^  pen  and  he  wrote  with 

hers^ 
attributive  adjective.  —  ^  pronoun. 


90.  With  the  pronominals  and  numerals  in  87  compare  the 
following,  to  which  the  principle  of  double  inflection  does  not 
apply,  for  those  on  the  left  are  never  preceded  by  an  article,  and 
those  on  the  right  always.  The  former  are  therefore  always 
strong,  the  latter  always  weak. 

WEAK   ONLY 

bcrferbc,    biefel'bc,    ba^feFbc^   the 

same 
ber'ienigc,    bic'jcnigc,    ba^'jcnige* 

that  J  that  one;  he,  she,  it 
bcr,  bic,  ba^  mei'nigc^  mine 
bcr,  bic,  ha^  bci'nige     yours 
bcr,  bie,  ba^  fei'nigc     his 
bcr,  bic,  ba6  i^'rigc       hers 
bcr,  bic,  ba^  fei'nigc      its 
bcr,  bic,  ha^  un'frigc    ours 
bcr,  bic,  ba^  cu'rigc      yours 
bcr,  bic,  ha^  il^'rigc       theirs 
bcr,  bic,  ha^  3^'rige     yours 
>  Distinguish  fciner,  fcinc,  fcineg,  the  ^  The  article,  though  joined,  is  in- 

pronoun  meaning  none,  from  fein,  fcinc,       fleeted  throughout,  e.  g.,  gen,  sing. 


bcr. 

bic,  ba^ 

bicfcr. 

-e,  -c^ 

icncr. 

-c,  -e^ 

feincr. 

-e,  -e^^ 

mand^cr. 

-e,  -c^ 

tceld^cr. 

-e,  -c^ 

allcr. 

-c,  -c^ 

ci'nigcr. 

-c,  -t^' 

mc^'rcrcr, 

,  -e,  -e^^ 

Compare  section  45 

232 


AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


fcin,  the  adjective  meaning  no  (50). 
—  2  Rare  in  the  sing.,  except  in  the 
nom.  or  ace.  neut. :  einigCiS  some 
things,  mcf)rcrci§  several  things. 


beg[e(ben,  berfelben,  beSfelben;  bc^ient* 
gen,  bcrienigcn,  beSicnigen.  —  ^erjcnigc 
is  used  chiefly  before  relatives,  e.  g., 
bieientgen,  meld^c  famen  those  who 
came.  —  2  These  forms  of  the  posses- 
sives  are  more  common  than  the 
other  weak  forms  of  87. 


Double  Inflection  of  Substantive  Adjectives 

91.  In  German,  as  in  English,  adjectives  may  be  used  sub- 
stantively and  thus  denote  persons  or  things  which  possess  the 
quality  expressed  by  the  adjective.  In  German,  such  an  adjec- 
tive is  written  with  a  capital,  like  a  noun,  but  inflected  like  an 
adjective  standing  before  a  noun.  It  then  denotes,  in  the  sin- 
gular of  the  masculine  and  feminine,  a  person  possessing  the 
quality;  in  the  singular  of  the  neuter,  a  thing  which,  or  that  in 
general  which  possesses  the  quality;  in  the  plural,  persons  (never 
things)  possessing  the  quality. 


STRONG 

ein  5ltter  an  old  man 

l^orc,  Slltc  listen,  old  woman 

5lttc^  unb  5^cuc^  old  things  and 

new 
id^  luunfc^e  ^l^nen  nur  ®utc^  / 

wish  you  only  what  is  good 
t)iel  ©utci^,  (Sd^onc^  unb  ^Sal^re^ 

much  that  is  good,  beautiful 

and  true 

Qutcr  Htter  good  old  man 
ein  ^cutfd^et  a  German  {man) 
al^   ^eutfd^c   irurbc   fie   gefragt, 

ob  .  .  .    being  a  German'  she 

was  asked  if  ,  ,  . 
altt  T)tut\d)t  old  Germans  (men 

and  women) 


WEAK 

ber  5lttc  the  old  man 

ha   ift    bie   5lltc    there's   the   old 

woman 
ha^  5lltc  unb  \ia^  5^eue  the  old 

and  the  new  (things) 
id^  iDttnfd^e  S^nm  alle^  ®ute  / 

wish  you  all  that  is  good 
ha^  ®ute,  ba^  (Sd^one  unb  ha^ 

3Sa]^re  the  good,  the  beautiful 

and   the   true  or   whatever  is 

good,  beautiful  and  true 
ber  gute  5Ilte  the  good  old  man 
ber  ^eutfd^e  the  German  (man) 
fie  tDax  eine  ^eutfc^c  she  was  a 

German 

bie  atten  ^eutfd^cn  the  old  Ger* 
mans  (men  and  women) 


DOUBLE   INFLECTION 


233 


©c^tDaqc  unb  SSei^C  black  and 
white  people 

fein  9?eifenbcr  no  traveler 

\6)  fa]^  t)iele  Dieifenbc  (84)  I  saw 
many  travelers 

ble  (Sonne  fd^eint  auf  ©ercd^tc  unb 
Ungerec^tc,  auf  ®ute  unb  ^ofe 
the  sun  shines  on  just  and  un- 
just, on  good  and  bad 

mit  ®utcm  fommt  man  tueltcr  aU 
ntit  ^ofcm  with  good  words  or 
treatment  one  gets  on  better 
than  with  bad 

cttDa^  (toa^)  or  \)id  ®utci§  some 
or  much  good 

cr  bringt  nid^t^  ®utc^  /le  brings 
no  good  (news) 

er  tDufetc  atterlcl  5^euc^  /le  /i/iew; 
all  sorts  of  news 

id)  ©liicflid^cr  /  happy  man 


bie  ©d^margen  unb  bic  SSeifecn  i/ie 

blacks  and  the  whites 
ber  ^elfenbc  the  traveler 
ba^  ©eparf  be6  D^eifenbcn  i/ie  Zwgr- 

ga^e  of  the  traveler 
bie  ©onne  fd^eint  auf  bie  ©ered^ten 

unb    bie    Ungered^ten,    auf    bie 

®uten  unb  bie  ^ofen  the  sun 

shines  on  the  just  etc. 
3ur  dtt(i)ttn  unb  gur  i^infcn  (dat. 

sing,     fern.,    to     agree    with 

.^anb)  on  the  right  and  on  the 

left 
mand^eg  ®utc  many  a  good  thing 

or  much  that  is  good 


ba^  5^euc  ift  nid^t  immer  ba^ 
iBefte  the  new  is  not  always 
the  best 

\i)x  ^leinglciubigen  0  ye  of  Utile 
faith 

n)ir  ^eutfd^Ctt  (85)  we  Germans 


n)ir  ^eutfd^e  (85)    we  Germans 
un^  ^eutfd^c  (ace.)  us  Germans 

un^  !Deutfd^cn  to  us  Germans,  dat.  plur.,  not  distinguishable. 

93.  Neuter  substantive  adjectives  denoting  languages  take  frequently, 
but  not  necessarily,  an  ending  when  directly  preceded  by  the  definite  article : 
bu«  !Deut[c^c  (also  !Dcut[(^)  the  German  language;  bo6  <£tubiuTn  bcS  ©nglifd^cn 
(less  often  ©nglifd))  the  study  of  English;  im  ^^'^"S'^fUt^en  (also  ^^ranjCfifd^) 
in  the  French  language.  Otherwise  these  substantives  remain  uninflected: 
ha^  beftc  3)eut[d^  the  best  German;  er  fprad^  cin  Snglifc^,  ha^  niemanb  tocrftanb 
he  spoke  (an)  English  that  nobody  understood;  cr  fagtc  c^  auf  ^^f^^ic^if^  he 
said  it  in  Italian;  (ein)  reined  !Deutfd^  (a)  jmre  German. 

93.  Certain  other  adjectives  have  no  ending  when  used  substantively; 
these  occur  mostly  in  pairs,  without  article,  and  are  written  with  small  ini- 
tials: bclicbt  bci  alt  unb  iung  a  favorite  among  old  and  young;  gleid^  unb  glcic^ 
gefellt  [ic^  gem  birds  of  a  feather  flock  together;  xdd)  unb  arm,  l^od^  unb  nicbrig 
rich  and  poor,  high  and  low. 


234 


AN  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


Double  Inflection  of  Comparatives  and  Superlatives 

94.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  are  formed  by  adding  et 
and  ft  to  the  stem  of  the  positive. 

Adjectives  in  c  drop  this  e  before  the  cr  of  the  comparative:  h)ei[c  vnse, 
comp.  toeifer,  —  Adjectives  ending  in  unaccented  cl,  en,  cr  commonly  drop 
the  e  of  these  syllables  before  the  er  of  the  comparative:  ebel  noble,  comp. 
eblcr.  —  Adjectives  in  g,  fe,  fc^,  i,  h,  t  usually  insert  c  before  the  ft  of  the 
superlative:  l^ei^  hot,  ^ei^e[t-*;  [tolj  proiid,  [toljeft-;  milb  mild,  milbeft-;  hunt  gay, 
bunteft-;  ge[d^icft  clever,  gefc^icfteft-.  But  participles  in  b  add  ft  only:  bebeutenb 
important,  bebcutenbft-;  fc^meid^clnb  flattering,  fd^Tneid^elnbft- 

*  The  hyphen  after  the  superlative  forms  indicates  that,  unlike  the  comparative,  they 
are  not  used  without  ending,  except  now  and  then  as  adverbs  (144). 

95.  Umlaut  in  Comparison,  The  following  monosyllabic 
adjectives  regularly  modify  the  vowel  in  the  comparative  and 
superlative : 


alt 

ciltcr 

alteft- 

old 

arg 

arger 

ftrgft- 

bad 

arm 

(xrnter 

armft- 

poor 

§art 

garter 

prteft- 

hard 

iung 

jiinger 

ilingft- 

young 

fait  • 

falter 

falteft-      . 

cold 

Hug 

flilger 

fliigft- 

wise 

!ranf 

franfcr 

franfft- 

ill 

tm 

fiirger 

fiirgeft- 

short 

lang 

I  anger 

langft- 

long 

rot 

roter 

roteft- 

red 

f(^arf 

fc^arfer 

fc^arfft- 

sharp 

fd^tDad^ 

fd^tDctd^er 

fd^mac^ft- 

weak,  feeble 

fd^marj 

f(^tD  arger 

fc^marseft- 

black 

ftarf 

ftarfer 

ftarfft- 

strong 

tDarm 

iDctrmer 

iDarmft- 

warm 

The  following  often  modify  the  vowel:  bla§  pale,  na&  wet,  fd^tnd  narrow, 
fromm  pious,  bumm  stupid,  gefunb  healthy.  —  See  also  96. 


96.  Irregular  Comparison, 
regular  in  their  comparison: 
gro6  grower 

gut  beffer 

Did  mel^r 


The  following  adjectives  are  ip 


grofet- 

great 

beft- 

good 

meift- 

much 

DOUBLE   INFLECTION 


235 


ndi) 


ff'6f)tx 
nii^er 


nad^ft- 


high 
near 


The  following  comparatives  and  superlatives  lack  a  positive;  they  are  re- 
lated to  the  prepositions  or  adverbs  given  in  the  place  of  the  positive,  and  the 
superlative  is  formed  by  adding  ft  to  the  comparative: 


in  in 
au8  out 
ohtn  above 
untcr  under 
bor   before 
jointer  behind 


inner  inner 
fiu§er  outer 
ober  upper 
unter  lower 
Dorber  fore,  front 
jointer  hinder,  hind 
From  the  superlatives  cr[t-  first  and  Ic^t-  last  are  formed  the  comparatives 
crftcrcr  or  ber  crftcrc  the  former  and  let^tcrer  or  ber  Icijtcrc  the  latter. 


inncrft-  innermost 
fiufeerft-  outermost 
oberft-  uppermost 
untcrft-  undermost 
borbcrft-  foremost 
l^intcrft-  hindmost 


97.  Inflection.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  take  the  same 
endings  as  positives,  according  to  74. 

Examples:  grofecrc  grcubc  (fem.)  greater  joy,  like  gutc  grau  77; 
ber  altcrc  Wann  the  older  man,  like  biefcr  or  ber  gutc  SJJann  77;  mcin 
beftc^  ^ud)  my  best  book,  like  fein  gutc^  ^Inb  80. 


STRONG 


N.  gro^erc  greube 

G.  grfigercr  greube 

D.  griigercr  greube 

A.  grofeerc  greube 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

grogcrc  grcubcn 
grofeercr  greuben 
grofeercn  greuben 
grofeerc     greuben 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

mcin  bcftc^  iBud^ 

V?)        P 

mcin  bcftC)^  i8ud^ 

N. 
G. 

D. 
A. 

WEAK 

ber  alterc  90?ann 

be^  ciltercn  SD^anne^ 

bcm  altercn  SD^anne 

ben  altcrcn  9}?ann 

bic  altcren  SO^  (inner 

ber  altercn  SJ^anncr 

ben  altercn  SDlcinncm 

bic  altercn  9[)lanncr 

meincg    beftcn  i8ud^e« 
melncm  beftcn  iBud^e 

meinc  beftcn  ^Btid^cr 

meiner  beftcn  ^iic^er 

meinen  beftcn  33u(^cm 

meinc  beftcn  ^iid^er 


98,   Examples  of    comparatives    and    superlatives   used   sub- 
stantively (91) : 


236 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


STRONG 


nid^t^  53effcrc^   nothing  better 

fein  Sufeerc^   its  exterior 

tx  tut  fein  ^eftc^  he  does  his  best 


WEAK 


ba^  33efferc  the  better 

ha^  Hufeerc   the  exterior 

gu  beincm  ^efteti  for  your  benefit 


1  ein(«) 

12  jh)alf 

2  3tt)ei 

13  breije^n 

3  brci 

14  bierje^n 

4  bier 

15  fiinfge^n 

5  fUnf 

16  Hje^n 

6  fcc^S 

17  [iebjc^n 

7  fieben 

18  ac^tjetjn 

8  a(^t 

19  ncunjc^n 

9  neun 

20  jiDanjig 

10  sc^n 

21  cinunbjtDanjig 

11  elf 

22  gtoeiunbghjangig 

149  ^unbcrt  neununb* 

Diersig 
200  gmei^unbert 
1000  taufenb 
1133  taufcnb    ein^unbcrt 
breiutibbreiRig  or 
elff)unbcrt    brei=» 
unbbrei^ig 
100000  f)unberttau[enb 
1000000  eine  ^million'       * 


Double  Inflection  of  Ordinal  Numerals 

99.   The  cardinals,  from  which  the  ordinals  are  formed,  run  as  follows: 

23  breiunbjmanjig 

30  bretfeig 

31  einunbbreifeig 

32  gtDciunbbreifeig 
40  t)ierjig 
50  funfgtg 
60  fed^sig 
70  [iebgig 
80  ad^tjig 
90  neungig 

100  ^unbcrt 

>  (S\n9,  a  neuter  pronominal  form,  is  used  when  no  other  numeral  follows; 
thus,  in  counting:  cin8,  jtDei,  brei  etc.,  I^unbert  unb  ein«;  also  in  expressions  of 
time,  as  eg  i[t  einS  or  l^alb  ctn^  it  is  one  or  half  past  twelve.  Otherwise  ein  is 
used,  as  in  einunbjtoongig  above,  and  in  forming  ordinals,  as  ber  einunbjn)an= 
gig[te  (100).  —  For  the  inflection  of  einer,  eine,  einc§  and  ber,  bie,  ba^  eine,  see  87. 

The  other  cardinals  are  usually  uninflected,  but  the  genitives  jlDeicr,  breicr 
and  the  datives  jtDeicn,  breien  are  used  when  the  case  would  not  otherwise  be 
obvious. 

100.  The  Ordinals  are  adjectives  resembling  the  superlatives. 
As  preceded  by  the  defimite  article,  they  are 
ber  erfte  the  first  ber  jmanjtgfte  the  twentieth 

ber  gmeite  the  second  '    ber  einunbgrtjanjigfte  the  twenty-first 

ber  britte   the  third  ber  jrtjeiunbjtDanjigfte  the  twenty-second 

ber  bierte   the  fourth  ber  breiiinbjraangigfte  the  twenty-third 

ber  filnfte  the  fifth  ber  brei^igfte  the  thirtieth 

ber  [ec^fte   the  sixth  ber  biergigfte  the  fortieth 

ber  fiebente   the  seventh  ber  fjunbertfte  the  hundredth 

ber  ad^te  (one  t)   the  eighth  ber  taufenbfte   the  thousandth. 

ber  neunte  the  ninth  etc.,  with  te  up  to  twentieth,  after  that  with  [te. 

The  ordinals  share  the  double  inflection  of  ordinary  adjectives: 

STRONG  WEAK 

erftci^  ^apitel  first  chapter  bag  crftc  ^apitet  the  first  chapter 

ein  brlttcr  gall  ift  unbenfbar  a    ber   britte   gall  tft  folgenber   the 
third  case  is  inconceivable  third  case  is  as  follows 


DOUBLE   INFLECTION 


237 


aU  biertcr  ©ol^n  (as,  that  is) 
being  the  fourth  son  (105) 

ficbentcr  33erg,  erfto^  iffiort  sei;- 
en^/i  'yerse,  first  word 


ber  Dicrtc  ©ol^n  the  fourth  son 

im  fiebcntcn  53er^  ba^  erfte  SBort 
m  the  seventh  verse  etc. 


lOl,   Summary:  Pronouns,  Adjectives,  Numerals. 

II.  Invariable:    III.  Uninflected  Stem-Forms: 

Prons.  Adjs.  Predicate  Adjectives  71-73 

fid^  39    einanber  40 
[elbft  41     man  136 
ctmag  nic^tS  137 
tncl^r  more  140 
JBcmgcr  less  140 


42 


Odd  Inflections: 

Pronouns 
id),  bu,  cr  38 
ber  dem.  rel. 
h)cr  h)a«  43 
icbermann  44 
icmanb  44 
niemanb  44 


IV 


Defective   Strong 
Inflection  : 
Adjs.  50 
ctn,  -t,  —  a,  an,  one 
fcin,  -c,  —  no 
mdn,  -t,  —  my 
bcin,  -t,  —  thy 
etc. 


mcin  mine 

unfer  ours 

bein  thine 

euer  yours 

\tvx  his 

i^r  theirs 

'ifyc  hers 

3^r  yours 

[ein  its 

gut  good 

bcffcr 

better 

3       VI.  Weak  Inflection: 

Prons.  Adjs.  90 

berjcnige 

berfelbc 

ber  bie  \>a%  meinige  mine 

ber  bie  "bai  beinigc  thine 

etc. 

V.  Complete   Strong 
Inflection  : 
Prons.  Adjs.  45 
ber  the,  that 
feincr,  -t,  -c^  none 
biefer,  -c,  -ci8 
iencr,  -c,  -cig 
toeld^er,  -t,  -cjS 
ciniger,  -c,  -t2 
alTcr,  -e,  -ci§ 
mand^cr,  -c,  -c§ 
mel^rercr,  -e,  -ei8 

V-VI.  Double  Inflection:  Strong  and  Weak: 
Prons.  Adjs.  87.      Substantives  91.      Compars.  Superls.  94.      Ordinals  100. 
Strong 
anbercr,  -c,  -c§ 
bieler,  -e,  -t^ 
tocniger,  -t,  -ti 
bdhtt,  -c,  -c2 
jebcr,  -c,  -t& 
folt^cr,  -c,  -ci§ 
cincr,  -e,  -Ci8  otic 
metncr,  -t,  -tS  mine 
beiner,  -c,  -c^  thine 

etc. 
gutcr,  -c,  -t» 

,     ®UtCiS 

beffercr,  -c,  -o? 
befter,  -c,  -ej8 
er[tcr,  -t,  -t2 


Weak 

ber 

bie 

hai  anbere 

ber 

bie 

boS  bieic 

ber 

bie 

ha^  menigc 

bie  (meine)  beibcn 

cincg  iebcn 

(f)einc«  fold^cn 

ber 

bie 

ba^  einc  the  one 

ber 

bit 

ha^  meinc  mine 

ber 

bie 

has  beinc  </iine 
etc. 

ber 

bie 

bo«  gutc 

bos  ®utc 

ber 

bie 

bag  befferc 

ber 

bie 

ba«  beftc 

ber 

bie 

has  erftc 

238  AN  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


USES  AND  CONSTRUCTIONS 

102.  Uses  and  constructions  of  German  which  differ  from  Eng- 
lish and  are  most  important  to  the  beginner  are  here  treated 
under  the  following  heads: 

I.  Articles.     Nouns  of  Measure.     Names  of  Cities.     Cases 
II.  Pronouns 

III.  Comparatives  and  Superlatives 

IV.  Numerals 
V.  Verbs 

VI.  Adverbs 
VII.  Prepositions 
VIII.  Conjunctions 
XI.  Order  of  Words 

I.    ARTICLES  — NOUNS  OF  MEASURE  —  NAMES  OF 
CITIES  —  CASES 

103.  The  Definite  Article  is  used  with  abstract  and  generic 
nouns,  names  of  seasons,  months,  days  and  streets: 

hit  3c^t  fte^t  nie  ftill  time  never  stands  still 

ba^  ®oIb  tft  gelb  gold  is  yellow 

id)  tnag  ben  $Blnter  nid^t  /  don't  like  winter 

int  5Iprir  in  April 

am  "^itVtioof^  on  Wednesday 

in  ber  ^orrftrafec  in  Charles  Street 
See  also  148.  —  For  articles  before  proper  names  see  67. 

104.  The  definite  article,  sometimes  with  the  dative  of  a  per- 
sonal or  reflexive  pronoun,  commonly  takes  the  place  of  a  posses- 
sive adjective,  provided  that  no  ambiguity  can  arise: 

tDag  f)at  fie  in  ber  §anb?  what  has  she  in  her  hand? 

i^  brad^  mtr   ba^  53ein,  unb  er    /  broke  my  leg,  and  he  broke  his 
brad^  fid^  ben  %xm  arm 


AETICLES,    ETC.  239 

105.  The  Indefinite  Article  is  omitted  before  an  unmodified 
predicate  noun  denoting  vocation,  rank  or  profession,  before  an 
appositive  introduced  by  aU  as,  and  before  I)UTibert  and  taufenb, 
unless  they  are  to  mean  one  hundred  and  one  thousand: 

ber  3Satcr  tear  ©d^neiber  (but  ein    the  father  was  a  tailor  {a  clever 

gefd^icfter  (Sd^neiber)  tailor) 

al6  Jreunb  l^alf  er  ntlr  being  my  friend,  he  helped  me 

fagte  er  ,f)unhtxt"  ober  „taufenb"?    did  he  say  a  hundred,  or  a  thou- 
sand? 

106.  Nouns  of  Measure,  Weight,  quantity  and  extent,  except 
feminines  in  e,  are  used  in  the  singular  after  numerals,  and  a 
following  noun  denoting  the  substance  measured  is  usually  treated 
as  an  appositive: 

je^n  gu^  l^od^  ten  feet  high 

gtt)el  ®la^  SBaffer  two  glasses  of  water 

fiir  brei  ^funb  \^ld\d)  for  three  pounds  of  meat 

ntit  gtDei  ^ipfunb  gebcm  with  two  pounds  of  feathers 

er  gab  fiinf  Tlaxt  he  gave  five  marks 

But 
brel  Wtn  (fem.  in  c)  Xud)      three  yards  of  cloth 

If  the  noun  denoting  the  substance  measured  is  modified,  the 
genitive  is  used  in  more  elevated  style,  and  the  appositional  con- 
struction, or  t)on  with  the  dative,  in  the  more  colloquial  language : 
er  trattf  gtrel  ®Ia6  biefe^  SSelne^  or  t)on  biefem  SBeine  he  drank  two 
glasses  of  this  wine,  nimm  ^tdd  *^funb  guten  Xtt^  or  itod  ^funb 
guten  Xtt  take  two  pounds  of  good  tea. 

107.  Names  of  Cities,  kingdoms  etc.  are  used  without  any- 
thing corresponding  to  of: 

hit  (Stabt  ^axi^  the  city  of  Paris 

bcr  <Staat  ^anfag  the  state  of  Kansas 

108.  The  Nominative,  besides  being  the  case  of  the  subject, 
the  case  of  address  (vocative)  and  the  case  of  the  predicate  noun, 
is  also  used  in  the  passive  of  «ome  verbs  which  in  the  active  take 
two  accusatives: 


240  AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

er  tDurbe  ber  2(lte  genantit  (active,    he  was  called  the  old  man 
man  nanntc  i^n  ben  2lltcn) 

SBcrbcn  in  the  sense  of  be  changed  into,  turn  into  is  commonly 
construed  with  gu  and  the  dative: 

er  tDurbc  gum  33errater  he  turned  traitor 

bag  (Sig  h)urbc  ju  Gaffer  the  ice  turned  into  water 

109.  The  Genitive  is  often  used  adverbially:* 

cincg  Xageg  or  9D?orgen6  one  day  or  morning 

inorgcng  unb  abenb^  (m  ^/le)  morning  and  evening 

meineg  ^Iffen^  to  mi/  knowledge 

fcinc^hjcgg  6^/  ^^  weans 

110.  The  genitive  is  used  with  many  adjectives  and  verbs: 

tneincr  'Bad)t  getDig  sure  of  my  case 

beg  $Hebeng  miibe  tired  of  talking 

feiner  tDiirbig  worthy  of  him 

gebenfe  meiner  think  of  me 

\(i)ont  i^rer  spare  her  or  them 

i<i)  erinnerc  mid^  beffen  /  remember  it 

fie  beraubten  i^n  feineg  ©elbeg    they  robbed  him  of  his  money 
For  the  genitive  with  prepositions  see  220. 

111.  The  Dative,  besides  being  the  case  of  the  indirect  object 
(113),  is  used  with  some  intransitive  verbs  which  in  EngUsh 
appear  as  transitive,  e.  g., 

anttDorten  answer  gel^ord^en  obey 

begegnen  meet  glauben  believe 

banfen  thank  l^etfen  help 

bienen  serve  nu^en  benefit 

einfallen  occur  to  fd^aben  injure 

eriauben  allow  fd^meid^eln  flatter 

folgen  follow  trauen  trust 

gefallen  please  h)iberfte'^en  resist 
Thus,  anttDortet  mir!  answer  me!    id)  l^elfe  3f)nen  /  help  you  etc. 

112.  The  dative  is  used  with  many  adjectives  and  idiomatic 
verb-phrases,  e.  g.^ 


PRONOUNS  241 

c3  tut  tnir  Icib,  ba^  ♦  .  .  /  am  sorry  that  ... 

ha^  gefd^ie^t  i^m  rcd^t  that  serves  him  right 

mir  traumte,  bag  .  .  .  /  dreamed  that  .  .  . 

tt)a^  fci^lt  blr?  what's  the  matter  with  you? 

Xoit  ge^t  e^  3^nen?  how  do  you  dof 

c^  h)ar  mir  lieb,  bag  .  ♦  .  /  ii;as  'pleased  that  .  .  . 

ber  ^err  ift  mir  fremb  the  gentleman  is  a  stranger  to  me 

ba^  ift  alien  bcfannt  that's  known  to  all 
See  also  104.  —  For  the  dative  with  prepositions  see  222. 

113.  Note.  To  with  the  objective  as  the  indirect  object  of 
a  transitive  verb  is  rendered  by  the  German  dative,  e.  g.,  he  gave 
the  book  to  your  brother  er  gab  ba^  ^ud)  Severn  iBrubcr.  To  with 
the  objective  as  a  prepositional  phrase  with  an  intransitive  verb, 
as  he  went  to  your  brother,  is  rendered  by  gu  with  the  dative:  cr 
ging  5U  ^l^rem  ^rubcr  (but  nac^  (gnglanb  or  no(^  Sonbon). 

114.  The  Accusative,  besides  being  the  case  of  the  direct 
object,  is  used  adverbially,  to  express  time,  distance,  price  etc.: 

er  Ia6  htn  gangen  2^ag  he  read  all  day 

er  gel^t  bie  (Strafe  ^Inunter     he  is  going  down  the  street 

e^  foftet  eine  Tlaxt  it  costs  a  mark 

115.  The  accusative  is  used  absolutely: 

ha  fte^t  er,  ben  §ut  in  ber  einen  there  he  stands,  his  hat  in  one 
^anb  unb  ba6  i8uci^  in  ber  hand  and  the  hook  in  the  other 
anbern 

116.  A  few  verbs  take  two  accusatives,  e.  g., 

cr  le^rt  ben  fnaben  ba^  ©d^reiben    he  teaches  the  boy  how  to  write 
fie  fragte  nii(^  t)ie(e^  she  asked  me  many  questions 

But  verbs  of  choosing,  making,  appointing  etc.  are  construed 
with  in  (108),  e.  g.,  they  made  or  chose  him  captain  fie  mad^tcn  or 
rt)a()lten  il^n  gum  ^auptmann  (in  the  passive,  er  tnurbe  gum  ^aWpU 
mann  gemad^t  or  gemd^It). 

For  the  accusative  with  prepositions  see  224. 

II.     PRONOUNS 

117.  Agreement  in  Grammatical  Gender  between  pronoun 
and  noun  takes  place  as  a  rule,  but  rarely  with  ba^  'jffl'dh^m, 


242 


AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


ba^  graulein  and  ba^  $3elb,  where  the  natural  gender  prevails: 
id)  rief  ba^  931abd^en,  unb  fie  fam  /  called  the  girl  and  she  came. 

118.  Substitutes  for  Personal  Pronouns.  For  the  pronouns 
of  the  third  person  when  depending  on  a  preposition  and  refer- 
ring to  objects  without  life,  German  commonly  substitutes  ha 
(before  vowels  bar)  compounded  with  the  preposition,  or  it  uses 
some  other  adverb: 


cr  na^m  btc  %thtx  unb  fd^rleb  ba- 

mit  (for  tnit  i^r) 
l^ier  ftanbcn  Xi\(i)t  unb  barauf  (for 

auf  i^nen)  lagen  iBiic^er 
iDir  fanben  ba^  3^^^^^  ^^'^  9^^- 

gen  l^inein  (for  in  c^) 

119.  Special  Uses  of  t§: 

(a)  eg  iDaren  bie  iBriiber 

(b)  eg  "max  einmal  ein  ^rinj 

(c)  eg  maren  einniat  brei  ^ipringen 

(d)  eg  famcn  diele 


he  took  the  pen  and  wrote  (there- 
with) with  it 

here  stood  tables  and  (thereon)  on 
them  lay  books 

we  found  the  room  and  went  into 
it 

they  were  (or  it  was)  the  brothers 
there  was  once  a  prince 
there  were  once  three  princes 
there  came  many 
@g   serves 'as  the  indefinite  subject  of  fein  with   a  predicate 
nominative  (a),  or   as  the  anticipatory  or  grammatical  subject 
of  any  verb  (b,  c,  d),  the  verb  in  both  uses  agreeing  in  number 
with  the  pred.  nom.  or  the  logical  subject.  —  When  the  pred. 
nom.  is  a  personal  pronoun,  it  comes  first :  id^  toax  eg  (not  „eg  tdax 
ici)")  it  was  I,  fie  toaxm  eg  (not  „eg  tdaxtn  fie")  it  was  they,  and  the 
verb  agrees  with  the  predicate  in  person  also :  if)r  feib  eg  (not  „eg 
feib  \f)x"  nor  „eg  ift  il^r")  it  is  you.  —  Sometimes  eg  means  so:  man 
fagt  eg  they  say  so. 

120.  Pronouns  of  Address : 

(a)  mo  bift  bu,  ^art?  bein  SSater 
ruft  bid^ 

(b)  m  feib  i^r,  ^arl  unb  SO^arie? 
euer  3Sater  ruft  euc^ 


(c)  n)o  finb  ®ie,  §err  ©d^mibt? 
or  meine  §erren?  ic^  foil  S^nm 
biefen  ^rief  t)on  3^rem  greunbc 
geben 


where    are    you,    Charles?   your 

father  is  calling  you 
where    are    you,     Charles    and 

Mary?  your  father  is  calling 

you 
where  are  you,   Mr,  Smith?  or 

gentlemen?  I  am  to  give  you 

this  letter  from  your  friend 


PRONOUNS  243 

(a)  addressed  to  one  person  with  whom  the  speaker  is  inti- 
mate or  to  a  young  child;  (b)  addressed  to  several  such  persons; 
(c)  addressed  to  one  or  more  persons  with  whom  the  speaker 
is  not  intimate. 

131.  Possessives.  Of  the  possessive  pronominals,  those  with 
defective  inflection  —  meiti  meine  ntein,  beln  beinc  bein  etc.  (50)  — 
are  used  like  their  English  equivalents,  the  shorter  forms  m?/, 
thy  etc. :  mein  §au^  ift  dt  my  house  is  old. 

The  other  four  sets  of  German  possessives  have  only  one  set 
of  English  equivalents,  the  longer  forms  mine,  thine  etc.,  but  they 
differ  in  use,  according  as  they  are  inflected  or  not.  Thus,  bie^ 
§au^  ift  mein  (uninflected  predicate  adjective,  73)  means  simply 
this  house  is  my  property  or  belongs  to  me,  and  to  no  one  else.  But 
bic^  §au^  ift  melne^  or  ba^  meinc  (87)  or  ha^  melnigc  (90,  inflected 
pronouns)  repeats  the  idea  house  in  the  strong  ending  e^,  or  in 
the  article  ha^  and  the  weak  ending  t,  making  the  statement, 
equivalent  to  this  house  is  the  one  that  belongs  to  me,  where 
the  one  also  repeats  the  idea  house. 

The  last  two  forms  are  used  as  substantives,  with  capitals:  td^ 
befd^ii^e  ba^  SD^eine  or  ha^  9)^elmgc  /  protect  what  is  mine  or  my 
own,  er  tat  ba^  @eine  or  ba^  ©einigc  he  did  his  duty  or  share,  Jebcr 
liebt  bic  ©einen  or  bic  (Seinigen  everybody  loves  his  own  (friends  or 
relatives) . 

122.  The  Demonstratives  are 

bcr,  bic,  ha^  (42,  45,  46)  that,  that  one;  he,  she,  it 
bicfer,  btefc,  biefe^  (47)  this,  this  one,  the  latter 
jener,  jene,  {ene^  (45)  that,  that  one,  the  former 
bcr'jenigc,  bie'ienige,  ba^'jenige  (90)  that,  that  one;  he,  she  it 
berfeFbe,  biefeFbc,  ba^feFbe  (90)  the  same 
fold^er,  fold^e,  fold^e^  (45)  such,  such  a  one 
Each  of  these  words  is  used  as  pronoun  and  as  adjective. 

123.  ^cr,  as  adjective  (45,  46),  differs  from  the  definite  article 
only  in  greater  emphasis,  which  is  often  indicated  by  spaced 
letters :  b  a  ^  ^ud^  l^abe  id^  gelefen,  gib  mir  ein  atibere^  that  book  I 
have  read,  give  me  another. 

124.  ^tt,  as  pronoun  (42),  is  used  as  follows: 


244  AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

fcincn  33ruber  fud^en  (Sic?  bcr  ift    is  it  his  brother  you  are  looking 

fort  for?  he  is  gone 

fragcn  @ic  ben  ba  mit  bem  <©todC    asA;  /im  or  ^/lai  man  there  with 

the  cane 
ful^rcn    (Sic   tnlt   ^^^t^cn    ^fcrbcn    did  you  drive  your  own  horses 

ober  mit  benen  3^xt^  ^ruber^?        or  those  of  your  brother   (or 

your  brother's)? 
ba«  finb^  mcinc  X'6^itx  those  are  my  daughters 

ba^  finb^  'Bit  unb  ba^  (or  bie^)     that's  you  and  that  (or  this)  is 

bin*  id^  myself 

^  3)a8  and  bic8  follow  the  same  construction  as  c6  (119),  except  that  the 
predicate,  if  a  personal  pronoun,  does  not  precede,  as  it  does  in  id^  bin  cd. 

See  also  126  and  141. 

135,  The  Relatives  and  Interrogatives  are 

bcr  bie  baS  (42)  who,  which,  that,  rel.  pron.  only 
meld^cr,  -c,  -e^  (45)  who,  which,  that,  rel.  &  interrog.  pron.  &  adj. 
h)er  (43)  who,  he  who,  whoever,  rel.  &  interrog.  pron.  only 
loaS  (43)  what,  that  which,  whatever,  rel.  &  interrog.  pron.  only 

126.       RELATIVE  CLAUSES  DEMONSTRATIVE  CLAUSES 

ba  tarn  cin  SJiann,  bcr  or  melc^er  ha  tarn  tin  SO^ann,  bcr  max  arm 

arm  trar  unb  beffcn  ©ol^n  langc  unb  beffen  @o^n  n»ar  lange  franf 

franf  gemefen  tnax  then  came  a  getnefen  then  came  a  man,  and 

man  who  was  poor  and  whose  he  was  poor,  and  his  son  had 

son  had  been  ill  a  long  time  etc. 

Observe:  (1)  Relative  clauses  require  the  transposed  order, 
demonstrative  clauses  the  normal  (or  inverted)  order  (231  ff.). 
—  (2)  The  choice  between  bcr  and  n)t\d)tx  is  largely  a  matter  of 
euphony,  but  the  genitive  of  n)cld^cr  is  not  used  pronominally, 
hence  beffcn  (not  „h)eld^c^")  (Bo^n  above.  —  (3)  But  bcr  is  the  rela- 
tive used  after  a  pers.  pron.  of  the  1.  or  2.  person,  the  antecedent 
being  generally  repeated  in  the  relative  clause  and  attracting  the 
verb  into  the  same  person :  h)a^  tDcifet  bu  ha\)on,  bcr  hn  nic  cin  (©c^iff 
gcfcl^cn  l^aft?  what  do  you  know  about  it  who  have  never  seen  a  ship? 

127.  The  Relative  is  not  omitted : 

ba^  ^wi),  ha^  or  mdc^c^  id^  Icfc    the  book  I  am  reading 
(never  „ba^  ^ud^  idi)  Icfc") 


PRONOUNS  245 

128.  Substitutes  for  bcr  or  ml^tv  (compare  118): 

ble  Jeber,  h)omit  (for  mit  bcr  or  the  pen  (wherewith)   with  which 

iDcId^er)  ic^  fd^reibc  /  am  writing 

Zi\(^t,  iDorauf  (for  auf  benen  or  tables    (whereon)    on   which   lay 

tDeld^en)  ^ild^er  lagcti  hooks 

tuomlt  (for  missing  dative  of  tda^  (wherewith     was    she    writing?) 

after  mit)  fc^rieb  fie?  what  was  she  writing  with? 

129.  2Bcr  and  toa§.  (1)  The  implied  antecedent  of  tDtx  or 
tt)a^  may  be  emphasized  by  a  demonstrative : 

iner  gu  fpcit  tarn,  ber  h)urbe  beftraft    /le  u;/io  or  whoever  came  too  late 

(he)  was  punished 

h)a6  id§  l^abc,  ha^  gebe  id^  bit  what  or  whatever  I  have  (that)  I 

give  thee 

With  Wtx  this  must  be  done  when  there  is  a  change  of  con- 
struction: n)cr  guerft  fam,  bem  gab  er  e6  whoever  came  first,  to  him 
ke  gave  it. 

130.  (2)  After  neuter  pronouns  and  neuter  substantive  adjec- 
tives of  the  superlative  degree,  toa^,  instead  of  ba^  or  toeld^c^,  is 
Ihe  regular  relative: 

ba6,  toa^  i(i)  t)abt,  gcbc  id^  that  which  I  have  I.  give 

atle^,  h)a^  ic^  !)attc  all  that  I  had 

tttoa^,  h)ag  id^  tjerlor  something  that  I  lost 

ba^  iBefte,  h3a^  id^  h)ci6  ^/le  best  (that)  I  know 

131.  (3)  2Ba^  often  means  t/;%f  tua^  liiufft  bu  fo  fd^ncll?  why 
do  you  run  so  fast? 

132.  (4)  SSa«  may  stand  for  etn^a^  (137) :  ^aben  <Sie  h)a«  ®u- 

te^?  have  you  anything  good? 

133.  (5)  In  h)a^  filr  ctn  what  kind  of,  toa^  is  indeclinable  and 
{iir  has  no  prepositional  force:  hjaS  fiir  ein  SD^^ann  (nom.)  ift  cr? 
i(;/iai  kind  of  man  is  he?  init  ma^  filr  einer  geber  (dat.  after  mit) 
fd^reibt  er?  what  kind  of  pen  is  he  writing  with? 

See  also  141. 

134.  Indefinite  Relatives  are  especially  those  accompanied 
by  auc^,  (aud^)  nur  or  auc^  immer: 


246 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


tDcld^e  Wflittd  er  and)  bcrfud^tc  whatever  means  he  tried 

tDcr  e«  aud^  (ttnmer)  fei  whoever  it  may  be 

tDO  er  fid^  nur  jeigtc  wherever  he  showed  himself 

135.  The  Indefinite  Pronouns  and  Adjectives  are 


PRONOUNS    ONLY 

PRONOUNS   AND    ADJECTIVES 

iebemtann  44 

every  one, 

atl-  45 

all 

everybody 

cinig-  45 

some,  a  few 

{cmanb  44 

some  one, 

TTtand^-  45 

many  a 

somebody 

mel^rcr-  45 

several 

nlcmanb  44 

no  one. 

ieb-  45,  87 

each,  every 

nobody 

anber-  45,  87 

other,  the  resl 

man  136 

one, 

beib-  45,  87 

both,  two 

some  one 

t)tcl-  45,  87 

much 

ctlDa    137 

something 

njenig-  45,  87 

little,  few 

nid^tg  137 

nothing 

cin-  50,  87 

one 

fcin-  50,  90 

no,  none 

Tue^r  140 

more 

meniger  140 

less,  fewer 

136.  SJlan'  is  indeclinable.  Its  equivalents  are  (a)  one:  man 
mii6  arbcitcn  um  gu  lebcn  one  must  work  in  order  to  live;  (b)  they 
or  'people."  man  fagt,  ber  *iprafibent  fcl  ^icr  they  or  people  say  that  the 
president  is  here;  (c)  a  passive  construction:  man  fagt,  er  fomme 
morgen  it  is  said  that  he  will  come  to-morrow. 

Never  use  er  to  refer  to  a  preceding  man:  njcnn  man  ya.  [d^ncH  Ifiuft,  fo  fann 
man  (not  „cr")  Icid^t  fatten  if  one  runs  too  fast,  he  is  likely  to  have  a  fall. 

137.  Q;ttoa§  and  nxd)t§  are  indeclinable.  Both  occur  fre- 
quently with  a  substantive  adjective  in  apposition  (91).  (Sttoa^ 
may  also  have  a  noun  as  appositive:  ctlDa^  @elb  some  money.  For 
mag  instead  of  cth)a6  see  132. 

138.  5(tt- often  means  every:  er  fam  allc  XaQ(t)  or  allc  3a]^r(c) 
cinmal  he  came  once  every  day  or  every  year;  alle  (Stunbe  einen  (S^* 
Ififfcl  'ooU  every  hour  one  tablespoonful;  er  ]^at  alien  ®runb  ba^u  he 
has  every  reason  for  it.  —  See  also  82,  141. 

Allm  the  sense  of  entire,  whole  is  gang:  he  stayed  all  day  er  blieb 
ben  gangen  Stag. 

139.  JBiel-  and  tocntg-,  when  not  inflected,  are  apt  to  have 


COMPARATIVES  AND  SUPERLATIVES 


247 


a  collective  meaning,  whereas  the  inflected  forms  tend  to  have  a 
distributive  meaning:        ♦ 


n)ir  f)ahtn  nid^t  t)iel  Spfel  bie^ 
3cLt)x  unb  Diele  finb  nid^t  3U 
effcn 

t)iel  SBcin 
Dieler  SBein 
tDenig  ^ein 
iDeniger  3Bcin 


ii;6  have  not  many  (a  large  crop 
of)  apples  this  year  and  many 
(single  or  individual)   apples 
are  not  fit  to  eat 
much  (a  large  quantity  of)  wine 
many  kinds  of  wine 
little  (a  small  quantity  of)  wine 
few  kinds  of  wine 
After  dn,  iDcnig  is  usually  uninfiected:  ein  tocnlg  a  little,  ctn 
toenig  SBaffer  a  little  water. 

140.  9We]^r  and  tocntger,   as  comparatives  of  biet  and  iDcnig, 

are  usually  invariable:  ber  cine  gab  mcf)r,  bcr  anbere  tDeniger  one 

gave  more,  the  other  less,  cr  ^at  me^r  @clb,  abcr  tocniger  J^anb  al3  td^ 
he  has  more  money,  but  less  land  than  I. 


141.   The  Neuter  Singular  of 

in  the  sense  of  a  plural  and  may 

cr  fagtc  mir  cinige^  or  mand^c^  or 
Tnef)rere^  or  t)iele^  or  tDcnigc^, 
tioa^  id)  nlc^t  tDufete 

fiir  anbere^  ^atit  er  fcincn  ©inn 

bag  anbcrc  nal^nt  cr 
ntit  beibem  pfrieben 
bag  fricgt  nie  genug 

iDag  fingen  fann,  bag  fingc 
aKeg,  n3ag  fonnte,  fam 
jebeg  njollte  ®elb,  feineg  tdolltt 
5lrbeit 


Certain  Pronouns  is  often  used 
denote  persons  or  things: 
he  told  me  some  things  or  a  num- 
ber of  things  or  several  things 
or  many  things  or  few  things 
that  I  did  not  know 
for  other  things  he  (had  no  sense) 

did  not  care 
the  rest  he  took 
content  with  either  or  both 
that  kind  of  fellow  or  such  a  fel- 
low never  gets  enough 
whoever  can  sing,  let  him  sing 
all  that  could  come,  came 
every  one  or  each  wanted  money, 
nobody  or  neither  wanted  work 


III.  COMPARATIVES  AND  SUPERLATIVES 

142.  The  Comparative  is  sometimes  used  absolutely,  i.  e.,  not 
implying  direct  comparison: 


248  AN  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

cr  blieb  (ftngere  3^it  he  stayed  (not  longer  than  others, 

buQ  quite  a  while 
elne  altere  !Damc  an  elderly  lady 

143.  The  Superlative,  when  used  predicatively  or  adverbially, 
assumes  the  fixed  form  of  a  phrase  made  up  of  am  and  the  dative 
singular : 

(a)  ber  Xee  tft  am  beften   (not    tea  is  best  when  it  comes  over- 
„beft"),    tDenn    er    iiber    Sanb        land 

fommt 

(b)  bie  D^ofen  finb  am  fd^onftcn    roses  are  finest  in  June 
(not  Mon\t")  im  ^u'nt 

(c)  bu  laufft  am  fd^nellftcn  (not    you  run  fastest 
MmW) 

In  (a)  and  (b)  the  superlative  is  used  predicatively,  in  (c) 
adverbially.  The  absence  of  the  article  in  all  three  English 
equivalents  is  one  of  the  marks  by  which  predicative  and  ad- 
verbial superlatives  can  usually  be  distinguished  from  the 
attributive. 

144.  Superlative  Stem-Forms,  as  given  in  94,  95  and  96,  are 

not  used,  except,  now  and  then,  adverbially;  e.  g., 

l^fid^ft  most  highly,  highly  iiingft  recently,  lately 

iSngft  long  since  meift  mostly 

augerft  extremely  •  moglic^ft  to  the  utmost,  as  much 

gefalligft  "kindly,  'please  as  possible 

145.  Superlative  Adverbs  with  aufi§  and  the  accusative  are 
common,  e.  g., 

auf^   befte   in   the   best   possible    auf^   flarfte  in  the  clearest  pos^ 
manner  sible  manner 

Observe  the  difference  in  meaning  between  these  phrases  and 
those  with  am  (143) : 

fie  fang  aufS  befte  she  sang  her    fie  fang  am  beften  she  sang  best 
best  (of  all  who  sang) 

146.  5(ffcr  before  Superlatives  strengthens  their  meanings: 
mein  allcrbefter  greunb  my  very  best  friend,  bu  laufft  am  atlerf(^ne(l= 
ftcn  you  run  fastest  of  all. 


NUMERALS.      VERBS  249 

IV.     NUMERALS 

147.  The  Hours  of  the  Day  are  expressed  as  follows: 

c^  ift  ncun  Ul^r  or  em  biertel  auf  it  is  nine  o'clock  or  a  quarter 
gel^n  or  l^alb  it\)n  or  brel  biertel  past  nine  or  half  past  nine  or 
auf  gei^tt  a  quarter  to  ten 

er  fam  um  clf  Ul^r  he  came  at  eleven  o'clock 

See  also  99  K 

148.  Dates.  When  simply  the  year  is  given,  the  cardinals 
are  used  and  may  or  may  not  be  preceded  by  im  ^al^rc,  e.  g., 
©oet^e  hjurbe  1749  (ficbge^nl^unbert  neununbtjicraig),  or  im  ^al^rc 
1749,  geboren  (not  „in  1749")  Goethe  was  horn  in  1749. 

When  the  day  of  the  month  is  given,  an  ordinal  is  used,  pre- 
ceded by  am,  or,  in  dating  letters,  by  ben,  and  followed  directly 
by  the  name  of  the  month:  ©oetl^e  iDurbc  am  28.  (ad^tunbglDan* 
jigften)  2luguft'  1749  geboren  Goethe  was  born  etc.;  Berlin',  ben  4. 
(t)ierten)  5lprU'  1891  Berlin,  Apnl  Uh,  1891.     . 

V.    VERBS 

149.  No  Progressive  Forms:  x6)  ge]^c=/  walk  or  /  am  walk- 
ing, \6)  glng  =  /  walked  or  /  was  walking,  \6)  bin  gcgangen  =  /  have 
walked  or  /  have  been  walking  etc. 

150.  Emphatic,  Interrogative  and  Negative  Forms  require 
nothing  to  correspond  to  do.  Thus,  /  did  write  is  \6)  fd^rieb'  or 
ic^  fc^rieb'  }a  or  ic^  fd^rieb  Xocl^V.  Did  you  walk  is  gingft  bu? 
glngt  il)r?  or  glngen  (Sie?  (ht.  walked  you?),  I  did  not  walk  is  x6) 
ging  nid^t  (lit.  /  walked  not).  DidnH  you  walk  is  gingft  bu  nid^t? 
etc.   (lit.  walked  you  not?). 

151.  The  Present  is  often  used  for  the  future  or  for  the 
EngHsh  /  am  going  to  4- infinitive :  id^  ge^e  morgen  auf  bie  3agb 
/  shall  go  or  am  going  hunting  to-morrow.  Also,  to  signify  that 
a  state  or  an  action  begun  in  the  past  still  continues: 

tDie  lange  finb  'Bit  (fd^on)  l^ier  how  long  have  you  been  here 

er  ift  fd^on  ge^n  3^^^  ©olbat  he  has  been  a  soldier  these  ten 

years  (and  is  still) 
But  er  ift  gef)n  Qa1)X  'Bolhat  getDefen  he  was  a  soldier  for  ten  years 
(and  is  a  soldier  no  longer). 


250  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

152.  The  Past.  The  peculiar  use  above  extends  to  the  past: 
td^  toav  fd^on  gel^n  3at)r  (Solbat  /  had  then  been  a  soldier  for  ten 
years  (and  was  still).  Otherwise  the  past  is  the  regular  tense 
for  narration  (see  153). 

153.  The  Perfect,  as  used  in  sentences  like  cr  tft  gcftcrn  an- 
gcfommcn  he  arrived  yesterday  or  ©oet^c  l^at  bag  @ebid^t  gefd^ric- 
ben  G.  wrote  the  poem,  merely  conveys  information  or  states  bare 
facts  without  attendant  circumstances.  If  the  reader  is  to  be 
transported  to  the  scene  of  action  and  given  a  vivid  presentation 
of  the  facts,  the  past  is  used:  er  fam  geftcm  an  (supply,  e.  g.,  al^ 
<Bit  ntd^t  gu  §aufe  traren  when  you  were  not  at  home)  or  ©octl^c 
fd^rieb  bag  ©ebid^t  (supply,  e.  g.,  mii^renb  er  in  3talicn  tear  while  he 
was  in  Italy). 

154.  The  Future  and  Future  Perfect  (often  with  tool^l)  may 
be  used  to  state  what  the  speaker  surmises  or  conjectures  to 
be  true :  eg  hDirb  (mol^l)  bein  53ruber  fein,  'btx  ba  flopft  it  will  prove  to 
he  or  it  is  probably  your  brother  that  is  knocking  there. 

155.  The  Subjunctive  may  express  a  Wish  (Optative  Sub- 
junctive): er  lebe  i)od^!  long  may  he  live!  n)are  i(^  bod)  gefunb! 
would  that  I  were  well!  l^atte  er  nur  gcfd^rieben!  if  he  only  had 
written! 

156.  The  Subjunctive  may  express  Purpose:  fage  eg  il^m,  ba- 
mit  er  f omme  tell  him,  in  order  that  he  may  come,  \6)  fagte  eg  ii^m, 
bamit  er  fame  /  told  him,  in  order  that  he  might  come. 

157.  The  Subjunctive  in  Conditional  Sentences  contrary  to 
fact: 

A.   In  the  present  or  in  the  immediate  future, 

CONDITION  CONCLUSION 


If  I  had  money,  or 
Had  I  money, 

SBenn  id^  ®etb  pttc, 

(past  subj.) 


/  should  be  happy 
fo  mare  id^  gliirfltd^ 

(past  subj.) 

or,  less  often, 

fo  iDiirbe  id^  gliidflidB  feic 

(pres.  conditional) 


VERBS 


251 


^'dttt  id)  ®elb, 

(past  subj.  with  inverted 
order  instead  of  totnn 
with  transposed  order) 


fo  metre  td^  gliicfftd^ 

or,  less  often, 

fo  iDixrbc  id^  gliirflid^  fcin 


or,  with  inversion  of  clauses, 


CONCLUSION 

I  should  be  happy, 

3d^  tDcire  gliirflid^,  or 

3d^  miirbe  glucfUd^  fein, 

B.    In  the  past, 

CONDITION 

//  I  had  had  money,  or 
Had  I  had  money, 

SBcnn  iii)  ®,  gc^abt  §atte, 

(pluperf.  subj.) 


§(lttc  i^  mb  gc^obt, 

(pluperf.  subj.  with  inverted 

order  instead  of  tt)cnn  with 

transposed  order) 


CONDITION 

if  I  had  money  {had  I  money) 

H)enn  id^  ®clb  l^ftttc 

(less  often  ^fttte  i^  ®clb) 


CONCLUSION 

/  should  have  been  happy 
fo  to'dxt  iii)  g.  gctocfcn 

(pluperf.  subj.) 
or,  less  often, 

fo  njiirbc  td^  g.  gcmefcn  fcln 

(perf.  conditional) 

fo  toctrc  id)  g.  gctocfcn 

or,  less  often, 

fo  miirbc  id)  g.  gctocfcn  fcin 


or,  with  inversion  of  clauses, 


CONCLUSION 


CONDITION 


I  should  have  been  happy,     if  I  had  had  money  (had  I  had  m.) 
Sd)  to  (ire  g.  geloefen,         ] 

or,  less  often,  \ 


tomn  id)  @.  gel^abt  l^iittc 


Qd)  toilrbe  g.  getoefen  fein, 


(less  often  pttc  id^  ®.  Qcl^abt) 


C.  Forms  A  and  B  above  may  be  combined : 

CONDITION    IN    THE    PAST 

//  he  had  been  there, 
SScnn  er  ha  getDefen  noixxt, 


CONCLUSION   IN   THE    PRESENT 

he  would  now  be  rich 
fo  mftrc  cr  ictjt  rcid^ 


CONDITION    IN   THE    PRESENT 

//  he  were  still  alive, 
SBenn  er  nod^  am  ?eben  toUxe, 


CONCLUSION    IN   THE   PAST 

he  would  have  been  here  long  ago 
fo  tt)fire  er  [d^on  langc  ^icr  gemefen 


Substitution  and  inversion  of  clauses  may  occur  as  in  A  and  B  above. 

158.   Observe:  1.  The  Condition,  or  the  i/'Clause,  takes  the 
subjunctive  only,  not  the  conditional. 


252  AN  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

2.  The  Condition  may  be  implied  only,  or  partly  expressed: 
2Sic  gliidflid^  tnavt  id)\  how  happy  I  should  be!  (supply,  e.  g.,  hjcnn 
id^  xdd)  td'axt)  or  Urn  glDoIf  U^r  Mvt  e^  gu  fpcit  gemefen  a^  12 
o'clock  it  would  have  been  too  late  (here  the  complete  Condition 
may  be  supposed  to  be  mnn  mir  um  gnjolf  U^r  gefommen  iuaren), 

3.  The  Conclusion  may  be  implied  only,  or  partly  expressed: 
2Bcnn  id^  nur  relc^  mare!  //  /  only  were  rich!  (supply,  e.  g.,  hjic 
gliidlid^  hjiirbc  id^  fein  how  happy  I  should  be)  or  (Sr  fprac^,  al^ 
(=al^  er  fpred^en  tDtlrbe)  hjenn  er  reic^  miire  or  (without  if  and 
with  inverted  order)  al6  tDCirc  er  reid^  he  spoke  as  (=as  he  would 
speak)  if  he  were  rich. 

4.  (a)  Conditions  of  the  less  vivid  future,  which  are  not  contrary  to 
fact  but  still  possible  of  realization,  coincide  in  form  with  those  contrary 
to  fact  in  the  present  time:  if  he  should  fall  sick,  I  should  he  unhappy 
hjcnn  er  txant  h)ilrbc  (or  toiirbe  er  franf),  fo  tio&vt  id)  ungliidlid^.  —  (b)  In  other 
conditions  not  contrary  to  fact,  including  those  of  the  more  vivid  future, 
the  indicative  is  used :  if  he  gets  (or  shall  get)  well  again,  I  shall  he  happy 
totnn  er  h)ieber  gefunb  njtrb,  fo  h)erbc  id)  gliidfUc^  fein;  if  he  has  money,  he  is 
happy  iBenn  er  ®elb  t)at,  fo  ift  er  glticflic^;  (if)  whenever  he  had  money,  he  was 
happy  ttjenn  er  (Mh  ^attc,  fo  iror  er  glildlic^;  if  he  has  been  there,  he  has  seen 
her  hjenn  er  ha  gemefen  ift,  fo  ^at  er  fie  gefel^cn. 

159.  The  Concessive  Subjunctive: 

eg  fel  l^eig  ober  Mt,  id^  ge^e  be  it  hot  or  cold,  I  shall  go 

cr  fel  nod^  fo  reld^  or  tdit  reid^    however  rich  he  may  be,  I  do  not 
er  and)  fei,  id^  ad^te  il^n  ntd^t  respect  him 

160.  The  Diplomatic  Subjunctive,  used  to  soften  an  assertion, 
or  to  make  a  cautious  statement: 

nun  toiiren  tolr  ja  fertig  bamit        now  we  ought  to  be  through  with 

it  or  now,  it  seems  to  me,  we 
are  through  with  it 

e§  biirfte  gu  fpcit  fein  it  is  too  late,  I  think  or  I  fear 

161.  The  Subjunctive  of  Indirect  Statement.  The  subjunctive 
forms  of  the  present,  perfect  and  future  are  most  frequent  in 
clauses  dependent  on  words  of  saying,  reporting,  thinking,  in- 
quiring, doubting  etc.  Their  use  in  such  clauses  is  to  emphasize 
the  indirect  or  hearsay  character  of  that  which  is  said,  reported 
etc.,  whereas  the  indicative  tends  to  make  it  appear  as  actual. 


VERBS 


253 


said   that   he   had   no 
fagte,  bag  cr  fein  ®elb 


162.  DIRECT   STATEMENT  INDIRECT   STATEMENT 

A.  says,  or  has  said,  to  B:  B.  says,  or  reports,  to  C: 

1.  /  have  no  money  3d^  l^abc  1^*  A.  says  that  he  has  no 
fein  ®elb.  money  ^,  fagt,  ba^  er  fein  ®elb 

l^abe. 

lb-  A. 
money  51 
]^abe» 

2^*  A.  asks  who  has  been  here 
21.  fragt,  tiotx  l^ier  getDefen  fei. 

2^-  A.  asked  who  had  been  here 
51.  fragte,  tDer  l^ier  gemefen  fei. 

3*"  A,  thinks  she  will  soon  get 
well  again  21.  glaubt,  fie  n)erbe 
balb  n)ieber  gefunb  iDerben. 

3^-  A.  thought  she  would  soon 
get  well  again  21.  glaubte,  fie 
toerbe  balb  n)ieber  gefunb  toerben. 

163.  Observe:  (1)  As  a  rule,  the  same  tense  of  the  subjunctive  is  used' 
in  the  indirect  statement  as  in  the  direct,  whether  the  principal  verb  is  in 
the  present,  as  in  1^  (foQt),  2^  (fragt),  3*  (glaubt),  or  in  the  past,  as  in  1^  (fagtc), 
2^  (fragte),  3^  (glaubtc).  But  if  the  form  of  the  present,  perfect  or  future 
subjunctive  would  coincide  with  that  of  the  corresponding  indicative:  the 
past  subjunctive,  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  or  the  present  conditional, 
respectively,  is  substituted,  especially  after  a  governing,  or  principal,  verb 
in  the  past;  thus: 

DIRECT 

©cl^cn  btc  ^inber  tnit  un«?  do  the  chil- 
dren go  with  us? 


2.  Who   has   been  here?  SSer 
ift  ^ier  gemefen? 


3.  /  think  she  will  soon  get 
well  3d^  glaube,  fie  h)irb  balb  njie- 
ber  gefiinb  toerben. 


INDIRECT 

©ic  frogtc,  ob  bic  ^tnbcr  mtt  un« 
gingen  (for  gel^en)  she  asked  if  the 
children  were  going  with  us 

9)2an  [agte,  [ic  ptten  (for  ^aben)  il^n 
nic^t  gefel^en  they  said  they  had  not 
seen  him 

©ic  fagte,  ba^  [ie  bctscitcn  ba  fein  miir^ 
ben  she  said  that  they  should  be 
there  in  season 

These  substitutions  are  also  found,  especially  in  the  spoken  language  of 
Northern  Germany,  where  they  are  not  needed  in  order  to  gain  a  distinctively 
subjunctive  form,  e.  g.,  fte  fragten,  ob  cr  il^n  ge[cl^en  l^attc  (for  l^abe). 

(2)  The  past  indicative  of  a  direct  statement  is  changed  to  the  perfect 
subjunctive  of  the  indirect;  thus,  fie  tourben  rcid^  becomes  er  fagt,  or  fagte,  ba^ 


©ie  fiaben  i^ti  nic^t  gefel^en  they  have  not 
seen  him 

iEBir  hjcrbcn  bciactten  ha  fein  we  shall  be 
there  in  season 


254  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

fie  rci(^  gctoorbcn  [cicn,  not  reid^  toUrbcn  (past  subj.),  which  might  seem  to  imply 
a  condition  (157,  158.  4),  as  tt)cnn  fie  flcifeig  arbcitcten  if  they  worked,  or  should 
work,  diligently. 

(3)  An  imperative  in  direct  statement  is  expressed  in  indirect  statement 
by  means  of  the  subjunctive  of  follcn;  thus,  bicib  l^icr!  (=bu  follft  f|icT  bleibcn) 
becomes  cr  fagt,  or  [agtc,  ic^  [otic  l^icr  bleibcn. 

164.  The   Infinitive.     Active   Form  with   Passive   Meaning. 

§oren,  fe^cn  and  laffen  may  be  followed  by  an  Infinitive  omitting 
its  object-subject  (besides  omitting  gu,  as  hear,  see  and  let  or 
have,  in  a  causal  sense,  omit  to).  The  infinitive  is  then  rendered 
by  a  passive  construction: 

With  object-subject  and  active      Without  object-subject  and  with 
meaning  passive  meaning 

\6)  prte  i^n  ^eutfd^  fprcd^cn  /  id^  ^6rtc  X)cutfci^  fpred^en  /  heard 

heard  him  speak  German  German  spoken 

\^  fal)  fie  ha^  ^aug  baucn  /  saw  vi)  \(x\)  ba^  §au^  baueu  /  saw  the 

them  build  the  house  house  being  built 

cr  Ue6  ben  Diener  il^m  ben  33rief  er  liefe  fic^  (t)on  bent  Wiener)  ben 
bringen  he  had  (let)  the  servant  iBrief  bringen  he  had  the  let- 
bring  him  the  letter  ter    brought   to   him    {by    the 

servant) 

165.  (@^)  iSgt  fid^  with  an  active  infinitive  is  quite  commonly 
the  equivalent  of  can  with  a  passive  infinitive  or  of  a  similar  con- 
struction: c^  la^t  \i(i)  nid^t  leugnen,  \ia^  it  cannot  be  denied  that, 
ha^  53rot  liefe  fld^  nid^t  mc^r  effen  the  bread  (could  no  longer  be  eaten) 
was  no  longer  fit  to  eat,  e^  lagt  fid^  nid^t  befd^relben  it  {cannot  be 
described)  is  indescribable. 

166.  Phrases  or  sentences  may  thus  occur>  with  laffen,  which  without 
context  are  ambiguous,  e.  g.,  id^  liefe  il^n  fd^reiben  =  /  let  him  write,  if  il^n 
refers  to  a  person,  and  /  had  it  written,  if  tl^n  refers  to  a  letter;  but  td^  lie^ 
i^m  fd^reiben  can  mean  only  /  had  him  written  to  or  I  caused  some  one  to  write 
to  him.  Similarly  td^  licfe  il^n  fud^en  =  /  let  him  look  (for  somebody  or  som£- 
thing)  and  /  caused  him  to  be  looked  for  (by  somebody). 

167.  The  active  form  of  the  infinitive  with  gu  may  have  passive 
meaning  also  after  fein,  e.  g.,  e^  tft  nid^t  gu  befc^reiben  it  is  {not  to 
be  described)  indescribable  and,  as  in  English,  (l^icr  ift)  eln  ^an^  311 
toermietcn  {here  is)  a  house  to  let. 


VERBS 


255 


168.    Other  Special  Uses  of 
er  bitcb  liegen  or  fi^cn 
cr  blicb  fte^en  usually, 
but  also 
Voir  fu^ren  fpajieren 
trir  gingen  fpajieren 
h)ir  ritten  fpagieren 
er  ^at  ^ein  im  teller  liegcn 
urn  3U  fc^reiben 
(an)ftatt  gu  fc^reiben 
o^ne  p  fd^reiben 
laufen!  or  nid^t  laufen!  (173) 


the  Infinitive : 

he  remained  lying  or  sitting 

he  stopped,  halted, 

he  remained  standing 

we  went  for  a  drive 

we  went  for  a  walk 

we  went  for  a  horseback  ride 

he  has  wine  lying  in  his  cellar 

in  order  to  write 

instead  of  writing 

without  writing 

run!  or  don't  run! 


169.    Infinitive  Phrases  have  the  infinitive  at  the  end:  er  bat 

mid^,  bag  33uc^  ntitgubringen  unb  red^t  balb  gu  fommeti  he  asked  me 
to  bring  the  book  with  me  and  to  come  very  soon.     The  gu  must 
be  repeated  with  every  infinitive. 
For  infinitive  nouns  see  56.  2. 


170.  The  Imperative  is  used  as  follows: 
1^-  fommt  unb  gel^t 
mit  mir,  ^arl  unb  2)?a* 
rie  or  ^tnber  come 
and  go  with  me, 
Charles  and  Mary  or 
children. 

2^-  gebt  mir  eure 
53ud^cr,  tarl  unb  5ma= 
rie  or  ^inber  give  me 
your  books,  Charles 
and  Mary  or  children. 
3^-  ge^t  i^r',  tarl 
unb  aJJarie  or  ^inber, 
Id^'  tDiK  nid^t  you'  go, 
Charles  and  Mary 
etc. 


1.  fomm  unb  gel^ 
mit  mir,  ^arl  come 
and  go  with  me, 
Charles. 


2.  gib  mir  beln 
33ud^,  ^art  give  me 
your  book,  Charles. 


3.  ge^  bu',  tarl, 
id^'  tDill  nid^t  you'  go, 
Charles,  V  don't  want 
to. 


1^'  fommen8icunb 
gel^en  @ie  mit  mir, 
§err  <5d^mibt  or  meine 
§erren  come  and  go 
with  me,  Mr.  Smith 
or  gentlemen. 

2^-  geben  <Sie  mir 
3^re  33ud^er,  §err  @. 
or  meine  §erren  give 
me  your  books,  Mr. 
S.  or  gentlemen. 

3^-  gel^en  ©ie',  §err 
<B.  or  meine  §erren, 
id^'  tnill  nid^t  you'  go, 
Mr.  S.  or  gentlemen 
etc. 


1,  2,  3  are  addressed  to  one  person  with  whom  the  speaker  is  intimate,  or 
to  a  young  child;  1*,  2*  3*  to  several  such  persons;  1^,  2^,  3^,  to  one  or  more 
persons  with  whom  the  speaker  is  not  intimate.     The  pronouns  bu  and  ifyc 


256  AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

in  3  and  3*  are  used  only  for  emphasis  or  contrast;  the  pronoun  ®ic  in  1^,  2^, 
3^,  whether  emphatic  or  not,  is  never  omitted  and  is  repeated  with  every 
imperative,  as  in  1^. 

171.  The  Participles  are  verbal  adjectives  and  subject  to  in- 
flection and  comparison  (94)  when  used  attributively. 

172.  The  present  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  used  as  an 
attributive  and  preceded  by  gu  has  passive  force  and  implies 
necessity  or  possibility: 

eine  gu  ftilnnenbe  S^f^^i^9  ^  fortress  that  has  or  had  to  be 

stormed 
cine  nid^t  ^u  ftUrmcnbe  geftung        a  fortress  that  cannot  or  could 

not  be  stormed 

173.  The  past  participle,  in  the  sense  of  a  present  participle 
in  EngUsh,  occurs  with  fommen:  er  tarn  gelaufcn  or  gefprungen  he 
came  running  or  jumping.  It  may  also  have  the  force  of  an  im- 
perative (168):  ftillgeftanben!  stand  still! 

174.  If  modified,  participles  are  preceded  by  their  modifiers: 
bcr  im  SBagen  fi^enbe  §err  the  gentleman  sitting  in  the  carriage, 
ben  t)on  fec^^  *ipferben  gegogcnen  ^agen  the  carriage  drawn  by  six 
horses.  But  in  participial  clauses  the  past  participle  often  stands 
first:  ber  3Sagen,  ijon  fed^^  "ipferben  gejogen  or  ber  SSagen,  gegogen 
t)on  fcd^g  ^ferben. 

175.  The  Passive. 

SBerbcn  +  past    participle    de-  Seln  +  past  participle  denotes 

notes    a   process    or   a   change  a   state   or   condition    resulting 

of    condition    and   is  the   real  from  a  process  or  an  action  com- 

passive:  pleted,  and  may  be  called  the 

resultant  passive: 

!Der  SBtief  njurbe  (gerabe)  gefd^rie^  !Der  SBrlcf   \dax    (fd^on)    gefd^rle* 

ben,  al6  id^  tarn  the  letter  was  ben,  aU  i6)  tarn  the  letter  was 

(just)   being    written    when  I  (already)    written   or   finished 

came  when  I  came 

!Die  ©olbaten  finb  gefangen  tuorben  ^ie   ©olbaten   finb   gefangen   the 

the  soldiers  have  been  or  were  soldiers  are  captives 

captured 


VERBS  257 

176.  The  passive  is  less  often  used  in  German  than  in  EngUsh, 
an  active  verb  with  mon,  or  a  reflexive  construction,  often  taking 
its  place,  e.  g.,  bann  begrub  man  bie  Xoten  then  the  dead  were  buried, 
eg  l^at  fid^  gejeigt,  ha^  c6  ntd^t  gel^t  it  has  been  shown  that  it 
won't  do.  —  There  are  also  passive  constructions  of  verbs  used 
intransitively:  e^  rt)irb  ba  getan^t  there  is  dancing  going  on  there. 
If  ba  stands  first,  eg  is  omitted:  ba  tDurbe  getangt  (178,  179). 

177.  Reflexive  Verbs  are  often  construed  with  a  genitive  or  a 
dative,  or  with  a  prepositional  phrase : 

freu(e)  bid^  beg  ?ebeng!  rejoice  in  life! 

ha^  3a^r  nal^t  fic^  feinem  (Snbe        the  year  is  drawing  to  a  close 

fie  fiird^tete  \id)  i)or  bem  §unbe       she  was  afraid  of  the  dog 

178.  There  are  also  reflexive  constructions  of  verbs  used  in- 
transitively:  eg  tangt  fid^  l^ier  gut  (it  is  good  dancing  here,  i.  e.)  this 
is  a  good  place  for  dancing.  If  l^ier  stands  first,  eg  is  not  omitted: 
^ier  tanat  eg  fid^  gut  (176,  179). 

179.  Sentences  containing  Impersonal  Verbs  or  verb-phrases: 
Beginning  with  eg  Beginning  with  some  other  word 

1.  eg  regnete  geftem  it  rained  P-  geftem  regnetc  eg  yesterday 
yesterday.  it  rained. 

2.  eg  gel^t  mir  gut  /  am  well.  2^-  mir  gel^t  eg  gut  /  am  well. 

3.  eg  gibt  fold^e  ?eute  there  3*-  fold^e  J^eute  gibt  eg  there 
are  such  people.  are  such  people. 

4.  eg  friert  mld^  unb  eg  ^ungert  4^-  mid^  friert  unb  (mid^)  l^ungert 
mid^  /  am  cold  and  hungry.  I  am  cold  and  hungry. 

Impersonal  verbs  Hke  those  under  4  and  4*,  which  describe  a 
state  of  body  or  mind,  differ  from  the  rest  in  the  omission  of  eg 
if  the  sentence  begins  with  a  word  other  than  eg  (176,  178). 

180.  Modal  Auxiliaries,    ^iirfcn: 

barf  td^  je^t  gel^en?  may  I  go  now? 

totx  barf  l^ier  befel^Ien?  who  ha^  the  right  to  command 

here? 

bag  biirfte  mal^r  fein  that  (might  =  )  is  likely  to  be  true 

aber  feiner  barf  eg  l^eren  but  nobody  must  hear  it 

<Bit  biirfen  nur  befe()Ien,  unb  id)    you  need  but  command,  and  I 

fontnte  will  come 


258 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


181.  mmtn: 

bag  fann  tr)ai)x  fein 

i<i)  fann  nid^t  n)eg 

i(i)  fann  nid^t  na^  §aufc 

id)  fann  nid^tg  bafilr  (or  bagu) 

See  also  186. 

182.  TOgcn: 

ha^  mag  mal^r  fcin 

id^  mag  gem  9}hifif  l^fircn 

id^  mag  nid^t  reifcn 

cr  module  nid^t  effcn 

id^  module  gem  ettrag  effen 

id^  mijd^te  lieber  l^ier  blelben 

183.  aRuffcn: 

man  mufete  i^n  Ueb  l^aben 
id^  mug  fort 

man  miifete  il^m  l^elfen,  meine  td^ 
man  miifetc  t)errudft  fein,  fo  tttoa^ 
gu  glauben 

184.  Sotten: 

(Bit  f)CLtttn  blelben  follen 

fag'  il^m,  er  foil  fort 
toag  foE  i^? 

hjag  foil  td^  bamtt? 
m^  \oU  bag? 

fie  foil  l^icr  fein  or  gehjefen  fein 

man  follte  meinen,  er  fel  t)errudft 

185.  SSottcn: 

cr  njill  Bit  gem  fpred^en 

er  loill  <Sie  lieber  felbft  fpred^en 


that  may  be  true 
I  cannot  go  or  get  away 
I  cannot  go  or  get  home 
I  cannot  help  it,   I  am  not  to 
blame  for  it 


that  may  be  true 

I  like  to  hear  music 

I  donH  care  to  travel 

he  did  not  care  to  eat 

I  should  like  to  eat  something 

I  should  prefer  to  stay  here 


one  could  not  but  love  him 
I  must  go 

one  ought  to  help  him,  I  think 
one  would  have  to   be  crazy  to 
believe  a  thing  like  that 

you  ought   to,    or   should,   have 

stayed 
tell  him  he  is  to  go 
(what    am    I    to    do?)    what    is 

wanted? 
what  shall  I  do  with  it? 
what  does  that  mean?  what  is  it 

for? 
she  is  said  to  be  here  or  to  have 

been  here 
one  would  think  he  was  crazy 

he  would  like  or  begs  leave  to 

see  you 
he  prefers  to  see  you  personally 


VERBS 


259 


cr    XDiU   ®le   am    liebften    felbft 

fpred^en 
id^  tDolIte  au^gcl^en,  aU  fie  famcn 
cr  tDiII  fort 
iDO  mollen  (Bit  l^in? 
tua^  milt  benn  bcr  ^erl? 

cr  mill  Offisier  fcin 

man  tt)ill  i^n  gefcl^cn  l^aben 


he  very  much  prefers  to  see  you 

personally 
I  was  about  to  go  when  they  came 
he  wants  to  go  or  is  about  to  go 
where  are  you  going? 
what  in  the  world  does  the  fellow 

want? 
he  pretends  to  be  an  officer 
they  maintain  that  they  have  seen 

him 


186.  ^iinncn,  Bennett  and  SStffcn  =  know :  f 5nncn  fonntc  gefonnt, 
used  chiefly  of  languages,  lessons  and  games:  id^  fann  grangofifd^, 
aber  fcin  !I)cutfc^  /  know  French,  but  no  German;  fennctt  fannte 
gefannt,  used  of  persons,  places  or  objects  in  general:  id)  fcnne  ii)n 
nid^t  I  donH  know  him,  am  not  acquainted  with  him;  tDiffcn  toufetc 
QciDu^t,  used  of  facts:  id^  tDcig,  ha^  er  t)a  tDo^nt,  abcr  id^  !ennc  il)n 
nid^t  /  know  that  he  lives  there,  but  I  donH  know  him  personally ^ 
or  by  sight. 

187.  The  Commonest  Verbs  with  fcin: 


anfommcn  arrive 

aufftc^cn  rise,  get  up 

au^gc^cn  go  out 

bcgegnen  (dat.)  meet 

blcibcn  stay 

cinfallen  fall  in;  (dat.)  occur  to 

fal^rcn   go  driving 

fallen  fall 

fliegen  fly 

fliel^cn  flee 

folgcn  follow 

geljcn   go,  walk 

gelingen  succeed 

gcfd^c^cn  happen 

fommcn  come 


laufen  run 
rcifcn  travelj  go 
rcitcn  ride 
fcin  be 

fpringcn  jump 
ftcrbcn  die 
trcten  step,  tread 
Dergcl^cn  pass,  elapse 
t)erfd^n)inbcn  disappear 
t)orfommen  occur,  seem 
iDOd^fcn  grow 
iDcrbcn   become,  get 
h)icberfommen  l  come  back, 
guriidfommcn  J     return 
gicl^cn  march,  go,  move 


Examples:   ift  er  angefommen?   has   he   arrived?,   bag   ^inb   ift 
gefallcn  the  child  has  had  a  fall. 


260  AN  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

VI.     ADVERBS 

The  following  are  some  of  the  commonest  adverbs,  with  their  simplest 
uses  merely  mentioned  and  the  more  difficult  ones  illustrated. 

188.  ^htx,  fonbern*  5l6er  follows  a  positive  or  a  negative 
statement  and  limits  it  by  opposition  only.  (Sonbcrn  follows  a 
negative  statement  only  and  usually  introduces  a  substitute  or  a 
contrary.     '^htx  =  but  yet,  \onba:n  =  hut  on  the  contrary: 

eg  ift  ie^t  nic^t  (Bommtx,  aber  eS    it  is  not  summer  now,  hut  yet  it 

tft  rt)arm  is  warm 

c6  ift  ie^t  nic^t  ©ommer,  fonbem    it  is  not  summer  now,  hut  on  the 

Winter  contrary  it  is  winter  or  it  is 

winter  now,  not  summer 

189.  ^l§  and  toenn.  5ltg  as,  (at  that  particular  time)  when  is 
used  with  past  tenses  only  and  refers  to  one  occasion  only;  tt)enn 
if,  whenever  is  not  confined  to  past  tenses: 

atg  id^  fam,  tt)ar  er  fort  when  I  came,  he  was  gone 

tdtnn  id)  tarn,  ttiar  er  fort  whenever  I  came,  he  was  gone 

^i^t^  alg   nothing  hut;  aU  after  compar.  than. 

190.  5tu^  also,  too,  moreover,  hesides,  even 

\6)  ge^c,  tocnn  t%  aud^  bli^t  I  shall   go  even  if  {though)   it 

lightens 
tft  er  aud^  arm  (  =  tt)enn  er  aud^     though   he   he   poor,    yet   he   is 

arm  ift),  fo  tft  er  bod^  gut  honest 

\6)  gel^c  nid^t,  unb  bu  aud^  nld^t      /  shall  not  go,  nor  will  you 

191.  ^a  there,  oftener  then;  since,  as 

ha  tarn  er  then  he  came,  then  came  he 

ba  er  nic^t  fam,  fo  ging  id^  since  (as)  he  did  not  come,  I  went 

fd^on  toollte  id^  fort,  ba  fam  fie         /  was  ahout  to  go  {then  =  )  when 

she  came 
jeijt  ift  er  ha  (often  =  ]^ier)  now  he  is  here 

193.  ^afict  never  therehy  in  the  sense  of  hy  means  of  it  or 
in  consequence  of  it,  which  is  baburd^  (193) 

er  ftanb  babel  he  stood  hy  or  near  it,  was  present 

fie  lag  unb  babel  fam  fie  an  eln    she  was  reading  and  while  doing 

neueg  ^ort  so  she  came  to  a  new  word 


ADVERBS  261 

„x^  Qtf)t/'  fagtc  cr,  unb  babel  blicb    ''I  go/'  he  said,  and  for  all  that 

cr  fi^en  he  kept  his  seat 

cr  ift  rcid^  unb  babel  gut  he  is  rich  and  good  too  (withal) 

193.  2)abur(i^  (192)  thereby,  by  it 

ha^  tarn  baburd^,  ba^  @le  gu  fc^nell  that  came  from  or  was  owing  to 
\\it)Xtn  your  driving  too  fast 

194.  ^afiir  therefor,  for  it,  for  them,  instead 

clnen  (Bahd  ^aitt  er  nld^t,  bofiir  it's  true,  he  had  no  sword,  hut  he 
f)attt  er  aber  elne  ^iftole  had  a  pistol  instead 

ba«  gebe  Id^  blr  bafiir,  bafe  bu  fo  thafs  what  I  am  going  to  give 
gut  blft  you  for  being  so  kind 

195.  ^amtt  therewith,  with  it  or  them 

„foTnm!"  fagte  er  unb  bamlt  lief  er  ^' come!''  he  said,  and  saying  so, 

n)eg  he  ran  away 

fie  entfd^ulblgtc  fld^  bamlt,  ba^  fie  she  excused  herself  saying  that 

franf  fel  she  was  ill 

er  begniigte  flc^  bamlt,  l^n  gefel^en  he  was  satisfied  with  having  seen 

gu  l^aben  him 

fag^  eS,  bamlt  er  e^  tod^  (^IffO  l^^    it   in    order    that   he   may 

know  it 

196.  ^aran  at  it,  near  it,  about  it 

eben  benfe  Ic^  baran  /  am  just  thinking  of  it 

baran  erfannte  er  e§  by  that  he  recognized  it 

iDer  Ift  fd^ulb  baran,  ba^  bu  arm  who  is  to  blame  for  your  being 
blft?  poorf 

197.  ^orauf  thereupon,  on  it,  on  them 

balb  barauf  soon  after  that 

ben  Xa%  barauf  on  the  following  day 

redone  nld^t  barauf,  bafe  Id^  fomme    don't  count  on  my  coming 

198.  X>a^  that,  so  that 

fie  fam  nle,  ol^nc  bafe  fie  un^  toa^  she  never  came  without  bringing 

brad^te  us  something 

cr  ftlrbt  Ileber,  al^  bafe  er  mld^  he  will  die  rather  than  betray  me 

berriit 


262 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


199.     ^aju  thereto,  to  or  with  it,  in  addition 
haiVL  braud^t  man  tin  SD^effer  for  that  one  needs  a  knife 


id)  h)unfc^e  bir  ©liidf  baju,  bafe  bu 
getDii^lt  blft 

300.    ^cnn  (228) 
njag  tulllft  bu  bcnn? 
IDO  fommt  ber  bcnn  ^er? 


/    congratulate   you    on    having 
been  elected 


what  do  you  want,  please  f 
why!  where  does  he  come  fromf 


301.    2)cfto  see  ^c,  209. 

303.    ^0(3^  still,  yet,  hut,  for  oil  that,  after  all 


(Sie  finb  boc^  nid^t  fran!? 

er  Ift  bod^  fertig? 

fie^  bod^! 

ergci^len  ^it  bod^ 

tDcire  fie  bod^  l^ier! 

ift  cr  aud^  arm,  fo  ift  er  bod^  gut 


you  are  not  ill,  I  trustf 
he  is  ready,  I  dare  sayf 
just  seel  or  do  seel 
tell  us,  pray 

would  that  she  were  herel 
though  he  he  poor,  he  is  good  at 
least 
er  mag  ge^en,  ^enn  er  arbeitet  bod^    he  may  go^  for  he  does  not  work 
nic^t  anyway 


303.    ^nmal,  mat  once,  once  upon  a  time,  sometime 
nod^  einmal 
noc^  ein'mal  fot)iel 
auf  einmal 
fomm  einmal  (mal)  ^er,  grife 


once  more,  again 

as  much  again,  twice  as  much 

all  at  once,  suddenly 

just  come  here,  Fred 


304.     Q:x^i  first 
erft  aU  er  fprad^,  fal^  id^  il^n 
erft  feit  geftem 
(bann)  erft  red^t 


not  until  he  spoke,  did  I  see  him 
only  since  yesterday 
(then)  all  the  more 


305.  @ar  very,  even,  with  negatives  at  all 

gar  nid^t;  gar  nid^t^  not  at  all;  nothing  at  all 

gar  fein  ®elb  no  money  at  all 

gang  unb  gar  entirely,  altogether 

306.  Q^ttn  gladly;  compar.  lieber  rather;  superl.  am  liebften 
hest  or  most  of  all 


ADVERBS 


263 


td^  tcfc  gem 

i(i)  fc^reibe  (iebcr 
id)  fpiele  am  liebftcn 


I  am  fond  of  reading,   I   like 

to  read 
I  prefer  to  write 
I  like  playing  best  of  all 


207.  ^rgcnb  adds  the  notion  of  any,  ever,  at  all,  some 

irgcnb  clner  or  irgcnb  jemanb  anybody    at   all,    any   one   you 

please 
irgenbtDic;  trgenbtDO  somehow;  somewhere 

208.  3a  yes,  indeed 
t)\tx  ift  er  ia 
^arl?  bcr  ift  ja  nod^  franf 

bicibcn  <Bk  {a  l^icr 

209.  ^t  ever,  at  any  time 
ie  frii^cr,  ie  (befto)  bcffer  the  earlier  the  better 

210.  SieBer,  am  UcBftcn,  see  ©cm,  206 

211.  ^odi  still,  yet,  see  also  ^nmal 


why,  here  he  is 

Charles?    he    is    still    sick,   you 

know 
by  all  means,  stay  here 


noci)  nid^t 
nod^  cin  ©tiidf 
mcbcr  .  .  .  nod^ 
nod^  immcr 

212.  ^lun  now,  and  now 
nun,  tDic  ge{)f  ^? 

213.  $Rur  only,  but 
fommcn  <©ic  nur 

mie  fann  man  fo  ettt)a6  nur  tun? 


not  yet 

another  {one  more)  piece 

neither  .  .  .  nor 

even  now,  even  then,  still 


well,  how  do  you  dof 


just  come,  you  had  better  come 
how  can  a  man  possibly  do  such 
a  thing? 


214.    Sd^on  already,  by  this  time,  often  not  translated 
fd^on  im  3af)rc  1830  even  in  1830,  as  early  as  1830 

fd^on  nad^  gcl^n  ^agen  only  ten  days  later 

fd^on  am  5lnfang  at  the  very  beginning 

ber  h)irb  fd^on  ge^en  he'll  go  fast  enough 


264  AN  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

215.  (So   SO,   thus;   often   untranslated   when    introducing   a 
principal  clause 

ge^ft  bu,  fo  bleib^  td^  if  you  go,  I  shall  stay 

faum  \a{)  er  mid^,  fo  lief  cr  treg  hardly  had  he  seen  me,  when  he 

ran  away 

fo  l^ore  listen  then 

ein  fo  grofee^  ^au^  or   fo  ein  such  a  large  house 

groge^  $au^ 

fo  cincr  suc/i  a  one,  such  a  fellow 

fo  tfma^  such  a  thing 

216.  ©unbern,  see  mtv,  188.    SScnn,  see  5«!^,  189. 

217.  mt  how 

iDle  cr  fam,  ging  id^  as  /le  came,  /  went 

tolc?  bu  toeinft?  what?  you  are  crying? 

Tlu\it,  Xoit  i(i)  fie  nod^  nlc  gcl^firt  music,  such  as  I  had  never  heard 

^atte  before 

toie  bent  aud^  Jel  however  that  may  he 

218.  SSoIir,  adj.,  adv.,  well 

fie  fal^  tool^l,  bafe  eg  gu  fpat  toax        she  probably  saw  that  it  was  too 

late 
fie  fingt  tool^t,  aber  toie?  s/ie  sings  indeed,  but  how? 

bag  ^at  er  trol^r  (emphatic)  gefagt    he  did  say  that 

219.  3^<^^  ^^  ^^  sure,  li  is  true 

gib  tnir  ein  53ud^,  unb  gloar  ein     gr{t;e  me  a  book,  and  that  a  good 
guteg  one 

VII.     PREPOSITIONS 

220.  Prepositions  with  the  Genitive : 

anftatt,  ftatt  instead  of  jenfeitg  on  the  further  side  of, 
aufeer^alb   outside  of  beyond 

biegfeitg   on  this  side  of  fraft   by  virtue  of 

l^atben  for  the  sake  of  laut  according  to 

^alhtx  for  the  sake  of  ntittelft   by  means  of 

inncrl^alb  inside  of,  within  oberl^alb  above 


PREPOSITIONS 


265 


urn  .  .  .  td'iikn  for  the  sake  of 
ungead^tet  notwithstanding 
untcr^alb  below 
untneil   not  far  from 
tjcrmogc  by  dint  of 


\daf)Xtnh   during 
tnegen  on  account  of 
Icing^  along 

gufolgc  in  consequence  of 
tro^  in  spite  of 


The  last  three  sometimes  take  the  dative. 

331.  With  l^albcn,  tcegen  or  h)i(ten  are  formed  mcinetl^albcn, 
tncinetmcgen,  um  melnettnillen  on  my  account  or  behalf,  for  my  sake; 
beinct^albcn,  bcineth)egcn,  um  beineth)i(lcn  on  your  account  or  behalf, 
for  your  sake,  etc.  with  fclnct-,  i^ret-,  unfert-,  curet-,  Ql^ret- 


333.    Prepositions  with  the  Dative : 


au^  out  of,  from 

aufeer  besides 

bet  by,  at 

binneit  within 

cntgcgett  against,  to  meet 

gcgcntlbcr  opposite 

gcma^   in  accordance  with 

tnlt  with 

nad^  after,  to 

333.    A  few  special  phrases: 

au«  melc^cm  ©runbc? 
aufeer  fid^  fein 
bcl  fc^Ied^tem  SBetter 
bci  biefen  ^Borteti 
bet  meinertt  53rubcr 
id^  ha(i)tt  bei  tnir 
id^  bleibe  babci 
tnit  bcr  ^a^n 
tnlt  53orfa^ 
nad^  atten  ©eiten 
nad^  oben,  nad^  utiten 
cr  fragte  nac^  bir 
na6)  (meinem)  3Sunfd^ 
feinem  $lu^fe{)en  nad^ 
tion  §er3en  gem 


n&d^ft  next  to 

ncbft  along  with 

ob   above 

famt  aZongr  w;tY/i 

felt  since 

Don  o/,  /rom,  off 

au  to 

gulDiber  contrary  to 


for  what  reason? 

be  beside  one^s  self 

in  bad  weather 

with  these  words,  while  saying 

at  my  brother's  (house) 

I  thought  to  myself 

I  stick  to  it 

by  train 

on  purpose 

in  all  directions 

upward,  downward 

he  inquired  for  you 

according  to  (my)  wish 

judging  by  his  appearance 

with  all  my  heart 


266  AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

3um  let^ten  Tlalt  for  the  last  time 

3um  genfter  l^inau^  out  of  the  window 

311  (Snbc  feln  be  at  an  end,  be  over 

3^  5^6,  3U  *iPfcrb  on  foot,  on  horseback 

(nad^)  bem  ^albe  gu  in  the  direction  of  the  forest 

334.    Prepositions  with  the  Accusative : 

bl^  till,  unto  ol^ne  without 

burd^  through  fonber  without 

filr  for  um  about,  round 

gegen  against,  toward  toiber  against 

225,    A  few  special  phrases: 

cr  l^cilt  i^ti  fiir  e()rUd^  /le  ^/imA;s  ^im  honest 

fiir  fid^  (stage  direction)  aside 

©d^ritt  fiir  <Sd^ritt  siep  by  step 

ic§  l^abe  nid^t^  bagegen  /  have  no  objection  (to  it) 

cr  fam,  ol^nc  ba^  er  ntlr  gefd^rlebcn  he  came  without  having  written 

l^atte  to  me 

c^  tut  mir  U\^  um  il^ti  /  am  sorry  for  him 

jclgt  iff  ^  um  bid^  gefd^c^en  now  you  are  done  for 

eg  l^anbelt  fic^  um  unfere  greil^cit  our  liberty  is  at  stake 

um  fo  Diet  mti)x  by  so  much  the  more 

336,    Prepositions  with  the  Dative  or  the  Accusative : 
an  on,  at  nebcn  beside 

auf  on,  upon,  up  iiber  above,  over,  across 

jointer  behind  unter  under,  among 

in  in,  into  t)or  before,  in  front  of 

gtDifd^cn  between 
These  govern  the  dative  in  answer  to  the  questions  where?  and 
when?,  i.  e.,  with  verbs  denoting  either  rest  or  else  motion  within 
certain  hmits,  e.  g.,  motion  in  a  circle  or  motion  to  and  fro.  They 
govern  the  accusative  in  answer  to  the  questions  whither?  and 
how  long?,  i.  e.,  with  verbs  denoting  motion  toward  an  object  or 
any  Umit. 

337.  DATIVE  ACCUSATIVE 

id^  filje  an  bcm  2:ifd^c  I  am  sitting    id^  fe^c  mid^  an  ben  ^ifd^  /  seat 
at  the  table  myself  at  the  table 


CONJUNCTIONS 


267 


ba^  ^ud)  liegt  auf  bent  Xi\(i)t  the 
book  is  lying  on  the  table 

fie  fpieleit  l^intcr  bcm  §aufe  they 
are  playing  behind  the  house 

bu  njarft  in  bicfem  3^^^^^^  2/^^ 
were  in  this  room 

id^  ftanb  ncbcn  3^ncn  /  stood  be- 
side you 

ha^  ^ilb  l^angt  ixhcx  ber  Xixv  the 
picture  hangs  over  the  door 

i(^  f)ortc  fie  nnter  mcincnt  genfter 
I  heard  them  under  my  window 

ftanb  fie  t)OX  bcr  Zixx?  was  she 
standing  in  front  of  the  door? 

id)  fanb  e^  jltiifd^en  ben  beiben 
iBaumen  I  found  it  between  the 
two  trees 


iii)  tege  e^  anf  ben  ^ifd^  /  lay  it 

upon  the  table 
er  lief  l^intet  ba^  §aug  he  ran 

behind  the  house 
bu  gingft  in  jene^  ^i^i^^i^  you 

went  into  that  room 
er  fe^t  fic^  neBen  mic^  he  sits  down 

beside  me 
er  fu^r  iil^er^  SWecr  he  went  across 

the  sea 
ha^  ^ud)  fiel  nnter  ben  2;ifd^  the 

book  fell  under  the  table 
gel^en  (Sic  t>ox  bie  Xux  step  out  in 

front  of  the  door 
id)  ftellte  ben  (Stuf)I  jltiifd^en  bie 

beiben  iBciume  /  placed  the  chair 

between  the  two  trees 


VIII.     CONJUNCTIONS 

228.    Conjunctions  are  of  three  kinds: 

(1)  General  connectives: 
aber  but,  but  yet        •     benn  for  fonbem  but,  on  the  contrary 

altein  only,  but  ober  or  unb   and 

These  never  affect  the  order  of  words  (232,  note  **). 


229.     (2)  Adverbial  conjunctions,  as 


alfo   so,  so  then,  hence 

avid)   also,  too,  moreover 

ba   then,  there 

hai)tx  hence 

bann  then 

barauf  thereupon 

barum   therefore 

bennoc^   yet,  notwithstanding 

mhlid)  finally 


inbeffen  however 
ichod)   nevertheless 
nod)  yet,  still;  nor 
nun  now 
fo  so  * 

t)ielleid^t  perhaps 
bietmel^r  rather 
n)o]^l  perhaps,  indeed 
gtDar  to  be  sure 


freilic^   to  be  sure 
These,  when  standing  at  the  head  of   a  clause,  regularly  re- 
quire the  inverted  order  of  words  (243) . 


268 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


330.     (3)  Subordinating  conjunctions,  as 


aU   when,  as 
bi6  until 
ha  since,  as 

bamiV   in  order  that,  so  that 
bag   that 
cf)e  before 
inbem'   while 
nad^bem'  after 
ob   whether,  if 

These  introduce  dependent  clauses  and  transpose  the  personal 
verb  to  the  end  of  its  clause  (240) . 


obgteic^'   although 

feit(bem)    since 

toaijxtnh   while 

h)anu   when 

tt)cU  because 

totnn  if,  when,  whenever 

toenn  aud^   even  if 

h)ie  how,  as 

tt)0   where 


IX.     THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS 

A.   Order  of  Verb  and  Subject 

331,  According  to  the  relative  position  of  the  principal  ele- 
ments of  the^  sentence  —  verb  and  subject*  —  there  are  three 
orders:  (1)  the  normal,  in  which  the  verb  follows  the  subject; 
(2)  the  inverted,  in  which  the  verb  precedes  the  subject  —  these 
two  in  independent  clauses  chiefly;  (3)  the  transposed  order,  in 
which  the  verb  stands  last  —  this  in  dependent  clauses  only  (240) . 

The  Normal  Order  is  used  The  Inverted  Order  is  used 

332,  In  declarative  and  in-  In  declarative  and  interroga- 
terrogative  sentences  beginning    tive    sentences    beginning    with 


with  the  subject: 

Dcr  SBefi^cr  iencS  .^aufcS,  ein 
reld^er  alter  ^aufmann,  tutrb 
morgen  mtt  fetner  grau  unb 
feiner  ^od^ter  nacf)  Snglanb  rei= 
fen,  [aber]  cr  bictbt  bort  nic^t 
lange,  [benn]  er  tft  f(^on  feit 
einem   3ai)xt    txant,    [unb]   cr 


any  other  element**: 

morgen  totrb  ber  S3cfi^cr  jcne^ 
$aufe6,  ein  reid^er  alter  ^auf= 
mann,  mtt  feiner  grau  unb  fei= 
net  Xo(i)Ux  nad^  Snglanb  reifen, 
[aber]  lange  Utiht  cr  ha  nid^t, 
[benn]  fd^on  feit  einem  3af)re 
ift  cr  franf,  [unb]  htn  ilSinter 


*  Verb  means  the  personal  or  finite  part  of  the  verb  only;  subject,  the 
subject  with  its  adjuncts.  —  **  Except  aber,  attein,  benn,  obcr,  fonbern  and 
unb,  which  nowhere  affect  the  order,  and,  thus  being  neutral  connectives, 
are  bracketed  in  the  examples  of  232. 


ORDER    OF   WORDS 


269 


NORMAL   ORDER 

tottt  ben  SSintcr  in  ^talien  gu* 
bringen  the  owner  of  that  house, 
a  rich  old  merchant,  will  go 
to  England  to-morrow,  with 
his  wife  and  his  daughter,  but 
he  will  not  stay  there  long,  for 
he  has  not  been  well  all  this 
year  and  he  intends  to  spend 
the  winter  in  Italy 

x^  fjahc  fein  ®ilber  unb  ®olb  / 
have  no  silver  and  gold 

ic^  ttJCtff,  ba^  er  fommt  /  know 
that  he  is  coming 

xti)  ging  nic^t  gu  il)m,  ba  id^  tDufetc, 

t)a^  cr  tarn  I  did  not  go  to  him, 

since  I  knew  that  he  was  coming 
fic  ift  nid^t  fd^fin,  [allcin]  ftc  ift  gut 

she  is  not  beautiful,  but  she  is 

good 
cr  ful^r  fc^ncll  nad^  bcr  @tabt,  urn 

ben   Slrgt   gu    l^olen   he   drove 

quickly  to  town  in  order  to  get 

the  physician 
bu  totllft  mir  bcfe^Icn?  you  mean 

to  order  me  about? 
tocr  tjat  eln  grogc^  §au6?  who 

has  a  large  house? 
toa^  mac^t  ben  SD^enfc^en  glildflid^? 

what  makes  man  happy? 

333.     Sometimes  in  declara- 
tive sentences  with  imperative 
force : 
\>n  btctbft  ^ier!  or  ©tc  BIctbcn 

{)ier!  you  stay  here! 


INVERTED    ORDER 


totH  er  in  3talien  gubringen  to- 
morrow the  owner  of  that  house, 
a  rich  etc. 


<Sirber  unb  ®oIb  f^abt  idf  nid^t 

silver  and  gold  have  I  none 
ba^  er  fommt,  toetjf  ic^  (or  bag 

njei^  id^)  that  he  is  coming  I 

know 
ha  id^  n)u6tc,  bag  er  fam,  gtng  t(^ 

nid^t  gu  i^m  since  I  knew  that 

etc. 
fd^on  ift  fie  nid^t,  [altcin]  gut  ift  fie 

she  is  not  beautiful,  but  she  is 

good 
urn  tm  5lrgt  gu  l^olen,  fu^ir  er 

fd^netl  nad^  bcr  ^taU  in  order 

to  get  the  physician  he  drove 

etc. 
toittft  btt  mir  bcfel^Ien?  do  you 

mean  to  order  me  about? 
iDer  (pred.  nom.)  ift  jener  SDlann? 

who  is  that  man? 
mag  (pred.  nom.)  ift  ber  SJlenfc^? 

what  is  man? 

Regularly  in  imperative  sen- 
tences when  the  subject  is  ex- 
pressed (170): 
blcib    hn    l^ierl    stay   thou   here! 

bicibcn  ®ie  f)ler!  stay  here! 


334.     Sometimes  in  optative        Regularly    in    optative    (im- 


270 


AN  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


NORMAL   ORDER 

sentences  with  the  verb  in  the 

3d  person: 

(3oit  ficfie,  bafe  er  fommt!  God 

grant  that  he  comes! 
cr  lefie  l^od^!  long  may  he  live! 


INVERTED  ORDER 


336.     In  dependent  conces- 
sive clauses: 

cr  fei  noc^  fo  rcld^,  id)  mag  tl^n 
nid^t  though  he  be  never  so 
rich,  I  don  t  like  him 


237.     In  dependent  substan- 
tive clauses  omitting  ba^: 
id^  fagc,  cr  ift  fleigig  (for  ha^  cr 

flelfelg  ift)   /  say  (that)  he  is 

diligent 


perative)  sentences,  without  re- 
gard to  the  person  of  the  verb: 
gcBc  Q^ott,  bag  er  fommt!  may 

God  grant  etc. 
toarcn  toir  bod^  gu  §aufe!  would 

that  we  were  at  home!  f o  f ci  c^ ! 

so  let  it  he!  gcl|cn  ton  let  us  go 

235.  In  sentences  beginning 
with  the  anticipatory  subject  c^ 
(119): 

e6  famcn  brct  JBriibcr  there  came 
three  brothers,  e^  Uht  hit  fjrci* 
l^cit!  long  live  freedom! 

In       dependent       concessive 
clauses : 
fci  cr  nod^  fo  reld^,  td^  mag  il^it 

nid^t   {be  he  or)  though  he  be 

never  etc. 

Always  if  the  first  part  of 
obgleid^,  JDenngleid^,  obf^on  or 
h)enn  aud^  is  omitted:  ttjfirc  c^ 
aud^  tt)ai)x  (for  tDenn  e6  auc^ 
iDa^r  tDcire),  fo  ginge  ic^  bod^ 
nld^t  even  if  it  were  true,  still  I 
should  not  go;  ift  cr  glelc^  arm 
(for  toenngleic^  or  obgleid^  cr  arm 
ift),  fo  ift  cr  boc^  gut  though  he 
be  poor,  (yet)  he  is  good 

238.  In  dependent  condi- 
tional clauses  omitting  h)enn  or 
ob,  for  which  see  157,  158. 

239.  Often  in  exclamations: 
toie  fd^on  ift  fie!  how  beautiful  she 
is!  fjai  bcr  abcr  cine  5^afe!  what  a 
nose  that  fellow  has!  badtff  xti)^^ 
bod^!  /  thought  so! 


ORDER   OF   WORDS  271 

340.  The  Transposed  Order  is  used  in  dependent  clauses 
introduced  by  a  subordinating  element  —  as  a  conjunction  (230) 
or  a  relative  or  indirect  interrogative :  —  atle  fallen,  ba^  t^  un- 
moglid^  toat  all  saw  that  it  was  impossible,  fie  faufte  e6  nid^t,  iDcil 
fie  fcin  ®elb  fjaiit  she  did  not  buy  it  because  she  had  no  money, 
man  fragte,  mo  ber  SJlann  gu  finbett  fei,  ber  t^m  ba«  gcfagt  f^aht 
they  asked  where  the  man  could  be  found  that  had  told  him  this, 

241.  Notes.  (1)  When  sentences  of  the  inverted  order,  with 
the  same  subject,  are  connected  by  unb,  and  unb  is  followed  im- 
mediately by  another  element  than  the  new  verb,  the  subject  is 
repeated  (in  the  form  of  a  pronoun) :  gcftern  fam  mein  greunb  gu 
mir  unb  glcld^  crgci^Ue  cr  mir  blc  ©efd^ic^tc  yesterday  my  friend 
came  to  me  and  at  once  (he)  told  me  the  story. 

242.  (2)  If  several  elements  begin  a  sentence  of  the  inverted 
order,  they  should  be  similar  in  kind,  e.  g.,  all  adverbs  of  time 
or  all  adverbs  of  place,  as  geftern,  al^  i^  nad^  §aufc  fam,  tear  cr 
nod^  ^ier  yesterday,  when  I  came  home,  he  was  still  here,  but  not 
„bamal^,  in  jcnem  §aufe  too^nit  cin  9}Jufifer/'  which  should  be 
bamalg  mo^nte  in  jcnem  §aufe  ein  SD^ufifer  or  in  ienem  §aufc  n^ol^ntc 
bamal^  ein  90?ufifer  then  there  lived  a  musician  in  that  house. 

243.  (3)  Certain  words  may  or  may  not  cause  inversion,  e.  g., 
bod^   but,  yet,  still  freilid^   to  be  sure 

jebod^   yet,  however  getoi^   certainly,  surely 

entn)eber  either  gn)ar  to  be  sure,  it  is  true 

The  more  of  a  pause  the  speaker  makes  after  such  words,  the 
more  they  become  detached  from  what  follows,  like  exclamations, 
which  never  cause  inversion.  Hence  we  find  bod^  gel^t  t§  and  bod^ 
e^  QC^t  but  it  goes,  entmeber  mein  95rubcr  fommt,  ober  id^  fommc 
and  enttDeber  fommt  mein  23rttbcr,  ober  id^  fomme  either  my  brother 
will  come  or  I  shall. 

244.  (4)  Concessive  clauses  often  fail  to  cause  inversion: 
n3enn  bu  aud^  Iciufft,  hn  fommft  bod^  gu  fpiit  (or  fo  !ommft  hn  bod^ 
gu  fpat)  even  if  you  run,  you  will  be  late  anyway, 

245.  (5)  In  dependent  clauses  introduced  by  a  subordinating 
element  and  containing  an  infinitive  used  for  a  past  participle 
(27.  5) ,  the  personal  or  finite  verb  regularly  precedes  the  non-per- 


272  AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

sonal  forms :  ftienn  id^  ii)n  fofort  l^otte  fommen  laffcn,  fo  to'dxt  c6  nid^t 
Qt\d)d)tn  if  I  had  sent  for  him  at  once,  it  would  not  have  happened. 

B.   Order  of  Adjuncts  of  Verb  and  Subject 

246.  The  subordinate  elements  of  a  sentence  —  adjuncts  of 
verb  and  subject  —  are  arranged  alike  in  all  three  orders:  parti- 
ciples, infinitives  and  prefixes  standing  nearest  the  end,  before 
these  the  elements  next  in  importance  or  emphasis  and  before 
them  again  the  less  important  or  less  emphatic,  so  that,  in  gen- 
eral, the  modifier  precedes  the  word  it  modifies  or  the  dependent 
word  that  on  which  it  depends: 

NORMAL  INVERTED  TRANSPOSED 

247.  1.  id)  iDerbe  1^*  morgcn  njcrbe  1^-  i^  fagc,  bag  id^ 
tnorgen  ben  ^rlef  id)  ben  iBrief  nid^t^  morgcn  ben  iBrief 
nid^t^  abfd^idfen^  fiin-  abfd^idfen^  fonnen  to-  nld^t^  abfc^idfen^  fon= 
nen  /  shall  not  he  morrow  I  shall  not  nen  toerbe^  /  say  that 
able  to  send  the  letter  etc.  /  shall  not  etc. 
to-morrow. 

1  Adverbs  of  jQegation,  like  nld^t,  nic,  fcincSlBcgS,  nirgenbS  etc.,  when  modi- 
fying a  clause  or  sentence  as  a  whole,  stand  last,  e.  g.,  er  Qab  ii)X  ben  ^ricf 
au«  Slmerifa  geftern  obenb  nic^t  or  next  to  last,  i.  e.,  immediately  before  the 
verb-forms,  as  above.  But  if  such  adverbs  modify  any  particular  word  or 
phrase,  they  immediately  precede  it,  e.  g.,  cr  Qah  i^r  ben  S3rief  qu3  Slmerifa 
nid^t  geftern  abenb,  fonbem  l^eutc.  —  ^  stands  before  EiJnnen  because  depending 
on  it  —  this  makes  the  German  order  of  the  non-personal  parts  of  the  verb 
usually  the  reverse  of  the  English.  —  ^  Also  nid^t  tcerbe  abfc^idfen  fiinncn,  245. 

248.  2.  er  ^at  2^-  l^eute  ^at  er  mtd^  2^-  @ic  iDiffen,  ha^ 
ntld^  l^eute^  in  tneinem  in  meinent  ,3^^^^^^  ^^  ^^^  l^eute^  in  Tnei= 
Simmtic^  \d)x  pflic^^  \t\)v  l^fiflid^^  urn  9?at  nem  3intmer-  fe^r 
um  dlat  gefragt*  to-  gefragt*  to-day  etc.  I^oftid^^  urn  dlat  ge* 
day,  at  my  room,  he  ftagt^  l^at  you  know 
very    politely    asked  that  he  etc. 

my  advice. 

S  2,  3  The  usual  order  of  adverbs  is  time,  place,  manner.  —  *  UTn-9?Qt-gcfragt 
forms  one  verbal  idea,  and  um-9?at,  though  not  actually  joined  to  gefragt,  as 
ab  to  fd^icf en  in  247,  is  treated  Uke  a  separable  prefix ;  hence  also  ic^  fragte 
il^n  geftern  abcnb  um  9tat  (at  the  end,  just  as  ab  m  ic^  fd^idtte  ben  SBrief  ge[tcm 
abenb  ab). 

249.  3.  er^atfo-  3*-  foeben  ^at  cr  3^-  id^  frage,  ob  er 
cbcn   feinem   ^ruber^    felnenx     ^ruber^    eln    foeben  fcinem  ^ruber^ 


ORDER   OF   WORDS  273 

eln  53uc^2  gcgebcn  he    iBud^^     gcgebcn     just    cin  33u(^^  gegeben  l^at 
has  just  now   given    now  etc.  /  ask  if  he  etc. 

his  brother  a  book. 

»,  2  Of  two  objects,  one  indirect  and  the  other  direct,  and  both  nouns,  tb. 
direct  is  the  more  important  and  usually  follows  the  indirect. 

250.    4.  cr  l^at  c6^  4*-  foebcn  l^at  cr  c^^        4^-  id^  fagc,  ba^  cr 

foebcn    fclncm    ^ru*  fcincm  iBrubcr'   gege*    c3^      focben      feincm 

ber'   gcgebcn   he  has  ben  just  now  he  etc.      33rubcr^  gcgebcn  l^at  / 

just  given  it  to  his  say  that  she  etc. 
brother, 

1, 2  Of  two  objects,  one  a  pronoun  and  the  other  a  noun,  the  pronoun, 
whether  it  be  the  direct  or  the  indirect  object,  is  the  less  emphatic  and  precedes. 
—  Among  pronouns,  a  personal  pronoun  precedes  a  demonstrative :  id^  Qah  e* 
bcm  /  gave  it  to  that  fellow;  a  reflexive,  being  least  emphatic,  usually  pre- 
cedes all:  bcr  gretnbe  [tcKtc  fic^  mir  Dor  the  stranger  introduced  himself  to  me; 
and  of  two  personal  pronouns,  the  shorter  precedes  the  longer  or  the  one 
having  the  fuller  sound:  td^  Qab  c8  il^ncn,  ic^  gab  c8  i^x,  id)  gab  c8  i^m. 

351.  In  the  inverted  order,  an  unemphatic  adverb  or  pronoun 
may  separate  verb  and  noun-subject  (not  pronoun-subject) :  ha^ 
mal^  famcn  oft  bic  335gel  an  mein  genfter  (or  bamal«  famen  bie 
586gel  oft  an  mein  genfter)  in  those  days  the  birds  often  came  to  my 
window,  bann  gab  mlr  beln  SBruber  ba^  i8ud^  (or  bann  gab  bein 
33ruber  mlr  ha^  53uci^)  then  your  brother  gave  me  the  book.  In 
the  normal  order,  however,  an  adverb  strictly  modifying  the  verb 
is  not  allowed  to  stand  between  the  subject  and  the  verb:  cr 
fanb  nirgcnb^  9?u{)c  (but  not  „cr  nirgenb^  fanb  9?uf)c")  he  nowhere 
found  rest.  5lber  however,  alfo  therefore,  bagegen  on  the  other  hand, 
inbeffcn  however,  jcbod^  but  and  namlid^  namely,  that  is  to  say  are 
found  between  the  subject  and  the  verb,  e.  g.,  cr  aber  glng  —  td^ 
bagegen  blieb  etc.,  but  they  are  then  connectives  of  sentences  or 
clauses  rather  than  true  adverbs. 

352.  The  adjuncts  of  the  noun-subject  or  of  nouns  in  gen- 
eral, as  also  those  of  the  infinitive,  are  arranged  as  shown 
in  169  and  174,  that  is,  in  general,  according  to  the  principle 
stated  in  246. 


A   LIST 


OF    THE 


COMMONEST   STRONG   VERBS 


In  Groups  according  to  Vowel-Change 

About  30  of  the  most  important,  which  should  be  learned  first,  are  marked 
with  an  asterisk. 


INFIN. 

PAST  nro. 

PAST  PART. 

fangcn 

fing 

gefangen 

catch,  capture 

anfangcn 

fing  an 

angefangen 

begin 

ctnpfdtigcu 

cmpfing 

cmpfangen 

receive 

^angen  ' 
fangcn  J 

^ing 

gefangen 

hang,  be  suspended 

*faEen 

flel 

i[t  gcfattcn 

fall 

gcfatten,  dat. 

gcfici 

gefatten 

please 

^altcn 

^iclt 

gel^alten 

hold,  keep 

erl^alten 

cr^ielt 

crl^alten 

obtain,  receive 

*{a[[cn 

m 

gelaffen 

let,  cause  to 

*t)erIoffcn 

berlicfe 

Dcrlaffen 

leave,  desert 

ratcn,  dat. 

rict 

gcraten 

advise,  guess 

bcrratcn 

t)crrict 

bcrroten 

betray 

*fc^Iafen 

waef 

ge[(^Iafen 

sleep 

*fa^ren 

ftt^ 

ift  gcfal^ren 

drive,  go,  pass 

crfa^rcn 

crful^r 

crfa^ren 

experience 

fortfa^rcn 

ful^r  fort 

fortgefal^ren 

continue 

(ein)Iabcn 

lub  (ein) 

(ein)gelaben 

invite 

*[d^Iagcn 

fd^Iug 

gefd^Iogen 

strike,  defeat 

*tragcn 

tru9 

gctragen 

carry,  wear 

*Iaufcn 

Kef 

ift  gclaufcn 

run 

*ftc^cn 

ftanb 

gcftaitbcn 

stand 

aufftc^cn 

ftanb  auf 

ift  aufgeftanben 

rise,  get  up 

*»crftc^n 

t)erftanb 

ocrftanbcn 
274 

understand 

COMMONEST   STRONG   VERBS 


275 


iNPm. 

PAST  IND. 

PAST  PART. 

*Qc6m 

gab 

gegcben 

give 

umgcbcn 

umgab 

umgebcn 

surround 

*fc^cn 

fa^ 

gcfcl^cn 

see 

anfc^cn 

fa^  an 

angcfcl^cn 

look  at 

au^fc^cn 

\ai)  au« 

auggefel^en 

look,  appear 

9cf(ie^cn 

gcfd|a^ 

tft  gefd^cl^en 

happen,  take  place 

trctcn 

trat 

tft  gctrctcn 

tread,  step 

Icfcn 

lad 

gclefcn 

read 

effcn 

afe 

gegeffen 

eat 

bergeffcn 

bcrga& 

tocrgeffen 

forget 

befc^Ien 

befall 

bcWcn 

command 

brcc^en 

brac^ 

gcbrod^cn 

break 

unterbrc(^cn 

untcrbrad^ 

untcrbrod^ctt 

interrupt 

♦fpred^en 

fprad^ 

gcfprod^en 

speak,  say 

bcrfprcd^cn 

berfprad^ 

berfproc^en 

promise 

♦nel^men 

nal^tn 

gctiominen 

take 

*^elfen,  dat. 

w 

gc^olfen 

help 

trcffcn 

traf 

gctroffen 

hit,  meet 

*[tcrbcn 

ftarb 

ift  gcftorbcn 

die 

mcrfm 

toarf 

gctt)orfcn 

throw 

*9C^en 

fittig 

tft  gcgangcn 

go,  walk 

aufgc^cn 

ging  auf 

ift  aufgegangen 

rise,  mount,  open 

bcrgcl^cn 

t)crging 

ift  Dergongen 

elapse 

fec^tcn 

fod^t 

gcfpd^tcn 

fight 

^eben 

^ob 

ge^oben 

lift,  heave 

Iciben 

litt 

geltttm 

suffer 

((^neibcti 

[d^nitt 

gefd^nitten 

cut 

*rcttcn 

ritt 

tft  gcritten 

ride 

ftreitcn 

ftritt 

geftirttten 

strive,  quarrel 

bcifem 

btfe 

gcbiffen 

bite 

rci^en 

rife 

gcriffcn 

tear,  snatch 

jerrei^en 

Scmfe 

Scrriffcn 

tear  in  pieces 

l^ci^cn 

fliefe 

gcl^etfeen 

be  caUed,  be  named 

*blcibm 

blicb 

ift  gcblicbcn 

remain,  stay 

*[c^cmen 

[d^ien 

gcfd^ienen 

shine,  seem 

crfc^einen 

crfd^icn 

crfd^icnen 

appear 

*[c:^reiben 

fd^rieb 

gcfd^rieben 

write 

fc^reien 

f(^ric 

gefd^rieen 

scream 

ftcigcn 

fticg 

ift  gefticgcn 

rise,  mount 

trciben 

tricb 

gctricbcn 

drive,  impel 

276 


AN  ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


mriN. 

FAST  IND. 

PAST  PART. 

♦bitten 

bat 

gebctcn 

beg,  request 

♦[ifeen 

fa6 

gefeffcn 

sit 

befitjcn 

hm 

befcffen 

possess 

bcginncn 

begann 

begonnen 

begin 

gciDinnen 

gciDQTin 

getDonncTi 

win,  gain 

binbcn 

banb 

gebunben 

bind,  tie 

toerbinben 

berbanb 

dcrbunben 

unite,  connect 

*finben 

fanb 

gcfunben 

find 

bcfinbcn,  fid^ 

befanb 

befunbcn 

be,  as  to  health 

gclingcn,  dat. 

gelang 

tft  gelungen 

succeed 

♦fingcn 

[ang 

gefungen 

sing 

♦fpringcn 

fprang 

ift  gcfprungen 

leap,  spring 

♦trinfcn 

tranf 

gctrunfen 

drink 

♦licgcn 

lag 

gclegen 

lie,  be  situated 

bicten 

bot 

gebotcn 

offer,  bid 

tocrbietcn 

bcrbot 

derboten 

forbid 

flicgen 

fto9 

ift  gcftogen 

fly  (flew,  flown) 

flic^cn             < 

m 

ift  gefto^cn 

flee  (fled,  fled) 

sicken 

m 

gesogen 

draw,  pull 

gic^en 

S09 

ift  gesogcn 

march,  move,  go 

♦fterlicrcn 

Dcrlor 

oerlorcn 

lose 

fliefeen 

flofe 

ift  gcfloffen 

flow 

fd^icfeen 

fc^ofe 

gefc^offcn 

shoot 

[(^licfecn 

\^H 

gefc^Ioffen 

shut,  close 

fc^UeBcn 

Wo^ 

gcfc^Ioffen 

conclude,  infer 

bcfc^ric^cn 

befd^Io& 

befc^Ioffen 

determine,  resolve 

entfc^Iic&cn,  fic^ 

cntfd^Iofe 

cntfd^Ioffcn 

determine,  decide 

♦fommcn 

fam 

ift  gcfommcn 

come 

flTifoTriTncn 

ftttn  cm 

ift  angcfomTncn 

arrive 

befommen 

bcfom 

befommen 

get,  receive 

oor!otnmcn 

fam  t)or 

ift  borgcfommcn 

appear,  occur 

*tim 

tat 

gctan 

do 

*ntfen 

rlef 

gcrufcn 

call 

Ittgen 

108 

gclogcn 

lie,  speak  falsely 

AN    ALPHABETICAL    LIST 


OP 


STRONG   AND   IRREGULAR   VERBS 

This  is  a  fuller  list  than  the  preceding  one,  but  it  gives  no  compounds,  ex- 
cept where  the  simple  verb  is  rare  or  not  in  use.  The  2.  and  3.  sing.  pres.  ind., 
the  2.  sing,  imperat.  and  the  past  subj.  are  given  only  when  there  is  a  change 
of  vowel  from  the  infinitive  or  the  past  ind.  respectively.  The  2.  sing.  pres.  ind. 
of  stems  ending  in  an  s-sound  is  often  shortened  so  that  it  becomes  identical 
with  the  3.  person,  e.  g.,  blSfcft  becomes  biftft  etc.  But  with  stems  in  fd^  the  f  of 
the  ending  ft  is  retained  so  that  toafd^eft,  for  example,  becomes  tofifd^ft,  which 
is  then  also  often  pronounced,  though  not  written,  like  the  3.  sing.,  totifd^t. 


INFIN. 

PAST  IND. 

PAST  PART. 

PRES.  IND. 
2.  AND  3.  SING. 

IMPERAT. 
2.  SING. 

PAST  SUBJ. 
1.  OR  3.  SING. 

Sadfen  hake 

hut 

gcbadfen 

bfidfft,  bacft 

biifc 

53cfe^kn  command 

um 

befo^lcn 

bcftc^lft,  bcfic^It 

befiebl 

bcfa^Ie, 
,    bcfiJ^le 

SBcfteifeen  (fic^)  ap- 

htm 

bcfliffcn 

ply  one's  self 

S3eginnen  begin 

bcgann 

bcgonncn 

begttnne, 
bcgfinnc 

S3ci§en  bite 

bife 

gcbtffcn 

33ergen  hide 

barg 

geborgcn 

btrgft,  birgt 

btrg 

barge, 
burge 

^er[ten  burst 

barft 

t[t  geborften 

birftcft,  birft 

birft 

barfte, 
biJrftp 

S3en)cgcn  induce 

beiDog 

betDogen 

bcn)(Jge 

Weak  and  regular  in  the  sense  of  move. 

33iegeti  bend 

bog 

gcbogen 

biJge 

S3ieten  offer 

bot 

gcbotcn 

h'6U 

SBinben  bind 

banb 

gcbunbcn 

banbe 

S3ittcn  beg 

hat 

gcbeten 

bate 

33Ia[en  blow 

blieg 

geblafcn 

biafcft,blaft 

S3Ieibcn  remain 

blieb 

ift  geblicbcn 

S3rQtcn  roast 

brtet 

gebraten 

bratft,  brttt 

^red^en  break 

brad^ 

gebroc^en 

bric^ft,  brtd^t 

brid^ 

brad^c 

33renncn  burn 

brannte 

gebrannt 

brenntc 

^rtngen  bring 

'  brad^tc 

gcbrad^t 

brad^te 

2)cnfen  think 

ha6)tt 

gcbad^t 
277 

bad^te 

278 


AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


PRES.  IND. 
2.  AND  3.  SING. 


HCPERAT.        PAST  SVTBJ. 
2.  SING.       l.OR  3.  SINa 


!Drcfc^cn  thresh 

!Dringen  press 

!Diirfcn  be  allowed 

©mpfcl^Icn  recom- 
mend 

@rblcid^cn  pale 

@rl6[d^cn  extin- 
guish, go  out 

(Srfd^rcdEcn  become 
frightened 

@ffcn  eat 

^af)Xtn  drive 

fatten  fall 

ijangcn  catch 

ged^tcn  fight 

ginben  find 

^Icd^ten  fmrie 

glicgen  fly 

gUel^cn  yZce 

gragcn  ask 

t^rcffen  devour 
©fircn  ferment 
©cbfircn  bear 
®cbcn  yive 
©cbei^en  thrive 
©cl^cn  ^o 
©clingcn  succeed 
@cUen  6e  tiJori/i 

©cncfcn  recover 
©cnic^cn  en/oi/ 
©efd^el^en  happen 
©cnjinncn  gain 

©ic&en  powr 
©Icid^cn  resemble 
©Iciten  glide 
©limmcn  ^Zeam 
©rabcn  c?iV 
©rcifcn  seize 
^abcn  have 


brofd^ 
brang 
burftc 
cmpfal^I 

crblid^ 
crlofd^ 


fu^r 

fid 

fing 

foc^t 

fanb 

flod^t 

flog 

m 

m 

fragte, 
frug 

gor 

gebar 

gab 

gebicl^ 

Qing 

gclang 

gait 

genaS 
geno§ 


geti)ann 


gli(^ 

Qlitt 

glomm 

grub 

flriff 

^attc 

l^telt 


gcbrofd^cn 
ift  gcbrungcn 
geburft 
cmpfo^Icn 

ift  crblic^en 
ift  crlofd^cn 


crfc^raf     ift  crfc^rocf  en 


gegcffen 
ift  gcfa^rcn 
ift  gefaKen 
gefangcn 
gefod^ten 
gefunbcn 
gcflod^ten 
ift  geftogcn 
ift  gcfIof)en 
ift  gefloffen 
gefragt 

gefreffcn 

gegorcn 

geboren 

gegeben 
ift  gebiel^eti 
ift  gegangcn 
ift  gclungcn 

gcgoltcn 

ift  gcncfcn 
gcnoffen 

ift  gefd^c^en 
geJBonncn 

gegoffen 
gcglic^en 
ift  geglitten 
gcglommen 
gegraben 
gegriffen 
getiabt 
gel^alten 


brifd^cft,  brifc^t      brifc^      brOfd^c 
briinge 
barfft,  barf  btlrftc 

empfie^lft,  cm=      cmpficl^I  empfal^Ic, 
pfic^It  tmpWt 


crlifd^cft,  crlifd^t 


cr* 


crfc^ridft, 
fd^ricft 
iffeft^ifet 
fa^rft,fa^rt 
fallft,fatrt 
fangft,f(ingt 
fid^tft,fid^t 

flic^tft,flid^t 


fragft,  fragt, 

fr(igft,fragt 
friffeft^frifet 

gebierft,  gcbicrt 
gibft,  gibt 


giltft,gilt 


9cf<^ic§t 


grabft,grcibt 

^aft,  hat 
i)'a\t%  ^filt 


crlifd^     crltifd^e 

crfd^ricf  crfd^rilfe 

ife  ft&c 

fil^rc 


fic^t 


flic^t 


fiJd^te 
fcinbc 
p(^tc 

pgc 
fUi^c 

pffc 
fragtc, 

friigc 
fra^c 
gore 
gebier     gebarc 
gib         giibe 


fri& 


gilt 


gclfinge 
galtc, 

gaite 
genfife 
genCffe 
gefd^a^c 
getuanne, 

geiDiJnne 
fiiiffe 


gliJmmc 
grilbc 


fitttte 


STRONG  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


279 


inns. 

PAST  IND. 

PAST  PART. 

PRES.  IND. 
2.  AND  3.  SING. 

IMPERAT 
2.  SING. 

.       PAST  SUBJ. 
.     1.  OR  3.  SING. 

^angcn  |  hang,  be 

^ing 

ge^angen 

I^angft,  l^angt 

^ange 

.^fingen  J  suspended 

^angft,  ^fingt 

^fing(c] 

) 

^aucti  hew 

^ieb 

gel^auen 

^cbcn  lift 

l^ob;  ^ub 

ge^obcn 

pbe,  1)^\it 

^ei^en  bid,  call 

^ie& 

ge^eifeen 

^  elf  en  help 

^alf 

gefiolfen 

m%mi 

m\ 

m\t,  Pfc 

^ennen  k7iow 

fannte 

gc!annt 

fcnntc 

^limntcn  climb 

flomm 

ift  geflommen 

flijmmc 

^lingen  sound 

flang 

geflungen 

fliinge,  flUnge 

^neifen  pinch 

fniff 

gefniffen 

^ommen  come 

fam 

ift  gefommen 

regular  (also 

fame 

fammft,  fiJmmt) 

^onncn  can 

fonnte 

gefonnt 

fannft,  fann 

fiJnntc 

^riec^en  creep 

frod^ 

ift  gefroc^en 

fr(}(^c 

^Urcn  choose 

for 

geforen 

fare 

?aben  load,  invite 

lub 

gelaben 

Ittbft,Iabt 

liibc 

Also  weak  and  regular,  except 

in  past  participle 

!  gelaben. 

?a[fcn  let 

licfe 

gelaffen 

Iaffeft,Ififet 

?aufen  run 

lief 

ift  gelaufen 

Ifiufft,  Iftuft 

gcibcn  suffer 

Utt 

gelitten 

?ei^en  lend 

lie^ 

gelie^en 

Scfen  read 

Ia$ 

gelefen 

liefeft^lieft 

Ued 

Iftfc 

Siegcn  lie 

lag 

getegen 

Ittge 

Siigen  lie 

log 

gelogen 

lage 

SD^ciben  shun 

mieb 

gemieben 

9}?effen  measure 

ma^ 

gcmeffen 

miff  eft,  tnifet 

mife 

mafee 

SKifelingen  /aiY 

mifelang 

ift  mifelungen 

mifelSnge 

W6%m  like,mxiy 

moc^te 

gemod^t 

magft,  mag 

mec^tc 

SD^iiffen  wws< 

mu^te 

gemufet 

mufet,  mufe 

mllfete 

SfleJ^men  take 

na^m 

genontmen 

nimmft,  nimmt 

nimm 

nfil^me 

S^lenncn  name 

nanntc 

genannt 

nenntc 

*iPfeifen  whistle 

Pfiff 

gepfiffen 

^reifcn  praise 

pric« 

gepriefen 

Ouetten  gush 

quoll 

ift  gequotten 

quittft,  quiat 

quiff 

quaffe 

9f?aten  advise 

net 

geraten 

rfitft,  rfit 

$Reiben  m6 

rieb 

gerieben 

SJeifeen  <ear 

rife 

geriffen 

Wxitn  ride 

ritt 

ift  geritten 

9?cnTien  run 

ranntc 

ift  gerannt 

rcnnte 

JRiec^en  smell 

ro(^ 

gero(^en 

rad^e 

9itngea  imn^ 

rang 

gerungcn 

range 

Sfiinnen  rwn 

rann 

ift  geronnen 

rftnne,  rannc 

9iufen  caW 

rief 

gerufen 

©aufen  dnnA; 

foff 

gefoffcn 

ffiufft,fauft 

f»ff« 

280 


AN   ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN    GRAMMAR 


INFIN. 

PAST  IND. 

PAST  PAST. 

PRES.  IND. 

IMPERAT. 

PAST  SUBJ. 

2.  AND  3.  SING. 

2.  SING. 

1.  OR  3.  SING. 

©QUQcn  suck 

fog 

gcfogcn 

fiige 

©d^affen  create 

fc^uf 

gefc^affcn 

fWc 

(B^aUm  sound 

fd^ott 

gefc^oKcn 

fd^fittc 

©(^eibcn  part 

[c^icb 

ift  gefd^iebcn 

©d^eincn  appear 

fd^icn 

gefc^ienen 

(©d^elten  scold 

[d^alt 

gefd^olten 

fc^iltftjd^ilt 

Wit 

fd^filtc.  fd^iJIte 

©d^crcn  shear 

fd^or 

gefd^oren 

f(^icrft,f(^iert 

f(^ier 

fc^arc 

©(^iebcn  shove 

[c^ob 

gcfc^obcn 

fd^fibc 

(©d^ie^cn  shoot 

\m 

gefc^offcn 

fc^fiffc 

©c^inbcn  flay 

fd^unb 

gefc^unben 

fc^iinbc 

(©d^Iofen  sleep 

fd^Iicf 

gcfc^Iafen 

fd^Iftfft,f(^mft 

©c^Iagcn  strike 

Wn 

ge[(^tagen 

fc^iagft,f(^Iitgt 

f<^lUgc 

(©d^Ieid^en  swcafc 

\m^ 

ift  gefc^Iic^en 

(Sc^Icifen  w;^e< 

[c^Hff 

gefc^Iiffen 

©c^Iic^en  shut 

Wo^ 

gefd^loffcn 

fc^Ififfe 

©c^Iingen  shny 

[c^Iang 

ge[(^(ungcn 

[d^lfinge 

(Sd^mei^en  smite 

fc^ntlB 

gefc^miffen 

(©(^mclscn  meZ< 

[c^mols 

ift  gefd^molgen  fd^milgeft,  fd^milgt  fd^mtlj 

fc^mflljc 

When  transitive,  usually  weak  and  regul 

ar. 

(Sd^nauben  snort  , 

[d^nob 

gefc^nobcn 

fe^nfibc 

©d^nciben  cut 

fd^nitt 

gefc^nitten 

©t^rouben  screw 

fc^rob 

gefd^roben 

fd^riJbc 

(Sd^reiben  write 

[d^ricb 

gefd^riebcn 

©c^reien  cry 

fd^ric 

gefc^rieen 

©d^reiten  stride 

fc^rttt 

ift  gefd^ritten 

©d^lDeigm  be  silent 

fc^micg 

gefc^njicgcn 

©d^lDcEen  swell 

fd^lDOlt 

ift  gefd^rtollen 

fc^tt)iEft,fd^ti)iat 

fd^mia 

fd^maac 

When  transitive,  weak  and  regular. 

©d^tDimmen  sri^m 

fd^lDamm 

ift  gefd^lBom* 
men 

fd^hjfimmc, 
fc^n)fimntc 

(Sd^tDinben  vanish 

fd^manb 

ift  gcfc^munbcn 

fd^tt)anbe 

©d^lDingen  sWngr 

fc^iDang 

gcfc^ttjungen 

fd^lDfingc 

©(^ttjfiren  siyear 

fd^h)or, 
fd^mur 

gefd^iuorcn 

fd^mfire, 
fd^tottrc 

©el^en  see 

fa^ 

gcfc^cn 

fieMtJie^t 

M 

mt 

©etn  6e 

tear 

ift  gcmcfcn 

bift^ift 

fei 

rtfirc 

©enbcn  send 

fanbtc 

gefanbt 

fenbetc 

©ingen  sing 

fang 

gefungcn 

fttttgc 

©infcn  sinfc 

fan! 

ift  gefunfen 

ffinfc 

©inncn  think 

[ann 

gefonnen 

fftnncJiJnne 

<5i^en  siY 

faB 

gefeffen 

f«e 

©otlen  shall 

[oKtc 

gefoat 

fottftjolt 

©peien  spiY 

fpic 

gefpiecn 

©pintien  spin 

fpann 

gefponncn 

1 

fpfinne,  fpCnne 

STRONG  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


281 


INFIN. 

PAST  IND. 

PAST  PART. 

PRES.  IND. 
2.  AND  3.  SING. 

UIPERAT. 
2.  SING. 

PAST  SUBJ. 
1.  OR  3.  SINGo 

©prcc^en  speak 

fprad^ 

gefproc^en 

fpnd^ft,fpric^t 

fprid^ 

fprftd^c 

©priefecn  sproid 

fproS 

gefproffen 

fpriiffc 

©pringcn  spring 

fprang 

ift  gefprungen 

fprfinge 

©ted^en  prick 

ftad^ 

ge[to(^en 

fti#,ftid^t 

ftid^ 

ftttc^c 

©tel^en  stand 

[tanb, 
[tunb 

geftanben 

ftttnbe, 
ftUnbe 

(Stcl^Ien  steal 

fto^t 

geftol^fen 

ftic^tftjtte^lt 

ftic^I 

ftit^Ic,  ftiJ^Ic 

(Steigen  ascend 

ftieg 

ift  gcftiegen 

©terbeit  die 

ftorb 

ift  geftorben 

ftirbft,  ftirbt 

ftirb 

ftarbe,  ftUrbc 

©tiebcn  disperse 

ftob 

geftoben 

ftiJbc 

(gtinfen  stink 

ftanf 

gcftunfen 

ftttnfe 

©tofeen  push 

\m 

gefto&en 

ft3&cft,ft(}6t 

©treid^en  stroke 

\m 

geftric^en 

©treiten  strive 

ftritt 

gcftrittcn 

Xvin  do 

tat 

getan 

tttte 

2:ragen  carry 

trug 

getragcn 

trttgft,tragt 

trttgc 

Jreffen  hit 

traf 

getroffcn 

triffft,trifft 

triff 

triifc 

Xxdhtn  drive 

tricb 

getriebcn 

Jretcn  tread 

trot 

ift  gctrcten 

trittft,  tritt 

tritt 

trtttc 

2:rinfen  drink 

tronf 

gctruntcn 

trttnfc 

Xrilgen  deceive 

trog 

getrogcn 

triJgc 

35erberbcn  spoil 

bcrborb 

berborbcn 

bcrbirbft,  bcrbirbt 

:  bcrbirt 

)    tjerbarbc, 

When  transitive,  weak  and  regular. 

bcrbiirbc 

SBcrbrie^cn  vex 

berbro^ 

bcrbroffen 

bcrbrCffc 

S3erge[[en  forget 

bcrga§ 

bergeffcn 

bcrgiffcft,  Dergi^t 

bcrgife 

berglifec 

33erUcren  lose 

bcrlor 

berlorcn 

berliJre 

SBad^fen  grow 

h3ud^8 

ift  gemac^fen 

tofid^fcft,  toad^ft 

tDiic^fe 

SBfigen  weigh 

h)og 

getDogen 

n)flgc 

SSa[d)en  was/i 

h3u[c^ 

gen)afd^en 

tofifc^cft,  toafd^t 

\dix\d)t 

SSeben  weave 

iDOb 

gemoben 

mht 

SSeid^en  ?/ieZd 

n)t(^ 

ift  gemic^en 

SSeifen  show 

n)ie« 

geiDiefcn 

SSenben  ^wrn 

JDonbte 

gemanbt 

iBcnbetc 

SBerben  swe 

n)arb 

getDorben 

hjirbft,  n)irbt 

hJirb 

tDfirbc,h)iirbc 

SBerben  become 

h)orb, 
tDurbe 

ift  gelBorben 

toirft,  n)irb 

iBllrbc 

SB  erf  en  throw 

marf 

gemorfen 

h)irfft,  toirft 

toirf 

njfirfc,  totlrfc 

SSiegen  weigh 

h)og 

gelDogen 

njagc 

SBinben  mm/ 

hjanb 

gelDunben 

tofinbc 

SBiffen  fcnoii; 

n3ufetc 

geiDu^t 

h)ci6t,  ttjei^ 

totlfetc 

SBoaen  m7Z 

h)otttc 

gemollt 

h)ittft,h)ia 

^ei^en  accwse 

3ie^ 

gejic^en 

3ie^en  draw 

SOS 

gegogcn 

a^gc 

3n)iTigen  /orce 

gjDttng 

gcamungcn 

jiDttnge 

GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


Numbers  preceded  by  L.  refer  to  Lessons.     Numbers  preceded  by  §.  refer 
to  paragraphs,  or  sections,  of  the  Abstract  of  Granmiar. 


bcr  WitVib,  bic  Slbenbe  evening;  l^cutc 
abcnb  this  evening;  abcnbS  in  the 
evening;  am  Slbcnb  in  the  evening 

after  but,  however  L.  3.  i;  L.  19.  i. 
n.2;  §.  188 

afttcgcn,  Icgtc  (xh,  abgclcgt  put  off 

aa  all  L.  13 ;  §.  45.  138. 141 ;  attc  Jagc 
every  day 

attcin  alone;  conj.  but,  only 

attcr  before  superl.  L.  15.  i.  n.^;  §.  146 

aUttUi  all  sorts  of  L.  10.  ii;  §.  79.  iii 

attc^  all,  everything;  attcS  h)a8  all  that 
L.  3.  n.  n.2 

attmttt^ttg  almighty 

al^  when,  as  L.  7.  i.  n.^;  after  compar. 
than  L.  6.  ii.  n.^;  §.  189 

alfo  hence,  so,  and  so,  accordingly 
§.  229 

alt,  alter,  filtcft-  old;  bcr  Slltc  the  old 
man,  bic  Slltc  the  old  woman 

am  =  an  bcm  at  the;  before  superl. 
L.  15.  I.  n.3;  §.  143 

Slme'rtfa,  nevt.,  America 

an,  prep.  dat.  ace,  at,  on,  near,  to, 
up  to 

anbcr  other  L.  12.  i;  §.  45.  87.  141 

anberi^  otherwise,  different 

anfangcn,  fing  an,  angcfangcn  begin 

9(nna  Anna 

an^  =  an  ba^  at  the,  to  the 

antttjortcn,  antnjortetc,  gcanttt)ortet  an- 
swer, reply 

bcr  Stpfct,  bie  tpfcl  apple 

ber  %px\V,  gen.  be^  2lpril(«),  April 

arficitcn,  arbeitete,  gearbcitct  work 

ttrgcm,  argerte,  gettrgert  vex  L.  28 

arm,  armcr,  iirm[t-  poor 

bcr  2(rm,  bic  Slrmc  arm 

bcr  2(rmc  or  bic  2(rmc  the  poor  man  or 
woman  L.  15.  ii;  §.  91 


WX^  also,  too,  moreover  L.  4.  ii.  n.'; 

even;  aud^  nid^t  not  either,  neither 
Cttf,  prep.  dat.  a^c,  on,  upon,  on  top 

of;  au\+ ace.  of  time,  a,s  auf  einigc 

SSod^cn    for    some    weeks;    before 

superl.  §.  145 
auf^dren,   l^iJrte   auf,   aufgel^Ort   stop, 


aufmar^ctt,  mad^tc  auf,  aufgcmad^t,  open 

aufiS  =  auf  bag,  §.  145 

oufftcl^en,  ftanb  auf,  ift  aufgcftanbcn  rise, 
get  up 

auftoad^en,  toa^tt  auf,  ift  aufgen)ad^t 
wake  up,  awake 

ha^  Sluge,  bic  Slugcn  eye  L.  18.  ii;  §.  65 

an§,  prep,  dat.,  out  of,  from 

auigfcl^ctt,  fal^  au3,  au^gefcl^cn  look,  ap- 
pear 

hat  begged,  asked,  see  bitten 

ftauctt,  bautc,  gcbaut  build 

bcr  S3auer,  bic  Saucm  peasant,  farmer 
L.  18.  ii;  §.  65 

bcr  S5aum,  bic  33aumc  tree 

bet,  prep,  dot.,  near(by),  at,  with;  bci 
mir  with  me,  at  my  house;  bci  S3atcr 
at  Father's  (house) 

fteibc  both,  two  L.  12.  i;  §.  45.  87.  141 

betm  =  bci  bcm  at  the,  with  the 

ha^  95eitt,  bic  SBcinc  leg 

bcr  93erg,  bic  53crgc  mountain 

ficrii^mt  famous 

bcf(^rei6en,  bcfc^ricb,  bcfc^riebcn  de- 
scribe 

beffer  better,  bcft-  best 

Befut^en,  bcfuc^tc,  bcfuc^t  visit,  call  on 

bag  S3ctt,  bic  SBcttcn  bed  L.  18.  n; 
§.65 

Bctsetten  betimes,  in  season 

ba^  Silb,  bic  33ilbcr  picture 


283 


284 


GERMAN- ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


bin  am,  see  fdn 

i}\^  until,  till,  up  to;  bi«  an  .  .  .,  bi« 

ju  .  .  .  up  to,  as  far  as 
6tft  art,  see  fcin 
hxttt,  withoid  ic^,  please,  pray 
bitten,  bat,  gcbcten  beg,  ask;  with  um 

ask  for 
btcibcn,  blieb,  i[t  gebliebcn  stay,  remain 
bKcb  see  bleibcn 

bti^cn,  bli^tc,  gebliljt  lighten,  flash 
bic  93tumc,  bie  SB  lumen  flower 
bdfc  wicked,  angry,  vexed 
brat^  broke,  see  brcd^en 
brat^tc  brought,  see  bringcn 
breti^cn,  brad^,  gebroci^cn  break 
brcnncn,  branntc,  gcbrannt  bum,  be  on 

fire  L.  19.  ii;  §.  16 
bcr  Srief,  bic  33rtefc  letter 
bringcn,  brac^te,  gcbrac^t  bring  L.  19.  ii; 

§.16 
ba6  Srot,  bic  S3rotc  bread 
ber  ©ruber,  bic  33rtlbcr  brother 
bic  S3ruft,  bic  S3ni[tc  breast 
bag  S3ui^,  bic  SBilc^cr  book 

ba  there,  then;  conj.  since,  as  L.  12. 

II.  n.2;  §.  191 
babci  in  it,  at  it,  during  it 
bafttr  therefor,  for  it,  for  them  L.  9. 

ii;  §.  194 
bamtt  therewith,  with  it,  with  them 

L.  9.  II ;  §.  195;  conj.  in  order  that 

L.  30.  II. 
banfen,  banfte,  gcbanft  thank 
bann  then,  thereupon 
baran  thereat,  at  it,  at  them,  of  it 

L.  9.  ii;  §.  196 
barauf  thereupon,  on  it,  on  them  L.  9. 

ii;  §.  197 
barin  therein,  in  it,  in  them,  L.  9.  ii 
baritber  thereover,  over  it,  over  them, 

on  account  of  it 
barum  therefore,  for  that  reason 
ha^,  conj.,  that,  so  that;  §.  198 
babon  thereof,  of  it,  of  them,  about  it, 

about  them  L.  9.  ii 
bcin,  beincr  etc.  your,  yours  L.  6.  ii,  10. 

II,  12.  ii;  13;  §.  50.  87.  121 
bcr  beinige  yours  L.  13;  §.  90.  121 
benfen,  bac^tc,  gcbad^t  think  L.  19.  ii; 

§.  16 


bcnn  then,  please,  pray;  for  L.  3.  i; 

§.  200.  228 
ber,  art.,  the;  L.  4.  i;  pron.,  L.  9.  i 

and  note  »;  §.  42.  122.  125  £f. 
beren  see  bcr 

berjcnige  that,  he  L.  13;  §.  90 
bcrfclbc  the  same  L.  13;  §.  90 
htStjaiii  therefore,  on  that  account 
beffen  see  bcr 
beutfd^  German;  bcr  !Dcutfd^c  L.  15.  ii; 

§.  91 
^eutfci^tanb,  neut.,  Germany 
bcr  Wiener,  bic  !Dicncr  servant 
btei§  this  L.  9.  I.  n.« 
biefer  this  L.  5.  i;  §.  47 
bO(i|  but,  yet,  still,  nevertheless;  §.  202 
bcr  2)o!tor,  bic  ^Doftorcn  doctor  L.  18. 

ii;  §.  65 
bonnem,  bonncrtc,  gcbonncrt  thunder 
ba^  2>orf,  bic  ®brfcr  village 
bort  there,  yonder 
bort^in  thither 
brci  three,  britt-  third 
bu  thou,  you  L.  1.  i;  §.  38.  120 
bunfel  dark  L.  11.  i.  n.« 
bUnfen,  eg  biinft  mid^  methinks  L.  28 
burd^,  prep,  ace,  through,  by 
bur(^^  =  burd^  bag  through  the 
bitrfen,  burftc,  gcburft  be  allowed,  may 

L.  22;  §.  25ff.  180 
burften  or  biirften,  eg  bur[tct  or  bilrftct 

mid^  I  am  thirsty  L.  28 

cbcn  just,  just  now 

cbel  noble 

cl|e,  conj.,  before 

ctn,  eincr  etc.  a,  an,  one  L.  6.  i,  12. 
ii;  16;  §.  50  ff.  87 

einanbcr  one  another,  each  other  §.  40 

einiflc  some  L.  13;  §.  45.  90 

einmat  once,  once  upon  a  time ;  eg  toax 
cinmal  once  upon  a  time  there  was 
L.  12.  ii;  §.  203 

ein^  one  L.  16;  §.  99 

ber  (Sinhjol^ner,  bic  Sinmo^ncr  inhabit- 
ant 

bic  (BUttn,  plur.  only,  parents 

empfangen,  empfing,  empfangen  receive 

bag  fenbe,  bic  @nben  end  L.  18.  ii;  §.  65 

cnblirff  finally,  at  last 

(Jnglanb,  neut.,  England 


GERMAN- ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


285 


citglift^  English 

er  he  L.  8.  ii 

bie  @rbc,  bie  Srben  earth 

crlauftcn,  eriaubte,  eriaubt  allow,  permit 

erft  first  L.  16;  §.  100.  204 

crstt^Icn,  crgii^Ite,  erja^It  tell,  narrate 

C^  it  L.  9.  I.  n.5;  §.  119 

ber  @fc(,  bie  @[el  donkey 

cffcn,  a^,  gegeffcn  eat 

ti'ma^  something,  anything,  some  L.  10. 

II ;  §.  137;  [o  etmaS  such  a  thing 
cucr,  eurer  etc.  your,  yours  L.  6.  ii,  10. 

II,  12.  ii;  13;  §.  50.  87.  121 
ber  curigc  yours  L.  13;  §.  90.  121 

fal^rcn,  fu^r,  ift  gefal^rcn  drive,  go 

ber  fjtttt,  bie  ^ixlit  fall,  case 

fatten,  fiel,  t[t  gefallen  fall 

fanb  found  L.  2.  ii 

fangen,  fing,  gefangen  catch,  capture 

faften,  faftete,  gefaftet  fast 

f au(  lazy 

fcc^tcn,  foc^t,  gefoc^ten  fight 

bie  fjcbcr,  bie  ^^ebem  feather,  pen 

ber  i^tx\(^,  bie  ^^einbc  enemy 

bag  ^d'i^,  bie  ^elber  field 

bag  fjenftcr,  bie  genfter  window 

fcft  fast,  firm 

bag  ^tVLtt,  bie  ^^euer  fire 

fiet  fell,  see  fatten 

ftnbcn,  fanb,  gefunben  find 

flct^tg  dihgent,  industrious 

ber  ^(u^,  bie  i^Iiiffe  river 

folgcn,  folgte,  ift  gefolgt,  dat.,  follow 

fdrtfa^ren,  fuf)r  fort,  fortgefa^ren  con- 
tinue 

bie  ^ragc,  bie  5^agcn  question 

fragcn,  fragte,  gefragt  ask,  inquire 

bie  '^xaw,  bie  ^rauen  woman,  wife,  Mrs. 

hcL%  ^tCiVLUxn,  bie  ^rfiulein  young  lady. 
Miss 

bie  l^rcubc,  bie  ^^reuben  joy 

frcucn  (fic^),  freute,  gefreut  rejoice  L.  28 

ber  f^rcwni^^  ^^6  ^reunbe  friend 

bie  fjrcuni^i"/  ^ic  g^^unbinnen  friend 

friifj  early;  fritter  earlier,  former (ly) 

fu^r  drove,  went,  see  fafjren 

fu^rcn  fii^rtc,  gcfilfirt  lead,  escort 

fiinf  five 

fiir,  jprep.  ace.,  for 

ber  fjuft,  bie  giifec  foot;  ju  gu&  on  foot 


gaB  gave,  see  geben;  c6  ofib+acc.  there 

was  L.  6.  II 
gan§  whole,  entire,  quite 
gar  very;  gar  nid^t  not  at  all;  gar  nid^tS 

nothing  at  all ;  gar  fein  none  at  all ; 

gar  ju  altogether  too 
ber  ©artcn,  bie  ©cirten  garden 
gcben,  gab,  gegeben  give 
gefattcn,  gefiel,  gefatten  please,  suit 
gegen,  prep,  ace.,  against,  towards 
gelfen,  ging,  ift  gcgangen  go,  walk;  cd 

gel^t  nid^t  it  won't  do;  c8  ge^t  mir 

gut  I  am  doing  well 
gcprcn,  gcl^arte,  gel^5rt,  dat.,  belong 
bag  ®c(b,   "bit   ©etber  money;  fleineg 

®clb  change,  coins 
genug  enough 
gerabe  just,  exactly 
gem  gladly  L.  23;  §.  206 
gefd^etien,  gcfc^a^,  ift  gefc^el^cn  happen 
bie  @efc^t(^te,  bie  ©efc^ic^tcn  history, 

story 
geftern  yesterday;  gcftcm  abcnb  yester- 
day evening,  last  night 
gefunb  well,  healthy 
gemi^  certain,  sure 
gift,  imperat.,  give  L.  21.  ii;  §.  20; 

gibft,  gibt,  2.  3.  sing.  pres.  ind.  of 

gcbcn  L.  20.  ii;  §.  18.  3;  eg  gibt-h 

acc.  there  is,  there  are 
ging  went,  see  gel^en 
bag  ®Ia^,  bie  ©lafer  glass 
glauben,  glaubte,  geglaubt,  dat.  pers., 

beheve,    think;     glauben    an  +  acc. 

believe  in 
gtttcfUd^  happy,  fortunate 
ber  Qiott,  bie  ©dtter  god 
ber  ©raf,  bie  ©rafen  count 
grofi,  grader,  grii^t-  great,  tall,  large, 

bigL.  15.  i;§.  96 
griin  green 
gut,  beffer,  beft-good,  adv.,  well  L.  15; 

§.96 
bie  @ute  kindness 

l^abcn,  fiatte,  gel^abt  have  L.  3.  i 
l^alten,  ^ielt,  gel^alten  hold,  keepL.  20.  j; 

with  ftir  regard  as,  take  for 
bie  ^anb,  bie  ^ftnbe  hand 
ber  ^afe,  bie  §afen  hare 
^at  has,  see  l^abcn 


286 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


ha^  ^an§,  bte  ^m\tv  house,  ju  ^aufe 

at  home,  na6)  §aufc  home 
bic  ^au^tur,  bic  ^augtiiren  door  of 

house 
^ctnrid^  Henry 
^cife  hot 
l^ci^Ctt,    f)te§,    geJ^ei^cn   be    called    or 

named,  i(^  l^ei^e  ^arl  my  name  is 

Charles 
l^clfcn,  l^alf,  ge^olfen,  da^.,  help  L.  20. 

ii;  §.  27.  5 
Ifcr  along  this  way,  hither  §.  34;  L.  25 
ijttan^  out  this  way,  out  from  there 
bcr  ^crr,  bie  ferret:,  gentleman,  Mr., 

master,  lord  L.  8.  i;  §.  63 
l^cruntcrfattcn,  fiel  ^erunter,  ift  l^cruntcr= 

gefallen  fall  down 
l^cruntcrfommcn,  tarn  l^erunter,  ift  l^erun* 

tergefommeti  come  down 
ba6  ^crj,  bie  -^erjen  heart  L.  18.  ii; 

§.65 
l^cutc  to-day;  l^cute  morgcn  this  morn- 
ing; l^cute  abenb  to-night 
l^icr  here 

tittfft,  mU,  see  ^Ifcn 
ber  ^tmmcl,  bie  ^imtnel  heaven,  sky 
l^in  along  that  way,  thither  §.  34 ;  L.  25 
l^tnauffu^rcn,  fiifirtc  l^inauf,  l^inaufgefil^rt 

lead  up 
l^inaufgcl^ctt,  ging  l^inauf,  ift  l^inaufge* 

gatigen  go  up  thither 
]^inaU)§  out  that  way,  out  from  here 
l^intcr,  prep.  dat.  ace,  behind,  beyond 
^intcrlaffcn,  f)interlte^,  t)iTiterIaffen  leave 

behind,  bequeath 
i)fS<i),  l^o^er,  ^iic^ft-  high,  tall  L.  12.  ii, 

15.  i;  §.  96 
l^offctt,  l^offte,  ge^offt  hope 
i)0\!ftx,  t,  e«  see  l^oc^ 
ia^  ^otS/  ^^^  -^olger  wood 
\)'^un,  ;^drte,  gel^Srt  hear,  listen,  mind, 

obey  §.  27.  5 
ber  ^unb,  bie  ^utibc  dog 
l^unpcm  hunger  L.  28 
^ungrig  hungry 
ber  Jput,  bie  ^iitc  hat 

x6)  I  L.  1.  i;  §.  38 

tl^m  to  him,  him,  see  er 

tl^n  him,  see  er 

S^ncn  to  you,  you  L.  8.  n 


i^i  ye,  you;  il^r,  il^rcr  etc.  her,  hers, 

their  etc.  L.  6.  ii,  10.  ii,  12.  ii;  13; 

§.  50.  87.  121 
ber  i^rigc  hers  L.  13;  §.  90.  121 
tm  =  in  bem  in  the 
immcr  always,  all  the  time ;  nod^  immct 

even  now 
in,  prep.  dat.  ace,  in,  into;  in3  =  in  "toA 

into  the 
ift  see  fein  L.  3.  i 
%ifet/romeffenL.20.ii,21.ii;§.18.20 

ja  yes,  nay  §.  208 

^^^  ^tLi)X,  bie  ^a^xt  year 

jc  ever  §.  209 

jcbcr  every,  each  L.  5.  i,  12.  i;  §.  45.  87 

jcbcrmann  everybody  §.  44 

jcmanb  somebody  §.  44 

jcncr  that,  yon  L.  5.  i;  §.  45 

jc^t  now,  at  present  L.  19.  i 

jung,  iiinger,  iiingft-  young 

iungft  recently 

ber  ^aifcr,  bie  ^aifer  emperor 

bie  ^aifcrtn,  bie  ^aiferinnen  empress 

fait,  falter,  fcilteft-  cold 

fam  came,  see  fommen 

ber  ^amcrab,  bie  ^ameraben  comrade 

tarl  Charles 

faufcn,  faufte,  gefauft  buy 

faum  hardly,  scarcely 

fcitt  no  L.  6.  i;  §.  50;  L.  13;  §.  90 

fcnncn,  fannte,  gefannt  know  L.  19.  n; 

§.  16.  186 
'bd.^  ttnb,  bie  ^inber  child 
bie  ^ird^c,  bie  ^irc^en  church 
"tai  ^(cib,  bie  ^leiber  dress,  garment 
ficin  small,  little;  bie  ^leinen  the  little 

ones 
f(ug,    fliigcr,    flilgft-   prudent,    wise, 

clever 
ber  ^naBc,  bie  ^naben  boy 
fommen,  fam,  ift  gefommen  come,  get 

(to) 
ber  ^iinig,  bie  ^Mge  king 
bie  ^iintgtn,  bie  ^iiniginnen  queen 
bie    Slonig^to(^tcr,    bie    ^onigStfic^ter 

princess 
fiJnncn,  fonnte,  gefonnt  can,  be  able 

L.  22;  §.  25ff.  181.  186 
foftcn,  foftete,  gefoftet  cost 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


287 


hant,  txanUx,  frcinfft-  ill,   sick;  bcr 

^ranfc  L.  15.  ii  patient 
bcr  ^rtcfl,  bie  ^riege  war 
lurs,  fiirjer,  fiirjcft-  short 

lag  see  licgen 

ha^  fianb,  bie  Sanber  land,  country;  auf 

bem  ?anbe  in  the  country 
lang,  longer,  Iftngft-  long 
langc,  adv.,  a  long  time 
Ittngft  long  ago 
Icffcn,  liefe,  gelaffen  let,  cause  to  L.  20. 

I  and  note  2;  §,  27.  5 
laufcn,  lief,  i[t  gelaufen  run 
laut  loud 

Icbcn,  lebte,  gelcbt  live 
bog  Scbcn  life;  om  Seben  alive 
Icgcn,  legte,  gelegt  lay,  put;  fic^  legcn  lie 

down 
Ic^rcn,  lel^rte,  getel^rt  teach 
ber  Scorer,  bie  Se^rer  teacher 
Ict(^t  light,  easy 

Icib,  e«  tut  mir  leib,  ha^  I  am  sorry  that 
(etber  unfortunately,  alas  I 
Icrncn,  lemte,  getemt  learn 
Icfcn,  log,  gelefen  read  L.  20.  ii 
(c^t-  last 

bie  Scute,  plur.  only,  people 
Itc6,  dear,  compar.  lieber  rather,  superl. 

am  liebften  best  of  all  L.  23;  §.  206 
bie  2tc6e  love;  i^m  gu  Sicbe  to  please 

him 
ItcBcn,  liebte,  geliebt  love 
Kef  see  loufen 

liegen,  log,  gelegen  lie,  be  situated 
loben,  lobte,  gelobt  praise 

• 
madden,  ntod^te,  gemoc^t  make,  do 
mad^ttg  powerful,  mighty 
bo8  ajiabd^cn,  bie  Wdhii)m  girl 
ber  Tlai  May 
mat  time(s),  jmeimol  twice 
man  one,  they,  people  §.  136 
manci^cr  many  (a)  L.  5.  i;  §.  45.  81.  90 
ber  3Kann,  bie  9)?  (inner  man,  husband 
SJiarte'  Mary 
me^r  more;  nid^t  mel^r  no  more,  no 

longer!/.  15.  i;  §.96 
mefirere  several  L.  13;  §.  45.  90 
mein  my,  meiner  etc.  mine  L,  6.  ii,  10. 

II,  12.  ii;  13;  §.  50.  87.  121 


mcinen,  meinte,  gemeint  mean,  think 
ber  meinige  mine  L.  13;  §.  90.  121 
mcift-mostL.  15.  i;  §.  96 
meiften^  mostly 
ber  aWcnft^,  bie  2)Zen[(^en  man,  human 

being 
mtr  to  me,  me  L.  8.  ii 
mtt,  prep,  dat.,  with,  along  with 
tniigen,  ntod^te,  gemod^t  may,  care  to, 

like  to  L.  22;  §.  25ff.  182 
milgltd^  possible 
ber  aWonat,  bie  SO^onote  month 
ber  Montag,  bie  SD^ontoge  Monday 
ber  aWorgen,  bie  SD^Zorgen  morning;  l^eute 

morgen  this  morning;  am  SJiorgcn  in 

the  morning 
morgen,  adv.,  to-morrow 
miiffen,    mu^te,    gemu^t    must,    be 

obliged  to,  have  to  L.  22;  §.  25  fif. 

183 
bie  abutter,  bie  Splitter  mother 

naci^,  prep,  dat.,  after,  to,  toward 
ber  aiai^^ar,   bie  ^fJad^bom  neighbor 

L.  18.  ii;  §.  65 
ttOC^bem,  conj.,  after 
nttd^ft  see  no^ 

bie  iSia<i)i,  bie  9^ad^te  night 
na^,  nii^er,  noc^ft-  near  L.  15.  i;  §.  96 
na^m  took  L.  3.  ii,  see  ne^men 
neben,  prep.  dat.  ace,  near,  next  to 
ttcl^men,  no^m,  genommcn  take 
netn  no 
ncnnen,   nannte,   gcnonnt   name,   call 

L.  19.  II 
neu  new 

neu(i(^  recently,  lately 
tttd^t  not 
nid^tig  nothing 
ttte  never 

ntemanb  nobody  §.  44 
ttimm,  nimmt  L.  20;  21.  ii 
no(^  yet,  still;  nod^  nid^t  not  yet;  nod^ 

eine  ©tunbe  another  hour 
nun  now  L.  19.  i;  §.  212 
nur  only,  but 

oB  if,  whether  L.  7.  i.  n.i 
oBen  above,  up-stairs 
obcr  or  L.  3.  I 
9\i  often 


288 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


O^nc,  Tprep.  ace,  without 

ba«   D^r,   bic  Of)ren  ear  L.   18.  ii; 

§.65 
bcr  Dnfct,  bie  Onfcl  uncle 

"tai  ^a^Jtcr,  bie  ^apiere  paper 
%CLxW ,  pronounce  parees',  Paris 
"iia^  5)Sfcrb,  bie  "ipferbe  horse;  ju  "ipferbc 

on  horseback 
ber  ^rittj,  bie  ^rinjcn  prince 
bcr  ^rofeffor,  bie  "iprofefforen  professor 

L.  18.  ii;  §.  65 

ratcn,  riet,  geratcn  advise,  guess  L.  20.  i 

red^t  right,  adv.,  very;  red^t  l^aben  be  in 
the  right 

rebcn,  rebcte,  gerebet  talk 

rcgnen,  regnete,  geregnet  rain 

rcit!^  rich 

rctfen,  reifte,  i[t  gereift  travel,  go 

rcitcn,  ritt,  i[t  geritten  ride  on  horse- 
back 

rcnncn,  ranntc,  ift  geratint  run  L.  19.  ii 

ritt  see  reiten 

ber  'Siod,  bie  9ItJdfe  coat 

rufen,  rief,  geru^  call 

runb  round 

fagen,  [agte,  gefagt  say,  tell 

fa^  see  [e^en 

fa^  see  [i^en 

ber  ®a^,  bie  (©ciijc  sentence 

bag  ^d^ad)  chess 

fd^ttmen  ([ic^)  be  ashamed 

fd^irfen,  fc^idfte,  gefd^icft  send 

tiOii  ©d^iff,  bie  ©d^iffe  ship 

f(^(afen,  fc^lief,  gefd^Iafen  sleep 

fd^lagcn,  [(ilug,  gefd^lagen  strike,  defeat 

fd^led^t  bad,  poor,  mean 

fd^ttcf  see  [c^lafen 

ha^  (Sd^toft,  bie  @d^I(i[[er  castle,  palace 

©(^mibt  Smith 

ber  ©d^neiber,  bie  ©d^neiber  tailor 

fc^neten,  fd^neite,  gefd^neit  snow 

f(^nett  quick,  swift 

ft^on  already  §.  214 

fd^iJtt  beautiful,  handsome,  fine 

fd^reibcn,  fc^rieb,  gefd^rieben  write,  with 

an  and  ace.  write  to 
ber  ©c^u^,  bie  ®c^uf)e  shoe 
bie  ©d^utc,  bie  ©c^ulen  school 
bcr  ©(^titer,  bie  (Schiller  scholar,  pupil 


fc^ttiat^,  fd^mad^er,  fc^mad^ft-  weak 

ft^toarj,  fc^iDcirjer,  fc^roargeft-  black 

fd^mer  heavy,  difficult 

bie  ©(^hJcftcr,  bic  (Sd^tt)cftcrn  sister 

fe(^!§  six 

fc^cn,  \(ii},  gcfel^cn  see,  look  §.  27.  5 

fc^r  very 

fci  L.  21.  II 

fctb  L.  3.  i;  21.  II 

fcin,  toar,  ift  getoefen  be 

fcin,  feiner  etc.  his  L.  6.  ii,  10.  n,  12. 

ii;  13;  §.  50.  87.  121 
ber  feintgc  his  L.  13;  §.  90.  121 
fcit,  prep,  dat.,  since;  conj.  since,  as 
bic  ©eitc,  bie  ©eiten  side,  page 
fcWicr,  [elbft,  intensive,  self,  himself  etc. 

L.  8.  i;  §.  41 
fclfift  see  felber 
fcnbcn,  fanbte,  gefanbt  send 
fc^en,  [e^te,  gefe^t  set,  place;  refl.  sit 

down,  be  seated 
fid^,  refl.,  self,  himself  etc.  L.  7.  ii  and 

notes  §.  39 
jid^cr,  safe,  secure 
fie  she,  they,  ®ie  you  L.  1.  i 
finb  are  L.  3.  i 
ftngcn,  fang,  gefungen  sing 
fi^cn,  fafe,  gefeffen  sit 
fo  so,  thus  L.  7. 1,  n.2;  fo  .  .  .  \6\t  as . . . 

as  §.  215 
foBatb  as  soon  as 
bcr  ©ol^n,  bie  ©iJ^nc  son 
folange  as  long  as 
forever  such  L.  5.  i,  10.  ii,  12.  i;  §.  45. 

79.  87 
bcr  ©otbat,  bic  ©olbatcn  soldier 
fottcn,  folttc,  gcfoirt  shall,  am  to  L.  22; 

§.  25  ff.  184 
bcr  ©ommcr,  bic  ©omnter  summer;  ed 

h)irb  balb  ©ommer  summer  is  com- 
ing soon 
fonbcrn  but,  on  the  contrary  L.  3.  i; 

19.  I.  n.2;  §.  188 
bcr  ©onntag,  bie  ©onntagc  Sunday 
fonft  else,  otherwise 
fpttt  late 

f|)ic(en,  fpiclte,  gcfpielt  play 
f^rad^  see  fpred^en 
f^jrcd^cn,  fprac^,  gefprod^cn  speak  L.  20, 

II,  21 
flJrid^  see  fpred^cn 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


289 


ber  <Btaat,  bic  ©taaten  state  L.  18.  ii; 

§.65 
bic  ©tabt,  bte  ©tabic  city,  town  L.  7. 

II.  n.3 
ftanb  see  [tel^cn 
\tath  see  [terben 
ftarf,  [tarfer,  ftSrfft-  strong 
ftc^en,  [tanb,  geftanbcn  stand 
ftc^tcn,  [tal^I,  ge[to^Icn  steal 
ber  (Stein,  bie  ©teine  stone 
ftcttcn,  ftelttc,  gefteitt  place,  put 
ftcrfictt,  ftarb,  ift  ge[torbcn  die 
ftitt  still,  quiet 

bic  ©tra^c,  bic  ©tra^cn  street 
boS  Stttrf,  bic  <BtMt  piece 
ber  ®tu^(,  bic  ©tti^Ic  chair 
bie  ©tunbc,  bic  ©tunbcn  hour 
fut^cn,  [ud^te,  gefuc^t  seek,  look  for 

ber  Xa^,  bic  Sage  day;  am  2:agc  by  day  ; 

eineg  jTagcg  one  day 
tat  see  tun 
tcucr  dear 

hai  Xkt,  bic  2:tcrc  animal,  beast 
bic  2;intc,  bic  jtinten  ink 
ber  Xi\^,  bie  Sifd^c  table 
bie  J^oc^tcr,  bie  iiJd^ter  daughter 
tot  dead 
tragcn,    trug,    getragen    carry,    wear 

L.  20.  I 
trani  see  trinfen 
trcffcn,  traf,  getroffcn  hit,  meet 
trctcn,  trat,  ift  getreten  tread,  step 
trinfcn,  tranf,  getrunfcn  drink 
trug  see  tragcn 
tun,  tat,  getan  do 
bic  X^x,  bic  S^ilren  door 

iibcr,  prep.  dat.  ace,  over,  above 

iibcrfartcn,  iiberfier,  ttberfaFIen  sur- 
prise L.  26 

tt'ficrfc^cn,  fe^te  ll'ber,  ii'bergcfeljt  ferry 
across  L.  26 

ilBcrfct'jcn,  iiberfe^'te,  iiberfe^t'  trans- 
late L.  26 

tibcrjcu'gcn,  iibcrjcug'tc,  iiberjcugt'  con- 
vince L.  26 

bie  U^r,  bie  U^ren  clock,  watch;  e6  ift 
fed^S  Ufir  it  is  six  o'clock 

urn,  prep,  ace.,  about,  around;  um 
fcd^^  U^r  at  six  o'clock;  bitten  um 
ask  for;  um  gu  + in/in.  in  order  to 


um'firingcn,   brad^tc   um',   um'gebrad|t 

kill  L.  26 
unbefannt  unknown 
unb  and  L.  3.  i;  §.  232 
un^  us,  to  us  L.  8.  II 
unfcr  our,  unferer  etc.  ours  L.  6.  ii,  10. 

II,  12.  ii;  13;  §.  50.  87.  121 
ber  unfrigc,  ours  L.  13;  §.  90.  121 
untcn  below,  down-stairs 
untcr,  prep.  dat.  ace,  under,  beneath, 

among 
untcrbrc'(^cn,  unterbrad^',  untcrbro'd^en 

interrupt  L.  26 
un'tcrgcl^cn,  ging  un'ter,  ift  un'tcrgc* 

gang  en  go  under  L.  26 
untcrgc'^cn,    unterging',    untergan'gcn 

undergo  L.  26 
untcmcl^'mcn,  untemal^m',  untcmom'* 

men  undertake  L.  26 
untertnegS  on  the  way 

ber  JBatcr,  bic  SSater  father 

Ijerbicncn,  berbicnte,  berbient  earn,  de- 
serve 

tjcrgcffcn,  berga§,  bergeffen  forget 

tocrfaufcn,  Derfaufte,  derfauft  sell 

UcrKcrcn,  berlor,  bcrloren  lose 

tjcrf^rcd^ctt,  berfprac^,  berfprod^cn  prom- 
ise 

tjcrftc^cn,  berftanb,  berftanbcn  under- 
stand 

ticrfut^cn,  berfuc^tc,  berfud^t  try 

Dici  much,  many  L.  10.  ii,  12.  i;  §.  45. 
87.  96.  139 

Utctcrki  many  kinds  of 

totettctd^t  perhaps 

totcr  four,  Diert-  fourth 

ber  SBogci,  bic  3Si5geI  bird 

t)Ott  full,  complete 

t)oIIbrtn'gcn,  bottbrad^'te,  botlbrad^t' 
complete,  carry  out 

ttottcn'bcn,  botlen'bctc,  botten'bct  com- 
plete 

tjom  =  Don  bcm  of  the,  from  the 

tjon,  prep,  dat.,  of,  from;  pass,  by 

tjor,  prep.  dat.  ace,  before,  in  front  of; 
bor  einem  ^fol^rc  a  year  ago 

ber  SBagen,  bie  SSagen  wagon,  carriage 
n>a^r  true,  nid^t  rtal^r?  (isn't  it  true? 
i.e.)  isn't  it  so?  don't  you?  etc. 


290 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


to&fixmh,  prep,  gen.,  during;  conj. 
while 

ber  SBalb,  bie  SSfilbcr  woods,  forest 

hjann  when,  at  what  time? 

toax  was,  see  fein ;  eg  toax  einmal  there 
was  once  L.  12.  ii 

toaxm,  iDarmer,  iDarmft-  warm 

toaxi  were,  see  [cin 

toaxitn,  martete,  gemartet  wait 

hiarum  why,  what  for 

toa^  what,  that  which,  whatever  L.  9. 
i;  §.  43.  129.  141 

ha^  SBaffcr,  bic  SBaffcr  water,  pond 

ber  9Scg,  bie  SBegc  way,  road 

hJCg  away,  off 

hJCtl  because  L.  3.  ii 

ber  SScin,  bie  SBeinc  wine 

hjcifc  wise 

toci^  white 

hJcift  1.  sin^.  pres.  ind.  o/ toiffen 

tocit,  wide,  far  away,  far;  todUx  far- 
ther, further 

toclc^cr  which,  who  L.  5.  i,  10.  ii;  §.  45. 
79.  90 

bie  2Bctt,  bie  SSklten  world 

tocnbcn,  iDanbte,  gemanbt  turn,  [id^  Jrcn^ 
ben  with  an  and  ace.  apply  to 

tocmg  little,  few  L.  10.  ii,  12.  i;  14; 
§.  45.  87.  139 

hJCnn  if,  whenever  L.  7.  i.  n.i;  §.  189 

totx  who,  whoever,  L.  9.  i;  §.  43.  129 

hjcrbcn,  n)urbe  or  luarb,  ift  genjorben  be- 
come, get,  grow  L.  3.  I 

hjcrfcn,  iDarf,  geluorfen  throw 

tocffcn  whose,  see  Idzx 

mibcr,  pref.,  against  L.  26;  §.  37 

toic  how,  as;  fo  .  .  .  tt)ic  as  .  .  .  as  §.  217 

toicbcr  again,  back 

toic'bcrtiringctt,  brac^te  toie'ber,  toic'ber* 
gebrac^t  bring  again,  return  L.  26 

toic'bcr^olcn,  ^olte  n)ie'ber,  luie'bergefiolt 
fetch  again,  fetch  back  L.  26 

hitcbcr^o'lcn,  n)ieber]^orte,  mieberl^olt'  re- 
peat L.  26 

totc'bcrfommctt,  tarn  mic'ber,  ift  hjic'ber* 
gefommen  come  again,  return  L.  26 

toic'bcrfc^cn,  [o^  ttjie'ber,  mie'bergcfe^en 
see  or  meet  again  L.  26 

ber  SSintcr,  bie  SSinter  winter;  e« 
totrb  balb  SBintcr  winter  is  coming 
soon 


toirb,  hJtrft  L.  3.  i 

mirfiit^  real(ly) 

njtffcn,   tt)uBte,   genjufet  know  L.  23; 

§.  28.  186 
too  where 

bie  2So(^c,  bic  SBod^cn  week 
toofitr  wherefor,  for  what,  for  which 
tootjtx  whence,  wherefrom 
)t)0^tn  whither,  whereto 
too^t  well,  indeed  §.218 
tool^ncn,  njo^nte,  gemo^nt  reside,  live 
toottctt,  tDottte,  gehjoKt  will,  be  willing, 

intend  to,  be  about  to  L.  22 ;  §.  25  ff. 

185 
toomtt  wherewith,  with  what  or  which 
tooran  whereat,  at  which  or  what,  of 

what 
toorauf  whereupon,   upon   which   or 

what 
toortn  wherein,  in  which,  in  what 
ha^  SSort,  bie  SBorte  word 
tooritl^er  whereover,  over  what,  at  what 

or  which 
tootion  whereof,  wherefrom,  of  or  from 

which  or  what 
tounbcrt,  e6  tounbert  mtd^,  ha^  I  wonder 

that 
hJiinfd^cn,  toitnfd^tc,  gemttnfd^t  wish 
mu^tc  knew  L.  23 

jcl^n  ten 

jctgcn,  geigte,  gegeigt  show,  point  out 

bie  3cit/  ^ic  B^^t^n  time;  beijeiten  be- 
times, in  season 

gtc^cn,  3og,  gejogen  draw,  pull 

gtc^cn,  jog,  ift  gejogen  march,  go,  move 

ha^  Sitnmtx,  bie  ^i^t^ner  room 

ju,  prep,  dat.,  to,  toward;  gu  .^aufc  at 
home;  ju  ^u&  on  foot;  gu  "ipferbe  on 
horseback 

JU,  adv.,  too 

sum  =  ju  bent  to  the 

§ur  =  gu  ber  to  the 

Suriirf  back 

jufammcn  together 

^toanjig  twenty 

^tuax  to  be  sure,  it  is  true  §.  219;  unb 
IWax  and  that 

jmct  two,  jh)eit-  second 

^toi^^tn,  prep.  dat.  ace.,  between 

jtoiJlf  twelve 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


a,  an,  indef.  art,  L.  6.  i 

able,  be  a.  fonncn  L.  22 

about,  round  a.  urn  ace;  be  about 
to  .  .  .  iDoIlcn  L.  22;  §.  185;  a.= 
concerning  toon  dat,  about  it  baDon 

above  iiber  dat.  ace. ;  a.  =  up-stairs 
obcn 

accomplish  boHbrin'gcn,  boEbrad^'tc, 
bollbrac^t'  L.  26 

across  iiber  dat.  ace. 

advise  raten,  riet,  geraten  <ia^.  pers. 

after  na6)  dat.;  con]',  nac^bcm 

again  mieber 

against  gcgen  ace. 

ago  bor  c?a^ ;  a  year  a.  bor  einem  ^Q^^rc 
•  all  aii  L.  13  and  notes  i-  2;  a.  =  en- 
tirely ganj;  none  at  all  gar  fein-; 
not  at  a.  gar  nid^t;  nothing  at  a.  gar 
nid^tg;  after  all  bod^;  of  all  with 
superl.  aller  L.  15.  i.  n.2;  all  that 
alleg,  h)ag  L.  3.  ii.  n.2-  s 

allow  eriauben,  eriaubte,  eriaubt;  be  al- 
lowed to  biirfen  L.  22;  §.  25  &.  180 

almighty  altmcid^tig 

alone  allein 

already  fd^on 

also  aud^ 

always  immer 

amtofoltenL.  22;  §.  25.  184 

America  Slme'rifa  neut. 

among  unter  dat.  ace. 

amomit,  small  a.  of  tuenig  L.  12.  i 

andunbL.  3.  i;  §.  232 

angry  bofe 

animal  bag  3:ier,  bie  Jierc 

Anna  Slnna 

another  ein  anbercr;  one  another  tin- 
anber  indecl. ;  a.  =  a  second  nod^  ein- 

answer  antlrorten,  ontmortete,  geant^ 
mortet 

any,  not  a.  more  or  longer  nid^t  mcl^r, 
nic^t  longer;  not  a.  =  none 

anybody  iemanb 


anything,  not  a.  nid^tg;  in  qaestionsj 

as  did  he  give  her  a.  ?  ttma^L.  10.  ii; 

§.  137 
apple  ber  Slpfel,  bic  tpfel 
apply  to  fi(^  icenben  an +acc. 
April  ber  2lpril  L.  14.  n.2 
arm  ber  2lrm,  bie  Slrme 
aroimd  um  ace. 
as  =  when  alg  L.  7.  i.  n.^;  =  since  ha 

L.  12.  II.  n.2;  as  .  .  .  as  fo  .  .  .  ftiic 
ask  =  inquire  fragen,  fragte,  gefragt;  = 

beg  bitten,  bat,  gebeten,  a.  for  bitten 

um  ace. 
at  an  dat.  ace;  at  which  tDoran;  at  it 

or  them  baran;  at  the  house  of  bet 

dat. ;  at  five  o'clock  um  filnf  U^r;  at 

home  ju  ^aufe 

bad  =  poor,  mean   [d^Ied^t;    =  wicked 

bo[e 
be  [ein,  Voav,  i[t  gehjefen 
beast  bag  2;ier,  bie  jiere 
beautiful(ly)  [d^t)n  L.  4.  i.  n.2 
because  ft)eil  subord.  conj. 
become  iDerben,  hjurbc  or  toaxh,  \\i  ge^- 

hjorben 
bed  ha^  S8ett,  bie  53etten  L.  18.  ii 
before  bor  dat.  ace.;  conj.  t\)t 
beg  (for)  bitten,  hat,  gebeten  (um  ace.) 
begin  anfangen,  fing  an,  angefangen 
behind  jointer  dat.  ace. 
being  (human)  ber  Wtn\6),  bic  aWen= 

fc^en 
believe  glauben,  gtaubte,  gegtaubt  dat. 

pers. 
belong  gel^dren,  gel^iirte,  gel^iJrt 
below  unten  adv. ;  unter  dat.  ace. 
beneath  unter  dat.  ace. 
bequeath  l^interlof'fen,  l^interlie^',  J^in* 

tertarfen  L.  26 
beside  neben  dat.  ace. 
best  be[t-  L.  15.  i  and  note  2;  like  best 

L.  23 


291 


292 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


better  beffer  L.  15;  like  b.  L.  23 

between  jhji[d)en  dat.  ace. 

beyond  Winter  dat.  ace. 

big  groB,  grower,  gro^t-  L.  15 

bird  ber  3!5ogel,  bie  S3()gcl 

black  [c^roarj,  fc^ioarjer,  [d^mitrjeft- 

book  ha^  SBuc^,  bie  i8iirf)er 

both  beib-  L.  12.  i 

boy  ber  ^nabe,  bie  ^naben 

bread  baS  33rot,  bie  S3rotc 

break  brec^en,  brad^,  gebroc^enL.  20.  ii; 

21.  II 
bring  bringen,  brad^te,  gebrad^t,  b.  back 

njte' ber  bring  en,  bracf)te  njic'ber,  iDie'* 

bergebrod)t  L.  26 
brother  ber  ^ruber,  bie  SBriiber 
bum  brennen,  brannte,  gebrannt  L.  19. 

ii;  §.  16 
but  aber,  fonbem  L.  19.  i.  n.2;  §.  188; 

=  only  nur;  =  yet  bod^ 
buy  !aufen,  faufte,  gefauft 
by,  with  passive,  Don  dat. 

call  =  c.  out,  shout  rufen,  rief,  gerufen; 

=namenennen,nannte,  gcnanntL.  19. 

II ;  c.  on  befud^en,  befuc^te,  befud^t 
can  bnnen,  fonnte,  gefonnt,L.  22;  §.  25. 

181.  186 
captive,  be  a  c.  gefangen  fein  L.  27 
capture  fang  en,  fing,  gefangen 
care  to  mogen,  moc^te,  gemoc^t  L.  22; 

§.  25.  182 
carriage  ber  SBagen,  bie  SBagen 
carry  tragen,  trug,  getragen;  c.  out  t)oIt= 

brin'gen,  DoItbrad)'te,  oollbrad^f  L.  26 
case  ber  j^alt,  bie  i^'diit 
castle  bag  ©c^Iofe,  bie  ®d^l()ffer 
catch  fang  en,  fing,  gefangen 
certain(ly)  geh)i^ 
chair  ber  ©tu^l,  bie  ©tiil^Ie 
change   (money)   fleineg  ®elb  L.   10. 

II.  n.i 
Charles  ^arl,  gen.  ^axU 
child  bag  ^inb,  bie  ^inber 
church  bie  ^ird^e,  bie  ^ird^en,  go  to  c. 

gur  ^ird^e  ge()en 
city  bie  ©tabt,  bie  ©table 
clever  flug,  fliiger,  flilgft- 
clock  bie  U^r,  bie  Ul^rcn;  at  5  o'clock 

um  filnf  U^r,  till  5  o'clock  big  filnf  U^r 
close  by  nebcn  dat.  ace. 


coat  ber  9Jocf,  bie  di'6dt 
cold  fait,  falter,  falteft- 
come  fommen,  fam,  ift  gefommen;  c. 

back  juriicffommen,  fam  guriicf,  ift 

juriidfgefommen;.  c.   down   ^erunter* 

fommen,  fam  ^erunter,  ift  ^erunter* 

gefommen 
complete  oollen'ben,  Oolten'bete,  Dolten'- 

bet  L.  26 
contmue  fortfa^ren,  ful^r  fort,  fortge* 

fa^ren 
convince  iiberjeu'gen,  iiberjeug'tc,  liber* 

geugf  L.  26 
count  ber  ®raf,  bie  ©rafen 
country  ha^  ganb,  bie  I'anber;  in  the  c. 

auf  bem  Sanbc 
cry  out  =  shout  rufen,  rief,  gerufen 

dark  bunfel  L.  11.  i.  n.^ 

daughter  bie  Xod^ter,  bie  Jdc^ler 

day  ber  Jag,  bie  2;age,  one  d.  eineg  Jageg 

dead  tot 

dear  lieb 
.  defeat  f(^Iagen,  fc^Iug,  gefc^lagen 

describe  befc^reiben,  befd^rieb,  befc^rieben 

die  flerben,  flarb,  ift  geflorben  L.  20. 
II,  21.  II 

different  anber  L.  12.  i 

difficult  fd^mer 

diligent  flei^ig 

do  tun,  tat,  gelan;  do,  did  etc.  in  ques- 
tions and  negations  not  transl.  L.  1. 
i;  §.  150;  do  =  make  madden,  macule, 
gemad^t;  it  won't  do  eg  ge^t  nic^t 
L.  10.  II ;  I  am  doing  well  eg  ge^t 
mir  gut  L.  28 

doctor  ber  S)oftor,  bie  !DoflorenL.  18.  ii 

dog  ber  §unb,  bie  §unbe 

donkey  ber  Qfel,  bie  @fel 

door  bie  Xiir,  bie  Jliren 

down-stairs  unlen 

draw  giel)en,  gog,  gejogen 

dress  bag  BUih,  bie  ^leiber 

drink  trinfen,  tranf,  gelrunfen 

drive  fa^ren,  ful^r,  ifl  gefat)ren 

during  n)al)renb  gen. 

dwell  loo^nen,  module,  gemo^nt 

each  (one)  Jeber  L.  5.  i;  12.  i;  §.  45. 

87 ;  e.  other  einanber  indecl. 
ear  bag  Ol^r,  bie  O^ren  L.  18.  ii 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


293 


early  friif) 

earn  berbieneti,  bcrbietitc,  berbient 

earth  bie  @rbc,  bie  ©rben 

easy  kidi)t 

eat  effen,  a&,  gegeffen 

either  L.  1.  i.  n.^ 

else  [on[t 

emperor  ber  ^atfer,  bie  ^aifcr 

end  bag  Snbe,  bie  (gnbenL.  18.  ii;  §.  65 

enemy  ber  geitib,  bie  ^cinbe 

England  ©nglanb  nevi. 

English  englifdf),  E.  language  @ngli[d^ 

enough  genug 

escort  fii^ren,  fil^rte,  gefiil^rt 

evening  ber  5lbenb,  bie  Slbenbc;  in  the  e. 

am  Slbetib;  this  e.  I^eutc  abenb 
ever  =  at  any  time  \t 
every  (one)  Jeber  L.  5.  i,  12,  i;  §.  45. 

87;  everybody  jeber  or  iebermann; 

everything  alleg 
eye  ba^  5luge,  bie  5liigen  L.  18.  ii 

fall  fallen,  fiet,  ift  gefalten  L.  20.  i;  f. 

down  {jcrunterfatlen,  fiel  l^erunter,  ift 

l^eruntergcf  alien 
famous  beril^mt 
far  loeit 
farmer  ber  ^auer,  bie  S3ouemL.  18.  ii; 

§.65 
fast  fc^nell 

father  ber  33atcr,  bie  S3  (iter 
feather  bie  ^^eber,  bie  ^ebem 
feeble  fc^mac^,  fc^ttjod^er,  fc^toac^ft- 
ferry  across  il'berf eljen,  f eljte  il'ber,  il'6er» 

gefe^t  L.  26 
fetch  back  mie'berl^olen,  l^oltc  mie'ber, 

n)ie'berge^olt  L.  26 
few  n)enigeL.  10.  ii,  12.  i,  14.  n.^;  §.  87. 

139 
field  ha^  ^elb,  bie  ^tihtx 
finally  enblic^ 
find  finben,  fanb,  gefunben 
fine  fcfidn 
fire  ba€  ^cuer,  bie  ^euer;  be  on  f.  bren= 

nen,  brannte,  gebranntL.  19.  ii;  §.  16 
first  erft 
five  filnf 

flower  bie  33lume,  bie  SBIumen 
follow   folgen,  folgte,  ift    gefolgt    dat. 

pers. 
foot  ber  gufe,  bie  p&c;  on  f.  ju  gu& 


for  fiir  ace;  benn  conj.;  ask  for  bitten 

um  with  ace. 
forest  ber  SSalb,  bie  SSfilbcr 
forget  tjergeffen,  berga^,  bergeffen 
former  (ly)  frii^er,  compar.  of  frti^ 
four  bier 

friend  ber  ^^reunb,  bie  gi^^unbc 
from,  away  f .  don  dat. ;  out  f .  au3  dat. ; 

hear  f .  l^oren  Don  dat. 
front,  in  f .  of  bor  dat.  ace. 

garden  ber  ©arten,  bie  ©arten 
gentleman  ber  ^err,  bie  ^erren  L.  8.  i 
German  beutfc^  adj.;  ber  !Deutfc^e,  bie 
!Deutfd^en  subst.  L.  15.  ii;  §.  91;  he 
speaks  G.  er  fpric^t  ©eutfd^ 
Germany  SDeutfd^lanb  neut. 
get  =  become,  groY»r  tDtxhm,  ttjurbc  or 
toarb,  ift  geiDorben;  g.  up  auffteljen, 
ftanb  auf,  ift  aufgeftanben 
girl  ba^  aJJabd^en,  bie  SJJcibc^en 
give  geben,  gab,  gegebenL.  20!  ii,  21.  ii 
glad,  be  g.  fid^  freuen  iiber  ace.  L.  28; 

gladly  gem  §.  206 
glass  bai  ©lag,  bie  ©tafer 
go  ge^en,  ging,  ift  gegangen;  =  travel 
reifen,  reifte,  ift  gereift  or  fa^rcn,  fu^r, 
ift  gefal^ren;  g.  down  un'tergel)en,  ging 
un'ter,  ift  un'tergegangen;  g.  on,  con- 
tinue fortfal^ren,  ful^r  fort,  fortgefal^* 
ten;  g.  up  l^inaufgel^en,  ging  l^inauf,  ift 
l^inaufgegangen;  am  going  to,  use  the 
present  tense  L.  2.  i.  n.^ 
god  ber  ®ott,  bie  ©otter 
good  gut,  beffer,  beft-L.  15.  i;  §.96 
great  gro^,  grower,  grafet-L.  15.  i;  §.  96 
green  griln 

grow  =  get  or  become  ttjerbcn,  ftjurbe  or 
toaxb,  ift  geiDorben 

hand  bie  ^anb,  bie  ^(inbc 

handsome  fd^on 

happen  gefd^elien,  gefd^al^,  ift  gefc^el^en 

happy  gliidlid^ 

hardly  faum 

hat  ber  §ut,  bie  §iltc 

have  l^aben,  l^atte,  gel^abt;  have  =  cause 

to  laffen  L.  20.  i.  n.2;  have  to  milffen 

L.  22 
he  er;  emphatic  ber  demonstr.  L.  9.  i, 

before  a  relat.  berjenige  L.  13 


294 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


hear  prcn,  l^iirtc,  Qcl^iJrt 

heart  bag  ^erj,  bic  ^erjen  L.  18.  ii 

heavy  fd^iuer 

Henry  ^emrid^ 

help  ^elfen,  l^alf,  ge^olfcn 

hence  =  therefore  aI[o 

her  adj.  i^r  L.  6.  ii,  10.  ii 

here  ^ier 

hers  ii)r  L.  12.  ii,  ber  il^rigc  L.  13 

herself  [ic^  L.  7.  ii,  28 

high  \)o6),  f)6^er,  p(^[t-  L.  12.  ii,  15.  i 

him  iF)n 

himself  fid^  L.  7.  ii,  28;  emphatic  fclbft, 
felber  L.  8.  i 

his  [ein  L.  6.  ii,  12.  ii,  ber  feinigc 
L.  13 

history  bie  ©efc^ic^te,  bie  ©cfc^ic^tcn 

hit  treffen,  traf,  getroffen 

hold  l^alten,  l^ielt,  ge^dten 

home  na6)  ^aufe;  at  h.  p  ^au[c 

hope  l^offen,  l^offtc,  gel^offt 

horse  bag  '^ferb,  bie  "pferbe;  on  horse- 
back ju  ^ferbe 

hot  f)ei& 

hour  bie  ©tuubc,  bie  ©tunben 

house  ha^  §aug,  bie  ^aufer;  at  the  h. 
of  bei  with  dat.  of  person;  at  your 
h.  bei  bir  or  euc^  or  ^i^nen 

how  n)ie 

hiunan  being  ber  SSitx[\6),  bic  9)?enfd^en 

himgry,  I  am  h.  eS  ^ungert  m\& 
L.  28 

husband  ber  SD^ann,  bie  3)?anner 

if  iDenn;  =  whether  ob 

ill  franf,  frfin!er,  !ranf[t- 

in  in  dat.  ace;  in  it  barin,  in  which 

morin 
indeed  tDol^I 
industrious  ftei^ig 
inquire    (for)    fragen,    fragte,    gefragt 

(nac^  dat.) 
intend  to  tnolUn  L.  22 
interrupt  unterbre'd^en,  unterbrad^',  un* 

tcrbro'd^en  L.  26 
into  in  ace. 
its  [ein  L.  6.  ii,  12.  ii,  13 

joy  bie  ^rcube,  bic  i^rcuben 
just,  just  now  cben;  just  =  exactly  ge* 
rabc 


kill  um'bringen,  brad^te    urn',  um'gc= 

brac^t  L.  26 
kind,  all  kinds  of  allerlei;  many  kindj 

of  bielerlei  L.  10.  ii 
king  ber  ^onig,  bie  ^Mgc 
know  personally  fennen,  fannte,  gcfanni 

L.  19.  II ;  know  facts  hjiffen,  iDU^te 

gcmufet  L.  23,  see  also  §.  28.  186 

lady,  young  1.  ha^  graulctn,  bic  i^TauIcir 
land  bag  Sanb,  bie  ?anber 
large  gro^,  grower,  ^xb^t-L.  15.  i;  §.  96 
last  le^t-;  at  1.  enblic^;  1.  night  ge[teni 

abenb 
late  fpiit 

lay,  laid,  laid  legcn,  legtc,  gclegt 
lazy  faul 

lead  fiil^ren,  fii^rte,  gefiil^rt 
learn  lemen,  lemte,  gelemt  L.  23.  n.i 
leave   behind,  bequeath  f)inter(a['fen^ 

^interliefe',  ^interlafjen  L.  26 
leg  bag  ^ein,  bie  Seine 
let  laffen,  liei  gelaffen  L.  20.  i.  n.^,  22. 

II.  n.3;  §.  164 
letter  ber  ^rief,  bie  SBriefe 
he,  lay,  lain  liegen,  lag,  gelegen 
Ught  leic^t 

Ughten  bli^en,  blijjte,  gebliljt 
like,  I  like  to  id^  mag  gemL.  22;  §.  182, 

see  also  §.  206 
little  flein,  loenig  L.  10.  ii,  12.  i,  14;  a 

little  ein  tuenig  or  etraag 
live  leben,  lebte,  gelebt;  =  dwell  lool^ncn, 

n)o^nte,  gemoi^nt 
living,  be  l.  =  live 
long,  adj.,  lang,  longer,  langft-;  adv. 

lange;  no  longer  nic^t  mef)r;  a  1.  time 

lange 
look  fel^en,  [al^,  gefel^en;  =  seem,  appear 

ougfe^en,  fa^  aug,  auggc[ef)en;  1.  for 

[ud^en,  fud^te,  gcfuc^t 
lord  ber  ^txx,  bie  ^erren 
lose  berlieren,  berlor,  berloren 
loud  laut 
love  lieben,  liebtc,  gcliebt 

make  ntod^en,  mad^te,  gemad^t 

man  ber  SD^ann,  bie  'ifflanntv;  =humai 

being  ber  9J2en[c^,  bie  9JJcn[(^en 
many  diele  L.  12.  i,  14;  many  a  (one 

mand^er  L.  5.  i,  10.  ii 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


295 


Mary  Wlam' 

master  ber  ^err,  bic  ^erren  L.  8.  i 

may  mdgen  L.  22;  §.  25.  182;  may 

I  .  .  .?barf  i(^  .  .  .? 
me  mir,  mid^ 

mean  meinen,  meinte,  gemeint 
meet  treffen,  traf,  getroffen  L.  20.  ii, 

21.  II 
mighty  mcid^tig 

mine  mein  etc.  L.  12.  ii;  §.  50.  87.  121 
Miss  i^raulein 

Monday  ber  Wlonia^,  bic  SJJontage 
money  ha^  &dh,  bie  ®elber 
month  ber  ^onat,  bie  SD^onate 
more  me^r,  not  any  m.  m<i)t  mel^r 
morning  ber  9D?orgen,  bie  ajJorgen;  in 

the  m.  am  SO^orgen;  this  m.  ^eute 

morgen;  one  m.  eine8  2Jiorgcn8 
most  meift  L.  15.  i 
mostly  meiftenS 

mother  bie  abutter,  bie  3)^lltter 
moimtain  ber  33erg,  bie  33ergc 
Mr.  ^err 
Mrs.  ^rau 
much  toiel 
must  miiffen  L.  22;  must  not  nid^t 

biirfen 
my  mein  L.  6.  ii,  10.  ii 
myself  (id^)  felb[t 

name  nennen,  nannte,  genannt;  his  n.  is 

er  ^eifet;  what  is  his  n.?  h)ie  l^ei^t  er? 
near  na^,  nailer,  nac^[t-  L.  15.  i 
neighbor    ber   ^^ad^bar,   bic   9^ad^bam 

L.  18.  II 
neither  L.  1.  i.  n.3 
never  nic 
new  neu 

next  nac^ft- L.  15.  i;  §.  96 
night   bie  ^f^ac^t,   bie  Wd^k,  last  n. 

ge[tent  abenb 
no  nein;  adj.  tein  L.  6.  i;  no  longer 

nid^t  mel^r 
noble  ebel 

nobody  niemanb,  feiner  L.  13;  §.  90 
none  feiner  L.  13;  §.  90 
nor  L.  1.  I.  n.3 
not  nid^t;  not  yet  nod^  nid^t;  not  either 

L.  1. 1,  n.3;  position  ofni^iL.  2.  i.  n.* 
nothing  nid^t^ 
now  jdjt,  nun  L.  19.  i 


obliged,  be  o.  to  miiffen  L.  22 

of  =  about,  concerning  toon  dot. 

often  oft 

old  alt,  alter,  alteft- 

on  auf,  an  dat.  ace;  on  Monday  am 
ajJontag;  on  foot  gu  ^^u^;  on  horse- 
back ju  'iPfcrbe;  on  it  baran,  barauf; 
on  top  of  auf  dat.  ace. 

once  einmal,  eiuft;  once  upon  a  time 
there  was  eS  h)ar  einmal  L.  12.  ii; 
at  once  gleic^,  fogleid^ 

one  indef.  man;  one  num.  ein,  einer 
etc.  L.  6.  I,  12.  II,  16;  a  good  one, 
good  ones  etc.  L.  10.  i.  n.^ 

only  nur 

open  aufmad^cn,  mad^tc  auf,  aufgcmac^t 

or  ober 

order,  in  o.  to  um  JU 

other  anbcr  L.  12.  i,  14;  each  o.,  one 
another  cinanber,  indecl. 

ought  to  fotltc  L.  22 

our  unfer  L.  6.  ii;  ours  L.  12.  ii,  13 

out  of  aug  dat. 

over  iibcr  dat.  ace. 

palace  ba^  ©d^lo^,  bic  ®d^l3ffcr 

paper  ha^  "ipapicr,  bic  "ipapierc 

parents  bic  ©Item  plur.  only 

patient  ber  ^ranfc  L.  15.  ii 

peasant  ber  33auer,  bie  53aucm  L.  18.  ii 

pen  bic  i^ebcr,  bie  gebem 

people  =  persons  in  general  bic  Scute 

plur.,  or  man  (one)  §.136 
perhaps  bielteid^t 
permit  erlauben,  erlaubtc,  crlaubt 
picture  ba«  53ilb,  bic  33ilbcr 
piece  bag  ©tiicf,  bie  ©tUdfc 
place  fcljcn,  fcljte,  gcfcljt 
play  fpielen,  fpiclte,  gefpiclt 
please  =  I  pray  bittc;  =  suit  gcfatlcn,  gc* 

fiel,  gefallcn 
pleasure,  with  p.  gem 
poor  arm,  firmer,  firmft-;  the  p.  man 

ber  5lrmc,  the  p.  woman  bic  Hrme, 

the  p.  people  bic  Slrmcn;  p.  =  mean, 

bad  f(^le(^t 
possible  mijglid^ 
powerful  mad^tig 
praise  loben,  lobte,  gclobt 
prefer,  I  prefer  to  ride  td^  rcitc  licbcr 

L.  23;  §.  206 


296 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


prince  ber  Wm^  ^^e  ^rinsen 
professor  bcr  "^^rofcffor,  bie  ^rofefform 

L.  18.  II 
promise     berfprec^en,     berfprac^,     ber= 

fprod^en 
pupil  ber  (Schiller,  bic  ©chiller 

queen  bic  ^onigin,  bic  ^dniginnen 
quick  [(^ncK 
quiet  ftitt 
quite  gaitj 

rain  regnen,  rcgnete,  geregnet 

rather  lieber  L.  23;  §.  206 

read  Ie[en,  lag,  gclc[en 

real(ly)  iuirflic^ 

reason,  for  that  r.  bcS^alb,  barum 

receive  cmpfangen,  empfing,  empfatigcn 

recently  neulid^ 

rejoice  [id^  freuen  L.  28 

remain  biciben,  bUcb,  t[t  gebliebcn 

repeat  n)leber{)o'(en,  h)iebert)oI'tc,  n3iebcr' 

^olt' 
rich  reid^ 
ride  in  a  carriage  fal^ren,  ful^r,  i[t  ge- 

fa^rcn;  on  horseback  reiten,  ritt,  i[t 

geritten 
rijht  rec^t;  be  in  the  r.  rcd^t  l^abcn 
river  ber  ^lu^,  bic  glUffe 
road  ber  SBeg,  bic  SBcgc 
room  bag  3^^^^^^  ^i^  3^"^"^^^ 
nm   laufen,   lief,   ift   gclaufeti;   rennen, 

rannte,  ift  gerannt  L.  19.  ii 

safe  (from)  fid^er  (bor  dot.) 

same  berfelbc  L.  13;  §.90 

say  fagen,  fagte,  gefogt 

scarcely  faum 

school  bic  ©c^ule,  bie  ©d^ulcn;  go  to  s. 

gur  ©d^ule  gel^en 
search  (for)  fuc^en,  fuc^te,  gefuc^t 
seat  one's  self  fic^  fe^en,  feljtc,  gefe^t 
second  gmeit-  L.  16 
see  fel^en,  fa^,  gefel^en  L.  20.  ii,  21.  ii; 

see  again   luie'berfel^en,  fal^  h)ie'ber, 

iDie'bcrgefe^en  L.  26 
seek  fuc^cn,  fud^tc,  gefud^t 
seem,  it  seems  to  me  mid^  biinft  L.  28 
sell  berfaufen,  berfauftc,  derfauft 
send   fd^idfen,    fc^idte,   gefc^idft;   fenben, 

fanbte,  gcfanbt  L.  19.  ii;  s.  for  rufen 

laffcn  L.  20.  i.  n.^ 


servant  ber  3!)iencr,  bic  !l)icncr 

set  fel^en,  fe^tc,  gefe^t 

seventy-five  fiinfunbficbaig 

several  me^rere  L.  13.  14 

shaU  folten  L.  22 

she  fie 

ship  bag  ©c^iff,  bic  ©d^iffc 

short  furj,  fiirjer,  fiirjeft- 

show  jcigen,  geigte,  gejeigt;  s.  the  way, 

escort  fii^rcn,  fii^rte,  gefu^rt 
sick  franf,  friinfer,  franfft- 
side  bie  ©cite,  bic  ©eiten 
since  prep,  feit  dot.;  conj.  "ta  L.  12.  ii. 

n.2 
sing  fingen,  fang,  gefuttgen 
sister  bic  ©d^mefter,  bie  ©d^njcftcm 
sit  fi^en,  fafe,  gefeffen 
six  fed^g 

sky  ber  ^intmcl,  bie  ^immcl 
sleep  fc^Iafen,  fc^lief,  gefd^Iafcn  L.  20.  i 
small  flcin 
Smith  (Sd^mibt 
snow  fc^neien,  fc^neite,  gcfc^neit 
so  fo;  so  .  .  .  as  fo  .  .  .  tt)ie;  s.  =  and  so, 

hence  olfo 
soldier  ber  ©olbat,  bie  ©olbaten 
some  =  a  little  ctmag  §.  137;  =afew 

einige  L.  13.  14 
somebody  iemanb 
something  etrtag 
son  ber  ©o^n,  bic  (Sot)nc 
soon  balb 
sorry,  I  am  s.  that  eg  tut  mir  leib,  ba& 

L.  28 
sort  see  kind 
speak  fprcd^en,  fprad^,  gcfprod^en  L.  20. 

II,  21.  II 
stand  ftel^en,  ftanb,  geftanbett 
state  ber  ®taat,  bie  ©taaten  L.  18.  ii 
stay  bleiben,  blieb,  ift  geblicben 
steal  fte^len,  ftaf)I,  gefto^len  L.  20.  ii, 

21.  II 
step  trcten,  trat,  ift  gctreten  L.  20.  ii, 

21.  II 
still  =  as  yet  nod^;  =  yet,  but  bod^;  = 

qiiiet  ftilt 
stone  bcr  ©tetn,  bie  ©teinc 
stop = cease  auf^oren,  f)drte  auf,  aufgcl^ort 
stoiy  bie  ©efc^id^te,  bie  ®efc[)ici)ten 
street  bie  ©tra^e,  bie  ©trafeen 
strike  fc^Iagen,  fd^lug,  gef<:^lagcn  L.  20.  i 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


297 


strong  [tarf,  ftarfer,  ftcirfft- 
student  ber  ©driller,  bic  ©d^iiler 
study  lernen,  lemte,  gelernt 
such  [olc^erL.  5.  i,  10.  ii,  12.  i;  §.  45. 

79.  87;  such  a  thing  [o  ttlDa^ 
summer  ber  (Sommer,  bie  <Sommcr 
Simday  ber  ©onntag,  bie  ©onntage 
sure  gemiji;  to  be  s.  glDor 
surprise  =  attack  iiberfarien,  iiberfier, 

ilberfarien  L.    26;   be   surprised  = 

wonder 

table  ber  Ji[c^,  bie  2:if(^e 

tailor  ber  ©c^neiber,  bie  ©d^neiber 

take  nel^men,  na^m,  genommen  L.  20.  ii, 

21.  ii;  t.  to  be  l^alten  fiir  ace. 
talk  reben,  rebete,  gerebet;  fpred^en,  \pvad), 

gefproc^en 
tall  groB,  grader,  gr()§t-;  =highl^o(^, 

^o^er,  ^fic^ft-  L.  12.  ii 
teach  le^ren,  lel^rte,  gelel^rt 
teacher  ber  Sel^rer,  bie  Se^rer 
tell  =  say  [agen,  [agte,  gefagt;  •=  narrate 

erja^Ien,  erjct^Itc,  erjii^tt 
than  aU 
thank  banfen,  bantte,  gebanft;  th.  you 

or  thanks  battfe 
that  demonst.  ber  L.  9.  i,  jencr  L.  5.  i, 

berjenige  L.    13;  relat.   ber,   njeld^er 

L.  9.  I,  that  which    n)aS  L.  9.  i; 

conj.  ha^,  that  =  in  order  that  ba= 

mit  L.  30.  II 
their  if)r  L.  6.  ii,  theirs  L.  12.  ii,  13 
them  [ie,  i^nen 
themselves  [ic^  L.  7.  ii 
then  bann 
there  ba  L.  12.  ii.  n.^,  bort;  there  was 

or  were  once  eg  Voax  or  tuareti  einmal; 

there  came  once  eg  fam  or  famen 

cinmol  L.  12.  ii;  there  is  or  there 

are  eg  gibt  with  ace. 
therefore  olfo,  beg^alb 
thereof  baDon 
thereover  barilber 
thereupon  barauf  L.  9.  ii;  §.  197 
therewith  bainit 
they  fie,  man 
thing,  such  a  th.  fo  ettDag 
think  =  reflect   benfen,   bac^te,  gebac^t; 

=  surmise,  beheve  gtouben,  glaubte, 

geglaubt 


thirsty,  I  am  th.  eg  burftet  or  bilrftet 

mic^  L.  28 
this  (one)  biefer  L.  5.  i;  this  evening 

f)eute  abenb 
three  brei 
through  burd^  ace. 
throw  luerfen,  rtarf,  gemorfen 
thunder  bonnem,  bonnerte,  gebonnert 
till  big 
time  btc  3cit,  bie  ^^iten;  at  what  t.? 

njann?;  from  t.  to  t.  t)on  3eit  ju  3eit; 

a  long  t.  lange;  by  this  t.  fd^on;  at 

any  t.  =  ever  jc 
to  gu  dat.,  an  dat.  aee.,  nad^  dat.  L.  19  i. 

Vocab. 
to-day  ^eutc 
together  gufammen 
to-morrow  morgen 
to-night  l^eute  abenb 
too  =  also  auc^,  =  too  much  gu 
towards  nac^  dat.;  t.  the  end  gcgcn 

(Snbe  L.  18.  ii.  n.^ 
town  bic  ©tabt,  bic  ©tiibtc;  go  to  t. 

jur  ©tabt  ge^en;  be  in  t.  in  ber  <Stabt 

fein 
translate   iibcrfet'gcn,   ilbcrfcij'te,  ilber* 

\ci^t'  L.  26 
travel  reifen,  rei[te,  ift  gcrcift 
tree  ber  S3aum,  bie  33iiumc 
true  iDal^r,  it  is  true  jhjor 
try  berfud^en,  derfuc^tc,  berfud^t 
two  glDci,  =  both  bcibc  L.  12.  i" 

uncle  ber  £)nfel,  bie  Onfel 

under  unter  dat.  ace. 

imderstand    uerfte^cn,    bcrftanb,    ber* 

[tanben 
imdertake    untemel^'mcn,    untcmal^m', 

untemom'men  L.  26 
until  big,  big  ju 
up  to  big  an  aee. 
upon  auf  dat.  ace. 
up-stairs  oben 

very  [e^r 

vexed,  be  v.  at  fid^  ftrgem  iiber  ace. 
village  bag  !Dorf,  bie  3)arfer 
visit  befud^cn,  befud^te,  befuc^t 

wagon  ber  SSagen,  bie  SBagcn 
wait  tnavttn,  hjortetc,  gettjartct 


298 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


wake  up  aufmad^en,  \r)a^U  au\,  ift  auf* 

gelDad^t 
walk  gef)en,  ging,  t[t  gegangen 
want  to  iDoIIen  L.  22 
war  bcr  ^rieg,  bie  ^riegc 
warm  tt^arm,  n)armer,  toftrmft- 
water  baS  SSaffer,  bie  2Ba[[cr 
way  ber  SSeg,  bie  SSege 
we  mlr 

weak  [d^tuad^,  [(^h)ad^er,  fd^lDftd^ft- 
wear  tragen,  trug,  getragen  L.  20.  i 
week  bie  SBod^e,  bie  iSBoc^en 
well  arf/.  adv.  gut,  oc?/.  adv.  njofjl 
what  toaS  L.  9.  i;  what  a  hjeld^  L.  10.  ii 
whatever  tiaa^  L.  9.  i 
when  d^,  =  whenever  rtennL.  7.  i.  n.^; 

§.  189;  interrog.  njannL.  2.  ii.  n.^ 
whence  iDO^er 
whenever  n)enn  §.  189 
where  h)o;  w.  from  tool^er 
wherem  tt)orin 
whereof  iDOtoon 
whereto  hjol^in 
whereupon  tDoroiif 
wherewith  hjomit 
whether  oh 
whither  iDol^in 

which  ireld^er  L.  5.  i,  ber  L.  9.  i 
while  mai^renb 
white  iDei^ 
who  iDetd^er  L.  5.  i,  ber  L.  9.  i,  inierrog. 

tt)er  L.  9.  i 
whoever  toer  L.  9.  i 
whole  gatij 
why  toarum 
wife  bie  ^^rau,  bie  grauen 


will  tootten  L.  22;  §.  25.  185 

willing,  be  w.  see  will 

willingly  gem 

window  ha^  i^enfter,  bie  ^^^iftcr 

wine  ber  SSein,  bie  3Beine 

winter  ber  SSinter,  bie  SSinter 

wise  njeife;  flug,  fliiger,  Hiigft- 

wish  iDiinfc^en 

with  tnit  dat.,  with  it  bamit;  =at  the 

house  of  bei  dat. 
without  ofine  ace. 
woman  bie  j^xau,  bie  ^i^auen 
wonder,   I  w.  that  eS  tDunbert  mid^, 

wood  ba^  ^olg,  bie  ^iJljer 

woods  =  forest  ber  SBalb,  bie  SSttlbcr 

word  bag  SBort,  bie  SOSorte 

work  arbeiten,  arbeitete,  gearbeitet 

world  bie  SBelt,  bie  SBetten 

worse  fc^Iec^ter 

write  fd^reiben,  fc^rieb,  gefd^rieben 

year  ba^  Saf)X,  bie  ^a^xt 

yes  ia 

yesterday  geftem,  y.   evening  gcftcm 

abenb 
yet  =  but  bod^,  =  still,  as  yet  nod^,  not 

yet  nod^  nic^t 
yonder  bort 

you  bu,  i^r,  ©ieL.  1.  i.  n.^ 
young  jung,  jilnger,  iiing[t-,  y.  lady  ha^ 

i^rautein,  bie  ^^raulein 
your  bein,  cuer,  ^i)X  L.  6.  n 
yours  L.  12.  ii,  13 
yourself  fid^  L.  7.  n,  felbft  L.  8.  i; 

§.41 


INDEX 

Tke  Index  refers  to  subjects   only.     For  references  to  the  treatment  of 
individual  words,  as  iebcr,  fenneti,  what  etc.,  consult  the  Vocabularies. 


absolute  ace.  §.  115;  absol.  compar. 
§.  142 

accent  p.  6;  a.  on  compd.  verbs  L.  24. 
25;  §.  32.  35 

accusative  §.  114  ff. 

active  infin.  with  pass,  meaning  L.  20. 
I.  n.2;  §.  164  ff. 

address  L.  1.  i.  and  n.^;  §.  120 

adjectives  L.  10.  11;  §.  71  ff.;  as 
adverbs  L.  4.  i.  n.^;  §.  71.  3;  com- 
parison L.  15.  i;  §.  94  ff.;  as  sub- 
stantives L.15.  ii;§.91;  after  pers. 
pron.  §.  85;  with  gen.  §.  110;  with 
dat.  §.  112 

adverbs  L.  4.  i.  n.^;  §.  71.  3;  188  ff.; 
a.  of  negation  §.  247 

appositive  §.105 

articles  L.  4,  5,  6;  §.  45.  50.  103  ff. 

auxiharies  of  mood  L.  22;  §.  25  ff.; 
a.  of  tense  §.  5ff.;  187 

capital  letters  p.  2 

cases  L.  4.  i;  §.  54.  108  ff. 

comparison,  see  adjectives 

compound  nouns  §.  53;  c.  verbs 
L.  24-26;  §.  31  ff. 

concessive  clauses  §.  159.  244 

conditional  modes  and  clauses  L.  29; 
§.  157  ff. 

conjunctions  §.  228  ff. 

countries,  names  of  §.  69.  107 

dative  §.  Ill  ff. 

day,  hours  of  §.  147;  days  of  the 
month  §.  70.  103.  148 

defective  strong  inflection  L.  6;  §.  50ff. 

definite  article,  see  articles 

demonstratives  §.  122  ff. 

dependent  clauses  §.  231.  240 

diminutives  L.  4.  ii;  §.  56 

do,  did,  not  translated  L.  1.  i.  n.^; 
§.  150 


exclamations  §.  243 
future  tense  §.  154 
gender  L.  4.  i;  §.  117;  rules  of  gender 

L.  4-8;  §.  53,  56,  1;  59,  1  and  3; 

61,  l;  63,  l;  p.  100  ff. 
genitive  §.  109  ff. 
hours  of  the  day,  see  day 
imperative  L.  21;  §.  20.  170 
imperfect,  see  past 
impersonal  verbs  L.  28;  §.  30 
indeclinable  adjectives  §.  71  ff. 
indicative,  tenses  of  L.  17;  §.  151  ff. 
indirect  statement  L.  30;  §.  161;  p.  186 
infmitive   L.   20.   i.   n.^;  20.   ii.   n.i; 

§.  164  ff. 
inseparable  prefixes  L.  24;  §.  32 
interjections,  see  exclamations 
interrogatives  §.  125  ff.;  i.  sentences 

§.  231  ff. 
intransitive  verbs  §.  111-113;  187 
inverted  order  L.  3;  §.  231  ff. 
irregular  nouns  L.  18.  ii;  §.  65;  irregu- 
lar weak  verbs  L.  19.  ii;  §.  16. 
languages,  names  of  §.  92 
manner,  adverbs  of  §.  248 
measure,  nouns  of  L.  14.  n.^;  §.  106 
modal  auxiliaries,  see  auxiliaries 
modes,    see   indicative,    subjunctive, 

conditional,  imperative 
months,  names  of  L.  14.  n.^;  §.  70 
names,  proper  §.  66  ff.;  n.  of  cities 

etc.  L.  14.  n.2;  §.  107;  n.  of  months, 

see  months 
nominative  §.  108 
normal  order  L.  3;  §.  231  ff. 
nouns  L.  4-8;  §.  53  ff.;  p.  100  ff. 
numerals  L.  16;  §.  147  ff. 
order  of  words  L.  3;  §.  231  ff. 
ordinals  L.  16;  §.  147  ff. 
passive  voice  L.  27;  §.  175  ff. 


299 


300 


INDEX 


past  tense  §.152 

perfect  §.153 

person,  congruence  of  §.  117;  per- 
sonal names,  see  names;  p.  pro- 
nouns L.  8;  §.  118  ff. 

place  of  adverbs  §.  247  ff. 

possessives  L.  6.  12.  13;  §.  50.  79  ff. 
87  ff. 

predicate  adjectives  L.  10;  §.  71-73; 
p.  nouns  denoting  rank  or  profes- 
sion L.  19.  II.  n.i;  §.  105 

prefixes  of  verbs  L.  24.  25;  §.  31  ff.; 
accent  of  prefixes  §.  35 

present  tense  §.  151 ;  of  certain  strong 
verbs  L.  20;  §.  18 

prepositions  L.  7;  §.  220  ff. 

preterite,  see  past 

principal  parts  L.  17;  §.  17 

progressive  forms  §.  149 

proper  names,  see  names 

questions  L.  1.  i.  n.^;  §.  150 

reciprocal  pronoims  §.  40 


reflexive  pronouns  and  verbs  L.  28; 
§.  29.  39 

regular  order,  see  normal  order 

relatives  L.  9;  §.  125  ff. 

sentence,  see  order  of  words 

strong  endings  L.  10.  11;  §.  48.  75; 
St.  verbs  L.'2.  20;  §.  4.  17  ff. 

subject  ace.  with  infin.  §.  164  ff. 

subjunctive  L.  29.  30;  §.  155  ff. 

subordinating  conjunctions  §.  230 

substantive  adjectives  L.  15.  ii;  §.  91 

superlative  L.  15;  §.  94  ff.;  143  ff. 

tenses  §.  151  ff. 

time,  expressions  of  L.  16;  §.  147  ff. 

titles  §.  68 

transposed  order  L.  3;  §.  231.  240 

verbs  L.  17;  §.  1-37;  uses  and  con- 
structions of  verbs  §.  149-187 

vocative  §.108 

weak  endings  L.  11;  §.  48.  76;  wk 
verbs  L.  2.  19;  §.  11 

words,  order  of,  see  order  of  words 


'  'FO^ 


14DAYUSE^^^^„ 


Th 


"--TOANM^. 


---^^^""^ 


LD  2 
^^^'        T-n'2lA-60r)i-3,'65 
%\'36slO)476B 


S^SflJ^^SSrnia 


U«^^"*grketey 


■%^ 


f 


lU  D^DV^ 


y^ 


RS9400    '^^r" 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


•»         '  •• 


